J^-v.^^' ^-' 
 
 XJf «t ir»jj j( I- n 
 
 ^iBS«(S)iS»^^i^¥^C(g|^lir€>ir 
 
^ SUM Mtabgicut & 
 
 ^ PRINCETON, N. J. ^ 
 
 Presented by A. G, Ca-mcTOm^ ^Vv.'D, 
 
 Divisiotj 
 Section • 
 
 
# 
 
/ 
 
 v« 
 
M^^m^W ©^iklffiM^IE 
 
 WITH A 
 
 PRAXIS 
 
 ON SELECT PORTIONS OF GENESIS AND THE PSALMS. 
 
 BY MOSES STUART 
 
 PROFESSOR OF SACRED LITERATURE IN THE THEOL. SESHNARY AT ANDOVER. 
 
 IS neto ebition, tebt^eb anb enlarged* 
 
 ANDOVER : 
 
 PRINTED AT THE CODMAN PRESS 
 
 BT FLAGG AND GOULD. 
 
 1823. 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2011 with funding from 
 
 Princeton Theological Seminary Library 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/hebrewgrammarwit01stua 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The science of Hebrew grammar has, within a few 
 years, been greatly improved by the labours of several 
 distinguished oriental scholars on the continent of Europe. 
 The first Hebrew grammars published by Christians were 
 modeled after those of the Jewish Rabbins, from whom 
 the knowledge of the Hebrew language was received. 
 Among these, the most distinguished was Reuchlln's Riidi- 
 menta linguae Hebraeae (l506), which was used by most 
 learners of the Hebrew until the publication of Munster's 
 grammar (l556). The latter continued in general use 
 until Buxtorf published his Thesaurus (l609), which so far 
 excelled all other works of the kind then extant, that it 
 came into almost universal use. A most important addi- 
 tion was made to the syntax of the Hebrew language, by 
 the noble work of Glass, styled Philologia Sacra and pub- 
 lished at Leipsic in 1623. In 1679, Alting of Gronlngen 
 published his Fundamenta punctationis linguae sanctae ; and 
 in 1696, Danz of Jena, his Literator Ebraeo-Chaldaeus. Both 
 works were constructed upon the principles of Buxtorf; 
 and for more than half a century, they guided the He- 
 brew studies of Holland and Germany. In 1737 appear- 
 the great work of Albert Schultens, professor at Leyden, 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 entitled Institutiones ad Jiindamenta linguae Hcbraeae^ in 
 which all the kindred languages, but especially the Ara- 
 bic, were made to contribute to the illustration of the He- 
 brew. In the steps of Schultens followed Schroder at 
 Groningen (1766), in his Institutiones ad Jiindamenta lin- 
 guae Hebraeae. Storr, Vater, Weckherlin, and Jahn have, 
 more recently, distinguished themselves in the department 
 of Hebrew grammar.* 
 
 But the mos.t important work, which has ever appear- 
 ed on this subject, is the larger Hebrew^ grammar of Ge- 
 senius, professor of theology at Halle, published in 1817 
 and containing about 900 pages. In this work, the whole 
 interior of Hebrew grammar has received a new arrange- 
 ment, and a multitude of dark places have been illumina- 
 ted. The publication of it has commenced a new era in 
 this department, — an era in which, it is probable, a more 
 radical and extensive knowledge of the Hebrew will be 
 attained, than has been possessed since it ceased to be a 
 vernacular language. 
 
 The present Avork originated from the wants of the 
 Seminary, with which the author is connected. His duty 
 led him to write lectures on Hebrew grammar; and his 
 wishes to afford the young men, who are placed under 
 his instruction, all the assistance in his poAver in learning 
 the Hebrew language, led him to make use of all the 
 
 * More than six hundred Hebrew grammars have been published, 
 most of which are either imitations or abridgments of the authors 
 above noted. 
 
PREFACE. Ill 
 
 helps in the department of Hebrew grammar, wliich were 
 within his reach. The repeated requests of his pupils, 
 that he would publish such a work ; united with his own 
 desire that Hebrew students in general belonging to his 
 native country, might enjoy an opportunity of access to 
 what has been lately done to facilitate the study of He- 
 brew, and with the hope that his work may contribute 
 somewhat to lighten the labours of oriental study, and re- 
 move some of its difficulties so often the subject of com- 
 plaint ; were the motives which led him originally to pub- 
 lish a Hebrew grammar. 
 
 The first edition being entirely exhausted in the course 
 of two years, and frequent demands being made for a sec- 
 ond impression, he felt himself impelled to make a new 
 effort for the improvement of the work, so far as was 
 within his power to accomplish it. The changes, great 
 and small, both as to matter and manner, which have been 
 made in this edition, are too numerous for specification. 
 Every important part of the grammar has undergone an 
 investigation de novo, independently of any preceding gram- 
 mar ; and the present edition contains results in some 
 important respects, and in a multitude of minor ones, 
 which are drawn from no other source than the author's 
 own experience and investigation. If any one is desirous 
 of comparing the two editions, he may peruse the sections 
 upon the vowels and the vowel-changes; upon the class- 
 ifications of the verbs and conjugations ; upon several of 
 the irregular verbs, particularly verbs Pe Yodh and Jyin 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 doubled ; upon the rules and order of declining nouns, and 
 the accounts of the declensions themselves ; upon the 
 nature and consecution of the accents in the appendix ; 
 and finally the extent of the praxis at the close. 
 
 This last article stands connected with a specification of 
 the progress which the student may be expected to make, 
 or, in other words, a designation of his recitations from 
 day to day. The details in respect to this may be seen 
 at the beginning of the praxis. The design in making 
 out these recitations was to save trouble to the teacher, 
 and prevent mistake in learners, as to the extent of their 
 studies for any particular recitation. Twelve years' expe- 
 rience in teaching Hebrew, has enabled the author to 
 judge how far learners of ordinary diligence ought to pro- 
 ceed from day to day; and he is satisfied that the truly 
 diligent student, of moderate abilities, may advance as fast 
 as the apportionment in the praxis requires, while active 
 and superior minds may much exceed it. The apportion- 
 ment is designed for a class, where talents of different or- 
 ders mingle together, and the recitation must be made 
 feasible for all who are not negligent. 
 
 This apportionment of study was particularly designed 
 to accommodate the studies of the Seminary with which 
 the author is connected. Other instructors, who may use 
 the grammar, of course are not bound to follow in the 
 path marked out for the classes here ; but may depart 
 ironi it as circumstances may require. 
 
 When the first edition of this work was published, re- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 peated wishes were expressed Ironi dillerent quarters, that 
 the author would pubhsh an edition of the work abridged. 
 A sincere regard to the interests of Hebrew hterature for- 
 bids him to do this. He has studied Hebrew enough to 
 know, that a mere synopsis of Hebrew grammar must of 
 course be a mere smattering of it, and leave at least as 
 many difficulties unexplained as it explains. No synopsis 
 can enable any one to read even the first chapter of Gene- 
 sis, and account for all the forms of words which there occur. 
 It is beyond question that every student, who is to ob- 
 tain even a tolerable knowledge of the language, must 
 have a grammar that embraces the whole body of the 
 anomalous forms. 
 
 But then the whole of the present work need not be 
 studied, and should by no means be studied, at once. No- 
 thing can be more tedious than the abstract study of a 
 grammar, without applying it to use. To avoid this as 
 much as possible, the author has made a selection from 
 the body of the grammar, for the primary course of the 
 student. The detail of this he will find at the head of 
 the praxis. The object of the selection is, to advance 
 him as soon as possible to the study of the language itself, 
 as he finds it in his Bible. No more, therefore, than 
 what is barely necessary to begin, is included in the first 
 course ; and it will be seen, by consulting the praxis, that 
 the student is to be led, step by step, to a survey of the 
 whole grammatical ground, through the medium of direct 
 
 study of the language itself; so that the tedium of ab- 
 
 2 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 stract grammar lessons may be in a great measure avoid- 
 ed. In this way, every thing which he studies in his 
 grammar, after a few of the first lessons, will be for the 
 purpose of immediate and definite application, and will 
 therefore much more probably be remembered. 
 
 The praxis, it will be seen, is in some respects con- 
 Iracted, in other respects enlarged. The former will not 
 abridge its utility; the latter will much increase it. It is 
 printed so that the student may have it bound as he 
 chooses, either separately, or in connexion with the gram- 
 mar. 
 
 In the course of the work, several changes in the or- 
 der of the sections became desirable, some of which 
 had been referred to in preceding sheets alreiady printed. 
 These references, of course, are now incorrect ; but as the 
 table of Corrigenda gives them all, it will prove no serious 
 detriment to the Avork. The gain in respect to perspi- 
 cuity, by a change of the order in regard to many of the 
 sections, is more than enough to compensate for the little 
 trouble of correcting the references. 
 
 In printing a work of this kind, it is impossible to guard 
 against some deficiencies arising from the nature of He- 
 brew types. Many of them are so small and slender, 
 that they either draAV out or break in the course of strik- 
 ing off the sheets, and thus escape detection. All possi- 
 ble diligence has been bestowed on the correction and ac- 
 curacy of the impression; and though it is not immacu- 
 late, the author does not hesitate to say, he believes it 
 
PREFACE. VII 
 
 will be found as free from blemishes of this bort, as any 
 other book of this nature before the public. 
 
 The revision of this work and the changes which have 
 been made, have cost much more labour than was be- 
 stowed on the original composition of the grammar. A 
 great proportion of the copy was sent to the press in man- 
 uscript. Investigations de novo in the province of Hebrew 
 grammar cost more time and patience than any one can 
 well conjecture, who has not been actually engaged in 
 them. Nor could the author, in his state of broken 
 health for the past year, have supported or completed 
 these, if he had not been aided in them by the friendly 
 assistance of Mr Edward Robinson, on whom the labour 
 of correcting the proof sheets has in a great measure de- 
 volved, and who has, with great perseverance and dili- 
 gence, pursued the new investigations which were so often 
 demanded. To his kind and able assistance, the student 
 is indebted for many of the improvements in manner, not 
 a few in matter, and for much of the minute accuracy, of 
 the present edition. The radical knowledge which Mr 
 Robinson has acquired of this language, is a happy indica- 
 tion of the progress which the study of it is making in 
 our country ; and holds out in regard to him a promise 
 of extensive usefulnesss in the department of sacred liter- 
 ature. 
 
 The Hebrew lexicon of Gesenius, now in the course of 
 translation and publication by Mr J. W. Gibbs, will sup- 
 ply an important desideratum among the works on Hebrew 
 
Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 literature accessible to students in this country. Mucli 
 may be hoped for from the circulation and general use of 
 this excellent and very important work ; which, it is expect- 
 ed, will be completed in the course of the present year. 
 
 Other works in the department of Hebrew philology 
 are much needed. A book of exercises on the orthogra- 
 phy and on the forms and syntax of the Hebrew, and a 
 vocabulary of all the anomalous forms in the Bible, would 
 add greatly to the facilities of acquiring a thorough 
 knowledge of the language. A history of the language as 
 it respects its formation, preservation, character &;c. and 
 as it regards the study of it since the Christian era ; a 
 good Introduction to the several books of the Hebrew 
 Scriptures ; and a Hermeneutica adapted to the writings of 
 the Old Testament ; Avould be important additions to the 
 present helps in this essential branch of theological edu- 
 cation. Should the publications already issued, or in press, 
 obtain sufficient encouragement, they will probably be fol- 
 lowed by others of a similar character. 
 
 The Author. 
 
 Andover, Sept. 15, 1823. 
 
 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Sect. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 Page 
 
 Intropuction. 
 
 1 Of the oriental or Shemilish 
 
 laDi^tiu^es . . .13 
 
 2 Name and origin of tlie He- 
 
 brew lanffuai^e . . 17 
 
 3 Historic sketch of the Hebrew 
 
 language . . .19 
 
 -I Sheinitish letters or written 
 
 characters ... 27 
 
 5 Hebrew characters . . 27 
 
 6 Manner of writing . . 28 
 
 7 Hebrew vowels ... 30 
 
 8 accents ... 34 
 
 9 Writers to be consulted . 35 
 
 PART II. 
 Orthography and orthokpy. 
 
 JO .Alphabets .... 38 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 14 
 15 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 19 
 
 ancient number and 
 
 order of letters . . 41 
 
 — present number of 
 Hebrew letters . . 42 
 
 — names of the letters 43 
 
 — final letters . . 43 
 
 — dilated letters . 44 
 
 — unusual letters . 44 
 
 — distinction of similar 
 letters ... 45 
 
 — sounds of the letters 46 
 
 — divisions of the letters 50 
 
 20 Vowels; preliminary observa 
 
 tions 
 
 21 names, classification 
 
 iic. . 
 
 — orthography 
 
 — coalescence of quies 
 cents, gutturals, &c. 
 
 orthography in con 
 
 22 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 nection with vowel-let 
 ters, kc. 
 
 25 Qamets Hhateph 
 
 26 Sheva 
 
 27 Pattahh furtive . 
 
 28 Daghesh 
 
 29 forte and lene . 
 
 67 
 68 
 
 70 
 
 74 
 75 
 
 75 
 
 Sect. P^gc 
 
 30 Mappiq and Raphe . . 81 
 
 31 Methegh .... 82 
 J2 Maqqoph .... 84 
 
 33 Accents .... 85 
 
 34 Tone-syllable of words . 87 
 
 35 Shifting of the tone-syllable 90 
 
 36 Critical marks and Masoret- 
 
 ic notes ... 92 
 
 57 Rules for reading Hebrew 93 
 
 38 Mode of reading Hebrew . 95 
 
 PART III. 
 
 Mutations of the consonants 
 
 and vowels. 
 
 39 Consonants; orthographical 
 
 commutations . . 98 
 
 40 ■ grammatical commu- 
 
 tations 
 
 41 assimilation 
 
 42 dropped 
 
 43 added to words 
 
 44 .— .^— transposed 
 
 45 — 
 
 99 
 100 
 101 
 103 
 104 
 which are not doubled 105 
 
 46 Gutturals ; effect on preceding 
 
 vowels . . .106 
 
 47 Quiesceuts ; cases where they 
 
 quiesce . . . 107 
 
 48 relation to preceding 
 
 vowels . . .110 
 
 49 commutation & omis- 
 sion .... Ill 
 
 50 apocope & paragoge 112 
 
 51 Vowels ; general causes of mu- 
 
 tation . . . 113 
 
 52 ■ • mutable & immutable 113 
 
 53 general principles of 
 
 mutation . . .116 
 
 54 • change of long into short 117 
 
 55 change of short into long 119 
 
 56 dropped . . .120 
 
 57 — transposed . . 122 
 
 58 new inserted . - 122 
 
 59 furtive inserted . 124 
 
 60 changes from euphony 
 
 and the pause-accents . 125 
 
 61 • of the article, prepo- 
 
 sitions, £:c. . . 128 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Sect. Page 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 Grammatical strcctcre and 
 f0rm8 oe words. 
 
 62 Radical words 
 
 63 Grammatical construction of 
 
 words 
 
 64 Kindred dialects intermixed 
 
 with the Hebrew 
 
 65 The article 
 
 69 Verbs ; general classification 
 
 70 ■ conjugations 
 
 — table of conjugations 
 
 — number of — 
 
 — arrans^eraent of — 
 
 — names of — 
 
 — root of all the conju 
 gations 
 
 — conjugation Kal 
 — Niphal . 
 
 — Piel and Pual 
 
 — Hiphil and 
 
 Hophal 
 
 Hithpael 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 73 
 74 
 75 
 
 76 
 
 77 
 78 
 79 
 
 80 
 81 
 
 — unfrequent conjuga- 
 tions . 
 
 §2 plurilitera! 
 
 83 denominative . 
 
 84 flexion 
 
 85 ground-forms . 
 
 86 formation and flexion 
 
 of the praeter 
 87 forms of the infinitive 
 
 mood . 
 88 formation and flexion 
 
 of the future 
 89 of the im 
 
 perative 
 90 ofpartici 
 
 pies 
 91 paragogic and apoco 
 
 paled future . . 
 
 92 imperative 
 
 Qo Vav conversive 
 
 94 Vav before the praeter 
 
 95 paradigms ; general 
 
 notes 
 
 133 
 136 
 137 
 138 
 
 66 Pronouns personal . ,138 
 
 67 . demonstrative . 140 
 
 68 relative and inter- 
 rogative . . .140 
 
 141 
 
 142 
 143 
 144 
 144 
 
 144 
 
 145 
 145 
 146 
 147 
 
 148 
 149 
 
 151 
 153 
 153 
 154 
 154 
 
 154 
 
 155 
 
 157 
 
 159 
 
 159 
 
 161 
 165 
 166 
 167 
 
 167 
 
 Sect. 
 
 96 Reg. verbs ; notes on Kal 
 
 ^J — on Niphal 
 
 — on Piel and 
 
 Pual 
 
 99 — on Hiphi 
 
 and Hophal 
 
 100 — onHithpae 
 
 and Hothpaal . 
 
 100 a -_ onPoel 
 
 100 b frreg, verbs ; mode of de 
 
 signation 
 ^01 • with gutturals and 
 
 102 
 103 
 104 
 105 
 106 
 107 
 108 
 109 
 
 no 
 
 111 
 
 112 
 
 112a 
 
 113 . 
 
 114 
 
 115 
 
 116 . 
 
 117 
 
 118 
 
 119 • 
 
 120 ■ 
 
 121 ■ 
 
 122 ■ 
 123 
 124 - 
 124 a- 
 
 Resh 
 
 — S guttural 
 notes on do. 
 
 — V guttural 
 
 — ^ guttural 
 
 — with quiescents 
 
 — 12 class I. 
 
 — IS class II. 
 
 — "3 class III. 
 
 — '^D class IV. 
 
 r 
 
 — ""D not classed 
 
 — notes on rQ 
 
 — h . ^ . 
 
 — notes on 5?y 
 
 — ^V . 
 
 — notes on "jy 
 
 -«'b . ,, 
 
 — notes on i^t^ 
 
 -l^b • ,' 
 
 — notes on ^^ 
 
 doubly anomalous 
 
 relation to each 
 
 other 
 124 b mixed forms 
 
 124 c Verbs ; forms of plurilite- 
 rals 
 
 125 notes on participles 
 
 126 with sullix-pronouns 
 
 126 a ^^ with suflixes 
 
 Page 
 169 
 171 
 
 172 
 
 173 
 
 174 
 174 
 
 175 
 
 175 
 176 
 178 
 179 
 
 181 
 182 
 183 
 184 
 186 
 187 
 188 
 190 
 190 
 191 
 192 
 193 
 196 
 202 
 207 
 211 
 212 
 213 
 215 
 217 
 222 
 
 224 
 223 
 
 226 
 226 
 227 
 235 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XI 
 
 Sect. 
 
 127 Paradigms. 
 I. Keg. verb 
 
 5 guttural 
 
 5> guttural 
 
 ^ guttural 
 
 U. 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 V. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Vll. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 IX. 
 
 X. 
 
 XI. 
 
 XFI. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 XV. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 ^S clasa I. 
 
 12 class II. 
 
 13 class 111. 
 
 IS class IV. 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 Kb ; 
 
 iQ and J^b 
 
 XVII. -jr) and ^b 
 
 XVIII. -'d and j^% 
 
 XIX. Mia 
 
 XX. Participles 
 
 XXI. Verbs witb suffixes 
 
 XXII. J^^ with suffixes 
 
 128 A 
 
 129 - 
 
 130 - 
 
 131 - 
 
 132 - 
 
 133 - 
 
 'ouns ; general remarks 
 
 — general classification 
 
 — composite and proper 
 
 — gender 
 
 — formation of the femi- 
 nine .... 
 
 — of the plural 
 
 number 
 
 — of the dual 
 
 134 — 
 
 133 constr. and suffix state 
 
 136 Towel-changes in de- 
 clension 
 
 187 arrangement of declen- 
 sions 
 
 138 first declension . 
 
 139 second 
 
 140 third 
 
 141 fourth 
 
 142 fifth 
 
 143 sixth 
 
 144 seventh 
 
 145 — eighth 
 
 Page 
 
 236 
 238 
 239 
 240 
 241 
 242 
 242 
 243 
 243 
 243 
 244 
 246 
 247 
 248 
 250 
 252 
 252 
 253 
 253 
 234 
 256 
 258 
 
 259 
 259 
 262 
 262 
 
 265 
 
 268 
 
 270 
 
 272 
 
 277 
 
 280 
 28 i 
 282 
 283 
 284 
 285 
 286 
 292 
 293 
 
 Sect. 
 
 146 
 
 147 
 
 148 
 
 149 
 
 150 
 
 151 
 
 152 
 
 153 
 
 Page 
 
 — . 295 
 
 — . 296 
 
 — . 296 
 
 — . 297 
 
 — . 298 
 noti'S on duals . 299 
 irregular, and numerals 299 
 forms of adjectives . 302 
 
 ninth 
 tentii 
 
 eleventh ■ 
 twelfth - 
 thirteenth 
 
 154 Paradigms. 
 
 I. Nouns with suffixes . 303 
 
 II. in declensions . 304 
 
 HI. dual . . .312 
 
 IV. numerals . . 313 
 
 155 Particles; general remarks 315 
 
 156 adverbs . . 315 
 
 157 prepositions . 316 
 
 158 conjunctions . 319 
 
 139 interjections . 319 
 
 PART V. 
 
 Syntax. 
 
 160 Order of Syntax . . 320 
 
 161 Nouns used as adjectives . 320 
 
 162 Adjectives used as nouns . 323 
 
 163 jYouns ; insertion of the ar- 
 
 ticle . . . 323 
 
 164 omission of the article 324 
 
 165 article before adjec- 
 tives . . . 325 
 
 166 mode of expressing the 
 
 neuter gender . . 226 
 
 167 of multitude and plu- 
 
 ralis excelleniiae . 326 
 
 168 apposition . . 327 
 
 169 repftition . . 328 
 
 170 mode of expressing the 
 
 genitive . . . 329 
 
 171 use of the genitive . .330 
 
 172 construct state without 
 
 a genitive . . 331 
 
 173 mode of expressing ob- 
 lique cases . . 333 
 
 174 use of the accusative 334 
 
 175 case absolute . . 334 
 
 176 construction of nume- 
 rals . . . .335 
 
 177 Adjectives; comparative de- 
 
 gree . . .338 
 
 178 superlative degree 338 
 
 179 qualifying nouns 340 
 
 180 as predicates . 341 
 
xu 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 — use of tiie primitives 342 
 
 used for the verb of 
 
 existence . . 343 
 
 use of the suffixes 344 
 
 place of the suffixes 345 
 
 use of nouns for pro- 
 nouns . . . 346 
 
 use of the relative 
 
 ^'4if< . . .347 
 
 Kerbs ; concord with nouns 347 
 
 anomalies in concord 348 
 
 impersonal and indefi- 
 nite . . . .351 
 
 general use of the tenses 353 
 
 use of the praeter tense 353 
 
 use of the future tense 356 
 
 use of the imperative 35f( 
 
 finite with cases . 358 
 
 governing an accusa- 
 tive . . . .360 
 
 governing two accusa- 
 tives . . .361 
 
 passive with cases . 362 
 
 use of the infinitive ab- 
 solute . . .362 
 
 use of the infinitive 
 
 construct . . . 365 
 
 infinitive construct with 
 
 Laniedh . . . 366 
 
 infinitive with cases 367 
 
 use of participles . 368 
 
 participles with cases 369 
 
 used as adverbs . 370 
 
 Sect. 
 
 206 Particles 
 
 207 
 
 208 
 
 :209 
 
 adverbs 
 prepositions 
 conjunrtions 
 interjections 
 
 Figures of speech. 
 
 210 Pleonasm . 
 
 211 Ellipsis 
 
 212 Change of construction 
 
 213 Constructio praegnans 
 
 214 Zeugma 
 
 215 Hendiadys 
 
 216 Paronomasia 
 
 Appe7ulix 
 
 A . . . . 
 
 B Greek alphabets 
 C Names of vowels 
 D Derivation of nouns 
 E 1 Accents ; table . 
 
 2,3,4 
 
 5 — 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 10 
 11 
 
 — number, names 
 and position 
 position &,c. 
 classification 
 consecution 
 explanations 
 double accentu- 
 ation 
 
 original design 
 present utility 
 
 Page 
 371 
 372 
 372 
 
 , 373 
 
 373 
 374 
 380 
 381 
 382 
 382 
 383 
 
 385 
 
 385 
 386 
 386 
 388 
 
 390 
 391 
 392 
 394 
 398 
 
 401 
 402 
 405 
 
 F Names of conjugations . 406 
 Praxis 
 
 ^ 
 
PART I. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 § 1. Of the OiUF.NTAL OR Shemitish languages. 
 
 1. The languasfes of western Asia, though differing' in respect 
 to dialect, are radiculhj the same ; and have been so, as far back as 
 any historical records enable us to trace them. 
 
 Palestine, Sj'ria, Phenicia, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Arabia, and 
 also Ethiopia, are reckoned as the countries, where the languages 
 commonly denominated oriental have been spoken. Of late, many 
 critics have rejected the appellation oriental, as being too compre- 
 hensive, and substituted that ol' Shemitish, a denominative formed 
 from Shein the name of one of IS^Oah's sons. Against this appella- 
 tion, however, objection:! of a similar nature may be urged; for no 
 inconsiderable portion of those, who spoke the languages in ques- 
 tion, were not desceiidents of Shem. It is doubtless a matter of in- 
 difference whicli appellation is used, if it be tirst defined. 
 
 2. The oriental languages may be divided into three principal 
 dialects; viz, the Aramaean, the Hebrew^ and the Arabic. 
 
 (a) The Aramaean, spoken in Syria, Mesopotamia, and Baby- 
 lonia or Chaldea, is sulidivided into the Syriac and Chaldee dialects, 
 sometimes called also the west and oast Aramaean. 
 
 (6) The Hebrew or Canaauitish dialect (1-^. xix. 18) was spok- 
 en in Palestine, and probably, with little variation, in Phenicia and 
 the Phenician colonies, v. g. at Carthage and other places. The re- 
 mains of the Phenician and Punic dialects are too tow and too much 
 disfigured, to enable us to judge with certainty how extensively 
 these languages were the saine as the dialect of Palestine, 
 3 
 
H § 1. OF THE ORIENTAL LANGUAGESt 
 
 (c) The Arabic, to which the Ethiopic bears a special resem- 
 blance, comprises, in modern times, a great variety of dialects as a 
 spoken language, and is spread over a vast extent of country ; but, 
 so far as we are acquainted with its former state, it appears, more 
 anciently, to have been limited principally to Arabia and Ethiopia. 
 
 It is uncertain whether any of the oriental or Shemitish dia- 
 lects were spoken in Assyria proper, or in Asia Minor. The prob- 
 ability seems to be against the supposition that the Assyrians used 
 them ; and a great part of Asia Minor, before it was subjugated by 
 the Greeks, most probably spoke the same language with Assyria, 
 i. e. perhaps a dialect of the Persian. A small part only of this sec- 
 tion of Asia seem to have spoken a Shemitish dialect, (Gesen. Ges- 
 chichte § 4. 1 and § 17. 3.) When western Asia is described, there- 
 fore, as speaking the Shemitish languages, the exceptions just made 
 are to be uniformly understood. 
 
 The Arabic is very rich in words and forms ; the Syriac, so far 
 as it is yet known, is comparatively limited in both ; the Hebrew 
 holds a middle place between them, both as to copiousness of words 
 and variety of forms. 
 
 3. Besides the dialects already named, there were slighter va- 
 riations of language among the Jews, sometimes distinguished from 
 the general name by local appellations. The Ephraimites seem not 
 to have distinguished, as the Hebrews in general did, between the 
 letters '»!; and "lU or D in speaking, being unable to aspirate the 'i;. 
 (Jud. xii. G.) Nehemiah was indignant that a part of his country- 
 men should speak the language of Ashdod. (Neh. xiii. 23 — 25.) 
 
 The Samaritan dialect appears to be made up, as one might ex- 
 pect, (see 2 K. xvii,) of Aramaean and Hebrew. And the slighter 
 varieties of Arabic are as numerous as the provinces where the lan- 
 guage is spoken. 
 
 In all these cases, however, we commonly name the slighter dif- 
 ferences provincialisms rather than diulects. 
 
 4. Of all the oriental languages, the Hebrew bears marks of 
 being the most ancient. The oldest records that are known to ex- 
 ist, are composed in this language ; and there are other reasons 
 which render it probable, that it preceded its kindred dialects. (§ 
 2. 2. Sic.) 
 
 It flourished in Palestine, among the Phenicians and Hebrews, 
 until the period of the Babylonish exile ; soon after ivhich it declin- 
 
§ 1. OF THE ORIENTAL LANGUAGES. 16 
 
 ed, and finally was succeeded by a kind of Hebraeo-Arainaenn dialect, 
 such as was spoken in the time of our Saviour among the Jews. 
 The west Aramaean had flourished before this, for a loiiir time, in 
 the east and north of Palestine ; but it now advanced fartlier west, 
 and during the period that the Christian churches of Syria flourish- 
 ed, it was widely extended. It is at present almost a dead lan- 
 guage, and has been so for several centuries. The Hebrew may 
 be regarded as having been a dead language, except among a small 
 circle o( literati, for about the space of two thousand years. 
 
 Our knowledge of Arabic literature extends back very little be- 
 yond the time of Mohammed. But the followers of this pretended 
 prophet have spread the dialect of the Koran over almost half the 
 population of the world. Arabic is now the vernacular language of 
 Arabia, Syria, Egypt, and in a great measure of Palestine and all the 
 northern coast of Africa ; while it is read and understood wherever 
 the Koran has gone, in Turkey, Persia, India, and Tartary. 
 
 5. The remains of the ancient Hebrew tongue are contained in 
 the Old Testament, and in the few Phenician and Punic words and 
 inscriptions that have been here and there discovered. 
 
 The remains of the Aramaean are extant in a varietj' of books. 
 In Chaldeo, we have a part of the books of Daniel and Ezra (Dan. 
 ii. 4 — vii. 28. Ez. iv. 8 — vi. 19, and vii. 12 — vii. 27) which are the 
 most ancient of any specimens of this dialect. The Targum of On- 
 kelos i. e. the translation of the Pentateuch into Chaldee, affords 
 the next and purest specimen of that language. All the other Tar- 
 gums, the Mishna, and Gemara are a mixture of Aramaean and He- 
 brew. It has been said that there are still some small districts in 
 the east, where the Chaldee is a vernacular language. 
 
 In Syriac, there is a considerable number of books and Mss. ex- 
 tant. The oldest specimen of this language, that we have, is con- 
 tained in the Peshilo or Syriac version of the Old and N. Testament. 
 A multitude of writers in this dialect have flourished, (vid. Assema- 
 ni Bibliotheca Orientalis,) many of whose writings probably are still 
 extant, although but few have been printed in Europe. 
 
 In Arabic, there exists a great variety of IMss. and books, histor- 
 ical, scientific, and literary. The means of illustrating this living 
 language are now very ample and satisfactory. 
 
 6. It is quite obvious from the statement made above, that a 
 knowledge of the kindred dialects of the Hebrew is very important, 
 
16 § 1, OF THE ORIENTAL LANGUAGES. 
 
 for the illustration of that language. Who can, even now, have a 
 very extensive and accurate understanding of the English language, 
 that is unacquainted with the Latin, Greek, Norman, French, and 
 Saxon ? Supposing then that the English had been a dead language 
 for more than two thousand years, and that all the remains of it 
 were comprised in one moderate volume ; who could well explain 
 this volume, that did not understand the languages with which it 
 is closely connected ? The answer to this question will decide 
 whether the study of the languages, kindred with the Hebrew, is 
 important to the thorough understanding and illustration of the He- 
 brew Scriptures. 
 
 7. The relation of the Hebrew to the Aramaean and Arabic, is 
 not such as exists between the Attic and other dialects of Greece. 
 The diversity is much greater. It bears more resemblance to the 
 diversity between German and Dutch, or German and Swedish. 
 The idiom of all is substantially the same. The fundamental words 
 are of common origin. But the inflections differ in some considera- 
 ble measure ; derivative words are diverse in point of form ; and 
 not a few words have been adopted in each of the dialects, which 
 either are not common to the others, or are used in a different sense. 
 
 The affinity between the Chaldee and Syriac is very great, in 
 every respect. 
 
 8. The oriental languages are distinguished from the western 
 or European tongues, in general, by a number of peculiar traits ; viz. 
 
 (a) Several degrees of guttural letters are tbund in them, which 
 we cannot distinctly mark ; and some of which our organs are inca- 
 pable of pronouncing, after the age of maturity. 
 
 (6) in general, the roots are triliteral, and of two syllables. By 
 far the greater part of the roots are verbs. 
 
 (c) Pronouns, whether personal or adjective, are, in the oblique 
 cases, united in the same word with the noun or verb to vvhicii they 
 have a relation. 
 
 (d) The verbs have but two tenses, the past and future ; ;'.nd in 
 general, there are no optative or subjunctive moods definitely 
 marked. 
 
 (c) The genders are only masculine and feminine ; and these 
 are extended to the verb, as well as to the noun. 
 
 (/) For the most part, the cases arc marked by prepositions. 
 Two nouns coming together, the latter of which is in the genitive, 
 
I 
 
 § 2. NAME AND ORIGIN OP THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 17 
 
 the first in most cases suffers a change which indicates this state of 
 rehition, while the liiller noun remains unchanged; i. e. the iiovcrn- 
 ing noun suffers the change, and not the noun governed. 
 
 {g) To mark the comparative and superlative degree*, no spe- 
 cial forms of adjectives exist. 
 
 From this observation the Arabic must be excepted, which, for 
 the most part, has an intensive form of adjectives tiiat marks both 
 the comparative and superhitive. 
 
 (/t) Scarcely any composite words exist in these languages, if 
 we except proper names. 
 
 (i) \'erbs are not only distinguished into active and passive, by 
 their forms; but additional forms are made, b}' the inQections of the 
 same verb with small variations, to signify the cause of action, or 
 the frequency of it, or that it is reflexive, or reciprocal, or inten- 
 sive &c. 
 
 {j) Lastly, all these dialects (the Ethiopic excepted) are writ- 
 ten and read from the right hand to the left ; the alphabets consist- 
 ing of consonants only, and the vowels being generally written above 
 or below the consonants. 
 
 § 2. A'*omt' and origin of the Hebrero language, 
 
 1. The appellation of Hebrew ("^'^55?), so far as we can learn 
 from histor}', was tirst given to Abraham by the people of Canaan 
 among whom he dwelt. (Gen. xiv. 13.) As the first names of nations 
 were commonly appellatives^ it is quite probable that this epithet 
 was applied to Abraham because he came from beyond the Euphra- 
 tes, ^Sy meaning over or beyond; so that '>'^^^:^ Hebrew meant as 
 much as one rvho belonged over the Euphrates, or came from beyond it. 
 This derivation agrees much better with the general fact, that the 
 most ancient names of nations were appellative, than the mode of ex- 
 plaining the appellation as a patronymic, derived from the name of 
 Heber the grandson of Shem. 
 
 Whatever extent of meaning was attached to the appellation He- 
 breio before the time of .Tacob, it appears afterwards to have been 
 limited only to his posterity, and to be synonymous with Israelite. 
 
 2. The origin of the Hebrew language must be dated farther 
 back, than the period to which we can trace the appellation Hebrew. 
 It is plain from the history of Abraham, that wherever he sojourn- 
 
lb §2. NAME AND ORIGIN OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 eil, he found a language in which he could easily converse. That 
 Hebrew was originally the language of Palestine appears plain, 
 moreover, frono the names of persons and places in Canaan, and from 
 other facts in respect to the formation of this dialect. E. g. the 
 west is in Hebrew D"', which means the sea, i. e. towards the Medi- 
 terranean sea. As the Hebrew has no other proper word for west, 
 so it must be evident that the language, in its distinctive and peculiar 
 form^ must have been formed in Palestine. 
 
 That this dialect was the original language of mankind, is not es- 
 tablished by any historical evidence, which may not admit of some 
 doubt. But it seems highly probable, that if the original parents of 
 mankind were placed in western Asia, they spoke substantially the 
 language which has for more than fifty centuries pervaded that coun- 
 tr}'. This probability is greatly increased, by the manner in which 
 the book of Genesis makes use of appellatives, as applied to the an- 
 tediluvians ; which are nearly all explicable by Hebrew etymology, 
 and would probably all be so, if we had that part of the Hebrew 
 which is lost. 
 
 3. How far back then the Hebrew dialect in its distinctive form 
 is to be dated, we have no sure means of ascertaining. At the time 
 when the Pentateuch was written, it had reached nearly, if not quite, 
 its highest point of culture and grammatical structure. The usual 
 mode of reasoning would lead us to say, therefore, that it must, for 
 a long time before, have been spoken and cultivated, in order to at- 
 tain so much regularity of structure and syntax. But reasoning on 
 this subject, except from facts, is very uncertain. Many of the sav- 
 age tribes in our wilds possess languages, which, as to variety in com- 
 binations, declensions, and expression, are said to surpass the most 
 C'lltivated languages of Asia or Europe. Homer was as little em- 
 barrassed in respect to variety of form, combination, or structure, as 
 any Greek poet who followed a thousand years later. The best 
 pledge for the great antiquity of the Hebrew is, that there never has 
 been, so far as we have any knowledge, but one language substantial' 
 ly in western Asia ; and of the various dialects of this, the Hebrew 
 has the highest claims to be regarded as the most ancient. 
 
§ 3. HISTORIC SKETCH OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 19 
 
 § 3. Historic shetch of the Hehrexo language. 
 
 1. From the time when the Pentateuch was composed until the 
 Babylonish exile, the language, as presented to us in the Old Testa- 
 ment, wears a very uniform appearance ; if we except the variety 
 of style, which belonsfs of course to different writers. This period 
 has been usually, called the golden age of the Hebrew. 
 
 On account of this uniformity, many critics deny that the Penta- 
 teuch could have been composed live hundred years before the 
 time of David and Solomon, or even long before the captivity. They 
 are willing to admit the antiquity of a ie\w laws, and of some frag- 
 ments of history in Genesis and some other books. But it is against 
 all analogy, they aver, that a language should continue so nearly the 
 same, as the Hebrew of the Pentateuch and of the historical books, 
 for a space of time so great as this. And besides, they affirm, there 
 are many internal evidences of a later origin, contained in occasional 
 notices of later events, which could not possibly be known in the 
 time of Moses, 
 
 In regard to this last allegation, only a single consideration can 
 be here stated. It may be safely admitted, that some things were 
 added to the Pentateuch by writers in later times ; such as a com- 
 pletion of the genealog}-^ of the Edomitish princes, Gen. xxxvi ; • an 
 account of the death and burial of Moses, Deut. xxxiv ; and a (evt 
 other things of a similar nature. But the other allegation, that uni- 
 versal analogy, in respect to other languages, renders it highly im- 
 probable that such uniformity in the Hebrew could have been pre- 
 served, so long as from the time of Moses down to that of David, or 
 down to the period of the captivity, we may be permitted to doubt; 
 for a greater philological wonder than this, which so much excites 
 their incredulity, can be produced. 
 
 Dr Marshman, one of the Baptist missionaries at Serampore, Avho 
 is extensively acquainted with the Chinese language, has published a 
 copious grammar of it, with a translation of the works of Confuciiis, 
 which were written about 550 years before Christ, or, according to 
 to the Chinese, much earlier. Dr Marshman asserts, that there is 
 very little difference between the style of Confucius and that of the 
 best Chinese writers of the present day. One commentary on his 
 works was written 1500 years after the text, and another still 
 later, which Dr Marshman consulted. He found no difference be- 
 
20 § 3. HISTORIC SKETCH OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 tween them and the works of Confucius, except that the original 
 was somewhat more concise. The documents of this philologist, 
 gathered from Chinese records, prove that the written and spoken 
 language of the Chinese (nearly one fourth part of the human race) 
 has not varied, in any important respect, for more than 2000 years. 
 (Quarterly Review, May, 1811. p. 401 &c. Marshman's Chinese 
 Gram, in var. loc.) 
 
 In respect to seclusion from other nations, the Jews bore a very 
 exact resemblance to the Chinese. Like them, they had no foreign 
 commerce or intercourse to corrupt their language. New inventions 
 and improvements in the arts and sciences there were not. What 
 then was there to change the language ? And why should not David, 
 and Solomon, and others write in the same manner, substantially, as 
 Moses did ? 
 
 In respect to the argument, which concludes against the compo- 
 sition of the Pentateuch by Moses, because there are some things in 
 it, which, if written by him, must be admitted to be predictions ; it 
 can here be observed only, that if the inspiration of the Scriptures 
 be admitted, criticism has no right to reject it in any investigations 
 respecting these books ; for inspiration constitutes one of the circum- 
 stances in which the books were composed, and cannot therefore be 
 omitted in the critical consideration of them, without virtually de- 
 nying the fact of inspiration, and conducting the investigation in an 
 uncritical manner. 
 
 2. (o) The second or silver age of the Hebrew, reaches from the 
 period of the captivity down to the time when it ceased to be a liv- 
 ino" language. The distinguishing trait of Hebrew writings belong- 
 inf to this age is, that they approximate to the Chaldee dialect. 
 Nothing is more natural, than that the language of exiles, in a foreign 
 country for seventy years, should approximate to that of their con- 
 querors who held them in subjection. 
 
 To this period belong many of the Psalms, and the whole books 
 of Jeremiah, Ezekiel, Daniel, Zechariah, Haggai, Malachi, Chroni- 
 cles, Ezra, Nebemiah, Esther, and perhaps some others. The 
 books of Job and Ecclesiastes abound in Aramaeisms ; and Canti- 
 cles exhibits a considerable number. The age of these three last 
 books, as also that of Jonah, Daniel, and the Pentateuch, has been 
 the subject of animated contest among critics on the continent of 
 Europe, for almost half a century. 
 
§ 3. HISTORIC SKETCH OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 21 
 
 (6) The Chaldaisms or Aratnaeisras of the silver acfc consist, 
 either (l) in adopting' both the /'or;/i and mrariiHo- of Aramaean words; 
 or (2) in preserving^ the Hebrew form, but assigning' to it an Ara- 
 maean sig-nification. (Ges. Gesch. § 10. 4, 5.) 
 
 (c) What is called the young-er or later Hebrew is somewhat 
 distinct from Aramaeism. It does not consist in using' foreign words, 
 but in a departure from the customary idiom of the older Hebrew, by 
 the adoption of different expressions to convey the same idea. E. g'. 
 the early Hebrew calls the shew-bread D'^a^n Cnb ; the younger 
 Hebrew nDl^'2 nnb. 
 
 The Hebrew of the Talmud, and of the Rabbins, has a close 
 afiBnity with the later Hebrew. 
 
 (rf) All the books belonging' to the second age are not of the 
 same character in respect to idiom. The book of Job, if it be set 
 down to a later age, though full of Aramaeisms, in other respects is 
 a peculiar example of the ancient simplicity of diction. Such is the 
 case with many Psalms, which belong, as their contents plainly show, 
 to the second period. Of the other authors comprised in this period, 
 Jeremiah and Ezekiel merely border upon the silver age in regard 
 to diction. Esther, Canticles, Chronicles, and Daniel are strongly 
 tinctured with the characteristics of later Hebrew ; and the remain- 
 ing later books are less strongly marked. Nearly half of the books 
 of Daniel and Ezra, is composed in pure Chaldee. 
 
 (e) In general, the earlier Hebrew writers are entitled to pre- 
 eminence in respect to their compositions, when considered merely 
 in a rhetorical point of view. But still, among the later class are 
 some of most exquisite taste and genius. Some parts of Jeremiah 
 have scarcely been excelled. Psalms cxxxix, xliv, Ixxxiv, Ixxxv; 
 several of the Psalms of degrees, cxx &c ; Dan. vii &c ; and other 
 parts of later authors, are fine specimens of writing: and some of, 
 them may challenge competition, in respect to excellence of style, 
 with the writings of any age or country. 
 
 A large catalogue of the later Hebrew and Aramaean words, 
 forms, meanings, phrases, orthography, and peculiarities of flexioQ 
 and syntax, is exhibited by Gesenius in his Geschichte der Hebr. 
 Sprache § 10. 5. The later orthography leans to the scriptio plena, 
 § 12. 2. n. 
 
 3. The Hebrew language throughout, both earlier and later, ex- 
 hibit? a twofold diction, viz. the prosaic and the poetic. Hebrew 
 
 4 
 
22 § 3. HISTORIC SKETCH OP THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 poetry, so far as we can ascei'taio, never comprised any thing of the 
 Roman and Grecian measure of long- and short syllables, and the va- 
 rieties of verse arising from this cause. Its distinguishing character- 
 istics are four; viz. a rhythmical conformation of periods or distichs; 
 a parallelism of the same in regard to sense or expression ; a figu- 
 rative, parabolic stj^le ; and a diction peculiar to this species of com- 
 position. (See Lowth's Lectures on Heb. Poetry, Lee. xviii — xx. De 
 Wette's Commenljir iiber den Psalmen, Einleit. § 7. Vogel de Dia- 
 lecto poetica. Ges. Heb. Lex. Theil L xxv — xxvii. Theil H. 
 1335. Meyer, Hermeneutik des Alt. Test.) 
 
 The poetic diction displays itself in the choice of words, the 
 meaning assigned to them, and the forms which it gives them. 
 
 (a) The choice of words. Thus "ibntN instead of DTN 7nan ; Irrni* 
 instead of Ni3 to come ; 'r^'n instead of ^y^ word ; C"!|? instead of 
 ti:i$ former time ; Dinn instead of D^a water. 
 
 (6) Meaning of words. E. g. ^i^N strong., for God; ^"'Z^ strongs 
 for bull; rrr'n'^ the only, the darlings tor life ; PlDT'^ Joseph., tor the ?ia- 
 tion of Israel kc. 
 
 (c) Forms of words. E.g. IjibN instead ofc^r^Vx God; Irtin in- 
 stead of n'^n to be ; Ti^l2l2'J_ instead of n"'73^' nations ; nis^lj instead of 
 fi'5;D years; ni^^ instead of D*^^ days; "^272 instead of 'J70 from; 
 M^n^ instead of 'T'b|| he will go. 
 
 ((/) In poetry, several grammatical forms are peculiar. E.g. paragog- 
 ic ?i_ is suffixed to nouns in the absolute state ; i. and ■^_ are suffix- 
 ed to nouns in regimen ; ia_ suffix is used instead of D_ them; their; 
 n!n"_. and ""T^i- instead of l^_ his ; "'D^— fern, instead of u"*- thine ; ':''_ 
 and "*_ plur, instead of D".. . 
 
 In other respects too, poetic usage gives peculiar libertj'. The 
 conjugations Fiel and Hithpael are sometimes used intransitively; 
 the apocopated future stands for the common future ; the participle 
 is often used for the verb; and anomalies in respect to concord, el- 
 lipsis &c. are more frequent than in prose. 
 
 4. As the Aramaean dialect was learned by the Jews during 
 their captivity, and a mixture of this and the Hebrew, ever after 
 their return, was perhaps spoken in Palestine by the people at large ; 
 so it is evident, that many words of the old Hebrew, in consequence 
 of this, must fall into desuetude, and the meaning of them become 
 obscured. Of course, the later Hebrew writers were obliged to 
 avoid such words. A comparison of the books of Kings with those 
 
§ 3. HISTORIC SKF.TCn OF THE IIERREW LANGUAGE. 23 
 
 of the Chronicle;?, where they are parallel, is full of instruction in 
 respect to this sul>jt'ct. It will be fonnil, that ihc author uf the 
 Chronicles has introtluceJ the later orthography and forms of words ; 
 substituted new words for old ones ; given explanations of the an- 
 cient text from which he drew the materials of his history ; and in- 
 serted grammatical glosses of the same, so as to accommodate his 
 style to the times in which he wrote. (Ges. Gesch. § 12.) 
 
 5. There is no probability that the Hebrew language ceased, 
 during the captivity, to be cultivated and understood, in a good de- 
 gree, by those who were well educated among the Jews. The num- 
 ber of books already extant in it at this period ; the reverence with 
 which they were regarded ; the care with which they were pre- 
 served ; all render such a supposition entirely inadmissible. Every 
 nation, subjected to a foreign yoke and to exile, does indeed gradual- 
 ly lose its own language and approximate to that of its conquerors. 
 Yet the Jews, who held all foreign nations in abhorrence, were less 
 exposed to this, than most others would be. The fiict, that after the 
 return from exile, so many authors wrote in the Hebrew dialect, and 
 for public use, demonstrates that the knowledge of the language was 
 not generally lost, although the dialect spoken may have been a mix- 
 ed one.* After the worship of God was renewed in the second tem- 
 ple, the ancient Hebrew Scriptures were unquestionably used in it. 
 In the synagogues, which appear to have been erected not long af- 
 ter this, the Hebrew Scriptures were always used. Even so late as 
 the time of the Apostles, this was the case, (Acts xv. 21) ; as it has 
 continued to be ever since. 
 
 How long the Hebrew was retained, both in writing and conver- 
 sation ; or in writing, after it ceased to be the language of conver- 
 sation ; it is impossible to determine. The coins stamped in the 
 time of the Maccabees are all the oriental monuments we have, of 
 the period that elapsed between the latest canonical writers and the 
 advent of Christ ; and the inscriptions on these are in Hebrew. At 
 the time of the Maccabees then, Hebrew was understood, at least 
 as the language of books ; perhaps in some measure also among the 
 better informed, as the language of conversation. But soon after 
 
 * Posfiblv (his may be doubtful. See Nehem. xiii. 23 &c. Does the 
 lanciuage of Ashdod here mean a dialect that was diverse from i':ood Hebrew ? 
 Or does it mean merely a dialect that differed from the language then common- 
 ly spoken by the Jews? 
 
24 § 3. HISTORIC SKETCH OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 this, the dominion of the Seleucidae in Syria over the Jewish na- 
 tion, uniting- with the former influence of the Babylonish captivitj' 
 to diffuse the Aramaean dialect among- them, appears to have de- 
 stroyed the remains of proper Hebrew, as a living language, and to 
 have universally substituted, in its stead, the Hebraeo-Aramaean as 
 it was spoken in the time of our Saviour. 
 
 A representation very different from this has been made by the 
 Talmudists and Jewish grammarians ; and, in following them, by a 
 multitude of Christian critics. This is, that the Hebrew became al- 
 together a dead language during the Babylonish exile ; which, say 
 they, is manifest from JVeh. viii. G. But as this sentiment is wholly 
 built on a mistaken interpretation of the verse, and as facts speak so 
 pl'dinly against such an opinion, it cannot be admitted. (Ges. Gesch. 
 § 13.) 
 
 6. From the time when Hebrew ceased to be vernacular, down 
 to the present day, a portion of this dialect has been preserved in 
 the Old Testament. It has always been the subject of study among 
 learned Jews. Before and at the time of Christ, there were flour- 
 ishing Jewish academies at Jerusalem. Those of Hillel and Sham- 
 mai are the most celebrated. After Jerusalem was destroyed, schools 
 were set up in various places ; but particularly they flourished at 
 Tiberias, until the death of Rabbi Judah, surnamed Haqqodesh or the 
 Holy, the author of the Mishna, about A. D. 230. Some of his pu- 
 pils set up other schools in Babylonia, which became the rivals of 
 these. The Babylonish academies flourished until near the tenth 
 century. From the schools at Tiberias and in Babylonia^ we have 
 received the Targums, the Talmud, the Masora, and the written 
 vowels and accents of the Hebrew language. 
 
 The Mishna or second law, i. e. the oral traditions of the fathers, 
 was reduced to writing by Rabbi Judah Haqqodesh, in the beginning 
 of the third century, as above slated. This constitutes the text of 
 both the Jerusalem and Babylonish Talmuds: and though tinctured 
 with Aramaeism, still exhibits a style of Hebrew that is pretty 
 pure. 
 
 The Gemara or commentary on the Mishna is later. The Jeru- 
 salem Gemara belongs, perhaps, to the latter part of the third cen- 
 tury ; that of Babylon is about three centuries later. Both exhibit 
 a very corrupted state of the Hebrew language. Other Jewish writ- 
 ings, composed about this period, are similar as to their dialect. 
 
I 
 
 § 3, HISTORIC SKETCH OP THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 25 
 
 The Targums, or translations of the Old Testament, are con- 
 fessedly Chaldee ; but they are (juitc impure, if you except that of 
 Onkelos. 
 
 The Masora consists of critical remarks on the text of the Old 
 Testament. A part of it is older than the Targums; but it was not 
 completed, or reduced to its present form, until the eighth or ninth 
 century. Its contents or criticisms show, that already the substan- 
 tial principles of Hebrew grammar, and the analogical structure of 
 the language, had been an object of particular study and attention. 
 
 7. Among Christians, during the tirst twelve centuries after the 
 apostolic age, the knowledge of Hebrew could scarcely be said to 
 exist. Epiphanius, who before his conversion was a Jew, probably 
 had a knowledge of the Hebrew tongue ; and perhaps Theodoret, 
 and Ephrem Syrus whose native language was Syriac, may have un- 
 derstood it. But among all the fathers of the Christian churches, 
 none have acquired any reputation for the knowledge of Hebrew, 
 except Origen and Jerom. In regard to the former, it is very doubt- 
 ful whether he possessed any thing more than a superticial knowl- 
 edge of it. (Ges. Gesch. § 27. 1.) But Jerom spent about twenty 
 years in Palestine, in order to acquire a knowledge of this tongue, 
 and has left the truits of his knowledge behind him, in the celebrated 
 translation of the Hebrew Scriptures called the Vulgate. 
 
 8. In consequence of the persecutions and vexations of the Jews 
 in the east, by Christians, and specially by Mohammedans, in the tenth 
 and eleventh centuries, their Literati emigrated to the west, and their 
 schools in Babylonia were destroyed. The north of Atrica, but par- 
 ticularly Spain, and afterwards France and Germany, became places 
 of resort for the Jews ; and here, during the eleventh and twelfth 
 centuries, almost all those important Jewish works in grammar and 
 lexicography were composed, which have been the means of pre^ 
 serving a knowledge of the Hebrew language in the world, and even- 
 tually of rousing Christians to the study of this sacred tongue. 
 
 It was during this period, that the Kimchi's, Jarchi, Aben Ezra, 
 and Maimonides flourished; and somewhat later appeared Ben Ger- 
 son, Ben Melech, Abarbanel, Elias Levita, and others ; who, by their 
 philological labours, prepared the way for the diffusion of Hebrew 
 learning over the Christian world. 
 
 9. During the dark ages, the knowledge of Hebrew appears to 
 have been banished from the Christian world, and to have been com- 
 
26 § 3. HISTORIC SKETCH OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 raonly regarded as a proof of heresy. But in the fourteenth centu- 
 ry, some glimmerings of light appeared. The Council at Vienna, in 
 A. D. 1311, ordered the establishment of Professorships of oriental 
 literature in the Universities. After this, slow but gradual progress 
 was made among Christians in the study of Hebrew, until the six- 
 teenth century; when the Reformation, operating with other causes, 
 served to increase the attention among the learned to the original 
 Scriptures. But as yet, the study of Hebrew was embarrassed by 
 many Jewish traditions and conceits, which had been propagated by 
 the Rabbins among their Christian pupils. Nor was it until about 
 the middle of the seventeenth centurj^, that Hebrew philology made 
 real advances, beyond the limits by which it had as yet been circum- 
 scribed. During this century, many grammars and lexicons of the 
 Hebrew and its cognate dialects were published, which increased the 
 means of investigation for future philologists. In the first part of 
 the succeeding centurj'^, Schultens published his philological works, 
 which exhibited deeper researches into the structure and nature of 
 the Shemitish languages, than had hitherto appeared. The appli- 
 cation of the kindred dialects, specially of the Arabic, to the illustra- 
 tion of the Hebrew, was urged much beyond what had before beea 
 done. Many eminent philologists were nurtured in his school at Ley- 
 den. The great body of critics, almost until the present time, have 
 followed in the path which he trod. Many of them have made an 
 excessive use of the Arabic language, in tracing the signification of 
 Hebrew words. Some of the best lexicographers, such as Eichhorn 
 and Michaelis, are not free from this fault. 
 
 Quite recently, a new and much better method of Hebrew phi- 
 lology has commenced, and is advancing, in a grefit measure, under 
 the patronage and by the labours of Gesenius at Halle. A temperate 
 use oi all the kindred dialects is allowed by this method, or rather 
 enjoined, in illustrating the sense of words ; but the most copious illus- 
 trations, borrowed from the kindred languages, are those which res- 
 pect the forms of words, their significancy as connected with the 
 forms, and the syntax of the Hebrew language. There is reason to 
 hope, that the present age will advance greatly beyond preceding 
 ones in respect to a fundamental and critical knowledge of the She- 
 mitish languages. The noble work of De Sacy (a professor at Paris 
 in the school for teaching the living oriental languages) on Arabic 
 grammar, has prepared the way for a more fundamental knowledge 
 
§ 4. SHEMITISH LETTERS. 27 
 
 of Hebrew idiom, than has hitherto been attained. Tlic zeal with 
 which oriental study is now pursued in many parts of the Christian 
 world, promises a rich harvest to the de])artment of Hebrew phi- 
 lology. 
 
 § 4. Shcmitish letters or written characters, 
 
 1. The origin of letters is lost in remote antiquity. But in tracing 
 the history of them, we arrive at a very satisfactory degree of evi- 
 dence, that in hither Asia they originated among those who spoke 
 the Hebrew language ; that they passed from them to the Greeks ; 
 and through them to the European nations in general. 
 
 2. The ancient Shemitish alphabets may be divided into two 
 kinds. 
 
 I. The Phenician character. To this belong : (a) Inscriptions dis- 
 covered at Malta, Cyprus &c ; and upon Pheniciao coins. (6) Inscrip- 
 tions upon Hebrew coins, (c) Pbenico-Egyptian inscriptions on the 
 bandages of mummies, {d) The Samaritan letters, (e) The most an- 
 cient Greek alphabet. 
 
 II. The Hebraeo-Chaldaic character. To this belong : (a) The 
 square character of our present Hebrew Bibles. (6) The Palmyrene 
 inscriptions, (c) The old Syriac or Estrangelo. (J) The old Arabic 
 or Kufish character, which preceded the Nishi or common charac- 
 ter of Arabia at the present time. 
 
 3. To all these characters it is common, that they are read from 
 the right to the left; and that the vowels constitute no part of the 
 alphabet, but are written above, in, or below the line. The old 
 Greek character is, in part, an exception to this remark. 
 
 § 5. Hebrew characters. 
 
 There are three kinds of characters, in which the remains of the 
 ancient Hebrew are presented to us ; viz. 
 
 1. The square character in common xise. This is sometimes called 
 the Chaldee or Assyrian character, because (as the Talmud avers, 
 Gem. Sanh. fol. 21. c. 2) the Jews brought it from Assyria or Baby- 
 lon, on their return from the captivity. 
 
 2. The inscription- character. This is found on ancient Hebrew 
 coins, stamped under the Maccabees. 
 
28 § 5. HEBREW CHARACTERS. 
 
 3. The Samaritan character. This is only a variety, or degener- 
 ate kind, of the inscription character. 
 
 4. Although it is highly probable, that the present square char- 
 acter was introduced among the Jews by means of the exile, yet it is 
 not likely, that it usurped the place of the more ancient character at 
 once, but came into gradual use, on account of its superior beauty, 
 and the tendency of the language toward what was Aramaean. It is 
 most probable, that the inscription-character (no. 2. supra) approxi- 
 mates the nearest, of all the alphabets now known, to the ancient 
 Hebrew or Phenician. The square character graduallj'^ expelled 
 this from use among the Hebrews ; as the Nishi did the Kufish 
 among the Arabians ; the present Syriac, the old Estrangelo among 
 the Syrians ; or the Roman type, the old black letter among the 
 English. The Palmyrene inscriptions seem to mark the character 
 in transitu ; about one half of them resembling the square charac- 
 ter, and the other half the inscription-letters. 
 
 It was very natural for the Maccabees, when they stamped coins 
 as an independent government, to use the old characters which the 
 nation had used when it was free and independent. 
 
 5. The square character was the common one in the time of our 
 Saviour; as in Matt. v. 8, Yodh is evidently referred to, as being the 
 least letter of the alphabet. It is highly probable, that it was the 
 common character in Hebrew Mss. when the Sept. version was 
 made ; because the departures from the Hebrew text in that ver- 
 sion, so far as they have respect to the letters, can mostly be ac- 
 counted for, on the ground that the square character was then 
 used, and that the final letters., which vary from the medial or initial 
 form, were then wanting. Ges. Gesch. §§ 40 — 43. 
 
 § 6. Manner of writing. 
 
 1. It has commonly been advanced as an established position, that 
 all the ancient Greek and Hebrew Mss. are without any division of 
 words, i. e. are written continua serie. But the Eugubine tables, and 
 the Sigean inscriptions, have one or two points to divide words; oth- 
 ers, still more : which however are not used at the end of lines, nor 
 when the words are very closely connected in sense, as a preposi- 
 tion with its noun. Most of the old Greek is written without any di- 
 vision of words. 
 
§ G. MANNER OF WRITINO. 29 
 
 Most of the Phnniciaii inscriptions are written in a similar uay, 
 but not all. Some have the words separated by a point. In this 
 manner, the Samaritan, and the Keil-character among' the Persians, 
 are separated. The Kiifish or old Arabic had spaces between words. 
 So have all known Hebrew Mss. now extant. 
 
 2. It is probable, however, that the scriplio conlinua^ i. e. writing 
 without any division of words, was foimd in the Mss. used by the 
 LXX ; b(>cause many errors, which they have committed, arise from 
 an incorrect division of words. 
 
 The synagogue-rolls of the Jews, written in imitation of the an- 
 cient Hebrew manuscripts, have no vowel points, but exhibit a small 
 space between the words. The Samaritan Pentateuch is also desti- 
 tute of vowels, but divides the words. 
 
 3. The final letters with a distinctive form (^ 14) are not coe- 
 yal with the alphabet. The LXX manifestly were unacquainted 
 with them ; as they often divide words in a manner different from 
 that which would accord with these final letters. But the Talmud, 
 Jerom, and Epiphanius acknowledge them. 
 
 4. That there were some abridgments of words in ancient He- 
 brew writings is probable. The Hebrew coins exhibit them ; and 
 all the Rabbinic writings exhibit them in abundance. 
 
 5. The Hebrews designate numbers by letters of the alphabet. 
 But whether they anciently wrote with cyphers also, as did the Ara- 
 bians, cannot with certainty be determined. Many mistakes in our 
 present Old Testament with regard to numbers, may be explained 
 on the supposition that cyphers were used; still more, however, oa 
 the supposition that alphabetic characters were used for numbers. 
 
 6. It can hardly be supposed that the square character now in 
 use, and which has become uniform in consequence of appearing 
 only in printed books, was altogether immutable while it was trans-, 
 mitted only by Mss. Jerom complains of the smallness of the He- 
 brew characters; but whether this was owing to the scribe who 
 wrote his manuscript, or to the form of writing then generally used, 
 cannot be determined. From what Origen and Jerom both say of 
 the similarity and relation of Hebrew letters to each other, it ap- 
 pears that the characters were then essentialli/ the same as they 
 now are. (Ges. Gesch. § 46, 1.) 
 
 7. Hebrew Mss. exhibit two kinds of writing; viz. 
 
 (a) The Tarn letter (probably so named from Tarn, a grandson of 
 5 
 
30 § 7. HEBREW VOWELS. 
 
 Jarchi, about A. D. 1200,) with sharp corners and perpendicular cor- 
 onulae, used particularly in the synagogue-rolls of the German and 
 Polish Jews. 
 
 (6) The Felshe letter; such as we see in the Hebrew Bibles of 
 Simonis and Van der Hooght. In Mss. however, this species of char- 
 acter has coronulae upon some of the letters. 
 
 u. The Spanish printed Hebrew character resembles the Felshe ; 
 the German, resembles the Tarn letter. The coronulae in both are 
 omitted. The Spanish letters are square and upright ; the German, 
 sharp-cornered and leaning. The Italian and French character is a 
 medium between both. 
 
 § 7. Hebrezo vowels, 
 
 1. It has been mentioned (§ 1. 8._;) that the Shemitish languages 
 exhibit alphabets destitute of vowels ; and that these, when added 
 to the text of any book, are placed above, in, or below the line of the 
 consonants. The question whether the written vowels of the Hebrew 
 language were coeval with the consonants, or at least very ancient, 
 has been agitated by many critics, for three centuries past, with 
 great interest and much learning. On the one side it has been main- 
 tained, that the vowel-points are coeval with the writings of the 
 Old Testament, or at least with the time of Ezra ; on the other, 
 that they are an invention of the Masorites, at some period between 
 the fifth and tenth centuries. 
 
 A few however have taken a middle path, and maintained that 
 some of the vowel-points (probably three) are very ancient ; and 
 that in the oldest Mss. they were appended to doubtful words. 
 
 2. The position that the written vowel signs are of comparative- 
 ly recent date, is now considered, by all critics of any note, as settled. 
 The principal reasons for this opinion may be summarily stated, io 
 a short compass. 
 
 (a) The kindred Shemitish languages anciently had no written 
 vowels. The most ancient Estrangelo and Kufish characters, i. e. 
 the ancient characters of the Syrians and Arabians, it is generally 
 agreed, were destitute of vowels.* The Palmyrene, and nearly 
 all the Phenician inscriptions, are destitute of them. Some of 
 
 * In regard to the Kufic, it is doubtful whether this opinion be correct. See 
 de Sacy, Gram. Arab, i 73. 
 
§ 7. HEBREW VOWELS. 31 
 
 the Maltese inscriptions,, however, and a few of the Phenician, have 
 marks which probably were intended as vowels. The Koran was 
 at first confessedly destitute of them. The punctuation of it occa- 
 sioned great dispute among' Mohammedans. 
 
 In some of the older Syriac writings is found a single point, which, 
 by being placed in different positions with regard to words, served 
 as a diacritical sign. The present vowel system of the Syrians was 
 introduced so late as the time of Theophilus and Jacob of Edessa, 
 about A. D. 800. The Arabic vowels were adopted soon after the 
 Koran was written ; but their other diacritical marks did not come 
 into use, until they were introduced by Ibn Mokia about A. D. 900, 
 together with the Nishi character now in common use. 
 
 It should be added here, that the inscriptions on the Hebrew 
 coins have no vowel-points. 
 
 (6) .lewish tradition generally admits, that the vowels were not 
 written until the time of Ezra. 
 
 (c) The synagogue-rolls of the Pentateuch, written with the 
 greatest possible care and agreeably to ancient usage as handed down 
 by tradition, have never had any vowel-points, 
 
 {d) The LXX most manifestly used a text destitute of vowel- 
 points ; as they have not only departed in a multitude of instances 
 from the sense of the pointed text, but even pronounce the proper 
 names in a manner dialectically different from that in which they 
 must be read, according to the vowel-system. It is possible, that in 
 some words they may have found a diacritical point, resembling that 
 in some of the older Syriac manuscripts. (\^id. supra a.) 
 
 (e) No explicit mention is made in the Talmud of vowel-points 
 or accents ; not even in all the disputes among the Rabbins about 
 the sense of words, which are there recorded. Doubtful names of 
 some kind of diacritical signs have been produced from the Talmud,- 
 and repeatedly discussed ; but no definite and satisfactory proof has 
 been educed from them, that they respect written vowel-points, 
 
 (/) The various readings in our Hebrew Bibles, called QeW, 
 man}' of which are quite ancient, have no reference to the vowel- 
 points of words. 
 
 (^) Neither Origen, nor Jerom, makes any mention of the pres- 
 ent vowel-marks, or of any technical expressions of Hebrew gram- 
 mar. Jerom says expressly, that " the Hebrews very rarely use 
 vowels in the middle of words, but pronounce (according to the will 
 
32 . § 7. HEBREW VOWELS. 
 
 of the reader and the difference of countries) the same words with 
 different sounds and accents." (Epist. 126. ad Evagr.) On Hab. iii. 
 5, he says of "in, " tres literae positae sunt in Hebraeo — absque ul' 
 la vocalV In other places, he speaks of a diversitas accentuum upon 
 words ; but whether he means a difference in pronouncinsf them, or 
 that some diacritical sig-n was occasionally used which he thus names, 
 it is difficult to determine. 
 
 3. Objections against this view of the subject may be readily an- 
 swered. The allegation that a language cannot be read without 
 written vowels, is certainly unfounded ; for hundreds of Jewish vol- 
 umes are every day read, that were never pointed : not to menlion, 
 that in all the Shemitish languages there are unpointed books, man- 
 uscripts, or inscriptions. 
 
 Kor has the objection, that an alphabet without vowels is an ab- 
 surdity, any more weight ; for the question is merely a matter of 
 fact, not a discussion respecting what a perfect alphabet ought to be. 
 Can it be shewn, that the Shemitish or Hebrew alphabet was per- 
 fect ? 
 
 The allegation that the Targums approximate very closely to 
 the sense of our present Hebrew text as furnished with vowels, is 
 true ; but the inference therefrom, that the Targumists must have 
 used Mss. with vowel-points, does not follow. On the contrary, we 
 may draw the conclusion with more probability, that the vowel- 
 points were conformed to the sense which the Targums gave. Both 
 merely convey the traditionary explications of the Jewish schools ; 
 and the same thing is done by Origen and Jerom in their commenta- 
 ries. All that can be proved by such arguments is, that the vowel- 
 points have faithfully transmitted to us the sense, which the Jews 
 very early affixed to the words of the Hebrew Scriptures. 
 
 4. Laying aside Jewish traditionary stories, the first certain marks 
 of our present vowel-system may be found in the Masora, compiled, 
 though not concluded, about the fifth century. Most of the vowels 
 are there named. A few of the occidental and oriental readings, collect- 
 ed in the eighth century and printed in some of our Hebrew Bibles, 
 respect the diacritical points ; e, g. two of them respect Mappiq in 
 He. The various readings of Ben Asher and Ben JYaphthali (about 
 A. D. 1034) have exclusive regard to the vowels and accents. The 
 Arabic version of Saadias, made about this time, is predicated upon 
 
§ 7. HFBREW VOWELS. 33 
 
 a pointed text; and the Jewish grammarians of the ninth century 
 appear plainly to proceed on the ground of such a text. 
 
 The time when the vowel-sy^tom was completed cannot be defi- 
 nitely fixed, for want of historical data. Most probably, it was dur- 
 ing the sixth or seventh century. Probably too, it first began, as 
 the accentuation of Greek did, in the schools; and gradually spread, 
 on account of its utility in a dead language, into a great part of the 
 Hebrew manuscripts. 
 
 5. The importance of the vowel-points to learners, can be fully 
 estimated only by those who have studied Hebrew without and with 
 the use of them. In respect to their being a constituent part of the 
 Hebrew language, it may be observed, 
 
 (a) That no language can exist without vowels ; although it is 
 not necessary that they should be written ; and originally, as we 
 have seen, they were not written in the Hebrew. 
 
 (b) It is certain that the vowel-points exhibit a very consistent, 
 deep, and fundamental view of the structure of the Hebrew, which 
 cannot well be obtained without them, b3' those who study it as a 
 dead language. 
 
 (c) Comparison with the Syriac and Arabic, the latter of which 
 is a living language, shews that the vowel-system, as to its princi- 
 ples, is altogether accordant with the structure of those languages. 
 
 (cZ) It is quite certain, from comparing the sense of the Hebrew 
 Scriptures as given in the Targums and in the version and notes of 
 Jerom, that the vowel-points do give us an accurate, and for the most 
 part clear account of the manner, in which the Jews of the first four 
 centuries of the Christian era understood the text of the Old Testa- 
 ment. Indeed, it is quite astonishing, that there should be so ex- 
 act a coincidence between the vowel-system and commentaries or 
 rather versions of so remote an age ; and this only serves to she\V 
 with how great exactness the vowel-system has been arranged, 
 agreeably to the ancient Jewish ideas of the sense of the Old Tes- 
 tament. The importance then of the written vowels, as conveying 
 to us a definite idea of the ancient commentary of the Jewish church, 
 in regard to a great number of difficult and dubious passages, is ob- 
 viously great. 
 
 (e) The critic and interpreter, being satisfied that the written 
 vowel-system is not coeval with the composition of the Hebrew 
 
34 § 8. HEBREW ACCENTS. 
 
 Scriptures, will not feel himself bound to follow it in cases where 
 it makes no sense, or a sense inconsistent with the context. 
 
 (/) The unwary student who is betrayed into the system of Mas- 
 clef and Parkhurst, which rejects the vowel-points of the Shemitish 
 languages, can scarcely conceive how much loss and disappointment 
 he will experience, by pursuing the study of Hebrew in this meth- 
 od. In a period of one year, the progress by the use of the vowel- 
 points is considerably greater than without them. In two years it 
 is doubled. Moreover, if the student uses the points from the first, 
 he will be able, with almost no trouble, to pass to the reading of 
 Chaldee, Syriac, and Arabic. One thing is pretty evident; there 
 never was, and it may be doubted whether there ever will be, a thor- 
 ough Hebrew scholar, who is ignorant of the vowel-system. The He- 
 brew language destitute of vowels is " without form," and is but lit- 
 tle removed from being " void" and having chaotic "darkness upon 
 it." Seven years experience of the writer, in teaching without the 
 vowel-points, has brought him fully to this conclusion. 
 
 § 8. Hebrew accents. 
 
 1. The system of accents, as it now appears in our Hebrew Bi- 
 bles, is inseparably connected with the present state of the vowel- 
 points ; inasmuch as these points are often changed by virtue of the 
 accents. The latter, therefore, must have originated cotemporane- 
 onsly with the written vowels; at least, with the completion of the 
 vowel-system. 
 
 2. Respecting the design of the accents, there has been great di- 
 versity of opinion, and much dispute. Three uses have been assign- 
 ed them, viz. {a) To mark the tone-syllable of a word, {b) To 
 mark the interpunction. (c) To regulate the reading or cantillation 
 of the Scriptures. Respecting each of these topics, it will be nec- 
 essary to say something hereafter. (Vide § 33 and App. E. 1©. -Slf) 
 
§ 9. WRITERS ON THE HEDREW LANGUAGE. 35 
 
 § 9. Writers useful to be read and consulted, by those who 
 study the Hebrew language. 
 
 The object of this section is only to give a small selection of 
 the older and more recent writers, who are deserving of special 
 attention. 
 
 /. J\Iiscella7ieo^(s, 
 
 Waltoni Prolegomenn, in Rib. Polyglott. 
 Loescher, de Causis ling. Heb. 
 Morini Exercitt. de Ling, primaeva. 
 
 Exercitt. Biblicae. 
 
 Wollii Bibliotheca Hebraea. 
 
 Cappelli Critica Sacra. (Ed. Scharfenburg.) 
 
 Arcanum Punct. revelatum. 
 
 Buxtorfius, de Antiq. etc. Heb. Punct. et Vocalium. 
 Glassii Philol. Sacra. (Edit. Dathii et Baueri.) 
 Hody, de Bibliorum Textibus etc. 
 Schultens, de Defectibus hod. Ling. Heb. 
 
 Origines Hebraeae. 
 
 Aurivillii Dissertt. (Ed. Michaelis.) 
 
 II, Introduction to the Hebrew Scriptures, 
 
 Carpzovii Introductio ad libros Vet. Test. 
 
 Eichhorn, Einleitung ins Alt. Test. 
 
 Jahn, Einleitung ins Alt. Test. 
 
 Bertholdt, Historisch-critische Einleitung etc. 
 
 Home's Introduction to the Scriptures. 
 
 ///, Lexicography, 
 
 Cocceii Lex. Heb. 
 
 Simonis Lex. Heb. (Ab Eichhornio.) 
 
 Michaelis Supplem. ad Lex. Heb. 
 
 Gesenius, Hebriiisch-Deutsches Worterbuch. 
 
 Heb. Lexicon, translated by J. W. Gibbs. 
 
 IV. Grammars. 
 
 Buxtorfii Gram. Heb. 
 Schroederi Gram. Heb, 
 JahniiGram. Heb. 
 
36 § 9. WRITERS ON THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. 
 
 Vater, Hebraische Sprachlehre. 
 
 Gesenius, Hebriiische Sprachlehre, also Lehrgebiiude &c. 
 
 Altingii Fundamenta Puuct. Heb. 
 
 Storrii Observatt. ad analogiam et Sjntax. ling. Heb. 
 
 Boston, Tractatus Stigmologicus. 
 
 F". On the Mss. letters, genius, history ^c. of the Hebrews, 
 
 Gesenius, Geschichte der Heb. Sprache und Schrift. 
 Eckhel, Doctrina Nummorum V^et. Vol. iii. 421 et seq. 
 Bellermann, Handbuch der biblischen Lit. B. i. 
 Kennicott, Dissertatio Generalis. 
 
 Dissertt. on the Hebrew Text. 2 vol. 
 
 Prideaux's Connexions. 
 Lovvth's Lectures on Hebrew Poetry. 
 Herder, Geist der heb. Poesie. 
 VogeJ, de Dialecto poetica Hebraea. 
 Tychsen, Tentamen de Codd. Heb. 
 Bayerus, de Nummis Samaritanis. 
 
 VI. Hebrew Antiquities, 
 
 .Tosephus' Heb. Antiquities. 
 
 Waehneri Antiquitates Heb. 
 
 Warnekros, Entvvurf der heb. Alterthiimer. 
 
 Hartnar's Observations. (Edit. Clarke.) 
 
 Jahn's Biblical Archaeology, translated by T. C. Uphani. 
 
PART II. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 
 
S 10. 
 
 j^ebreto :^Ipi)abet 
 
 Heb. 
 letters. 
 
 Repres- 
 ented bj 
 
 Sound- 
 ed as 
 
 Names. 
 
 Names in 
 Hebrew. 
 
 Signification of INumber 
 names. signified. 
 
 N 
 
 N^ 
 
 5 
 
 i^aleph 
 
 ^^h 
 
 OX 
 
 1 
 
 n 
 
 bh 
 
 V 
 
 Beth 
 
 n^3 
 
 house 
 
 2 
 
 :\ 
 
 gh 
 
 g 
 
 Gimel 
 
 ^^^3 
 
 camel 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 dh 
 
 ^ thin 
 ( that 
 
 Daleth 
 
 7h^ 
 
 door 
 
 4 
 
 n 
 
 li 
 
 h 
 
 He 
 
 ksn 
 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 Vav 
 
 r\ 
 
 nail, peg 
 
 6 
 
 T 
 
 z 
 
 z 
 
 Zayin 
 
 iH 
 
 armour 
 
 7 
 
 n 
 
 hh 
 
 hh 
 
 Hheth 
 
 n^n 
 
 hedge 
 
 8 
 
 l) 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 Tet 
 
 DVJ 
 
 serpent 
 
 9 
 
 h 
 
 y 
 
 J 
 
 Yodh 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 hand 
 
 10 
 
 =1 
 
 kh 
 
 h 
 
 Kaph 
 
 ?i^- 
 
 hollow hand 
 
 20 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 Lamedh 
 
 ^?l 
 
 ox-goad 
 
 30 
 
 a a 
 
 m 
 
 ra 
 
 Mem 
 
 t=2^. 
 
 
 40 
 
 = 1 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Nun 
 
 ^3 
 
 fish 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 Samekh 
 
 ^^P, 
 
 triclinium 
 
 60 
 
 y 
 
 :? 
 
 " 
 
 3? ay in 
 
 rx 
 
 eye 
 
 70 
 
 eq 
 
 ph 
 
 f 
 
 Pe 
 
 JiS 
 
 mouth 
 
 80 
 
 sy 
 
 ts 
 
 ts 
 
 Tsadhe 
 
 ""T"? 
 
 fish-hook 
 
 90 
 
 P 
 
 q 
 
 k 
 
 Qoph 
 
 5lhp 
 
 ear 
 
 100 
 
 T 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 Resh 
 
 dn 
 
 head 
 
 200 
 
 •(2 
 
 sh 
 
 sh 
 
 Shin 
 
 TP 
 
 tooth 
 
 300 
 
 [0] 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 Sin 
 
 r*^ 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 th 
 
 th 
 
 Tav 
 
 T 
 
 cross, mark 
 
 400 
 
§ 10. 
 
 Heb. 
 
 Samar. 
 alphabet. 
 
 Hebrew 
 coin-letter. 
 
 Hcb. 
 
 ■ 
 
 Syriac 
 alphabet. 
 
 ] 
 
 Arabic 
 alphabet. 
 
 N 
 
 A 
 
 FV< 
 
 f 
 
 •^ 
 
 5 
 
 ^ d 
 
 n 
 
 O 
 
 .i 
 
 3 
 
 t 
 
 
 ^ -1 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 n 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 :^^ 
 
 r 
 
 1 
 
 cn 
 o 
 
 
 n 
 
 Ti 
 
 B<5^ 
 
 T 
 
 1 
 
 f 
 
 Hj 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 
 v 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 .*j 
 
 ^ £k. 
 
 T 
 p 
 
 or 
 
 •Vv^S 
 
 t: 
 
 i 
 
 Li, 
 
 P 
 
 i 
 
 /. >^ 
 
 1 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 D 
 
 a 
 
 r^^ 
 
 3 
 
 ^^ 
 
 a ■n 
 
 !5 
 
 :^ 
 
 5 
 
 D 
 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 /o 
 
 :; 
 
 7 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 D 
 
 b 
 
 
 D 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 :: 
 
 vn 
 
 •v^*- ^v> 
 
 D 
 
 ss 
 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 TV 
 
 ?» 
 
 is. 
 
 c c 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^q 
 
 D 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 ««4 
 
 yj^ 
 
 VV O) 
 
 2 
 
 ^ 
 
 JO AO . 
 
 c3 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 £> 
 
 3 
 
 n 
 
 A 
 
 X 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 il) 
 
 .• 
 
 MA 
 
 
 *4- 
 
 t 
 
 
 MA 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 Z 
 
 *i S* 
 
40 § 10. ALPHABETS. 
 
 1. In the first column of the Hebrew alphabet, the final letters, 
 which are unlike the medial or initial ones, are placed on the right 
 hand of them. The student needs only to be told here, that the let- 
 ters Kaph, Mem &c. are written in two ways, according to the place 
 in a word, which they may happen to occupy. Comp. § 14. 
 
 2. In the second column, the representatives of the Hebrew let- 
 ters there given, are, in general, the most common; for which rea- 
 son they are retained, rather than to introduce new ones. On the 
 plan, however, adopted for representatives of Hebrew letters in this 
 grammar, viz. that every different letter, as far as our alphabet ad- 
 mits, should have a distinct representative, departure from the com- 
 mon custom is, in a few cases, a matter of necessity. The object of 
 this is, to enable the reader of any represented word, as extensively as 
 is practicable, to trace the original Hebrew letters. On this ac- 
 count, q is put for p, though it sounds like a hard k. So bh is made 
 to represent S, although it sounds as v. So J< and ^ are inserted 
 without any attempt to represent them, because our language does 
 not furnish us with the means of doing it. But as D and to sound 
 alike, they can he represented in our alphabet only by s. The same 
 is the case with u and n^= t. For a particular account of the sound 
 of each letter, see § 18. 
 
 3. The learner should particularly note, that the names of the 
 letters, in the fourth column, are not to be pronounced according to 
 English analogy, but agreeably to the sounds attached to the repre- 
 sentatives of the Hebrew consonants, in the third column, and in § 
 12; and to those of the vowel-points, as given in ^ 21. E. g. Aleph 
 is sounded as if written aw-lcf; Beth, as baith &,c. The plan oi pre- 
 serving a uniform mode of representation, has occasioned some slight 
 changes from the more usual mode of writing some of these letters. 
 When the student becomes able to com{)are the Hebrew column of 
 the names of letters, with the names as written in the Roman let- 
 ters, he will see the ground of all the orthographical changes which 
 have been made. 
 
 4. The sixth column contains the most probable meaning of the 
 names. About some of them there is not certainty ; and some are 
 left untranslated, because no particular signification has, as yet, been 
 rendered very probable. (See § 13.) 
 
 5. The seventh column contains the value of the Hebrew letters, 
 
§ 1 1. ANCIENT NUMBER AND ORDER OF LETTERS. 41 
 
 used as tlie signs of numbers. For a more complete account of tlii>* 
 subject, see appendix A. 
 
 6. The alphabet on p. 39 presents the reader with a comparison 
 of the Hebrew, first with the Samaritan and old Hebrew coin-let- 
 ter ; then with the modern Syriac and Arabic letters, Comp. § 1 2. 
 
 In the S3'riac, most letters of the alphabet have a slight varia- 
 tion from the form here presented, when they stand in the middle, 
 or at the end of a word. In the Arabic alphabet the variation in 
 similar cases is, for the most part, considerably greater than in the 
 Syriac. 
 
 7. In Syriac there are only five written vowels, commonly ex- 
 pressed thus ; viz. Pethocho (^ ) = a ; Rebhotso (" ) = e ; lihevot- 
 sO (^ ) = i; Zeqopho C ) = o ; Etsotso ( ^ ) = u. The first three 
 may stand above or below the line ; the last two, above only. For 
 the same vowels, there are also more ancient marks of a different 
 form, used in some Mss. and printed books either exclusively or in 
 conjunction with the above. There is no Sheva in Sj'riac ; and no 
 Daghesh. 
 
 8. In Arabic there are only three written vowels ; viz. Fatah 
 ( ' ) = a, e ; Kesre ( / ) = e, i ; and Dhamma ( •> ) ^ o, u. There 
 is no Sheva vocal ; Sheva silent is written thus ( ^ ), and called Jesm. 
 Daghesh is written over the letter thus ( j ), and called Teshdid. 
 
 *§ 11. Alphabet; ancient numher and order of letters, 
 
 1. The number of letters in the ancient Hebrew alphabet is 
 clearl}' ascertained from several poetic pieces in the Old Testa- 
 ment, the verses and distichs of which are arranged in alphabetic or- 
 der. (Fs. XXV, XXXIV, XXXVII, CXI, exit, cxix, cxLv. Prov. XXXI. 10 
 &c. Lam. I, II, in, iv.) This number was twenty-two ;t no distinc- 
 tion being then made in writing between iu and UJ.J The same was 
 the ancient number in the Arabic alphabet, before the Nishi charac- 
 ter was introduced by Ibn Mokla about A. D. 900. The same 
 also is the number in the Syriac, Chaldee, and Samaritan alpha- 
 bets ; and very probably the old Greek alphabet, which came by 
 
 t In Ps. XXV, XXXIV, and cxlv, one letter is omitted ; in Ps. xxxvii, iH is re- 
 peated and ^' omitted. 
 
 :|: See alphabetic pieces, Ps. cxix. 161—168. Lara. n. 21, ni. 61. iv. 21, 
 and ail the alphabetic Psalms. 
 
42 §12. PRESENT NUMBER OF HEBREW LETTERS. 
 
 Cadmus from Phenicia, also contained the same number. (See ap- 
 pendix B.) 
 
 2. The testimony respecting the original order of the letters is 
 not uniform. In Lam. ii, in, iv, Ayin stands after Pe. The predom- 
 inant testimony favours the common arrangement. (See Ps. cxix, 
 CXI, cxii, cxLv. Prov. xxxi. 10 &c. Lam. i.) 
 
 *§ 12, Alphabet ; present number of Hebrew letters, 
 
 1. Before the Nishi character was introduced (cent. 10th) into 
 Arabic writing, the Arabians wrote only twenty-one or twenty-two 
 letters, but sounded twenty eight ; i. e. they occasionally aspirated, 
 sibilated, and hardened six or seven of their letters. Afterwards, 
 the distinction was marked in writing by a dot over or under these 
 letters, and the alphabet was increased to twenty-eight characters. 
 (See alphabet p. 39.) 
 
 2. In the Hebrew alphabet, there is commonly reck- 
 oned only one letter, the pronunciation of Avhich is distin- 
 guished by a dot or diacritical sign ; viz. tIJ = sh, and \!3 
 = s. The Hebrew alphabet, however, by means of the 
 present diacritical signs, actually consists of twenty-nine let- 
 ter. These are as follows : 
 
 .et. 
 
 Repr. 
 
 Sound. 
 
 Let. 
 
 Repr. 
 
 Sound. 
 
 Let. 
 
 Repr. 
 
 Sound 
 
 iS^ 
 
 i5 
 
 ? 
 
 n 
 
 hh 
 
 hh 
 
 D 
 
 ph 
 
 f 
 
 n 
 
 bh 
 
 V 
 
 D 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 S3 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 s 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 1 
 
 J 
 
 y 
 
 2 
 
 ts 
 
 ts 
 
 ^ 
 
 gh 
 
 g 
 
 S 
 
 kh 
 
 'h 
 
 P 
 
 q 
 
 k 
 
 3 
 
 g 
 
 g 
 
 S 
 
 k 
 
 k 
 
 n 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 1 
 
 dh 
 
 th(hard) b 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 sh 
 
 sh 
 
 "n 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 12 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 'w 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 n 
 
 h 
 
 h 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 th 
 
 th 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 D 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 n 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 T 
 
 z 
 
 z 
 
 ^J 
 
 'J 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
I 
 
 i 
 
 §§ 13, 14. NAMES OF LETTERS, ETC. 43 
 
 3. There are no distinct alphabetic names lor any of those letters 
 which are distinguished by the dot in them called Daghesh^ § 28. 
 The diacritical sign over \u 5{n, seems to be older than the Daghesh 
 in the other letters. (See Jerom on Gen. ii. 23. Amos vii.) 
 
 4. In the same manner (by points above or below) seven letters 
 in the Arabic alphabet are distinguished, and diflTerently sounded. 
 But the letters thus affected do not correspond throughout with the 
 Hebrew. (See alphabet p. 39.) 
 
 In Hebrew and Arabic n, UJ, and n are double, i. e. have two 
 sounds. In Plebrew, but not in Arabic, 3, :t, D, and d are double. 
 In Arabic, but not in Hebrew, n, U, 2?, and :j£ have two sounds. 
 
 The same number of letters in each language represents two 
 sounds ; but a difference of dialect led to a different selection. The 
 Arabic wants Samekh, and has only twenty-eight letters. 
 
 This illustration of the Hebrew from a kindred language now 
 extensively spoken, may tend to remove objections raised against the 
 above representation of the present Hebrew alphabet. 
 
 *§ 13. Alphabet; names of the letters, 
 
 1. The names and forms of the letters were, for the most part, 
 (probably all of them,) designations of sensible objects. But resem- 
 blance must not be sought for in the present forms of the Hebrew 
 letters, except in a few instances. The old Hebrew character and 
 the Samaritan are obviously the best sources of comparison; and 
 here one may generally find satisfaction. 
 
 2. The fact that the names of the Hebrew letters originally de- 
 signated sensible objects, and that these names apocopated or slight- 
 ly changed have passed into all the cognate languages, and plainly 
 into the Greek itself, satisfactorily demonstrates the great antiquity 
 of Hebrew literature ; and renders it highly probable, that the in- 
 vention of letters must have taken place among those who spoke 
 the Hebrew language. 
 
 *§ 14. Alphabet ; Jinal letters, 
 
 1. Originally, and when the Septuagint version was made, there 
 were no final letters which differed from the common form. (§ G. 3.) 
 They appear to have been introduced after the scriptio continua was 
 
44 §§ 15, 16. DILATED AND UNUSUAL LETTERS. 
 
 dropped, and are now found in all Hebrew manuscripts and printed 
 books. They are five ; viz. 
 
 Common form S 73 5 s ii: 
 
 Final form "^ D 'j p) y These final 
 
 forms stand also for 500 600 700 800 900 
 
 2. A final form stands in the middle of a word, Is. ix. 6. Com- 
 mon forms at the end, Neh. ii. 13. Job xxxviii. 1. This, it can 
 hardly be doubted, arose at first from mistake of the copyist, which 
 has been perpetuated by some superstition. 
 
 *§ 15. Alphabet^ dilated letters. 
 
 The Hebrews do not separate a word at the end of a line, as we 
 do when there is not space enough for it. To fill out an empty 
 space in printed books, several dilated letters are commonly used ; 
 as Meph >5, He In, Lamedk ^, Mem t3, Tav tn, and sometimes oth- 
 er letters. 
 
 In manuscripts, the same expedient was often adopted ; but some- 
 times the space at the end was filled up with a part of the next 
 word left unpointed ; and sometimes with unmeaning letters, some 
 appropriate sign being added to give the reader notice. (Eich. 
 Einl. Th. II. s. 57. Ges. Heb. Lehrgeb. s. 10.) 
 
 § IG» Alphabet^ unusual letters. 
 
 These are the effect of Rabbinic conceit and mysticism. They are 
 
 (a) Literae majusculae ; as Mj^T Ps. lxxx. 16. 
 
 (b) minuscidae ; as DJ^"l2rtil Gen. ii. 4. 
 
 T . IT • : 
 
 (c) suspensae ; as ^_l'D^ Ps. lxxx. 14. 
 
 {d) inversae ; as i-"'D;2 Numb. x. 35. 
 
 According to the Rabbins, the i> suspended in c means Christ sus- 
 pctided ; the n minusculum in b means diTiiN Abraham^ which is 
 made out by transposition of the letters &c. Few of these are found 
 in our present Hebrew Bibles ; it is high time they were entirely 
 omitted. 
 
§17. DISTIXCTION OF SIMILAR LETTERS. A5 
 
 *§ 17, Alphabet; distinction of similar tetters. 
 
 Several letters bear a great resemblance to each oth- 
 er. These should be carefully compared, and the differ- 
 ence noted by the student, that in reading the one may 
 not be taken for the other. 
 
 Similars. 
 
 1. Beth 
 
 n 
 
 D Kaph 
 
 2. Gimel 
 
 5 
 
 D Nun 
 
 3. Daleth 
 
 *! 
 
 "■] Kaph 
 
 4. Daleth 
 
 
 1 Resh 
 
 5. Vav 
 
 1 
 
 ^ Yodh 
 
 6. Vav 
 
 1 
 
 1 Nun 
 
 7. Zayin 
 
 ♦ 
 
 1 Vav 
 
 8. Zayln T 1 Nun 
 
 9. Hheth n n He 
 
 10. Hheth n n Tav 
 
 11. Mem 12 D Tet 
 
 12. Mem D D Samekh 
 
 13. Tsadhey^:? Ayin 
 
 To aid the learner, it may be proper briefly to describe the dif- 
 ference between these similars. 
 
 1. S is distinguished from 3, by the right angle which its perpen- 
 dicular side makes with the strokes at the top and bottom of the let- 
 ter; 3 is round at its corners instead of being angular. In some 
 printed copies, 3 is distinguished from 1 only by the roundness of its 
 corner at the bottom. 
 
 2. a is distinguished from 3, by having the stroke at the bottom 
 united to the perpendicular only by a small point ; in 3, the bottom 
 stroke is united without any variation of its magnitude. 
 
 3. ''^ final descends below the line; ^t does not. 
 
 4. T is distinguished from ->, by having a right angle at the top, 
 at which part ^ is round or obtuse. 
 
 5. ■) descends to the bottom of the line : "• does not. 
 
 6. "^ final falls below the line ; 1 does not. 
 
 7. The top of T is continued a little to the right of the perpen- 
 dicular, while that of 1 is not; the upright line oft is small at the 
 top, where it inclines to tlie right, while it is gibbous below ; which is 
 not the ca«e with i. 
 
46 § 18. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 
 
 8. T descends onlj to the line ; "^ final falls below it. 
 
 9. T has no space between its left side and the top ; n exhibits 
 a small chasm. 
 
 10. n has a small dotted circle at the bottom of the perpendicu- 
 lar stroke on the left hand ; n has not this mark. 
 
 11. D is open at the top ; a at the bottom. 
 
 12. is almost round ; )2 final is a square or parallelogram. 
 
 13. j£ is angular on the right side of it, and the bottom is paral- 
 lel with the line^ S> turns to the left only. Final y, in its falling 
 stroke, either turns a little to the right, or falls perpendicularly. 
 
 N.'B. The student will tind it altogether the easiest method of 
 making himself t'amiliar with the distinctions between the Hebrew 
 letters, and with the respective sounds of the letters, (as also of the 
 vowels § 21,) to practise writing them down, calling each aloud by 
 its name and uttering the sound of it as often as he writes it. Let 
 this practice be persisted in, until all the vowels and consonants can 
 be recognized with facility and pronounced readily ; their distinc- 
 tions definitely described and drawn with the pen at pleasure ; and 
 their names familiarly recalled. In this way the student learns to 
 7s:rite Hebrew letters and vowels, (which he should b}' all means do,) 
 and he fixes the names, forms, and sounds of all the written signs in- 
 delibly upon his memory. 
 
 *§ 18. Alphabet } soimds of I he letters, 
 
 1. Preliinlnaiy remarks. 
 (a) Ail reasoning a priori, or from the analogy of the western 
 languages, to determine what were the sounds of the Hebrew let- 
 ters, must be fallacious and inconclusive. How can we decide, from 
 the difficulties which we find in uttering sounds attributed to He- 
 brew letters, that those sounds never existed ; or that they never 
 ouirht to have existed ? 
 
 o 
 
 (6) The deep guttural sounds, and the many degrees of distinc- 
 tion between gutturals, in the Hebrew, as attested by Jewish tradi- 
 tion, are by no means impossible. For every gradation of gutturals 
 in Hebrew, the Arabic 7iow spoken has nearly two. (See Arabic al- 
 phabet in Do Sacy or \ ater's Arabic grammar.) The number of 
 guttural gradations in any language is simply a question of fact, to 
 be settled by testimony, not by reasoning from analogy or a priori. 
 
§ 18. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 47 
 
 (c) The sources of testimony in regard to the sounds of the lie- 
 brew letters arc four. (1) The ancient Greek translations of the LXX, 
 Aquila, Symmachus &,c. and also the version of Jerom ; the authors 
 of which have endeavoured to express the Hebrew proper names, 
 as they pronounced them. But here let it be cautiously remember- 
 ed, that the (.iroek and Latin alphabets were quite incompetent to 
 convey all the sounds of the Hebrew, even supposing the authors 
 themselves of the ancient versions could pronounce them rightly. 
 (2) The best source of testimony is the traditionary [)ronunciation 
 of the Jewish literati. Caique in sua arte cr&dendum est. (3) The 
 analogy of the kindred languages, some of which are still living, is 
 anotlier source. (4) The approximation of certain letters to each 
 other, and the exchange of certain ones for each other, casts mutu- 
 al light upon both. 
 
 2. Remarks on the sounds of the letters ; particularly 
 on those which are attended with difficulty. 
 
 Aleph (m) is generally represented by the spiriius lenis of the 
 Greeks. It had a feeble sound ; and at the beginning of a word, it 
 seems to have been scarcely audible, like h in hcrb^ lio/nme^ kc. It 
 resembles He (n), but is lighter. We cannot make the nice distinc- 
 tion that is necessary to separate these gradations, n therefore is 
 generally treated, in practice^ as destitute of any sound. 
 
 In theory, it is frequently to be considered as a vocal letter. The 
 Hebrews doubtless sounded it. (§ 23.) 
 
 Beth (n) = 6/t, a sound somewhat uncertain. In general, bh is 
 sounded as our v. So the modern Greek sounds (3 at the present 
 time. 2 = 6; i. e. the Daghesh or point in it removes the aspirate. 
 (See alphabet in § 12.) 
 
 Gimel (a) = gh^ a sound generally considered uncertain and un-. 
 attainable. But the Arabians in general sound it as our j, and this 
 seems to be the genuine sound of o soft or aspirated ; but some sound 
 it as our g hard. (De Sacy, Gram. Ar. § 31.) a = g hard as in o'o. 
 Both of these letters, by the common usage of Europe, are sounded 
 as g hard. 
 
 Dulcth (t) = dh, a sound very difficult for most Europeans, but 
 very easy for the modern Greeks and the English, being exactly 
 the sound of our th in that, ri ^ d. Common usage among Euro- 
 ropeans sounds both as d, on account of the difficulty of sounding dh. 
 
 He (n) = a feeble A, as in had. 
 
48 §18. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 
 
 Vav {"]) ==■ V was a feeble letter, as it often coalesced with the 
 vowel which preceded it (§ 23) or was dropped. {^ 24.) Our v, as 
 commonly pronounced, seems to be too strong to represent it. In 
 Arabic it sounds as our w. Probably its Hebrew sound was near to 
 this ; and so, like our w in groxf:, show, &.c. it often quiesced when pre- 
 ceded by a vowel. (§ 23.) 
 
 Zmjin (t) r= 2 or ds. In Arabic, Dsal and Ze correspond to it. 
 Hheth (n) = hh was in general a strong aspirate ; but at the begin- 
 ning and end of words, the LXX have sometimes represented it sim- 
 ply by a vowel, or by a mere spiritiis letiis. 
 
 That usage in Hebrew assigned two gradations of sound to this 
 letter, is probable ; as very different meanings are sometimes attach- 
 ed to words in which n stands, that are the same in respect to 
 orthography. E. g. ^nn to destroy, and b^n to take a pledge. Usage 
 probably distinguished these words in pronunciation. The LXX 
 commonly represent t\ by ;j. The Arabians sound it in two different 
 ways. ( § 12. 4.) 
 
 Tet (d) = I emphatic or hard, as in turri ; but n, also represent- 
 ed in English b}' the letter <, sounds as t soft, i. e. less hard than 13. 
 
 Yodh ('^) = y when a consonant ; but it is a feeble letter, being 
 often lost in the sound of the vowel which precedes it. (§ 23.) 
 
 Kaph (id) = kk, the sound of which we cannot certainly ascertain. 
 Common usage sounds it as an aspirate, like the h in the French 
 word heros. In the Septuagint it is commonly represented by ^, 
 seldom by x. 3 = k. 
 
 Samekh (d) = s, but whether it most resembled the s in say, or that 
 in pleasure, it is difficult to decide. In the orthography of many words 
 in Hebrew, D and "O are carefully distinguished ; in others they are 
 confounded. In the Syriac and Arabic, there is but one letter for 
 both these. The confounding of D and to is peculiar to the later 
 Hebrew orthography. From these considerations it appears prob- 
 able, that originally there was a nice distinction in the Hebrew be- 
 tween these two letters, which afterwards disappeared, or was com- 
 monly disregarded, and never was carried into the cognate Syrian 
 and Arabian dialects, which were of later origin. Originally, it is 
 probable, \d was an intermediate sibilant between to and D ; as the 
 Shemitish languages make nearly as many degrees of sibilants, as of 
 aspirates. By common usage, at present, to and C are both sounded 
 as our s in soy. 
 
 Aijin {v) we do not sound : oot because wc suppose the Hebrews 
 
 I 
 
§ 18. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 49 
 
 (Jill not; but because we think the sound was probably such that we 
 cannot well imitate it. (irarnmarians have represented this letter 
 
 ^y S") S^'"> "»» "g'"' §'^-> ''^'i ''''^' ^'S'* '^'^- '^ ''^ Arabians have two gra- 
 dations of sound for it, viz. Ain and Chain. Probably the Hebrews 
 may have occasionally had the same, as the LXX have translated 
 rri/iy 7o^iOfj()c<, rrr^ laCu &c ; while in other words they have giv- 
 en it no sound, as "'irJi 'jJll, pra?. \i[xuh]yi &c. It is more probable 
 that the Ayin of the Hebrews was in general a feeble letter, like 
 the Arabic Ain, than that it resembled the Ghain or guttural gh of 
 Arabia, because : (a) It suffers contraction, as b2 for V^^ , which no 
 strongly sounding letter could do. (6) It is not unfrcquently ex- 
 changed for Alepli. (Ges. Lex. N.) (c) In the Syriac it is often 
 quiescent, contracted, or dropped, (d) Among the Persians, who 
 have received the Arabic alphabet, it is passed over in silence. 
 The sound of ng or g7i, which many give to it, is palpably errone- 
 ous, as it makes a nasal of it instead of a guttural. It is safest per- 
 haps to pass it over without sounding it ; as it seems to have had 
 a feeble sound, not easily distinguished. Such is the practice of the 
 best oriental scholars of the present time. 
 
 If however the student would give an impetus to the vowel of 5?, 
 (like that which he would give to the second a in lu-ot-og if he 
 should accent the second syllable,) he would probably approximate 
 as near to the proper sound of i? as can be done at the present day. 
 (De Sacy, Gram. Arab. § 43.) Jerom calls V a vowel ; which 
 contradicts the notion of its being a strong guttural sound among the 
 Hebrews. (De Nomin. Heb.) 
 
 Pe (d) = ph or/. In Arabic it has only this sound. The LXX 
 generally represent it by go ; but sometimes by ;t, as ncs TTuaya, &.c. 
 D = p. The old Greeks appear to have given only this sound to 
 the letter. 
 
 Tsadhe (:;) = u sibilated, i. e. ts ; as Zayin properly = n sibi- 
 lated, i. e. ds. The Arabian gives two sounds to this letter. (§ 1 2. 4.) 
 
 Qoph (p) = q. The difference between this letter and S = fc 
 is, that p is deeper, harder, and more guttural. 
 
 Resh (-i) =r r, not the common English r, but the rolling or 
 French r. Hence it is often ranked in Hebrew among the guttu- 
 rals. 
 
 Shin (\i;) ^= s/j, or s aspirated. For the sound of iD, see under C. 
 
 Tav (n) =:= (h in think, n = i, and is sounded like C, but softer. 
 
50 § 19, DIVISIONS or THE LETTERS. 
 
 *§ 19. Alphabet^ divisions of the letters, 
 
 1. The letters are divided according to the organs 
 used in pronouncing them. 
 
 (a) Gutturals 
 
 is^ n 
 
 n 
 
 5? 
 
 Qj) Labials 
 
 n 1 
 
 ^j 
 
 S 
 
 (c) Dentals 
 
 t D 
 
 :2 
 
 D fe) 
 
 (c?) Linguals 
 
 1 D 
 
 ^ 
 
 D n 
 
 (c) Palatals 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 D 
 
 P 
 
 i?(.s/i (n) approaches nearest to the guttural class (§ 18 under 
 Resh) but cannot properly be called a guttural. 
 
 2. Six are called aspirates ; viz. D, 5, ^, D, S, n,(also 
 technically called riE>)1^!3 Bfghadh-Kfphath,) because, 
 without a clot or Daghesh in them, they are aspirated. 
 Without Daghesh, they are also sometimes called molles 
 or raphaiae ; but with it, durae or dagessaiae. (§ 29.) 
 
 3. Four are called quiescents ; viz. j^j, M, 1, **, (also 
 technically called '^In^ i^^he-vT,) because, having a feeble 
 sound, they sometimes coalesce with the vowel that pre- 
 cedes them, or lose their sound in that of the vowel. (§ 23.) 
 
 4. To these may be added a division of four liquids, 
 
 viz. 7, 'D, 3, 1 (as m Greek,) such division being useful in a 
 
 grammatical treatise. 
 
 N. B. Of the classes of letters enumerated in the present sec- 
 tion, it is important for the student to impress upon his memory only 
 the gutturals^ the aspirates, and the quiescents. 
 
 *§ 20. Voivels ; preliminary observations. 
 
 1. In the Greek, Latin, and present European languages, the vow- 
 els are written in a line with the consonants. To each of these vow- 
 els, however, belong several sounds, although there are no distinct 
 marks to designate them. Intimate acquaintance with any language 
 enables the reader readily to distinguish these sounds, without the 
 danger of erring. In the Shemitish languages, the vowels are gen- 
 erally written above and below the consonants. Some of them have 
 
§20. vowels; preumixary observations. 51 
 
 only three vowel marks, as the Arabic (§^^'7 -8) and the Sahaean ; the 
 Syriac has five (§ 7. 7) ; the Ethiopic seven, which are united with the 
 consonants; and the Hebrew ten, or if yon number the ^hcvas, fourteen. 
 2. No language possesses so many distinct vowel signs as the He- 
 brew now exhibits. The reason of this may be traced to the anxie- 
 ty of the Hebrew grammarians or Rabbins, t(i perpetuate the nice 
 distinctions of the ancient pronunciation, wiiich had been tradition- 
 ally handed down to them. No living language needs so many vow- 
 el signs; and none probably ever had so many. 
 
 3. In Hebrew, as in Arabic, there are only three clas- 
 ses ofvoivels. These have a near relation to each other, 
 and are often commuted for each other. 
 
 NoTK I. Before the present vowel marks were added to the He- 
 brew text, three of the quiescents (n. 2 infra) viz. N, 1, and "^ were 
 used in many cases as the signs of vowels ; for these letters being 
 feeble easily coalesced with the preceding homogeneous vowels, and 
 might theretbre be made to stand for them. In the unpointed man- 
 uscripts of the Hebrew, and in the dialects where no vowels are 
 written, these three letters are frequently inserted in the text, mere- 
 ly for the sake of designating a vowel. The fact that only three 
 letters were thus used, serves to confirm the statement made above, 
 that there are only three classes of vowels. The letters N, t, "♦, 
 in reference to this use, are called vowel-letters, in distinction from 
 vo-jcel-points. Commonly, by the older grammarians, they are cal- 
 led matres lectionis ; which means, that they produce or direct the 
 right reading of the text. (Comp. § 24.) 
 
 Note 2. The four letters i<, rr, 1, and 1 are all called quiesccnis 
 (§ 23) because they frequently quiesce in the preceding vowel. But 
 only three of them, viz. n, 1, and 1 arc vowel-letters or matres lectio- 
 nis. The technical terms Khevi and quiescents are synonymous, and 
 either of them com[>rehends k, j-;, T, ">, i. e. ^iriM. So tlie terms -joa- 
 el-leliers and matres lectionis are synonymous^ and either means j?, 
 1, '^. (§ 19. 3. § 23.) In the following pages sometimes the one 
 designation is used, and sometimes the other, as is most convenient. 
 
 4. A great part of all the .Arabic and Persian and nearly all 
 the Syriac and modern Hebrew books, are written without any 
 vowel-points; yet the habit of reading them makes it easy to read 
 them with rapidity, as every day's experience demonstrates. 
 
52 
 
 §21. VOWELS ; NAMES, CLASSES, ETC. 
 
 § 21. Voioels ^ names, classification, quantity, sound. 
 
 tThe following table exhibits all these in a connected 
 
 view. 
 
 /. Class : A sound, corresponding vowel-letter (n). 
 
 Name. 
 
 Vtlp Qamets 
 nriD Pattahh long 
 Pattahh short 
 
 Form. 
 
 IS52, 12, "053 
 
 m, 53, n53 
 
 53,D53 
 
 Sound. Rep. by 
 
 = a in all a 
 = a m father a 
 — a in man a 
 
 Vij*<^ Sfghol long 
 Sfghol short 
 
 53., "J53, 
 
 — a in Aa/e 
 = a in climate 
 
 e 
 e 
 
 //. C/a5s : £ and I sound, corresponding vowel-letter ('^), 
 
 i-)'!^ Tseri 
 
 Sfohol /o»fi' 
 
 a o 
 
 Sfghol s/ior/ 
 
 p'nTt Hhireq magnum 
 Hhireq parvum 
 
 '^.^ 
 
 ?' 
 
 t)53_ 
 
 ^53. 
 
 ^.' 
 
 ^^. 
 
 
 ^.' 
 
 "^^. 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 ■^53 
 
 
 ^.' 
 
 D53 
 
 = at m gain 
 = ai in ^am 
 = e in 77ien 
 = i in machine 
 
 = J in pi« 
 
 ///, Class : and U sound, corresponding vowel-letter (l). 
 
 D^in Hholem 
 
 153, 53, i::"53 
 
 = in go 
 
 6 
 
 jTlIin y53p Qamets Hhateph 
 
 53, lJ53 
 
 = in not 
 
 o 
 
 pT^O Shureq 
 
 •^53 
 
 = 00 in moon 
 
 u 
 
 yiSP Qibbuts /o«^ 
 
 tip, 12, "ori 
 
 = 00 in moon 
 
 li 
 
 Qibbuts short 
 
 D53 
 
 = !( iny?/// 
 
 11 
 
§21. vo^^^:LS ; classification, etc. 
 
 tl. In the second column, which oxhihit'' the forms ot' the vow- 
 els, the letters ^, 13, N, T^. i, ^ nre emplo>'efl merely for the sake of 
 showino^ the learner how the vowels are placed in respect to the vo- 
 cal consonants and quiescents ; whether above, below, or in them. 
 The vowel marks here exliibited are also used with all the other 
 letters of the alphabet, in a manner corresponding to their position 
 here. 
 
 t2. In learning the sounds of the vowels, the student 
 must divest himself, at the outset, of the habit of giving 
 English sounds to the representatives of the Hebrew vow- 
 els. 
 
 3. Usual mode of representing the classification and quantity of the 
 Tovtels. The common division of the vowels, in most Hebrew gram- 
 mars, is into long and short. According to them, Qamets, Tseri, 
 Hhireq magnum, Hholem, and Shureq are long ; Pattahh, Seghol, 
 Hhireq parvum, Qamets Hhateph, and Qibbuts are short. This 
 division is very incorrect in itself, (inasmuch as some of the short 
 vowels are often long.) and embarrasses the student exceedingly ia 
 learning the fundamental principles of the vowel-changes. The 
 facts, that the commutations of the vowels are confined to those of 
 the same classes ; that in analogy with three classes there are three 
 composite Shevas corresponding to them ; that there are three vowel 
 letters (§ 20.3. n. 1); and especially that the Arabic even at the present 
 time contains but three vowels, seem to establish the propriety of 
 the division here made, beyond reasonable controversy. The older 
 Jewish grammarians made a triplex division ; it is the more modern 
 ones (and with them Christian grammarians) who have divided the 
 vowels into long and short. Gesenius has revived the old division, 
 has supported it b}' such evidence of its propriety, and has met with 
 such general approbation in respect to it, that it will, in all prob- 
 ability, be universally adopted. 
 
 Theory of the long and short vowels. 
 
 The explanation of certain terms applied to the vowels is in the 
 first place requisite, in order to facilitate the right understanding^ 
 of this subject. 
 
 8 
 
54 § 51. VOWELS ; CLASS I, QUANTITY, ETC. 
 
 Pure and impure vozvets. 
 
 t4. Vowels are eitlier pure or impure. A pure vow- 
 el is one with which no consonant-sound is intermixed, or 
 with which no consonant-sound coalesces. An impure vow- 
 el is one wi(h which a consonant-sound is intermixed, or 
 with which a consonant-sound coalesces. 
 
 E. g-. in z the Qamets is pwj-e, being succeeded by no consonant 
 which affects it by adding- to its length or by coalescing with it. 
 But in N2, the sound of the N coalesces with that of the Qamets and 
 lengthens it (§ 23), so that the Qamets is here impure. So in '^"12 
 ha-rekh, (which is so written instead of ^^2 bar-rekh., the analogous 
 form with Resh doubled § 4G. 1,) the Qamets is impure., because 
 the letter omitted goes into the preceding vowel and lengthens it, so 
 as to make a Qamets out of the Paltahh which the analogous form 
 would have ; for in "7^2 only one Resh is contained, but in 'r^'na there 
 are two. (§ 29. 1.) 
 
 t5. All cases of impure voAvels may be traced to the 
 intermixture of consonant-sounds with them ; i. e. to the co- 
 alescence of consonants with them. 
 
 With the principle in view which has just been exhibited in 
 this explanation, the theory of long and short vowels in Hebrew may 
 be easily understood. 
 
 /. Class of vowels. 
 
 t6. Qamets is always long ; but not always equally 
 so. Qamets impure is longer than Qamets pure. 
 
 E. g. t«2 is "longer than 2; n^, than 73 ; and in ']72 (for l^^.'z) 
 the Qamets in 2, having virtually m it a coalescent Resh (§ 23), is 
 longer than the same vowel in 132 where it is pure. But the student 
 in Hebrew cannot always distinguish the quantity of Qamets by its ap- 
 pearance, as the quiescents and coalescing consonants which prolong it 
 are often omitted in writing (§§ 24,46). Thus Dj^ is commonly writtea 
 instead of tDNp ; and so in a multitude of cases where Qamets is impure, 
 it is written in the same manner as if it were pure. So also in regard 
 to the mode of writing when other consonants besides the quiescents 
 
§ 21. vowels; class i. quantity, etc. 55 
 
 coalesce with it, and are omitted in writing, t . g. in 'l^nz lhe(iauiets 
 appears to be pure, but is really impure, because it is protracted by 
 a coalescent Resh, as has been sulliciently exemplified above. 
 But in "j-^s 6d-rd/c/j, where the (-iamets has the same appear- 
 ance, it is pure, because it is afTected by no succeeding consonant 
 coalescing with it. Some knowledge of Hebrew forms is there- 
 fore necessary, before the student can, in many cases, apply the 
 theory of quantity to the vowels with any good degree of certain- 
 ty. This observation will apply to most of the other vowels, as well 
 as to the one in question. 
 
 t7. Pattalih Is long only and always when It Is Impure. 
 
 E. g. in nX"!!;? liq-rdth, in Tin ma &.C. it is protracted, because the 
 quiescent which Ibllows coalesces with it (§ 2o). So in bns bci-hcl 
 (so ivritton instead of the analogous form bri? bdk-hel) Pattahh is pro- 
 longed by the coalescent n, which is omitted in the writing (§ 45). 
 What is the relative quantity of Pattahh impure and (^amets pure or 
 impure, we possess no adequate means of ascertaining. 
 
 The student will perceive, that the same difficulties attend the 
 business of ascertaining the quantity of Pattahh, as of Qaraets. E. 
 g. in priz and m nns, the Pattahh in the first syllable of each ap- 
 pears to be of the same length : but in the tirst case it is impure, and 
 therefore long ; in the second it is pure, and therefore short. This 
 difficulty, as in the case above, can be overcome only by a knowl- 
 edge of what belongs to the different Hebrew forms. 
 
 t8. Pattahh Is short in all cases where it is pure, 
 whether in a simple or mixed syllable.* 
 
 E. g. in ~ins pd-/(/id(M, it is short in both syllables; for in the 
 first it is pure, having no consonant-sound mixed with it to protract 
 it ; in the second, the sound of the consonant T which follows is heard 
 after the Pattahh, and does not at all coalesce with it. 
 
 In all mixed syllables destitute of quiescent letters, Pattahh is 
 of course short, and the student can in general easily distinguish it. 
 In simple syllables it may be long or short, accordingly as it is pure 
 or impure. But to judge of this, a knowledge of Hebrew torms 
 is of course necessary. In respect to the mode of writing merely, 
 
 * A simple syU.Me is one vvliicli ends with a vowel or a quiescent ; a mixed 
 syllable is one which ends with a yocal or moveable consonant (i 23. 4. note*). 
 
56 § 21. vowels; class n. quantity, etc. 
 
 (not of real quantity,) Pattahh in simple syllables may be regard- 
 ed as a doubtful vowel ; as are u, t, v in Greek. 
 
 t9. Sfghol is long only and always when it is impure. 
 E. g. before quiescent i<, as in rj2^{i-^n tvwtse-nd ; or before 
 Jl, as ri!:ii go-le ; or b .fore "^i as N'^.n ^e. bo when a coalescent con- 
 sonant is omitted ; as in D'^-)— ?1 lie-hd-rim, the b in the article b^t be- 
 ing omitted (§ 35. I. 1. 2), the Seghol, which in this case is put for 
 Q,amets (§ 60. 1), is therelore protracted (§ 4G), i. e. is long. 
 
 tlO. Sfgliol is short when pure, or when in a mixed 
 syllable. 
 
 Seghol in a simple syllable, like Pattahh, may be either pure or 
 impure, and therefore short or long. Simple syllables, consequent- 
 ly, in which Seghol is employed, are of doubtful quantity in respect 
 to their appearance, but not doubtful in reality. A proper knowl- 
 edge of Hebrew forms enables the student easily to decide, whether 
 they are long or short. E. g. in ^'''It^ln Seghol is in a simple syllable, 
 but is impure and long, as is shewn above. But in ']b'?.i ^^^ syllable 13 
 is short, because Seghol is pure. As a proof of this, it is enough to 
 suggest, that a pause-accent falling on 73 lengthens it into 73 ; e. g. 
 ^V?.i ^^ pause i^V.'^' So before Hhateph Seghol (■:), Seghol is 
 short; e. g. ^cn: ne-hephdkh^ written for '^:rij or ^^^j:. As to 
 Seghol in all mixed syllables, there can be no doubt that it is short. 
 
 //. Class of vowels. 
 
 til. Tseri is always long; but, like Qamets, Tseri 
 impure is longer than Tseri pure, and for the same reason. 
 
 E. g. in SUi". ye-shebh (so written instead of au:"'^) ^^^ .1 '^ impure 
 because the Yodh which follows quiesces in it, i. e. coalesces with it 
 (§ 23. 2). Whether this quiescent Yodh be written down or omitted, 
 makes no difference in the quantity of the Tseri (§ 24). But in 
 the other syllable 2'^, the Tseri is pure and less protracted, be- 
 cause the following consonant-sound does not coalesce with it, but is 
 heard after the vowel-sound. So in ^72 be-rekh^ (thus written in- 
 stead of the analogous form "^-^z § 4o,) the 2 is long and impure, be- 
 cause a coalescent Resh is contained in the vowel ; but in '^7, Tseri 
 is long and pure, because no consonant sound is contained in it. 
 
§21. vowels; class II. QUANTITY, ETC. 57 
 
 As Tseri pure and Tseri impure assume, in writing, the same 
 form in numberless instances, (the quiescent which follows Tseri 
 im|»ure being often omitted, and no signs of other coalescent letters 
 being written,) it npeds, as in the cases above, a knowledge of He- 
 brew forms to distinguish between the two kinds of this vowel. 
 
 tl2. Sfghol impure is /o«g. Scghol pure is short, 
 whether in a simple or mixed syllable. 
 
 E. g. in "^^S^ kdp-pe-klia, also written l^ES, Seghol is impure and 
 long; but in "I'-n /(/(£• /«Z/i, 'T:n|] yi-h'^phdkh^ it is short. The diffi- 
 culty of distinguishing the quantity, when Seghol stands in a simple 
 syllable, is the same as mentioned in treating above of Scghol as be- 
 longing to the first class of vowels. 
 
 tl3. Hhireq magnum is always impure and long, 
 whether in a simple or mixed syllable. 
 
 E. g. in D'^p^'^^ tsdd-di-qim, (which may be written D^p^::^, Dp''l2, 
 or Cp"2t § 21,) it is long and impure. So in -1^2 hl-Ver^ put for the 
 analogous form 'l-yz bW-'Jer, it is long and impure, because it con- 
 tains the coalescent v. 
 
 tl4. Hhireq parvum is always pure and s/ior/, wheth- 
 er in a simple or mixed syllable. 
 
 For the most part, there is no difficulty in determining when 
 Hhireq is parvum. But as the quiescents are not unfrequently omit- 
 ted in writing, the appearance of Hhireq is sometimes doubtful in 
 respect to quantity. E. g. in D"^^^l del dl-rlm (for D"'"1/~n) Hhireq 
 in the syllable Q"), so far as appearance is concerned, might be judged 
 to be parvum^ while in fact it is impure and long; and so in many, 
 other cases. To distinguish the true quantity and nature of Hhireq, 
 when its appearance is thus doubtful, requires a knowledge of He- 
 brew forms. 
 
 There is one case where Hhireq appears to be pure, and which 
 I do not find particularly noticed by any of the grammarians. It is 
 in forms of the apocopated future of verbs rt^(123. c/). E. g. 'bpi^yi- 
 ghel, fornlri'; y'lgh-le ; ^i'T vdy-yi-ghel, for ri!:i'^T vdy-ijlgh-le ; where I 
 take the Hhireq to be short and pure. I inter that it is short, be- 
 cause, when protracted, it is exchanged for Tseri, as N'1*.T vdy-yi-rd. 
 
58 § 21. VOWELS ; class hi. quantity, etc. 
 
 ^;;n]j vdt-te-ghtl Sac. It is pure, because no consonant coalesces with 
 it. Its analogy with Pattahh in a similar situation, would seem to 
 establish the position that it is short ; for Pattahh is clearly so. E. g. 
 bn^l vdy-yd-hhdl for nbri'^li ''^ pause bri'T vdy-yd-hhdl ; i. e. the 
 Pattahh in pause is lengthened into Qamets, and therefore must be 
 pure and short. 
 
 Note, In writing, short Hhireq regularly admits no quiescent af- 
 ter it. Nevertheless, in the later Hebrew of the Old Testament, a 
 Yodh is sometimes found in syllables that are short. E. g. 1 Chron. 
 12: 1, 20, :ibp'':i ts'iq-ldgh, which in 1 Sam. 30: 1 is written sbj^^i- The 
 method of writing short Hhireq with a Yodh after it, prevails in 
 Chaldee and Rabbinic. The Yodh in such cases is a mere fulcrum, 
 and not a real quiescent. (§ 24. 4.) 
 
 ///. Class ofvoTjcels. 
 
 tl5. Hholem is always long ; but, like Qamets and 
 Tserl, Hholem impure is longer than Hholem pure, and 
 for the same reason. 
 
 E. g. in y^^p qol^ nibp qd-loth &c. it is long and impure. In bb 
 &d/, VVip/l yiq-tol &.c.it is long and pure, as no consonant-sound coa- 
 lesces with it. 
 
 The difficulty of distinguishing between Hholem pure and im- 
 pure, is the same as in the case of the preceding vowels. In nibj? 
 and 'w";j?, the syllable p appears to be the same ; but in the for- 
 mer it is impure, as it stands for ip ; while in the latter it is pure, be- 
 cause no consonant coalesces with it. Of course, an acquaintance 
 with Hebrew forms is necessary, in order to distinguish between the 
 cases. 
 
 Note. Hholem pure is sometimes irregularly written over a 
 Vav ; e. g. ^^L:p''. But this is unfrequent, and belongs rather to the 
 later Hebrew. In such cases the Vav is not a real quiescent, (for 
 then it would make the Hholem impure,) but merely an orthograph- 
 ical fulcrum. (§ 24. 4.) 
 
 tl6. Qamets Hhateph is always short, Avhethcr in a 
 
 simple or mixed syllable. 
 
 E. g. i^lriX o-hlo, Sl'i vdy-yd-robh. 
 
§21. vowels; class III. qi'axtity, f.tc. 59 
 
 tl7. Sliureq Is always imjxire and hn^^ bein^ written 
 only and always m a quiescent (i. c. coalescent) Vav. 
 
 E. g". Cip qinn. 
 
 tl8. Qibbuts when Impure is /(W^r, and in almost every 
 case where it is so, it stands ior Shureq. 
 
 E. g. Wp'^ ya-qii-mu instead ofnTonp^ ; IripiP qd-tidinstead of Vlt2p. 
 The reason why Qibbuts is put for Shureq is, that in cases where 
 the Vav belonging to the Shuroq is omitted, it is necessary to omit 
 the Shureq also, as it can be written only in the Vav. It becomes 
 necessary, therefore, in such cases, to designate the vowel belong- 
 ing to the syllable in some other way ; and this is done by writing it 
 with a Qibbuts. In almost all cases where Qibbuts is in a simple 
 syllable, it stands for Shureq. But where it is in a mixed sj'Ilable 
 (e. g. bipp) a knowledge of the nature of forms is necessary, in order 
 to distinguish it from short Qibbuts. 
 
 Besides the use of long Qibbuts as a substitute for Shureq, it is 
 sometimes used as long and impure, where no Shureq can be plac- 
 ed. E. g. ?TniO pu-rd : In73n3 nu-hhd-md. for !^an3 nuhh-hhd-md. 
 But this is very uncommon. 
 
 tl9. Qibbuts is short, when pure and in a mixed syl- 
 lable. 
 
 But it may stand in a mixed syllable and be impure and long, 
 as has just been observed. It is its heiug pure, which determines 
 its shortness. 
 
 Note. As Qibbuts long is sometimes written for Shureq, as is said 
 above, so Shureq, in a few instances of the later Hebrew, is writ- 
 ten for Qibbuts short. E. g. *p/in hhuq-qe instead of "'pn ; "T^i'^ 
 md-yuz-zi instead of ^ty^. This method of writing short il is borrow- 
 ed from the Aramaean orthography. The ^ in these cases cannot 
 be considered in the light of a common ^, which makes a sylla- 
 ble long and impure ; but the 1 is a mere fulcrum (24. 4), or n is 
 substituted for Qibbuts short. 
 
 t20. General remarks on the comparative length of the 
 vowels. TheE class of vowels is longer comparatively than 
 the I class ; the O class longer than the U class. Hence 
 
60 § 21. vowels; quantity, sounds, etc. 
 
 the shortening of the E class into the I class ; and of the O 
 class into the U class ; and vice versa, the lengthening of 
 the shorter into the longer. A due attention to this gen- 
 eral principle, will serve to explain many appearances in 
 the mutations of the vowels. (Vide infra 22.) 
 
 t21. General Summary. 
 
 Qamets, Tseri, and Hholem are always long; but lon- 
 ger when impure than when pure. 
 
 Hhireq magnum and Sliureq are always impure and 
 long. 
 
 Pattahh, Seghol, and Qibbuts may stand in a simple 
 or mixed syllable, and may be impure and long, or pure 
 and short. 
 
 Hhireq parvum and Qamets Hhateph may stand in a 
 simple or mixed syllable, but they are always pure and 
 short. 
 
 Pattahh and Seghol in simple syllables are of doubtful 
 appearance in respect to quantity. 
 
 Qibbuts in a simple syllable is long, but in a mixed 
 syllable is doubtful. 
 
 t22. The pure vowels of every kind are mutable. 
 The long pure vowels may be shortened, and the short pure 
 vowels may be lengthened, i. e. they may be (and often are) 
 commuted for each other, in consequence of the inflections 
 and other changes of words. (§§ 51, 52 kc.) But the 
 commutation of short and long vowels for each other is con- 
 fined, nearly without exception, to the classes to ivhich they re- 
 spectively belong. While this fact justifies the above classi- 
 fication, it also shews the importance of it to the student. 
 
 t23. Sounds of the vowels. The names of the vowels 
 arc probably significant. (See app. C.) It is impossible, 
 however, to conclude with certainty that we have attain- 
 
§■22. vowels; orthography. 61 
 
 ed the right pronunciation of them, from investigating 
 the significancy of these names, or in any otlier manner. 
 The pronunciation of any one of the ancient Greek and 
 Latin translators, as exhibited by the proper names of Scrip- 
 ture, is so much at variance with itself and with otliers, 
 as to elude all ellort to educe from it a uniform system. 
 The traditionary pronunciation of the Jewish literati, the 
 general analogy of the European and oriental languages, 
 and the vowels of the Arabic a living cognate language, 
 are the principal guides in the assignment of the sounds in 
 the table. 
 
 2 I. The agreement is pretty general among Hebrew scholars, 
 in regard to the sound of all the vowels, excepting Qamets. The Ger- 
 mans and some others sound this as a in father. But the pronunciation 
 of the Jews in most of Europe, and (if I am rightly informed) in Pal- 
 estine, the general voice of the Rabbins, and the testimony of the 
 Masorites, are in favour of giving to it the sound of a in all. The 
 figure ( T ) stands also for short o : does not this indicate a supposed 
 approximation in the Qofne<5-?ound to the sound of o '? This approx- 
 imation is manifest, when we sound Qamets as o in all. 
 
 *§ 22. Vowels ; orthography/, 
 
 1. By the table in § 21, it may be seen that the vow- 
 els are all written under the line, except Hholem (j_ i) 
 and Shureq ("^). 
 
 But Qamels is written in the bosom of a Kaph final, as 'rj (comp. 
 §26. 2. o); which is merely a matter of convenience and calligraphy, 
 
 2. In very many cases, the quiescents, which by coalescing with 
 the vowels make them impure (§21.1), are omitted ; although in other 
 cases of the s;ime kind they are inserted. This was occasioned by 
 the unsettled state of orthography among the Hebrews. In other 
 cases, as was shewn in the last section, T and ^ are inserted in a 
 few instances after pure or short vowels, where they do not proper- 
 ly belong. This resulted from the inHuence of orthography in the 
 
62 § 23. VOWELS ; coalescence, etc. 
 
 kindred dialects, and from its unsettled state among the Hebrews. 
 (§ 24.) 
 
 3. The manner of writing Hholem over the letter TD is in some 
 cases peculiar. (1) The point over '6 serves as the diacritical 
 point of the letter, and as the vowel Hholem for the preceding let- 
 ter, if such letter have no other vowel point ; as n^^ moshe. (2) 
 The point over to serves as a diacritical point, and for a Hholem to 
 this same letter, if it have no other vowel-point ; as fnpiu su-ne. (3) 
 With two points (x) this letter is read sho when it has no other vow- 
 el, the left hand point being a Hholem for the to; as ~|/D'i3 sho-mcr. 
 When the preceding letter has no other vowel, h is read us ; as 
 tos"^^ y'lr-pos^ where the right point of the 'to serves as a Hholeni 
 for the preceding letter c, which is destitute of any other vowel. 
 
 The examples are subjoined in one view, for the convenience 
 of the student. 
 
 Tt'^'a mo-she ^^?.'^ shd-mir 
 
 i-!:to so-ne toS'^"' ylr-pos. 
 
 4. If Vav have a Hholem over it, and also a vowel of its own, 
 the Hholem belongs to the preceding letter, and Vav retains its con- 
 sonant-sound. E. g. Inilb lo-ve, ~^'n'l yeho-vd. 
 
 *(^ 23. Vowels ; coalescence of the "")!nN or quiescent letters^ and also of 
 the gutturals 4'C. (Comp. §§ 46, 47.) 
 
 /. Qtiiesceiits. 
 
 1. These letters, having a feeble sound, often lose 
 themselves or coalesce in the preceding vowel. (§ 19. 3.) 
 
 E. g, in N3 fed, we say Aleph is quiescent in Qamets, or coales- 
 ces with it, because the sound of it cannot be heard as distinct from 
 the vowel (t ) Qamets. 
 
 2. The quiescents commonly (not always) coalesce 
 vrith the preceding homogeneous vowel. (Vide infra 4. &.) 
 
 The vowels are said to be homogeneous^ when they are adapted to 
 produce this coalescence ; when they are not adapted to produce 
 it, they are said to be heterogeneous. 
 
 In general, J<, % and \ when preceded by any of the 
 
§ 23. VOWELS ; COALESCENCE, ETC. 
 
 G3 
 
 class of vowels of which they arc respectively the corres- 
 ponding vowel-letter (§21.1), quiesce as in the table below. 
 But .ileph (&{) is so feeble a sound, that it quicsccs in 
 all the other vowels, except Shureq and Qamets Hhatepli. 
 
 He (n) never quiesces except at the end of a word ; 
 and then in vowels of diilerent classes. 
 
 Aleph (n) 
 
 Yodh (^) 
 
 Vav (l) 
 
 He(n) 
 
 in Qamcts 
 
 I T 
 
 ) *{:3 ba. 
 
 Class I 
 
 - Pattahh 
 
 ( - 
 
 ) nwSnp:) liq-ra 
 
 th. 
 
 - Seghol 
 
 
 ) rijN-S^n tim-tse-na. 
 
 - Tseri 
 
 (■] 
 
 ) nbwVb le-mor. Class II 
 
 - Hhireq 
 
 ( — 
 
 ) I'rOiil rl-shon. 
 
 - Hholem 
 
 (—] 
 
 ) "IwVS bor. 
 
 Class III 
 
 - Qibbuts 
 
 
 ) in"lS^S pu-ra 
 
 
 in Hhireq 
 
 (— 
 
 ) y-H din. 
 
 Class II. 
 
 - Tseri 
 
 ( .. > 
 
 1 y:i^ ben. 
 
 
 - Seghol 
 
 (•■■] 
 
 1 iX\) ge. 
 
 
 in Hholem 
 
 (-^' 
 
 b'lp qol. 
 
 Class III. 
 
 - Shureq 
 
 (1) 
 
 nip qum. 
 
 
 in Qamets 
 
 V *'* 
 
 ThjS ga-la. 
 
 Class I. 
 
 - Pattahh 
 
 ( - ^ 
 
 Tl)2 ma. 
 
 
 - Seghol 
 
 
 t]hp> go-le. 
 
 
 - Tseri 
 
 
 Tkpi gele. 
 
 Class II. 
 
 - Hholem 
 
 (— ) 
 
 il^5 ga-lo. 
 
 Class III, 
 
 In English we have a multitude of cases similar to these. E. g". 
 /oa>, show &c. with w quiescent ; say, day &.c. with y quiescent. Al- 
 most every letter in our alphabet is, in some situations, quiescent be- 
 fore or after some other letter. 
 
64 § 23. VOWELS ; coalescenck, etc. 
 
 Note. In regard to the quiescence of T in Hholem and Shureq, the 
 beginner in Hebrew may be at a loss to see how this can take place, 
 inasmuch as the Shureq (and perhaps the Hholem) appears to be put 
 after the "j, rather than before it. But this is merely appearance, 
 iand belongs simply to the convenience of writing, r\p is the same as 
 if it were written Tp ; and ip ^:=: I'p. The whole difficulty is mere- 
 ly orthographic. 
 
 3. The sound of any one of the Ehevi when quiescent 
 is not lost ; but, coalescing with the preceding vowel, it 
 lengthens that vowel ; i. e. the vowel in which the Ehevi 
 quiesce, becomes of course longer. Long vowels by this co- 
 alescence become more protracted, and short ones become 
 long. (§ 21. 4, 6.) 
 
 4. One simple rule enables the learner to distinguish 
 all the cases, in which the Ehevi quiesce ; viz. When- 
 ever a vowel or a Sheva belongs to them, they are moveable ;* 
 otherwise, they coalesce and are quiescent. 
 
 Of course, they are always moveable or retain their 
 consonant power, 
 
 (a) When they begin a syllable : Avhether they have a 
 vowel belonging to them, as H'Pi^ t fr^a-mar, DH hem, Tli*^ 
 ya-ladh, iVi ve-ledh ; or a Sheva, as 1527'] yelam-medh, 
 ^)2i^ ii^mar. 
 
 (6) When they end a syllable, if they have a Sheva un- 
 der them : as "IDj^'^ yaJ^-sor, 'Tj&ri] neh-pakh, "^nibt!) sha- 
 lav-tl, IWI vay-yo-mer the same as "l53>{'^"]1. (§29. I.) 
 
 In the case b then, although the vowel preceding may be homogene- 
 ous, the vowel-letters do not quiesce. In fact, the Sheva in such cases is 
 put under them, to show that they are exempted from the general 
 rule of quiescence. 
 
 * A moveable letter is one which is pronounced or sounded by itself. The 
 term moveable is used as the opposite of quiescent. 
 
 t We do not sound ./lleph (i 18. 2), but the Hebrews did in such cases. 
 
4 23. VOWELS ; COALESCENCE, ETC. 65 
 
 5. The qulescents, preceded by heterogeneous vowels^ 
 remain moveable consonants : as IH tav, IJ? qav, Tip'JD sha- 
 lev, IT ziv, ^n hhaj, •'HiN* w^^dho-naj, ^15 goy, '^V^? ga-luy 
 or '^'P^ gii-lijy« 
 
 6. Sometimes the Eheui do not contribute at all to 
 modify the sound of a word ; i. e. they are neither em- 
 ployed as consonants, nor used as quiescents to lengthen the 
 preceding vowel (supra 3), but arc employed simply for 
 the sake of orthography. They are then said to be in 
 otio. This happens in the follo\ving cases. 
 
 (a) When a Sheva precedes them, as NUn hhU. ^nj* i/^at. 
 
 (6) Or a quiescent letter, n^'^^T he-bhe-tha. 
 
 (c) Or Daghesh forte (§ 29) follows, JlT-na mdz-ze = riT^O. 
 
 {d) Yodh is in otio, when preceded by (T)and followed by the 
 suffix pronoun T his at the end of a word ; as V^lT debhd-rdv, his 
 ■words. 
 
 Id Eng'lish, compare u in honour, a in hear kc. 
 
 II. Coalescence of the gutturals, Resh 4'C. with the vowels. 
 
 7. As the gutturals and Resh scarcely ever admit of 
 reduplication (§ 45), on account of the harshness of sound 
 which this would produce ; in those cases, where by the 
 general analogy of the language the gutturals ought to 
 be written double, i. e. to have a Daghesh in them (§ 45), 
 this Daghesh, i. e. the first of the two guttural letters 
 (§ 29. I.) is omitted, and the letter which is thus omitted in 
 writing coalesces with the preceding vowel and lengthens 
 it, as a compensation for its omission. (§ 46.) 
 
 E. g. y">>Nn hd-Hd-rets instead of yiNn hdi^-ad-rets ; 'IttN;;'. ye- 
 
 md-mer instead of "l^-N^ rp^-md-mer ; bina bci-hU with Pattahh long 
 
 . and impure (§21.7) instead of ina bdh-hel ; i'lna bl-hel with Hhireq 
 
 long and impure (§21. 13) instead of ):7\^ hih-hel ; ^"^XV^ iid-hhim 
 
66 § 23. VOWELS ; coalescence, etc. 
 
 with Pattahh long and impure instead of l3"»nN Hdhh-hhim ; DT33 m- 
 hhdm with Hhireq long and impure instead of DnD mhh-hhdm ; "nya 
 hdVer instead of l-^a bd'S-'Ser ; D^'O me-'Siin instead of DSJ^ miV-yun ; 
 ^na be-rekh instead of ^"nz bir-rekh ; ^na bd-rekh instead of ^na bdr- 
 rekh kc. (Comp. §§ 45, 46.) So also in respect to any other let- 
 ters, when they ought by analogy to be doubled, but the Daghesh is 
 omitted. E. g. ''Jn^T vd-yehi with Pattahh long and impure instead 
 of "'^T^T vdy-yihl with Yodh doubled and Pattahh short. But such 
 cases are not frequent, except with the gutturals, Resh, and Yodh 
 with Sheva. 
 
 8. The effect produced on the vowels which precede 
 the coalescent gutturals, Resh, or other letters, when by 
 analogy these letters would be doubled, is the same as that 
 produced on them by the quiescents, i. e. they are length- 
 ened. In other words, there is a real addition to the pre- 
 ceding vowel-sound. This vowel-sound, moreover, is ren- 
 dered impure and immutable by the coalescence of the 
 gutturals &c. with it, in the same manner as it is by the 
 union of one of the quiescents. 
 
 These facts are amply sufficient to justify the ranking of the qui- 
 escents and the coalescent gutturals, Resh, or other letters where 
 the doubling is omitted, under the same category. In this vvay, the 
 student comes at the very outset, to a fundamental knowledge of all 
 the causes which make any vowels in the Hebrew language impure 
 and immutable. The whole lies within a very narrow compass, viz. 
 that the homogeneous quiescents remit their sound to the preceding vowel, 
 coalesce with it., lengthen it., and by their rnixture with it render it impure 
 and immutable. So also the gutturals., Resh., and occasionally some other 
 letters when they should by analogy be doubled., remit the sound of the jirst 
 letter to the preceding vowel., and affect it in a similar manner. 
 
 It should be well noted by the student, that the gutturals, Resh 
 &c. are the subjects of such a coalescence, and produce such an ef- 
 fect then, and only then, when by analogy they would be doubled ; 
 and that it is the first of the two gutturals &,c. in such cases, which 
 coalesces with the preceding vowel ; i. e. it is that letter which 
 would be designated by the Daghesh, if the Daghesh were inserted. 
 
4 24. vo^\^ELs; orthography, etc. G7 
 
 *§ 24. Voxocls ; orthographij in connexio7i zoUh vmocl-lcllers and 
 
 fulcra. 
 
 1. As the vowel-letters, when quiescent, do not es- 
 sentially change the sound of words or syllables, but mere- 
 ly prolong the preceding vowel (§ 23. 3), a great variety 
 of orthography in respect to them has arisen in the He- 
 brew language. They are sometimes inserted^ and some- 
 times omitted, in cases where they regularly belong to a 
 word ; and in some other cases, they are inserted as ful- 
 cra (infra 4) where they do not belong. (Vide § 2 J. 14 
 note, 15 note, 19 note.) 
 
 2. When they are inserted as quiescents, the vowel 
 in which they quiesce is said to he fully written ; as TiDip 
 qo-tel, where the Hholem is fully written. 
 
 When they really belong to a word, but are omitted, 
 the vowel is said to be defectively written ; as 7 tip qo-tel. 
 
 3. Words to which the Ehevi essentially belong, are 
 often written both fully and dfectively. 
 
 Fully. Defectively. 
 
 "^nN^Ta ''nV.'? md-lc-thi. 
 
 '^"»3 *n3 nir. 
 
 Vtp Vp qol. 
 
 0^723 C733 kd-mus. 
 
 The pronunciation remains the same in both cases. 
 
 ' 4. Use of fulcra. Words to which the vowel-letters do 
 not essentially belong, are sometimes written with them. 
 
 "i'lftbl more properly "iTab"^ yil-mddh. 
 I'^nb inb so-bkcbh. 
 
 ^J>nn yM hhuq-qe. 
 
 In all these cases, the Vav or Yodh is a mere fulcrum or ortho- 
 graphic support of the vowel, and contributes nothing either to its 
 length, or to determine its mutability. (Comp. § 21. 14 note, 15 
 note, 19 note.) But to distinguish such cases from those where 
 
68 § 25. VOWELS ; qamets hhateph. 
 
 Vav and Yodh are real quiescents, a knowledge of Hebrew forms and 
 the nature of the vowels is necessary. 
 
 5. Vav and Yodh occasion almost all the irregularities spoken of 
 in this section. Aleph is seldom omitted where it is regularly re- 
 quired; and still more seldom inserted where it does not belong. 
 In general, He is exempted from the irregularity in question. 
 
 6. The quiescents are less frequently inserted in the earlier He- 
 brew Scriptures, and more so in the later ones. In Samuel we have 
 "iT^j Dd-vidh^ in Chron. VT1. In all parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, 
 however, there reigns a variety in regard to the insertion of the 
 matres lectionis^ which seems to have resulted from the unsettled 
 state of the Hebrew orthography. Thus we have TilTO'l^n. "niC^pn, 
 ''nilOp!!, intop^^I all pronounced haqi-mo-thi, and ditfering only ortho- 
 graphically in respect to the insertion or omission of 1 and ^ quies- 
 cent. 
 
 *§ 25. Vozvels ; Qamets Hhateph, 
 
 The figure (x ) is employed to designate short o(§ 21), 
 as well as the long vowel Qamets = a. It is impor- 
 tant that the student of Hebrew should be directed how 
 to distinguish when it is to be read as 6 or a. 
 
 1. The figure Qamets ( ^ ) is short o, in a mixed sylla- 
 ble unaccented. This happens in the following cases. 
 
 («) When a simple Sheva follows Qamets, without 
 a Metheg between them; as riA^Sn hhokh-ma. 
 
 Note 1. But with a Metheg (§ 31) it is read thus, ri723n hhd- 
 khema. There are a (evf cases, however, where the Methc g after 
 Qamets (t ) does not make this vowel long ; viz. when it is in the an- 
 tepenult syllable of a word ; as ni3T!3T'l dor-bho-noth^ not dd-rehho-noih. 
 The reason of this is, that Metheg in such cases is not placed after 
 Qamets as a sign of its being a long vowel, but with another design 
 and by another rule. (§ 31. 3. a.) 
 
 Note 2. In a very few instances, Metheg stands after Qamets 
 in the penult syllable without making it long; as '{2'^p qor-ban^ not 
 qd-rsbhdn ; n*l?3".l3 shom-rd, not shd-merd. But here manuscripts and 
 editions differ ; and it is plainly a violation of the common principle. 
 
§ 25. VOWELS ; QAMETS HIIATEl'ir. CO 
 
 To (listina^uish the excepted cases in notes 1 and 2, a knowledge 
 of Hebrew forms is necessary. 
 
 IVoTF, 3. The rule is, that tlie syllable in which the Qamets is 
 followed by Sheva must be yuaccentcd,in order to make short o; for 
 if it be accented^ the long sound of (^ ) remains. Thus flPi^h mdv- 
 thd^ MTjj sAdv, Ttb'^'T Idij-ld ; not mov-tlid, s/iou, loy-ld. 
 
 (b) When Qaniots Is followed by Daghcsh forte 
 (§20.1) it is short o; as '^jZtl hhon-iid-nl, tZTS hot-tiiu. 
 
 This is the same as the case u; for the words written out would 
 stand thus, ":p.:n, Crnz. 
 
 NoTK 1. A Met hog' here on the antepenult does not necessarily 
 make Qamets long; e, g. DD^na bbt-te-khein. (See above a, note 1.) 
 
 NoTF. 2. Qamets remains long in a tone-syllable j as r;""' ydm- 
 jnu, rralr Idm-md. (See above a, note 3.) 
 
 (r;) Qamets in a final mixed syllable unaccented is 
 short ; as Dp'l vay-ya-qom. 
 
 The same as case a ; for written out fully it stands thus, DP'l. 
 
 All the cases, therefore, resolve themselves into the 
 simple rule before given; and they all respect Qamets in 
 a mixed syllable. 
 
 2. The f/ifi/re Qamets ( , ) is sometimes short a in a 
 simple siflkihlc. This happens in the following cases. 
 
 («) When another Qamets Hhateph follows; as 
 r)V_:>;S p6-?ol-kha, ^:2'J|"5 qo-tobh-kha. 
 
 In cases of this nature, the Qamets (t ) is generally to be read 
 as short o ; but the Methcg universally added here seems to 
 indicate that the O sound is somewhat protracted. In a very few ca- 
 ses, a (, ) thus situated is to be read as d ; e. g. "'it:p qd-tm-nl from 
 ■jiisp. Etymology only can determine these cases. 
 
 (//) When Hhateph Qamets (§ 26. 3) follows ; as 
 
 iVr^s p(>""io; nn:: bo-hh^ri. 
 
 T: - ' • 1 ; IT 
 
 The Metheg always appears here after (» ), but in all the cases 
 • binder no. 2, it plainly serves in a different office, from that in whichi 
 it serves when (x ) is followed by Sheva simple, as in no. 1. (Vide 
 supra 1. a. note 1. Vide etiam § 3K 2, i, d.) 
 
 10 
 
70 § 26. SHEVA. 
 
 Note 1. Exceptions to the rule in h are cases where 
 (x ) stands under the article belore nouns ; as n'^jXH ha- 
 
 ^ 1 • r; IT 
 
 i>}"mj-ya, the figure Qamets designating ^. (§61 -.2.) 
 
 It is the same where the article is elided, and the prepositions 
 i, D, b come into its place (§ ^\.. '_. g) ; as ^TDNS bd-ii"niy-yd &,c. 
 
 But prepositions, not coming into the place nor taking 
 the vowel of the article, are read according to the rule ; 
 as "^"hrih l6-hh«h &c. 
 
 • ' : IT 
 
 Note 2. D"'\i;"^"iJ sho-rd-shlm and Qiujip qd-c1hd-sJnm have 6 in the 
 first syllable, because thej are the plurals of Ui~i\L" sho-resh and uiTp 
 qo-dhesh., the o being preserved but shortened in the plural. A few 
 cases of this nature occur in the language, where nothing but a 
 knowledge of etymology can determine. Nor is it of much conse- 
 quence to determine. It were indeed a very desirable thing to the 
 student, to have a distinct sign for short o; but we must learn the 
 language as it is, and not construct another. In daily usage, there 
 could have been no more difficulty for a Hebrew to distinguish when 
 to read d or o, than there is among us to determine when to read 
 the letter o as o or as <<, in the words 7wt, son &c. 
 
 § 26. nr^ Shfvd. 
 
 tl. The Hebrews appear but very rarely to have 
 combined or amalgamated two or more consonants togeth- 
 er, without any intervening vowel-sound, as we often do in 
 English ; e. g. hand, hands, stripe, shrink. This was prac- 
 tised only at the end of a word ; and even here, it was the 
 usual method, where two consonants occurred without 
 an intervening vowel, as "1£0 , to supply a furtive vowel 
 (§ 59. 2) in the pronunciation, as ")SD sepher. 
 
 The usage which so generally inhibited the combina- 
 tion of two consonants after a vowel in the same syllable, 
 did not operate so extensively, nor in exactly the same 
 manner, in respect to the admission of two consonants be- 
 
§ 26. SHEVA. 71 
 
 fore a vowel. Two oflcn apjiear ; hut llicy arc modified 
 in regard to their pronunciation. Tlie Hebrews do not 
 appear ever to have pronounced as we do, bra,.brc, amal- 
 gamating tlie hr into one compound sound ; but between 
 the 6 and the r in such a case, tliej uttered a kind of hall 
 vowel (usuallv a very short a or e), as b^ra, b*^re; much 
 like our c in the words begone^ begin &c. 
 
 This custom of pronunciation gave rise to the sign of 
 Sheva ; and the whole oi)jcct answered by ail the She- 
 vas, both simple and comj)osite, is merely to aid the pro- 
 nunciation of syllables which begin with two consonants. 
 
 More than two moveable letters can never begin any sylla- 
 ble ; more than two can never end one ; nor even this number, 
 except at the end of a word. Syllables like street, sprain &lc. 
 are impossible in Hebrew ; equally so are such as works, 
 thinks &c. 
 
 t2. Instead of limiting Sheva to the simple office of 
 denoting a half-vowel between two consonants which begin 
 a syllable, and writing it only in this case, the authors of 
 the punctation-system consider it as belonging to every let- 
 ter (the quiescents excepted) which has no vowel of its 
 own. Under the final letters of words, however, it is not 
 written, but implied in case these letters be destitute of a 
 vowel ; e. g. Cp qam is the same as Up. 
 
 Orthography omits Sheva under all final letters, except in the 
 following cases. (a) In final "1 ; as Y".'?. 'nc-/e/:/j, where it is mere- 
 ly calligraphic, (i) In a final syllable ending with two moveable 
 letters; as nTab Id-mddht. When one of these final letters is a qui- 
 escent, usage is variable ; as we have both nN'3 and nN2 bath. 
 (c) When Pattahh furtive (§ 27) stands in the room of the penult 
 Sheva ; as rj^f^-p shd-maMvi instead of n^"?2^ shd-tnd'jt. 
 
 NoTF,. It is easy to distinguish such a Pattahh furtive by the or- 
 thography. If it were a real vowel, the Sheva under the final let- 
 ter would be omitted, as in n^^a'^D shd-md-vdth. 
 
72 § 26. SHEVA. 
 
 t3. There are two kiuds of Shevas, viz. simple and 
 composite. 
 
 Representatives. 
 
 Slifva (simple) ( : ) = e in begin. £ 
 
 ^ ^ Hhateph Pattahh ( -: ) = a in Germany. j^. 
 
 |- \ Hhateph Sfgliol ( •.•; ) =-- e in begin. ±_ 
 
 c # _ 
 
 ^ V Hhateph Qaraets ( r; ) = o in ivorij. ^ 
 
 The student will perceive, that the composite Shevas are consti- 
 tuted by the mere juxtaposition of the short vowels at the left hand 
 of the simple Sheva. 
 
 t4. In the quantity of all the Shevas, there is no dii- 
 ference. All of them are excluded from the rank of 
 vowels ; IpS peqodh, 2717 z'^'habh, "'Vn* N^le, "hn hh°]I, 
 
 1.11 --; ..... . ^. 
 
 being all monosyllables in theory. None of them are ever 
 sounded, except between two moveable consonants which begin 
 a syllable. 
 
 t5. The composite Shevas stand, for the most part, 
 only under the gutturals (§ 46. 2) ; and here they occur 
 only when those gutturals begin a syllable. They are 
 merely substitutes for simple Sheva. The only dlilbrence 
 between them and simple Sheva is, that they give a vari- 
 ety of tones to the Sheva-sound, which renders it easier 
 to be pronounced, or more euphonic, when connected with 
 
 those difficult letters. 
 
 When a guttural ends a syllable it takes a simple Sheva, like the 
 other consonants; as ^En? neh-pukh. Two of the composite Shevas 
 are occasionally found under other letters, besides the gutturals ; as 
 iJnT, also SriT ; lnD'^3, also r:3"^2 k.c. So Ci'>riP qodhd-shhn and D"'rii"5 
 qo-dhd-shim. But Hhateph iSeghol never occurs except under gutturals. 
 
 t6. In consequence of Sheva being considered as be- 
 longing to all moveable letters destitute of a vowel (supra 
 2), it often occurs at the eticl of a syllable. But here 
 it must not be sounded. This has given occasion to the 
 
§ 2G. SHEVA. 73 
 
 distinction between Sheva vocal and silent. As both have 
 the same ligure, viz. ( : ), it becomes necessary to give a 
 rule by which tiie student may distinguish tliem. The 
 universal rule is the lullowing. 
 
 .i// Skevas at (he bcgi)ini))g of a syllable are vocal ; 
 all at the end of a syllable, or after the vowel, are silent. 
 
 Sheva vocal. 
 
 (a) All composite Shevas (supra 5). 
 
 (6) Simple Sheva after a simple syllable ; as ITi^b Id-imdhd. 
 
 (c) after another Sheva ; as ^l^ttr'^ yil-mtdlm. 
 
 {^d) under a letter with Dag-hesh forte ; as ^"iTab lim-medhu. 
 
 (e) at the beginning of a word ; as Sjsb limudh. 
 
 (/') under a letter repeated; as ^~\rz hdl-lelu not hal-la. 
 
 (§ 45. 5.) 
 
 Sheva silent. 
 
 (a) After a short vowel in a mixed syllable ; as Sab'^ yll-modh. 
 
 {b) After a long vowel in a mixed tone-sjllable ; as IiZlTsbn tll- 
 mOdh-nd. 
 
 (c) If two Shevas occur at the end of a word, both are silent ; 
 as n^l^b Id-mddhf. 
 
 Much easier would it have been for reader and writer, if the 
 punctators had written Sheva only when it is vocal. But we must 
 study the language as it is, rather than attempt to devise a better 
 orthography. 
 
 t7. Hhalcph Qa7ncts ( t.- ) the composite Sheva is eas- 
 ily distinguished I'rom Qamets Hhateph the vowel (§ 2.5). 
 Tlie former (t.) is never a proper vowel (supra 4), and 
 is always written under one letter, with Sheva at the right 
 hand of the figure Qamets, as n ; Qamets Hhateph, on 
 the contraiy, is always a proper vowel (§ 21), and, when 
 in a mixed syllable, it has a Sheva on the left of the fio-- 
 ure Qamets and under the following letter^ as n^DH 
 hhokh-ma. 
 
 Note 1. Hhateph Pattahh ( ... ) is by far the most frequent of the 
 composite Shevas, because the A tone is more congenial with the 
 
74 § 27. PATTAHH FURTIVE. 
 
 gutturals than the other tones. Hhateph (garnets ( ■»; ) is the most 
 unfrequent of them. 
 
 Note 2, The older Hebrew grammarians vary the sound of sim- 
 ple Sheva. (a) Before the gutturals, they sound it like the vowel 
 belonging to the gutturals. (6) Before a Yodh, it is assimilated to 
 the / sound, (c) In other cases, it sounds as very short Pattahh or 
 Seghol. The LXX, the other ancient Greek translators, and Je- 
 rom, exhibit in the proper Hebrew names which they have endeav- 
 oured to express, many traces of the correctness of these general 
 principles. E. g. riablp ^olof.i(av, dlD ^odof-iu, n'^'iz berith &,c. 
 But these minutiae are not worth attention in practice at the pres- 
 ent day. 
 
 *§ 27. Pattahh furtive, 
 
 1. The words which end with a guttural being diffi- 
 cult to pronounce, euphony and facihty of utterance have 
 introduced into the Hebrew language the custom of pro- 
 nouncing all final syllables, which end in a moveable guttu- 
 ral, with the A sound, as best adapted to this purpose. In 
 accordance with this principle, the proper vowel Pattahh 
 is very generally written in a final syllable with a gut- 
 tural (§ 46. 3), instead of other vowels. But in case 
 other vowels are retained in the final syllable, a furtive 
 Pattahh^ as it is called, is thrown in after them, in order 
 to ease the pronunciation. This is written under the gut- 
 tural but sounded before it, as mi ru^hh ; being in res- 
 pect to quantity merely as a Hhateph Pattahh ( -: ). To 
 pronounce ^"1, lay the stress of the voice on ru, and mere- 
 ly touch the «hh ; as in English, trial, vial kc. In theo- 
 ry, n^") is a monosyllable. 
 
 2. Pattahh furtive is put under Mappiq T\ (§ 30), H, 
 and 3?, at the end of words, when the final vowel is i\ot an 
 A sound. Alcph does not receive Pattahh fiirtive, because 
 at the end of ^vords it is quiescent Thus Hi 35 ga-bho"h, 
 
§§ 28, 29. DAGHESH FORTE AND LENE. 75 
 
 n''U3^ ma-shPhh, •! re";?; but N'2;^ mits-tse without the 
 furtive Pattahh. 
 
 *§ 28. tri Doglush. 
 
 Daghcsh is a point in the bosom of a letter. It is 
 divided into two kinds, viz. Daghcsli furte aixl DagJicsh 
 kne. Daghesh (c35'l) signifies strengthening, hardening. 
 
 § 29. Daghesh forle and Icne, 
 I. Daghesh forte. 
 
 tl. This kind of Daghesh signifies, that the letter In 
 which it is inserted is to be repeated or read as if twice 
 written. E. g. "i^,^ lim-medh = "?.^.^- 
 
 How to distinguish Daghesh forte from Daghesh lene is describ- 
 ed in 19 infra. 
 
 2. Orthography of Daghesh forte. When the same letter is im- 
 mediately repeated, instead of being twice written out fully, it is the 
 usual practice to write it but once, and to insert a Daghesh forte in 
 it as a sign of reduplication. E. g. ^tcj? qlttel instead of ]3t2t:p. 
 
 3. To this usual orthograph}^, however, there are a few arbi- 
 trary or anomalous exceptions. E. g. V;:b2£ tsll-lo instead of 1^22 ; 
 ^■^TJ; shor-rekh instead of ^"n/^ kc. 
 
 4. Besides these anomalous exceptions, in which the orthography 
 might conform to the general rule, there are many cases where the 
 same letter, immediately repeated, 7nust be written out fully in both 
 rnstances. 
 
 (a) Where the first of the two letters has a Sheva vocal, or a 
 vowel belonging to it. Thus, D'^b^y ^o-lelim, not uVs which would 
 read Sol-llm^ and so destroy the true form of the word : nWp qild' 
 Id, not fiTp^ qll-ld, which would entirely change the word. 
 
 (6) A letter which itself ought to have a Daghesh forte and 
 "srhich is doubled in the pronunciation, cannot be designated by a Da- 
 ghesh forte inserted in a succeeding letter of the same kind, but must 
 be written out fully. E. g. ^Vr^r, put for ^bVn hdl-lfld and read in 
 the same manner (§45. 5), cannot be written ^prt hdl-lu, as this would 
 
76 § 29. DAGHESH FORTE. 
 
 change the form of the word. So that here the first ^ cannot be 
 written by inserting a Daghesh forte in the second, i'or the reasons 
 above stated. 
 
 (c) Secondary forms of words, derived by declension from ground- 
 forms, do not admit a Daghesh forte if the grounri-form excluded it. 
 E, g. ground-form nVrp., const, form nb^p^, not nbj5 as it might be 
 written if it were not derived by declension. This custom is useful 
 in rendering the etymology of words obvious. 
 
 Note. Of the other oriental languages, only the Chaldee and 
 Arabic have a written sign for Daghesh forte. 
 
 t5. Division of Daghesh forte. It may be divided into 
 that which is necessary, and tliat which is accidental : or, 
 in other terms, into that which is essential to the forms 
 of words, and that which respects only the occasional mode 
 of pronouncing them and is merely euphonic, 
 
 t6. Daghesh forte essential. This may be divided 
 into two kinds, viz. 
 
 (a) Compensative ; i. e. which stands for a letter 
 omitted in writing, that really belono;s to the form of a 
 word. E. cr. '^3fiD na-than-nu = IDSHD, where the same 
 letter is repeated ; ^^'] yig-gash, put instead of C/Z"^ yin- 
 gash, the Nun being assimilated to the Gimel (§ 41), and 
 represented by Daghesh forte. 
 
 (6) Characteristic ; i. e. where it is intended to de- 
 signate a particular form of a w^ord. E. g. 7tpp qit-tel, the 
 Plel form of the verb Vop^ qa-tal. (§ 78. 1.) " " 
 
 7. A few words exhibit a very anomalous use of Daghesh forte 
 compensative, n^ thou is put for n:N and is read at ; D\~UJ shf4d- 
 yhn {two) is probably put for D'^n;^ shln-td-yhn ; r\'y2 (2 pers. fem. of 
 the verb IT^S) is put for nn'ns &.c. Strictly speaking, the Daghesh 
 is here compensative, as the letter in which it is inserted stands in 
 the place of two letters. From the necessity of the case, however, 
 it is read merely as a Daghesh lene. 
 
 8. Daghesh forte euphonic. Daghesh essential never 
 
§ 29. DAGHE3H FORTE AND LEXK. 77 
 
 appears in tlie beginning of a word ; but Dagbcsh euphon- 
 ic is not unl'requently Ibiind in the first letter of a Avord, 
 when the preceding word ends with a vowel-sound. 
 
 (rt) When worths are connected by a IMaqqeph (§ 32) ; as !-tT~r!73 
 t/idz-cf', read as n"^ and sometimes written so, Ex. 4:2; aTt:~r;'3 
 indt-tvbh. In all such cases, the final quiescent letter is considered 
 and treated in pronunciation as if it were in otio. (§ 23. 6. c.) 
 
 (6) Without a 3Ja(|qeph ; particularly it' the preceding' word be 
 penacuted and furnished with a conjunctive accent, as "^sz ?^ip^i read 
 V'l-scp-pfn ; sometimes also when the preceding' word has an acute 
 accent, as ~\'3ii't T'rp'Q mo-shil-lc-inor. (App. E. 1.) 
 
 The Arabians, in reading-, connect a great number of their words 
 with one another, in a similar way. 
 
 9. Besides the foregoing Dag-hesh euphonic, which occurs only at 
 the begiiming of a word, there is another euphonic Daghesh occasion- 
 ally (though very seldom) used; viz. where a pause-accent falls on 
 the penult syllable of a verb and lengthens it, a Daghesh euphonic 
 is sometimes inserted in the final radical of the verb. E. g. iVlM 
 for nrnn, which without a pause-accent would be ^';'in ; !iin; for 
 !i:n;, out of pause n:n:. (§ GO. 7.) 
 
 10. Daghesh euphonic, in a considerable number of cases, is also 
 inserted in the letter which follows a short vowel, in order to strength- 
 en it. E. g. J"i"i3N iii'k-ke7'e-hd instead of inn^N mkh-re-hd ; ^7.15'^^ 
 y'lq-qirekk instead of ^"^p"^ yiq-rekh. 
 
 Note 1. The student should particularly observe, that the Dag- 
 hesh, in such a case and in all the cases of euphony merely, does not 
 really belong to the word, according to the common laws of the lan- 
 guage. Its insertion is merely accidental, or for the sake of a par- 
 ticular pronunciation of words. But as this insertion not imfrequent- 
 ly takes place, the learner ought to be informed of such a principle 
 in regard to the use of Daghesh ; otherwise he will be greatly em- 
 barrassed in analysing the forms of words which exhibit it. 
 
 NoTF. 2. For the cases in which Daghesh forte essential is omitied, 
 see § 45. 
 
 //. Daghesh lene. . 
 
 til. Daghe?h Icnc is inserted only in the aspirates 
 (technically called TS!:":*! BfxhadJj-Kfphath § 19. 2). and 
 
 ' n 
 
78 § 29. DAGHESH LENE. 
 
 serves merely as a sign that the aspiration is removed. 
 E. g. 3 with Daghesh lene = k^ but '2 = kh &c. 
 
 tl2. When Daghesh forte happens to be insert- 
 ed in the aspirates, it not only doubles the letter (as in 
 other cases), but also performs the office of Daghesh /c??c, 
 in respect to removing the aspiration. E. g. "'Eii^ ai>pi; 
 not aph-phi, nor aph-pl. 
 
 In respect to cases of this nature it may be observed, that Da- 
 ghesh forte is something more than a mere sign of doubhng the let- 
 ter, [f we write the word out fully, it would read "^SSi^ aph-pl^ not 
 dp-pl. The fact is, that in such cases an assimilation of the former 
 to the latter letler takes place (§41), and Daghesh forte marks both 
 the reduplication and the assimilation. 
 
 tl3. First general rule. The aspirates take Daghesh 
 lene, i. e. these letters lose their aspiration, in the beginning 
 of a chapter, verse, or disjunctive clause. 
 
 Any word which immediately follows a disjunctive accent (app. 
 E. 1) is the beginning of a disjunctive clause. 
 
 tl4. Second general rule, (a) The aspirates take Da- 
 ghesh lene after a consonant with a silent Sheva, either ex- 
 pressed or implied. E. g. n'lJ^E, where n follows Sheva 
 expressed ; "^ZS"^^, where S Ibllows Sheva implied. 
 
 (6) But after a vocal Sheva, a vowel, or a quiescent 
 letter, they reject Daghesh lene. 
 
 The same principle applies to the aspirates at the end of words; 
 e. g. ri'ipE, vvhere n follows silent Sheva expressed. So also when 
 a furtive vowel (§ 59. 2. c) is used instead of silent Sheva ; e. g. Vi'np'b 
 Id-qd-hhdt (put for nHJib), where n is used instead of n, because the 
 furtive Pattahh which precedes it is not reckoned as a real vowel, 
 but only as a substitute for silent Sheva. (§ 59. 2. c, note 2.) 
 
 ] 5. Exceptions to the second general rule. 
 These are somewhat numerous, (a) In the middle of a word 
 derived by inflection from another word, Daghesh lene is omitted in 
 an aspirate, if that aspirate, in the ground-form of the word, is im- 
 mediately preceded by a vowel. E. g. 1S")"1 ridh-phu,, ground-form 
 
§ 29. DAGHESH LENE. 79 
 
 ;JTn where Ilholcni precedes the Pe, by the general rule would 
 be written nCll ridh-pu. So'^r)b?3 muZ-A-Ae, ground-form D^^V'3 where 
 Q,.imets precedes the Kaph, by the general rule would be "'sVTa 
 mdl-ki:. So inTi"^ i/rt-j."dc-6/i», ground-form itJ'""' where llholem pre- 
 cedes the Beth, by the general rule would be ^aT^; yd-S!d2-bu. 
 
 (b) Some ivords, in their ground-forms, have Shcva vocal under 
 their first letter and an aspirate for the second letter. If to such 
 words there be made an accidental prefix, which causes the Sheva 
 vocal to become silent, the succeeding aspirate still rejects the Da- 
 ghesh lene, as it did in the ground-form. 
 
 ans, with prefix 2 SPDs blkh-thdhh^ by general rule 5P32. 
 
 *^''D3, with prefix 3 ^'^^r'^ klkh-phlr, "T'SDS. 
 
 irima, with prefix b b^l^b llgh-blml, bns^b- 
 
 nincuj, n''\n^':j'T lish-phd-hhoth, ninsuib. 
 
 In such cases the original form of the word is exactly retained, 
 notwithstanding the accession made to the beginning of it, which is 
 regarded as merely accidental. 
 
 ] 6. Departures from the principle of exception exhibited 
 above in no. 15. b. 
 
 The future tense, and infinitive mood with a prefix, follow the gen- 
 eral rule. E. g. fut. I'sD"', although the infinitive which is the ground- 
 form of the 3 pers. future is noD. So inf. tis'd, but with prefix prep. 
 k2E'i;b. Some instances of the infinitive, however, follow the rule in 
 15. 6; as b*D3, i:E:3. 
 
 The usage just described appears to be arbitrary ; and can be 
 accounted for only on the ground, that the punctators viewed the 
 prefixes to the future and infinitive, in such cases, as constituting an 
 essential part of the word. 
 
 17. Particular anomalies. 
 
 (a) The suflSxes '^, did, 1^ always reject Daghesh lene in every 
 situation. 
 
 (6) Words commencing with the aspirates sn, Bi, S3, riD, 35, 
 2D, with Sheva under the first of these letters, insert Daghesh lene 
 in that first letter, whether the preceding syllable be pure or mixed. 
 To this principle there are but very few exceptions. The object 
 of this practice is to avoid the accumulation of the aspirates. 
 
80 § 29. DAGHESH FORTE AND LENK, 
 
 (c) An aspirate following the word TiiTi'' takes Daghesh lene, 
 because Tl'^Tf^ is read '^;ii< a^'dho-ndy (Ges. Lex.), i. e. with a con- 
 sonant at the end of the last syllable. (Vide supra 14. a.) 
 
 {d) Denominatives ending in n^ omit Dag'hesh lene, contrary to 
 the g'eneral rule. E. g-. m^b!?? from ^~7J, ii^i^v from "iny, nnb;;; 
 from lb.!! ^c. where we might expect the D and T, in the last sylla- 
 bles of the derivative words, to have a Daghesh lene in them. The 
 furtive Seghol at the end of ^b.'? &c. is not a real vowel (§ 59. 2), 
 but seems to be regarded as one, in the mode of writing the denom- 
 inatives in question. 
 
 (c) The derivatives of "i^s omit Daghesh lene, where by the gen- 
 eral rule we might expect to find it. E. g. "lar, Ti:;2, "''1^2 &c. 
 
 (/) Vice versa, we have ■^•i?33f from Wy^y., ""v.P"} ffom D''2"c:"), 
 where the principle of exception (15. a) would require 17.72^, ""vZ-^^")- 
 
 (^) Besides these peculiar anomalies, the student will sometimes 
 find mistakes in the printing. He will moreover find some anomalies 
 in respect both to the insertion and omission of Daghesh lene, par- 
 ticularly at the beginning of words, which have been sanctioned by 
 time, and which are received into the common copies of the Hebrew 
 Bible ; but which originally arose, it can scarcely be doubted, from 
 variations in regard to the distinctive accents, or from errors of the 
 transcribers. 
 
 tl8. Distinction of Daghesh Jorte from Daghesh lene. 
 
 (a) Daghesh forte can never be written In the final 
 letter of a word, as It would render an additional syllable 
 necessary to pronounce it. (b) Daghesh forte can never 
 appear in the first letter of a word, excepting Daghesh eu- 
 phonic (8 supra), (c) Daghesh /o/7e is always inunediately 
 preceded by a vowel-sound ; but Daghesh lene by a silent 
 Sheva. This simple principle will enable the learner to 
 determine when the aspirates are to be doubled, and when 
 they merely lose their aspiration and remain single. 
 
§30. MAPPIQ AND RArHE. 01 
 
 § 30. MCipptq and Raphe. 
 
 \l. The letter He (n) is commonly quiescent at the 
 end of a word (§ 23. 2). Sometimes however it is 7tiorc- 
 abic, and to indicate this, a point is placed in the bosom 
 ot" it called p'^E^ MappTq ; as n'^ v^h, not ya. 
 
 The point Mappiq is of use ir) distinguishiiii^ some 
 words; as in the final fem. pronoun n- , to distinguish it 
 from the mere feminine ending of a noun. E.g. HS^'D nud- 
 kah means }icr king ; but n!^'?'^ med-ka means a queen. 
 
 In verbs ending with double //e, when the future is apocopated 
 (§ 123. Kal. f^), the middle radical (n) is marked with a Mappiq to 
 show that it is not quiescent; as SriDRT vdt-te-khdh instead of Innpni 
 vdi-Cikh-he, root Tin's. 
 
 Note. In the present editions of Hebrew books, Mappiq is found 
 only in He ; but in manuscripts it is sometimes appended to all the 
 quiescents, when they are moveable at the end of a word. 
 
 II. Raphe (npn) means soft, and is the opposite of Da- 
 ghesh and Mappiq. It is now scarcely ever used in any 
 printed edition. But Hebrew manuscripts exhibit it over 
 the mpiratcs, as a sign that they retain the aspiration ; 
 e. g. n'TIID kha-bhfdha. In some cases, it stands in man- 
 uscripts where Daghesh forte would be written according 
 to analogy, in order to show that the Daghesh is omitted. 
 It is sometimes also Ibund over i< and H when they qui- 
 esce at the end of words. 
 
 In some printed editions, Raphe is occasionally used where a 
 Daghesh forte is omitted, Judg. 16 : 16 ; or Daghesh lene, Judg. 
 16 : 28 ; or Mappiq, Num. 32 : 42. In all such cases, it is noted in 
 the margin. See Van der Hooght's Hebrew Bible. 
 
82 § 31. METHEGH. 
 
 § 31. 2,r[^ Methegh. 
 
 tl. Methegh signifies check, restraint. Such is the 
 name of the perpendicular mark (i) under words, which 
 is called also the euphonic accent, because it denotes that the 
 preceding vowel sound is to be somewhat delayed, or dis- 
 tinguished in the pronunciation. Hence the name J\Ie- 
 thegh. It compares well with what we call the half-ac- 
 cent in English ; as in undertake, underwrite &c. 
 
 2. Manuscripts, editions, and grammarians differ very 
 much in respect to the insertion or omission of this euphon- 
 ic accent. The following cases are those in which there 
 is, however, a general agreement that it ought to be writ- 
 ten. 
 
 (a) In the second syllable, if a simple one, before the 
 tone-syllable, as !Z'^^{^ ha-a-dham; or if the second sylla- 
 ble be a mixed one, then on the third if simple, as "iri'^>i1 
 va-Niv-va-ther. 
 
 But the conjunctional signifying atid, i. e. being merely copula- 
 tive, does not receive it ; as 2;^.hl, ft-bhu-tsc^v. 
 
 Two words connected by Maqqeph (§ 32) are considered as one 
 in reference to Methegh ; as p'^"^:i~'^3 ki-tsdd-diq. 
 
 (6) After a long vowel which comes next before the 
 
 tone-syllable and is followed by a Sheva; as nfl'^n ha-yetha. 
 
 But there is not an entire uniformity in the observance of this 
 
 rule, the short vowels sometimes taking Metheg, as i^'^T]'' yihh-jje ; 
 
 for what reason, it is difficult to say. 
 
 (c) When Dagliesh forte is fallen out, but the pre- 
 ceding vowcl-polnt is still retained ; as D'^'TinS ba-hhu-rim 
 instead of n^n^R^. (Comp. § 45.) 
 
 The usage here is not universal ; e. g. 'I'^n^l hd-hho-shekh, with- 
 out Metheg after n. 
 
 ((/) Usually, after a long vowel in the syllable which 
 
§ 31. METIIEGH. 83 
 
 precedes a Maqqcph ; as '^'^""nuD shath-li, 1j5i>'""'3 ki- 
 2?im-ma-nu. 
 
 The JMetliee: is used here to shew that tlie lonc^ vowel is retain- 
 ed, notwithstanding the tonic accent is thrown oil' by the Maqqeph. 
 (§ 32. 3, 4.) 
 
 (c) Always before the composite Shevas; as '''iri'il} 
 sa-hMliI, rjVn;. yc-hh^loph. 
 
 ISIethcg may he placed twice on the same word, if two reasons 
 for usins: it concur ; e. g. D!"."'N}CN2£ ise-H^tsa^^c-han. (See a and e 
 above.) 
 
 3. The following arc cases in which Metheg is used 
 more or less often, but not uniformly. 
 
 fl+Fd syllable before the tone-syllable, although it be 
 a mixed one ; as DD'^na but-ie-khem^ W'ZlzriTi inuh-nud-dfbkhn. 
 
 {b) On the foaptn syllable before the tone-syllable, the third be- 
 ing a mixed one ; as D^uTTii'^l vdy-yish-hha-tum^ T\'yz^l2TV\ vehd- 
 mds-se-khoth. 
 
 (c) On those derivatives from the verbs rT^ln hd-yd {to be) and ST^H 
 hhd-yd {to live) which receive a formative prefix ; as futures Tt'^y:'^^ 
 yih-ye^ Tiin'' y'lhh-ye, ninn t'lhh-ye 4'C. 
 
 {J) After a vocal Sheva under the first letter of some words ; as 
 DNT viUcth^ :iN-^ seHu^ -"in~ dfbhdr. By some grammarians the design 
 of this is said to be, to qualify the Sheva sound and make it analo- 
 gous to the succeeding vowel ; i. e. we must read vemth^ s'"^tiu^ d'^bhdr 
 &c. (§ 26. 7 note 2.) 
 
 Note 1. Methegh is of the same form as the accent Silluq (app. 
 E. 1), but is easily distinguished from it, inasmuch as Silluq is never 
 used except under the ultimate or penult syllable in a verse. 
 
 Note 2. Instead of Methegh, the conjunctive accents (app. E. 1) 
 are not unfrequently used ; especially when the word has a greater 
 distinctive accent ; as D'^'jS'.iWbl u-hmo-vadliun with Munahh, instead 
 of D-^nrrobn with Methegh. 
 
 Note 3. The use of Methegh as a diacritical sign in the cases b 
 and c under no. 2, is of real value. It is to be regretted that all the 
 •other uses of it had not been spared ; to the learner at least they are 
 of no real importance, but rather serve to perplex him. They have 
 been detailed here, to save him from confusion or mistake. 
 
84 § 32, MAQQEFH. 
 
 N. B. The learner will observe, that Methegh has been here de- 
 scribed as it is used in the text of the Hebrew Bible. In other books, 
 e. g. in Hebrew grammars, it is exhibited only after a Qamets fol- 
 lowed by simple Sheva, in order to distinguish it from Qamets Hha- 
 teph (25. 1. «, note 1), the other uses of it being superseded as un- 
 necessary. This usage is also followed in the present grammai*. 
 
 § 32. p)j;!D Mciqqeph. 
 
 tJ. Maqqepli, like our hyphen, serves to connect two 
 words together, e. g. ^j"rii^i; not to make a composite 
 Avord of tliem, but to connect them in respect to interpunc- 
 tion and accent. 
 
 t2. Words connected by Maqqeph are closely con- 
 nected In sense ; so that its office, in respect to interpunc- 
 tion, is like that of a conjunctive accent. (App. E. 1.) 
 
 t3. The word which precedes Maqqeph loses its ton- 
 ic accent. 
 
 According to the theory of the punctntors, two or more words 
 connected by a I\Iaqqeph are to be pronounced as one word, the 
 tone-syllable being only on the last. Thus 'JD"'^?^';] va-yihl-khcn^ 
 l3'jpl;*"rS~nN ij^'eth-kol-V't'-scbh. 
 
 The rationale of this case may be easily explained. The He- 
 brews ge?iera% avoid having two tone-syllables in immediate succes- 
 sion. Where these would occur, they either insert a Maqqeph, which 
 is the sign that the tone is removed from the first ; or they throw 
 back the accent of the former word one syllable, where the length 
 of such word admits it. Hence Maqqeph rarely appears, except af- 
 ter monosyllabic or dissyllabic words which precede others of a sim- 
 ilar character, so as naturally to occasion the crowding of tone- 
 syllables together. 
 
 t4. If the syllable which precedes Maqqeph is a mix- 
 ed syllable with a long pure vowel, that vowel is commonly 
 (not always) shortened, on account of the JMaqqeph which 
 removes the accent : for a long vowel does not usually 
 occur in a mixed syllable unaccented. (§ 54. %. h.) 
 
■^ :i3. ACCENTS. 85 
 
 When a long^ vowel is retained, Methegh is usually placed after 
 it, as a sign that it is long; as "'5-nO shdth-li (§ 31. 2. d). So 
 
 Mote. In tne use of^Maqqeph, the punctators are far from being 
 uniform or consistent. The same words, in the same connexion, at 
 one time have it, and at another time have it not. The same vowel 
 is sometimes shortened by it, and sometimes not. Does not such an 
 arbitrary use denote that this accent was connected rather with 
 modes of cantiUatiiu^ the .Scriptures, than with the sense of words ? 
 
 § 3.3. Accents, 
 
 tl. Besides the two euphonic accents, Methegh and 
 Maqqeph, there are a large number of tonic accents, as 
 they- arc called, which are appended to the Hebrew text ; 
 are inseparably connected with the present vowel system ; 
 and serve, if we may credit Hebrew grammarians, a vari- 
 ety of purposes. Three uses are assigned to them, viz. 
 (a) To mark the tone-syllable, (b) As signs of interpunction. 
 (c) As notes to direct the cantillation of the Hebrew text 
 
 2. Of these accents, some are written above, and some 
 below the line, like the vowels ; only one viz. Pcsiq (|) 
 is written in the line. (See the table App. E). 
 
 t3. Tonic poicer of the accents. So far as this power 
 is concerned, they all stand upon the footing of equality 
 when they actually subserve this end ; all of them mere- 
 ly oculing the ultimate or penult syllabic on which they 
 stand. Every word (unless one before a Maqqeph § 32) 
 has one or more of the accents upon it. 
 
 t4. There are no less than seven of the accents, 
 which do not mark with certainty the tone-syllable, but 
 only coincide with it incidentally. (See App. E. 4*. b. ) 
 
 t'5. When two accents of the same kind are placed 
 upon a word, the Jirst of them marks the tone-syllable ; 
 
 as '^nr fo-hn. with the tone on the penult. 
 
 12 
 
86 § 33. ACCENTS. 
 
 t6. When two accents of a different kind are placed 
 on a word, the last of them marks the tone-sj liable ; as 
 D'^"T>'1'J3V'^ u-kmo-J^'^dhlm, with the tone on the ultimate. 
 
 Note. Though the accents determine the tone-syllable of most 
 words, yet the student cannot depend upon them universally as 
 guides, (supra 4). For the rules to determine the tone-syllable 
 in all cases, see §§ 34, 35. 
 
 7. Accents as signs of interpunction. This, in the view 
 of those who have most highly prized the accents, is their 
 principal use. In regard to this, the accents are distin- 
 guished into two greater classes, {a) Disjunctives, or those 
 which show a suspension in reading, or a division of the 
 sense greater or less. (6) Conjunctives, placed upon words 
 to show that they are nearly related to other words, and 
 must not be separated from them. In other words, dis- 
 junctives indicate a pause of some sort; and conjunctives 
 that there is no pause, but a continuation or conjunction. 
 For further explanation, see A pp. E. 
 
 8. Accents as signs of cantillation. In the public read- 
 ing of the Scriptures, the Jews from time immemorial 
 have cantillated them, i.e. have read them in a kind of half- 
 singing rccitativo way ; much like what is called chanting 
 in some of our churches. In this manner Mussulmans 
 read the Koran ; and in this way the people of the east 
 generally deliver public discourses. The mode of cantil- 
 lating Hebrew is, at present, various in different countries ; 
 but is guided in all by the accents, i. e. the accents are used as 
 musical signs, though various powers are assigned to them. 
 
 For an exhibition of the povvers of the accents as musical signs, 
 see Jablonskii Praef. ad Bib. Fleb. § 24, .and Bartoloccii Biblioth. 
 Rabbin. Tom. iv. p. 431 ; where may be found the Sargas or accent- 
 songs, written out in musical notes. 
 
 Whether this was the original design of the accents, see discus- 
 sed in App. E. IQ. 
 
§ 34. TONE-SYLLABLES. SI 
 
 § 34. Tone-syllables ofiuords. 
 
 tl. General rule. The general law of the Hebrew 
 language is, that the accent or tone is on the last syllable* 
 
 To this there are a great many exceptions; but still they are 
 not sutTicient to reader the expression of a general rule improper. 
 In Syriac and Arabic, the tone-syllable is generally the penult. 
 But in Hebrew, this mode of accentuation is regarded as an excep- 
 tion to predominant usage. 
 
 Note. In Hebrew, a word aculed, i, e. having the tone on the 
 last syllable, is called y^rTa .'Ui/ray {front below), and a word peiiacul- 
 erf, i.e. having the tone on the penult syllable, is called b'yb?3 A']l':fel 
 {from above). It is often convenient to use these technical terms ; 
 and the student should therefore understand them. 
 
 t2. Exceptions to the general rule, JMilel or penacuted 
 are several classes of words. 
 
 (a) All Segholate forms, 1. e. those which have a fur- 
 tive vowel in their final syllable. (§ 59. 2. § 143). 
 
 This vowel almost without exception is Seghol.^ Pattahh, or Hhi- 
 req parvutn. In a few cases Shureq and Hhireq magnum appear to 
 be furtive ; as in ^nri and tiria which stand for irin and iHz, I'^S for 
 "•IS (§ 47. 3). In proper names ending with nni the penult sylla- 
 ble is accented, as :in';'Z)''73 Micaiah ; so also iu Wrili'l, as the ^ is 
 furtive, (§ 47. 3). ' " 
 
 t(6) All duals are penacuted, as D^T^I ; and plurals 
 of the same form with duals, as tS**^, Q**^'*!) ; where the 
 Hhireq in the final syllable is parvum. 
 
 (c) Apocopated futures in verbs nV, which take a 
 furtive vowel ; as 7^\ (§ 123. I. d.) 
 
 (d) All the forms of regular verbs, which receive for- 
 
 * Words wiih (he tone on the ultimate are not in this grammar marked with 
 the accent, except for special purposes. The reatler will understand, therefore, 
 that a word without a tonc-acrcnt noted, je usually to be regarded as having 
 the tone on the ullimale. 
 
§ 34. TONE-SYLLABLES. 
 
 mative suffixes beginning with a consonant ; excepting those 
 which have Cn and '^,. (§ 86 &c. § 127. Parad. I.) 
 
 Exceptions to this rule may be found, but they are either the re- 
 s\ilt of error in copyists or printers, or the accent lias been moved 
 from its proper place by some of the causes described in § 35. 
 
 (e) In Hiphil of regular verbs, all the persons are 
 penacuted which have Yodh characteristic between the 
 two last radicals. The other persons follow the rule in d, 
 (y) In Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal of verbs ^'J?, 
 the tone rests on the penult in all the persons vv'hich have 
 formative suffixes beginning with a voivel, i. e. in all the 
 persons where n_, 1, or *^_ is added to the root. 
 
 But sometimes the tone is Alilra ; as nz"}, imper. ^\'-). Such ex- 
 ceptions are limited chiefly to Kal. 
 
 In all the persons of these verbs which have forma- 
 tive suffixes beginning with a consonant (excepting the suf- 
 fixes Cn and in), the tone rests on the epenthetic i or '^^ 
 (§ 115. 3), which is inserted between the verb and the 
 formative suffix. 
 
 To this rule there are a few exceptions; as "'ri"?'^ &.c. where 
 the tone is on the ultimate. 
 
 Poel, Poal, and Ilithpoel of these verbs are regularly accented ; 
 i. e. they have their tone like the corresponding conjugations in a 
 
 regular verb. 
 
 " 
 (g) In Kal, Niphal, and Hiphil of verbs 13?, the tone 
 
 rests on the penult in those persons which have formative 
 suffixes bcirimiinif ivith a voweL i. e. the suffixes n_, 1, ^- • 
 In a few cases, the tone here is on the last syllable ; as ;)«-^, 
 imper. ^ar^i;. This is very rare, except in Kal. (Comp. above un- 
 der/.) 
 
 All the persons of these verbs which have an epenthetic 
 i or '^_. (§ 117. 6) before formative suffixes beginning icith 
 
§ ,1 1. TONK-SYI.T.AIU.ES. 89 
 
 a consonant (excepting the suffixes CFl and "jri), have the 
 tone on the epenthetic syllable, i. c. on the penult. 
 
 All the other parts of the verbs "I'j are regularly accentet!, viz, 
 Ilophal, Tilei, Pulai, Hitlipalcl, and those persons in Kal which have 
 formative suffixes beginning' with consonants and not preceded i)y 
 the epenthetic syllable ; as rraj^ &:c. So participles of these verbs, 
 in the I'eminine and plural, are regularly accented. (Comp. under/.) 
 
 (//) Nouns, pronouns, participles, and adverbs, which 
 take n_ or n_ paragogic or local, arc penacuted ; as nS^, 
 
 n-Zn, '-TD. (§ 50. 4. § 157. 2. g.) 
 
 A few words of these classes with ^, paragogic are J\Iilra ; and 
 Yodh paragogic always draws down the accent upon it. 
 
 Note 1. But verbs which take ri_ and !i_ paragogic (§§ 91, 92) are 
 accented in the same manner, as when they take the formative suf- 
 fixes iTT- -, ^ , ;ind ■'_ ; i.e. on the ultimate, in all cases except those not- 
 ed above in e,/, and "-. E. g. Milra Tt^'i^l for "^-qi imper. Piel of -^^t ; 
 Ttl'l for vi imper. of i'T' AlUel Ttih^ for iON 1 pers. fut. of niio : 
 rrin; for dns from fi'an ; In^Tps fur D^p: from Dip. 
 
 Note 2. n_ and n- paragogic are rarely added to any persons, 
 except those which end with a radical of the verb ; and this mostly 
 in the future tense. In the praeter, only the 3 pers. fern, in a very 
 few cases receives a paragogic ?7_ or l-i_, (all other apparent cases 
 of paragoge in the praeter being quite doubtful); and this 3 pers. fern, 
 retains, like a paragogic noun, the accent on the penult, contrary to 
 the rule in note 1. E. g. rinj^znn Josh. 6: 17 ; innNrD: 2 Sara. 1: 26 
 with Pattahh under N, where we might expect Q,amets. 
 
 (/) Verbs, nouns &c. are Jllilel with the f"ollo^ving suf- 
 fix-pronouns ; viz, *'D_, '^D _, '^2 _, "^H-, 'IH-, 'in_, ln_, n -, 
 YjZ, IdJ, '^21, i'QJ, and some others. (See § 126. II. § 
 135. II. where the penacuted suffixes are marked.) 
 
 Also with T\-, D—, 7—, shortened from 'TI-, Q_, I—; 
 
 - I- _ I" T It 
 
 which latter suffixes are JM'dra. (See as above.) 
 
 A word having the suffix ^ with Shcva before it, is 
 Milra, as Tp.Z's ; but is Milel if a vowel precedes the suf- 
 fix, as ri'^2w\\" ■ 
 
90 § 35. SHIFTING OF THE TONE-SYLLABLE. 
 
 Nun epenthetic inserted between a verb and its suffixes always 
 takes the tone, and of course makes the word Mild ; as "'sSD'^^ he 
 chastised me ; iTlinp take it. 
 
 (j) Many Avords with a pause-accent are JMilel. 
 (§ 60. 7.) 
 
 These accents, even in case they alter the regular tone-syllable 
 (as they often do), can stand upon the ■penult as well as on the ulti- 
 mate ?.y\\c\h\e. E.g. ."isna penacuted, where the regular tone would 
 be on the ultimate; ri72'T Milra. where the usual tone would be 
 Milel. 
 
 § 35. Shifting of the tone-syllable. 
 
 The tone of words is often shifted by prefixes and 
 suffixes, or by relation to pause-accents, or by preceding or 
 following words. Cases of this nature are the following. 
 
 1. More or less of the cases stated in §34. 2. /i, i, j. 
 
 2. Nun paragogic (added to any persons of verbs 
 ending with '^ or ^__ § 43. 3) always draws down the tone 
 on the ultimate syllable. 
 
 Consequently, in cases of penult tone in § 34. 2. e,f g, it changes 
 the tone from the penult to the ultimate. 
 
 Besides the changes which this shifting of the tone may occasion 
 in the praeformatives which have a long vowel, (as "jnn^TSD instead 
 of nn^ZSn,) the Nun paragogic sometimes (but not generally) length- 
 ens, or restores and lengthens, the vowel of the preceding syllable ; 
 as 'j^iTa'^'' instead of nTi)'^''. But here usage varies, and is inconsistent 
 with itself. See Ps. 104 : 28, where both usages stand in the same 
 verse. 
 
 3. Vav prefixed to the praeter commonly (not al- 
 ways) makes those persons Jllilra, which without it are 
 Milel ; as ""nipiljl , but without Vav ^nilj^ ; Hiphil 
 
 n^'^'^nni , without Vav n'^-^^nn. (s 94.) 
 
 Thus also in verbs yy and ts (§ 34. 2./, o-), those persons which 
 are Milel, commonly (not always) become Milra by taking a prefix 
 Vav. 
 
§ 3 J. SHIFTING OF THE TONE-SYLLAHLE. 91 
 
 The following are generally (not always) exceptions to the pre- 
 ceding rule. 
 
 (n) The first per. plur. of verbs, always; as nS'^ONV 
 (6) Verbs ending with a quiescent ; as riN^.^"), fj''\^'i, also nN2V 
 (c) Verbs with a pause-accent on the penult, (§ 34. 2. k). 
 {(l) When a tone-syllable immediately follows, the tone is then 
 commonly (not always) thrown back ; as ^^in Tinf uil. 
 
 NoTF. There are a few anomalous cases, where the accent re- 
 mains on the penult when \'av is prefixed, for which no reason can 
 be given, unless it be the fault of transcribers or printers, or the in- 
 consistency of the accentuation itself. 
 
 4. Vav conversive prefixed to the future commonly 
 (not always) makes the word M'del ; as "itljj'^1, but with- 
 out Vav -ibwS'^ (§ 93.) 
 
 But here two conditions must take place, (o) The verb must 
 end wi:h a radical letter. (6) The penult syllable must be a simple 
 one. Otherwise Vav produces no change in the tone. 
 
 Note 1. In regular verbs, therefore, the change in question is 
 limited to Niphil future. In verbs Ayin gutlural^ it takes place in 
 the fut. Niphil, and in all the Daghesh'd conjugations, viz. Piel, Pu- 
 al, and liithpael, because in them the penult syllable is simple. 
 (§46.1.) 
 
 In verbs yy, in the fut, of Kal, Hiphil, and the Daghesh'd conju- 
 gations. In t:?, in the same conjugations. In verb« i<D with N quies- 
 cent, in future Kal. In verbs "^d, in fut. Kal and Hiphil. 
 
 Note 2. But verbs ^"b with Vav conversive may suffer apocope 
 and retraction of the accent, in all the conjugations. (§ 123. I. rf.) 
 
 Note 3. Excnptions to the general rule in no. 4 are the follow- 
 insf. («) The first pers. sing-, of verbs ; as -^75^^^. (6) Verbs Nb with 
 N quiescent ; a? Nn"'^]. (c) Word? in pause (^ 34. j). 
 
 5. The negative V^? before the future of prohibition 
 or warning, aflfecls it often (not always) in the same man- 
 ner as Vav conversive. 
 
 Thus roiri"b{< do not reprove^ 5|D^r"rN you must not add, with 
 the tone on the penult. But here practice is not uniform, as the ac- 
 cent is som'^times on the ultimate. 
 
 Verbs rib preceded by bN commonly suffer both apocope and re- 
 traction of the accent, as in case of Vav conversive (supra 4 note 2). 
 
92 § 36. CRITICAL MAUKS AND MASORETIC NOTKS. 
 
 6. When an acuted word is immediately followed 
 by a tone-syllable, it commonly (not always) becomes pen- 
 acuted. (Comp. § 32. 3.) 
 
 The desig'n in throwing back the accent in this case, is to avoid 
 the concuri-ence of two tone-syllables. But since the final syllables 
 of many words which are Milra, cannot be changed without a con- 
 fusion of forms or sense, and the penult syllable of many others is 
 mixed, and therefore not adapted to have the accent thrown back 
 (supra 4), the usage in question is not unfrequently neglected. 
 
 7. The imperative and future apocopated having an 
 imperative, optative, hortative &c. sense (§§91, 92), com- 
 monly (not always) throvt^ back the accent, like the future 
 with Vav conversive (supra 4). 
 
 Thus '^'miT] keep thyself^ for '^fji"'"; ^5'~l7, let him see, for JlN'l^ ; 
 lijn^ for -\ixn'; ; 7\'^h for n^nt^- 
 
 General remark respecting the cases in this section. 
 
 Inasmuch as the accent, when thrown back, is often removed 
 from a long syllable, the long vowel in such cases must be exchang- 
 ed for a short one ; which is done agreeably to the laws in § 54 re- 
 specting the mutation of vowels. 
 
 § 36. Critical tnarks and Masoretic notes. 
 
 1. In the common editions of the Bible with Masoretic notes &c. 
 a small circle over any word, e. g. N^in, shews that the margin is 
 to be consulted, either for a different reading (as Gen. 8: 17 N:i''r:in 
 the case above), or for literac majores vel minores, Piska^ puncta ex- 
 traordinaria &.C. The mark ( ) over words in Van der Hooght &c. 
 refers to a marginal note. 
 
 2. Qfn and K^thibh. There arc a considerable number of mar- 
 o-inal readings (about 1000) in our common IMasoretic Bibles, most 
 of which are quite ancient. Some of them correct grammatical anom- 
 alies, some arc euphemisms, and some propose a different word. They 
 are probably the result of an ancient recension of Hebrew manu- 
 scripts. The marginal word is called "^-ip Q^rt, which means read; 
 i. c. this word is road, instead of the word in the text to which it re- 
 lates, and which is called S"n3 Kstiubh, i.e. "xritten or text. The vowel- 
 
§ 37. RULES FOR READINO HEBREW. 93 
 
 points under the FCethibh belong to the Q,eri, which is printed with- 
 out points. 
 
 If a word is omitted in the text, the vowel-points stand in the 
 place with a small circle over them, while the letters belonging to 
 them are printed in the margin; as Judg. 20: 13. This is called 
 I'^nD nV") ''")p read but not written. 
 
 If a word is supcriluous in the text, it is left unpointed; as Ezek. 
 48: 16. This is called ^"npi Nbl 3TI3 written but not read. 
 
 3. Lilerae majores et minores distinguish themselves (§ IG). Plskd 
 (xpCD) means separation, i. e. a space left in the text in the middle 
 ot a verse; as Gen. 35: 22. 
 
 4. Puncta exlraordinaria are marked thus, VnptJ'i. See Gen. 18: 
 9. 33: 4, where the points over the letters are exlraordinaria. 
 
 The Rabbins regard these as designating some mysterious signi- 
 fications of the words over which they are placed. Probably the ori- 
 ginal design of them was, to denote that the reading was suspicious. 
 The number of words over which they are found is only fifteen. 
 
 For a full account of all the marginal and other notes in the 
 Masoretic editions of the Hebrew Bible, see the preface to Van der 
 Hooght's Hebrew Bible, §§ 23 — 45. 
 
 *§ 37. Rules for reading Hebrew, 
 
 Having become acquainted with the nature and design of all the 
 letters, vowels, accents, diacritical points &c. &c. which appear on 
 the pages of the Hebrew Bible, the student is prepared to com- 
 mence the reading or pronunciation of the language. After rendering 
 himself familiar with the signs of the sounds, viz. the consonants 
 and vowel-points, his principal difficulty will consist in a want of skill 
 to make the proper division of syllables. To assist him in this, the 
 following rules should be observed. 
 
 N. B. The student should here bear in mind the definition of 
 simple and mixed syllables, as given in § 21. 8 note *. 
 
 RtfLE 1. Every syllable must begin with a moveable letter. 
 
 Vav with Shureq (n) in the beginning of words is the only excep- 
 tion, and is sounded fi = oo in English. In '^^2i< Hd-mdr, lai' 2?n-' 
 mddh &.C. the N and :> are moveable, although we do not sound Ihem. 
 because M-e know not what sound to give them. (§18.2.) 
 13 
 
94 § 37. RULES FOR READIN« HEBREVf. 
 
 Rule 2. No syllable can have more than two move- 
 able letters before its vowel ; and none admits more than 
 one after its vowel except 9. final syllable, which may have 
 two. 
 
 Rule 3. Every vowel stands in a simple syllable, when 
 followed by a letter which has a vowel belonging to it. 
 
 Rule 4. Every short vowel makes a mixed syllable, 
 when followed by a simple Sheva expressed or implied, 
 or by a Daghesh forte. 
 
 E. g. bT*52 bdr-zel; in which the first syllable has a Sheva ex- 
 pressed ; the second, a Sheva implied. So n^pb lim-midh = '173/2^. 
 
 Rule 5. Every long vowel makes a mixed syllable, 
 when followed by a simple Sheva expressed or implied, 
 or by a Daghesh forte, provided such vowel he in a tone- 
 syllable. 
 
 E. g. 'Dp qdm, rtjbbj^*; ylq-tol-nd where the Hholem is in a mix- 
 ed tone-syllable. So ti3\ ydm-md = TtJZTZ'^. 
 
 Rule 6. A long vowel which is not in a tone-syllable, 
 makes a simple syllable, although followed by a Sheva. 
 
 E. g. InbUp qd-Uld, D'^n^ia ho-ghidhim. 
 
 Rule 7. Every vowel followed by a real quiescent 
 makes a simple syllable, provided the letter next after the 
 quiescent have a vowel belonging to it, or the quiescent 
 stands at the end of a word. 
 
 E. g-. in n'''4JN"^ re-shlth, i^'i is a simple syllable, because the 'is 
 which comes next after it has a vowel of its own ; in N'la 6d-rd, ^«'^ 
 is a final simple syllable. 
 
 Rule 8. Every vowel followed by a real quiescent 
 makes a mixed syllable, if the next succeeding moveable 
 letter is destitute of a vowel. 
 
 E. g. in r'^'^DN'i re-shith., D'"'2i is a mixed syllable. But such sylla- 
 bles must always be tone-syllables; excepting the very few cases 
 
§ 38. MODE OF UEADINO HEBREW. 95 
 
 where the quiescent letters are irregularly used in short syllables. 
 (§21. 14 note, 15 note, 19 note.) 
 
 Rule 9. Every composite Shcva, and every simple 
 Sheva vocal, stands ol course at the beginning of a sylla- 
 ble. (§ 26. 6.) 
 
 *§ 38. Exemplification of the manner m which Hebrew is read, 
 with references to rules and principles which respect the ortho' 
 graphy and orthoepy of the Hebrew text.\ 
 
 Genesis, Chap. I. 
 Verse 1. 1. n^uJN'na hirl-shxth ; Beth has a Daghesh lene in it 29. 
 13J ; Sheva under z is vocal 26. 6. e ; in Nna 6fr£, f< quiesces in the 
 Tseri 23. 2, which makes a simple syllable, rule 7. — In n^UJ shith^ 
 Yodh quiesces in Hhireq and renders it impure 23. 2 ; and it is a 
 mixed syllable r. 8 (comp. r. 5); final n is written without a Sheva 
 expressed 26. 2, and is also written without a Daghesh lene 29. 14. b. 
 
 2. N-na ba-rd; a 6d, Beth with Daghesh lene 29. 14; a simple 
 syllable r. 3. — Nn rd a simple syllable r. 7 ; 4< quiescent in Qamets 
 23. 2. 
 
 3. B"^rTbN iH^lo-hun ; 'bN fct^/o a simple syllable r. 3 and 26. 4 ; with 
 composite Sheva 26. 5, which is vocal 26. 6. a. (comp. r. 9). — D'TJ him 
 a mixed syllable r. 8 and 5 ; Yodh quiescent in Hhireq 23. 2 ; D with- 
 out Sheva expressed 26. 2. 
 
 4.nN-Nif|^'^ ; a mixed syllable with a long vowel r. 5, Sheva being 
 implied under n, 26. 2 ; Daghesh lene omitted in n, 29. 14.6. 
 
 5. D'^.Dn hdsh'shd-md-yhn ; lii'n hdsh, "j being doubled by the Da- 
 ghesh 29. 1 ; a mixed syllable r. 4. — UJ shd a simple syllable r. 3. — 
 a ma r. 3, Pattahh pure and short 21. 8. — D"" y'lm r. 4, Hhireq being 
 parvura ; D without Sheva expressed 26. 2 ; a mixed syllable r. 4. 
 
 6. nN") viHeth ; Vav moveable 23. 4. a ; Sheva vocal 26. 6. e ; mix- 
 ed syllable with a long vowel r. 5 ; Daghesh lene omitted in n, 29. 
 14. b ; Sheva implied under n, 26. 2. 
 
 + The explanation of the accents is here omitted, and may be found in Ap-- 
 pendix E. 
 
 I The first figure or number refers to the section (v) in the grammar ; and 
 the other references in connexion, to the subdivisions in that section. The ruies 
 referred to are those contained in J 37. 
 
96 § 38. MODE OF READING HEBREW. 
 
 7. yiN^ ha-»d-rets ; hd, r. 3 ; Na, r. 3 ; rets, r. 4 j y without 
 Sheva 26^ 2/ 
 
 Verse 2. 
 
 8. V'l'*'!'! J ^66 nos. 6, 7. 
 
 9. nrT^n hd-yithd ; Metheg after ~ 31. 2. 6 ; hd n simple syllable 
 r. 6. — In yethd Yodh is moveable 23. 4. a ; Sheva vocal 26. 6. 6 ; n final 
 quiescent 23. 2 ; a simple syllable r. 7. 
 
 10. :iHnf/jo-/m; D without Dag^hesh lene 29. 14. 6, the n here 
 following a quiescent letter in the preceding word. In Aw, Vav is 
 quiescent in Shureq 23. 2. ■« 
 
 1 1. ^Hli vd-bho-hu ; vd, no. 6 and r. 3. — bho without Daghesh lene 
 29. M. 6 ; a simple syllable r. 3. — hii, no. 10. 
 
 12. ^'^irri vehho-shekh', 1 no. 6. — hho with Hholem over *lj and co- 
 inciding with the diacritical point on its right 22. 3. (1) ; a simple syl- 
 lable r. 2- — shikh, r. 4 ; Sheva in final Kaph 26. 2. a ; Kaph without 
 Daghesh lene 29 14 6. 
 
 13. -b3> ^'dl r. 4; Maqqeph after bv 32. 
 
 14. "^iD penc; Pe with Daghesh lene 29. 14. a, because it follows 
 a mixed syllable ; ''; with Yodh quiescent 23. 2. 
 
 15. U'^TID th{hdm ; monosyllable 26. 4 ; n without Daghesh lene 
 29. 14.6; Vav quiescent in Hholem 23. 2; a mixed syllable r. 5. 
 
 16. n^"Ti veru°'hh] monosyllable 26. 4; Vav quiescent 23. 2 ; Pat- 
 tahh furtive under n, 27. 1. 
 
 17. CribN ; see no. 3. 
 
 18. T\'^ry-\12mfrd-hhe-phith; '^^ with long Pattahh because Da- 
 ghesh forte is omitted in n 21. 7. — n, r. 3. — riD, r. 4 ; Q and n with- 
 out Daghesh lene 29. 14. 6; n without Sheva expressed 26. 2. 
 
 "19. "^jS'i^^j ; see nos. 13, 14. — D';73ri hdm-md-ylin, no. 6. 
 
 Verse 3. 
 
 20. ^TSN'I vdij-yo-mer ; vdy with Yodh moveable 23. 5, Daghesh 
 forte doubling the Yodh 29. 1. — In i/w, Yodh is moveable 23.4. a, and 
 Ji is quiescent in Hholem 23. 2. — mer, r. 4. 
 
 21. -'t^'^ yihl; Yodh moveable 23. 4. a ; final Yodh quiescent 23. 2. 
 
 22. '^^^« Nor; N moveable 23. 4. a ; Vav quiescent 23. 2; mix- 
 ed syllable r. 8. 
 
 23. 'niN— ^n";i vd-yehl nor; in to, Pattahh is long and impure, be- 
 cause Daghesh ibrte is omitted in the Yodh 23. 7, and of course the 
 syllable comes under r. 6. See nos. 21, 22 for the reading. Metheg, 
 no. 9. 
 
§ 38. MODE OF READING HEBREW. 07 
 
 Verse 4. 
 
 ~\. a'^'^^ vdy-ydr ; vdy, no. 20. — ydr^ r. 4. — N at the end is in otio 
 23. 6. a. 
 
 25. S^U— ^3 kl-tobli; 3 with Daghesh lene 29. 14. a. — ""D without 
 Metlieg' alter the Hhireq, and so an exception of 31. 2. d ; perhaps 
 because the next succeeding' syllable is accented, but more probably 
 because the long vowel Hhireq has no Sheva after it 31. 2. b. — ^^a, 
 see -^^.S no. 22. 
 
 26. ^12^T vdif-ydbh-dil ; rdi/, no. 20. — ydbh, r. 4. — i without Da- 
 ghesh lene, i9. 14. 6. — del mixed syllable r. 6 ; -ri with Daghesh Je- 
 ne 29 11. a. 
 
 27. 1"'2 bin ; 2 with Daghesh lene 29. 14. o; Yodh quiescent 23. 2; 
 mixed syllable r. 5 ; — "J^nn u-bhm ; m, r. 1 . — ^ without Daghesh lene 
 29. 14. i.— "^i'nn, no. 12. 
 
 Verse 5. 
 
 28. N'lp'T vdy-yiq-rd; ray, no. 20. — yiq, r. 4. — N^,no. 2. — D'i'^yom; 
 Y8dh moveable 23. 4. a ; mixed syllable r. 5. 
 
 29. vfld-hhO-sliekh ; Id with long Pattahh no. 23. — qd-rd inV'^b Idy-ld^ 
 25. l.a, note 3; vd-yihl Ve-rebh^ V wdth Seghol pure and short 21. 10, 
 12. — vd-yfhi bho-qer ydm THN tie-hhddh^ with long Seghol because Da- 
 ghesh forte in n is omitted 21. 9. 
 
 Verse 6. Vdy-yo-mer ti'^lo-hwi ythi ^'^p'^ ?-d-gi''y, Pattahh furtive 
 under y, 27. 2, bfikokh hdm-md-yim vi-hi mdbh-dil ben md-yim Id-md-yim. 
 
 Verse 7. Vdy-yd-Sds H^lo-him Heth hd-rd-qi^S^ Pattahh furtive under 
 2? 27. 2, vdy-ydbh-dH ben hdm-md-yim "^'viiN H'^sher, composite Sheva un- 
 der N 26. 5, vdt-td-hhdth^ Daghesh forte in Tav 29. 1, Pattahh pure and 
 short 21. 8, Id-rd-ql^y u-bhen hdm-md-yim i^ashermt-'Sdl Id-rd^qi'^S vd- 
 yihl, 2 ^ith long Pattahh no. 23, khen. 
 
 Verse 8. Vdy-yiq-rd ^'^lo-hlm ld-rd-ql"!fi shdrmd-yvm vd-ythi Ve-rehh 
 vd-yfhi bhu-qer yijm she-ni. 
 
 Verse 9. Vdy-yu-mer H^td-him yiq-qd-vu^ the first Vav moveable 23. 
 4. a, the second quiescent 23. 2, hdm-md-yim mit-td-hhdth lidsh-shd^ndy 
 yim ml md-qOm e-hhddh vfthe-rd-He hdy-ydb-bd-shd vd-yeht khen. 
 
 Verse 10. Vdy-yiq-rd H''l6-him Idy-ydb-bd-shd He-rets u-limiq-^e 
 hdin-md-yim qd-rd ydm-mtm vdy-ydr (no. 24) i^Ho-htm ki-tobh. 
 
PART III. 
 
 MUTATIONS OF THE CONSONANTS AND 
 VOWELS. 
 
 I. OF THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 39. Orthographical commutations of consonants. 
 
 That consonants of a similar sound, or which are piKv 
 nounced with the same organs, should occasionally be ex- 
 changed for each other both in writing and speaking, is 
 an occurrence which is common in all languages. In He- 
 brew this occasionally happens, and letters are commuted 
 for each other in the following manner. See Ges. Lex. 
 under the several letters. 
 
 1. Letters of the same organ. 
 
 (tt) Labials. 15, Sa and V\^j, the back ; i<"'-)« and N"'^2 fat ; t2btt 
 .and £3^E to escape ; Sept. Ao^ivci for Heb. n;iV SChron. 21: 10. 
 
 (6) Palatals. "niD and "IDD to shut up ; ''^y'^ and Its'! to travel 
 about ; 5>5is and ^i^p <* handle. 
 
 (c) Linguals. Of these only n, t: and 1 are interchanged ; as 
 ;)Kn and ;^nn to rob; i2^n for nsiinn (§ 41. l. d). 
 
 {d) Denials, tb^, D^^ and yby to exult ; pyj and p^S to cry out ; 
 pniy and pniw to laugh. 
 
 (e) Gutturals. oN3 and nn3 to be pusillanimous ; DSN and DW* to 
 he mournful. 
 
 2. Letters of a diiferent organ. 
 
 (a) Sibilants are commuted for linguab., i. e. the sibilation is drop'- 
 pod, and the letter is pronounced without it. E. g. ^^T and ^i"^ to 
 
§ 40, COMMUTATIONS OF CONSONANTS. 99 
 
 quench., where f = ds and the sound of 5 is dropped ; "^^S and "il22 to 
 watch over^ where ^ = ts ; "iii'na and ni-^a ajir tree ; ttinn and nnn to 
 engrave. So in Greek, x^Q'''-^^^ '^^^ '/^(jutto). 
 
 (5) The liquids b, ^, 3, n are sometimes commuted. E. g. ynb and yna 
 to oppress ; '-''ni:n and "l^ni^n to cause to shine ;* "ja'^y and DtJ*>y to hate ; 
 13173 and Ui: to totter ; "jD^ and n^y Achar^^dL proper name. But these 
 changes are very unfrequent, 
 
 (c) The Ehevi,^ when moveable. E. g. D^Nl'iVa and Q"'^_Vr2 rags ; SNT 
 and 37.iT Doeg., a proper name ; Y^~ '*f^<l Icr '^ ^^' ^*^^ ^'^^ exchange 
 of the vowel-letters when really quiescent, see § 49. 
 
 (r/) The Ehevi and A*«?i, which is a kind of semi-vowel. E. g. SS^ and 
 2^3 to place ; HN^ and HNJ to be beautiful. So future Kal Irtjp";, but in 
 Syriac uniformly ~it3p:. 
 
 Note. The above changes principally concern lexicography, and 
 serve to direct philological disquisition. They do not affect the 
 grammatical forms of the words in question ; but the knowledge of 
 them is very useful to the student, in order to give him a proper 
 view of the essential nature of the Hebrew letters. If he know what 
 letters are correlative., or what letters are commuted for each other, 
 then, when he does not find satisfaction in the explanation of any 
 particular word, he may investigate its correlates, i. e. those words 
 which contain letters that are occasionally commuted with the let- 
 ters of the word in question. 
 
 § 40. Grammatical commutations of consonants. 
 
 The following commutations of the consonants, on the other hand, 
 respect merely grammatical forms, or the changes which are pro- 
 duced in letters in consequence of inflection. 
 
 1. In the conjugation Hithpael of verbs beginning 
 with 2, the n of tlie prajformative DH is changed into D, 
 and transposed with the 2. E. g. Kal p^S, Hithpael 
 pTJSn instead of p'^^Sfin. (§ 80. 2. a). 
 
 This usage prevails in all the kindred dialects of the Hebrew. 
 The immediate concurrence of two t'* is thus avoided, viz. one in 
 n and one in ^ = ts. 
 
 • The Chinese, and many tribes of Ihe American savages, have no r anH 
 speak / for it. The Japanese have no / and speak r for it. 
 
100 §41. ASSIMILATION OF CONSONAIJTS. 
 
 2. He quiescent at the end of words is changed into 
 Tav^ when the word receives an accession or is in regimen 
 (S 135) ; as TO\ fern. nnV^ ; Hpl^, in regimen i. e. be- 
 fore the genitive, rij?12. 
 
 In Arabic the feminine ending is ri-, and corresponds to the He- 
 brew irt_ ; and in Syriac N and n are often interchanged, as ^mnf* 
 for 'nnNDN. No satisfactory reason, however, has yet been given 
 for this change of li into n, which so extensively prevails in the 
 Shemitish languages. 
 
 § 41. Assimilation of consonants. 
 
 The assimilation of a preceding letter to a succeeding one, in 
 order to avoid harshness of sound or to facilitate utterance, is com- 
 mon in most languages. Thus in Greek avXXai.t(3ui/o) for ovvkafi- 
 ffufco, Xtliii.if.iac for ?JXso7Tfiac &.c. In Latin illustris for inlustris, dif- 
 fusus for disfusuSf collabor for conlabor &c. 
 
 1. Several Hebrew letters are occasionally assimilat- 
 ed in the same manner. 
 
 (a) JVim most frequently of all. E. g. riTtt for nTD^jfrowi. this, UJ5^ 
 for UJa3\ This is very common in verbs "JO (§ 113. t ), but not 
 universal. 
 
 {b) Lamedh rarely. Probably in the article bn in all cases (§ 65) ; 
 as 'Dl'q-^ri for n'^'a'ii brr &c. (Comp. Arabic article bN.) Also in 
 the verb njl^ ; as future nj^"^ for npb";. 
 
 (c) Resh very seldom. In "TiiiN, as ^"'InyiiJ instead of ^"^i^^ 'n'^N wJio 
 will be ; M53 for NO'ID, which is the form of the word in Syriac and 
 Arabic. 
 
 {d) Tav, in the praeformative rrt in Hithpael often assimilates it- 
 self to the first radical of the verb, when that radical is 1 or D ; some- 
 times, when it is t, 3, D, 'n, or w. E. g. 'nsir! for "laiirin &c. (§ 80. 
 2. 6,c.) 
 
 (e) Mem only in a few foreign words ; as ^"^sb for T'S^b, in Greek 
 /.ui.nT(x.dag. 
 
 {f) Yodh in some verbs '^D (§ 112). 
 
 2. The student will perceive that the assimilated let- 
 
§ 42. CONSONANTS DROPPED. 101 
 
 ter is marked, in all the iorcgoing cases, by a Daghesh 
 forte in the letter to which it is assimilated. 
 
 3. But in cases Avhere the letter to ^vhich a preceding 
 letter is assimilated comes at the end of a word, this Da- 
 ghesh is necessarily omitted : because a Daghesh f( rtc 
 cannot be written or spoken at the end of" a word. (§ 29. 
 18. a. § 45. 3.) 
 
 (a) A''tin before Tav at the end of a word, frequently falls out<in 
 this way ; as nr for n;r. to give ; ?N for »i:X anger ; n.^ for DZZ davghr 
 ter^ feminine of "jS son ; n'3>< for rr'a^J truth ; nn^ for ri:P'^ gift. 
 
 (6) Dalclh before Tav ; as nV for n"ib to bear children; rinN for 
 mrM one, feminine of 1~ii. 
 
 (c) Tav before another Tav ; as nnu;^ for feminine nnr.xa cor- 
 rupted., D'^'C'O for feminine nrc/.L'D sercing. 
 
 NoTK 1. Instances like the foregoing' are very unfrequent, ex- 
 cepting the case a; but the principle which is concerned in them 
 should be exhibited and explained, so that uhen they do occur, the 
 student may be able to satisfy himself respecting them. 
 
 Note 2. In all the above cases, on account of the Daghesh being 
 omitted in the letter to which the one which is dropped is assimilat- 
 ed, the tyro can find no certain index of assimilation. It is only an 
 acquaintance with the language, and especially with the principle of 
 assimilation, which will explain to him these apparent anomalies. 
 They are usually noted in the best lexicons. 
 
 Note 3. As those letters only which have a furtive Seghol (§ 59. 
 2) are dropped in this way, the conclusion is, that this species of 
 Seghol was not very distinctly pronounced ; otherwise no cacopho- 
 ny arising from the pronunciation would have required the omission 
 of a consonant. For it is only when two consonants come together, 
 without an intervening distinct vowel-sound, that there arises a harsh- 
 ness of utterance. 
 
 § 42. Consonants dropped. 
 
 This sections treats of the omission of those letters only, which 
 would be moveable if inserted. For the omission and apocope of 
 the Ehevi when quiescent, see §§ 49, 50. 
 
 14 
 
10? § 42, CONSONANTS DROPPED. 
 
 The feeble consonants, jDartlcularlj the Ehevi and the 
 Hqulds, are sometimes dropped. 
 
 1. At the beginning of words, bj Aphaeresis^ when 
 they have a Sheva under them. 
 
 (o) Aleph. E. g. ^:n\ for ^^n"; N tt-e ; c^ii: for D'"i;:N women ; '^T\ for 
 nnN one (with Seghol) ; "19 and •■4: for T^N who or wAtc^ ; D'^TSnlTT the 
 Syrians for D'^/3"^Nn, the f1 being' only the article and Nl beginning the 
 word. This is very common in Aramaean, Rabbinic, and vulgar Arabic. 
 
 (fe) Yodh. E. g. "lb for "5^7 imper. from "ib;^, and so commonly in 
 vei-bs "^3 (§ 109 &c.) ; b^z for ril'' provender^ n^'l for !^^■'^■^ knowl- 
 edge. 
 
 (c) Lamedh very seldom. E. g. tlj? usual imper. for HJ^b, from 
 np.b. (§ 114. IV. G.) 
 
 {d) Mem. Often in participles beginning with this letter ; as nj>b 
 for nj:b72 ^flA-cH. (§ 90. 2.) 
 
 (e) A'fm. E. g. "jri for ]ri3 imper. from 'jri;, and so commonly in 
 verbs js. (§113 &c.) 
 
 Note. A few words (and only a few) suffer an aphaeresis of letters 
 which have vowels. E. g. T^ for T^'^ Judg. 19: 11 ; ~rn for Snrna 
 2 Sam. 22: 41 (comp. Ps. 18: 41) ; :ir:j for ^rCJl Jer. 42: 10. 
 
 2. In tlie middle of words, by Sijncope, when pre- 
 ceded by a Sheva ; in which case, the vowel of the let- 
 ter dropped is always transferred to the letter that pre- 
 cedes, and takes the place of the Sheva. 
 
 (a) Aleph. E. g. rib?: for >lb>V» part. Piel from >\bii; J^b"^ for tlb^'J 
 request. 
 
 {b) He very frequently. E. g. fut. Niph. nrb"; for l^br-; ; fut. 
 Hiph. ";^rb: for Ti^br^: ; fut. Hithpa. Tabn^ for nJsrnr;* (§88.'3.) 
 
 So when the article comes after a prefix preposition ; as '^b.'sb 
 
 for ^b7?"^5 i^y^ ^^i" "v^"=?; Tv?? ^^r YvH^? ^c. (§ 61. 6.) 
 
 Note. In all such cases of verbs and nouns, the syncope of the Ti is 
 
 the common usage ; and the occasional retaining of it is classed among the 
 
 anomalies. 
 
 (c) Vav very seldom. E.g. ''J' for ''"/J ruins., ^H for """iNl ishmd.,'"2 
 
 for "^"^2 brand. 
 
 {d) Yodh. E.g. nba forT'ba, and so often in verbs hb. (§ 122 &.C.) 
 
§ 43. CONSONANTS ADDED TO WORDS. 103 
 
 (<•) .lyin very seldom. E. g. rs for ]:y2 = b^5 iJaf//,- "•:: lor ""r^ / 
 pray you. 
 
 Note. In some few cnses, confraclion takes place in the middle of 
 words where a Sheva does not precede. E. g. rit: for ~ZiJ_ mouthy ri'i) 
 for """15 lamb. 
 
 .3. At the end of words, by ,/lpocope. 
 
 («) Mem in the regimen of all masc. plurals.* (§ 135. 2.) 
 
 (6) Ahh, when a plural ending and in regimen (§ 135. 2). Also at 
 
 the end of some proper names in "ji — ; as i-573 for ')T~3'2 ; perhaps 
 
 rir^-i; for "i*'::"'^. 
 
 (c) ri_ as a quiescent, very frequently. See in § 50. I. 
 
 § 43. Consonants added to zoords. 
 
 The present section treats of those letters only, which are move- 
 ohle. For an account of the manner in which the Ehevi when qui- 
 escent are added to words, see § 50. II. 
 
 1. At the beginning of words, by Prosthesis, in a few 
 words which begin with two moveable consonants. 
 
 («) Jlleph. E.g. n/3ri, "::T?3riN yesterday; ^'IT, i"i-iTN «r?7i ,• "^TS 
 'nt^N cruel k.c. More seldom is it, that N prosthetic is used before 
 words which begin with one consonant. E. g. ]3J< for ]3. Comp. in 
 Greek X^^^i ^'/.^^^'^ ^'^'^ ^^6 Latin sjnritus and French esprit fcc. 
 
 {h) He. E. g. in Hithpael Vuj^nr?. The fie is merely prosthetic 
 here, as the corresponding Arabic shows, which omits it. The pros- 
 thetic He is used in all the forms of Hithpael, which have no praefor- 
 mative letter. 
 
 2. In tlie middle of words, by Epenihesis. 
 
 (a) He in the plural of a few words. E. g. n^N a maid, plural 
 
 (6) JVwre between the future tenses of verbs and their suffixes. E. g. 
 •rjrprN for "J^ni* (§ 12G.;f. ). This epenthesis is common. 
 
 * So in Latin, 7n at the end of a word and before another hnpinnins; with a 
 vowel, suffers apocope. Quinctihan says of it, — eliam.ii scrihitur.^ lamcn parum 
 
 erprimitur, ohscuralur., el tantum aliqua inter duas locales vtlut no'la eet^ 
 
 ne ipsae co'eanl. Inst. Orat, ix. 4. { 40. 
 
104 § 44. TRANSPOSITION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 (c) In later Hebrew, we find "^^CIi^ put for ^l^iljP, where the Da- 
 ghesh is resolved into Nun ; p"^"!^"!"!! ^or P'?'^^, where the Dagheshis 
 resolved into Rcsh. 
 
 Such epentheses are common in Chaldee ; but are unfrequent in 
 Hebrew, excepting- the c;t«e h. Compare d epenthetic in the Latin 
 prodeo ; (3 in the Greek ^^i^knui, &c. 
 
 3. At the end of words, by Paragoge. 
 
 JVun is frequently adde;l to those forms of the future tense of 
 verbs which end with ^ and ■»_, but without any change of their 
 meaning'. 
 
 For the effect of this paragogic IVun on the tone-syllable and on 
 the preceding letters and vowels of the word to which it is append- 
 ed, see § 35. 2. § 123. I. h. 
 
 § 44. Transposition of consonants » 
 
 A considerable number of words exhibit a transposi- 
 tion of letters, without a change of signification. The ibl- 
 lowing are the classes of letters which are most frequent- 
 ly transposed. 
 
 1. The sibilants and Resh. 
 
 E. g. 5:03 and ^30 to be foolish^ n'l53 and iunS; a lamb^ t\tz and XQS to 
 breathe, ^^S and y"iS to break, D1~J and Syr. and Arab. 112"^ to wink Sac. 
 
 2. The quiescents with 7, D, and with each other. 
 
 E. g. !nibi* and Tlb"^,^ wickedness, p:N and pN; to sigh, ni"^i<.?, and 
 SniN|^3 vallies, perhaps nin^ra and riV?n3 terrors &c. 
 
 3. The liquids. 
 
 E. g. rroVvP and fibato a garment kc. 
 
 See also the transpositions in Hithpael § 80. 2. a. 
 
 The transpositions noticed in this section belong, however, 
 rather to the province of the lexicon than of the. grammar. A 
 good Hebrew lexicon will explain the detail, under particular 
 words. The principle of the transpositions in question is not an ex- 
 tensive one in Hebrew, and has been much abused by some lexicog- 
 raphers. It is important for the student to know that such a princi- 
 ple, in a moderate extent, does exist. Its origin must be traced to 
 vulgar usage, which makes such transpositions. Thus in Greek, 
 
§ 45. CONSONANTS WHICH ARE NEVER DOUBLED. 105 
 
 MttOTfQog is changed into x^juriijog ; av(jiCio into the Doric avfjtadw 
 &.C. In English, cupalo is ;i vulgar word lor cupola k.c. 
 
 *§ 45. Consonants zuhich arc never doubled. 
 
 It shoulil 1)0 borne in mind that when a letter is doubled, the first 
 of tli;' two letters is commonly expressed by a Daghesh forte (§ 29. 1) 
 inserted in the second letter. The present section, therefore, may 
 be considered as pointing out the cases where Daghesh I'orte essential 
 is omitted. 
 
 1. The gutturals were never doubled, on account of 
 tlio diOiculty which this would have occasioned in pro- 
 nouncing them. Daghesh therefore is never found in the 
 gutturals. 
 
 2. Resh commonly was not doubled. 
 
 A (avf instances are found, however, of Resh doubled, i. e. with 
 Daghesh forte. E. g. n'^3, ^'^;^, rn» &,c. 
 
 3. Letters are not doubled, i. c. do not take Daghesh, 
 at the end of words. (§ 29. 18. a. § 41. 2.) 
 
 The Hebrews, agreeably to this canon, wrote ns instnad of na 
 for n;2, (comp. § 41.3. a.) So 12>:';] is written instead of ^x'^T where 
 the 1 at the end has a Daghesh forte (§ 55. 2). See examples in § 41. 
 3, and verbs yy § 1 15. 2. 
 
 4. After a mixed syllable, the doubling, i. e. the Da- 
 ghesh forte, IS frequent! ij omitted. 
 
 E. g. nnp/; for irj?";, in^n for in^n. Orthography admits both 
 forms, i. e. both with and without Daghesh. 
 
 Note 1 . This omission of Daghesh is not uncommon in the Alt. Kal 
 of verbs -|S (§ 114. I. c) ; as ^'S'C\^ instead of iiyD-^T from yD3 Ex. 12: 
 37 ; nN'D'.T for ^N^'T Gen. 7 : 17. So also in verbs 'yj § 116. \Y. d.. 
 
 Note 2. In a similar manner Daghesh is sometimes omitted in nouns, 
 when in the course of declension &.c. the letter in which it stood comes 
 to have a Shcva ; as N33, '^Np3 Ps. 45: 7, where the Daghesh is drop- 
 ped to avoid an impossible syllable (§ 26. 1). Sometimes also without 
 this necessity ; as 5?D?5, Dn-yoa Ex. 17 : 1 ; pIST, ^^j-^ST Is. 57: 8. 
 
 ^140 note 1. 
 
106 § 46. GUTTURALS. 
 
 Note 3. The omission of Daghesh in such cases is marked, in some 
 instances, by the use of a composite Sheva instead of a simple one, un- 
 der the letter in which Daghesh is omitted ; as iinj^b instead of 
 rjnjpb Gen. 2: 23. ^bbn:: instead of ^bV"":] Gen. 12: 15 ; see the next 
 paragraph. 
 
 5. Regularly Daghesh is omitted in a letter which 
 is followed by the same letter; as vVn for T^hV]. 
 
 The omission of Daghesh in such cases is merely orthographic. 
 The word is read as though Daghesh were written (§ 26. 6./). See 
 the preceding note. 
 
 6. Yodh and Vav with Sheva under them commonly 
 (not always) reject Daghesh forte, i. e. are not doubled. 
 
 E. g. ''I^'^l for ■'m'^i, d"^~\'i:j' for D"'"n^y &c. On the contrary, d''b.2'"^ll 
 &c. with Daghesh. The former examples are merely an ortho- 
 graphic conformity to the vulgar pronunciation, which inclines to 
 the abridgment of words. 
 
 Note 1. The later Hebrew orthography not unfrequently sub- 
 stitutes a long vowel instead of Daghesh with a short one ; as 
 D'^^'^-jVo for Canitt, "iiJ^.i-s for ^^.b.Q &c. This is very common in 
 Chaldee, and in KabLuuic Hebrew. 
 
 Note 2. Vice versa, instead of a long vowel, the later orthogra- 
 phy sometimes writes Daghesh forte with a short one ; as D''."tD for 
 D''rD, D-'i::^ for U'^-J.'^ll he. 
 
 *§ 46. Gutturals', effect on preceding vowels. 
 
 J. The gutturals and Resh not admitting reduplica- 
 tion (§ 45), the preceding vowel is lengthened as a com- 
 pensation for Daghesh forte excluded. (§ 23. 7, 8.) 
 
 E. g. '^-\z for ""ysz-i D3;'7j for Ci;7j. 
 
 Before ti and n, Pattahh commonhj remains ; as blTir for b~2, 
 D"«nN for D'^nN In all such cases, Pattahh, Seghol &ic. are really 
 long and impure. (§ 21. 7, 9, 12, 18.) 
 
 2. Instead of simple Sheva, the gutturals commonly 
 (not always) take a composite Sheva. 
 
 E.g. &\7l:N instead of d^7Vw^:; n'^ay;; instead of na?"; or nai'2 &c. 
 
§ 17. QUIESCENT LETTERS. 107 
 
 But we have also "'pyT"', -SHN &.c. i. c. giittnrals witli sim[)le 
 Sheva. It should be paiticuUirly uuled, that the gutturals never take 
 a vocal Sheva simple, but always substitute in its place a composite 
 Sheva. A silent Sheva simple, howevfTT, is not unfrequently placed 
 under them ; yet never except afier a short vo'Ji'el, and when the gutturals 
 stand at the end oja mixed sijUuble. 
 
 Resh sometimes admits a composite Sheva, but not oftener than 
 most of the other consonants. 
 
 3. The gutturals and Resli very generally take a Pat- 
 tahh» particularly in a final syllable, in preference to any 
 other mutable vowel ; probably because they were utter- 
 ed more easily with Pattahh. 
 
 E. g. Future Kal i"^"!""] instead of VTZ'^I ; Pie! S^'^a instead of 
 ?52 S:c. 
 
 4!--?c But if the vowel in the final syllable where they oc- 
 cur be immutable, then the gutturals take a Pattahh j^r- 
 tive (§ 27) in order to ease the pronunciation. 
 E. g. ^n^-r, ^•"'72^^ &.C. 
 ti'1^. Resh never takes Pattahh furtive ; and in regard to the syllable 
 in which it occurs, though it inclines to the use of Pattahh, like the 
 gutturals, yet it frequently adopts the common forms. 
 
 § 47. Quiescent letters ; cases where they quiesce. 
 (Comp. § 23.) 
 
 The fact that these letters quiesce, and in what vowels, has beea 
 considered in § 23. The design of the present section is, to show 
 in what position or -jaken quiescence happens to them, and the lawe 
 in accordance with which their consonant-power ceases. 
 
 N. B. As the principles exhibited in this section are fundament- 
 al in respect to all the verbs, nouns, and adjectives, which are irreg- 
 ular by reason of quiescents, the student should not fail to make him- 
 self most thoroughly acquainted with them. This is by far the short- 
 est method of obtaining a correct understanding of the irregularities 
 in question. 
 
 tl. The Ehevi quiesce in a homogeneous vowel, when 
 
108 § 47. QUIESCENT LETTERS. 
 
 according to the analogy of other consonants, they would 
 stand at the end of a mixed syllable, or have a silent She- 
 va expressed or implied under them. 
 
 E. g. !"^'^1n■'2 instead of Jinnn^a; ita^"; instead of iu"^';; S'^Nb in- 
 stead of -I'^i^b ; auinn instead of npiri. 
 
 This rule is universal for Vav and Yodh, and for Aleph at the 
 end of words. But n in the middle of words frequently retains its 
 character as a guttural (§ 46. 2). E. g. PJCN^. instead of PJON'^. 
 When N quiesces here it reads P]ON'^, where N quiesces in Hholem. 
 
 t He quiesces only in a final syllable (§ 23. 2), and al- 
 ways quiesces there unless it have a Mappiq. (§ 30.) 
 
 t In the cases above, it is taken for granted that the 
 vowel preceding the quiescent is homogeneous ; but if it 
 be heterogeneous^ the Ehevi retain their consonant power. 
 E. g. inlblS? 5>di)-Za, d''3"'tt'^» may-ml-nvm &c. (§ 23. 5.) 
 
 t2. Aleph, Vav, and Yodh commonly (not always) qul- 
 esce, when according to the analogy of other consonants, a 
 Sheva would immediately precede them. 
 
 E. g. ni<'^ instead of nsip. 
 
 In such cases, the preceding Sheva is dropped, and the vowel 
 belonging to the quiescent comes into its place ; as C^uiN"^ instead of 
 a'^'ilJN'n; "Jv^tiN"! instead of 'ji;i;N'n ; "ijia instead of SN2 ; JT1N2 instead 
 of nnN2 ; n^p instead oi TO.'p. ; ini\Nl instead of !nn;'N &c. 
 
 Note. The above principle of contraction is carried so far, that 
 in a few cases vowel-letters preceded by Sheva even destroy a pre- 
 vious syllable, in order that they may throw back their vowel on 
 the preceding letter and quiesce in it. E. g. ^ID^V^ instead of the 
 regular InSN^'a riN'npb instead of riw^'^pb; 'n'>l^Nbn instead of "i^iiNrn. 
 
 t3 Vav and Yodh at the end of words, when a Sheva 
 or a furtive vowel precedes them, uniformly go into qui- 
 escence. 
 
 This is effected by changing the preceding vowel, and accommo- 
 dating it to the final quiescent. 
 
§ 47. QUIESCF.NT LETTERS. 109 
 
 E. g. •'fnMnsteacl of *^"' ; '^"^d instead of 1''nD ; titin instead of "irin; 
 in'a instead of Tiia; inn\2J*T instead of "inn'ii'l the apoc. form of 
 njnn-^iv (193. VI. b.) ' 
 
 On the contrary, Aleph remains in otio at the end of a word, when 
 preceded by Sheva. E. g. N"):;}, Nan Sic. (§ 123. I. d.) 
 
 Note. The principle of quiescence in nos. 2 and 3 is the same ; 
 but in no. 3, the quiescent letter standing at the end of a word, and 
 having no vowel of its own to throw back upon the preceding let- 
 ter, and thus provide for ifs own quiescence, as is the case in no. 2, 
 resort is had to the various expedients just described. The Hebrew 
 language does not admit of a moveable Vav or Yodh at the end of 
 words, when preceded only by a Sheva or by a furtive vowel. 
 
 t4. Aleph, Vav, and Yodh frcquendj qulesce, though 
 preceded and followed by a vowel. 
 
 E. g. dip instead of Dip qd-vdm; "J^a instead of ']|;2 bd-yen ; 'iilA'^ 
 instead of-^JN-^ ro-i^tnh ; riii:!^ instead ofni<2:733 nim'tse-aHh. 
 
 Note. In the last case, viz. that of a Segholate form (§ 59. 2), 
 the quiescence and consequent contraction always takes place if the 
 preceding vowel be homogeneous ; as T2;i<n instead of 'iJN'n ; n^b^ in- 
 stead of ni<r?3 ; niba instead of nVrr &c. But if the preceding 
 vowel he heterogeneous, iheB the contraction does not take place; 
 as ni^o, rr'a. Quiescence is admitted here only by necessity, in or- 
 der to mark the construct state of nouns. (§14-3 . ©«€. V". «<•".) 
 
 5. Peculiarities of Aleph. 
 
 t(a) When Aleph with a composite Sheva is immedi- 
 ately preceded by a simple syllable with the corresponding 
 short vowel, this vowel is frequently lengthened and Aleph 
 goes into quiescence. 
 
 E. g. WTSNr for SttwNiV. ; Criir^b for b'^HrN?. as it is often written; 
 niN: for mN3 Niph. ofVnN ; i^iN" for bi:^"' fut. Hiph. of b^N &c. 
 
 (6) In the beginning of a word, when a composite 
 Sheva belongs to it, Aleph not unfrequently takes a cor- 
 responding long vowel. 
 
 15 
 
no §48. QUIESCENTS ; RELATION TO PRECEDING VOWELS. 
 
 Instead of (' ) is put ( ••) as tDQllN for latti'iN 
 
 — (.:) — (••) - ^^^. — ^-^. 
 
 — (t:) — (— ) - d^brjN — tj^VnN 
 
 Note. This is a Sjriasm. At the beginning- of a word, the Syr- 
 ians always enunciate Aleph and also Yodh with a proper vowel. 
 
 C. When two quiescents come together, and a vowel 
 between them is moved back or dropped (supra nos. 2, 4), 
 one of them is put in olio. (§ 23. 6.) 
 
 E. g. pi^'iz with T in olio instead of 'jiNi?; Dlt^b^ with 1 in otio 
 instead of niJib^ ; ^NIQ with N in otio instead ofbNiJ3. 
 
 7. A quiescent may again become moveable, if a 
 change of vowels or particular forms of words require it. 
 
 E. g. ^iUJ (for '~\)p) a beeve, plural t3'''^]iiJ shfva-nm. 
 
 § 48. Quiescents ; relation both to homogeneous and heteroge- 
 neous vozoels. 
 
 tl. In order to admit of quiescence the preceding 
 vowel must be homogeneous ; and if the vowel be short, 
 it is of course lengthened by the quiescent. (§ 23. 3.) 
 
 E g. SaNb instead of S»N^ ; b^N^ instead of b2£N2 ; SD"*'^ in- 
 stead of nq^^ &c. (§ 47.) 
 
 Pattahh and Seg'hol sometimes remain before a quiescent letter, 
 but are prolonged (§ 23. 3) ; as DN-lpb for DN'ljPb, rriN!:;^ for 
 n3Nb». (§ 47. 2 note.) 
 
 The future Kal of verbs t<D exhibits an exception to the above 
 rule (comp. § 47. 5. a) ; as b^N"^ instead of b^.N^, by the rule b^N^^. 
 
 Note. How to determine whether the long vowel should be 
 Tseri or Hhirer magnum when Yodh quiesces, or Hholem or Sliureq 
 when V^av quiesces, can be learned only from practice. 
 
 t2. If the preceding vowel be heterogeneous, the case 
 is managed in two ways in order to effect a quiescence. 
 
 (a) The vowel confoi'ms to the quiescent. 
 E. g. i'^TiJTh instead ofi''*iJT^t (Vav receiving Hholem or Shurcq 
 § 23); Tl^'-)): instead of In"; "lb ; ribii? instead of Ji^l^; nva instead of 
 
§ 49. QUIESCENTS ; COMMUTATION AND OMISSION. Ill 
 
 (b) The quiescent conforms to the vowel. 
 
 E. g. Uap or Dp instead of a^ip, Vav being changed into Alcph 
 which is often dropped; n"*^, instead of Dltt, \'av into Vodh ; rtirO 
 instead of I^UJ, V^av into He ; l-i!:^'; instead of "'^^J';, Yodh into He. 
 
 Note 1. The case a is the most common. In fc, the vowel is 
 retained because it is essential to the characteristic form of the 
 words, and the quiescent is therefore made to conform to it. 
 
 Note 2. The vowel-letters (n n •') in cases whore tliey are move- 
 able, sometimes conform to the vowel-points of the preceding sijlla- 
 ble ; as D^NaiC instead of n'''^:ns, where Aleph is put for \'av because 
 of the preceding Qamets; d^.J? instead of Dip, Zi'^p_ instead of S^iri, 
 where Vodh is put fo rV'av because of the preceding Hhireq. This 
 is very common in the Arabic. 
 
 §49. Quiescents ; commulaiion and omission. 
 
 1. As the same vowels are homogeneous to several 
 of the qulescents (§ 2.3. 2), a variety of orthography has 
 arisen in regard to the quiescents, without occasioning, 
 however, any dliTerence in the pronunciation. 
 E. g. N_ is put for n_, 
 
 *<- — 
 N_ — 
 
 6i- — 
 
 i- 
 
 2. The quiescents are often wholly omitted, the pro- 
 nunciation remaining the same. ( § 24.) 
 
 In many words, custom authorizes the omission of the quiescents 
 uniformly. In others usage is variable. In some they are scarcely 
 ever omitted. 
 
 3. Daghesh euphonic sometimes occasions the omission 
 of a quiescent. 
 
 J^T. 
 
 as 
 
 T -l-r 
 
 for 
 
 J^rt^p 
 
 J^-r., 
 
 - 
 
 ^:.py. 
 
 — 
 
 nipa 
 
 n^., 
 
 - 
 
 «:•!;■; 
 
 — 
 
 nDTp"; 
 
 
 - 
 
 ND 
 
 — 
 
 rrs 
 
 ^-' 
 
 - 
 
 -^R'3 
 
 — 
 
 Ntp'a 
 
 N-., 
 
 - 
 
 ST^.S 
 
 — 
 
 Nl.? 
 
 N-, 
 
 - 
 
 ■^in 
 
 — 
 
 •^N*» 
 
 ^'-1 
 
 - 
 
 TtJ^ 
 
 — 
 
 rfiu:^ 
 
 N-r., 
 
 - 
 
 Cn 
 
 — 
 
 DNn 
 
 *<-:, 
 
 - 
 
 'jiuJ-'-j 
 
 — 
 
 plliN") 
 
112 §50. QUIESCENTS ; APOCOPE AND PARAGOGE. 
 
 E. g. nT."Sl^ mdz-ze^ written also 11172 &c. (§ 29. 8. a). 
 On the exchange of the quiescents for each other when moveable 
 consonants, see § 39. 2. c. 
 
 § 50. Quiescents ; apocope and pa?'agoge. 
 
 This section treats only of those letters which are really quies- 
 cent. For the apocope and paragoge of moveable letters, see §§ 42, 43. 
 
 /. Apocope. 
 
 1. In the future of verbs Ti?-, and m the apocopated 
 
 iiiiperative, 5l_ and n_- fall away. (§ 123. I. d, III. d.) 
 
 E. g. fut. ti^r.^";, apocopated ira"; or !:5^ ; Piel imper. ti^.a, apoco- 
 pated ^a &,c. 
 
 2. The same apocope occurs In nouns derived from 
 these verbs, especially when they receive increase. (§ l4l'« 
 Dec. IX.) 
 
 //. Paragoge. 
 
 Paragogic letters are either orthographic, or they serve to lengthen 
 out woiyis. 
 
 3. Aleph paragogic after ■*_, % and 1, is often merely 
 
 orthographic. 
 
 E. g. N"*!?: the same as "pi ; N12'^ the same as ia'n ; Nib the same 
 as lb. The Arabians always write an orthographic Aleph after a Var 
 quiescent at tlie end of a word. In Hebrew this seldom happens. 
 
 4. Several paragogic letters, with their vowels, serve 
 
 to lengthen out words. 
 
 (rt) -_ . E. g. d?7., by parag. !i72!rJ ; ^fi (fem. pron.) by parag. JlSlTt. 
 Also in verbs ; see §§ 91, 92. § 34. 2. h notes. 
 
 {b) n_ . E. g. 'jrt (interjection), by parag. TllTl ; "''^N, ln:."lN. 
 
 (c) M_ . E. g. bN, by parag. nbij ; eiN, MUJN. Also in verbs ; see 
 as above under a. 
 
 {d) i-. E. g. D:., by parag. iJzl mostly in suffixes (§§ 126, 135); 
 J^'H? by parag. in":r;. (Comp. § 40. 2. § 45. 4.) 
 
§§51,52. vowels; mutation etc. 1|." 
 
 (f) ^_ . E. g. D'^pa, by panxg. "Q";:^ ; b'^eUJ^, '^):''2'>13a ; "inN?., 
 ••-i-^kV: Ex. 15: 6. 
 
 For the tone-syllable of words which receive the above paragogic 
 letters, see § 34. 2. h kc. 
 
 Note 1. In none of the preceding cases does the paragogic letter 
 affect the signification of the word to which it is appended. Compare 
 the last example in e, Ex. 15: 6 and in verse 11. 
 
 Note 2. Pronominal suffixes to verbs and nouns, corresponding as 
 to appearance with most of the above paragogic forms, are also em- 
 ployed, and are treated of in §§ 126, 135. The termination n_ ap- 
 pears also as a local preposition, indicating motion to a place. (§ 157.) 
 
 5. A paragogic letter is most frequently added to the 
 const met state of nouns (§ 135). It also appears often in 
 compound words, i. c. proper names ; as 7^{''"li^=7^{ ID-l 
 7nan of Gael, the first noun being in the construct state. 
 
 II. OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 § 51. Vozoels ; general causes of mutation. 
 
 The numerous changes of the Hebrew vowels are 
 fundamentally connected with the whole grammatical con- 
 struction of the language. They result from the lengthen- 
 ing and shortening of words ; the position of the tone-sylla- 
 ble ; the relation of nouns to each other ; euphony ; the placing 
 of xcords at the end of sentences ; and the influence of dialects. 
 
 § 52. Vozoels ; mulahlc and immutable. 
 
 In order to understand the following rules, it is necessary that the 
 student should have made himself familiar with the theory of pure 
 and impure, long and short vowels, as exhibited in § 21 ; with their or- 
 thography in connexion with the vowel-letters, as exhibited in § 24 ; 
 and with the theory of the coalescence of the Ehevi, the gutturals, 
 Resh &c. in the vowels, as exhibited in § 23. With the principles in 
 his mind which are there unfolded, he will be able to understand 
 without difficulty the following theory of the vowel-changes. 
 
114 §52. vowels; mutable and immutable. 
 
 /. Common usage in respect to vowel-cJianges. 
 
 tl. All impure vowels are long and immutable. 
 This is equally true of those which are called long, and of those 
 which are more usually short. E. g. Qamets, Tseri, Hhireq, Hholem, 
 and Shureq, having a quiescent or a guttural coalescing with them, are 
 immutable, whether the quiescent &c. be written out or not (§§ 21, 
 24). In the same manner, Pattahh, Seghol, and Qibbuts, when im- 
 pure, are equally immutable. Whether a vowel be impure and im- 
 mutable cannot, in many cases, be discerned merely from its appear- 
 ance ; because vowels after which the quiescents are omitted in writ- 
 ing (§ 24), or vowels after which a Daghesh forte has fallen out 
 (§ 21. 7,8), are of doubtful appearance in these respects. A knowl- 
 edge of etymology, declension, dialects &c. is often necessary, in order 
 to decide in respect to the pureness and consequent mutability of vowels. 
 
 t2. All pure vowels are mutable. 
 This is equally true of the long and of the short vowels. Long 
 vowels when pure may be shortened, and short vowels when pure 
 may be lengthened, i. e. long vowels when pure may be exchanged for 
 short ones, and vice versa. Gesenius has laid it down as a rule (large 
 Gram. § 44), that shor]t vowels before Daghesh forte, i. e. in a mixed 
 syllable, are immutable. But this is evidently erroneous. E. g. ?in2< 
 in pause nnN ; nni? in pause nn^ &c. where the short Pattahh is plain- 
 ly mutable. The fact inost evidently is, that as a general principle 
 all vowels ummxed with consonant-sounds^ and therefore piire^ are in their 
 nature mutable ; they may therefore be changed, whenever there is oc- 
 casion for it. This very simple theory appears to have been only 
 partially developed by the admirable grammarian just mentioned. 
 
 //. Particular usage in respect to vowel-clianges. 
 
 To preserve the form of a particular word is sometimes so impor- 
 tant, that in order to effect this purpose the common law respecting 
 the mutability of vowels is transgressed. 
 
 3. Where there is an accidenfal concurrence of a qui- 
 escent and a homogeneous vowel, and a coalescence takes 
 place in consequence of it, still, if declension require it, 
 such vowel is mutable. 
 
§ 52. VOWELS ; MUTABLE ANT) IMMUTABLE. 1 1 5 
 
 E. g. 3 pers. masc. ^ti:?2, so written by reason of the ^< instead of the 
 retnilnr form N^t'^ (§ 55- 3), hut 3 pers. fern. !nN^^ where the Qamets 
 under N is dropped, which sliews that it is mutable. So N'lp, with 
 suffix "'N'^p qor-ai, i. e. the Hholemof the final syllable is thrown back 
 and shortened into Qamets Hhateph, although in the ground-form it 
 quiesced in N. (§ 126. IV. note 6.) 
 
 4. Immutable vowels belonging to the same class arc 
 sometimes exchanged for each other, on account oi' their 
 relative length. (§ 21. 20.) 
 
 (a) Hholcm impure and Shureq. 
 
 E. g. Niph. 3 pers. sing. Dip3 with Hholem impure, but 2 pers. 
 niTanp:, 1 pers. ^ni^aipa &c. with Shureq. So infinitive absolute 
 rilTO "lio ; but infinitive construct n^tt, 11D kc. So also many words of 
 the form Di:^ &c. in the suffix-state, plural &c. take forms like "0^:73, 
 D-C^s^ &c. i. e. they substitute Shureq for Hholem impure. 
 (6) Tseri Impure and Hhlreq magnum. 
 
 E. g. Infin. abs. in Hiphil ^""topn or Vcipiri, infin. constr. (which is 
 shorter) b"'t3pn. So the plural noun I3"'t3"'~3 in regimen is "^p.'^bD &c. 
 
 Note. In both the above cases, the first vowel is relatively longer 
 than the second (§21. 20); and when abridgment of form is required 
 without throwing away an immutable vowel, a correlate vowel some- 
 what shorter is chosen. 
 
 If 
 
 .5. Shureq in the regular future of verbs 1^, is ex- 
 changed in the apocopated form for Plholem pure. (§ 118. 
 I. c.) 
 
 E. g. C^p, future Q^p^, apocopated form Dp^ which has a pure 
 Hholem, because with V"av prefixed it reads Cp 'T vdy-yd-qom with 
 short 0. This exchange is made to shorten the form in the apocopat- 
 ed state ; for Hholem pure is shorter than Shureq, although Hholem 
 impure would be longer than Shureq. (Supra. 4. a, and note.) 
 
 The same thing, in substance, takes place in some other cases in re- 
 gard to exchange of forms. The reason is, that to mark the particti- 
 lar form by some peculiar designation, is more important than to ob- 
 serve the general laws of the change of vowels. 
 
 6. Feminine endings in n_ are changed into ri_. in 
 regimen. (l35. 2.) 
 
 This results from the importance of marking the regimen-form ; 
 
116 § 53. VOWELS ; general principles op mutation. 
 
 in order to accomplish which, the common law of the immutability of 
 an impure vowel (in this case Jn_) is violated. 
 
 7. Composite Shevas with their corresponding short 
 vowels are sometimes exchanged for each other. 
 
 E. g. Dbi';3 part, masculine, but in the feminine Jil^abys, plural 
 t3^?3by:. So future SOit.^., with suffix ^s^Sn:: (§ 58. 3). The A sound 
 is shorter than the E sound, and when the word receives increase 
 is not unfrequently substituted for it. 
 
 Note. This change does not relate to the commutation of immutable 
 vowels for each other, and therefore does not rank under the same 
 class with no. 4. But as it is similar in its operation, and is occasioned 
 by a similar cause, it is here noticed on account of these resemblances^ 
 
 8. Besides the particular changes already noticed, 
 there are others which are occasioned by certain laws of 
 euphony, and by the position of words in sentences ; for 
 an account of which see § 60. In all languages there are 
 some anomalies, and in the Hebrew they are occasional- 
 ly found in respect to the vowels ; but this does not prove 
 that general rules respecting vowel-changes are not useful. 
 
 9. General Summary. 
 
 («) Immutahk. Qamets, Tscri, Hhireq magnum, Hho- 
 lem, Shureq, Pattahh, Seghol, Qibbuts, when impure. 
 
 (6) Mutable. Qamets, Tseri, Hholem, Pattahh, Seghol, 
 Hhireq parvum, Qamets Hhateph, Qibbuts, when pure. 
 
 The student should note, that Hhireq magnum and Shureq are 
 always impure ; and Hhireq parvum and Qamets Hhateph arc always 
 pure. All the other vowels may be pure or impure, and consequent- 
 ly mutable or immutable, according to their respective condition in 
 each particular word. 
 
 § 53. Vowels ; general principles of mutation. 
 
 tl. The exchange of the pure vowels for each other 
 is limited, almost exclusively, to the boundaries of the 
 classes to which they respectively belong. (§ 21. 22.) 
 
§ 51. vowels; change of long into short. 1J7 
 
 There are a very few apparent exceptions to this principle. E. g. 
 TO, plural D""^^ ; 3"^^^, plural d'^ij-^ia &.c. But even here, it is 
 perhaps more probable that the derivative forms come from TD, 3"7.tQ 
 &c. now obsolete. As to such cases as 2 person Hiph. n":rCi?r| from 
 3 person b'^LOJpn &.c. there is here rather a change of characteristics, 
 than an exchange of vowels. 
 
 t2. Tlie changes, almost without exception, respect 
 
 the pure vowels in the final and penult syllables of words, 
 
 as they exist In the ground-forni. * 
 
 § 54. Vowels) change of long into short. 
 
 tl. Long vowels are exchanged for short ones only 
 in mixed syllables, when the tone is removed. 
 
 As long vowels can usually stand in mixed syllables only when 
 they have the tone ; so, that tone being removed, it is evident "that 
 the long vowels must be shortened, when the syllable continues to 
 be a mixed one. (§ 37 rules 5, 6.) 
 
 Note. To shorten a vowel is different from dropping it. Thus in 
 *^'Z~ from ~\131 the first vowel is dropped^ the second is shortened, i. e ex- 
 changed for a short vowel. For an account of vowels dropped, see § 56. 
 
 t2. Long vowels are exchanged for short ones when 
 the tone is moved Jorward, i. e. towards the IcJt. This 
 happens in the following cases. 
 
 (fl) When the word receives any accession beghming 
 li'ith a consonant. 
 
 E. g. cinn-, ground-form "^31. Here the Qamets in **:2 goes into 
 Pattahh, and the first Qamets is dropped (§ 56). So ground-form n^, 
 with suffix Cp."!^ (but sometimes as "^^l) ; &^.">P!1 from ^|;; "^la from ]2!j 
 ■j^ri^jV yiq-tul-khd from bi:p^; V?n_a gndh-lo from 'b'i\. 
 
 Note 1 . The reason why the accession must begin mth a consonant 
 
 * The ground-form of words is that on which (he other or derived forms are 
 built. In regard to the oblique cases of a noun singular and the nominative 
 plural, the ground-form is the nominative singular. In reccard to the oblique ca- 
 ses of the plural, it is the nominative plural. In the praeler of verbs, it is (he 
 3 person sioir'ilar j;c. 
 
 IG 
 
118 § 54. VOWELS ; CHANGE OF LONG INTO SHORT. 
 
 is, that otherwise the long vowel is thrown into a simple syllable, and 
 of course must remain unchanged. E. g. 13^, with suffix beginning 
 with a consonant obn^T, where nl is changed into ni because it has 
 lost the tone by the accession of D5., and a long mixed syllable unaccent- 
 ed is contrary to usage. But in "^"13'^, there is not the same reason for 
 changing the Qamets, because the accession begins with a vowel, and 
 «ecessarily takes away the last letter of the word, in order to form a 
 regular syllable (§ 37 rule 1 ) ; consequently it leaves the Qamets of 
 the ground-form in a simple syllable, where it may stand unaccented, 
 and where it is the kind of vowel which such a syllable requires. 
 (§ 55. 1.) 
 
 Note 2. There are a few cases where the accession to a word be- 
 gins with a consonant, and yet, although it removes the tone of the 
 previous syllable, it does not change the previous long vowel. E. g. 
 ■^"ijn^ dihhd-rfkhd^ Ti"!^^ &,c. But here a special expedient is adopted 
 to preserve the long vowel, viz. the final letter of the word is taken 
 away and thrown into the same syllable with the accession, and thus 
 Qamets remains in a simple syllable and needs no change. (§ 31. 2. fe.) 
 
 t(6) When a mixed tone-syllable with a long pure 
 vowel precedes Maqqeph. 
 
 E. g. '^Ijiit-bs kbl from Vs (§ 32. 3). The two words thus connect- 
 ed, are regarded only as one in respect to accent. 
 
 t(c) Generally, when a noun is in regimen, i. e. before 
 another noun in the genitive (§ 135), and has a long pure 
 vowel in a mixed final svllable, it exchanofes the long vowel 
 for a short one. 
 
 E. g. 'lil word^ but in regimen nin^ *12~ the word of Jehovah. 
 
 For the ground of this change, see § 135. The tonic accent, indeed, 
 is wiitten in our Hebrew Bibles over such nouns when in regimen. But 
 this only serves to show, that the primary design of the accents is not 
 to mark the tone-syllable. At least, analogical reasoning in respect 
 to the shortening of the vowel in the case before us, would lead us to 
 believe, that two nouns in regimen are treated as a composite /loun, and 
 so the real tone is removed to the ultimate or penult syllable of 
 the second word (§ 32. 3). The change which takes place in the 
 long pure vowel of a final mixed syllable of a noun in regimen, is 
 generally the same as that which happens in other cases from remov- 
 ing the tone. 
 
§ 55. VOWELS ; CHANGE OP SHORT INTO LONG. 1 19 
 
 t3. Long vowels are exchanged for short ones when 
 the tone is moved backwards, i. e. towards the right. 
 
 E.g. "^V'^i gfound-form "T.V!!;C)5\5 vdy-yd-qum, gronnd-form DJ3[J 
 yarqd7n ; Dn^pD/l instead of Dn'vljps Hos. 2: 9. 
 
 t4. In all the cases described in this section, the long 
 vowels are changed in the following manner. 
 Qamcts goes into Patlahh. 
 Tucri — Seghol or Hhircq parvwn. 
 
 Hhokm — Qamcts Hhatcph or Qibhnts. 
 Compare the foregoing examples. 
 t5. When a long tone-syllable becomes short, by re- 
 ceivins: an accession which causes Daghesh forte to be in- 
 serted in its final letter, then the change of the long vow- 
 el is as follows. 
 
 Qamets goes into Patlahh. 
 Tseri — Hhireq parvum. 
 
 Hholem — Qibbuts or Qamets Hhateph. 
 
 E. g. Dy, ca? ; 6J<, ''73^< ; pn, nj^n ; t>, •'■ry oz-zi. 
 Note. If the tone remains, the vowel is not shortened ; as ?i7a\l3, 
 rtT^h &c. (§ 34. 2. h.) 
 
 § 55. Vowels ; chans^e of short into long. 
 
 Short vowels are exchanged for long ones in the fol- 
 lowing cases. 
 
 tl. When from any cause a mixed syllable with a 
 short vowel is changed into a simple syllable. 
 
 E. g. ^n!:i::j5 he killed him., ground-form ^Bp^ ; ^^fi, ground-form 
 l3fl ; d^T^, ground-form TiJ. 
 
 Note. In this case, the accession made to the word begins with a 
 vovcel. Consequently it requires the last letter of the word to be uni- 
 ted with that vowel, and thus takes it away from the previously mix- 
 ed syllable, which of course becomes simple. But when long syllables 
 are shortened^ the accession begins with a consonant. (§ 54. 2. a, note 1.) 
 
120 ^56. VOWELS DROPPED. 
 
 t2. When Daghesh forte is omitted where analogy 
 requires it, i. e. in a guttural, or at the end of a word. 
 
 (§ 4.5.) 
 
 E. g. "^^a for '7"^2 ; ']'12 for ^^2 ; '^'13 for '^'na ; bi": for ^a") used 
 instead of r!"^5"; ; DN for 73J< = D^i< ; TNn"; for ^Nn"; from HIiNn-; &c. 
 
 Pattahh frequently remains before Jl and n, but is long. (§ 46. 1.) 
 
 Note 1. The cases in nos. 1 and 2 are in principle the same. All 
 the difference is, that in no. 2 the concluding guttural of the mixed 
 syllable coalesces with the vowel, so that the syllable becomes simple, 
 and long ; whereas in no. 1 the concluding consonant is transferred to 
 another syllable, in which case usage commonly prolongs the vowel 
 which was short. (Comp. § 23. 7.) 
 
 Note 2. In respect to the case where Daghesh forte is omitted at the 
 end of a word, the vowel is not uniformly prolonged, but often remains. 
 E. g. nt-}'^, apocopated form V^"], for which is written b^l and b^\ 
 Compare as ^ ^^&, to account for the latter method of writing. 
 
 t3. When there is a concurrence of a homogeneous 
 quiescent letter. 
 
 E. g. i<^a instead of i<2£72 ; nba instead of ilba. (Comp. § 52. 3.) 
 
 t4. In general (but not always) when a pause accent 
 falls on a short vowel. (§ 60. 7.) 
 
 E. g. Ct: instead of d^72 : bitn instead of ^art. 
 
 But in the futures of Kiphal and Hiphil, and occasionally of other 
 conjugations, the pause-accent falling on final Tseri commonly chan- 
 ges it into Pattahh (§ 60. 7. a (2). § 97. 2. § 99. I. e.) 
 5. There are a few peculiar anomalies. 
 
 (a) Some words (very few) prolong their vowel when they take the 
 article ; as di', U'Jn ; ^rt, -irirj ; -12£, "iSir; ; "nD, ^En ; yni?, yn.N^ &c. 
 
 (fe) Seghol with n quiescent at the end of words, when these words 
 are placed in regimen, goes into Tseri. E. g. Sl^.^, in regimen ^i^h ; 
 a singularity limited to words of this form. (§ \4S. Dec. IX.) 
 
 § 5S. Vozocls dropped, 
 
 tl. When from any cause the tone is moved forward, 
 or towards the left, from the syllable which had it in the 
 
^ 5G. VOWELS DROri'ED. 121 
 
 grouiul-rorm, an omission of mutable vowels takes place 
 to correspond with it. This omission is regulated by tlie 
 following principles. 
 
 t2. When the tone is moved forward one syllable, 
 the penultimate vowel of the ground-form falls away if it 
 be mutable. 
 
 E. g. "la-, ■'n^T: n\y, 'hzv. 
 
 But when the tone continues on the same syllable as in the ground- 
 form, the first vowel remains unchanged, although an accession be 
 made to the word ; as nari^, ground-form '2r2i\ 
 
 NoTK. The above rule is pretty general, in respect to nouns and 
 adjectives. It applies generally to verbs in the praeter, where the ac- 
 cent is thrown forward by declension, and also in the various cases where 
 the verb receives suffixes which change the place of the tone. See 
 § 126 and the paradigms in § 127, particularly Par. XXI. 
 
 t3. In many cases, particularly in the future (and 
 sometimes in the praeter) tense of verbs and in the pres- 
 ent participles, when the tone is moved forward one sylla- 
 ble by declension, or by a formative or other suffix begin- 
 ning with a vowel, the ultimate vowel of the ground-form 
 falls away if it be mutable, and the first vowel of the verb 
 remains. 
 
 E. g. In the praeter of verbs ; bCj?, feminine !n]^*t3|5. In the fu- 
 ture ; Vcp."; , ^-Cp^ ; Vcp";', with suffix "':.l?t:p.\ In participles ; ^ap, 
 feminine nrup; nsb'S, plural D">nab7J. 
 
 As usage in the verb is variable, sometimes the first and sometimes 
 the second vowel falling away by a change of tone, practice only can 
 make the student familiar with the respective cases where the one or 
 the other principle is to be applied. 
 
 Note. Nouns of the same form as present participles follow the 
 same rule. E. g. a;;iN an enemy, plural D'^l'l'^i*. (§ l44: Dec. VII.) 
 
 t4. When the tone is moved forvirard two syllables, 
 
 both the vowels of the ground-form fall away if mutable. 
 
 E. g. nni, Db'^na-i ; f|5T, Di7.^:pT ; where both the vowels of the 
 
122 §§ 57, 58. vowels; transposition etc. 
 
 ground-form disappear in the suffix-state. But here the suffix must 
 begin with a vowel ; or the word must be plural, and in regimen. 
 
 For the manner in which those vowels that fall away are supplied, 
 aee § 58. 
 
 § 57. Vowels ; transposition, 
 
 1. This happens mostly In verbs with suffix pronouns, 
 where the suffixes do not take the tone. 
 
 E. g. ''3?13?, ground-form n^T^ ; where Qamets and Sheva are 
 transposed, and a composite Sheva is substituted for the simple one be- 
 cause of the guttural. 
 
 2. In verbs Lamedh guttural, instead of a transposi- 
 tion, there is rather an insertion of a new vowel. 
 
 E. g. i^nNit'O-:, ground-form ^^2^:2';; '':^*^":o-iJ, ground-form 15>73\23. 
 
 These examples, however, may be better solved by another pria- 
 ciple, viz. the original vowel in the final syllable of the root is restor- 
 ed, and prolonged if it be a Pattahh. (§ 126. IV. notes d, 12.) 
 
 3. Segholate nouns (§ 59. 2) in the plural, imitate 
 
 the transposition in verbs. 
 
 E. g. 'l^b??, original form '!]!:'^ or Y^^i ^^t in plural D''lD'b?3. 
 Transposition sometimes takes place merely for the sake of eupho- 
 ny ; as Tisn"^ for ^:ni; ini2^nz for nau5n2. 
 
 § 58. Insertion of nexo vowels, 
 
 fl. When a vowel falls away, a Sheva of course comes 
 in its place (§ 26. 2) ; a composite one if the letter be a 
 guttural, otherwise a simple one. But where two vowels 
 fall away (§ 56. 4) and leave the word in such a state 
 that three consonants must come before a vowel, then a 
 new vowel is inserted in order to avoid the impossible syl- 
 lable which these would make (§ 26. 1). This new vow- 
 el is usually Hhireq parvum ; but if either of the letters be 
 a guttural, it is then Pattahh or Seghol. 
 
 E. g. ^13^ in plur. constr. is ""HIT instead of ^"iS"^, both of the 
 
1^ 58. NEW VOWEl.ij. 123 
 
 vowels having fallen out. So •»)!;:«« instead of '•1232N, from D"'UJ:N ; 
 •^cns instead of ^?~3. (§ 77. 1.) 
 
 Note. In a few cases the supplied vowel is Pattahh though the 
 letter be not a guttural ; as ""D:? instead of ''DDS, ground-form D^D33 
 two wings. 
 
 t2. If two letters come before a vowel both having a 
 Sheva, and the latter Is a guttuial requiring a cojnposite 
 Shcva, the short vowel which is contained in the compos- 
 ite Sheva must also be inserted under the preceding letter. 
 
 E. g. ia?, -iny^ instead of -inyb (regularly nayV) ; Vdn?. for VsnV; 
 ^irr:2 for '>n2. (6 61: 9.) 
 
 • t; IT • t: : ^ J / 
 
 The rule may be otherwise expressed. Of two Shevas 
 before a vowel, if the second be composite, the first is chang- 
 ed into the short vowel of tiiat composite Sheva. 
 
 The older grammarians expressed it still differently. A guttural 
 points itself and the preceding letter ; i. e. the vowel of the first letter 
 must be homogeneous with the Sheva of the second. 
 
 Thus in the future tenses of verbs Pe gutiurul, we have a de- 
 parture from the punctuation which is common where there is no guttu- 
 ral. E. g. Sts^.: instead of -172^"^; Tl'llV^ instead of !l-^y\ (§ 102. 1.) 
 
 Note 1 . In all these cases the guttural is thrown into the succeeding 
 syllable, instead of remaining in the preceding one, as in the regular 
 punctuation. E. g. T/ab"] yll-mddh^ but with guttural ^72yD yd-S<^mudk. 
 
 Note 2. The preceding rule holds good, though the guttural should 
 afterwards exchange its composite Sheva for a simple one and be 
 again united with the preceding syllable, as is not unfrequently the 
 case. E. g. ^5!n3 neh-pdkh, Avith composite Sheva ^?r;3 ne-Ji/phdkh, 
 not *]S!i; ; "I'ry^ ^^d St^;^, not ~l'Ti'\ Two verbs only take Hhireq 
 parvum in such cases ; viz. n^", fut. !^*?7^, Niph. n^~; ; and nTi, fut. 
 ni'.n";. In the fut. apoc. Hhireq parvum often appears; as fut t">n!|;, 
 apoc. ^n^ ; mri.^ fut. apoc. ~n\ 
 
 t3. If regularly two Shevas occur in the middle of a 
 word, the first of which is composite, this composite She- 
 va falls away, and the short vowel in it remains in its place. 
 
 E. g. nscns instead of ri3Dn3 ; '^byc instead of 'njys ; nnm""" instead 
 of 51173?\ (Comp. no6. 1,2 above.) 
 
124 § 59. FURTIVE VOWELS. 
 
 § 59. Insertion of furtive vozoels, 
 
 tl. It is contrary to the genius of the Hebrew lan- 
 guage to admit two consonants after a vowel, in any sylla- 
 ble except at the end of a word, and very rarely even 
 there. 
 
 E. g ri*7^b 2 pers. sing. fem. praet. of Kal. So also "^^jli, and a 
 few other nouns. 
 
 t2. To avoid the concurrence of two consonants in 
 this way, the Hebrews for the most part supplied a vow- 
 el under the penultimate one, which does not belong to the 
 essential form of the word, but is a mere expedient for the 
 sake of euphony. The vowel thus supplied is commonly 
 Sef^hol : linger penultimate gutturals, Pattahh ; and wm^ 
 Yodh final, Hhireq. pamum. (§ 34. 2. a. § 41. 3 note 3.) 
 
 All nouns, adjectives, and participles, in v.'hich these 
 furtive vowels are found, are said to have a Segholate form, 
 and are usually called Segholates. 
 
 These furtive vowels are supplied in the following classes of words, 
 (a) In all nouns, adjectives, and participles, which end in Seghol, 
 Pattahh, or short Hhireq. 
 
 E. g. TjVja instead of ^b^ or lf:12 orig. form. 
 
 '^CD — ^SD — 
 
 ^fl —■ S^l — 
 
 tv_z — nVs — 
 
 Fem. nouns ri"ib.i| — ^^rA — 
 Participles m'^.'ib — n'i's.'ib — (Comp. § 60. 3.) 
 (6) In the apocopated future and imperative of verbs Tib. (§ 123. 1, d.) 
 Fut. Kal. rr^.^"] apocopated b^'T for which b^.^1 is used. 
 
 Fut. Hiph. ii!r.a: — ^.V-5 — -^-^ — 
 Imp.Hiph. ns'nn — cSn — ;]nn[ — 
 
§ GO. VOWKI.S ; riT.WGV.S FROM EUnrONY, ETC. 1Q5 
 
 (c) In the 2 pers. sing. fem. praet. of verbs Latnedh guttural ; as 
 r^^'ii shd-md-Vdt for r^'ax" shd-niAst. 
 
 Note 1. In Arabic, nouns of the class a have no furtive vowel 
 written. They write *]V^ a king; but pronounce with a furtive 
 Seghol, like the Hebrews. 
 
 Note 2. The Pattahh which is inserted in words of the class c, dif- 
 fers from the Pattahh furtive treated of in § 27, in being pronounced 
 after the guttural under which it stands. It also differs from the fur- 
 tive vowel in words of the classes a and 6 above, in being introduced 
 merely to facilitate the pronunciation of the gutturals (comp. § 27. 1); 
 for in the 2 pers. fem. of all other verbs, no furtive vowel is either 
 written or pronounced. 
 
 § GO. Vowels J changes from evphony and from the influence 
 of pause- accents, 
 
 1. A guttural with Qaraets seldom admits the A 
 sound, i. e. either Pattahh or Qaraets, before it; but sub- 
 stitutes for them the kindred vowel Seghol. 
 
 E. g. D""nr:n instead of a''^!-jr:; T»ni<i. instead of T^PiJ; nrjB instead 
 of nn?; "w-N-nT?. instead of "DrN-na. (§61.3. §68.4.) 
 
 But Qamets sometimes remains ; as y"l.'i~i "^m ^c. (§ 55. 5.) 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes, though very seldom, the second Qamets goes 
 into Seghol instead of the first; as *12?T instead of nyi for IS"'. 
 
 Note 2. Seghol sometimes, though very rarely, stands for Qamets 
 when a guttural does not follow ; as "'"I'^D n72— js' instead of ntt, Ps. 4:3, 
 
 Note 3. So also very rarely, before Hhateph Qamets ; as D■*■lp^^rt 
 instead of D'^C'jnri. (§61.5.) ' " '^ " 
 
 2. Pattahh in a mixed syllable is not unfrequently 
 changed into Seghol ; and vice versa. 
 
 E. g. aan-^. instead of C:?"]:; '^VSN instead of t^!:SN. Vice versa, as 
 •jjif instead of "JJ^.T constr. state of IpT. (§ IJ^. note I.) 
 
 3. The furtive Seghol (§ 59. 2) at the end of words, 
 often changes the preceding vowels Qamets, Pattahh, or 
 Tseri of the original forms, into Seghol. 
 
 17 
 
1 26 §60. VOWELS ; CHANGES FROM EUPHONY, ETC. 
 
 E. g-. '^T.h instead of Yv5 ! ^^.T'^ ^^^ n^Jr^n ; rriia for n^na ; 
 fut. Hiph. ilbi"', apoc. ^?.\2, also^^.^i; imper. Hiph. nD^rt, apoc- 
 D"-|ri, e ;hol-form q"iri. 
 
 Note. With gutturals the change is into Pattahh ; as i'"li?3, Seghol- 
 form ni'Ti/3. 
 
 4. The Segliolate forms are sometimes contracted, 
 and the vowel thrown upon the penult letter of them. 
 
 E. g. nN;>p instead of ni<ip; nJ^HtTS instead of ri^ka. (§ 47. 2.) 
 
 5. In a similar manner, composite Shevas with their 
 preceding short vowels are sometimes contracted, when 
 they assume a Segholate form In the course of Inflection. 
 
 E. g. llriNn for n 3nNn, so written instead of ^iriNn ; ^!nb:Di<n for 
 InbDJjn, so written instead of nnbSNr. (Comp. § 47. 5. a.) 
 
 6. On the other hand, long vowels are sometimes (not 
 often) put for the short ones which usually precede the 
 composite Shevas ; and vice versa. 
 
 E. 2r. ^rMn for "ibiTm: lib^'T^ for InV^i^; Snby'n for nbi-'". Fice versa. 
 T^nN for n"nr!N; n:?:n; for nan^. 
 
 Note. The cases in nos. 4, 5, 6, are quite unfrequent, and are ex- 
 ceptions to the general rule. The contraction in no. 4 is a Syriasm. 
 
 t7. Vowels are often changed by the pause-accents, 
 which may be placed either on the ultimate or penult syl- 
 lable, even though the original tone-syllable is thereby 
 removed. (§ 34.2. j.) 
 
 A word or syllable, on which one of these accents ap- 
 pears, is said to be in pause. 
 
 The changes occasioned by a pause-accent may be di- 
 vided into two classes. 
 
 (a) When it falls upon the usual tone-syllable. 
 (1) It changes Pattahh into qamets ; as d";^, D^pj bbj?, ^Uj?. 
 Seghol (standing for Pattahh) suffers the same change ; as ^bb, 'jV.J ; 
 and so of all nouns belonging to the A class of Segholates in Dec. VI. 
 (§14-3 .) 
 
§00. vowels; changes fiiom pause-agents, etc. 127 
 
 ('2) It often cliansfes Tseri in the ultimate syllable of verbs into 
 Pattahh; as ncn, iDrt ; }hp, b^P ; ?»a^ b^j",; n.?."!, 1^?.; "iib 
 
 .. ..1 ^_ .. ..|,7 ;i>-li ' ■•■,.^ A •■ ' 'A 
 
 (6) When it lulls upon a svllahlc, uliicli is not iIk.' 
 usual tone-syllable. 
 
 /. On the penult. 
 
 (1) When the last syllable beg^ins with a sins^le consonant, and there 
 is a vowel already bolon^iii^i; to the next precedins^ letter, if that vowel 
 be Pattahh. it is rliansred into Qainets; as TT.^wV, rini< ; nri", rtP" : but if it 
 lie a lonj^ vowel, it remains unchanged ; as "*3'N, ''--N- 
 
 (2) When the last syllable besjins with two consonants and of course 
 with a vocal Sheva, then the pause-accent (beini>- on the penult) occa- 
 sions a proper vowel to be placed in the room of the Sheva. This 
 vowel is various, according to the nature of the case. 
 
 (a) In verbs, the original vowel of the ground-form is restored ; 
 as riN-i"', rrx"!" from iS'-i' ; azti'c, ^:?3t: from 1730 ; future n:up"', i!:bp: 
 from 3 pers. "r'Dj7"; ; ^^"'r"'^% ^^''t'-^! *i'om yq'li\; nhs'^:';, for nas-i;'; S:c. 
 
 Note. In the second and two last examples, the Pattahh of the ground- 
 form is restored and lengthened into Qamets ; which is the usual fact 
 in all cases of this nature. Even silent Sheva, in some cases, is chang- 
 ed by the pause-accent, and the preceding vowel removed ; as n^^'ip 
 with paragogic n, from I'ttU;, in pause ni'Tap. 
 
 (b) In verbs n!r, the Pattahh of the ground-lorm is not only res- 
 tored and lengthened, but the Yodh of the root also is restored. In cas- 
 es where it usually falls out: as ^t*:. ^'^:iz from tlC; ^ "^U; ; ^ya, 
 ^""^^z imper. of -;^= —^t^- (§ 122. 1. § 12.3. I. h.) 
 
 (c) In nouns, and other parts of speech, simple Sheva goes into 
 Seghol ; as Cp.p, CD'vl5 ; '^^^'2, '^S:^ : composite Sheva goes into the 
 corresponding vowel ; as "^':w\, '^:N where Pattahh is inserted and length- 
 ened ; ^irn, "^"rn where Hhateph Qamets becomes Qamets Hhateph 
 and is lengthened into llholem. No instance of Hhateph Seghol oc- 
 curs. 
 
 Note. A ievf anomalies are found here ; as "nv. '^'I'J : "*:cn, "'lin. 
 
 •-• -A" ' ' -i^ -A" 
 
 //. On the uhiiiiate. 
 
 (3) Here the pause-accent prolongs the vowel, if it be short j as 
 T\'o•^^_ with Qamets Hhateph in the ultimate^ but in pause n:o^i with 
 Hholem. 
 
128 § 61. VOWELS UXDER THE ARTICLE, ETC, 
 
 8. The effect of pause-accents is not uniform. In a 
 great number of cases, no change is occasioned by them. 
 On the other hand, most of the disjunctive accents, and 
 even several of the conjunctives, not unfrequently produce 
 the same effect in prolonging svllables, as the pause-accents. 
 
 (a) Disjunctives. E. g. ^-5n, ^ -b^ ; ^:^C2, :i3bD ; J^y^UJ, Ti^jyy^ J 
 qi>2, fl^iys; 1:3'n^«2•^■;^ Ps. 5: 12. &c. &c. 
 
 {b) Conjunctives, ibninn, ^!:nnr; Twa,^u;a ; '^ns'ns, '^n^'na ; ri^on, 
 JT'Dn&c.&c. 
 
 -ryx T 
 
 From the view of the subject here given, it is sufficiently evident 
 that all the changes wrought upon the vowels by the accents, are mere- 
 ly euphonic and arbitrary. 
 
 §61. Vowels; changes in the punctuation of the article, prepo- 
 sitions, the conjunction Vav, and the interrogative He, . 
 
 I. Article. 
 
 1. The b of the Hebrew article ^H (§ 65) being al- 
 ways assimilated to the first letter of the following noun 
 (§41. 1. &), and commonly expressed by a Daghesh forte in 
 that first letter, the usual punctuation of the article is Pat- 
 tahh followed by Daghesh forte. 
 
 E. g. 1l3n:" the serpent., instead of Uins bin. (§ 63. 3.) 
 
 2. The Daghesh not being admissible in gutturals, the 
 article before them commonly (not always) lengthens its 
 vowel into Qamets. (§ 46. 1.) 
 
 E. g. •<::"'i<rj the man ; "J""^?! the eye ; TtwNf-^?? the head. So D''^VN!^ 
 Ex. 22: 7. 
 
 Before n and n, the Pattahh of the article very generally (not al- 
 ways) remains ; as "^Uinn the darkness, ^b.^-l '^'^^ "a.-alks. But Pattahh 
 in such cases is long. (§ 46. 1.) 
 
 3. If the guttural have a Qamets under it, the arti- 
 cle commonly (not always) takes Seghol instead of Qamets. 
 
§ 61. vo^^'E^5 under prepositions, etc. 129 
 
 E. g. C"'">nn the mountains ; ^:rt7. the cloud. (§ 60. 1.) 
 But we have also yi^n, arn, 2Nn, nn^sr:, nrtn &c. agreeably 
 to the common rule in no. 2 above. (§ 55. 5.) 
 
 4. The Dagliesh commonly (not always) is omitted be- 
 fore a word beiiiiinino; with JVlem or Yotlh with a sim- 
 pie Sheva. 
 
 E.£^. nSr'On (read hd-mfkhds-se) the coverings instead of nODTaJ^ hdin- 
 nukhds-se ; "is'^n (read lui-yfUoryhe river^ instead of nK'n hdy-yfiiOr. 
 
 5. In a lew instances, the article takes Seghol before 
 Hhafonh Qnmets. 
 
 E. g. D"'U;nnn the months, nia-jnn the waste places. (§ 60. 1 note 3.) 
 
 6. When the prepositions 2,2,7, are prefixed to a 
 noun which has the article, the article commonly (not al- 
 ways) falls away ; but its vowel and Daghesh are attached 
 to the prepositions. 
 
 E. g. t2Vy:iz for D*b-ir;2 ; fiys for Qyns ; D'^'^.n^. for D'^-^nnl?. 
 
 The cases where the article and preposition are both retained are 
 somewhat numerous, particularly in respect to 3 ; as Di'HS , UifTt^ , 
 ?|-\liri2 &c. 
 
 //, Prepositions 2, 3,!:. 
 
 7. The appropriate point of these prepositions is sim- 
 ple Sheva. (§ 157.) 
 
 8. Before the article, they commonly (not always) re- 
 move it and take its punctuation. (See no. 6 above.) 
 
 In the same manner, they sometimes remove the T\ of the inf 
 Niphil and Hiphil. (Comp. § 88. 3.) 
 
 9. Beibre composite Shev^as, they take the corres- 
 ponding short vowel; as "jiinS &c. 
 
 10. Before a tone-svllable they take Qamets. 
 
 (a) Before monosyllabic or penacuted infinitives, asn^icV M'^pX^ ; 
 but not when they are in regimen, as ~n"i;32. 
 
 (6) Before monosyllabic or penacuted pronouns and suffixes. 
 (§ 157.4.) 
 
130 § 61. VOWELS UNDER VAV, ETC. 
 
 (c) Before the tone-syllables of nouns at the end of a proposition^ 
 or when they have a disjunctive accent ; as Gen. 1 : 6 a"53b D^?3 ■j'^2. 
 Deut. 17: 8 i'-ib.b i>5\r2- 
 
 But prepositions before monosyllabic and penacuted dissyllabic 
 nouns, in cases other than o, 6, c above, generally exhibit the punctu- 
 ation of nos. 7 and 9. But ni::'r takes Qamets ; though not before 
 the genitive. 
 
 ///. Preposition |>3, 
 
 11. The * of the preposition 'j'Q (§ 157) is common- 
 ly assimilated to the first letter of the following Avord ; so 
 that the usual punctuation is Hhireq parvum followed by 
 Daghesh forte; as 'T^'^W instead of 'rjbp"'^:. (§ 63. 3.) 
 
 12. Before the gutturals and Resh, the Daghesh 
 is omitted and the vowel under the Mem commonly 
 lengthened into Tseri (§ 46. 1); as Dntl, "l£>"^.. 
 
 13. Sometimes when the Daghesh is omitted the 
 Hhireq is still retained, but is lengthened into Hhireq inag- 
 mtm. (§ 46. 1.) 
 
 E.g. ^•'iS^tt, RTI'^, n^p^O, DNr?2; perhaps nvi173 Ruth 1: 12. 
 
 14. Before Vodh with Sheva, Hhireq remains, but is 
 prolonged, because Yodh becomes quiescent. (§47. ].) 
 
 E.g. ''lo.'^^a, lia"'7q. 
 
 Mem is found with Patiahh 1 Chr. 15: 13 ri:r:;w\-iz7ob. 
 
 IV. Conjunction |. 
 
 15. The appropriate point of the conjunction Vav is 
 simple Sheva; as H'^ju'I. (§158.) 
 
 16. Before words bavins: simple Sheva under the first 
 letter, Vav takes Shureq; as pD'pl. 
 
 But when a word begins with "^i, Vav may take Hhireq, in which 
 
 case Yodh becomes quiescent ; as "Ti"'!, Dn^'i'ii, "^tl""'.? "^'S'*;- (§ "l^- 2- ('■) 
 
 When the first radical ol" the two verbs rr'n and HTi would regu- 
 
^ Gl. VOWELS UNPER VAV AND TIE. 131 
 
 larly have ( ) under it, V^av commonly takes Hhireq parvum, some- 
 times Seghol, and the (irst radical takes simple Sheva ; as Dn'^^ri'), 
 :T^m Gen. 42: 18. nv.i Gen. 12: 2. (^ 102. 3 note.) 
 
 17. In like manner, before its cognate letters tlie la- 
 bials (H 52 S), the conjunction Vav commonlif (not always) 
 takes Shureq. 
 
 E. g-. rr;?^, Y^.'P.^ !^>*")?^- (See no. 19 below.) 
 
 18. Bclorc a guttural with composite Sheva, Vav 
 takes the corresponding siiort vowel ; as '"i'2V\ 
 
 But if other letters have a composite Sheva, Vav before them take.s 
 Shureq ; as ^'^\^'^^ ''R^'^/'- 
 
 Note. AVhen words begin with N, the contraction to which this let- 
 ter is subject occasions, in some cases, an anomalous punctuation under 
 Vav prefixed ; as D">n rNT instead of DTl 7NT j "'ili^T instead of "^31^1. 
 (§ 47. 5. rt.) 
 
 19. Before a tone-syllable, Vav frequently (not al- 
 ways) takes Qimets; even in cases like those in no. 17. 
 
 (a) When the word with which it is joined has a disjunctive accent ; 
 as ^n^/J Gen. 33: 13. A word with a conjunctive accent, does not ad- 
 mit Vav with Qamets. 
 
 (ft) Often (but not uniformly) when words are closely connected 
 in a kind of couplet or triplet ; as ^^'^'^^ lii generation and generation ; 
 2;"J] n^O good and evil; ^\''.'2'\ DT'' day and night; JlCT nnsT '^'T^kf^o.r 
 and a pit and a snare Is. 24: 17. 
 
 But here the regular punctuation is sometimes also found ; as 12J\*< 
 "li'^NI Ps. 87:5; •iJin'^n'] "j'^'^'l DV^' fornication and wine and new wine 
 Hos.'4: 11. Ecc. 2:26. ' 
 
 Note. For the punctuation of Vav conversive prefixed to the fu- 
 true tense of verbs, see § 93. 
 
 V. Interrogative H. 
 
 20. The appropriate point of Ti interrogative is Hha- 
 teph Pattahh. 
 
 E. g'. Y^;~ "jan an de arbore ? 'TlQ/iirt rium custos? 
 
132 § 61. VOWELS UNDER HE. 
 
 21. Before a simple Sheva it takes Pattahh; asHDITSn. 
 
 22. Before gutturals it takes Pattahh, and in a few in- 
 stances Qamets. 
 
 E. g. ']V.'?.^!i *^*«'' J g*^ ^ ^'3^^! «»* <w «*« •" 
 
 23. Before a guttural with Qamets it takes Seghol. 
 
 E. ff. DIDnin is he wise ? 
 
 O T T '•• 
 
 24. Not unfrequently it takes Daghesh euphonic after 
 it, and thus appears like the article ; from which it can 
 be distinguished only by the sense of the passage, or by 
 its standing hefore the prefixes of nouns &c. and not next 
 to the noun itself, as does the article. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 17: 17 ^a'^n. So 18: 21. 37:32. Num. 13: 19, 20 &c. 
 
PART IV. 
 
 GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE AND FORMS 
 OF WORDS. 
 
 *§ 62. Radical words, 
 
 1. The Hebrew and its cognate languages, in their 
 present state, exhibit a surprising degree ol regularity and 
 unilbrmitj, in the construction and sound of the radical 
 words. This circumstance forms a broad line of distinc- 
 tion between them and all the western languages* Al- 
 most all radical words, which with few exceptions are 
 verbs, consist of only three letters usually forming two syl- 
 lables ; as '^j^^ he reigned, X^^ the earth. From such trilit- 
 eral roots are derived the various forms of nouns and 
 verbs, which are used to express case, number, gender, per- 
 son, tense &;c. and the dili'erent forms of ncuns, adjectives, 
 particles &c. From this general principle of derivation 
 as to nouns &c. which was commonly represented by the 
 older grammarians as universal, are to be excepted, how- 
 ever, a few words, which constitute the names of i'amiliar 
 objects; as 2ii Jatlicr, Ci^ rnother, 1'' hand, &lc. A few 
 particles and primitive pronouns also are biliteral in their 
 root, and not derived from any triliteral word. 
 
 2. So extensive in Hebrew is the princijile of inflec- 
 
l'^4 §62, RADICAL WORDS, 
 
 tion grounded on derivation from a triliteral root, that 
 nouns which are primitive and bihteral, conform to the com- 
 mon laws in their declension ; 1. e. they are treated as 
 though they were derived from triliteral roots. Thus 
 Di^ by Inflection becomes ''^X = ^Xi^X, as if derived from 
 D53N ; although G^f Is primitive. 
 
 3. From some appearances in the Hebrew language, 
 it is probable that oilginally it contained a greater number 
 of billteral roots, than at present ; and that its triliteral 
 forms were, in many Instances, constituted by doubling the 
 second radical of the root, or adding to it one of the vow- 
 el-letters, or the semi-vowel Nun. 
 
 E. g. it2^ and S''t3 to be good, common root its. 
 
 ns: — n^c to blow, — ns. 
 
 ^15-^, ^n'^, ND'^, TTD-n to thrust down, — T^l. 
 
 In like manner, there are a considerable niunher of 
 words in the Hebrew and its cognate dialects, in which two 
 of the radicals are the same, while the third Is quite dif- 
 ferent, and jet the meaning of all the words remains the 
 same. 
 
 E. g. The verb to lick is either 2??^, Sib, 12^"^, Di-"r, ^I'lb, y^\, 
 or p^lb ; the letters ^h being uniform in all. 
 
 But if biliteral roots were originally more numerous 
 than at present, they had conformed to the common laws 
 of the language at least as early as the written Hebrew now 
 extant ; since the written language every where piesents the 
 triliteral forms, as principally constituting the radical words. 
 
 4. Quadrlliteral and quinqueliteral roots are very 
 rare in the Hebrew; such as T't3"^!D a fruitful field, iCw")lD 
 to devour, pJJiVd to he quiet. Those which exist, are form- 
 ed by the addition or insertion of a letter or letters, to 
 lengthen the triliteral root ; in the same manner as tri- 
 
§ G2. RADICAL WORDS. 1 35 
 
 literals arc formed from biliterals, as described above in 
 no. 3. 
 
 5. There is no proof that tlie Hebrew is a language 
 derived from any other. So far as is known, it appears 
 to be original. Yet this must not be so understood, as to 
 exclude all words of foreign origin. In general, however, 
 whether these words are Egyptian, or Persian, they are 
 recognized as foreign by their nonconformity to the com- 
 mon laws of the Hebrew. 
 
 6. The parts of speech, as they are called, are the 
 same in Hebrew as in Greek and most other western lan- 
 guages. But as Hebrew nouns and adjectives are mostly 
 derived from verbs, convenience of arrangement requires 
 that the latter should precede the former in a grammat- 
 ical treatise. The order adopted in this grammar is the 
 following ; viz. the article^ pronouns, verbs including 'partici- 
 ples, nouns, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, in- 
 terjections. 
 
 7. The proportional number of roots in the various 
 parts of speech in the Hebrew may be thus arranged. 
 
 (a) The verb is altogether most frequently primitive ; 
 and there are very few verbs which are not underived. 
 (§ 69. 1. b, c.) 
 
 (/>) Only a small number of nouns are primitive ; most 
 of them being derived from verbs, or from other nouns. 
 
 (f) The original pronouns, personal, demonstrative, 
 ^'c. are all primitive. These, of course, are not very nu- 
 merous. 
 
 (d) Particles are some of them primitive, and some 
 are derived from other parts of speech. The Hebrew 
 has very few particles. 
 
136 § 63. GRAMMATTICAL CONSTRUCTION OF WORDS. 
 
 *§ 63. Grammatical construction of words, 
 
 1. There are two ways in which case, number, gen- 
 der, person, tense &c. may be expressed In any language. 
 First, by the inflection of the original words or ground- 
 forms ; and secondly, by affixing other words or particles, 
 which serve to express relation. The Hebrews made use 
 of both these methods. According to the second, they 
 connected particles with their nouns, and to their verbs 
 they affixed pronouns or parts of them, to designate per- 
 son and gender. In accordance with the first, they inflect- 
 ed nouns, adjectives, and participles, by annexing to them 
 the feminine termination n_, and the plural forms C'^^, 
 ni &c. which, however, cannot be traced to any root. 
 All the derivative conjugations of verbs, and all deriva- 
 tive nouns &c. also exhibit the first method of inflection, 
 and prove by their frequency that it is extensively com- 
 prised in the Hebrew language. 
 
 2. Composite words, i. e. compound verbs, nouns &;c. 
 which the Greek, Latin, and other western languages ex- 
 hibit, are not usual in the Hebrew. Words properly com- 
 posite are found in Hebrew almost exclusively in proper 
 names ; where, however, they frequently occur. 
 
 3. The Hebrew also differs from the languages of 
 the Avcst in the mode of writing many of its particles, and 
 the oblique cases of personal pronouns. These, Instead 
 of standing by themselves, are commonly united with the 
 verbs, nouns &c. to which they belong or on which they 
 depend, so as to form with them but one word. 
 
§ n 1. MNDRF.D UIALF.CTS MIXED WITH THE HKimEW. 137 
 
 {(i) Particles are pre6xed. E. jj. "wi"2-;j~ (he smh, instead of "ilT:;;; b~ 
 (§ 60); iT'wN^Z in the beginning &:c. 
 
 (6) Fra'j-nienls of prornMins &,c. arc sufllxcd. E. g'. Cr'rup //(o» //«5^ 
 kiUcd them, instead of crt r\z:p ; DO^D /Acir /torse, instead of Dr; D^D 
 &c. (§§ 120, 135.) 
 
 § G 1. kindred dialects mixed with the Hebrew. 
 
 1. The Hebrew boincr l<in(lrod with the Sjrinc. Clialdee, and Ar- 
 abic (§ 1. 2), contains a multitude of words which are common to all 
 these langi'uao'es. It is therefore only when a word is in some re- 
 spects anomalous as a Hel'rew word, but conformed to what is usual in 
 some one of these dialects, that we call it a Syriasm, Chuldaism, or 
 Arabism. 
 
 2. The later Hebrew, written after the captivity, exhibits a con- 
 siderable number of Chaldaisms or Syriasms, as in Ezra. Daniel, Chron- 
 icles &.C. It is observed also of the poetical books in general, that their 
 language approximates to these dialects. But wliether this is to be 
 considered simply as poetic costume, or as the remains of the ancient 
 Hebrew when it differed little from the Syriac, is difficult to ascertain. 
 
 3. Arabisms, properly spealcin?, occur only in a few words, and 
 relate merely to the form. This, it is probable, is only the result of 
 negligent transcription. The Arabic language never exercised any 
 predominant intluence over the Hebrew ; as the Jews did not speak 
 it, until after the Masorites had begun to guard against all innovations 
 on the sacred text. What has often been named Arabism, viz. the 
 plural ending in "j"- , is also an Aramaeism ; and much more probably 
 was derived from the Aramaean, than from the Arabic. Still, because • 
 the Hebrew has many roots in common with the Arabic, much light 
 may be borrowed from this latter dialect to illustrate the former. 
 Above all, the forms, inflections, and syntax of the Hebrew, receive a 
 great acccession of light from a good Arabic grammar, such as that 
 published by De Sacy. 
 
§§ G5j GB. THE ARTICLE AND PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 *§ 65. 
 
 1. The Hebrew lias but oiio article viz. V". It cor- 
 responds in a good degree, but not universally, with the 
 definite article the in English. 
 
 2. The article "pin is always united with the noun to 
 which it belongs, and its Lamedh assimilated to the first 
 letter of that noun and expressed by a Daghesh forte in 
 that letter or by some equivalent. 
 
 E. g-. '•■\X2l2'n the rain, instead of ^U12 i^rr : tD^Nn the man &c. (6 41. 
 1. b. § 46. 1.) 
 
 For an account of the manner in which the vowel of the article is 
 affected by the letter or vowel-point which follows it, or by prefix- 
 prepositions, see § 61. 1 — 6. 
 
 Note. That the original form of the article was bf^, seems hardly to 
 admit of reasonable doubt. The V nowhere appears in Hebrew, being 
 always assimilated to the letter which follows it (as it also is in the 
 verb rii^b); but the form corresponds to the Arabic article ^N, whose 
 ? is frequently assimilated in the same manner. The only difference 
 is, that in Hebrew the assimilation or some equivalent for it is uni- 
 versal ; in Arabic, it is usual only before certain letters.^ 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 . § 60. Personal pronouns. 
 
 tl. The Hebrew is rich in personal pronouns ; not only 
 distinouishinsf the masculine and feminine of the second and 
 third persons when they stand as the subjects of verbs, 
 but possessing forms appropriate to the oblique cases Avhich 
 follow verbs, nouns, or particles. 
 
 t2. The following table exhibits the nominative case 
 or ground-form of all the personal pronouns. 
 
 ■f The solar leUeiis, viz. «/, I, s, z ; and also r and n. De Sacy, nos. GO, 108-. 
 
§ uG. I'KRSONAL 1'RO\-OIN>. 130 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Ph 
 
 irnh 
 
 1 
 
 pcrs. 
 
 com. 
 
 ■'ZNI, ''pbs; 
 
 '^:n3N\ 
 
 13-3, "i:wNl_. 
 
 2 
 
 — 
 
 mas. 
 
 nriws, nj^ 
 
 CDN. 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 r,j^, ^-nj^ 
 
 ]Z^-^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 — 
 
 mas. 
 
 Nnn, 
 
 ^n. 
 
 n^n. 
 
 3 
 
 — 
 
 iom. 
 
 wN^n, N^n 
 
 P. 
 
 hDH. 
 
 3. In pause, the pronouns nssnmc the forms "IN, nnN, riN &c. 
 (§ 60. 7). The N" in both the third persons singular is paragogic and 
 in otio. The teminine N'Ti is pronounced hi. See no. 6 belovv. 
 
 4. In the lirst person phiral, the form ^:n\ occurs only six times, 
 and the form n:N only once in Kethib Jer. 42: 6. In the 2 pers. plur. 
 feni. and in both the third persons plural, the final !i of the right-hand 
 forms is probably paragogic, inasmuch as the tone remains on the 
 original syllable. (^ 34. 2. /(. § 50. 4.) 
 
 5. Id the second persons singular and plural, the Daghesh in Tav 
 is an assimilated Nun ; the original words being !nn:t\ or ri:wN|, Dn^N ; 
 as they now are in Syriac and Arabic. 
 
 6. The feminine pronoun i^^7] hl^ as it ajipears in the Pentateuch 
 of our common Hebrew Bibles, is anomalous. The explanation of the 
 anomaly is, that the pointing is associated with NTi, a marginal read- 
 ing introduced by the Masorites, who appear to have been ignorant 
 that Nnn in the Mosaic writings is of the common gender. When it is 
 feminine, they have written it Niri hi, and supplied the appropriate 
 consonants (n'^ri) in the margin. 
 
 Note. There are a few instances of peculiar construction, where 
 the ground-forms of the pronouns, as here exhibited, stand for oblique 
 cases (§ 181). But in general,they are used only to designate the 
 nominative. 
 
 t7. Tlic oblique cases of personal pronouns In Hebrew, 
 are represented by I'ragraents of primitive pronouns united 
 with verbs, nouns, and particles so as to make one word, in- 
 stead of being written separately, as in the western languages. 
 For an account of these pronominal suflixes as appended to the 
 above mentioned classes of words respectively, see for verbs § 126, 
 
140 §§ 67, 68. PRONOUNS. 
 
 for nouns § 136, for adverbs § 156, for prepositions § 157, and for in- 
 terjections § 159. 
 
 § 67 Demonstrative pronouns » 
 
 tl. There are very few demonstrative pronouns in He- 
 brew. The usual forms follow in the first line below ; 
 those in the second line are unusual. 
 
 Sinmdar. Plural 
 
 Masc. !nt, fem. niXT, com. tVh, this. Com. nVijJ^ these. 
 
 - ^^k^b - "1"' - "^T, — - bi^, — 
 
 2. In the fem. sing, the form !iT occurs a few times in the same 
 xneaning as mil, and also the form ^itlrr^ once, Ezek. 36: 35. 
 
 § 68. Relative and interrogative pronouns, 
 I. Relative. 
 
 tl. The Hebrew has but one relative pronoun, viz. 
 "ItDfi^. It is of all genders and numbers, and answers to 
 who, which, what, in En2;lish. 
 
 2. In the later Hebrew especially, 1d^{ frequently 
 appears in a contracted form. The ^{ is dropped (§ 42. 
 1. <:/); the 1 is assimilated to the first letter of the word 
 which follows (§ 41. 1. c); and the vowel under "Ci is some- 
 times chano;ed. Hence it has the forms -d, -tj, ID, d. 
 
 E. g. ^3Dn: fi"!r9 "who hath not given us up, instead of !|33n3 iih "^TZiN 
 Ps. 124: 6 ; 13"'=)^. "43 which we waited for, Lam. 2: 16 ; "^ri'^^Ji'IJ Judg. 
 5: 7 ; rtr^i?"^ Judg. 6: 17 ; Dn\2i Ecc. 3: 18. In the three last examples -12? 
 &c. ("TiJN) sustains the office of a conjunction, like the Greek or* and 
 the Latin quod. 
 
 3. The pronouns in" and 1", which arc usually demon- 
 stratives, are in a few instances employed also as relatives. 
 
§00. VK.RBS ; GF.NF.RAI, CLASSIFICATIOV. lil 
 
 //. Interrogative. 
 
 t4. The Hebrew has two interrogative pronouns viz. ^^ 
 
 irAo, n'2 what. The latter also takes the forms n/3 and Tip. 
 
 Before Matjqeph n?^ becomes HJZ (§ 32. 3. § 54. 2. 6), and is joined 
 by Dagfhesh eupbonic uitb the following word; as "^Vtits mdl-lfkhd 
 (§ 29. 8. a). Before f^ntturals with Qamets, T]'0 becomes T,"^, for the 
 «akc of euphony. (§ (30. 1.) 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 *§ 69. General classification* 
 
 1. As to origin, verbs may be divided into three classes, 
 (r/) Primitive, i. e, underived from any other words. 
 
 E. g. TirJO ioreign^l 2'^"^ to 5iV, and so of most of the Hebrew verbs, 
 
 (6) Derivafive, i. e. such as come from primitives by 
 the accession of formative letters. Such arc all the con- 
 jugations of verbs (§ 71), excepting the first or Kal. 
 
 (c) Denominative, i. e. those whicli are formed from 
 
 nouns (c?e nomine). 
 
 E. g. briN to live in a tent, from '^rtN a tent. 
 
 These divisions concern the origin of verbs, but not the mode of 
 inflection. A great number of verbs is comprehended in the class 6, 
 while very few belong to the class c. 
 
 2. In respect to derivation and inflection, verbs are 
 divided into rct^ular and irremilar. Regular verbs arc 
 those which are uniform in their inflections, and preserve 
 throuo'h all their chan2;es their orip;irial triliteral root. 
 Verbs irregular are either pluriliteral, or those Avhich 
 drop or assimilate one or more of their radical letters, 
 or which exhibit peculiarities in thcu* vowel-points occa- 
 sioned by the gutturals and quicsccnls. 
 
 t Literally, he reigned. The in.^inilive in En;;lisli is used in lliis work, mcrc- 
 Ij for (he sake of brevily, in prtference to tlie praeter wMcli woulu exactly cor- 
 respond to the Hebrew root. 
 10 
 
142 § 70. verbs; conjugations. 
 
 *§ 70. Verbs ; covj ligations, 
 
 1. The term conjugation^ in grammars of the Greek, 
 Latin, and some modern languages, is employed to denote 
 diiferent classes of verbs, which are distinguished from 
 each other by certain peculiar characteristics of form or 
 inflection, and which are therefore said to belong to the 
 first, second, third &c. conjugation. In this sense, the He- 
 brew might be said to have several conjugations ; but this 
 word is not so used by Hebrew grammarians. 
 
 2. In Hebrew grammar the word conjugation is ap- 
 plied to different Jhrms of the same verb, and corresponds 
 in some degree with the term voice in Greek grammar, al- 
 tliough it is employed in a much more extensive sense. 
 The passive and middle voices in Greek exhibit the orig- 
 inal idea of the verb under certain modifications, — with 
 some additional shades of meaning. So the property of 
 all the conjugations in Hebrew is to vary the jjrimary 
 meaning of the verb, by uniting with it accessory significa- 
 tions. The Hebrews were thus enabled to express, by 
 means of their conjugations, all those various modifications 
 and relations of verbs, Avhich in most other languages are 
 expressed either by composite verbs or by several words. 
 
 Tims Kal, the first conjugation in order, exhibits the verb in its 
 oria;inal state and in its simple meanins;-. The next, Niphal, is formed 
 fi'om Kal, and gives to the verb a passive sense. Then come Piel and 
 Pual, formed from Kal, which are active and 'passive to each other, 
 and usually exhibit the verb in 9. causative sense ; and so of all the 
 other conjugations. 
 
 The most convenient arrangement is, to make as many conjuga- 
 tions as there are forms of verbs, original and derived. Those are 
 presented to view in the following section. 
 
§71. verbs; conjugations. 143 
 
 §71. Verbs ; table of conjugatiotis. 
 
 For a particular account of all the conjugations exhibited in this 
 section, see §§ 76 — 82. 
 
 /. Usual. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 
 JVame. 
 
 Form. 
 
 JVame. 
 
 Form. 
 
 1. Kal 
 
 ^Dp, 
 
 .... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 . . . 
 
 2. Niphal 
 
 ^'^V.' 
 
 3. Piel 
 
 -4^.^ 
 
 4. Pual 
 
 ^'^-i:!; 
 
 5. Hiphil 
 
 -""^Rn- 
 
 6. Hophal 
 
 ^jpn. 
 
 7. Hithpael 
 
 ytpj'/nn. 
 
 .... 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 '//. 
 
 Unusual. 
 
 ^. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 8. Hothpaal 
 
 !:Dp_nn. 
 
 9. Poel 
 
 ::niD. 
 
 10. Poal 
 
 nniD. 
 
 11. HIthpoel 
 
 nniDnn. 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 12. Polel 
 
 n^ip. 
 
 13. Polal 
 
 a^ip. 
 
 14. Hithpolel 
 
 c^ipnn. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 15. Pllel 
 
 "^\P?: 
 
 16. Pulal 
 
 y?i:p; 
 
 17. Hlthpalel 
 
 bb'qpm. 
 
 '. . . 
 
 , . . 
 
 18. Pealal 
 
 VoVop. 
 
 19. Poalal 
 
 '"-V^i?; 
 
 20. Pilpel 
 
 nDno. 
 
 21. Polpal 
 
 DMO, 
 
 22. Hithpalpal 
 
 '^5b5nn. 
 
 also nOnp. 
 
 23. Peoel 
 
 ^^"^'X^?.' 
 
 • • • 
 
 . . . 
 
 24. Tiphel 
 
 ^'^r.^.' 
 
 25. Popaal 
 
 ^!?i;^E- 
 
 
 III. Pluriliteral verbs. 
 
 
 ■^'•rPI^' 
 
 CDIS, 
 
 b:ro, ;rJDDi. 
 
144 §§ 72, 73, 74. verbs; conjugations, ktc'. 
 
 *§ 72. Verbs ; number of the conjugations » 
 
 1. All the conjugations exhibited in the preceding section are ac- 
 tual forms of verbs found in the Hebrew language ; but only the first 
 seven are of usual occurrence. As no verb in Greek is ever actually 
 found in all the persons and tenses of the three voices ; so in Hebrew, 
 no verb is ever found in all these conjugations. The instances are 
 very rare, in which a verb actually exhibits all of the -usual conjuga- 
 tions. But that so many conjugations exist in the language is certain- 
 ly not improbable, since actual forms in them occur, and the Arabic 
 language exhibits at this day nearly an equal number. 
 
 2. The student, however, need be under no apprehension of diffi- 
 culty from the unusual conjugations. He may safely neglect them at 
 first, and an acquaintance with the usual ones will lead him easily and 
 imperceptibly to a knowledge of the others. 
 
 *§ 73. Verbs j arrangement of the conjugations, 
 
 1. The forms which are passive are arranged in the table (§ 71) 
 opposite to those active forms to which they respectively correspond. 
 Niphal is commonly represented as the passive of Kal ; and so it some- 
 times is ; but it is so frequently the passive of other conjugations, that 
 it is here arranged as a general passive without any particular rela- 
 tion. 
 
 2. By the preceding arrangement of the active and passive forms, 
 the student must not understand, that all of them are exclusively ac- 
 tive or passive in the manner designated. Most of them participate, 
 more or less, both of an active and passive sense. The arrangement 
 has respect to their predominant meaning. 
 
 *§ 74. Verbs ; names of the conjugations. 
 
 1. The names of all the derived conjugations arc bor- 
 rowed from the various forms of the verb 7^S, which the 
 old grammarians used In constructing the paradigms ; and 
 are merely the modes of jironoiincing those several forms. 
 2. The first conjugation is called rj^ A'd/, i.e. light; because it is not, lilce 
 
§§ 75, 76. VKRTS ; conji'gatiox km,, etc. 115 
 
 the derived forms, increased by the addition of any Idler lo (he root. 
 The other names are formed thus ; Hp 3 jy'tph-ydl ; "ri;2 Pi-"cl^ Da- 
 ghesh forte being excUided by the guttural ; b^p Pii-ydl^ Daghesh ex- 
 cluded ; 7''smr[ Hiph-yil; byon Huph-vdl; b:?2n:n Hitfi^pd-'Jel^ Ba.- 
 ghesh excUided ; and so of the unusual conjugations. 
 
 For a full exemplilication of the name.s of all the conjugations, 
 see Appendix F. 
 
 *§ 75. Verbs } root of all the conjugations, 
 
 1. The tliird person singular of the praetcr inKal Is re- 
 garded as the ground-lorin or root of nearly all verbs, be- 
 cause it exhibits the most simple form of the radicals. 
 In one class {v^) of verbs irregular (§ 1 17), the infinitive is 
 regarded as the ground-forrn, merely because it exhibits 
 three radicals, while the praeter has but two. 
 
 2. Many grammarians, however, regard the infinitive mood as the 
 root in all verbs. It is true that the infinitive is the ground-form of 
 more parts of the verb, than is the third person praeter. But to de- 
 cide which existed first, is not in our power. Among the Arabians, 
 the grammarians of Bassora maintain that the infinitive is the root of 
 verbs in their language ; other grammarians among them generally 
 give a preference to the praeter. De Sacy Gramm. Arabe, § 529. 
 
 *§ 76. Verbs ; conjugation Kah 
 
 1. The conjugation Kal is active, but it may be either 
 transitive or intrwmtivc. These two classes of verbs in 
 Kal are very commonly distinguished by the vowels of the 
 ground-form. 
 
 E- g- 1)~S to visits with final Pattahh, transitive, 
 "U-l '" gfow old^ - - Tseri, intransitive. 
 "ii" to be afraid, - - Hholem, 
 
 2. Hence there are three forms distinguished by their 
 la>t vowel, and corresponding to the three classes of vow- 
 
14G §77. verbs; conjugation niphal, 
 
 els, the two latter of which forms are usually Intransitive. 
 To distinguish these verbs, they may be named verbs final 
 Pattahh, Tseri, and Hliolem.^ 
 
 Note. Verbs final Pattahh are sometimes intransitive ; as Vl^ and 
 Vl^ to be great. But verbs final Tserl or Hholem are seldom transitive. 
 
 In Arabic, the above distinction of the classes of verbs by means of 
 different vowels, prevails more extensively than in Hebrew. 
 
 3. Inasmuch as all intransitive verbs approach to a 
 passive sense, so verbs that are intransitive in Kal are some- 
 times rendered passively. 
 
 E. g. nby to ascend., also to be elevated. 
 
 4. In Kal, the same verb is not unfrequently both tran- 
 sitive and intransitive or passive. 
 
 E. g. Y^Z to scatter., also to be scattered. 
 
 *§ 77. Verbs; conjxtgation Miphal, 
 
 « 
 
 1. The characteristic of Niphal is JS'un prefixed;" as 
 Kal Vjp^, Niphal ^'JpS 
 
 In Arabic the corresponding conjugation has IN prefixed ; and 
 this, or at least its equivalent, appears in Hebrew in the infinitive of 
 Niphal ; as V'lOJPirt = btppsn; so that :r! prefixed was probably 
 the original characteristic of Niphal, though at present it appears 
 only in the infinitive *Jid imperative 
 
 Note. The point under the prefix Nun would therefore regularly 
 be a simple Sheva ; but as the first vowel of the ground-form is dropped. 
 Nun commonly takes Hhireq parvum ; before gutturals, it takes 
 Seghol or Pattahh. (§ 58. 1, 2.) 
 
 2. Niphal is used in the following senses. 
 
 (r/) It is commonly tlie passive of Kal, when Kal is 
 transitive. But when Kal is intransitive or not used, then 
 Niphal is the passive of cither Picl, or Hiphll, or of both, 
 provided they are transitive. 
 
 X Commonly caHed middle Pattahh kc. i. e. (he middle letter having Pat- 
 tnhh kc. But the student is more liahle to mistake in this way, than if the de- 
 nomination is taken from the final vowel, as above. 
 
§ 78. verbs; pif.l and pual. 117 
 
 (6) It is not unfrcqiiently intransitive, and tlien it may 
 a^ree in meaninof with Kal intransitive. 
 
 E. g. Kai rrVn to be sick., Niph. I^'rn: in the same sense. 
 
 (c) It is often reilexive ol" Kal ; as Ipcj to watch^ 
 n'^d] to icatch ones self. It is also reflexive of other 
 active conjugations. 
 
 {d) It is used in significations like the following; viz. to 
 show one's self as performing an action, as ^^DD to show 
 one's self honorable ; to appear to do or sulfer a thing, as 
 "^^ to ap-jear to be smitten ; to permit an action, as 1P!5?D 
 to permit one to entreat., i. e. to hearken to him. 
 
 ((?) It is employed to express reciprocal action which 
 implies two parties ; as u2El33 to contend, tZHPS to Jight &;c. 
 So IZ?'' to decide, Niph. 'I'jy}^ to decide by conferring with 
 another. 
 
 (y*) In some cases it implies a dative of personal ad- 
 vantage, like the middle voice in Greek; as /J^D to ask, 
 Niph. bi<Z2_ to ask for one's self. Compare auaof-ica. 
 
 (g) It often serves to express affection and passion, 
 as Mji^O to sigh ; being used like deponent verbs in Latin. 
 
 (h) Sometimes it requires to be translated by prefix- 
 ing can, must, may, ought kc. to the corresponding verl) in 
 English ; as Gen. 6: 21. 16 : 10. 20 : 9. 
 
 *■§ 78. Verbs ; conjugations Piel and Pual. 
 
 1. The characteristic of Piel and Pual is the doubling 
 of the middle radiccd, expressed by Daghesh forte in that 
 letter, or by an equivalent prolongation of the preceding 
 vowel ; as Kal t:"Jp^. Piel Vjp, Pual ^T'jp. 
 
 In Aramaean and Arabic are correspondin;^ ronjug-ation?. 
 
148 §78. verbs; hiphil and hophal. 
 
 2. Plel has the following significations. 
 (a) It is usually causative of Kal. 
 
 E. g. 11^ ^^ perish, Piel '^2^l to cause to perhh i. e. to destroy. 
 (6) It signifies to let, help, hold, or show a thing to he 
 thus and so. 
 
 E. g. i^T! to live, STn to let one live ; p^it to be just, p'^_ii to shew 
 to he just, i. e. to justify ; M^_t2 to he unclean, N73_t2 to pronounce unclean. 
 
 (c) It is sonfietimes intensive of Kal. 
 
 E. g. V^?^ii to flsA;, !riit>y ^ 6e^ ; ^i'ij <o break, '^2'l23 to (?05^ «?i pieces. 
 
 (^) It has In some verbs a privative sense, or denotes 
 
 action in opposition to that indicated by Kal. 
 
 E. g. "l5- to know, '^33 to misapjjrehend ; i<t3n ^o sin, ii'CT] to make 
 expiation for si^i. 
 
 (c) It often has the same meaning as Kal, or has only 
 a slight shade of difference, when Kal is transitive. The 
 intransitive meaning of Kal is very seldoai transferred to 
 Piel. 
 
 When the sense of a verb in Kal is figurative, the literal sense of- 
 ten appears in Piel ; as Kal Nns to create, Piel Nn2 to hew out. 
 
 3. Pual is simply the passive of Piel. 
 
 *§ 79, Verbs ; conjugations Hiphil and Hophal, 
 
 1. The characteristic of Hiphil and Hophal is He pre- 
 fixed ; as Kal V'Jp, Hiph. ^^^"Opn, Hoph. b'^'pt] or V'Jpn. 
 
 In Arabic and Aramaean, the characteristic is N instead of Tl. 
 
 2. Hiphil has a near resemblance to Piel in its sig- 
 nifications. 
 
 (a) It is usually causative of Kal. 
 
 E. g. Il^'ip to be holy, Hiph. 'tii'^'^ptn (o make lioly ; '0^'~\'' to possess^ 
 'ij'^'yyl^ to cause to possess. 
 
 Note. Commonly but one conjugation is used in a causative sense 
 
§ BO. VKRHS ; IIITHPAKr,, 149 
 
 If Piel have such a moaninor, then Hiphil is not commonly used, or 
 else is used in a sense somewhat difTeront from that of I'icl. The lat- 
 ter case not unfrequently occurs, in which llij)hil and Piel have a 
 slight shade of difference ; as ins to be hidden^ Piel "ins to conceal, 
 Hi[)h. TTjlDn to extirpate. Compare uqavi^nv in Greek. 
 
 (/;) It is sometimes intransitive, like Kal. 
 E. Sf. inb and rsrn to be white ; '^nn and ">:3""nn!n to be silent. 
 3. Hophal is the passive of Hiplnl. But as Hiphil 
 sometimes imitates Kal in sense, so Hophal imitates Niphal, 
 and has sometimes, like Niphal, an intransitive meaning. 
 (§ 77. 2. b.) 
 
 E. g Vo"', Hoph. future rD^"* to be able. 
 
 § 80. Verbs ; conjugation Hithpael, 
 
 tl. The characteristic of Hithpael is m prefixed to 
 the infinitive-form of Piel ; as infinitive Piel PtpjP, Hithpael 
 
 In Aramean, the prefix is JnN ; in Arabic, n is equivalent to the He- 
 brew and Aramaean, the prosthetic in or wX being omitted. 
 
 2. The characteristic r\T[^ underoocs several changes, 
 in order to unite with verbs. The Hebrews appear to 
 have had a difliculty in pronouncing T\ = th beibre the 
 sibilants and some other letters, and to have had recourse 
 to various expedients to avoid such a sequence. 
 
 (rt) When a verb began with a sibilant, they com- 
 monly (not always) transposed this letter, and placed it be- 
 fore the n of the characteristic. (Comp. § 44.) 
 
 E. g. D Kal bno Hithpa. irrnCfi instead of VaDnn 
 
 'O - Sri! — -i'.^r'^pn — ^V^^rt 
 
 ^ - "^-yz — p~'^'^~ — P^.^nn 
 
 In the Inlier raso {'ly (ho n is not only transposed, but changed in- 
 20 
 
150 § 80. VERBS ; HITHPAEL. 
 
 to its cog-nate 13 (§ 40. 1). This case, however, is very unfrequent in 
 Hebrew, though common in the cognate languages. 
 
 (6) When a verb began wills a cognate letter, i. e. 
 with '1, D, or n, the fl of the characteristic was usually 
 assimilated. 
 
 E. g. ^^.vl instead of ^a'^inlri from ^ST 
 
 a7anri — l373nrin — D»n 
 
 This practice also appears to have arisen from the difficulty of pror 
 nouncing n=: //i before its cognate letters. The usage is general, 
 but not without a few exceptions. (§ 41. 1. (/.) 
 
 (c) In a lew cases the principle of" assimilation was ap 
 plied when verbs began with the letters which follow. 
 With T, as ^STrt instead of ^3Tn;i from n3| 
 
 — 3, as rtDsn — !^*?.?»"in — f^'?^ 
 
 — :, as N2iri — ^r.^^n — ^n: 
 
 — ^, as Q^.inN — D^oinnN — D^n 
 
 — "vT, as DTSTi^n — cav^nn- — ni2XD 
 
 In all the cognate languages, the same principle of assimilation ex- 
 ists in like cases. 
 
 t3. Hithpael is used in the following senses. 
 
 (a) It is sometimes passive of Piel, from which it 
 borrows its form ; sec no, 1 above. 
 
 E. g. Pie) 1jp,2 to number, Hithpa. 'iJPEnri to be numbered. This 
 sense is unfrequent. 
 
 Qj) It is iiS!ially reflexive of Piel. 
 
 E. g. 'tiTj? to sanrAify^i "ilJ'i^ri^l he sanctified himself. 
 
 So the middle voice in Greek is sometimes passive and sometimes 
 reflexive. 
 
 (c) The general idea conveyed by Hithpael is, to 
 make or slicw onc^s self to be or do that, which the 
 ground-form of the verb indicates. 
 
 E. g. D2jn»")Jl to show onc\s self cunning., from DlDH to be wise ; 
 V'^ann to behave one''s self proudly., from ir'ia to be great ; T^tT}r>ri to 
 represent one^s self as sick, from n;rn to be sick. 
 
§81. verbs; unfrequent conjugations. 151 
 
 It is used also in senses closely allied to the preceding. 
 
 E. <r. Dsnnn to think one's self wise, from C^n to be wise ; tJEnnn 
 to make one's self to be sought^ i. e. to conceal one'^s ^If^ from u:2n to 
 seek ; linnn to ask favour fur onc''s self properly to make one gracious^ 
 from 'jjn to be gracious. 
 
 ((/) It is sometimes intransitive, like Kal. 
 
 E g. b^i^nn to mourn., ?]iNnri to be angry. 
 
 (f) Like Ni[jlial (§ 77. 2./), it often indicates after 
 it a dative of advantage ; as nr^riiTI to rid ones -"^(^fof. 
 (^) It is often active and transitive, like Kal. 
 E. g. *^73n*2Jri to keep or observe laws, statutes &,c. 
 
 §81. Verbs ^ iinfrefjiient conjugations. 
 
 1. Hothpaal (^tiJPrn or h''^^_pT\) is the passive of 
 Hithpael as to form ; but cannot be distinguished in sig- 
 nification from Hithpael used passively. (§ 80. 3. a.) 
 
 So the passive forms of some of the Arabic conjugations (e. g. 
 conj. VII.) have an active, passive, and reciprocal meaning. 
 
 2. Pud and Poal (-I11D and DDiD) are rarely 
 found in regular verbs. In verbs •"}? (§ 115), these con- 
 jugations are the forms usually employed instead of Piel 
 and Pual ; though the latter sometimes co-exist with the 
 former. Poal is the passive of Poel. 
 
 Note 1. The Hholem in Poel and Poal (l^^D and iiiD) is im- 
 pure and immutable. These forms correspond with the active and 
 passive of the third conjugation in Arabic, which reads iUN|5, bia^p. 
 Note 2. In meaning, Poel and Poal resemble Piel and Pual ; i. e. 
 they are causatives of Kal, and sometimes synonymous with it. But 
 where there is a Piel and Poel conjugation of the same verb, there is 
 generally a distinction in the sense of them, such as exists between 
 Piel and Hipbil in regular verbs. (§ 79. 2. a, note.) 
 
 3. Hithpoel (DDIDnn) stands related to Poel and Poal, 
 
152 §81. verbs; unfrequent conjugations. 
 
 as Hithpael to Plel and Pual (§ 80 ). It is a reflexive 
 of Poel, and is subject to all the varieties of meaning which 
 belong to Hithpael ; and also to the same transpositions 
 &;c. of its first radical with the characteristic m • (§ 80. 2.) 
 
 4. PoM and Pohl (CDIJP and G^ip) are found in 
 verbs 13? (§ J 17), and are the forms commonly used 
 in verbs of this class instead of Piel and Pual ; though 
 the latter sometimes co-exist with the former. For their 
 meaning, see no. 2 note 2 above. 
 
 5. HitlipoJd (S/Dlpm) is related to Polel and Polal, 
 as Hithpael to Piel and Pual. (§ 80. Comp. no. .3 above.) 
 
 6. P'del and Pidal (^< u3p and ^^up ) are rare forms of 
 some regular verbs, made hy doubling the last radical. In 
 meaning thev resemble Piel and Pual. 
 
 E. g. bb£: from b?: ; nnai: from na^; Pulal br'SN, probably 
 from b^N. With a guttural, y-'?.'^. 
 
 7. Hilhpakl (VVop.nr:) is related to Piiel and Pulal, 
 
 as Hithpael to Piel and Pual. (§ 80. Comp. no. 3 above.) 
 
 Note. All the conjugations in nos. 4, 5, 6, and 7, have one com- 
 mon characteristic, viz. that they double the last radical. In this re- 
 spect they differ from Poel, Foal, and Hithpoel, which only insert T 
 after the first radical, 
 
 8. Pcalaland Poalal 6p<LJp. ^"^ Vprj;^), formed by 
 the reduplication of the last two radicals, aie intensive 
 conjugations, giving energy to the simple meaning of the 
 verb. 
 
 E-g- '^T\'~\y\^_ to move ahoid rapidly^ from *inS to travel about; 
 '^'^1'^T}. to ferment vehemently^ from "l^ri to ferment. 
 
 9. Pilpel and Polpal (-OpD and npniD or 2'C2}D). 
 
 II It " " i' I . ■ ^ ■ '■ 
 
 In verbs 3?^ and VJ, the first and last, i. e. the permanent 
 
 radicals only, are doubled in order to form conjugations re- 
 
§^82,83. verbs; pluriliteral, ktc. j53 
 
 scmbling in some measure those in no. 8. In meaning they 
 resemble Kal or Picl and Pual. 
 
 E. g. >ara from bba ; bsbs from bis. Polpal bs^s 1 K. 20: 7. 
 
 10. Hithpalpal (^^p^nH), rcllexive of Pilpcl, occurs 
 in several cases, and stands related to Pilpel and Polpal, as 
 Hitlipael to Kal, Plel, and Pual. (§ 80. Comp. no 3. above.) 
 
 11. Peoel (Ttii^p) is uncommon. It appears to be 
 
 active, and like Kal in meaning^. 
 
 In form, Peoel resembles the twelfth conjn2;ation in Arabic, which 
 reads bk^iCJPN with Aleph prosthetic. In Hebrew we have "i^f/i^n 
 to blow the trumpet^ from "l^n. 
 
 12. Tiphel (^lOpn) is active, but verj' unfrequent. 
 It is more common in Svriac and Arabic. In Hebrew 
 we have ^^"ID io icalh literally to foot it, from b^l foot. 
 
 13. Popaal (pppuDp), formed by repeating the two 
 first radicals, is very rarely found. 
 
 In Ps. 45: 3 we have n'^CC thou art very fair, from hC"^, where 
 the meaning is intensive. 
 
 § 82. Plurililcral verbs. 
 
 There arc ver}' fc\Y verbs in the Hebrew language 
 which have more than three radical letters, and they are 
 all Ibrmed from trilileral verbs by the addition of another 
 letter (§ 62. 4); as 7d'^D from uinS. They are declined 
 like Pilel and Pulal. (^ &!;=#:) 
 
 § 83. Denominative verbs. 
 
 Verbs derived from nouns do not diifer as to form, flexion, 
 
 or meaning, from underivcd or primitive verbs; unless it 
 
 it be, that in Piel the privative meaning is more frequent. 
 
 E. g. ^"jt'li a root, *'iJ'?.^ to root %ip, to tear vp by the roots ; "VP^. ash-' 
 M, yii"^^ to take azi'ay ashes ; 3ib the heart, S2b to wound the heart <S-c. 
 
154 §§84,85,86- verbs; flexion, etc. 
 
 *§ 84. Verbs ; jltxion, 
 
 1. In respect to moods a)id tenses, the PJebiew lan- 
 guage is very limited. It has only two tenses, the prae- 
 ter and future, distinguished by definite and appro- 
 priate forms ; and its only moods are the indicative, the 
 imperative, and the infinitive ; with a participle present 
 and past. 
 
 2. All the other tenses and moods are indicated by 
 those already mentioned, used in some peculiar syntactical 
 connexion, or with some small change of the vowel-points. 
 In respect to designating number, person, and even gender, 
 the inflections of the Hebrew verbs are sufficiently copious. 
 
 *§ 85. Verbs; ground forms. 
 
 The piincipal ground-forms of tlie inflections In all the 
 conjugations may be reduced to two ; viz. the third per- 
 son singular of the praeter, and the infinitive mood. 
 
 Thus in Kal, btij^ is the ground-form of all the persons in the prae- 
 ter, and also of the present participle. The intinitive Virp is the 
 ground-form of the future and imperative. In all the derived conju- 
 gations, the 3 pers. sing, praeter is the ground-form of all the persons 
 in the praeter, and of the participle in Niphal; while the infinitive is 
 the ground-form of the future, imperative, and (except in Niphal) of 
 the participle also. 
 
 *'^ 86. Verbs ; formation and fexion of the praeter. 
 
 1. The persons of a verb in Hebrew are ranged in 
 an order contrary to that which they hold in the gram- 
 mars of the western languages. The 3 pers. sing. masc. 
 being usually the ground-form, is placed first in order, 
 while the first person stands last. 
 
§§ 80, 87. VF.RRS ; formation of tiif. fraeter, F.Tr. 155 
 
 2. The persons andsjcnderof the practcr, arc designa- 
 ted by fragments of the personal pronouns suffixed to the 
 ground-form. (Conip. § 66. 2.) 
 
 Si>ii{ular. 
 
 3 mas. ^Lip ground-form. 
 3 fem. rr^I^p by adding n_ 
 
 fragment of N'^n. 
 
 2 mas. 
 
 r^-jp 
 
 2 fem. 
 
 rV'jp 
 
 1 com. 
 
 ""rV^p, 
 
 3 com. 
 
 v^'jp 
 
 ;'iT 
 
 2 mas. 
 
 srVLip 
 
 2 fem. 
 
 i^^^P 
 
 1 com. 
 
 "ijrjp 
 
 n nn 
 
 — — nrwx. 
 
 T ~ 
 
 n ^■n 
 
 — — r.^ \'^_N. 
 
 ^n n 
 
 prob. from obs. Ti<. 
 
 Plnml 
 
 
 1 N^l 
 
 derivation unknown. 
 
 tn 
 
 fragment of CDX. 
 
 
 — — ]r>s. 
 
 ■^3 
 
 — — iDwV?. 
 
 Note 1. The suffix-forms in the second column are variations from the 
 common ones and are of very unfrequent occurrence. He paragogic 
 sometimes (though very rarely) is added to the forms of the praeter, 
 but does not take the tone ; as Sinijbs: instead of "Nboa (§ 34.2.A,notes). 
 Nun paragogic is also rarely found appended to those persons which 
 end in n or '^_, for an account of which, see § 35. 2. 
 
 Note 2. Inasmuch as some of the above suffixes shift the place of 
 the tone, they occasion one of the vowels of the ground-form to be 
 dropped ; see § 56. 2, 3. 
 
 *§ 87. Verbs ', forms of the infnitixe, 
 
 1. The irifinitive or second ground-form is a kind of 
 verbal noun, and like nouns has two states, the absolute and 
 construct (§ 13.5). In general, it has forms adapted to de- 
 sififnate these states. 
 
 For the various uses of the infinitive absolute and construct, see 
 
156 § 87. VERBS ; forms of the infinitive. 
 
 /. Infinitive construct. 
 
 2. The infinitive construct, being the most simple, is re- 
 garded as the ground-form. In Kal its characteristics are 
 Sheva under the first radical and a p?/re Hholem, Pat- 
 tahh, or Tseri, between the two last; as ^tOp, DD^, "flj. 
 
 Like the praeter it has final Pattahh, Tseri, and Hholem. (§ 76.2.) 
 
 3. In all the derived conjugations, the final vowel 
 of the infinitive construct is Tseri, Hhireq, or Pattahh. 
 
 See in the paradigms (§ 1 27) the infinitives of Niphal, Piel, Hith- 
 pael, Hiphil, Pual, and Hophal. 
 
 Note. The irregular verbs exhibit some variations from the general 
 rules in nos. 2 and 3. 
 
 4. The infinitive construct, being a verbal noun, some- 
 times takes a feminine ending in H-, or n_. (§ 131.) 
 
 In regular verbs this is unfrequent ; as il^'^p^ instead of iljs. But 
 in verbs Mb (§ 122), it is the common form ; as nibii for nib-) (§47, 
 4 note) instead of the masculine form iba. So in verbs "jD {^ 113); 
 as mp5 from *i23a, which is for m;53. In verbs "iD (§ 109); as ni'iJ from 
 S"^ which is for i'llJ"^. Sometimes in verbs Nb (§ 120); as HiJ^a in- 
 stead of Nap. 
 
 II. Infinitive absolute. 
 
 5. Of the infinitive absolute the characteristics in Kal 
 are Qamets under the first radical and Hholem impure be- 
 tween the two last ; as pltip It is regularly of this form 
 in Kal, and triliteral in nearly all the kinds of verbs. 
 
 In verbs ly however, DTp stands by contraction for Dip. 
 
 6. In the derived conjugations also, the infinitive abso- 
 lute generally takes Hholem impure in the final syllable. 
 
 E. g. Niph. inf const, buj^i^, abs. btip!^ ; Piel inf const, btcp, abs. 
 b"l3)5 ; Hophal inf. cons, btsp, abs. b't:p. But Hiphil has (■•— ) or (— ) 
 in the inf, absolute ; as b'^JJpii or bpp^, the Tseri being a prolonga- 
 tion of its usual ■'-T- , since the absolute form requires a longer vowel 
 than the construct-form, (§ 52. 4. h.) 
 
§ 83. VERBS ; FOnMATION OF THE FUTURE, ETC. 157 
 
 Note. To distinguish the absolute form of the infinitive from the 
 construct, in those cases where the construct-form ends with Hholeni, 
 the absolute adopts a Tseri for its tinal vowel. Thus in Picl the con- 
 struct-form is riiy or ni-y, but the absolute nss. 
 
 The feminine termination never appears in the infinitive absolute. 
 For the various uses of both forms of the intinitive, see §§ I93i '^<J0- 
 
 *§ 88, Verbs ; formation and jltxion of the future tense, 
 
 1. We have scen(§ 86) tliat the persons of the praeter 
 are formed, by suffixing the iragnients of pronouns to the 
 tliird person singular. As distinguished from this, the future 
 is formed bj prefixing similar fragments to the infinitive ; 
 and in some cases, by suffixing additional fragments in or- 
 der to mark a difference of gender. 
 
 Singular. 
 Inf. const. 7 Dp ground- form. 
 
 3 mas. Vdp;. by prefixing — ^ \V:Xe^T;;:J°' 
 
 3 fcm. ^Dpn — ri deriv. uncertain. 
 
 2 mas. Vl^pn — ■ n from rrnfij. 
 
 2 fem. ■''ropn by suff and pr. ''_ T \ SJ-lfto'dS^the^em! 
 
 1 com. ^i^p!^. by prefixing N from '':n. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3 mag. I^Dp'^by suff andpr, 1 "^ deriv.of n uncertain. 
 
 o r .-.L-:;ls^ » ^i^ ^ ^ deriv. of n uncer- 
 
 3 fem. , .jtJOpn — I , iD n ^ ^.^^^ . ^^ from nsrt, 
 
 2 mas. iVopn — ^ T\ pref from nm.. 
 
 c *-^L-.i«"^ * ^^ ^ Prefix from 1^!^; 
 2 fem. nD^^L^pn — \ I^Z J^ ^ n: from nsn. 
 
 1 com. !?Dp3 by prefixing ] from^:N. 
 
 The suffix-forms which stand farthest at the left are occasionally 
 found, but are not common. A''un paragogic also is often found ap- 
 pended to those persons of the future w hich end in ^ or "'-, as to the 
 effect of which, see § 35. 2. (Comp. § 95. 1 . o.) 
 21 
 
158 § 88. VERBS ; FORMATION OF THE FUTURE, ETC. 
 
 2. The fragments prefixed are called praeformatives. 
 The appropriate vowel-point under them is Sheva ; which 
 appears in Piel, Pual, and their substitute conjugations, Po- 
 el, Polel &c. But in Kal, Niphal &c. the Sheva undergoes 
 various modifications, according to the laws ot" vowel chan- 
 ges as exhibited in §§ 54 — 60. In Kal of the regular 
 verb the praeformatives take Hhireq parvum, because the 
 first vowel of the original verb is dropped. (§ 58. 1.) 
 
 These changes will be described in the notes upon the respective 
 paradigms of the verbs. 
 
 3. The praeformatives, in conjugations whose charac- 
 teristic in the infinitive is Ti , usually expel it, and receive 
 its punctuation in the room of that which regularly would 
 belong to them. 
 
 Fut. Niphal Vp.p/, instead of bupil? 
 
 from inf 
 
 ■ ^^ 
 
 — — in verbs I'y D^p\ — 
 
 diprj-: 
 
 — 
 
 Qiprr 
 
 — Hiphil -"'l^j*! — 
 
 V^I2)?_d^ 
 
 — 
 
 '■'"^R^ 
 
 — — in verbs 1i> 1^'^p.l — 
 
 n^prj: 
 
 — 
 
 D^prj 
 
 — Hophal lapj'^ — 
 
 DjD^n; 
 
 — 
 
 di^^ri 
 
 — Hithpael ^^.\i^1 — 
 
 irt:.i:n!i;« 
 
 — 
 
 Vuj5nn 
 
 4. Inasmuch as the future is formed from the infini- 
 tive, it exhibits the same vowels that are found in the in- 
 finitive (§ 87. 2), viz. final Ilholem, Pattahh, and Tseri; 
 usually called future O, Jl, and E. They are used as fol- 
 lows. 
 
 (a) The future O is the most common one. 
 
 {b) The future A is usually found in the following cases, (l) hi 
 verbs intransitive, whose praeter has final Tseri. (2) In verbs with 
 a guttural in the tinal syllable ; as y^'r, future i'^'IJ";. {-i) In verbs 
 ''S, n!:, and many of fs. (§ 110. § 120. § 113.) 
 
 (c) The future E is found in verbs JO with N quiescent, a few of 
 ^£, and one of-js; as n»Nl\ n'i:"'.":, ■jn\ (§ 107. § 110. § 113.) 
 
 Note. Verbs hb have Seghol in the future, as n\yi (§ 122). 
 Probably this future is one of the class which would regularly have 
 final A : as nV:*" = ''t^^. 
 
§^ 09, 90. VERBS ; FORMATION OF THE IMPERATIVE, KTO. 150 
 
 *§ 09. Verbs ; formation andjhxion of the imperative. 
 
 1. The imperative is formed from the infinitive; and 
 like the infinitive and future, it may have final Hholem, 
 Pattahh, or Tseri. The usual vowel is Hholem. 
 
 2. The imperative, like the praetor, is wholly formed 
 by suffixes ; but they are the same with those Avhich arc 
 attached to the same persons in the iuturc. 
 
 Sin<rular. 
 
 Inf. const. Pl2P ground- for 
 
 &" 
 
 m. 
 
 2 pers. mas. 7 Zip same as the infinitive. 
 
 2 — fem. *hp2 ^y adding \ from ii"'?!- 
 
 Plicral. 
 
 2 — mas. vt2p — '^ derivation uncertain. 
 
 2 — fem. HDbdjp — HD from H"?!. 
 
 3. The imperative has no first nor third persons. The 
 persons of the future are used for these, when they need 
 to be expressed. 
 
 The imperative, like the future, is subject to apocope and para- 
 goge. (§ 92.) 
 
 *§ 90. Verbs ; formation and flexion of participles* 
 
 1. The conjugation Kal has two participles, which 
 correspond in signification with the present and past par- 
 ticiples in Latin; as DflS sc)ibe7is^ -IDS scriptum. The 
 derived conjugations have each only one participle. 
 
 The present participle of Kal, and the participle of 
 Niphal, are formed from the 3 pers. sing. masc. of the 
 praeter, in the following manner. 
 
160 § 90. VERBS ; lORxMATION OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 (a) In verbs final Tserl and Hholem, and in Niplial, 
 the participle is commonly of the same form Avith the 
 praeter ; except that in Niphal, final Pattahh is chang- 
 ed into Qamets. 
 
 E. g. Praeter and participle in verbs final Tseri as N^73. 
 
 — - — in verbs final Hholem as S^"*. 
 
 — - — in verbs Ti" as fip. 
 Common form in Niphal, as praeter '^'^J^h part. bl2p.2. 
 
 The form btOJ?, which is now used only as a verbal noun or adjec- 
 tive, was probably an old form of the present participle. So the forms 
 Nb^S and *i:J"' above, are noted in the lexicons as verbal adjectives. 
 
 (6) In verbs final Pattahh, the present participle of 
 Kal commonly inserts Hholem impure after the first radi- 
 cal, and Tseri pure under the second. 
 
 E. g. btJTp or bpp with Hholem impure, and of course immutable. 
 
 The past, or passive participle of Kal, is probably a remnant of an 
 obsolete passive voice of Kal. It takes Qamets under the first radical, 
 and Shureq between the two last; as b^top. 
 
 Note. Intransitive verbs usually have no passive participle ; but 
 use the present participle for it. When they do have a passive partici- 
 ple as to form, it is active in its signification ; as 'inST memor^ T3^t32 co7iJi- 
 dens. Some intransitive verbs have no participle, but use A participial 
 adjective instead of it ; as D'z'n ncise^ from DSn. See a above. 
 
 2. In all the other conjugations, the participles are 
 formed from the infinitive mood by prefixing ^ ; which 
 expels tlie characteristic H where it occurs, in the same 
 manner as do the praeformative. (§ 88. 3). Final Pat- 
 tahh, wherever it occurs, is changed into Qamets. 
 
 Verbs yy and iy are an exception to the above rule in Hiphil, form- 
 ing their participles in that conjugation from the praeter. 
 
 The appropriate point under the Mem is Sheva, which appears 
 in Piel, Pual &c. but in other conjugations it undergoes various chang- 
 es, for which see the paradigms in § 127, and the notes which pre- 
 cede them. It is sometimes also omitted. (§ 95. 2. e.) 
 
 3. Participles take a feminine ending in !ri_ or ri_, 
 
§ 91. VERBS ; PARAti. AND APOr, FLTrRK. 
 
 IGI 
 
 5 
 
 (§ 131. Coiiip. § 12|t). They are very frequently em- 
 ployed as adjectives, and undergo from declension the same 
 changes as nouns and adjectives. 
 
 E. g. Masc. -il::, fem. ^;-^p: from -\U: ; masc. SJ, fom. riiT from 
 Silt ; masc. '^ba, fern, np.'lria from '^^72 ; masc. 2fnr, fcm. n>"nV from Ji?'!^ 
 (§ 59.2. § 60.3). So $:n;, const. r^T;, plur. D'^yv in the sense of t/w%nw. 
 
 § 91. Fer^A' ; paragogic and apocopated future. 
 
 tl. As the Hebrew has no optative, subjunctive, nor 
 conditional mood, and only two tenses in the indicative, it 
 must be easily seen that the language needed some expe- 
 dient, by which the various shades of meaning attached to 
 a verb and designated by the moods in the question, could 
 be expressed. Such an expedient, to a certain extent, the 
 Hebrews appear to have found, in the occasional use of 
 paragogic and apocopated forms of some of the persons in 
 the future tense, instead of the ordinary regular forms. 
 
 In Syriac and Chaldee, there are no traces of such an usage in re- 
 spect to the future tense. But in Arabic, it appears in full perfection. 
 The Arabic has no optative nor subjunctive mood ; but has distinct 
 forms of the future, which compensate for the want of those moods. 
 Thus the common future in Arabic would be like the Hebrew bpp" ; 
 the subjunctive form Vtajp^ ; the conditional form '':'cpi ; and the par- 
 agogic or intensive form 'jtS^p!! J related to each other in sense some- 
 what as the English, he mi// /a'//, that he may kill^ if he might kill, he wilt 
 certainly kill. Between the poverty of the Aramaean on the one side 
 in respect to forms of tenses, and the richness of the Arabic on the 
 other, stands the Hebrew ; being neither destitute of all variety, nor 
 furnished by any means with the copious variety of the Arabic. 
 
 The paragogic and apocopated forms of the future in Hebrew, ap- 
 pear to be in an incipient state. Hence they extend not to all the 
 persons of the future, nor to all the conjugations of verbs ; nor have 
 they that variety and nice discrimination which the Arabic exhibits ; 
 one variation from the common future serving to express all the shades 
 of subjunctive, conditional, and optative moods. 
 
162 §91. VERBS 5 PARAGOGIC FUTURE. 
 
 /. Paragogic future. 
 t2. The paragogic future is constituted by adding ln_, 
 and very seldom tl-., to the Jirst persons singular and 
 plural. 
 
 In a very few cases, the second and third persons singular take Tti. 
 paragogic ; in these cases the same sense is attached to it as in the 
 first persons singular and plural. 
 
 All classes of verbs, and all conjugations, admit the paragogic Ti- in 
 the first persons ; excepting verbs passive, verbs with suffixes, and 
 verbs inb, in all which it is very rarely found. 
 
 3. The cases Avhere this paragogic form is employed, 
 
 may be arranged as follows. 
 
 (a) It is used as an optative, i. e. to express a wish or 
 
 desire, either affirmatively or negatively. 
 
 E. g. ^n^lSN let vie die : il'iiiSN nV let me not be ashamed ; com- 
 mon forms mSN, '»2iniN. In this case it is often followed by N5 ; as 
 N5~JiSbN let me go now, common form ^bN. 
 
 (b) To express excitement, urging, an appeal to one 
 to rouse him, strong assurance, solemn determination. 
 
 E. g. S^SbN / must go, common form '^5^^ ; J^^''^^ I '^M exult, for 
 ):"'^ij ; Up! my sold, iJlUi H'^'^yJJ let me rise up early, for T^^N > 
 •^Jt? !T^2'lN / am determined to speak in my distress, for '^5'^^*,• In 
 the plural rrsbs let' us go, for ^b3 &,c. 
 
 (c) It is employed to express conditional j)arts of 
 sentences ; and is thus used after the conjunctions condi- 
 tional )^j^b and 1 signifying that, so that; as l^^^b 
 irnSDfi^ so that I may declare ; give us food m*3ND1 that 
 we may cat. Sometimes it Is used In the same manner af- 
 ter 1 signifying because ; and sometimes In conditional sen- 
 tences, where the conditional particle is merely implied. 
 
§ 91. verbs; apocopated future. 1C.3 
 
 (f/) Vav conversive, especially in tlie later Hebrew, 
 often connects itself with the paragogic form ; but no spe- 
 ciality of meaning is then necessarily attached to the form. 
 
 E g. ^'I'tDN^ and / said; in earlier Hebrew ^^i<V Ezra 8: 
 28. Neh. 5: 7^, 8 &c. 
 
 //. Apocopated future. 
 
 t4. The apocopated future occurs in the second and 
 third persons sing. masc. and in the 3 pers. sing, feminine, 
 when they are without suffixes. It is constituted by 
 shorteninor somewhat the final long vowel of the com- 
 
 mon future, and in verbs TO by wholly removing it. 
 
 The first person very rarely admits of apocope. Cases of it in 
 this person are about as rare, as cases of paragoge in the second and 
 third persons. 
 
 t5. It does not, like the paragogic future, occur in all 
 the conjugations of verbs, but only in those which follow. 
 
 Reg. verb Hiph. b'^Up^ apoc. btajs^ b'^upn apoc. btp.JSn. 
 
 Verbs h Kal nnD"" — riD" . n^^an — r02r\. 
 
 T T -r T 
 
 Hiph. rT'tt;; — n^.; n"'7jn — njan. 
 
 Verbs rib Kal nl?.r — br (r?.:) irrb^n — ^:}n (b^n). 
 
 Piel SiVi": — ^T. (-5") ^?.5«^ — ^iri (ban). 
 
 Hiph. !rib^2 — ba^C-^.^) nban — b:|n (b^n). 
 
 The other conjugations in verbs ^ib may also sutTer apocope, and 
 they follow the same method. (§ 123. I. d.) 
 
 6. The apocopated future is particularly employed in 
 
 the following cases. 
 
 (a) To express command, wish, prohibition. 
 
 E. g. rrn^^ ^^^ him destroy., common form ri'^'nD^ he iscill destroy. 
 "IPpn bN hide not., common form TinCn thou wilt hide. 
 
 (b) After 1 that., as a conditional conjunction. 
 E. g. Speak to thine hxtsband isb-na^l that he may tell vs. 
 
1G4 §91. verbs; apocopated future. 
 
 (c) In direct negation, after 5*7 or 7&^. 
 
 E. g. 7\Qiitr\ ^?b thou shall not add; 'inin bi< thou shall not be pre- 
 ferred. 
 
 (d) Vav conversive before the second and third per- 
 sons, (but not before the first,) connects itself with the 
 apocopated form, but without any speciahty of meaning 
 necessarily attached in this case to the form. 
 
 E. g- b'^lS^] and he divided. 
 
 7. The apocopated future differs widely from the future with re- 
 tracted tone and final long vowel shortened in consequence of it, 
 (§ 35. 4). This latter is merely a matter of accentuation or orthoepy, 
 and depends on Vav conversive, and a particular form of the ultimate 
 and penult syllable of a verb ; it may happen to any verb, and in any 
 conjugation where this form concurs with the Vav ; and it has no in- 
 fluence on the meaning of the word. But the apocopated future be- 
 longs only to certain conjugations ; can take place without the Vav as 
 well as with it ; and generally has a rnea^iing appropriate to itself. It 
 is true, that Vav conversive falling upon those forms from Avhich 
 an apocopated future is constructed, generally reduces them to that 
 form. But the mere power of Vav conversive to retract the tone and 
 shorten the final syllables of the future, is exercised indiscriminately 
 over forms apocopated and forms not apocopated, in all cases where 
 it can produce its etfect. E. g. Niph. *ip,3'^, with Vav "ip.C'i, a con- 
 jugation and tense out of the circle of apocopated futures ; so com. 
 fut. b^p^, apoc. Dp;), but with Vav Dp^'^1 vdy-yd-qom. In a word, Vav 
 conversive often connects itself with an apocopated form when it does 
 not retract the tone ; it is not therefore as retracting the tone that it is 
 to be regarded when associated with the forms in question ; but the pow- 
 er of retraction and the changes suffered by the verb in consequence of 
 it, are things to be separately considered. (§ 93.) 
 
 8. In poetry, and sometimes in the later Hebrew, the apocopated 
 future is used as the simple future ; so that the distinctions above 
 made are not of universal application, but only show what is general 
 in prose, and to what the language was tending. 
 
§92. verbs; rAUAcOG. and apoc. nirr.RATiVE. IG' 
 
 § 92. Verbs ; paragogic and apocopated imperative, 
 
 1. In respect to paragogic and apocopated forms, the 
 imperative imitates the i'uture (§91). The paragogic 
 form of the imperative occurs often in Kal and Hiphil, and 
 IS more seldom found in other conjugations. 
 
 E. g. Imperative Kal com. form "l7-"iJ, parag;og"ic iT^^^'-i? 
 
 — - — anp, — iinnp 
 
 — Piel — ^ipo, — i^"^^? 
 
 2. The apocopated imperative, in some of the con- 
 jugations of verbs ""P and 1^, is more frequent than the 
 regular lorms. 
 
 E. g. Imperative Piel ba instead of !i?a ; Hiphil ';:5ri (b;»^.) in- 
 stead of ^"^.5!-i ; Kal 'i'a instead of biJa. 
 
 3. In Hiphil, both the paragogic and apocopated forms 
 are common, and have almost entirely extruded the reg- 
 ular form from use. 
 
 E. g. Reg. form r^cpf^, apoc. Vtp.pij, parag. rtb^tpJ^. 
 
 Note. Only the second pers. sing, masculine, or ground-form of the 
 imperative, is in general susceptible of the paragoge or apocope in 
 question, as this only ends in a radical letter. If any exceptidh is to 
 be made from this, it is that a very few forms in the 2 pers. fern. plar. 
 appear to suffer a kind of apocope; as "ji'/ro for n:^^"^ ; 1N,'nj> for 
 Ji:Nnp &c. 
 
 4. The meaning of the imperative is geperallj ren- 
 dered more energetic or Intensive, by the paragogic and 
 apocopated forms. 
 
 In some cases however where these forms occur, it is difficult to 
 point out a definite meaning, distinct from that of the common imper- 
 ative. 
 
 The Arabic has an intensive imperative, but it extends to more 
 persons than that of the Hebrew. 
 
106 § !?3. VERGS ; VAV COWKRSIVE OF THE FUTURE. 
 
 §03. Verbs; Vav conversive of the future, 
 
 tl. To express the Imperfect, or past tense of narra- 
 tion, the Hebrews used the future tense with Vav prefix- 
 ed, having a Pattahh under it and followed by Daghesh 
 forte ; as ^ u^p^^^l- 
 
 But when the praeformative has a Sheva under it, the Daghesh is 
 omitted; as !rti;j/''l (§ 45. 6). Before the praeformative N, the Pat- 
 tahh is lengthened (as ":^Ijj7N1), because the Daghesh is exchided from 
 the Aleph. So inbt:.!^";! the Pattahh is long under the Vav. (§ 46. 1.) 
 
 Note. Because Vav in this connexion usually gives a preterite 
 meaning to the future tense, it has been named Vav conversive ; i. e. 
 Vav conversive of the future into the past. 
 
 2. Vav conversive is commonly (not always) connect- 
 ed with the apocopated future, where such form exists. 
 
 Even the first person singular is sometimes apocopated with a Vav 
 conversive ; as N"iNT instead of InN'^NI ; but this is not very com- 
 mon. (§91.4,7.) " '^ 
 
 .3. Vav conversive commonly (not always) draws back 
 the tone from the last to the penult syllable. (§ 35. 4.) 
 
 Retraction of the tone, however, takes place only in those per- 
 sons which end with a radical letter, and have a simple penult syl- 
 lable. (§ 35. 4.) 
 
 Note. Vav conversive is jirobably a fragment of the verb nin to 
 be. The first letter is dropped, as it commonly is in Syriac ; then the 
 final r; in lni is assimilated to the first letter of the verb that fol- 
 lows it, like TiVZ for nT"^:^. We have then in bop'^l a word equiv- 
 alent to btop"^ ^]^i ^- ^- ■^'^ '^''^^ (that) he killed., or he killed. 
 
 The Arabians constantly make their imperfect by writing out in 
 full the verb of existence. The Syrians make theirs by joining the 
 present participle to the verb of existence. 
 
^§91,95. verbs; v.w hkforf. thk i>h aktk.r, ktc. /1G7 
 
 § 94. J''crbs ; Vav before the practer, 
 
 1. Vav prefixed to the praeter Is merely a conjunc- 
 tion. It frequently gives to the praeter the sense of the fu- 
 ture^ because it connects it with some antecedent future 
 or imperative, expressed or implied. 
 
 As in other languages the conjunction and (or its equivalent) con- 
 nects like cases and moods, so here it connects or indicates like tens- 
 es. The solution of the difficulty lies in this, that the Hebrew tenses 
 are in themselves real aorists, capable of being modilied by circum- 
 stances. 
 
 2. As Vav conversive draws back the tone, so on the 
 contrary Vav before the praeter throws it forward. 
 
 E. g. ■'nnq'ij, with Vav "^n-in-y^i. But this effect, though usual^ is 
 not uniform. (§ 35. 3.) 
 
 PARADIGMS OF THE VERBS. 
 
 § 95. Notes on the paradigms in general. 
 
 In general, only the usual forms are exhibited in the paradigms. 
 Uncommon forms &c. which are peculiar to any conjugation or class 
 of verbs, will be found in the notes on the respective paradigms. But 
 there are certain departures from the usual forms in the paradigms, 
 which are occasionally found in all the conjugations and classes of 
 verbs, and which are therefore collected and exhibited at one view in 
 the present section. 
 
 1. Paragogic letters are suffixed. 
 
 (a) JVun paragogic. This is occasionally suffixed to any of the pei'- 
 
 sons in the future which end in ^ or "'_ ; as 'J^::^-)'^ for niES'l^ ; 
 
 "■'j:2';ri for "'|53"iri. Very rarely is it added to the 3 per. plur. prae- 
 
 ■ ter; as "jnrv for ^rv Deut. 8: 3, 16. For the effect of JVun on the 
 
 tone, and on verbs Sir, see § 35. 2. § 123. 1, h. 
 
168 § 95. VERBS ; notes on all the paradigms. 
 
 \b) He paragogic. This is very common in the future and im- 
 perative (§§ 91, 92). It is scarcely ever found in the praeter, and 
 then only in the 3 pers. feminine ; as Niph. rii^bc:, with parag. 
 rrnNbcs 2 Sam. 1 : 26 ; Hiph. r:N"'2nr:, with parag. nni<2nn Josh. 
 6: 17. Other instances in the praeter are doubtful. For !n added to 
 the 2 pers. sing, praeter, see below in no. 3. a. 
 
 (c) Aleph paragogic and in otio. The 3 pers. plural sometimes ex- 
 hibits this; as N^sb^T for ^Dbrr .Tosh. 10:24; fut. iil'i;^- Jer. 10: 5. 
 This is an imitation of the Araiiic orthography, which in such cases 
 always employs the paragogic Ale ph. 
 
 {d) He and Yodh^ especially the latter, are frequently added as 
 paragogic letters to participles, when those participles are in regi- 
 men. Participles with paragogic He are penacuted ; with paragogic 
 Yodh^ the tone is on the last syllable. (§ 34. 2. h.) 
 
 2. Some forms are defectively written. 
 
 (o) Forms ending in ^, in the praeter, future, and imperative, are 
 occasionally written with Qibbuts ; as praeter 7i!^tV for ^"T^N 1 Sam. 
 13: 19 ; Slr^'-Z: in Kethib for 152"^ Deut. 21:7; future. '^^T.'l for ^1 ^ti':^ 
 1 K. 12: 7;'r!Dr in Kethib for JIDT"; Ezek. 23: 43. The imperative 
 appears in the same form as the praeter. 
 
 Note. Wheneveu such forms occur in Kethib as ^33123 and T\'j^\ 
 above, the consonants appropriate to the punctuation are supplied by 
 the Qeri in the margin. The forms with simple Qibbuts, likewise, com- 
 monly have the usual vowel Shureq suggested by the Qeri. (§ 21. 18.) 
 
 (6) Forms ending in "I, viz. the 3 and 2 pers. plur. feminine, not 
 unfrequently omit the n ; as 'iU:.nn for ^D'^IJar]; |'^p;>pnT for Jl^'^p.TI^rii. 
 
 (c) The 1 pers. sing, praeter, which ends in "^n, is sometimes written 
 without the Yodh final ; as nyn;| for TiV'-r ; r^^ov^ for W-^:?. (§ 86. 2.) 
 
 {d) The prepositions r, 3, b, prefixed to the infinitive of Niphal, 
 sometimes expel the n, and stand in its place; fis ^tpjta instead of 
 Vt|5Jvin2. The latter form however is not unfrequent. (Comp. § 88.3.) 
 
 (e) Participles to which Mem praeformative belongs, some- 
 times omit it. E.g. njp]: for np^b)D 2 K. 2: 10; XZ^12 for "O^lZlZ 
 Ezek. 21: 15, 16; t]7?.ipn= for a7:^j:n7:2 Ps. 139: 21. 
 
 3. Some forms have a peculiar orthography. 
 
 (r/) The 2 per?, sing. masc. of the praeter is not unfrequently writ- 
 ten with final T\ ; as riri'iss instead of ri"i= ; ~\^'t!^ f"'' ^^""3!^ ^c. 
 See the table in § 86. 2.' 
 
§ 96. REG. VERKS ; NOTES ON THE TARAP, Ol' KAl.. I GO 
 
 (6) The 2 pers. sing. fern, of the praeter is sometimes wrillcn as 
 ^rb'^p^ for rbcp^. with Yodh vi olio. (§ 80. 2.) 
 
 (f) In verb«! wliicli have n for their hist radical, the second persons 
 singular and plural of the praeter, whose sufformatives hegin with n, 
 express the former by a Daghesh forte in the latter ; as ri";!^ for 
 rnns; \^";!3 for •'pri"5S ; n^^r: for »-in"^D: ; nnu; for ^riri-^j from 
 m*tU; inuj for "'nri\2; ; 2 pei-s. phir. dn^r; for anriTir; from nnT:. 
 
 (f/) In Pie/ and Pual, in the forms which have a Sheva \mdcr the 
 middle mdical, the Daghesh characterislic of the conjugations is not 
 unfrequently omitted ; as ^i'2:p5? foi' ^S"4:p_5?i •^'^V'P ^oi" "T^V"^? '"V'^ 
 for 'nr^ &:c. (§ 45. 4.) " " ' ' ' ' ' . ' 
 
 (t) Sometimes this omission of Daghesh is compensated by length- 
 ening the preceding s uwel, as C^bn"; for Dp.^n"^ 1 Chr.2.3:6; or by a com- 
 posite Sheva under the Dagesh'd letter, as nnj^r for "njvb. (§ 45.4 n.3.) 
 
 I. REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 § 96. .N'otes on the paradigm. 
 
 Thus far the observations on verbs have been of a general nature, 
 applicable with very little exception to all the various kinds of verbs, 
 regular and irregular. We come now to particulars respecting the 
 several classes of verbs, so as to show whei-ein they differ from 
 each other in the mode of inflection. 
 
 The paradigm of the regular verb (§ 127) is to be studied in con- 
 nexion with the following notes. For the anomalous forms and depar- 
 tures from the paradigms the student must habitually consult the notes. 
 
 CONJUGATION KAL. 
 /. Praeter. 
 {(t) Verbs final Hholem (§ 76. 2) retain the Hholem in their inflec- 
 tion; as -{5^, ri"]^^, ''n"i'a^; which, when the accentis thrown off, be- 
 comes short, as ^'^>l^i vfyd-ghOr-td. But some of them conform, out of 
 the third person, to the common model also. 
 
 (b) Verbs final Tseri (§ 76. 2) commonly drop the Tseri in flex- 
 ion, and are declined out of the third person like common regular 
 \ erbs, as yen, PJ^^^n ; but in pause they retain the Tseri in the 3 pers. 
 
170 § 9G. REG. VERBS ; NOTES ON THE PARAD. OF KAL. 
 
 sing, and plural ; as ^pi'i. Several verbs have Pattahh when not in 
 pause, and Tseri when in it ; as "J^'-IJ, in pause ]^."IJ. When the ac- 
 cent is thrown forward beyond the radicals, by suffixes &,c. the Tseri 
 of the ground-form is changed into its corresponding short vowels, viz. 
 Hhireq parvum or Seghol ; as "Jb'n.^, C:n">p"l'; ; nb^, '^'^p'ly ; VK"!?, 
 
 ar;>NUj. (Comp. ^ 54.) 
 
 Note. The tone is on the ultimate syllable of the verb, when the 
 penult is not marked with the accent in the paradigm. For the uni- 
 versal laws respecting the tone, see §§ 34, 35 ; where it may be seen 
 how many causes operate to change the tone-syllable as exhibited ui 
 the paradigm. 
 
 //. Iiifinitive. 
 
 (ft) The infinitive absolute with Hholem impure, either fully or 
 defectively written, is almost universal ; as Vt:p or i'lUp. With 
 Tseri, b^.-n Gen. 26: 13; b'>^2 Ex. 12: 9. 
 
 {b) The infinitive construct exhibits various forms ; as Vcp, -Tup, 
 bnp ; fem. 'nb'cp^ or nbqp, nbpp ; Vup^ (Chaldaism). 
 
 Note 1. The Hholem of the inf const is generally j»m re. But in 
 verbs with a guttural for the middle or final letter, it appears to be 
 impure ; as p'^'T, ^1^2 &,c. where it remains unchanged. 
 
 The fem. forms of the infinitive are rather unfrequent. 
 
 Note 2. The final Hholem of the infinitive construct is commonly 
 written without a Vav ; but sometimes with one,, Being pure it goes 
 into Qamets Hhateph, when the tone is removed by Maqqeph &,c. 
 (§54.4.) 
 
 ///. Future. 
 
 (a) The praeformative of the 1 pers. sing, being a guttural, takes 
 Seghol ; as b""opj«. (§ 58. 1 . Comp. § 88. 2.) 
 
 {b) Forms as b't:p:, hr^p.l (Hholem pure), bt^pi (§ 88.4.6). Several 
 verbs have future O and .^J, each having a different meaning; oth- 
 ers have both forms without any difference of meaning. 
 
 (c) Uncommon forms occur, like sib'lDp'^ 3 pers. plural; '^";r^t:pn 2 
 sing, feminine ; Db^Upn 2 sing. masc. with suffix-pronoun, instead of 
 nbapn. 
 
 {d) Also inrUpN, nt;p;i;i* l person singular with In paragogic. Both 
 these result from retaining, in some degree, the Hholem sound in tho 
 
§97. REG. VF.RBS: NOTIS ()\ N'llMlAI,. 171 
 
 last syllable of the cjroiincl-lorm ; and are inutalions of Chaldaic and 
 Syriac futures, which have the U sound. 
 
 For the changes In the vowels of the future occasioned by pause- 
 accents, suffixes &,c. sec § 60. 7. § 124. IV note 6. 
 IF. Imperative. 
 
 Forms as Vt^J? , biup (Hholeni pure), Vt^J^ ; with M_ parag. 
 nrup, ~Vi:p, seldom nVuj?, iibbp. (§ 92). Second pers. fern. '^\'0p,-, 
 "rr": mol-kln Judg.9:10; ■'»"'D)^ 1 Sam. 28: 8 with Vav superfluous. Sec- 
 ond pers. plur. masculine lbl2p., ^-13j^ seldom; in pause, iVpp, ^-J^p- 
 
 V. Participles. 
 
 I. Active, (a) '^t:ip , "cfp (Hholem impure) ; very seldom as 
 b'^qip, yc'ip. ,With Yodh parag. "'pup, fem. very rarely \"7rL:p from 
 the feminine rir'op. (^ 40. 2. § 95. l". d.) 
 
 {b) In verbs tinal Tseri and Hholem, it has the forms Vl^-Ri '^R- 
 (§ 90. 1. a.) 
 
 Note. The final vowels Tseri and Hholem are mutable, and 
 when the accent is thrown off are shortened into Seghol and Qamets 
 Hhateph, or are dropped. 
 
 For the fem. part, see § 90. 3. § 125; and for plural forms, see 
 Dec. VII of nouns. 
 
 //. Passive, (c) b^X^^^ ; which however not unfrequently in neuter 
 verbs, and a few times in transitive ones, is used in an active as well 
 as passive sense (§ 90. 1. 6, note). Tliis is very common in Syriac. 
 
 § 97. Reg. verbs ; notes on Js'iphal, 
 
 1. The regular praeter has no variety. The infinitive absolute 
 is, in a very few cases, used for the infinitive construct ; vice versa., 
 more seldom still. The inf abs. has the form 'iJl'N for "^JTlln once 
 Ezek. 14:3. 
 
 2. The final Tseri of the infinitive, future, and imperative, is 
 shortened into Seghol, when the tone is retracted by a tone-syllable 
 immediately following the verb (§ 35. 6). In some cases this takes 
 place, without being thus followed by a tone-syllable, as imper. 'n'?.^*t7 ; 
 and also with Vav conversive. as anr':. 
 
172 §98. REG. verbs; notes on fiel and pual. 
 
 3. Instead of Seghol, however, Pattahh sometimes appears; as ^TJJP. 
 In cases where the tone is not retracted, but the final syllable 
 is in pause, Pattahh often appears, as b'2a'»_T ; especially in the sec- 
 ond and third persons feminine, as inab^'jjn. Sounder a syllable with 
 a guttural, as t^2^5En ; or a Resh, as ns'^riW ; and sometimes in oth- 
 er cases where the word is not in pause, nor has a guttural. So that 
 the second and third persons feminine seldom appear without Pat- 
 tahh in the tone-syllable. (§ 55. 4. § 99. 1, e.) 
 
 4. The future 1 pers. sing. '?t2jp N is sometimes pointed as -tOJPN. 
 Note. For the omission of the characteristic ii in the infinitive 
 after prepositions, see § 95. 2. d. 
 
 § 98. Reg, verbs j notes on Piel and Pual. 
 
 I. Piel. 
 
 {a) Praeter bt£;.p, "IS':;, iisb. Pattahh often appears before a Maq- 
 qeph, and sometimes elsewhere, particularly with Resh. 
 
 {b) The infinitive absolute in a few cases is distinguished by an 
 appropriate form; as HD^, Nij5, N3\ In general, it is the same as 
 the construct form. Once yV.n. Fem. forms ST^JaV, with suff. ^np/^^t 
 Ezek. 16: 52; ri;:r!b for -Zinh Ps. 102: 14. " ' 
 
 (c) Future tipbn:, for D^Vn': 1 Chr. 23: 6. (§ 95. 3. d, e.) 
 
 (d) Imperative -)72 Ps. 68: 31. 
 
 For (he omission of Daghesh forte, see vS 95. 3. d. p. 
 
 Note. The Tseri in the infinitive, future, and imperative, is short- 
 ened into Seghol when the tone is removed from it. (§ 54.) 
 
 //. Pual. 
 
 {a) Praeter braj^, T^iU Nah. 3: 7 with Qamets Hhateph ; bta^p with 
 Shureq, which is merely an orthographic mode of the later Hebre%v, 
 in imitation of the Syriac. (§21. 19 note.) 
 
 (fe) Infinitive absolute i:.T Gen. 40: 15. 
 
 (c) Future once '^■^ppnn Ezek. 26: 31 for "^'^p^n, with Daghesh 
 omitted (§ 95. 3. d) and a composite Sheva under the praeformative 
 as if it were a guttural. 
 
 (rf) Participle blip'O, and without the praeformative tt, Vt^p. The 
 Mem is not unfrequently omitted in the participle. (§ 95. 2. e.) 
 
 Note. The verb brin in Piel has either briii orVrjin, as if the 
 middle radical were a guttural ; in Pual bin^Jn. 
 
§ 90. RF.n. VF.nns ; xotf.s n\ Hiriiii- axd hopiial. 173 
 
 § 99. Reg. verbs ; notes on Iliphil and HopJial. 
 
 I. Ill/>hU. 
 («) The 3 per?, sins:. f^'i<l pl'"'- of llio praeter always have "'- bc- 
 hvccn the two last radicals Out of the third person, Pattahh appears 
 there as in Kai. 
 
 Forms; 3 pcrs. as b''t:p.r:, r'^cpr;, b'^qpN (Chaldaism). In the 
 second and firel persons, Hhircq parvum sometimes appears between 
 the two last radicals instead of Pattahh; as n!n\"^rLjp.!n instead of 
 ^ rf^p b tj p r; ; but this happens only \vhen the verb has a suffix-pro- 
 noun. 
 
 {h) Infinitive absolute r'^ppr:, r^.p^, ^-^'^.p.^i (Chaldaism). The 
 form with Tseri without Yodh appears to be sometimes shortened 
 when the tone is removed; as Di3D~12rt instead of 'istj. Some- 
 times, though rarely, the inf. const, has the same form as the inf. ab- 
 solute, and vice versa ; as construct "J 2b b for 'j"'zbSlb Dan. 11:35; 
 absolute T'Si;?! for -I'nyrt Josh. 7:7.' 
 
 Infinitive construct b'pjpri ; with prefix preposition commonly as 
 b^qp.-b ; but also b'^"opb,' expelling the He (§ 95. 2. d. § 88. 3). 
 Sometimes as b'^tjpn like the praeter ; rarely as the infinitive ab- 
 solute, for which see above. 
 
 (c) In the future the apocopated form is Vp.J?^ (§91. 4), with 
 Tseri pure and mutable. Very rarely the Yodh of the full form is re- 
 tained ; as T'^r Ex. 19: 3. In pause, this Tseri becomes Pattahh; as 
 '^pl!! (§60.7.a2). When the accent is retracted, the Tseri goes into 
 Seghol ; as bwp;^r (§ 55.4.) 
 
 In the 3 pers. plural, the '^_ of the common future sometimes 
 (though very rarely) is omitted ; asibt:p^ for nb''tjp\ 
 
 {d) Imperative bip.pfj with Tseri mutable, rib''t;pri. The regular 
 form b^COp" is not in use ; the apocopated or paragogic forms only be- 
 ing found in the 2 pers. masc. singular ; for which reason the apoco- 
 pated ibrm is given in the paradigm. Suilix-pronouns, however, are 
 appended only to the regular form. The other persons are formed 
 from the regular b'^Up", and are as in the paradigm. 
 
 (e) Participle b"'qp^, b^p^s ; fem. nbpp:^, once n^-r-)?^ 2 Chr. 
 24: 7 ; plur. Cb'^cp/a, D"'::?"^ as if from Yt.H'? Zech. 3:7. 
 
 For the tone-syllable of this conjugation, see 5 34. 2. e 
 
174 § 100. REG. verbs; notes on hithpael, poel, etc. 
 
 //. Hophal. 
 (a) Praeter bt^jlJ^T, often asbt^prr. The same verb sometimes has 
 both forms. 
 
 (6) Infinitive absolute -tp.p.rj, ^l^.p^J- Inf const, does not occur. 
 
 § 100. Reg' verbs; notes on Hithpael and Hothpaal, 
 
 I. Hithpael. 
 
 1. Praeter btspnrr. The praeter, future, and imperative some- 
 times as rCjTri'rt, which in pause becomes btiprin ; as b"?DriN Ps. 5: 3. 
 
 2. Those persons of the praeter which regularly would have Pat- 
 tahh between the two last radicals, sometimes take Hhireq parvum 
 instead of it when the tone is moved forward; as \n!:t2J5^rinT. Final 
 Tseri is pure and mutable. 
 
 3. As in Piel and Pual (§ 95.3.(^), theDaghesh is occasionally omit- 
 ted, and is sometimes compensated by a long vowel; as nj5cn^ Judg. 
 20:15, fomp.En\ 
 
 //. Hothpaal. 
 
 4. Hothpaal occurs very rarely, especially in regular verbs. The 
 form n npssn^i fonipsnin occurs Num. 1: 47. 2: 33. 26: 62. 1 K. 20: 27. 
 See no. 3 above. 
 
 § lOO a. lieg. verbs ; notes on Poel. 
 
 The conjugation Poel is very rare in regular verbs. The follow- 
 ing instances occur, viz. ">l3'^;ii (uJ'iTi;) Is. 40: 24, a denominative verb 
 from Uil'IJ radix ; niZ;"l**i in pause Jer. 12: 2 from the form 'ti'y^ with 
 Pattahh because of the Resh; '^UDuia my judge Job 9: 15, Poel part, 
 from tDSUi. For the manner of declining Poel, see the paradigm of 
 verbs ys?. 
 
 Note. For the few instances in which the unusual conjugations 
 Pilel., Pulal &IC. occur in regular vei'bs, see §81. 6, 11, 12 &c. 
 
§ 101. IRREGULAR VERB:=i, ETC. 175 
 
 II. IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 § 100 b. Mode of dcsignalhig irregular verbs. 
 
 1. In order to mark concisely the diflerent species of irregular 
 verbs, grammarians have employed, as a kind of technical numerals, 
 the ratUcal letters of the verb ^52, whose forms have also given 
 names to the several conjugations (§74). As D is the first letter of r^'C, 
 a verb whose first radical is a guttural, is said to be a verb regutlural; 
 and a verb whose first letter is N, ^ &c. is said to be a verb Pe Alepk, 
 Pe Yodh &.C. In the same manner verbs whose second radical is a guttural, 
 Vav &:c. are called verbs Ayin guttural, verbs Ayin Vuv &lc. because :? 
 is the second letter of r^'S. So verbs whose final radical is N, tn &c. 
 are denominated verbs Lamedh Aleph, Lainedh He kc. because b is the 
 final letter of b^B . 
 
 Note. Verbs yy are those which have the last two radicals alike, 
 i. e. which repeat the second radical for the third one. 
 
 2. In the present grammar, letters which are thus used technically 
 are indicated by the accent Garshayvn, i. e. two strokes placed over the 
 let't hand letter; as M~, Mb. These are always to be read by calling 
 the alphabetic names of each letter ; as Pe Aleph, Lamedh He &c. 
 
 CLA'S I. OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 § 101. Verbs with gutturals and Resh, 
 
 1. Under the first class of irregular verbs, I have thought it best to 
 arrange those verbs which have a guttural for one or more of their 
 radical letters. They have not usually been thus arranged by Hebrew 
 grammarians, merely because the old definition of an irregular verb 
 included only those which " change or drop any one of their three 
 radicals."' As the definition however is arbitrary in regard to its ex- 
 tent, I have thought it more convenient to extend it so as to include 
 the verbs with gutturals, and have accordingly ranked them as irreg- 
 ular; a place to which every student in Hebrew instinctively assigns, 
 them, on account of their numerous irregularities in the vowel-points. 
 It the vowels at the present day are a necessary part of a verb, why 
 
176 § 102. VERLS PE GUTTURAL. 
 
 should not their departures from regularity give rise to a correspond- 
 ing classification, as well as those of the consonants ? (§ 69. 2.) 
 
 2. Verbs which have Resh for one of their radicals may also be rank- 
 ed in the same class, because in such case Resh, by rejecting Daghesh 
 forte where it would regularly be inserted, as in Niphal and in the Da- 
 ghesh'd conjugations, affects the preceding vowel-points in the same 
 manner as do the gutturals (§ 46. 1). In other situations, Resh has no 
 very peculiar effect on the vowel-points (§ 46. 3, 5). As a final rad- 
 ical, it sometimes takes Pattahh in preference to another vowel, and 
 sometimes does not. 
 
 3. When Aleph is the first radical of verbs, it is sometimes a gut- 
 tural and sometimes quiescent. In the former case, the verbs fall un- 
 der the present class ; in the latter, they are treated of in § 107. As 
 the second radical, Aleph is always a guttural ; as the third, it is al- 
 ways quiescent. (§ 120.) 
 
 4. Under the first class of irregular verbs are to be 
 comprehended the following species of verbs. 
 
 (a) Part of verbs iSlD and all of XJ?. See no. 3 above. 
 
 Q)) All verbs HD and u^', and those of n^ in which 
 final He has Mappiq. 
 
 (c) All which have Jl or 5? for one of their radicals. 
 
 {d) All verbs "ID and "i;? where Resh Avould regu- 
 larly receive Daghesh forte. See no. 2 above. 
 
 § 102, Irrcg. verbs; verbs Pe guttural ^c, 
 
 1. When the regular verb has simple Sheva under 
 the first radical, verbs Pe guttural usually take a compos- 
 ite Sheva. (§ 46. 2.) 
 
 2. Praeformatives take the short vowel correspond- 
 ing to the composite Sheva which follows, instead of the 
 usual vowels in the reo:ular forms. The same is true of 
 the letters characteristic of the several conjugations. (§ 58.2.) 
 
 E. g. n^S^:;; instead of -fm"^. ; 1^'D!^':, Instead of PiDN> 
 
§102. VF.llHS 1"E CiUTTL'RAL. 177 
 
 NoTK. The composite Sheva under the gutlTiral here, is commonly 
 homog'eneoiis with the vowel-point which stands under the praeforni- 
 ntive in regular verhs ; i. e. the short vowel of the composite Sheva 
 is of the same class as the regular vowel of the praeformative. Thus 
 instead ofn?:^-: we have l^i;: ; for VCi-ri, T'Tsi^r; ; for T'^jyn, nvjyrr 
 ice. To this rule, however, there are very many exceptions. 
 
 3. Simple Sheva silent is not unl'requently Ibund here 
 untlcr the gutturals when preceded by a praelorinative, 
 just as it would be in regular verbs. In this case the 
 pracrorniativc takes the same short vowel as it would if 
 the Sheva had been composite ; and the guttural is united 
 with it so as to make a mixed syllable, as in regular verbs. 
 (§ 58. 2 note 2.) 
 
 E. g. "i'vi instead of STi?:; "vlian; for tnui ; "fsris for ^5r?2. 
 
 Note. Two verbs, viz. n^jjn to be and Ji^n to tive^ differ here iVom 
 all other verbs of the class Pe guttural, by adopting the regular punc- 
 tuation under the praeformative, while the guttural has simple Sheva 
 silent ; as futures n^!77 and t^^.n"; ; Niph. ^i^rjD. The verb nTt is 
 not found in Niphal, and in Hiphil it conforms to verbs Pe guttural ; 
 as r.^nn (§ 58. 2 note 2). A few others, which are also rib, take 
 Hhireq in their apocopated form; as STir, "n"; ; "-jri, "in'^- 
 
 4. When the guttural has a composite Sheva, and in 
 the course of flexion the letter which follows it comes to 
 have a simple Sheva, the composite Sheva of the guttu- 
 ral goes into its corresponding short vowel. (§ 58. 3.) 
 
 E. g. ^nn?: instead of ^ "i^y^i the latter being an impossible sylla- 
 ble. (§ 26. r.) 
 
 5. In cases where the first radical is required to be 
 doubled, as in the infinitive, future, and imperative of Niphal, 
 the Daghcsh being omitted in the gutturals and Resh, the 
 preceding vowel is therefore prolonged. 
 
 E. g. nai'r? instead of Tasri ; D7onn instead of DQ'nn. This is 
 the only case in which Rcsh produces any irregularity as a first radical. 
 
 Note. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael of this class of verbs are altogeth- 
 er regular. 
 
178 § 103. VERBS PE GUTTURAL. 
 
 § 103. Irreg. verbs ; notes on verbs Pe guttural. 
 
 I. Kal. 
 
 {a) Infinitive construct 'i^^i'", bbN ; with a preposition KhS"^, bb^!?. ; 
 also as !rbN!r. Fern, forms r7«'i;i<, fijP'tn, tibl^n Ezek. 16: 5. 
 
 {b) Future O as 'lJ3i:\ Fut. A as p^n": ; and sometimes fut. O as 
 J]D^(^ Some verbs have both forms. 
 
 Future O with Sheva simple i:iri^ ; fut. A b"3rj\ Sometimes the sing. 
 is like Vin2 while the plural is as Tb2n\ A peculiar form is Tibinn for 
 ^brin (§ 60. 6). Plurals pers. fem. Via "las'.: for tlJ-j^n Dan. 8: 22 
 a form of the fern, plural which imitates the 3 pers. fern, of the Syri- 
 ac and Arabic, in preserving the Yodh praeformative. 
 
 (c) Imperative in verbs No, ?|DM, THN. With ^ parag. inepNi. 
 Second pers. fem. ''Diprils. 47: 2 ; '^mN Ruth'3:15. Plural 2 masc^rn^N. 
 
 {d) The Pattahh sound is somewhat shorter than the Seghol-sound. 
 When a verb Pe guttural has the Seghol-vowels in its ground-form, and 
 afterwards receives accession at the end, the Pattahh-vowels are some- 
 times substituted for the Seghol ones, in order to shorten the sound 
 of the word. 
 
 E. g. Sing. f]'DN;i, plural =i2pi<\ 
 
 — "^bx;;, with suffix linn DNr 
 
 — "I^n.^ plural iT^pn^. 
 
 //. JViphal 
 
 (a) Praeter nJoy?., S'i;n;, ']iEn3i Est. 9: 1; ^ir^-:! 1 Chr. 5: 20; 
 plur. ^'ina Cant. 1:6. The form with Pattahh under Nun character- 
 istic, as nM2r,: Gen. 31 : 27, seldom appears in the praeter except 
 when preceded by the conjunction Vav ; and in the participle only when 
 increased, as dby:, fem. rtTDbJ^:, plur. D"'7:b^:. See above in no. I. d. 
 
 {b) Participle once DinHD Est. 8: 8 from Dnn. 
 
 ///. Hiphil. 
 (a) Praeter T'^^i',?!, 'T^Drin. A peculiar form is Inbrn for iiryrr 
 Hab. 1 : 15 (§ 60. 6). Vav prefixed to the praeter changes the Se- 
 ghol-class of vowels to the Pattahh-class (comp. Kal and Niphal) ; air 
 \n»^nrf, but with Vav '^pannn'i. 
 
§104. VERBS AYIN GUTTURAL. 179 
 
 (6) Infinitive absolute ^"S^n with const, form Josh. 7 : 7. Fice 
 versa^ inf. const, "n'ijyb with abs. form Deut. 26: 12. 
 (c) Future T'T:?:, n-'pi":. 
 
 {(I) Imperative plural nu;nn 2 K. 2: 3, 5, from Jrrn. 
 (f) Participle Tsntt; yi-Q for "j'^TN^ Prov. 17: 4. 
 
 /r. Hophal. 
 {(i) Praeter 'T2rn, ']?"-, ->y"n a peculiar form for Hbsn. (§ 60. 6.) 
 (/^) Infinitive absolute Vrnn Ezek. 16: 4. 
 
 § 104. Irreg. verbs ^ verbs Ay in guttural <i-c, 
 
 1. The departures from the forms of the regular 
 verb are less frequent in verbs whose second radical is a 
 guttural or Resh, than in those of the class Pe guttural. 
 The princi[)al variation is, that in persons and forms where 
 the middle radical of the regular verb would have simple 
 Sheva under it, verbs Jiyin guttural take a composite 
 vSheva, which is generally Hhateph Pattahh. (§ 46. 2.) 
 
 2. The final syllable of the future and imperative, 
 having a guttural in it, usually takes Pattahh (§ 46.3), though 
 in a few instances it has Hholem. The infinitive also, 
 contrary' to what might be expected, takes Hholem. 
 
 Note. Inasmuch as Pattahh in the final syllable of verbs Ayin gut- 
 tural results merely from the influence of the guttural, the future 
 ..'3 in verbs of this kind does not necessarily indicate an intransitive 
 verb, as is usually the case with the future Pattahh. (§88. 4. b.) 
 
 3. In the same manner, Plel in verbs of this kind not un- 
 
 frequently takes final Pattahh instead of Tseri . 
 
 E. g. an3, Cti3. So also the imperative of Hiphil; as pH'^ln in- 
 stead of pn-jn. 
 
 4. In the conjugations which regularly take Daghesh 
 forte in the middle radical, viz. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, the 
 
180 §104. VERBS AYIN GUTTURAL, 
 
 Dawhesh Is of course excluded by the gutturals and Resh, 
 and the preceding vowel prolonged. (§ 46. 1.) 
 
 E. g. Piel praet. 'JN^, "^^N^, '^n?. ; Alt. '^N!:';', 'yNS';, ^^_:2'^ ; Pual 
 ^J<il, ^t!3, yn'^ with Qibbuts long; Hlthpael ']'il2nri &.c. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 /. Kal 
 
 (a) Infinitive fern, as lni2n;ij, nblnN ; sometimes with Qamets 
 Hhateph, as ^p^n') ; and as np^rt for rtj^yT. (§ 60. 6.) 
 
 (b) Future ■'^-pn^|; for pni'^ Gen. 21: 6 ; probably an effect of 
 the pause-accent. 
 
 (c) The imperative feminine and plural is formed according to the 
 rule in § 58. 2 ; as masc. pi'T, fern. "'pS'T &,c. 
 
 //. JViphal 
 
 Infinitive absolute Dhr3 Judg. 11: 25. In other respects Niphal is 
 entirely regular, with the exception noted in no. 1 above. It is there- 
 fore omitted in the paradigm. 
 
 ///. Piel and Pual. 
 
 (a) The praeter in Piel with middle N, takes either Tseri or 
 Hhireq magnum under its first radical, as ]N75, yN: ; with middle T> 
 and n, usually Hhireq magnum and sometimes Tseri, as "JlriS, '.IJns, 
 ^HN ; with middle 5?, usually Hhireq magnum and very rarely Tseri ; 
 as -1^2, W"^. Judg. 14: 20; with middle 1, Tseri, as '^■7,2. The par" 
 adigm exhibits forms with both vowels. An anomalous form is 
 nan;: for rran*;, with suff. "^^n^an^. Ps. 51: 7 from nn\ 
 
 {b) In the infinitive, future, imperative and participle of Piel and 
 Hithpael, middle N and middle "1 usually (not always) require Q,amets 
 before them, as nND^', ^"?3^, also yij:^ Num. 14: 11 ; part. SNn'a ; but 
 middle n, H, and y, are very rarely preceded by Qamets. E. g. a"3'J, 
 '^y:'^ ; but sometimes 1^2, !3yn\ 
 
 (c) Infinitive absolute yN j with Hhireq magnum, for the usual yND* 
 
 {d) Future 1 pers. sing r^liTN Lev. 26: 33 for n"lTN. 
 
 (e) In Pual the gutturals aTid Resh require, as compensation for 
 Daghesh omitted, either Hholem or Qibbuts long ; as n-NA% nl:t7.3», 
 
 ynn kc. 
 
§105. VERBS LAMEDH GUTTURAL. IBl 
 
 IF. Hithpael. 
 
 In Hithpael we have ']'n2»"iri, bn:nr|; see Piel in b. In pause, Pat- 
 tahh under the first radical is chang-ed into Seghol, as ■'nQn:!n Ezek. 
 5: 13 lor '^n;3r;3nn. (§ 60. 1. § 80. 2. c.) 
 
 Note. Hiihpoel appears once in these verbs; viz. participle yi<i73 
 in pause Is. 52: 5, for y4<.:n73 from yi<3. (^ 80. 2. c.) 
 
 § 105. Irreg. verbs ; verbs Lamedhgullural. 
 
 1. When in regular verbs the final letter of the root 
 would have a Sheva under it, verbs Lamcdh guttural are 
 nearly without exception conformed to the regular model ; 
 as Kal praet. 2 person rj>"^Ili &c. 
 
 But the 2 pers. fern, takes Pattahh furtive under the guttural ; as 
 ri"a\!J instead of ni?a\^ (§ 59. 2 note 2). A very few forms exist like 
 ^:yaD for ^:y53. 
 
 2. All the forms vv^hich end with a guttural letter, 
 have Pattahh either proper or furtive in the final syllable. 
 
 (a) Pattahh yi<r/iY'e is inserted, when the vowel of the 
 
 ultimate syllable is ■<_, i, or "^ . (§ 27. 2.) 
 
 E. g. ?"'^'2Jn, yi^'viJ, :?iQu;. 
 
 The infinitive construct of Kal has Hholem impure, contrary to 
 the analogy of other verbs ; as J'Q^J. 
 
 (Jj) The proper vowel Pattahh appears as a final 
 vowel without exception in the future and imperative of 
 Kal. So also in the Segholate form of the participle fem- 
 inine. 
 
 E. g. Fut. yTJ-iJ"; ; imper. 5>tt'43 ; part. fern. n^pw. (§ 59. 2. § 60. 3 
 note.) 
 
 3. When in regular verbs the vowel of the final syl- 
 lable would be Tseri, these verbs either retain the Tseri 
 and insert a Pattahh furtive after it, as J^^ilj ; or else ex- 
 change the Tseri for the proper vowel Pattahh, as IS'pd- 
 
 24 
 
182 § 106. SECOND CLASS OF IRREGULAR VERBS, ETC. 
 
 The former method is common in the infinitive absolute, and where 
 a pause-accent falls on the case absolute of participles (§ 1?S: 2. c), 
 i. e. wherever a lengthened form is required ; the latter is usual in 
 the construct state of participles, in the infinitive construct, and in 
 words with conjunctive accents &c. So also in the apocopated forms 
 of Hiphil ; as imperative Mblln for nblSJl &lc. 
 
 4. Verbs Lamedh Resh frequently take Pattalili in 
 the final syllabic, but often have other forms; as ^H^"^ 
 and yc_^\ (§ 46. 3, 5.) 
 
 6, By a kind of apocope the 2 pers. plur. fem. of the imperative 
 
 has '\S)T^ for in::^'^\p once Gen. 4 : 23. 
 
 CLASS II. OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 § 106. Verbs with quiescents ^c» 
 
 1. Under the second class of irregular verbs are comprehended all 
 those in which any of the radical letters are dropped, assimilated, com- 
 muted, or become quiescent. 
 
 2. These have commonly been divided into verbs imperfect and 
 quiescent^ and that order followed in treating of them which this divis- 
 ion required. But as all divisions of this nature are merely techni- 
 cal, I shall adopt that order which seems most simple, and which re- 
 gards these verbs as irregular in their first^ second^ or third radical 
 letter. 
 
 3. Under the second class of Irregular verbs are to be 
 comprehended the following species of verbs. 
 
 («) Verbs irregular in the first radical ; viz. verbs 
 i<S with Aleph quiescent, all verbs "^3, and most of "JD. 
 
 (b) Verbs irregular in their second radical ; viz. all 
 verbs yy, n:!?, and h. 
 
 (c) Verbs irregular in their third radical ; viz. all 
 verbs iXb, verbs tlb with He quiescent, and verbs li'P. 
 
 4. There are also many verbs which are doubly ir- 
 regular, i. c. Avhich are irregular in two of their radical 
 
§ 107. VERBS PE ALEPH, 183 
 
 letters, usually the lust and last, because t\vo irregular let- 
 ters very rarely stand together. Such are verbs which 
 
 are both ^{D and Hr, as nP>{ ; verbs ''D and ^{T, as J^IS*^ ; 
 verbs "'D and Hr, ?is ni"' ; verbs "IS and 5<p, as Jiuj ; 
 verbs ^S and rk, as n'JD. C§ 124.) 
 
 .'3. A few other verbs are peculiarly anomalous ; as 
 
 wSi2, "^n for ^^n kc. (§ 121.) 
 
 § 107. Irreg. vei'bs ^ verbs Pc Aleph. 
 
 1. In the greater part of the class of verbs 5^D, the 
 letter Aleph is a guttural, and the verbs in which it ap- 
 pears in that character, are to be inflected simply as verbs 
 Pe guttural (§§ 102, 103). But in a few verbs, Aleph 
 appears in the future of Kal as a quiescent, and assumes 
 the forms presented in the paradigm and the following 
 notes. It is these latter verbs only, or verbs Pe Aleph qui- 
 escent, which are treated of here. 
 
 2. The class of verbs N9 with Aleph quiescent is quite small, com- 
 prehending only the five following verbs, viz. ^^i<, "-^^i -?^? "T^^i 
 ?12N, which are inflected only as in the paradigm. The verbs 
 -"^? "JjiJ and >]DN exhibit in the future of Kal the inflections both 
 of verbs ND quiescent and NO guttural, and belong to both species. 
 
 Note. Out of the future of Kal, ^< is everywhere considered as a 
 guttural, and the few instances in which it quiesces in other conjuga- 
 tions are anomalous, and belong as well to verbs ND guttural as to 
 verbs ^<s quiescent. They are however exhibited in the notes. 
 The paradigm gives only the future of Kal. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIG3I. 
 
 /. Kal. 
 (rt) The praeter is entirely like verbs Pe guttural ; as are also the in- 
 finitive, imperative, participles, and all the other conjugations, ex- 
 cepting the forms noted below. 
 
184 § 108. VERBS PE YODH. 
 
 (6) In the future 1 person, the quiescent M falls out after the prae- 
 formative N ; as '-(pit instead of "^^NN. The ground of this seems to be 
 to avoid the concurrence of two Alephs. 
 
 (c) Forms of the future ; "(''jwN"', ''i^N'', SinN);, rrn;; without Aleph. 
 So T ^Jzh for T "i'2Sn &c. The common form of verbs Pe guttural co- 
 exists, in some persons of the verbs TPN and ?]DN, with the quiescent 
 form ; as TrrN"^ and tijiN^. ; P|!?N\ fjp"', and 5iDN\ The first person from 
 5!jN is four times itTN, once l?]i< Prov. 8:17; all the rest are as in 
 verbs Pe guttural. 
 
 {d) The infinitive has N quiescent only in the construct form S?3Nb 
 for "iQN.b which is a peculiarity of Aleph. (§ 47. 5. a.) 
 
 (e) imperative n DN for ^ 2N by a Syriasm. (§ 47. 5. b.) 
 
 II. Mphal. 
 The only example of quiescence in Niphal is TJiN; for in^Nt j. 
 
 ///. Piel. 
 Future "'^'^.Tn 2 Sam. 22: 40 for ''^niNri where Aleph quiesces and 
 is dropped (§ 47. 2). So participle nrsV?? for^:C5N72. 
 
 IF. Hiphil. 
 (ff) Infinitive b'^^n Ezek. 21: 23 for b'^DNtj, where N is dropped 
 after becoming quiescent. (§ 47. 5. «.) 
 
 {b) Future b'^^iN for b'^DNN, after the analogy of the future of 
 Kal, supra I. b. biii*'} for biZN'T with the tone retracted. (§ 55. 3.) 
 
 (c) Imperative ^^~i^7 in pause for iDNn from tin^- The i< qui- 
 esces (§ 47. 5. a) and is then dropped. For the Yodh, see § 123. 1, h. 
 {d) Participle ']^T!a for '{"'TN^., Aleph quiescent dropped as in c. 
 
 V. Hophal. 
 Future ^b^i"* for ^PSN"', where Aleph goes into Vav in order to 
 be more homogeneous with the O sound, and then quiesces in the 
 sound of the Qamets Hhateph under the praeformative, which is of 
 course lengthened into Hholem. (§ 48. 2. 6.) 
 
 § 108. Irreg, verbs ; verbs Pe Yodh. 
 
 1. Under the general appellation of verbs Pe Yodh, 
 are comprised four kinds of verbs, nhich dilTer from each 
 other in a Jew cases, with respect to the mode of iniiec- 
 
§ 103. VRRBS I'K YODH. 185 
 
 tion : Avhile llic ground-lornis, and many ot" the lonns de- 
 rived IVoni them, exhibit the same appearance in all. 
 
 2. Most verbs denominated Pc Yodh appear to have 
 been orioinallv Pe Vav ; the Vav beinij; changed into Yodh, 
 because tlie IIel)re\vs generally avoided beginning words 
 with a Vav. 
 
 Thus lb^ appears to have been *!'?],"' as it now is in the Arabic. 
 The Arabians have a considerable number of verbs of this form, which 
 are quite distinct from verbs Pe Yodh. In Hebrew, the class of 
 Verbs "'D which originally were ns, disclose this Vav in some parts of 
 their inflection, as an original moveable letter. Thus *;b;], Niph. fut. 
 'I'r n*, imp. ^r;^^i &c. Some disclose it also in Hithpael ; as ^"]^ Hithpael 
 ' 22r!n- ^^ lliphil and Hophal it is quiescent ; as T^V'^t, ib^Tl. 
 
 3. A few verbs "^3 appear to liave been originally 
 
 so, and retain the Yodh radical throughout, in all the 
 
 forms of them which are extant. 
 
 Tliis is not to be understood, however, as excluding the defective 
 mode of writing when the Yodh is quiescent ; as iC"'^ for '^i'C''^ &c. 
 
 4. A few also assimilate their first radical Yodh to 
 the letter which follows, in the same manner and in 
 the same cases as verbs Pe A^n (§ 113); as D'l^ future 
 
 n2% Niph. ni^j. 
 
 - . J - . ^ If 
 
 5. Tnere are also a few verbs '^S whose forms can- 
 not be exclusively ranked under either of the above clases. 
 
 6. Verbs "^5 of all the clases are regular in the prae- 
 tor, infinitive absolute, and participle of Kal, and in the 
 Daghesh'd conjugations. 
 
 This is to be understood with the same latitude as is applied to 
 common regular verbs ; among which, as we have seen, occasional an- 
 omalies appear. 
 
 7. The irregularities, by which tliey differ from reg- 
 ular verbs and from each other, are limited to the future, 
 infinitive construct and imperative of Kal, and to Niphal, 
 Hiphil, and Hophal. 
 
186 § 109. VERBS I'E YODH ; CLASS I. 
 
 § 109. Irreg. verbs ; Jirst class of verbs "3, 
 
 1. The first class of verbs "^S in their origin are 12. 
 The characteristic of this class is, that in the future the 
 praeformative expels the radical Yodh, and takes Tseri; 
 and the final syllable, unless it have a guttural in it, adopts 
 also the same vowel. 
 
 E. g. ii23^, fut. '2X\ The full future in this class of verbs, as 'nj2"' 
 fut. 'Ij2'')l occurs (as an exception) in two or three instances. With a 
 guttural in the linal syllable, the form is as fut. S'T^ from i'"n"'. 
 
 2. In the infinitive and imperative, the radical Yodh 
 falls away. 
 
 E. g. nu3^ imper. n-^ ; i'T; inf ^"i ; "15^ inf feminine nilr. ; '^\\ 
 inf fern. riDr. 
 
 4. In Niphal praeter and participle, Hiphil, and 
 Hophal, the original Vav of this class of verbs appears as 
 a quiescent. 
 
 E. g. S-iJ;, Niph. S;ijn:, Hiph. i'^'iijirt, Hoph. iir^n. 
 
 Note. The Verbs which belong exclusively to this class are few ; 
 
 viz. i."i;, nri;;, th^, -i^; or n^.;;, 'if;^, Ni:;, y,"?;, n-^-;, y-^;;, s\r^ ; in the 
 whole ten. Others have forms partly according to this class, and part- 
 ly according to other classes. See general remarks in § 112 a. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 /. Kal 
 
 (0) Praeter T^ for Ti;; once Judg. 19 : 11 (§ 42. 1 note); ^"15">^^ 
 for ^nnt;"] Ps. 23: 6. 
 
 {b) Future with Yodh retained 'Ij?*'?. ; first pers, i^sb^ijt, which is 
 very uncommon. With tone retracted, as S'^; ■^,}. With n paragog- 
 ic, as t^^'iN. 
 
 (c) Infinitive absolute Sr::y&c. Once Sri; Jer. 42: 10 with Yodh 
 dropped. Inf construct j^"_ , fepi. n^T ; fem. ""ir, ri"iV, by contraction 
 rr (§41.3. b); also as r!'p^!*''ltlth suffix, as \n2-^, \^'l-\. It is usual- 
 Iv feminine. 
 
§ 110. VEHRS PE YODH ; class ii. 187 
 
 _— -_ ,^^ , 
 
 {(I) Imprrativo 2u ; Ti., r:n-) ; ^r., riDr, T^b, from ^r;; ; r;^:^ 
 with "- paragogic, from S"}"^ (§ 92). The paragogic forms are the 
 most common. For the form nrjii: Cant. 3: 11, see § 121. I. c. 
 
 //. J\'ipJial. 
 
 Praeter ^"1?!): with Daghesh euphonic, from "5'r\ 
 
 ///. Iliphil. 
 
 {ii) Future "~.V]] with tone retracted. With Vav omitted, "l!^.^!. 
 Once "S"*"?""?! for "^s'^Vt" Ex. 2: 9. With n characteristic retained, 
 ij'-l-T-V (§ 88. 3.) 
 
 (/;)' Imperative ^t2:■1r|, in Qeri N^i?.":- for N^iin Gen. 8: 17. So 
 TtJ'!", in Qeri "\'4J'^^ Ps. 5: 9. The firs! radical in these cases is 
 treated as if the verb were entirely regular, the form being precisely 
 the same as b^^J^. The Kethib therefore exhibits the true reading. 
 
 IF. Ilithpuel. 
 
 The verb i'T^ has Hithpael i'T^nri, retaining the original Vav. 
 
 § 1 10. Irreg. verbs ; second class of verbs ■'b. 
 
 1. The second class of verbs '^D also are ID as to 
 their origin. The characteristic of this class Is, that they 
 preserve the radical Yodh in the infinitive, future, and im- 
 perative. 
 
 2. The future has Pattahh In the final syllable ; the 
 infinitive takes final Hholcm. 
 
 E. g. Future UJa"";, ;)?■"; &c. Inf. 'ii'2\ '}i\lj'^ &:c. See below in I. c. 
 
 Note 1. The number of verbs exclusively belonging to this class is 
 small; viz t::"", yi"*, m*', in", i^:', rto^, ■!"% ;ly^ V^'N S^^"*? N"i\ 
 !^*<^, ■J'iJ'' or ](I^'' ; in the whole thirteen. 
 
 Note 2. Out of Kal, the forms of verbs "D belonging to the first 
 and second classes are altogether the same. No paradigm, therefore, 
 of the second class is needed beyond the conjugation Kal. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 /. Kal 
 
 (a) The praeter besides final Pattahh has final E and 0, but reg- 
 ular; as "^i", bb\ 
 
188 § 110. VERBS PE yodh; class II. 
 
 {b) Future commonly fully written with Yodh, as V^''1 ; but also 
 defectively as ilii"; ; which is merely a mode of orthography. Plural 
 ^irSi;, ^M"!]^. defectively ; and so often in the plural. Pattahh is always 
 found in the final syllable of the future in this class of verbs, unless they 
 end in N or M ; in which case they conform, as to their final vowel, to 
 the forms in verbs Mb and nb. 
 
 (c) Infinitive always Hholem, wherever it appears ; as "iii", fern. 
 m^n% fem. nys^; Nf-l';, fem. nNI/;; "jriiV From IrT-j;^ ' comes 
 NT'-l'^b 2 Chr. 26: 15 with i< instead ofn (§ 121. IV), and also n^-^■'b. 
 
 {(1) Imperative •1'^.'], N'^';', nT^, UJn"; which appears in the par- 
 agogic form JTil?'^'^ • The form 1^:^ Judg. 19:30. Is. 8:10 from yy;, is 
 altogether anomalous. 
 
 The imperative does not occur except in verbs with final M or Ji, 
 or with a guttural in the final syllable. 
 
 //. Mphal. 
 
 (a) Future ny^l Ex. 19: 13; brj^'J Gen. 8: 12. The first per- 
 son sing, in Niphal has Hhireq parvum under the prae formative, in- 
 stead of Seghol ; as i'iJ^N, not il'^^^N as in regular verbs. 
 
 (6) Participle plural construct "'linD, as from a praeter 1":^^"} from 
 T.i'l ; "t^p.is participle with Tseri, from '^Jll- 
 
 III. Piel. 
 
 Future ^ti'^r^l for nn-i^is;^";] from uii^ ; ^"^T for n^;;";^ from rTj\ 
 So na;;2, Qn/i'!]. 
 
 IF. Hiphil. 
 
 Future ^Tiin^ instead of n'l.i"' from it V ; ^p^n1 from ;:]D^, the 
 characteristic of Hiphil being preserved. (§ 88. 3.) 
 
 V. Hithpael. 
 
 The verb nn;; in Hithpael has JT^inri ; 03^ in Hithpael has ns^nr; ; 
 both preserving the original Vav. 
 
 VI. Popaal. 
 The verb Jib;^ is found once in Popaal, viz. 2 pers. rj''s.^S^ Ps.45: 3. 
 
 § 1 1 1. Irreg. verbs ; third class of verbs ^c 
 
 1. The third class of verbs '^D appear origliially to 
 have had Yodh for their first radical. 
 
 2. In the future of Kal they are declined like verbs of 
 
§111. VERBS PE YODH ; CLASS III. 189 
 
 the second class, retaining their Yodh, and having Pattahh 
 and sometimes Tscri in tlieir final syllable. 
 
 Note. No instances occur of the infinitive or imperative in Kal of 
 this class of verbs, so that we have no means of deciding the form of 
 those moods. 
 
 3. The only peculiar characteristic of this class of 
 verbs is, that in Hiphil they retain their original Ycdh. 
 
 E. g. p:^ Hiph. p"*3"'rt. not p''-'^~ as in the preceding classes. 
 But these forms in Hiphil may be defectively written; as fut. i'^^T. 
 or 3"'U\ 
 
 4. Forms in these verbs are found only in Kal and 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Note. The verbs belonging to the above class are very few ; viz. 
 ita^, hbl^ p:^, "lUJ^, ]''^''ri, and in respect to most of their forms yj? ^ 
 and ~\^'' ; in all seven. 
 
 The paradigm exhibits only the conjugation Hiphil. 
 
 KOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 /. Kal 
 
 There appears to be a future Tseri in some verbs of this class. 
 Thus n::"''.] from n^;"'"; ; Vp."''''! ; 0%''^\^_ Gen. 50:26. Such futures rank 
 neither under the first nor second class of verbs ""D, and must be 
 considered as peculiar to this third class. 
 
 //. Hiphil. 
 
 {a) Praeter fully written, as ]'^/'3"'n ; and defectively, as "J^^ln. 
 
 {b) Future fully written, as l3''u:''.';; and defectively, as S"*S22 ; silso 
 ^n'"-2J']2 Prov. 4: 25 with Yodh moveable, as if it were a regular verb. 
 So also Dn"'D':N Hos. 7: 12. Comp. § 109. 111. b. 
 
 Note. Some futures sui generis are constructed from it3^ and ^b''; 
 as n^a:^ ; b^?:.:, also b"«b*'r|'; ; but it is doubtful whether this latte'r 
 form belongs here. See the lexicons in bb". 
 
 (c) Imperative forms of this class with Yodh moveable, as '^'ii'^^'n. 
 in Qeri Ps. 5: 9 ; so n:^.-;!! in Qeri Gen. 8: 17. Comp. § 109. III. b. 
 
 {d) Participle Diq-'-^-JJ 1 Chr. 12: 2 with Yodh moveable. 
 
190 §112. VERBS PE YODH ; CLASS IV. 
 
 § 112. Irreg, verbs ^ fourth class of verbs ''S. 
 
 1. The characteristic of the fourth class of verbs ^t) 
 is, that wherever in the preceding classes the radical 
 Yodh becomes quiescent, in this class it assimilates itself to 
 the letter which follows it, in the same manner as the 
 Nun does in verbs Pe JYun (§ 113); viz. in the future of 
 Kal, in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal. 
 
 2. The future Kal has Pattahh and Hholem, like 
 verbs Pe Mm ; as n^% fut. r\1^ ; pS% fut. p:2\ The other 
 conjugations are also as verbs Pe JYun. (§ 113.) 
 
 Note. All the forms referred by Gesenius to roots under this 
 description of verbs, viz. to n;"', Jj:^^, y^"^, n^i"^, as belonging' exclusively 
 here; and to 1D^, "lO^, p^lj, "^^^ "^"4?^5 as mostly belonging here; 
 are with better reason ranked by Simonis and Eichhorn under verbs 
 •jC; for in that case the common laws of the language, as to assimila- 
 tion, are simply followed. The assimilation of the Yodh is contrary 
 to the nature of this letter in general, as it usually quiesces rather 
 than assimilates. But as the lexicon of Gesenius is constructed upon 
 a different principle, the grammar is here adapted to it. As to signifi- 
 cation, it is a matter of indifference whether the student derive these 
 forms from verbs ')2 or "'D, because the same meaning is attributed to 
 both roots. 
 
 3. The paradigm exhibits only Kal, because in the other conjuga- 
 tions the forms are precisely like those of verbs "jS in the succeeding 
 paradigm; as Niphal p:^;, Hiphil p"'i:iri, Hophal p-iZ'n ; like 'IJJi:, '*iJ'^3i^, 
 
 4. The apocopated future p'^\'^ 1 K. 22: 35 comes from a future 
 with Tseri. Imp. p^ 2 K. 4: 41 is like verbs "J-:. So also the infinitive. 
 
 § 112 a. Verbs ''D which do not fall under the foregoing classes. 
 
 1. Verbs "'B whose forms cannot be exclusively ranked under either 
 of the preceding classes, are the following; viz. Dtl^, "IS^, '^'?^i 
 
 "12?:, "^p.:, -T.:^ "^p.:^ ^^-:^ ^^k^ q"^:^ ^'^i ? i" ^" ^^^^'^'*- 
 
 2. These, as the student may ascertain from his lexicon, have 
 forms which would seem to belong to two or more of the foregoing 
 classes; as On*, fut. cnH and Dn\ This verb has also Spers. plur. fern- 
 
§113. VERKS n: NUN, ini 
 
 nr'sn^. with Yodh praeformative instead of Tav, like the Syriac ai\fl 
 Arabic. So "nu:' has fut. ~)p", and njp^"; ; and 3 pers. phir. Com. r!:";iVui"; 
 with Yodh and Daghesh euphonic, for n2")3"'r (§29. 10). Other 
 anomalous forms of several of these verbs are noted in the lexicons. 
 General remarks on all the verbs Pe Yodh. 
 3. Lexicog-raphers and grammarians dilTer in the classitication of these 
 verbs, on account of the variety of forms which they present. The 
 chis.«irication, however, is comparatively of little consequence, provid- 
 ed the student knows how to decline and account for the particular 
 forms with which he meets. To one or other of the above divis- 
 ions he will be able to refer all ; excepting that here as in regular 
 verbs, now and then an anomaly occurs, wliich can be assigned by 
 analogy to no particular class. E. g. cn;^, fut. cn'N of clas^frst as to its 
 first vowel, and of class second as to its second vowel. So also of a 
 (ew others ; which, however, are mostly noticed in the lexicons. 
 
 § 113. Irreg, verbs ; verbs Pe Nun, 
 
 1. The irregularity of verbs "D consists in this, that 
 when the verb receives any accession at the beginning, so 
 that the JVwi would regularly stand at the end of a syl- 
 lable and have under it a silent Sheva, it is assimilated to 
 the letter which iollows it, and is expressed by a Daghesh 
 forte in that letter. 
 
 In the infinitive construct and imperative of Kal, 
 where the Nun would regularly have under it a vocal 
 Sheva, it is in a few instances dropped. 
 
 E. g. The verb Tl35: has fut. 'iTa^ forrarj Niphal uja: for 'CaiS; 
 Hiphil •-■'3- for ^""asn ; Hophal "ijarr for UJ-i :n or u;a:n ; Kal infini- 
 tive construct feminine riw.n, imperative u;a for u;a3 &,c. 
 
 2. Hence the irregularities of these verbs arising from 
 the Nun, are limited to the future of Kal, the prae- 
 ter and participle of Niphal, and the conjugations Hiphil 
 and Hophal ; because in these only would the radical Nun 
 regularly receive a silent Sheva under it. 
 
 3. Verbs "jD, which have a guttural for their second 
 
192 § 114. VERBS PE nun; notes. 
 
 radical, are inflected simply as verbs Ayin guttural^ and 
 have no irregularities arising from their Nun ; because the 
 Nun cannot be assimilated to a guttural and expressed 
 in it by a Daghesh. 
 
 Note. From this observation must be excepted the verbs Cn3 and 
 nt}\ ; from which come Niph. Qn:, and fut. nn', Niph. nn; not nn3D. 
 
 4. A fe\N verbs which usually take the assimilated 
 forms, admit also the regular forms m a very few cases. 
 
 E. g. P]'!;, fut. S)"-';, once>li3ri Ps. 68: 3 ; *it::, fut. "112";, once Su?': 
 Jer. 3: 5 ; "1^3, fut. S2£^ and five times -)"2£:r So ?)j^2, ^n:, and pnj 
 
 Note. The Daghesh which marks the assimilated Nun is some- 
 times omitted. (§ 45. 4 note 1. § 95. 3. d.) 
 
 § 114. Irreg. verbs ; notes on verbs Pe jSl'un, 
 
 I. Kal. 
 
 (a) In the infinitive construct, the radical Nun is dropped only in 
 the following feminine forms, viz. n^a, ri"r^., n^D, nns, nj?.^, DNip and 
 DN^tJ for niJilJ (47.2) ; once nVij Ps. 89: 10 ; nri for n:^! (§ 41. 3. a). 
 The regular forms 5i»3, 5tD3 also occur. The infinitive feminine with 
 suffix is as inpa. 
 
 {h) The future is found in about two thirds of the Verbs ]D, as 
 bs"; ; future A in about one third, as •ij.n\ Future E is found only in 
 "jns, as 'in\ The verb nn: has future nn;;, plural in pause ^nn;; Job 
 21:13 with Daghesh euphonic in Tav (§29. 9). Forms with Nun 
 retained see in § 113.4. In the future especially, the Daghesh is 
 sometimes omitted (§ 45. 4 note 1). Future O as bis"^. with Hholem 
 pure. (§21. 15 note.) 
 
 (c) In the imperative, the radical Nun is dropped only in the fol- 
 lowing forms, viz. ya, u;a and u;a and "i;-i, i"D, ''ns Ezek. 37 : 9, p:^, 
 ^i:: Is. 8:17, N-^p, bt;, ^"^-"JPU;' Gen. 27 : 26, fn and !i;n Ps. 8: 2. 
 The regular form S^3 also occurs. 
 
 //. Mphal. 
 
 (a) In those verbs where the Nun is assimilated and the conjuga- 
 tion Piel takes Pattahh or Qamets in its final syllable, Niphal and Piel 
 have the same form ; as ^j:3, Niphal and Piel "!|^3 ; Nil?:, Niphal and 
 Piel NTB3. The verb b»3 has in Niphal the form i: "17^23 Gen. 17: 26, 27. 
 
 (6) The infinitive absolute appears in the following forms, viz. 
 ;]i-i3, v\~-:n Ps. 68: 3; "jin:^!-; Jer. 32: 4. 
 
§11^5. NT.RU-^ AVIX DOIPLKD. 193 
 
 (c) Participle with suffix "J^niS, probably from an obsolete form 
 m3. (§121.11. c.) 
 
 III. Hiphil and Ilophal. 
 
 (t/) The radical Nun very rarely appears ; the intinitive construct 
 ^•'nin occurs Ezek. 22: 20. Apocopated future T'an Ex. 19:3 with 
 Yodh retained. 
 
 {h) In Hophal^ Qibbuts is the more common vowel of the first 
 syllable. But Qamets Hhateph appears; as ^pn2rT Judg. 20:31. 
 
 IV. JVotcs on the verbs nj^b and "jn:. 
 {a) The verb n^b imitates verbs "js by assimilating' its Lainedh in 
 the future of Kal, as nj5 7 ; and by dropping it in the intinitive con- 
 struct and sometimes*in the imperative ; as inf. fem. nn|5 ; imperative 
 nj? and nj^b. In the praeter it has once the very anomalous form of 
 np for npjb Ezek. 17: 5. In Niphal, Pual, andHithpael, it is regular. 
 Piel. JHijAiily and Hiphil do not occur. 
 
 (6) The verb ]n: is quite anomalous- fut. in*;; imper. IP], n'n inf. fein. 
 •^n Ps. 8: 2 ; -in^fei. nn for Din (§41. 3. a), with suffix "^nn, the Da- 
 ghesh in the tinal Tav being the assimilated Nun, which appears when 
 the word receives an accession (§41. 3). The_^?ia/ Nun of the verb 
 is also assimilated when it meets with a suffix beginning with Tav or 
 Nun ; as nn: for n:n: ; ^2n3 for n:3n: ; and so nn3, Dnn:, inn: &c. 
 
 § 115. Irreg. verbs ; verbs Aijin doubled. 
 
 1. The irregularities of verbs Ayin doubled are occa- 
 sioned by a contracted mode of speaking and Avriting the 
 last two radical letters. The general law of the contrac- 
 tion in those forms which end with a radical letter is, to 
 drop from the regular form the vowel of the first radical 
 if it have one, to drop also the middle radical, and then to 
 utter the word by the aid of the final vowel and the first 
 and last radicals of the ground-form ; as DID for D2D ; !:b 
 for 122D &c. 
 
 But when the verb receives any accession, the middle 
 radical instead of being dropped is expressed by a Da- 
 
194 § 115. VEKBS AYIN DOUBLED. 
 
 ghesh forte in the final one, the contraction in other re- 
 spects being the same as before ; as HID for h22D ; im- 
 perative ^^b for "1^20 &c. 
 
 Note 1. The above law of contraction seems to have been gener- 
 al in the Hebrew language, wherever it could be applied without vio- 
 lating some more important principle. In some cases the feebler 
 consonants were even assimilated, in order to effect contraction. Thus 
 we have CjN for 5)^.^; ; iiz for n32 ; nb for ni!: ; and without assimi- 
 lation n'l'd73 for nn-|^73 (§ 41. 3). In words of this kind also, the as- 
 similated or contracted letter re-appears as Daghesh whenever there is 
 any accession ; as T2N, "'Pa &c. The reason why Daghesh is omitted 
 in such forms in these verbs as iD, SD &c. is merely because the let- 
 ter in which it should be written stands at the end of a word. (§ 45.3.) 
 
 The same contraction is found in nouns derived from this class of 
 verbs ; as :in, pn ; with suffix ""an, '^JPrt ; from 5511 and pjPn. 
 
 Note 2. The above rule for the final vowel holds for all those 
 persons of the verb, where the tone remains on the same syllable as 
 in the ground-form. But when the tone is moved forward by acces- 
 sion &,c. the long vowels Hholem and Tseri are as usual exchanged 
 for short ones ; as ^ao;, nraDn ; nabn, Dniapri. (§ 54. 4.) 
 
 2. Contraction is excluded in the followino; cases. 
 
 (a) When either the first or second radical of the 
 verb is followed by an immutable vowel. 
 
 E. g. Infinitive absolute aiaD ; participle active '^'^IQ ; participle 
 passive i^iS. The first vowel, when immutable, cannot be dropped ; 
 the second, when immutable, cannot be transferred to the first radical. 
 But Hiphil takes Tseri pure instead of "'- , in order to admit con- 
 traction. See below in no. 5. 
 
 Note. Hence contraction Ls excluded from all those conjugations 
 whose characteristic forms contain an immutable vowel, viz. Peel, Poal, 
 Hithpoel. 
 
 (b) When the middle radical has Daghesh forte. 
 
 E. g. Piel aaD ; infinitive construct iao. The middle radical, 
 when doubled, cannot of course be united with the final one. Con-, 
 traction is therefore excluded from all the DagheshM conjugations. 
 
§115. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. 1 D5 
 
 Note. Hence, generally, wherever the characteristic law of de- 
 clension in any conjugation would be affected by contraction, the lat- 
 ter is excluded. 
 
 3. In tliose persons of the verb which take sulForma- 
 tives beginning with a consonant, viz. T, D, Cn, "IH, ID, HD, 
 an epenthetic 1 or *•__ is inserted between llie sufforma- 
 tive and the ground-form of the verb. 
 
 E.g. Praeter 2 per?, sing. n^ztD instead of n^D, regular form n^.nD; 
 Cn.T'sD instead of crizc, reg. form cnn^D ; imperative ti:"^^.? instead 
 of nzzo, reg. form r;:2bp 
 
 The epenthetic '^_ is inserted only before the sufTormative 
 !13 ; viz. in the second and third persons plural feminine of the future 
 and imperative. The epenthetic i is of course confined to the prae- 
 ter. The insertion of these letters is probably for the sake of eupho- 
 ny ; and prevails in similar cases in the cognate languages. 
 
 4. The praeformatives and letters characteristic of the 
 several conjugations, where they would regularly have un- 
 der them short vowels, take long ones in these verbs. 
 These long vowels, however, with the exception of Shureq, 
 are pure and of course mutable. 
 
 E. g. Future Kal io^ instead of ^'20;;', for which form see no. 5 
 below ; Hiphil 20" instead of nsO" ; Hophal iD^n instead of aaDH &c. 
 
 Note. The long vowel in the first syllable results from the usual 
 short vowel being thrown into a simple syllable. (§ 55. 1.) 
 
 5. Many of the original forms from which the con- 
 tracted forms of these verbs appear to be derived, are such 
 as would be unusual forms in regular verbs. 
 
 E. g. Kal fut. nb; from n^D^ instead of f 2p\ 
 
 Niph. praet. 2C3 — nzp: — n?p3. 
 
 — fut. ic": — nno^ — ano";. 
 
 Hiph. praet. 2pn — ^r.^H — ^'rPH- 
 
 Most of these unusual forms are found in other classes of verbs, or 
 in the kindred dialects. Sometimes also the contracted forms even here 
 depart from the usual mode of contraction, and are derived from reg- 
 
196 § 116. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED ; NOTES. 
 
 wZar original forms; as fut. '~\72l from 'T^^'; ; Niphal bn2 as if from 
 bbn: &c. 
 
 6. In these verbs occur the unusual conjugations Poel, 
 Poal, Hithpoel ; and Pilpel, Polpal, Hithpalpal (§81.2, 3, 
 9, 10). They sometimes occur instead of Piel, Pual and 
 Hithpael, though these latter are the most frequent ; 
 sometimes both are found under the same verb. When 
 they exist together, their meaning is often synonymous, 
 though not unfrequently different. 
 
 For further information respecting these conjugations, see the gen- 
 eral remarks at the close of the next section. 
 
 7. In verbs where the doubled letter is a guttural or 
 Resh, Daghesh forte is of course excluded, and the pre- 
 ceding vowel prolonged (§§ 45, 46). See above in no. 1 
 and notes. 
 
 E. g. nnp, 3 pers. masc. H;^, 3 pers. fern. JlH"^, 1 pers. ""nin^lJ. 
 So Ti72, 3 pers. fern. tT^b instead of rr^a ; I'^N, 1 pers. "ini-iN in- 
 stead of '^ni'nN &c. The number of these verbs is small; and they 
 occur in very few forms. 
 
 Note. For the peculiar tone-syllable of verbs Ayin doubleds, see 
 §34.2./. 
 
 § 1 16. Irreg, verbs ; notes on verbs Ayin doubled. 
 
 Changes of vowels in declension. In Kal future and imperative, 
 when the tone is thrown off from the final Hholem by accession, this 
 Hholem shortens into Qibbuts ; as ^fo^, Mi"'3DP. In Hiphil in the 
 same case, the final Tseri shortens into Hhireq parvum ; as iDirr, 
 nnaor?. (§ 54. 4.) 
 
 Qamets and Tseri under the praeformatives and letters character- 
 istic of the conjugations, throughout this class of verbs, are pure and 
 mutable (§ 115. 4); and are therefore dropped as usual when the 
 tone is moved forward ; as Kal fut. ^3D^, MD''3:Dn ; Hiph. 3Drr, 
 JiisDn ; part, nott, naoa. (§ 56.) 
 
§116. VERBS AYIX DOURI.Kn; NOTFS. 197 
 
 /. Kai 
 
 {fi) In the praeter, verbs final llholcni retain the Hliolem in the 
 contracted forms of the thin! persons; as n-aS contr. for l^'^"^ from 
 D"3-», also n-rn from D53-», ; ^zS contr. for nnnn from rim, also ^2^. 
 from 35^ (§ 115. 1). For the forms of verbs in which the doubled 
 letter is a g-uttural or Rosb, see above in ^ 1 15. 7. 
 
 In the praeter and infinitive, the regular forms sometimes co-e3Ust 
 with the contracted ones; as TTa Ezek. 29: 19 and T2 Is. 8: 1. So 
 ;iT7r. in pause ^TT2 ; and so usually in pause. The verb F)Sw'< is found 
 only in the third person plural, where it is always reg'ular. SoStl'i; &,c. 
 
 The form ^-'2h for ^: vrn, without the epenthetic i, occurs Ps. 64: 7. 
 
 {b) Infinitive construct 2^0, and regular Hip ; before Maqqeph 
 "Sr, Hholem going into Qamets Hhateph ; with suffix ipn, ''73n, Hho- 
 lem going into Qibbuts shoi't. 
 
 The infinitive sometimes has Pattahh as in regular verbs (§ 96. II. b); 
 as ^'4; contr. for ^3U? ; with suffix d"i2 Ecc. 3: 18 from ^2 inf. of 
 ^'nr(§55. 1). Occasionally it has Shureq like the infinitive of verbs 
 "):>?, as "\^2 Ecc. 9: 1 from *T^2 ; see in no. IV. a(l). It appears also 
 in the feminine form, as ri"h from yy^ ; sometimes it has a kind of 
 plural form, as nT;2"23 Ezek. 36: 3 from 'DJ2X; niiO from "Jin. 
 
 Note. The Hholem of the infinitive, future, and imperative, is 
 pure and mutable, and should always be written without Vav ; though 
 that letter is sometimes inserted ; as IT 2 for T 2 from 7T2. (§21.15 note.) 
 
 (c) The future with Hholem sometimes is written with Vav, as 
 • i"", ni^^; but the Hholem is always pure and mutable, and when the 
 tone is removed from it, goes either into Qamets Hhateph, as ^:|.r!'^ 
 Ps. 67: 2 ; or into Qibbuts, as ^I'lU'i Is. 27: 1 1. 
 
 The future with Pattahh takes Tseri under the praeformative; as 
 ^72", Cn"; also "H'' in pause ^r"* Prov. 27:17. 
 
 Sometimes the future takes Shureq, like that of verbs IS ; as 
 l^'^l for "jn^ from '|:"i; y^")^ for yn^ from '{'4"} &c. See below in 
 IV. a (2). For the Chaldee forms, like 20^ Sec. see below under IV. b. 
 
 {(I) Imperative once with Pattahh, viz. r)2,": Num. 22: 17 with par- 
 agogic ", for ~f^i from 22j:. (§ 45. 6 note 1.) 
 
 //. JViphal 
 
 ((/) In the praeter the usual final vowel is Pattahh, but Tseri and 
 Hholem are also found ; as rj^.', "20: ; nV5: Is. 34: 4. Hence, all the 
 findings of the praeter in regular verbs are also found here. 
 26 
 
193 § 116. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED ; NOTES. 
 
 The vowel of the first syllable is usually Qamets, but others are 
 sometimes found ; as bn:, 'jn?.. This last is probably a Chaldaism ; 
 comp. below under IV. b (2). 
 
 Second pers. fern. sing, nrn: Ezek. 22: 16 for nV^n^ ; ""n^Pi: Jer. 
 22:23 forni-n:. 
 
 (b) Infinitive absolute pzT] with Hholem. Infinitive construct 
 with Pattahh and Tseri ; as iSlTl, 072^]. The verb bbn has inf. const. 
 Vrrr. 
 
 (c) Future with Pattahh and Hholem; as SS* from i^G ; D^"] from 
 aa~. Other peculiarities of the futui-e see below under IV. 6, c. 
 
 {(I) Imperative with Hholem irinri from d^~>. 
 
 (e) Participle as IC: ; from praeter with Tseri as ^722. 
 III. Hiphil and Hophal. 
 
 (o) The Tseri in Hiphil is pure throughout, contrary to the 
 usage in regular verbs, which make their '^_ here immutable. 
 Hence this Tseri is not only mutal)le, but is not unfrequently exchang- 
 ed for Pattahh ; as p'ln, bj^^l, ^^cn, infinitive pnn, participle bl?^.. 
 A guttural or Resh in the last syllable may of course take Pattahh ; 
 as n:?ri. 
 
 (6) Praeter b'^TH Lam. 1: 8 from bbf, the fir^t syllable being a 
 Chaldaism and the second like verbs iy ; see below under no. IV. o, b. 
 Second person singular masculine riTiSrt Prov. 24: 28 instead of 
 nirii:ri. Future with suffix "^^.^.O") Ezek. 47: 2, the Tseri going into 
 Hhireq parvum ; so Dj^.TNi 2 Sam. 22:43. For other anomalous forms, 
 see below under IV. b. 
 
 (c) Hophal is not particularly anomalous, excepting that the ^ in 
 the first syllable is immutable, and stands instead of Qibbuts long; as 
 SS^n for ^0", instead of the regular form izpn (§ 115. 4). This 
 and the corresponding case in Hophal of verbs ly, are instances 
 sui generis of the exchange ofQibbuts for Shureq. 
 
 IK. Particular anomalies in the preceding conjugations. 
 
 (ff) Exchange of forms for those oj^ verbs tS. From an inspection of 
 the paradigms of verbs yy and n", it is evident that there are many 
 points of resemblance between them, and some entire coincidences. 
 In Hophal for instance, the forms in many cases coincide ; and so in 
 the apocopated futures of Kal and Hiphil. 
 
 What happens so tVequently in the common course of inflection 
 In respect to verbs 5?y and 1>", is by usage of the Hebrew extended 
 
§11G. VERBS AYIN doubled; NOTES, TOO 
 
 occasionally beyond tlic common limits, and thus occasions some anom- 
 alies. 
 
 (1) A"((/ infmitive "1^2'r for ~i2V from T^s ; i. e. the infinitive of yy 
 is of the same form as it would he from a root "^IZ in verbs "!>". So 
 ipins Prov. 8:29 for Tj^nr from p|:n. 
 
 (2) In the future inn^ for "j-i^ from ]:-j ; y^")^ for 7-1^ from ":;n ; 
 n^U,^ for Tr; from TjO &:c. 
 
 (3) Hlphil praeter :"^Tn from rVj (ill. A). Infinitive 'T:\-in Is. 3.3: 1 
 for "^rann fn'ui ccp. Future C'i/"' i'roni c":'i" ; with sulfix "in'n"' 
 for ■jPn'^ from nnn Hah. 2: 17. Comp. § 45. 6 note 1. 
 
 Note. The student should particularly mark these anomalies in 
 respect to verbs i'i" borrowing the forms ol 1" ; for otherwise he may 
 at times be greatly perplexed in regard to grammatical analysis. See 
 further on this subject in no. VII below. 
 
 (6) Chaldaic forms of verbs W. 
 
 (1) Instead of the long vowel under the praeformatives as in the 
 paradigm, the Chaldee has a short vowel followed by Daghesh forte ; 
 as pi""; instead of j~T\ This method the Hebrew has imitated in a 
 considerable number of verbs Ayin doubled ; some following both this 
 method and that of the paradigm ; and some following exclushely the 
 Chaldee forms. These are exhibited below in the left hand column. 
 (§ 45. 6 note 2.) 
 
 Kal fut. iS", instead of-'c^ 
 
 — ^73*13'; future with Pattahh. 
 
 — 2^nn future with Shureq ; see a (2). 
 
 — "rro Hhireq m;ig. for Dagh. omitted. 
 
 — D"'"»N; Tseri for Dagh. omitted in N. 
 
 — bjrri see above in III. b. 
 
 — bn^ Pattahh long for Dagh. omitted. 
 
 — ^nr^ 
 
 — riD^"^ Qibbuts short for Shureq. 
 
 — DUJ^n Qamets Hhateph for Shureq. 
 Note 1. In almost all the instances where the Chaldaic praeform- 
 atives occur in those forms which have an accession at the end, the 
 Daghesh of the/?ifl/ radical and the final vowel oi' the groimd-f or rn of 
 the verb, are dropped ; as ^ 72n- in pause instead of the usual form ^mn" ; 
 IDS] instead of ^irb;; nnp". instead of ^ip^ kc. See below in (/. 
 
 — 
 
 - 
 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 Dm 
 
 Niph 
 
 praet. 
 
 ^l-r 
 
 - 
 
 part. D"''ni<3 
 
 Hiph. 
 
 praet. 
 
 :'"'7n 
 
 - 
 
 fut. 
 
 SD^ 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 rn-' 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 ^nr"' 
 
 Hoph 
 
 . fut. 
 
 ns^ 
 
 - 
 
 inf 
 
 c-i'n 
 
200 § n6. VERES AYTV DOUBLED ; NOTES, 
 
 Note 2. In two forms, the Daghesh and preceding vowel remain ; 
 as Hiph. fut. ^z\i} from S^D, and Hoph. fut. ^inh^ from nns. 
 
 The paradigm exhibits the usual form of the Chaldee future. 
 
 (2) The Chaldee does not insert the epenthetic i or V. before the 
 sufformatives of verbs ,flyin doubled. In imitation of the Chaldee us- 
 age, the Hebrew sometimes also omits those letters. 
 ,, E. g. Kal praeter ^ :72n for n3T-::ri; rrrlr'kri for rrr^iin ; Niphal 
 praeter 2 pers. sing. fem. nbn^ for nVirn: ; "Tjinz for nTi~3. In 
 the two last examples the Daghesh also is omitted in the final La- 
 medh and Nun. See above under II. a. 
 
 (c) Syriac forms of verbs W . In Syriac, the active participle of 
 verbs Ayin doubled, instead of being regular as in Hebrew, inserts 
 Aleph in the place of the middle radical ; as pii^i instead of p^i. In 
 Hebrew, there are a few verbs which imitate this in various moods 
 and tenses. 
 
 E. g. Kal participle with suffix 'T'.bN;'i:; Jer. 30: 16 probably for 
 ^'DD-:; ; Niph. future DN^ai Job 7: 5 instead of DD-a"^ ; Hiph. future 
 ^^''OCpri 2K. 3: 19 probably instead of Ti"'zDri; perhaps participle 
 ■nW^'i^^ instead of ~i''~i7373, though it is usually and perhaps more prop- 
 erly referred to the root "iN73. 
 
 (rf) A peculiar anomaly is the omission of Daghesh in the final rad- 
 ical of the verb when there is any accession to the ground-form, and 
 dropping the vowel that precedes the same radical ; compare above 
 in 6 (1) note 1, 
 
 Kal fut. nrl33 for nVi: with m paragogic. 
 
 - inf t:)onb — fi^snb r prep. D suffix-pronoun. 
 Niph. praet. nip: — iisb: 2 pers. fem. 
 
 fut. !T9"i: — na^a 1 pers. pi. with T\ paragogic. 
 A similar usage obtains also in the Chaldaic forms, for which see 
 above in b (l) notes. 
 
 V. Poel, Pool, Hithpoel 
 \(i) These conjugations are common in verbs i'y, sometimes instead 
 of Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, and sometimes along with them. The 
 latter often occur alone, and indeed are more frequent than the lor- 
 mer ; see the general remarks below. Departures from the forms in 
 the paradigm are very rare, and arise chiefly from the practice of 
 
§11C. VF.URS AYIN DOUBLED ; NOTES. "201 
 
 writing the Hliolem cither fully or defectively; as nn^'D or nnb. The 
 form Tiis occurs Nah. 3: 17 with Pattahh, probably on account of the 
 pause-accent. (§ 60. 7. a 2.) 
 
 (b) Pool occurs in only three verbs ^V ; viz. br-n, Poal part. fern. 
 nrri:.?: Is. 9:3; nna, Poal part. plur. 1cm. nin-n.r3 1 K. 7: 9; Viv^ 
 Poal b'ri^- Lam. 1: 12. 
 
 (o) llithpoel is declined after the model of Pocl, the T\1i be- 
 ing treated as in Hithpael of regular verbs, hi verbs with gutturals 
 and some othei-s, the final vowel is Pattahh ; as nn'^, Hithpocl fut. 
 nnintn for nniu:rn (§ 80. 2. a). So ni/yns Ps. 20: 9. 
 
 Note. For the names of these conjugations in the lexicons, see be- 
 low in no. VII. d. 
 
 VI. Pilpel, Polpal, Hithpalpal. 
 
 (fl) These sometimes occur in place of the preceding conjugations, 
 and in a few instances co-exist with them. There are few departures 
 from the forms in the paradigm. The verb bbj? has bflbp^ Ecc. 10: 10 
 with final Pattahh, probably on account of the pause-accent. (§ 60.7. a 2.) 
 
 {b) Po/jDrt/ occurs in only one verb i"', viz.y^uj, Pilpel^"w;y"::,PolpaI 
 yiii-j from which comes fut. 2 per. plur. masc. in pause ^y'*;a"C;n Is. 
 66: r2. 
 
 (c) Hithpalpal is declined after the model of Pilpel, the n^ being 
 treated as in Hithpael and Hithpoel. Thus bba has Hithpalpal 3 pers. 
 plur. ^ba:an~ ; ~T^73 has Hithpalpal future l^n'^n" with final Pattahh 
 on account of the Resh. The participle has final Tseri, as "'rnTana 
 2 Sam. 15:28 from nr;?:. 
 
 Note. For the names of these conjugations in the lexicons, see be- 
 low in no V'll. d. 
 
 Vll. General remarks on verbs Ayin doubled. 
 
 (a) Inasmuch as the two classes of verbs w and ^V are subject to 
 irregularities arising iVom their middle radical, which in the former is 
 contracted and in the latter quiescent, they have many resemblan- 
 ces in their forms and conjugations. Some of these are noted above 
 in no. IV^ a. The conjugations Poel, Poal, and Hithpoel in verbs 'J'jy 
 are in respect to form precisely similar to Polel, Polal, and Hithpolel 
 in verbs ny. Hence, when there is a root in each class with the same 
 meaning, it is immaterial to which of them a given form is referred ; as 
 "n:: (V. «) may be cither in Poel from Ti:, or in Polel trom m: ; the 
 meaning of these roots being for the most part synonymous. In this 
 
202 ^^117. VERI5.-5 AVIN VAV. 
 
 respect the lexicons differ ; and if the student cannot find a given form 
 under a root i">", he has only to turn to the corresponding root in 
 verbs IS". 
 
 {b) The whole number of verbs, ranked by the best lexicogra- 
 phers under class >:>, is one hundred and twenty four. Of these, t-jveiitij 
 six have one or more of the conjugations Piel, Pual, Hithpael, without 
 any of the unusual ones ; twenty have one or more of the conjugations 
 Poel, Poal, Hithpoel, without any of Piel &c. eleven have one or more 
 of both Piel &.c. and Poel &-c. ten have one or more of the conjuga- 
 tions Pilpel, Polpal, Hithpalpal, without any of those above mentioned; 
 two have one or more of these latter conjugations along with Piel 
 &c. and three have them along with Poel &c. There remain then 
 Jlfty two verbs of this class, which are found only in one or more of 
 the usual conjugations Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, Hophal. Of all these 
 verbs many are found only once, and few are of frequent occurrence. 
 
 (c) There c(re seven verbs which have n repeated for their two hist 
 radicals, hi two of these verbs, viz. nnb and rrri^O, final r> has Mappiq, 
 and they are classed with verbs yy ; where they are found in Hithpal- 
 pal only. In the other j?re the final n is quiescent, and these are class- 
 ed with verbs T'C quiescent (§ 122). The verb bb^ is declined only 
 as a verb Pe Yodh; see § 111. II. b note. 
 
 {d) The lexicons exhibit great irregularity in the mode of de- 
 signating the unusual conjugations, both in these verbs and in verbs 
 Ayin Fav. In some they are all considered sis coming under Piel, Pual, 
 and Hithpael ; in others they are marked as Pilel, Pulal, Hithpalel ; 
 and in others still, they have both designations, and very seldom the 
 proper one. In assigning to such forms their proper appellations, the 
 student must therefore be guided entirely by their appearance and 
 characteristic marks, as described in § 81. 
 
 § 1 1 7. Irreg. verbs ; verbs Ayin Vav, 
 
 1. The irregularities of verbs Aijin Vav arise from 
 Cvontraction, and are occasioned by tlie peculiar character 
 of the middle radical Vav, which inclines to quiesce in all 
 possible cases. 
 
 Here, as in verbs >"•', the contracted form is gen- 
 
§117. VERR5 AYIN VAV. 203 
 
 erally uttered by the aid of the first and last radicals 
 and the final vowel of the ground-form ; in which vowel 
 Vav becomes quiescent. In order to elTect this quies- 
 conce In dilfcrent vowels, and in consequence of its relative 
 situation in dlHerent conjugations and tenses, the Vav as- 
 sumes a variety of forms; and in some cases would seem 
 to be wholly dropped. 
 
 E. ,2;. r:j> for D]j:; n"3 for ni72 ; ^^N for ^il^y from SiN ("^^J*); 
 D^j:; for D^p: ; ts'^p.n for u''1p,r^ &c. 
 
 In accounting for the anomalies of this species of verbs, the stu- 
 dent must consider that the final vowel, with which by the preceding 
 rule the contracted form would properly be uttered, is often hetero- 
 geneous in respect to the middle radical Vav (§ 23. 2); and therefore 
 to obtain quiescence, either Vav must change in order to become ho- 
 mogeneous with the vowel, or the vowel must change in order to be- 
 come homogeneous with Vav (§ 48. 2). Both of these methods are 
 employed in different forms of this class of verbs. 
 
 Thus in the praeter, instead of the regular form D2p, the contrac- 
 ted form Dp is used, which in theory is equivalent to aNJ? ; i. e. the 
 Vav in Dip being a feeble sound and the tone being wholly on the 
 last syllable, by the usual tendency of the language to contract the 
 pronunciation of words, the last vowel came to be uttered as if it 
 stood under the first radical, and the Vav became quiescent. In order 
 to effect this, it was considered as accommodating itself to the vowel 
 which was thus made to precede it ; which in this example is Pattahh. 
 Consequently, in theory Vav here becomes Meph^ which however is 
 never written, except in one instance; for which see the notes in the 
 next section. Its influence however remains in changing the vowel 
 in which it thus quiesces into Qamets, which is hence impure and im- 
 mutable. See below in no. 7 note 2. 
 
 So in dt: for n}^, Vav in theory becomes Yodh ; so that n^_ is 
 equivalent to rCTZ ; which, however, is never fully written. 
 
 The participle active Dp appears to be derived from the obsolete 
 participial form ?t:p^ ; as D^p, Dp^. (§ 90. 1. a.) 
 
 In Niphal we have Dip; instead of the regular form D3p2 or Dip3 ; 
 
204 §117. VERBS AYIN VaV. 
 
 in which case the vowel is accommodated to the Vav, and becomes 
 homogeneous with it. 
 
 In the Hiphil form D'^jPSi for D'^'lj^ll, the sound of the Vav goes in- 
 to that of the % and prolongs it; as appears from its being retained in 
 flexion out of the third person. 
 
 One or the other of these methods of accommodation, enables us 
 to account for all the phases which verbs iy assume. 
 
 2. Contraction is excluded in the following cases. 
 
 («) When the middle radical Vav has a Daghesh 
 forte in it, characteristic of conjugation. 
 
 E. g. Piel "in; from Tny ; -\iy from -|;!i^&;c. But even here, Vav 
 is sometimes changed to Yodh in order to be homogeneous with the 
 preceding vowel ; as n«n instead of 3 ^.n from mH; D^p instead of 
 finp from a^p. 
 
 (6) When the verb has He quiescent for its final 
 radical, the middle radical Vav is regular throughout. 
 
 The reason of this is, that irregularities occasioned by different let- 
 ters never appear in immediate succession. 
 
 Note. A few verbs of this class are regular in their inflection ; 
 for which see § 118. VI. h. 
 
 3. The vowel in which Vav quiesces, is of course 
 
 impure and immutable ; as Cp = C^{p, Sip, D'lp &c. 
 
 But the apocopated future and imperative of Kal and Hiphil have 
 a. pure final vowel ; as Dp^, dp; Qp.^', Dpn ; where Hholem and Tseri are 
 pure and mutable, as is seen when tone is removed; as Dp*^i, Dp '^2 &ic. 
 This does not result from any change of the immutable Shureq or 
 Hhireq magnum in the ground-form, but from adopting an appropriate 
 vowel in the apocopated forms, in order to distinguish them from the 
 usual ones ; Hholem and Tseri pure being shorter than Shureq and 
 Hhireq magnum. (§ 52. 5.) 
 
 4. In the praeter of Niphal and Hiphil, in those persons 
 of the verb which take sulformativcs beginning with a conso- 
 nant, viz. n, n, Cri, ]r), "^3, an epenthetic i is inserted be- 
 
§ 117. VERBS AVIN' VAV. 205 
 
 twecn the siilTormative and the ground-form of the verb, 
 as in verbs .^Ji/in doubled. 
 
 In the future ol Kal, an epenthetic '^_ is generally in- 
 serted before the suflix HD, viz. in the second and third 
 persons plural feminine. 
 
 E. g:. Niphal praeter nv2np2 fornT:!^:; Hiph. praet. n3i*:o*pr! for 
 i:72j;n ; Kal future ni-'bnpri for n:^npn &.c. 
 
 In the future of Kal and praeter of Hiphil, the epenthetic sylla- 
 bles are in a few instances omitted, for which see the notes in the 
 following' section. The {Traeter and imperative of Kal, the future of 
 Niphal and Hiphil, and all the forms of Hophal, never receive the 
 epenthesis in question. 
 
 5. Those forms of verbs 12? whose sufformatives be- 
 gin with a consonant, and which jet do not take the 
 epenthetic ^ or '^_ , are altogether peculiar and diifer- 
 ent from most other forms in these verbs. 
 
 E. g. r'sp, ""raf? &:c. with a short vowel in the contracted form. 
 Imper. fem. plur. ":^p mth Hholem pure. Hiphil fut. "ia^jin with 
 Tseri pure ; though sometimes as !i:73''pn with Hhireq magnum. So al- 
 so Hophal generally ; as^Dj^^n, ^!opnn &c. 
 
 Note. The above forms exhibit an anomaly for which no gramma- 
 rian has yet been able to account. In r^^f? , dji^^ &lc. the Vav of the 
 original root appears to be wholly thrown out. The same anomaly 
 prevsuls in Syriac and Arabic. We may perhaps consider Hophal as 
 borrowing its forms from verbs 3'3'. Comp. § 116. III. c. 
 
 6. The praeformatives and letters characteristic of the 
 several conjugations, where they would regulailj have un- 
 der them short vowels, take long ones in these verbs, as in 
 verbs "'^. These long vowels, however, with the excep 
 tion of Shureq, are pure and of course mutable. 
 
 E. g. 2"p^ instead of D'p^ ^or which form see no. 7 below ; Hiph- 
 il D^." in-tead of a^ipn; Hophal Dj:in instead of D^pr: kc. 
 
 Note. The long vowel in the first syllable results from the usual 
 short vowel being thrown into a simple syllable. (§ 55. 1.) 
 
20G § '17. VERES AYIN VAV. 
 
 II 
 
 7. Here, as m verbs yj', many of tlie original forms 
 from which the confracted forms appear to be derived, 
 are such as would be unusual forms in regular verbs. 
 
 E. g". Kal inf. D^p from Dip instead of Dip. 
 
 — fut. nip2 — ^?.p.- — DTp\ 
 
 — part. Dp — Dip. — D;i.ip. 
 Niph. praet. Dip3 — Dip? — Dips. 
 
 Note 1. It will be seen on slight inspection, that where the 
 vowel of the contracted form is Hholem impure or Shureq, the Vav 
 of the root remains (although quiescent), because it is homogeneous 
 with these vowels, as Dip, Dip &.C. But where the verb must be ut- 
 tered with a heterogeneous vowel, Vav or its equivalent is not writ- 
 ten, as Dp, D"'pn ; sometimes it wholly falls out, as "^r;^^ &c. See 
 above in no. 5. 
 
 Note 2. The contraction of this class of verbs cannot well be ac- 
 counted for, on the supposition that the Hebrews pronounced the Vav 
 (as we do) hard like v. But if, like the Arabians, they pronounced it as 
 u', then most of the contractions can easily be accounted for. Thus 
 Dip qd-wdm goes easily into DJ? qdm ; D.ip^ ydq-vi-ion into Dip"" yd- 
 quin ; W'p'r] luq-whn into D'^pn he-qim; D^pn Mq-wdin into DpiiTt 
 hu-qdm &.c. 
 
 8. In tliese verbs alone, occur the unusual conjuga- 
 tions Pole!, Polal, and Hithpolcl (§ 81. 4, 5). They are 
 used instead of Piel, Pual, and Hithpael ; thougli the latter 
 sometimes appear in these verbs, but are seldom used in 
 conjunction with the former. The conjugations Pilpel, 
 Polpa), and Hithpalpal, are also very rarely found. 
 
 See the general remarks at the end of the next section. 
 
 Note. The forms under which verbs li" are noted in the lexicons, 
 as tDip, '2r<:!i &c. are the infinitive construct. This is chosen in pref- 
 erence to the praeter, because it contains the three radicals of the 
 verb, while the praeter exhibits only two ; the latter being always 
 written as 3p, ^'iJ &c. (§ 75.) 
 
§ 118. VKRIiS AYIN" VAV ; NDTT^. 907 
 
 § 1 18. I rieg. vcrlts ; notes on verbs .Iijln Vav. 
 
 Changes of the vowels in declension. Wherever Shtireq occurs in the 
 course of flexion, it is often written by long Q^ibhuts (§ 21. 18); as im- 
 perative l^^p and tap ; future Iin'J^ and 3";:^ ; inTdi"J and n jU;^ &:r. 
 
 Q,amets and Tseri under the praeforinalives and letters character- 
 istic of the conjugations, are pure and mutable in these verbs, as in 
 verbs i"y ; and are therefore dropped as usual when the tone is mov- 
 ed forward ; as Kal fut. '"J^'p;, r7:'''?.npn ; Hiphil uD"'pn , nvjipn ; 
 part, r:^.^., r.-rp'-:. 
 
 /. Kal. 
 
 ((/) Praeter once DXp Hos. 10: 14 ; fern. 2 pers. once na'IJT Ezek. 
 
 4G: 17 for rrni; ; 2 pers. plur. once tzir-.-iJs Mai. 3: 20 for irirmJE. 
 
 Forms imitating verbs rv are "2 Zech. 4: 10 for T2 ; ni3 twice for 
 
 riu, probably on account of the guttural ; plur. 3 pers. twice ^rij for 
 
 Verbs ^;ia/ Tseri are exhibited in the paradigm. The forms ra 
 ■^nq &c. are by contraction for rri^, \'in:3 &.c. for which see § 95. 
 3. c. The 2 pers. fem. sing, and both the second persons plural of 
 n75 do not occur. 
 
 Verbs /7iai Hholetn are sometimes written with Vav; as "^i^, 
 •ijis ; but this is not usual (§117. 7 note 1). They retain the Hholem 
 in flexion, as 3 fem. riwir ; 2 fem. n'^Jz ; 1 pers. "^r^i^a ; 3 plur. 
 ^j£ and ViJis; 1 plur. V.'v^z &c. 
 
 (6) The infinitive construct has Hholem where the praeter has it ; 
 as n^N, wT2&.c. The verb na has both ni "3 and ni73. The usual 
 vowel is Shureq. The infinitive absolute uniformly takes Hholem ; 
 and once has the form '^iilK Is. 28: 28 as if from a root *OjN, though 
 it is joined with the future of "^T". A form like those of verbs ''i" is 
 •^^T Deut. 25: 4. 
 
 (c) The t'uture commonly takes Shureq, as in the paradigm. Fu- 
 ture O occurs in "iiis^. kc. The form ■>iJin.'; has Tseri under the 
 praeformative, as if contracted from the regular form wi*3\ 
 
 In the second and third persons plural feminine, the epenthetic "^_. 
 is sometimes omitted; as n:2-n 1 Sam. 7: 14 or "ia'Trn twice Ezek. 
 16: 55, where also occurs the full form Hj'^n'Cri. These defective 
 
208 § 118. VERBS AYIX VAV ; NOTES. 
 
 forms would seem to come from the apocopated future. Sometimes 
 the Yodh alone is omitted, as nsr^Ton Ezek. 13: 19. (§ 45. 6 note 2.) 
 
 The apocopated future takes Hholem pure, as tlfp^ (§117. 3); and 
 is very rarely found as tljp'^ or Q^p^ In this latter case, the Vav is 
 a mere fulcrum, and the Hholem remains mutable (§21. 15 note). 
 When the tone is removed, the Hholem goes into Qamets Hhateph ; as 
 t3I^'2 1 N3~i'>ljn &.C. With a guttural or Resh, the apocopated luture 
 sometimes takes Pattahh when the tone is shifted ; as n: ' i, 'Ci'nh^ Job 
 31: 5 for tTlh") : -iD'-" &,c. 
 
 T T- ' - T- 
 
 (rf) The imperative has the forms tzi^p, £3p, n73 ; with n par- 
 agogic na^p, riiViJ, n^p ; apocopated V'O Josh. 5: 2 with Hholem 
 pure. 
 
 (e) Participle plural once !=D"^^ip 2K. 16:7. The form'Oi^-,^ (like 
 praeter tSNj?) is used several times in Ezekiel. The verb "j^b has 
 once nab Zech. 5: 4, and once plural a'':b Neh. 13: 21. 
 
 Verbs final Tseri and Hholem retain these vowels in the participle ; 
 as nX3, tzi'^'djii;. 
 
 77. Mphal. 
 
 (a) The praeter is once ^^^i Zech. 2: 17. The student will ob-' 
 serve, that out of the third person the vowel in the contracted form 
 of the verb is Shureq. and not Hholem as in the third person. Shureq, 
 or its equivalent long Qibbuts, is adopted instead of Hholem because it 
 is rather shorter, and therefore serves to abbreviate the word in pro- 
 nunciation, when the tone is moved forwards (§ 52. 4. a). Sometimes 
 the Hholem remains; as ti^ni^-DD. 
 
 {b) The infinitive construct is formed with Shureq ; as "iJ^^M. 
 
 (c) Participle plural u:2"'322 Ex. 14:3 with Qibbuts for Shureq, 
 instead of tZi"'3ii; with Hholem. 
 
 777 HipJdl. 
 
 (a) The praeter is sometimes defectively written, as nyJi Gen.43: 
 3. The epenthetic i is occasionally omitted and the forms construct- 
 ed as in Kal^ as rDfrrEx. 20:25 instead of ni5'':r!; ■'nb::r'^ Jer.l6:13 
 instead of "nib "t:?l ; '^l^'ri, 2 Chr. 29: 1 9 instead of nriVon. For forms 
 like CjriTjri from n n a, see § 95. 3. c. 
 
 (l) A few forms, out of the tliird person, take Tseri instead ofHhireq 
 magnum; as nTb"!" Num. 31: 28; nin'^- Deut. 4:39 ; ^:^^p.~ Mic 
 5: 4 &c. Hhateph Seghol is also found under the characteristic 77e ; 
 as nia^un IK. 8: 18 &c. 
 
§1]8, VERBS AVIN VAV ; NOTES. 209 
 
 (2) The verb "^1 2 has the forms "I'^cn and "^Dn, the hitter like verbs 
 >y. The verb y'~\ also has i'nri and i""^", the former like verbs 'J:; 
 and the latter on account of the guttural. The verb mD has Hiphil 
 n"'wn and once ri^On Jer. 38:22, which is a Chaldee form (§45. 6 
 note 2; comp. § 116. IV". b 1). The same verb has the feminine sin- 
 gular ~rb- 1 K. 21: 25 instead of r:n'br|, as if from a root yy. 
 
 (3) Verbs ".y which have Ayin for the first ratUcal, in those persons of 
 the praeter which receive the epentiietic i, take the proper vowel 
 Paltahh under the characteristic He, instead of the usual Hhateph 
 Pattahh ; as from "n:?, 2 pers. nVT'i'n and ni'i^in instead of ni^^yri; 
 1 pers. ir.i*!"'^-. So from m>', 1 pers. "^nin'^rin. The verbs T^ii* and 
 •^ ".r are the only ones, which occur in the cases where the peculiarity 
 in question would be exhibited. 
 
 (6) Intinitive feminine T'tt^Tj from masc. >1"':~. Infinitive absolute 
 nrn Gen. 43: 3 on account of the guttural. 
 
 (c) Future once t:"'"?^ in Qeri Num. 14 : 3G, a Chaldaism 
 (6 1115. IV. b 1 ). Second pers. plur. fem. ninujn Job 20:10; rri^Tin 
 Mic. 2: 12 for -:''^,''rjn with "-_ epenthetic as in Kal, or it is perhaps 
 fut. Kal from a root D'Tl. (§119. 5.) 
 
 The form yN:^ Ecc. 12:5 is in some lexicons referred to the 
 root Vi2, and in others to the root yND. 
 
 The apocopoled h\t\iTe takes final Tseri pure, as tajT."^ ; which when 
 the tone is retracted becomes Seghol, as Sp.r} "1".^"- N kc. With a gut- 
 tural or Resh the fut. apoc. sometmies takes Pattahh when the tone is 
 shifted, and thus exhibits occasionally the same forms as the fut. apoc- 
 in Kal: as yir"^, "^D'T &.c. 
 
 {(i) Imperative n^wH 2 K. 8: G. 
 
 (e) Participle with Chaldee ibrm n"'Sa for n"^C?2 ; 'J'^b^ for ybK. 
 IF. Hophol. 
 
 Long Qibbuts is sometimes substituted for Shureq ; a3 ^r'an for 
 Tn?3nn; "ncn for iD^in kc. See at the beginning of this section, and 
 compare § 116. III. c. 
 
 V. Polel, Poktl, Hithpolel. 
 
 (o) These conjugations occur in these verbs instead of Piel, Pual, 
 Hithpael (§81. 4,5). There are few (if any) departures from the 
 forms in the paradigms. 
 
 (6) Pulal occurs in only four verbs, viz. b^rt, "JIS, D^n, iVii; ; and 
 has only one or two forms in each. 
 
 (c) Hithpolel is declined after the model of Polel, the nrt being 
 
210 ^118. VERBS AYIN VAV ; NOTES. 
 
 treated as in Hithpael of regular verbs. It sometimes takes Pattahh 
 in its final syllable, which in pause becomes Qamets; as 'j^i^nrt Is. 1: 
 3 from ■{"'a (§ 119). So future ■):^^n'^ Prov. 24 : 3, also "jjisn Num. 
 21: 27 with the second n assimilated. (§ 80. 2. b.) 
 
 Participle fem. in i^ause n^^^Tpn^ Job 20: 27 ; t)^.ipn3 Ps.l39: 21 
 with Metn omitted, and prefix preposition. (§ 95. 2. d, e.) 
 
 Note. These conjugations are often marked in the lexicons as 
 niel, Pulal, Hithpalel. 
 
 V. Pilpel^ Polpal^ Hithpalpctl. 
 
 These conjugations occur a few times in these verbs, as well as 
 in verbs h. (§ 116. VI. § 127. Par. XI.) 
 
 (o) Pilpcl is found in only five verbs, viz. ^•1'r, "bvo^ "-^3, "112, 
 n^p. In the latter it takes the form "Ij^lji Num. 24: 17 on account 
 of the Resh. So participle 'ip'^Ji'S Is. 22: 5. 
 
 {b) Palpal is found only in ^13, viz. 3pers. plur. ^bsbs 1 K. 20:27. 
 
 (c) Hithpalpal is found only in the verb ^T H, viz. fut. 2 pers. fem. 
 rr'rnnn Est. 4:4. 
 
 Note. For the names of these forms in the lexicons, see § 116. 
 VII. d. 
 
 VJ. General remarks on verbs "iy. 
 
 (o) Verbs ^y have in some of their forms a close resemblance to 
 verbs S'?, so that the two classes sometimes interchange forms. On 
 this subject see § 116. IV. o. The forms which the former borrow 
 from the latter have mostly been given above ; as in no. I. a &c. 
 
 {b) The whole number of verbs ranked by the best lexicographers 
 under the class which has Vav for the middle radical, is about one hun- 
 dred and forty. Of these one hundred and twenty two uniformly take the 
 contracted forms ; thirteen are also verbs ^i'r, and therefore are not 
 contracted (§ 117. 2. h) ; and six others are not contracted, for 
 which no special reason can be assigned. These last are the follow- 
 ing, viz. i^-l, -iin once Is. 29: 22; niy (once D^y Is. 50:4 in anoth- 
 er meanhig) ; Hi:^ once Is. 42: 11 ; T\^'^ ; i'V.L" only in Piel. 
 
 (c) Besides some of the verbs ~b and some of the above mention- 
 ed verbs regularly declined, there are^re verbs IJ-" which have the con- 
 jugation Piel, viz. nn found only in Piel 2 pers. plur. masc. nrj^^ri Dan. 
 1: 10; TTy,Piel 3 pers. plur. Tm.^; ^Mi", Piel fut. "^ivl; "nu-, 
 Piel ■^p^' ; Cnp, Piel D^p.. The two last verbs are the only ones in 
 
§110. VEnCS AYIN YODH. 211 
 
 which Piel and Polel co-exist. The verb ni» has the contracted forms 
 of Kal in one signification, and Piel in anollior quite different. 
 
 ((/) The verbs NTS, J<t:, NTp are not reckoned in the above enu- 
 meration. They have forms peculiar to themselves, for which see 
 § 121. 4. 
 
 § 110. Frreg. verbs j verbs Aijin Yodh. 
 
 1. Tlicrc arc about twenty vcrb.s in Hebrew, 
 most of whose I'orms In Kal come from roots which have 
 Yodh lor the middle radical. 
 
 2. The characteristic ol" verbs **y Is their retaining 
 the Yodh with a homogeneous vowel, in the infinitive con- 
 struct, future, and imperative of Kal; as 'j'^S, 1"'!3% "j v &C. 
 
 In other respects and in all the other conjugations 
 the I'orms are entirely the same as in verbs Ayin Vav. 
 
 This arises from the quiescence of the Yodh, and from its being* 
 commuted for V^av wherever the vowels require the exchange. 
 (§117.1.) 
 
 NOTES OX THE PARADIGM. 
 
 ?). The praeter of Kal is declined like verbs li". Three forms on- 
 ly are found ixi which the Yodh is retained, viz. "ri^rz Dan. 9: 2; 
 n^in^-j Job 33: 13 ; with suffix tmir- Jer. IG: 16. The two firsthave 
 also forms like those of the paradigm. 
 
 4. The infinitive absolute is sometimes without Vav ; as ii. 
 
 5. The futures of Kal and Hiphil, whenever both occur, have 
 the same form and can be distinguished only by their meaning. The 
 form rii^.Tin Mic. 2: 12 is for n;''^a"'r7r., or sec § 118. III. c. 
 
 The apocopated future is like that of Hiphil in verbs ir ; as '2"^''^ 
 tri'l)^ &c. With a guttural as nn^ from n"'-) Lc. With the tone retract- 
 ed, V?.rT Lc. Compare the forms in § IIC. III. c. 
 
 6. The participle is like that of verbs ly. For n;r and tD'':r 
 see § 118. I. c. Two verbs in Kal make the participle regular, and 
 are found only there; viz. 3;j<, part, n;.^^{ often; i;;^, part. Vp in 
 Qeri 1 Sam. 18: 9. 
 
212 § 120. VERBS LAMEDH ALEPfl. 
 
 7. Four verbs are ""^ and nV, viz. r.'^rr, i^l^H; ^fp, imper. T'p 
 Jer. 25:27; n;^">^, fut. fern, in pause "'uin Deut. 32: 18 for ■'u;r the 
 apocopated form, like "^n^ 
 
 Note. For the other conjugations, see the notes on verbs VJ in 
 § 118. As a denominative verb, there appears once future Hithpaei 
 in pause n-i^HJi^'.T Josh. 9: 4 for TT^:^n'j. (§ 80. 2. a.) 
 General remarks on verbs "'i". 
 
 8. There are very few verbs which are exclusively of the form "'i', 
 even in those parts of Kal which are characteristic of that form. 
 Most verbs "^ have also forms as from a root IS? ; as inf ]'^b and ^^^ ; 
 to'^ia and D ^ n &c. This seems to have arisen from the great facility 
 and consequent frequency with which Yodh and Vav were inter- 
 changed. 
 
 9. Most of the verbs which Gesenius has ranked under the class 
 "'5', were by the older grammarians and lexicographers assigned to the 
 class iy ; and their forms which retain the Yodh were considered as 
 belonging to Hiphil. The form ■J"'b for instance was considered as 
 the infinitive of Hiphil, by aphaeresis for 'J"'brT. Hence, if the student 
 cannot find in his lexicon a given form under a root ""y, he will be 
 likely to meet with it under a root ly, and vice versa. 
 
 § 120. In-eg. verbs ^ verbs Lamedh Ahph, 
 
 1. The irregularities of verbs Lamedh Aleph are oc- 
 casioned by the nature of the Aleph, which, when it stands 
 at the end of a verb, is always quiescent. 
 
 Wherever the final vowel would regularly be Pat- 
 tahh, it is lengthened into Qamets (§ 55. 3). Other vow- 
 els remain unchano;ed. 
 
 E. g. Ni:^ instead of N^tt ; Pual Jtitg instead of Ni)? ; Kal inf 
 N2'3 ; part. N5:73- 
 
 NoTE. The vowels in which final Aleph thus quiesces remain mu- 
 table, inasmuch as the quiescence is accidental. Thus ^i^'c, fern. 
 nNi:a ; nIt.'s, fem. nij'ra ; Nip, with suffix ■'N'^p kc. (§ 52. .3.) 
 
 2. When the final vowel is already rendered impuie 
 
§I"21. VERBS LAMEDH ALEPII ; NOTES, 213 
 
 l)V the quiescence of Vav or Yodh, Alcph appears to be 
 /// ofio. (§ 23. 6.) 
 
 E. g. Kal infinitive absolute wN*^::^ ; Hiphil N''::^;^. 
 
 3. In those persons of the verb which take suflforma- 
 tives bcirinnino; with a consonant^ Aleph continues to qui- 
 cscc in the followinii; manner. 
 
 {(i) In the jiraeter of Kal in verbs originally final 
 Pattahh, it qulesces in Qnmels ; but in the praeter of all 
 the other conjugations, in Tseri. 
 
 E. rr. 2 per?. Kal TN:^"^, plural iznN^iirr ; Niphal nNii'?: ; Piel 
 riwVj;-: ; Hiphil nxx"?- &:c. 
 
 (/») In the future and iraperative of all the conjuga- 
 tions, it quiesces in Scghol. 
 
 E. g. Kal imperative plur. fem. InrN^^TT, future Ji:J<::7:n ; Piel fu- 
 ture rjiNk'cn &,c. 
 
 4. In those persons which take sufformatives be- 
 ginning with a vowel, Aleph is moveable and regular. 
 
 E. g. Second person feminine l^N^"^ ; imperative fem. ''Ni?^ &c. 
 Note. The radical Aleph, when quiescent, is sometimes omitted in 
 writing; as "nk": Num. 11: 11 ; ''Ps^ Job 32: 18 &:c. 
 
 § 121. Irreg, verbs j notes on verbs Lamedh Aleph. 
 
 I. Kal. 
 
 {(i) In the praeter, verbs final Tseri (§ 76. 2) retain the Tseri 
 through their flexion ; as N"^^, HN^^, QpN"?.? &c. Once onN -( 7 Josh.4:24- 
 
 The third person feminine sometimes take the Syriac form with 
 final n instead of n ; as nN*np Is. 7:14 instead of nN->p &c. 
 
 Forms defectively written ; as ^~lk^ &c. see in § 120. 4 note. 
 
 (6) Infinitive construct with fem. ending ?T_, as HN^";, J^Nl:?! 
 rTN"2a. So with Syriac ending and prefix preposition nN"^p5: for 
 '"•^^l^lp." from H'\p. (§ 47. 2 note.) 
 
 Infinitive const, fem. with Segholate form, as r\^'b72 for ntiV^ ; 
 nw'np, DNr'i) &c. In Ezek. 17: 9 is found the form niN'£Q, which is 
 • 28 
 
214 §121. verkj. LA:.it:DH aleph ; notes. 
 
 the Aramaean infinitive from NilJD. Infinitive masculine sometimes de- 
 fectively written as Tt2n Gen.20:6 for Nmn ; with suffix inNt:n Ezek. 
 33: 12. like a verb Tlh. See in no. IV below. 
 
 (c) The future A is the only one in this class of verbs ; the regu- 
 lar Pattahh being of course prolonged into Qamets. 
 
 {d) Imperative ^N"^^ yfrfi Ps. 34: 10 for njt'^-; ylr-Hi'i ; 2 pers. plur. 
 fem. fN'^p Ex. 2: 20, by a kind of apocope for n3.\nj:> (§ 92. 3 note). 
 The form n;'' t«:i Cant. 3: 11 is for Jiixk from Nx;^ a verb belonging 
 to the first class of verbs •>!:. (§ 109.) 
 
 (e) Participle fem. DH'^p forDN^ra; defectively written DICT'^ for 
 DNi^.V Deut. 28:57. With suffix Di^'ii Neh. 6: 8 for DCJ^i. (§ 47. 2.) 
 
 //. JViphal. 
 
 (fl) The praeter 3 pers. fem. sometimes takes the Syriac form ; 
 as riNbc; Ps. 118: 23 for nijbc: &c. 
 
 Forms defectively written as tDn^otDD Lev. 1 1 : 43 &c. Compare 
 § 120. 4 note. 
 
 (&) Infinitive absolute i<"ip.3 2 vSam. 1: 6. 
 
 (c) Participle plural C3\>«i:72:, l=]\N^qD Ezek. 20: 30, £3\y2n2 
 Josh.l0:17 ; probably from obsolete forms NljI^Ji k.c. (§ 139. note 3.) 
 ///. Piel and Hiphih 
 
 («) Piel infinitive nV/2, riN'ir'g, and nlN^Q. See no. IV below. 
 
 (6) Praeter of Hiphil sometimes defectively written ; as ''t2n~ 
 2 K. 13: 6 for N'^uHn. 
 
 (c) Infinitive also "'Unn Jer. 32: 35 for N'^UH^!- ' 
 
 IV. Exchange of forms for those of verbs nb. 
 (a) As to vowels; as Kal "^nj^^S Ps. 119: 101 for ^"^N]:2 ; partici- 
 ple ^'Jiiz Ecc. 7: 26 for ii^'^)2. Piel nV?^ Jer. 51: 34 for N?'^ ; NS" Ps. 
 143: 3; "'riNsn 2 K. 2:21 ; future J<-3r Job 39: 24; infinitive mx'lr^ 
 
 2 Chr. 36 : 21 ; nxb^ Ex. 31: 51. Hiphil ftbsn Is. 28: 29 for i^^Vs" ; 
 
 3 pers. fem. with n paragogic nnN:;nn Josh. 6: 17. Ilithpael infini- 
 livc n^^a:t^ for NS^nri Zech. 13: 4. (§ 80. 2. c. § 95. 3. r?, e.) 
 
 (/>) As to CONSONANTS, viz. exchauge of final N for n; as Kal iinper. 
 no^ Ps. 60: 4 for kNE-^.; no: Ps 4: 7 for ND: =N'^?. J^'iphal infini- 
 tive absolute iisrs Jer. 49: 10 for N2n?. ; infinitive construct n?."!" Jer. 
 19: 1 1 for Nv;"J"- Piel future r^V^"? Job 8: 21 for NV.^^ 
 
 (c) As to both VOWELS and consonants ; as Kal 2 pers. fem. riTO^C 
 Ruth 2: 9 for ni*'::: ; nb': Ezek. 28: 16 for nN^b?:, and so nVs 1 Sam. 
 C>: 10; future n:"?."in Job 5: 18 for n3N'3-}ri ; participle feminine N^" 
 
§ 122. VERHS LAMKDII ME, 215 
 
 Ecc. 10: 5 for n::^ instead of nN^C" ; plural with suffix iTO'i: Is. 29: 7 
 for -■'Na'i; participle pasniie "'^'■^HZ Ps. 32: 1 lor N^lt;:. A^iplial n"'23 
 Jer. 20: 9 fur nN2: ; ^:">'^:r:: Job 18: 3 for TDN.'pq:; 2 pers. fem. 
 rrns-i: Jer. 51 : 9 for riwNsi: ; future ^^::i'' Ps. 73: 10 for n^xa"" ; 
 Piel future lE-^*: .Icr. 8: 11 for UNC-^"; ; Hiphil with suffix ^»':'>:»:72ri 2 
 Sam. 3: 8 for '^i'' ViNX"3n ; participle nipTS Ezek. 8: 3 for ii-':p"3. Hith- 
 pael rpzzDr, 1 Sam. 10:6 for nN^rnr; ; infinitive nizznri 1 Sam.lO:13 
 forNr:nr| from N^:. See also ii» a. 
 
 Note 1. The torejjoing exchanges seem to arise from the com- 
 mon tendency of botli final Jleph and final lie to quiescence ; and from 
 the close resemblance which exists between the two classes of verbs 
 Nb and rrl: on account of this tendency. In some cases there are 
 corresponding verbs in each class, with an id ntity of meaning. Thus 
 N"^p and nnp to meet; nbs and nrs to be great or -^•onderful^ &c. 
 
 In Chaldee and Syriac, verbs Mb and nb fall into one class; and in 
 Hebrew they would seem to have been tending to a similar result. 
 
 Note 2. For the forms of the doubly irregular verbs N'iJS, i<T3, 
 wNi:, it'ip, see § 124 and Par. XVII, XIX. 
 
 § 122, Irreg, verbs ; verbs Lamedh He. 
 
 1. Under the general appellation of verbs Lamedh He 
 are couiprised what were originally two distinct classes of 
 verbs. Of these, one was numerous and terminated in fi- 
 nal Yodh, as ^^^5 ; the other contained but few verbs and 
 terminated in final Vav, as 17U3. 
 
 But as the Hebrews avoided ending a word with 
 Vodli or Vav as moveable consonants, they substituted 
 for them in these verbs a quiescent H, in all cases w^here 
 the verb would end with a radical letter, excepting in the 
 passive participle. This change led also to a corres- 
 ponding change in the final vowels of the verb. 
 
 In this way the two species of verbs, which originally were "^b and 
 lb , were brought to assume the same form, and became so blended to- 
 gether as to be generally undistinguishable in their inflection. In Ara- 
 bic, they are sometimes distinctly marked, but in most cases flow togeth- 
 
216 § 122. VERES LAMEDH HE. 
 
 er as in Hebrew. The only mode of ascertaining, in general, what verbs 
 were "^b and what were "!"?, is by examining the words derived from 
 them, many of which retain the original final radical ; as "^p; from 
 !lj~:= "jT: ; "i^R. from nilj? = 1]Cp^ &.c. One verb only retains the 
 radical Vav in its inflection, viz. "bw, praet. 1 pers.^-ilb*^. 
 
 Note. Verbs nb with Mappiq are declined as verbs Lainedh guttu- 
 ral, the moveable n being the original radical. 
 
 2. Throughout all the conjugations, final n in the sev- 
 eral tenses and moods quiesces in the follovMng vowels. 
 
 (a) In the praeter it quiesces in Qamets ; as Kal 
 
 nb5 , Niphai n\j2 , Hiphii nb^n &c. 
 
 (6) In the iuture and participle, in Seghol ; as Kal 
 In'py'] , Niphai H^y"] &c. Kal part, n'pi &c. 
 
 (c) In the imperative, in Tseri ; as nT^, 51^5 Sec. 
 
 {d) In the infinitive absolute, in Hholein ; as n^5 &c. 
 
 (e) The infinitive construct takes the feminine form 
 n'1 for nV; as ^\^T^ for n^b5 &c. (§ 47. 4 note.) 
 
 3. Before the sufTormatives beginning with a conso- 
 nant, viz. ri, n, "^n, nr, "jn, '^D, n3, the original radical 
 Yodh appears and quiesces in the following vowels. 
 
 (a) In the praeter of Kal, it quiesces in Hliireq 
 magnum^ as fl'^^^ ; but in the praeter of all the other 
 conjugations, in Tseri; as Piel fl'^Vs &;c. 
 
 (b) In the future and imperative of all the conjuga- 
 tions, it quiesces in Seghol ; as TO'^^^n &:c. 
 
 The original Vav is changed into Yodh in order to admit of this 
 quiescence (§ 48. 2. b); so that the two original classes of verbs are 
 here undistinguishable. Sec no. 1 above. 
 
 The quiescence takes place in ord^r to avoid ending a syllable 
 with a moveable Vav or Yodh ; as rr'^ba instead of rfra. (6 48.) 
 
 4. Before the sufTormatives beoinninii' with a vowel, 
 viz. '^ , *'_ , tlic radical Yodh or Vav falls away. 
 
§123. VF.UBS LAMFDII HE; NOTES. 217 
 
 E. g. 1-3 for ^""ba ; ""r-i for ^^bij. In pause the Yodh is restored; 
 as r ba ^ fon r a -. {f\ 23. l'. //.) 
 
 In the same manner the Yodh, or rather //c, with its vowel nnj- 
 formly falls away before suthx-pronouns ; as ~"r.n = "^j-inb-i. (§ 126 a.) 
 
 NoTF.. In the 3 pers. sing'.feminine, final n is changed into n before 
 the suft'onnative "_ ; as nV^, ~n"rA. (§40. 2.) 
 
 5. In all the conjugations the future often takes an 
 
 apocopated form ; and in several, the imperative also. 
 
 See in the next section, and compare the Arabic futures, which 
 uniformly take an apocopated form. 
 
 § 123. Irreg. verbs ^ notes on verbs Lamedh He^ 
 
 I. Kal. 
 
 (a) In the praeter 3 pers. sing. fem. by an Aramaeism the sufforma- 
 tive is sometimes omitted, as nii'i' Lev. 25: 2] for ~»"jiiJjr; (comp. § 
 121.1.0). First person by Syriasm TiN^iin Ezek. 43: 27 ; so also 
 plur. 1 pei-s. n:r>i< Jer. 3: 22 for n:inN. Once with final Vav retained 
 and moveable, viz. "riT:*^ Job 3: 26. (§ 122. 1.) 
 
 The forms are sometimes defectively written; as "^fibs for 'r}'^3 2. 
 In pause &,c. the Yodh is restored in forms where it commonly falls out ; 
 see below in h. 
 
 (6) The infinitive absolute sometimes has the form Vra ; as IN"! 
 Gen. 26: 28; 'Z)Z Is. 30: 19. Twice it takes final n like the construct, 
 viz. nin'^ Is. 22: 13; niN'n Is. 42:20 Qeri. Like verbs Nr, iis Nu;: 
 .Jer. 23: 39. 
 
 Infinitive construct rizp_ Prov. 16 16; with suffix ^rfuj? Ex. 18: 18. 
 With feminine form and Vav retained n^ijtn Ezek.28:17 ; by Syriasm 
 n:.- Ezek. 21:15 for ni"rT. 
 
 (c) The future sometimes imitates verbs Nr ; (l) in the final voth- 
 els^ as 1 pers. nyUJN, 2 pers. ribsn ; (2) in the final consonants^ as 
 N:;^";,J<rn:; &,c. Comp. § 121. IV. By Syriasm n^.rin, Nnn for n5.\n 
 ■•iTn for nz'rn Jer. 3 : 6 &c. For the appearance of the radical Yodh 
 in pause &c. see below in h. 
 
 The 3 pers. plur. fem. is written defectively in !i:Ci'''Z! Job 5: 12; 
 with Daghesh euphonic "i^i^n Judg. 5: 29 ; and also with both Da- 
 £:hesh and Yodh ns"'i<->n Mic. 7; 10. , 
 
218 § 1:23. VERBS LAMEDH HE; NOTES, 
 
 (rf) The apocopated future occurs only in those forms which end 
 with the radical ri. It is made by dropping both the final n and the 
 final vowel. The table below exhibits the mode of apocope and the 
 forms ; the first Hebrew column containing the full forms ; the second 
 exhibiting their appearance after the vowel and final n are drop- 
 ped ; and the third displaying them as they usually appear, viz. with 
 a furtive vowel (§ 59. 2. b). There are some other forms in use, with 
 an anomalous punctuation and without any furtive vowel. These are 
 also exhibited in (2). 
 
 (l) Forms with a furtive vowel. 
 
 i^5\l, "bt^^ Job 27: 8. 
 
 ^ani, Tnni, 'jnn}. 
 
 v& 
 
 'nri^';], in pause bn'^T. 
 
 (2) Forms without a furtive vowel. 
 Praeter ^52 future S^Sl"^ apoc. ^f^;], '[(Sr.. 
 
 Singular 
 
 3 
 
 pers. 
 
 -^.^: 
 
 b:t-« 
 
 — 
 
 2 
 
 — 
 
 rrV.^n 
 
 IrVn 
 
 — 
 
 1 
 
 — 
 
 i^c.^"?. 
 
 "^M 
 
 Plural 
 
 1 
 
 — 
 
 nss; 
 
 3C3 
 
 : t • 
 
 igiitt. 
 
 3 
 
 — 
 
 nyui-; 
 
 r^;; 
 
 — 
 
 2 
 
 — 
 
 nynn 
 
 
 S gutt. 
 
 3 
 
 — 
 
 nu;5;2 
 
 \pi-;2 
 
 HD 
 
 3 
 
 — 
 
 i^in: 
 
 ^n':' 
 
 n^rj 
 
 — 
 
 "■T.n": 
 
 — ^-^ 
 
 ^-;, ^HNr, ^iiD. 
 
 n^n 
 
 — 
 
 s^vHI 
 
 — 'n;. 
 
 "'n"', ■'nn. 
 
 rinn 
 
 — 
 
 
 — ID! 
 
 
 T T 
 
 — 
 
 riiiD"; 
 
 — rc^T 
 
 Job 31: 27. 
 
 ■* T 
 
 — 
 
 Sriw^.-;': 
 
 — ^'<1!25 
 
 N wt oiJofalsoN'n'^.l- 
 
 T T 
 
 — 
 
 "■?.") "". 
 
 — 11!2 
 
 
 rrno 
 
 — 
 
 n?;^": 
 
 — i'^""."! 
 
 
 rt^-J 
 
 
 
 
 — '•'•^ri 
 
 Deut. 32: 18. 
 
 Note 1. The apocopated forms of riTl and ^TI above, are made 
 by transferring the vowel of the praeformative to the first radical for 
 the sake of euphony, and in order that the middle radical Yodh may 
 quiesce ; as "rj^ for";n'^_ &c. The form N^M"] Ecc. 11:3 is a Syriasm 
 for '!"■*_ the apocopated form of n?.!l'^ Irom iTiin = nT. Comp. no. 
 VI. 6. § 95. 1. c. 
 
 Note 2. The apocopated forms usually lake Vav couvcrsivc, l»ul 
 not always. The Vav is also very rarely found with the full form ; 
 as n:^:] 2 K. 1:10; n-\3^T 2 K. G: 23. 
 
 For such forms as U'T &c. from InU:, see 6 124. 3. e. 
 
 ••-. TT' 
 
§123. VEans LAMK.nu III". ; notks. '219 
 
 (e) Imperative in pause I^^S kc. see below in h. 
 
 {/) The participle active in a few cases takes a feminine form 
 like n^b^-i, as if from a masculine form ^na or"»''!:^a like b^tr^p (§ 96. 
 V. o). k g. n^nc Ps. 128:3; n^piz Lam. 1 : 16; plural ni'nix Is. 
 4 1 : 23 from ^nN &c. Masculine form witli suffix in pause n"'T2).5> Is. 
 22: 11 for Tix'y; see below in h. 
 
 {g) The participle passive of verbs originally th sometimes re- 
 tains final Vav moveable ; as plural ni^o: Is. 3: 16 ; nin^yy 1 Sam. 25: 
 18. This form appears only in Kothil) ; the Qeri has nT'nu: and 
 ni"»n'::3?. Here belong also the forms i'i;y Job 41: 25 and ^'Z^2 Job 15:22 ; 
 proba])ly for 'niui* and TnD:^. Some manuscripts read ■'qQ:£ as in the 
 paradigm. 
 
 {h) Yodh radical restored. In all those forms of Kal which 
 usually drop the Yodh, the radical Yodh is restored and its preced- 
 ing vowel restored and prolonged^ when a pause-accent falls on the 
 last syllable that contains a radical, or when a pariagogic Nun is added; 
 as praeter n^cn instead of ^DH, original form n'^On like ^-i^p^; fu- 
 ture n"^""^"; for VrO*^ ; "i^'^^^n for ^y^n ; imperative ^".^2 for ni-"2 ; 
 participle fern. JT^Ui? for nt2i> Cant. 1: 7. The same rule extends 
 to the other conjugations. 
 
 \Vith the paragogic Nun, the preceding vowel is sometimes not 
 restored; as yz-^\ Deut.8:13; ';.';'-;-|-; Ps.36:9 for jl"^*)")^ &c.(§ 21. 18.) 
 
 //. Aij^hal 
 
 (f() The praeter, out of the third person, sometimes takes Hhireq 
 instead of Tseri, like Kal; as ^;"'*r^3 1 Sam. 14: 8 &,c. Comp. below 
 in Piel. In pause the radical Yodh is restored ; see no. I. h. 
 
 {b) Infinitive absolute nVrs: 2 Sam. 6 : 20 contrary to analogy ; 
 irtzHD Jer. 49 : 10 for rizr,:. Infinitive construct niN-ir; and riNnn 
 Judg. 13: 21 &.C. 
 
 (c) The future in its apocopated form merely drops the final He 
 and final vowel, but suffers no other change ; as ra^i for r;r.n"]. 
 
 {d) Participle ri:n: like verbs J<':, for r.irn:. Comp. § 121.IV.fl. 
 ///. Piel and Ptial. 
 
 (a) The praeter of P?e/, out of the third person, sometimes takes 
 Hhireq instead of Tseri, like Kal and Niphal ; as Tl'^^p Ps. 40: 2 ; 
 rT'"?3 Is. 57: 8. Third pers. with suffix once \4l ^^^- 41: 51 for"*:^;. 
 
 (6) Infinitive construct H}^ Ex. 22:22 like verbs Nb ; see no.V below. 
 
 (c) The future sometimes also takes final Tseri in,stead of Seghol. 
 
220 §123. VERBS LAMEDH he; notes. 
 
 like verbs i<b, as rrV^n Lev. 18:7; see no, V below. With suffix 
 ^3'^'^^.n;' Hos. 6: 2 with final Yodh radical. 
 
 In the apocopated future, the iinal He and final vowel fall away 
 as in the other conjugations ; and hence the Daghesh of the middle 
 radical also falls away, because the middle radical then stands at the 
 end of a word ; as r^";] for n 5.3']] (§ 45. 3). Sometimes the Pattahh 
 is prolonged into Qamets; as Tn"^} 1 Sam. 21: 13. (§ 55.2.) 
 
 {d) The apocopated form of the imperative is like On Am. 6: 10 
 for r-\^ri. So in Hithpael brrnn 2 Sam. 13: 5. 
 
 (e) The final Yodh radical is restored in pause and with paragogic 
 Nun ; see no. I. h. Thus, imperative plural n'^bl Prov. 26: 7 ; future 
 •jn^atir Is- 40: 18; with suffix and pause-accent ^72;* CO';' Ex. 15:5 with 
 Qibbuts for Shureq (§ 21. 18). In all these cases, the Daghesh of 
 the middle radical is omitted (§ 95. 3. rf). Participle with suffix in 
 pause rjS'Ca Hos. 2: 16 for rrnca. 
 
 IV. Hiphil and Hophal. 
 
 (a) Praeter of Hiphil out of the third person with Hhireq, as "'n'^b'-in 
 2 K. 17: 26 ; n':,y- Ex. 33:1 ; compare Kal, Mphal, and Piel. The 3 
 pers. sing. fem. has sometimes the Aramaean termination, as in Kal ; as 
 ni^nn Lev. 26: 34 for t-iniSnn ; nxbr: Ezek. 24: 12 for t^nNbn from 
 JTlNb. So Hophal nb^ln Jer. 13:19; comp. in Kal. 
 
 The characteristic n sometimes takes Seghol, though not followed 
 by a guttural ; as in nNbrj above ; and with suffix ':j"'»"iNbrr Mic. 6: 3 ; 
 nNn- Gen. 41: 28 ; nb^n Est. 2: 6. 
 
 Several words take a Syriac ending; as "b^!^ Is 53: 10 for SlbniTJ; 
 plural ro'qri Josh. 14:8 for ^Sari &c. 
 
 {h) The infinitive absolute occurs only in the Syriac form with 
 Tseri, instead of Hholem, which form is therefore placed in the par- 
 adigm. The verb nm has inf abs. both n2"^n and nzin. Infini- 
 tive construct nn^ipn Lev. 14: 43 for ni^Lpri. 
 
 (c) The future borrows from verbs Nb by Syriasm (no. V ); as 
 N''"i22 Hos. 13: 15 tor n'nc\ It takes a Syriac ending like the prae- 
 ter ; as'^TOn Jer. 18:23 for nn72n. 
 
 {d) The apocopated future drops the final He and final vowel, and 
 usually assumes a furtive vowel as in Kal (§ 59. 2. b). Two forms 
 only are found without the furtive vowel. The following table exhib- 
 its the full forms, and the usual apocopated forms. 
 
§ r?3. VERBS LA jrnpii he; .votes. 221 
 
 Singular 3 pers. nb.r b:'\} Scghol for Pattahh. (§ 60. 3.) 
 \'erhs V giitt. ^".'1! ^''l\2 
 
 — 3 gtUl. '^>'z?.2 '?\l ''^^6 the apoc. form in Kal. 
 
 The forms without a furtive vowel are ~t~]2 I^*- 41:2 from M""^^, 
 and PC;; Gen. 9: 27 from ?ir!p\ 
 
 For such forms as C^i &.c. from t^t2i, see § 121. 3. e. 
 (f) The imperative has a few apocopated forms with a furtive 
 vowel, viz. 2-1 n for nz"]"; T['\h for -2-in ; r^h Ex.33: 12 for r:r?;r|. 
 
 V. Exchange of forms for those of verbs N*. 
 
 As verbs X; borrow manj forms from verbs nb (§121. IV), so 
 the latter often take forms analog^ous to those of the former. 
 
 (</) As to vowKLs; as Kul fut. nrduV. P^- HO: 117 for rrJti^ &.C. 
 See no. I. c. and the other notes above. 
 
 (i) As to coxsoNANTS, viz. exchange of final n for N; as Kal future 
 az-c^l Lam. 4: 1 for ":;4;-", ; inf. ticz Jer 23: 39 for ri'^:. Piel i<v:: 2 
 K. 2 5: 29 for nri; ; Pualfut. iiV^I Ecc. 8: 1 &,c. See other forms in 
 the preceding notes. 
 
 (c) As to both VOWELS and consonakts ; as Kal praeter with suffix 
 D^Nrn 2 Sam. 21: 12 in Qeri for mpn from nbn. Hiphilfut. ^"'")C2 
 Hos.'lo: 15 for rnp\ 
 
 Most of these forms have been already noted above. They owe 
 their origin to the influence of the Syriac dialect, in which the two 
 classes of verbs Nr and re flow into one. (§ 121. IV note 1.) 
 
 Note. In Aramaean (§1.2. a), the futures and participles of verbs 
 S«r and nb commonly end in N_ or '_ ; which form the Hebrew has 
 sometimes adopted, as is seen in the preceding notes. The same 
 remark applies to those forms which end in '_ instead of n_ or n^. 
 the usual terminations. 
 
 VI. Pile] and Hithpalel. 
 
 {(i) Two verbs originally "ir have the conjugation Pilel (§81. 6), 
 formed by doubling the liual Vav and then adopting the usual final n. 
 Thus rrij: = "!{<:, Pilel !^1N: = iin: ; which appears in the contract- 
 ed form ~in:. plural rN: Cant. 1: 10 and part. niN:^ Cant. 2: 14 on 
 account of the Aleph (§ 47. 5. a). The otiier verb is JintJ, Pilel 
 part. plar. const, nxj?. "'inuTa Gen. 21: 16. 
 
 {b) Hithpalel occurs only in the verb MHtJ ; of which all the forms 
 in use are given in the paradigm (§ 80. 2. a). Future 3 peri, plur- 
 29 
 
§124. VERLiS L'OUBLY ANOMALOUS. 
 
 sometimes Tnn"^"^ (§ 95. 2. a). Apocopated future inn'-z:"], for which 
 the form inr'i;'^^ i^^ in common use like "^rj"; for "ri"] (§ 123. 1, ti, note 1). 
 Chaldaic infinitive r^;;inn->prj 2 K. 5: 18. For the form dn/inpipjq , 
 see § 124 b. 
 
 * * * 
 
 Note. V'erbs rb are irreguUir only in those persons which take 
 sufformatives beginning with n ; in which case the final Tav of the 
 verb is expressed by a Daghesli forte in the Tav of the sufforma- 
 tives ; as rin2 for rnns &:c. See examples in § 95. 3. c. 
 
 § 12-1. Incg. verbs-, verbs doubly anomalous. 
 
 1. Verbs douhhj anomalous are those which are ir- 
 regular in two of their radical letters, usually the first and 
 the last. (§ 106. 4.) 
 
 E. g. nriN, N:i^ n-i% Nt;::, Tro'j &c. 
 
 Note 1. It is not cotamon that two irregular radical letters 
 come together. There are, however, a few cases of such a concur- 
 rence ; as in verbs both i:; and Nb, for which see below in no. 4. 
 
 Note 2. The verb Ti:, which is both "JS and i"3>, is inflected in 
 Kal simply like verbs "jD ; as praeter 3 pers. fem. M'J'i^ ; future 'il'^ 
 Nah. 3: 7 with Hholem, and T^^!! Gen. 31: 40 with Pattahh. In Hiphil 
 the only form which occurs is 3 pers. plur. ^tT?.^, with suffix ^ni3^ 
 Job 18:18 like verbs yy. In Hophalthe only forms are the participle 
 ^Zfp 2 Sam. 23: 6 like ver1)s 2."2?, and future nv Job 20: 8 like verbs 
 •jD. The verb DD: occurs only in Poel and Hithpoel, where of 
 course it exhibits no irregularities. These two are the only verbs 
 which are both "jD and "y. 
 
 In the verbs T^; and j-"^:, which are both IS and 1^", the A'un is en- 
 tirely regular. 
 
 2. All the Irregularities which are found in the first 
 and last radicals of verbs, concur in these verbs. 
 
 See Par. XVI, XVII, XVIII. 
 
 In order to find all the forms of a doubly anomalous verb, the stu- 
 dent has only to consider the anomaly at the beginning as belonging 
 to the class of verbs irregular 3, and the one at the end as belonging 
 to those irregular r , and unite the irregularties of both of these in 
 the flexion. 
 
f'I21. VEllBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. 2-23 
 
 3. The lollowiiii:; cxanipics and iiolos on llie par- 
 adigms just ineotioncd, exhibit all tlio forms of these verbs 
 in whicli the student is likely to meet \vilh any dilliculty. 
 
 (^0 Verbs ND an 1 T.^. (§ 107. § 122 &c.) 
 
 r:rN, Iliphil Alt. apoc. rx"^] 1 Sum. 11: 21 for nVw\*'}. 
 
 nCN, imperative nCN Ex. IG : 2:5 l)y Syria.'^m fur n2N (§ 17. 5. b.); 
 future with suffix inbr} 1 Sam. 28: 24 fon^iSNrr 
 
 ^inN, pnieter in pause ^SnN Jer. 3: 22 ; imperniive in pause ^^"^^^ by 
 Syriasra for n-r^^ (§ 47. b. h. § 12.3. I./t) ; future i<n\} Dent, i'i: 21 for 
 nriN";, the tii-st N bein<2: dropped and final N put for ri (§ 123.V. b) ; 
 dn;;] Is. 41: 25 for "ri^!!:- Hiphil imperative in pause '"nr; for Vnxn. 
 
 (6) Verbs ^S and vN:^ . (§ 108 kc. § 120 kc.) 
 n:c^, inf. fern. DN^C for nit^. (§ 47. 4); imper. Nit ; see § 109 &c. 
 
 (c) Verbs ^D and nb, Par. XVI. (§ 108 kc. § 122 &c.) 
 
 !Tl^,not foimd in Kal; Pielfut. I'n'f,^ Lam.3:53 for M2']2- Hiphilfut. 
 with n retained n'lin"^ Neh. 11: 17; first person with suffix '^~iN Ps. 
 65: 18, and in pause '^llK Ps. 30: 13. . 
 
 ln:;j,/u<. 1 pers. plur. with suffix d:*': Ps. 74: 8. 
 
 r\^l^fui. apoc. Pl"".2 Ezek. 31: 7 ; Popaal n''^^^;; Ps. 45:3. 
 
 '^'^^/«^• 1 pers. with suffix d")"^: Num. 21: 30. Hiphil fut. with 
 sufif. nn^ 2 K. 17: 27 ; r^-\'\r\ Ps. 45: 8 kc. 
 
 (d) Verbs ]Dand ^i^, Par. XVII. (§113 &c. §121 kc.) 
 
 The paradigm exliihils in Kal and Niphal the forms of N'*!;: ; in 
 Hiphil those of N\2;', because the former does not occur in Hiphil. 
 
 Infinitive construct riN'Jj for riN/i (§ 47. 4). Future rt:\y.r^ Rutli 
 1:14 without Aleph. Hiphil fut. ''UJ: Ps. 55: 16 Kethib for ^^'^\ 
 
 (e) Verbs ]D and nb, Par.XVIII. (§ 113 &c. § 122 kc.) 
 
 The three verbs Mt:, iiij:, r:D2 , are all which occur under this 
 form. The following are all the departures from the forms in the 
 paradigm. 
 
 /ia/ fut. apoc. with Vav 'Ci} and -t:^] ; also T-;l 2 K. 9: 33. 
 
 Niphal exhibits only the following forms, viz. from rfo:, praet. 3 
 pers. plur. in pauses"*:;: Num. 24: 6; fut. 3 pers. nUi"'^ Zech. 1: IGj 
 
224 § i24. VERliS DOUKLV ANOMALOUS, KTC. 
 
 3 pers. plur. ^C:'; Jer. 6: 4 ; from nt^:, praet. ns: 2 Sam. 11:15; 
 ^NS3 Job 30: 8 with t? for n. (§ 123. V. b.) 
 
 Hiphil future with suffix as 13^ 2 Sam. 14: 6 ; T^:il Job 30 : 18 &:c. 
 Fut. apoc. with Vav 12*1, ""^^l &c. The imperative also suffers apoc- 
 ope and takes the forms t:ij, ^^i, Avhich are of frequent occurrence. 
 
 4. There are a low verbs of peculiar irregularity. 
 
 (a) The usual forms of the Verb kS*T2 are exhibited in Par. XIX. 
 From these there are many departures, resulting from the nature of 
 the two last radicals. One is, that most of the forms with Hholem or 
 Hliireq, are written both fully and defectively; as imp. N^2 andNz&c 
 
 Kal praeter 3 pers. plur. 1N2 Jer. 27: 18. The infinitive construct 
 takes suffixes, as "^J^'a, '^n's, Tt'z^'z Gen. 10: 19 &c. and is often thus 
 used as a sort of adverbial noun. Future with Vav converfive JiilS'li, 
 £<;'n'"';2, Ti\l 1 K. 12: 12 Kethib. Third pers. plur. fern, twice ns^Xin. 
 
 For the forms nnxari, "^nNsn, see § 121b. 
 
 Hiphil praeter often *{*':ir7. In the 2 and 1 persons with suffix, an 
 epenthetic i is sometimes inserted, as ^i^niN^arr, T^nN'^in &c. So 
 without suffix Dr'!i*"'lrj. First pers. plur. occurs once Num. 32: 17, as 
 in the paradigm. Intinitive N'^lb for i^'^sn}: ; sometimes with suffixes, 
 as in Kal. Future 1 pers. "^iN. 
 
 (ft) The form ''ti is the praeter of Kal from a root "^2" like verbs 
 i?". JYo other form Irom this root is found in Hel'rew. 
 
 (c) The verb N5; is found only in Hiphil, where it is declined 
 like Niz above. Future once ''2'^ Ps. 141:5. 
 
 {(I) Tb.e verb i<Tp is also found only in Kiphil, and is declined 
 like i<i2. 
 
 § 124 a. Irreg. verbs ^ relation to each other. 
 
 1. From the similarity of forms and signification in many cases, it 
 is probable, that all the verbs which have been described above as be- 
 longing to the second class of irregular verbi?-, viz. all those which are 
 Irregular in their ^?'5/, second^ or third radical letters, were originally 
 hiUteral ; and were l)rought to their present form by the addition of >?, 
 ^ , ;, and sometimes n, for a tii'st radical ; by inserting T or "^ , or by 
 doubling the last radical for a middle one ; or l»y annexing one of the 
 quiescent letters for a final radical. Thus fiom the biliteral '"p were 
 formed '^5", 'r]T7, Nr~, r;:::i, all having the same meaning. So. ^^^ 
 and a^:; i:;:'', ^lli, and ^"12: ; Nip and n-iP : iiu and Si;^ Lc. 
 (§ 62. 3.) 
 
§ 1Q4. VERHS ; MIXED JX)RMS. 225 
 
 2. Henco, when two irregular verbs of the same signification and 
 of kindred origin occur, it is often the case that the one is used only 
 in particular tenses and conjugations, while the other is employed 
 in the tenses and conjugations where the first is wanting ; both roots 
 thus nuiking out a complete verb. Thus from the biiiteral "^b were 
 formed *^rr! and "j?" with the same meaning, tJie lormer of which is 
 used in the praeter and participle, as "^^m, ^V.^ri; while the latter fur- 
 nishes the infinitive, future, and imperative, as n^b, *^b"], ";'?. ^♦^• 
 Niphal ha-i Y^r;; from the former. So :2iD a verbT^has a future '2'iZ^I 
 as from SS2^ a verb "D. In like manner Kal pjin, but Pual "pti and 
 Hithpael rrjvnriri as from ~pn. So 'y*:cnhas future y^"i' and Niphal 
 y^-',: as from "fin, but Piel 7"m-i &c. 
 
 3. This trait in Hebrew verbs is very important, because it affords 
 an obvious solution for a multitude of supposed anomalies. If in Latin 
 it be allowable to bring toget her ^/ero, tuli^ Inlum^ as constituent parts 
 of oHc verb, although evidently derived from three; and in Greek, 
 (juit'O), jitfUio, t'lJijt', and fft/jM^ o'tnco^ t\vty7.a &c. which are made up in 
 a similar manner ; why should not the same practice be extended to 
 the Hebrew ? This has been done in a degree by Gesenius in his 
 Lehrgeb;iude ^§ 112,113; but the princif>le has not yet been fully 
 adopted in lexicography, 
 
 §124b. Verbs ; mixed forms. 
 
 There are a Cew anomalous forms ofverl)s in tlie Hebrew Bible 
 Avhich the older grammarians denominated mixed forms ^ because they 
 considered them as uniting the characteristics and (as they said) the 
 meanings of different conjugations. Such are the following. 
 
 7\--\''_ Ps. 7:6 which is fut. Piel in all but its final vowel, where it 
 resembles Kal. 
 
 1.\'>L\x: Ezek. 0: 8 made from Niphal praeter "H5"«li: and Kal 1 pers. 
 future ~1N*1"N. 
 
 rinNZ.T Deut. 33: IG and \-;N;'2r! 1 Sam. 25: 34 for future 3 and 2 
 pers. sing. fem. Nir and ''X-r, but with sufformatives like the prae- 
 ter of verbs Tib . 
 
 Dn"'"nrU;:^ Ezek. 8: IG with the sufformative of the 2 pers. plur, 
 masc. praeter, but evidently standing for the plural participle of Hithpa- 
 lel CTrr'w::^, as is read in some manuscripts. 
 
 Forms like the preceding are generally noted in the lexicons, and 
 arc probably the result of negligent transcription. 
 
22-3 ^125. v^ERBS : notes ON participles. 
 
 § 1 24 c. Verbs ; forms of plurilileral verbs. 
 
 It was stated in § 82 that phiriliteral verbs were declined like Pi- 
 lel and Pulal. The following seven forms, however, are all that ap- 
 pear in the Hebrew Bible. 
 
 N'uwSl:, 1 pers. with suffix l^'n^^Jtu; Is. 14:23. 
 
 bz-is, participle ^s-i^TS 1 Chr. 15:27. 
 
 CD-S, future with suffix nrbp-js;' Ps. 80: 14. 
 T\:nE, Job 26: 9. 'CED Vjob 33: 25. 
 
 ^in^Eli 2 pers. future ?")nn^ Jer. 12 : 5; participle n'nnriJ^ 
 Jer. 22: 15. 
 
 A few other forms are noted in some of the lexicons, but in oth- 
 ers they are more properly referred to the Pilel form from a triliter- 
 al root; as Pilel 3 pers. fern, in pause M:"!'— \ Job 15: 32, Cant. 1: 16. 
 Irom l^'l. 
 
 § 125. Verbs ; notes on the paradigm of participles, 
 
 1. The paradigm of participles exhibits the manner in which the 
 feminine is formed from the masculine, and also the formation of the 
 masculine and feminine plural. The mode of declining these forms, so 
 as to designate the relation of case^ must be sought among the nouns ; 
 because in all their inflections participles are treated as nouns and un- 
 dergo the same changes from declension (§ 90. 3). The declensions to 
 which the participles respectively belong, are noted in the paradigm. 
 
 NoTF- The tone-syllable of participles follows the usage of nouns,, 
 and not of verbs. 
 
 2. The Segholate forms of the feminine are mostly limited to those 
 participles in which the final vowel of the masculine is Qamets or 
 Tseri pure and mutable. Here they arc of frequent occurrence, es- 
 pecially when the participle is in regimen. 
 
 3. The ground of the above limitation is, that the final vowel oi 
 the word which lakes a Segholate form, is usually changed by the eu- 
 phonic power of the furtive vowel (§ 60. 3). Hence, when the final 
 vowel is iminviable^ the feminine form in n_ is generally preferred. 
 
 4. lYniiiiiiic foims in n_ ai-e found, however, in participles, even 
 where the final vowel of the masculine is Hholcm impure ; as rii;.-:: 
 
§ I'JG. Vr.KKS WITH .SUKFIX-l'RONOl'XS. 227 
 
 2 85101.10:8. In feminine nouns and adjectives, it is not uncommon 
 tor the furtive Seghol to be preceded by llholem; as Dyi:'!! , ri:'rir , 
 D'^r,: &.C. 
 
 5. In Hiphil, the Segholate form of the feminine is derived from 
 the apocopated form of the masculine; as b'lcp'^, apoc. i^.p.'?: ^'^"'■ 
 n;bp"^. {<) 99. 1. e.) 
 
 § 12G. Verbs with siiffix-proiioiins. 
 I. General remarks. 
 
 1. The verbal suffixes, or accusative cases of pro- 
 nouns after transitive verbs, are parts of primitive pro- 
 nouns united with the verb so as to form with it one 
 worJ, Instead of being written separately as in the wes- 
 tern languages. (§63. 3. § C(>. 7.) 
 
 E. g. D.'^"^t2p thou hast killed them^ instead of Dn'nV^tji? &c. 
 
 This is the common mode of speaking' and writing the accusative 
 of personaj pronouns in Hebrew, instead of exhibiting the full form of 
 the pronoun by itself A trait very similar appears in the Greek 
 :iar/jj> fiov for nair,o f'«oiI&.c. and in the Latin cecum for ecce eian &c, 
 
 2. Most of the verbal-suffixes cause the tone of the 
 verb to which they are appended to be moved forward, 
 or towards the left. Hence a change in the vowel-points 
 of the verb is, in most cases, a thing Avhich follows of 
 course (§§ 54 — 58). In a few forms, there is also a 
 change of consonants in the sujformatives in order to ad- 
 mit the suffix; see below in no. 12. 
 
 This change of vowels in verbs, however, is not altogether con- 
 formed to the laws which regulate the vowel-changes in nouns. The 
 peculiarities of it are noted in the explanations which follow. 
 
 3. Inasmuch as the forms of all the conjugations term- 
 inate in the same manner as those of Kal, they also for t\\c 
 
 . most part take suffixes in precisely the same manner. 
 
 But from the nature of the case, neuter verbs and forms 
 
 of verbs with a passive or reflexive signification do not usually 
 
 receive suffixes, because the suffixes are almost alwavs in 
 
228 § 126. VERIiS WITH SUFFIX-rROXOUiVS. 
 
 the accusative, and of course follow transitive verbs. 
 Hence the conjugations Nlphal, Pual, Hophal, and Hlth- 
 pael, are very rarely found with suffixes. In the few 
 cases in which they do receive them, they are to be ta- 
 ken in an active sense, or else the suffix is employed to ex- 
 press a dative of advantage. 
 
 Piel differs a little from Kal in the mode of receiving suffixes ; see 
 below in IV note 14. 
 
 4. Forms of verbs in the first and second persons, do 
 not take suffixes of the saine persons ; because the recip- 
 rocal meaning which would thus be conveyed is expressed 
 by Hithpael &c. 
 
 5. The infinitive mood and participles may take suf- 
 fixes either like verbs or like nouns. But in the infinitive, 
 the noun-suffix is the subject, and the verbal-suffix the ob- 
 ject, of the action expressed by the verb; as '^IpS mypun- 
 ishment, i. e. that which I inflict; ^'Dlp^'p to punish me. 
 
 II. Farms of pronouns used as verhal-sujffixes. 
 
 6. Most of the verbal-suffixes, or fragments of primi- 
 tive pronouns, have at least three different forms, adapted 
 to the different ending or tense of the verb to which 
 they are appended. 
 
 (o) The most simple form of the suffixes is that in which they be- 
 gin with a consonant. In this shape they are appended, through all the 
 tenses and moods, to forms of verbs which end with a vowel. See note 1. 
 
 {h) To the simple form is prefixed a vowel of the A class, viz. 
 Qamets or Pattahh. In this shape they are appended to forms of 
 verbs which end with a consonant, in the praeter only. 
 
 (c) To the simple form is prefixed a vowel of the E class, viz. 
 Tseri or Seghol. In this shape they are appended to forms of verbs 
 which end with a consonant, in the future and imperative. See also 
 below in no. 9. c. 
 
 Note 1. The vowel which is thus prefixed to the suffixes, serves 
 to connect tbem more readily with the verb, and is therefore called 
 
§ 12G. VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 
 
 229 
 
 the union-vowel. When the verb ends in a vowel, that vowel ot" 
 course serves as a union-vowel. 
 
 7. Between the suffix and the union-vowel, there is sometimes in- 
 serted an epenthetic J\i'un (§ 43. 2. i), which is usually assimilated to 
 the first letter of the suffix and expressed in it by a Daghesh forte. 
 In poetry, the Nun is sometimes fully written. This class of sutlixes 
 is limited principally to the singular number of the pronouns, and 
 to the future tense of verbs. 
 
 8. The following tabic exhibits the suffixes as append- 
 ed to verbs endini^ with a vowel in all the moods and ten- 
 ses, — to those ending with a consonant in the praeter, — 
 and to those ending with a consonant in the future and 
 imperative. It exhibits also those suffixes which receive 
 an epenthetic Nun. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Praeter. 
 
 # 
 
 Future ^c. 
 
 1. 
 
 ^2- 
 
 ^3l 
 
 ^C 
 
 2 m. 
 
 <- -?- 
 
 •^ in pause '^-^ ^— . 
 
 ^&c. n^- 
 
 2f. 
 
 ^ '^. 
 
 V. ^..v^^" 
 
 ^.. V^ '^^. 
 
 3 m. 
 
 •inl T 
 
 •^.ril i 
 
 inl i 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nl 
 
 n- n_ 
 
 .nl 
 
 Pl.l 
 
 . i:t- 
 
 ^d1 
 
 ■r 
 
 idI. 
 
 2 m. 
 
 tDD 
 
 ^P. 
 
 d::. 
 
 2f. 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 3 m. 
 
 D poet.l^- 
 
 Q-Q-* poet.i'Ol 
 
 D^, Q--* poetitll 
 
 3 f. 
 
 1 
 
 F 
 
 1-' !--■ 
 uture with epenthetic JVta 
 
 I. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 1- V-'H^o' 
 
 r'^^al&c. 
 
 Sing. 3 m. 
 
 ^DlforlnDl,alsoi3 
 
 — 
 
 2 m. V nsl f 
 
 or!^3-&c. 
 30 
 
 - 3f. 
 
 n3_ for ri3_> 
 
S.'^O § 126. VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 
 
 9. JYotes on the table of sujffixes. (a) In a very few instances, the 
 future has the suffixes "'dI, &_, like the praeter ; and vice versaihe. 
 praeter very rarely takes suffixes like the future, viz. "'sl. and a few 
 times "^il. 
 
 (&) The original union-vowels would seem to be Qamets and 
 Tseri, which shorten into Pattahh and Seghol when the tone is re- 
 moved. Before the epenthetic Nun^ the two latter only are found. 
 So also in ""dI., which in pause becomes "^2 
 
 (c) The 2 pers. sing, fem Tj_ occurs but seldom ; the more com- 
 mon form in the praeter is ^_, and without the tone '^_*, as in the 
 future. The forms with paragogic Yodh occur often in the later 
 Tsalms. 
 
 {d) The suffixes SS, "JS, never take a union-vowel ; nor does the suf- 
 fix Tj or rrS, except in pause. The 3 pers. sing. fem. of the praeter also 
 takes suffixes without a union-vowel ; see below in no. IV note 2. a. 
 
 (e) The forms tqL, 'i^al, i^ol with a paragogic i , are common in 
 poetry (§ 50. 4. d). The form VZ is found as a suffix once Ex. 15: 5, 
 as in Ethiopic ; and also the form I3n_ Deut. 32: 26. 
 
 (y) Instead of the feminine suffix "J of the third person plural, the 
 masculine d appears after the sufformative ^, in order that the femin- 
 ine suthx may not be confounded with the paragogic '] ; as D!l\i:"l5"'2 
 Ex. 2: 17 for ^T^::'!^':!; D^l^^pN!! 1 Sam. 6: 10, &c. 
 
 {g) The suffixes with epenthetic Nun are occasionally found m 
 the impei'ative and rarely in the praeter ; see a above. In Chaldee, 
 an epenthetic Nun is always found before the suffixes of the future, 
 imperative, and infinitive. 
 
 (/i) Wherever there is a union-vowel, it uniformly takes the tone. 
 The suffixes Q3 and ]3 always draw down the tone upon themselves, 
 removing it two places if necessary, and are on that account denomin- 
 ated grave suffixes. The others never move the tone more than one 
 syllable, and are called light suffixes. 
 
 The suffix "^ or iriD, when appended to verbs ending in a consonant, 
 usually takes the tone, except in the % pers. sing. fem. of the praeter. 
 See below in no IV note 2. a. 
 
 (t) Some of these suffix- forms of pronouns arc derived from primi- 
 tive forms which are still in use ; as D, ], from dirr, "jt^ &.c. Others would 
 seem to come from forms which are now obsolete in Hebrew ; as T^ 
 fiom nSN = l^S^'^ like "SiN ; DD from CSN k.c. The form ^ still 
 appears in Ethiopic as a regular sufformative in the flexion of verbs. 
 
§126. VF.RBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOl'NS', '231 
 
 10. Vcrbal-sufllxcs arc also united, in all ihcir lorins. 
 with certain adverbs and interjections ; in wliich condition 
 tliej are in the nominaiicc case. See in § 156. 
 
 ///. Forms of verbs as adapted to su^xes. 
 
 1 1. It should be borne In mind, that all the vowel- 
 changes which appear in verbs with suflixcs, occur solely in 
 consequence of the removal ot" the tone-syllable which is 
 caused by the sufBx ; and that they are entirely conform- 
 ed to the laws of vowel-changes given in §§ 54 — 58. 
 
 12. In a few of the forms, a change is made in the 
 siifformative of the verb, in order to admit the suffix. 
 
 (ff) In the praeter 3 sing. fern. n_ is put for H— 
 
 _ 2 - - \^ — n or 'in 
 
 — 2 plur. m. in — Qn 
 The n of the 3 sing. fem. is changed into n because of the ac- 
 cession (§ 40. 2); and the Qamets is shortened to Pattahh because it 
 comes to stand in a mixed syllable. (§ 54. 2. c.) 
 
 Note. The 2 plur. fem. does not occur with suffixes. 
 
 (6) In the future and Imperative, instead of the fem- 
 inine sutTormative DD, appears the masculine ending 1 . 
 
 13. The following are the forms of the praeter adapt- 
 ed to receive suffixes. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Forms with suffix. Com. form. With suffix. Com.Jorm. 
 
 3 mas. Vjp Vjp Vjp com.'^yjp ^Vjp 
 
 3 fem. nVujp nVop hVl^p 
 
 2 mas. nVjp^ n^;jp n'^bp^ 'ifi^JDp. cn^Ji^p 
 
 2 fem. ^nVop nVjp nVop^ (not found) inVjp 
 
 1 com. ^"^.VJp ^rbhp i^Vop iD^bp 
 
232 ^126. VEIIBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUXS. 
 
 IV. NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Praeter of Kal. 
 
 Note 1. Third person singular masculine with suff. ■':";:t3p, without 
 suffix ^tJjP. The tone being moved forward one syllable by the suffix, 
 the Qamets of the first syllable is dropped (§ 56. 2); and the Pattahh 
 of the second syllable is lengthened, because it comes to stand in a pure 
 syllable, the final letter of the verb being united with the suffix 
 (§ 55. 1). Before DID and 'jD Pattahh remains, as DlD^Dp, because the 
 final radical continues in the same syllable ; but before "^ it is thrown 
 into another syllable and takes a vocal Sheva, as "^i^tSR' 
 
 Verbs final Tseri usually retain the Tseri before the suffix, as 
 a'iiib; but sometimes have Qamets, as iNb73 Esth. 7: 5. Verbs final 
 Hholem are very rarely found withsuff.xes. The formT'nbD"' occurs 
 Ps.l3:5, where Hholem is shortened into Qamets Hhateph.(§ 96.1.a.) 
 
 Note 2. Third person singular feminine "^ZT^tXyp., ^n^ Op, without 
 suffix ^bpp^- The removal of the tone causes the first vowel of the 
 ground-form to be dropped and the second to be revived and lengthen- 
 ed, as in note 1. For the n see above in no. 12. a. The vowel of the 
 third syllable is Qamets or Pattahh, according as the n is or is not 
 united with the suffix, as in note 1. 
 
 (a) It is a peculiarity of this feminine form, that although it ends 
 with a consonant, it yet takes suffixes beginning with a consonant, when 
 they make a syllable by themselves. Hence it takes but three with 
 a union-vowel, viz. ^--, D_, "J-, and these are shortened to Tj-, D_, 
 ■J- , because the tone is always on the last syllable of the verb and 
 not on the suffix. (§ 54. 3. Supra 9. t.) 
 
 (jj) This form of the verb is sometimes contracted, or it assimilates 
 to its final n the initial n of the suffixes ^r: and n of the 3 person 
 masculine and feminine. Thus we have both the full form inrijr/^". 
 Prov. 31: 12, and contracted ^nb?:^ 1 Sam. 1:21 &,c. With the fem- 
 inine suffix the contraction always takes place ; as nn T HJ* Jer.49:24 for 
 "•11^^ &c. T\ic final Ji in this last example would seem to be par- 
 agogic, as if the suflix were nt^. 
 
 Note 3. Second person singular masculine "ZrirUp, Tnbt^p., without 
 suflix ri^'^i^. The first vowel is dropped as in note 1 ; the second is 
 not affected. The Qamets of the sufformative serves as a union-vowel; 
 though it is sometimes dropped and the suffixes ■^;1. and i of the first 
 and third person singular appended to the form rirop. 
 
 Noti: 4. Second jjcrson singularfcmininc "':''r':rOp., "'zrbup, without 
 
§126. vr.UTlS WITH St'FFlX-PRONOUNS. 233 
 
 suffix nbcp or TilrDp. The vowels of the two first syllables are as in 
 note 3. This form changes its sufformative in order to admit suffixes 
 (see above in no. 12. »); and the lihircq which it takes serves as 
 a union-vowel. This is sometimes defcctivclj' written, as "^ir/il:'; Jer. 
 15: 10 &.C. In a few instances the sulTixes "^:1 and ^:1 of the 1 pers. 
 singular and plural, are appended to the form rirop, as Jer. 2 : 27. 
 Josh. 2: 17. Cant. 5:9. 
 
 NoTF. 5. The remaininc;' forms of the praetor, when adapted to re- 
 ceive suthxes (no. 13), all end in a vowel, and of course take suffixes 
 witM^it a union-vowel. The changes of their vowels are the same as 
 those of the preceding forms, which are explained above. 
 Jnjinitivc of KaL 
 Note 6. The infinitive form "::Dp (-tJp) 1*^ treated as a Segholate 
 noun in respect to suffixes, <:>kio2r them somewhat after the analogy 
 of the form in Dec. ^ I-^'?- ^ luis, ground-form b'lsp, with suffix "'bl^p 
 &c. The final vowel of the ground-form is for the most part thrown 
 back to the first radical (§ 57), and is in all cases shortened into eith- 
 er Qibbuts or Qamets Hhateph, because the tone is removed from it 
 by the suffix. Before Dp., Ip, and sometimes Tj, the vowel remains in 
 the final syllable, although it is shortened; as DpbiriN Gen. 3:5 &c. But 
 in these latter cases also, the vowel is sometimes thrown back ; as 
 Dpnpi; Deut. 27:4; □pi:iip.. and '^"ixp Lev. 23: 22. 
 
 NoTK 7. Verbs .%m gufiural take a composite Sheva (,. ) under 
 the guttural when the vowel of the ground-form is thrown back, in- 
 stead of the usual simple Sheva, as Sns, """inz mr/ choosing Ezek.20: 
 5 ; -'"N. a^~w\ their love Hos. 9 : 10. Before ap and p., they take 
 the corresponding short vowel, viz. Qamets Hhateph, as DppN?j Is. 
 30: 12 ; and so Dp.^-jp^ Deut. 20: 2 with Resh. 
 
 The forms DpNr^o Gen. 32: 20 and Dpp';2;i2 Am. 5: 11 are anoma- 
 lous, and stand for PpN:!i"3 and pppljz. 
 
 Note 8. The infinitive with Pattahh (-tip) retains its form before 
 2p and ]D, but before other suffixes it takes the form ^Dp and some- 
 times Vcp ; as y.n, ap::n Is. 30 : 18 &c. yj^s, P>-p2 'Am. l : 13 &c. 
 i-p.-), ^s'-i^'.l Ezek. 25: 6 &,c. 
 
 N. B. The feminine forms of the infinitive with a furtive vowel, 
 are treated as feminine Segholates of Dec. XIII; as rTipn, ""r'^;-^ &,c. ' 
 
 Future of KuL 
 Note 9. In futures with Hliolem and Tscri^ all those persons which 
 end in a consonant drop the final vowel of the verb (like nouns in 
 
234 § 126. VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 
 
 Dec. VII), and receive suffixes with a union-vowel (no. 6. c) ; as 
 Vl^p-;, with suffix *'?|t3p*; ; also >\'1^Z, C?.?il^ Josh. 23: 5 &c. Before 
 'Tj, DD, and "jS, however, final Hholem and final Tseri are shortened 
 into Qamets Hhateph and Seghol, and in that shape retained; as 
 ?^^iCN Is. 42: 6 ; "^^riN. Jer. 38: 16 and often. 
 
 Verbs with future Paitahh retain the Pattahh in the preceding 
 cases, and prolong it into Qamets before those suffixes which have a 
 union-vowel ; because the final consonant of the verb is then thrown 
 into another syllable ; as DtJ^b^ &.C. (§ 55. 1.) So also the futures of 
 verbs i<b. (§ 121.1. c.) 
 
 Note 10. All the persons that end in a vowel, viz. in ^ or "'_ (includ- 
 ing the 2 and 3 pers. plur. fem. as stated above in no. 12. 6), receive 
 suffixes of course without a union-vowel (no. 6. a); as d^bSNn, 
 llnVSNn Lev. 7: 24, where the Shureq is defectively written by Q,ib- 
 buts.'(§21. 18.) 
 
 The 3 pers. plur. masc. sometimes takes the suffixes after a para- 
 gogic Nun (§ 95. 1. «), but without a union-vowel ; as '^33 Nip"] Prov. 
 1:28 (§ 21. 18); nnshni':; Jer. 5 : 22. With ^^ twice ^3nn-i;f^ Is. 
 60: 7, 10. 
 
 Imperative ofKal. 
 
 Note 11. The 2 pers. sing. masc. with Hholem (b'l3p) imitates the 
 infinitive. The other forms "'bup, ^btop, and fem. nbt:p (no. 12. 6), 
 remain unchanged and take suffixes beginning with a consonant. 
 
 Note 12. Imperatives with Pattahh^ like the future, retain the 
 Pattahh and prolong it before those suffixes which have a union-vow- 
 el ; as ? 3^.73 oj /tear we. So plural "^3 ni'73\ij /tear ye me ; '^3nri<UJ ask ye 
 me Is. 45: 11. See note 9 above, and compare note 2. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Note 13. All the participles imitate nouns in their mode of re- 
 ceiving suffixes, and the declensions to which they respectively belong 
 are noted in Par. XX. 
 
 Piel 
 
 Note 14. The final Tseri of Piel falls away before suffixes with a 
 union-vowel, as in the future of Kal. Before •:), DD, "j^, it is general- 
 ly (not always) shortened into Seghol or Hhireq parvum ; as praeter 
 "Tj^inp Deut. 30: 3 ; infinitive D553r}1 Is. 30: 18 ; D5t:-)C Is. 1: 14; fu- 
 ture '^b^HN Ezek. 28: 16; Dp.i:73NN Job 16: 5; also t^nVii^N Gen. 31: 
 27. Sometimes the Tseri under Resh is changed into Pattahh, as 
 r.D^T. Deut. 2: 7 kc. 
 
§ 12G. VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 235 
 
 Whenever Pattahh is adopted in the tinal sylhihlc on account of a 
 guttural, it remains before the suffixes " &c. as '^'on') Deut. 13: 10. 
 
 Note. 15. Foe/, Palely and Pllel imitate Piel, their first vowel bo- 
 in<<- immutable, and their final one the same as that of Piel. The same 
 is true of all forms which have the same final vowels in the same cir- 
 cumstances. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 NoTP IG. In the future and imperative, the suffixes are appended 
 (0 the regular forms, and not to those which are apocopated. 
 
 A few forms seem to come from the apocopated future ; viz. 
 ?i:Vri'2 1 Sam. 17:25, Ps. 65: 10 for ^1i^TV'<2 ; ^n.^'DNr? Job 20: 26 for 
 Jinr'^DiNn (§ 60. 5) ; U^?'ij^ Is. 35: 4 for a3>p'i;i"». This is perhaps 
 the efl'ect of Syriasm. 
 
 § 1 26 a. Verbs Tib with suffixes. 
 
 1. In all the forms of verbs Ttb which end in n, this letter and the 
 preceding vowel fall away before suffixes. The verb thus apoco- 
 pated takes or omits a union-vowel before the suffix according to its 
 termination, as in regular verbs. 
 
 2. In the 3 person sing. fem. the suffixes are attached to the D of 
 the verb, after the analogy of regular verbs (§ 126. IV note 2). 
 The tone also remains upon the final syllable of the verb. For the 
 form liT^y with suffix of the 3 pers. masculine, see § 120. IV note 2.b. 
 
 3. The sufTormative n of the 3 pers. plural, before the suffix m, is 
 very often defectively written; as iri;ri'. (§ 21. 18.) 
 
 4. In the forms '7";r!i;2 Ezck. 16:31 and D::'^ni-\Tri Ezek. 6: 8, 
 which are infinitives ofKal and Niphal with noun-suffixes, the suffixes 
 are those o{ plural nouns, which have jirobably been appended by 
 mistake. 
 
 5. In these verbs, Yodh is sometimes inserted between the suffix 
 and the union-vowel Tseri or Seghol; as Piel imper. 'irT'^n Hab. 3: 2 ; 
 fut. i^^c^^ Ps. 140: 10; Hiphil imper. "^:^sn 1 K. 20: 35; future 
 G!n*'i<s:N Deut. 32 : 26 from tiNs. This would seem rather to be a 
 restoration of the original radical Yodh, as in pause. (§ 123. I. /;.) 
 
 Note. The paradigm (XXII) exhibits only some of those forins 
 which are of the ,most frequent occurrence. It is, however, sulli- 
 ciently copious to guide the learner, and enable him to reduce to 
 the same general principles any other forms which may occur. 
 
236 §127. Par. I. Regular verbs. (§§96—100.) 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Praet. 3 m. 
 
 yjp^ 
 
 12p^ 
 
 V5^ 
 
 ^'^-P3. 
 
 3 f. 
 
 T :*iT 
 
 T : It 
 
 T :iT 
 
 nVjpD 
 
 2 m. 
 
 rhbp 
 
 -r • -l-r 
 
 
 T I T 
 
 nbbpq 
 
 2 f. 
 
 ^iV^-B 
 
 ; ; - T 
 
 nVb^^ 
 
 nbppD 
 
 1. 
 
 '#B 
 
 ^n^pD 
 
 ^nVS-^ 
 
 ^nbppD 
 
 PL 3. 
 
 ^Voj? 
 
 i^n^ 
 
 ^*^'^,: 
 
 •^VopD 
 
 2 m. 
 
 DnVoj? 
 
 sniniD 
 
 anbp"^ 
 
 cnVjpD 
 
 2 i: 
 
 t^.V^-P. 
 
 in'ins 
 
 
 in'ppp: 
 
 1. 
 
 ^:hhp_^ 
 
 13^25 
 
 ■^Dyf; 
 
 ^^yops 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 br^Z 
 
 ^ins 
 
 
 •jpD,V"jpn 
 
 const. 
 
 Vl^P 
 
 ^733 
 
 
 Vqpn 
 
 Fut. 3 m. 
 
 '^'"^K^ 
 
 "^-^.? 
 
 
 ^4^.p: 
 
 3 f. 
 
 V'Jpn 
 
 IBIDH 
 
 
 -?p^ 
 
 2 m. 
 
 Vbp.ri 
 
 "isin 
 
 
 -'P.P,^ 
 
 2f. 
 
 'V^P.^i 
 
 ^"i:nin 
 
 
 '^^.tifn 
 
 1. 
 
 pLipfij. 
 
 "^ii^. 
 
 
 yjp^jj. 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 '^^^p.'! 
 
 ^lai^ 
 
 
 "^^^f.^ 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nDV^jprn 
 
 riDnlbn 
 
 
 riD^bj^n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 "^^'"^p.^. 
 
 ^^iDpn 
 
 
 
 2 f. 
 
 riDVdpn 
 
 JiDil^jn 
 
 
 riD^bpri 
 
 1. 
 
 ^''^P.^ 
 
 '^^-^;. 
 
 «, 
 
 '^'^.p3 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Imp. ni. 
 
 V-op. 
 
 ^ns 
 
 
 ^=?.p^. 
 
 f. 
 
 'V^P 
 
 ''l^!^ 
 
 
 ''V^p.n 
 
 PI. m. 
 
 ^^dp 
 
 ^^nD 
 
 
 :'iT • 
 
 f. 
 
 nDVi5p 
 
 n3^23 
 
 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 -45.V 
 
 'ins 
 
 ^=1=: 
 
 5^^P^ 
 
 pass. 
 
 ^vop 
 
 
 
 
§ 1'27. Par. I. Regydur verbs. (§§ 96—100.) 237 
 
 rici. 
 
 Pual. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Hophiil. 
 
 llilhpacl. 
 
 -'^p 
 
 -^P._ 
 
 '^''^pn 
 
 -'^P.'^. 
 
 ^'^.P-H" 
 
 nrjp 
 
 nVjp 
 
 ni:/bpn 
 
 nrjpn 
 
 nrjprin 
 
 ^. 
 
 rrjp_ 
 
 r^jpn 
 
 nV^ispn 
 
 n'^bpnn 
 
 r!:t2R 
 
 n'rjp^ 
 
 r'rjpn 
 
 rropn 
 
 inViopnn 
 
 "•n^bp 
 
 ■"^V^P. 
 
 ^nV^pn 
 
 'in^bpn 
 
 Tirjp.nn 
 
 iVl?!? 
 
 ^^"^.P.. 
 
 "i^'ppn 
 
 ■>^'^.pr[ 
 
 Vpiop.nn 
 
 onb-jp. 
 
 nnr^P.' 
 
 cn'r^pn 
 
 tn^.ppH 
 
 Driyjp_nn 
 
 "jn^jp 
 
 t^.V^P, 
 
 ^nbppn 
 
 ]nVjpn 
 
 '{n':?t:p_nn 
 
 ■^Drjp 
 
 ID'b^Sp 
 
 iD^bpn 
 
 ID^r^ppn 
 
 ^]^^bp_rirr 
 
 y-jp. 
 
 !rbp^^ 
 
 -'■^'l 
 
 i^"-Rn 
 
 
 ^4^?- 
 
 -■^P. 
 
 5^'PP^i 
 
 
 ^tp_pnn 
 
 '^^. 
 
 V^R"! 
 
 ^''^P.l 
 
 ^■^-p; 
 
 <"^.p-n'. 
 
 ^'^l^, 
 
 ^LDpn 
 
 ^''■^ph 
 
 -PP^i 
 
 Vu!_p_nn 
 
 ^'^}.^. 
 
 -■^P.n 
 
 ^'■^pri 
 
 Vopn 
 
 ^■jpnn 
 
 ■•V^p-n 
 
 '-.^p'f^ 
 
 ^V'^P.^ 
 
 ''Tqpn 
 
 ''prqpnn 
 
 ^'ap_« 
 
 ^'^-PM 
 
 ^''^p>! 
 
 i^iipwy 
 
 VLpp_rfi< 
 
 ^h'^}_\ 
 
 ^-'^p'' 
 
 ^'^"^p.- 
 
 ^^p: 
 
 ib'LDpn^ 
 
 n5T^p_n 
 
 norjpn 
 
 riD^bpn 
 
 n:Vbpn 
 
 nD^bpnn 
 
 V!:-jp_n 
 
 •^^jpn 
 
 ^b^bpn 
 
 ^Vopn 
 
 lijDp,^!! 
 
 n:^^^p_n 
 
 n^V^pn 
 
 riDbbpn 
 
 
 riDbbpnn 
 
 
 '-^S 
 
 ^''^P^- 
 
 -"^p? 
 
 -"^.P-H? 
 
 ^Cp"' 
 
 ^^.?- 
 
 
 ^'^.P" 
 
 
 yjpnn 
 
 'V^p- 
 
 
 "'V'^P.^ 
 
 
 ''VL3p_J^h- 
 
 ^V-jp 
 
 
 V^'^bph 
 
 
 ■^Vjpj-in 
 
 ^^.^.p- 
 
 
 
 
 n]T^_pnn 
 
 '"■^.F-^. 
 
 
 y-jp^ 
 
 3U 
 
 yOp53 
 
 ^'^.P-H^. 
 
238 §\^7. Par.}]. Verbs Peg^dtural. (^§102,103.) 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Praet.3 m. 
 
 ni2y 
 
 
 ^i^y: 
 
 Ttyt: 
 
 itts'n 
 
 3f. 
 
 ■r ; IT 
 
 
 n^^^r-D 
 
 ni'>t:?n 
 
 nn^3?n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 n"ii23? 
 
 
 n"ib3?3 
 
 nnr!:;n 
 
 n'lb^-n 
 
 2 f. 
 
 nn^5? 
 
 
 n^ias?: 
 
 n"i^yn 
 
 n^i^jpn 
 
 1. 
 
 . . - y; 
 
 
 '^n'lb)?^ 
 
 •^nibs^n 
 
 '^nib^'n 
 
 PI. 3. 
 
 ^"I^S? 
 
 
 "^112^2 
 
 ^"i^byn 
 
 iit)3?n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 Dnn^3? 
 
 
 tr^ltiy: 
 
 cn^i^yn 
 
 on^a^Ti 
 
 2 f. 
 
 ]^A^Z 
 
 
 1^.1^-?.?. 
 
 i^."^.?.n. 
 
 ' ■•• ; - r; t 
 
 1. 
 
 "^my 
 
 
 ''^I'^.??. 
 
 
 ; r; -r 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 ^1^3? 
 
 
 
 ^^^sj^n 
 
 l^3?n 
 
 const. 
 
 i'^^:?^ 
 
 
 T^^^n 
 
 i^i2>:p_ 
 
 
 Fut. 3 m. 
 
 ^'i::?^ 
 
 pin-'. 
 
 itt:?^ 
 
 Tl^^"^ 
 
 n:2>"^ 
 
 3 f. 
 
 ii2ir\_ pmn 
 
 "i^3?n 
 
 l^^yn 
 
 'i^^-n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ""^?n f 
 
 JTnn 
 
 *it2>-n 
 
 ^'^^DJn 
 
 1:2 >'n 
 
 2f. 
 
 •''I'qyn ^p.tnn 
 
 '^'itjs^n 
 
 ■^l^ri^^n 
 
 *«"i:a>'n 
 
 1. 
 
 ""^?>^ i 
 
 ^tn^^ 
 
 'T^5?>{ 
 
 n^52:?j{ 
 
 ^^y.s* 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 iiny^ •! 
 
 pTH'' 
 
 ^112T 
 
 iTa:;?^ 
 
 11^5?^ 
 
 3 f. nD'i'D>"n HJp.tnn ri5^b:?n ?in^.?.^- ♦^n^?.'^! 
 
 2 m. 'Ti's:^n ^pmn '^"i^.^'n ^"^^^n i"i^.>;r; 
 
 2f. n]"i55?r n]pTnn Mj'b^ri. 5i5"i^j?.n riD-i^Dyn 
 
 1. 'iiz:?: pTHD "i^PD ^^n>'3 n52>*: 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
 
 
 
 ■T?.?- 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 '^"^?. 
 
 pm 
 
 
 "?>".n 
 
 f. 
 
 ^1^:? 
 
 •'pTH 
 
 '^^^^-n 
 
 ^"i'^^::n 
 
 Pl.m. 
 
 ''Mt::? 
 
 ^pTH 
 
 ^I'^rn 
 
 iTr^-n 
 
 f. 
 
 ^rt^?. 
 
 riDptn 
 
 riD^tiyn 
 
 riD^ibi^n 
 
 Part. 'lt^7 iri>-3 1^'2^-ti ":^::?ti 
 
§ 127. Par. III. Verbs Ayingvtiural, (§ 104.) 239 
 
 Kal. Picl. Piel. Fual. Hithpael. 
 
 Praet 3 m. pJ-T ^n3 'HIS T^^ '^l^nn 
 
 3 f. np^:^T n^^n.D n::-|S niD-lb niD-isnn 
 
 2 m. rp^T rVm nDns rDi'ii r^^nsnn 
 
 2 f. rp_T rVnD r^n_s rina rii-iarin 
 
 ^- 'i"^.pl"l ^'^^r^. ^^??^. '^r^.i^ "^^p.i^nn 
 
 PI. 3. np:?T V^n3 '^--)2 "^D-ia "iDninn 
 
 2 f- i^p.^j. i^^n] ir.^.na )r]y."i2 iriSisnn 
 
 1. ^,:p^>*T iD^h] '13:513 ^3512 "isDnann 
 
 Inf. abs. p^'T 
 
 const. p'T !:n3 "^na 'Tjnin '^"lann 
 
 Fut. 3 m. ty-^ briD'^ '^12'^ 'nib'^ 
 
 3 f. p^Tn ^mn 'rj-ian '^nnn '^nann 
 
 2 m. pptn irmn Tjnnn 'rj-ibn *T)n3nn 
 
 2 f. ''pi^.Tn ''Vmn ''^Dinn "^annn "^lann 
 
 1- F^'i^":^. ^*7.^^. X}?J^. T^"^^. X^rp.^, 
 
 PI. 3 m. ipi^'o ^Vnr ^::iD^ -i^-ip^ '^^"1-n"' 
 
 3 f. njp|:TFi r;]!:n3r r;:Dnbr. rijDnin nDiiarin 
 2 m. 'ip^Tn "i^nDn "iDnnn ^sn'nn i^nann 
 2 f. riDpy-n Mjbmn injrnan nnsnbn n:sn2nn 
 1. p"T3 ':?n]3 ^-ini 'nnnD "rinana 
 
 Fm^ aj9oc. has no distinct form here. 
 
 Imp. m. p?7 hn}_ 'Tiin X}rFP. 
 
 ^- ^}p.i ^^p}?- ^^?!t "^^"is^in 
 
 PI. m. ip^7 ibnD i^r-ia ^r;"i2nn 
 
 f. n5p77 nDVriD n::)n2 njDi^nn 
 
 Part. p^T ^Hj^. rf}212^ '^j-JDXD ""l.^nQ 
 
240 § 127 
 
 Par. IV. Verbs 
 
 Larnedh guttural. 
 
 (§105.) 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Piel. 
 
 Praet. 3 m. 
 
 yM 
 
 — • m 
 
 5?52d 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nyqiD 
 
 t]yn;d^. 
 
 n:?sd 
 
 2 m. 
 
 
 ris^bipD 
 
 
 2f. 
 
 • — — T 
 
 Tifiypz 
 
 nybd 
 
 1. 
 
 
 •^nybii: 
 
 'in^jad 
 
 PL 3. 
 
 • It 
 
 li^^qia 
 
 ^i'^6 
 
 2 m. 
 
 tsnippp 
 
 any^^pD 
 
 s:n5?i2d 
 
 2f. 
 
 1^.3!^P 
 
 ]T)ppp2 
 
 •jnysd 
 
 1. 
 
 ^D:?bD 
 
 '^IDS'MD 
 
 1]5?|p 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 ;pi^D 
 
 
 
 const. 
 
 :?bp 
 
 :?^:sn 
 
 ^^;^" 
 
 Fut. 3 m. 
 
 3?M^ 
 
 ~ T • 
 
 yad^ 
 
 3f. 
 
 ^i2m 
 
 
 PMn 
 
 2 m. 
 
 >'12pT) 
 
 5'Mn 
 
 :?5Ddn 
 
 2f. 
 
 *i;;53idn 
 
 • ; It » 
 
 ''^^.dn 
 
 1. 
 
 :?t:-j:j<^ 
 
 yl2-JD>5, 
 
 ^^dvS5 
 
 PL 3 m. 
 
 ^:?M^ 
 
 t It • 
 
 ^:?52d^* 
 
 3f. 
 
 n5:;?2pr] 
 
 
 np^Sdn 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ^;:?^;jDn 
 
 ; It • 
 
 ^i^adn 
 
 2f. 
 
 r^l'^h'm 
 
 riD5?Mn 
 
 nrridn 
 
 1. 
 
 i^tspD 
 
 T ' 
 
 i?MD 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 :p:ap ■ 
 
 3?^"dn 
 
 :P2d 
 
 f. 
 
 ^^'PP 
 
 ^^p;^n 
 
 *.3?52d 
 
 PL m.^ 
 
 •=13?^' 
 
 ; It • 
 
 i:?:2d 
 
 f. 
 
 JiD^ad 
 
 ■ n3>;b9n 
 
 n5>;tDd 
 
 Part, act. 
 
 ^?"^ 
 
 
 :priEi!3 
 
 pass. 
 
 
 
 
Par. IV. Verbs v' cultural. Par.V. Verbs h'b. (§ 107.) 241 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Hithpael. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 
 
 (as verbs Pe guttural) 
 
 r^pn 
 
 :^sndn 
 
 
 
 y^i2d''_ 
 
 y:2rid': 
 
 b'Dii'^ 
 
 -l^Nf"* 
 
 r^'an 
 
 DJ^sndn 
 
 ^3N:'n 
 
 n^_Ntn 
 
 r^dn 
 
 yandn 
 
 tSwyn 
 
 -i^>i'n 
 
 "^Thm 
 
 ^;:?2ndn 
 
 *'i>^^jn 
 
 n^w^^'n 
 
 r^-jiwx 
 
 :?rrd&t 
 
 ^?^ 
 
 n^Lx 
 
 ^mp::^ 
 
 ^•snd'] 
 
 ^!:D.s'' 
 
 n^.i^'^ 
 
 112712137) 
 
 n3:??3ndn 
 
 nDbbfi^n 
 
 nni:Ni'n 
 
 ^r^bdn 
 
 ^3?andn 
 
 ii?s«n 
 
 mswNi'n 
 
 r>27hm 
 
 n:3?5:ndn 
 
 n3^5^5■Fl 
 
 n3n?2wHn 
 
 rad] 
 
 >'2nd3 ! 
 
 " "' •• • 1 
 
 b?>V3 
 
 * 
 
 i^>v: 
 
 ^^vi ! 
 
 
 3?Mn 
 
 y:2ndn 
 
 (as Pe guttural) 
 
 '^r^uH 
 
 '^i^sndn 
 
 
 
 'ip'^ripn 
 
 ^-ardn 
 
 
 
 ri3>;bdn 
 
 nD:?s_ndn 
 
 
 
 /^^dn 
 
 ysrdn 
 
 
 
 32f 
 
242 
 
 § 127. Par.VL Verbs 
 
 ^e . C/ass I. (§ 
 
 109.) 
 
 ^ Par. VII. ^S. 
 ^C/. II. (§110.) 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Praet. 
 
 Dd'^ 
 
 y^'v 
 
 D'^din 
 
 nd^n 
 
 dD"^ 
 
 3 f. 
 
 (regular] 
 
 ri2m 
 
 nn^b'in 
 
 nnpin 
 
 (regular) 
 
 2 m. 
 
 
 nrdiD 
 
 nnibin 
 
 snnb^n 
 
 
 2 f. 
 
 
 nnipi3 
 
 nndin 
 
 nsd^n 
 
 
 1. 
 
 
 '^nnb'iD 
 
 '^nndin 
 
 'Tinb'in 
 
 
 Pi. 3. 
 
 
 'intJ'iD 
 
 ^n-'din 
 
 ^nir^n 
 
 
 2 m. 
 
 
 anndia 
 
 Dnndin 
 
 annd^n 
 
 
 2f. 
 
 
 •jrip/djij 
 
 irindin 
 
 innp^n 
 
 
 1. 
 
 
 ^:n;diD 
 
 ^Dn-jiin 
 
 ^Dnd^n 
 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 -r 
 
 
 
 
 din*^ 
 
 const 
 
 • ^r"^ 
 
 2'^\n 
 
 n^din 
 
 n-L:^n 
 
 dn*' 
 
 Fut. 
 
 2'j:^ 
 
 ti'^^^ 
 
 n'^dv 
 
 ni::v 
 
 dn^^ 
 
 3f. 
 
 n-iijn 
 
 DU3'in 
 
 n^'j3''in 
 
 nd^n 
 
 dn^n 
 
 2 ffl. 
 
 Siijn 
 
 ;:t3^n 
 
 y-dt'iv) 
 
 nd^n 
 
 dn'^n 
 
 2f. 
 
 •^n"j:n 
 
 •^nd^^n 
 
 ^n^din 
 
 '^3D'^n 
 
 ■^dn^n 
 
 1. 
 
 nwD5^_ 
 
 n-^u^w^ 
 
 D'^dvx 
 
 nd^&{ 
 
 dn\x 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 ■^-P?. 
 
 : IT • 
 
 ^n^b'i^ 
 
 "indi^ 
 
 rc:2^^ 
 
 3f. r 
 
 iDiiiin 
 
 riDndin 
 
 riDndin 
 
 HDnD'in 
 
 nsdn^n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ^Ddn 
 
 ; IT • 
 
 ^n^pin 
 
 ^rd^n 
 
 •idn^n 
 
 2 f. ri3D-dn 
 
 "^^^^'l^ 
 
 riDndin 
 
 n]:2d>n 
 
 nrd^'^n 
 
 1. 
 
 nd] 
 
 ^'^V. 
 
 n^m 
 
 1 
 
 dn-^D 
 
 i M^ apoi 
 
 
 
 nipr 
 
 1 
 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 ^1? 
 
 ndin 
 
 n-i^in 
 
 
 tijn^ 
 
 f. 
 
 '^np 
 
 ^nd^n 
 
 ■^n-'bin 
 
 
 (regular) 
 
 PI. m. 
 
 ^nd 
 
 : It • 
 
 ^nvpin 
 
 
 
 f. 
 
 ri3n-d 
 
 M^nb^^n 
 
 n^ndin 
 
 1 
 
 .. 
 
 Part. Ddi*^ DUiiD IS^dltJ adi53 
 
 dn"^ 
 
Par.VIII.^c 
 
 c/.iii.(§in.) 
 
 ^'v:(^^^ ^^^^^^ Par. X. re rfc .]g^. (§ § 113,114.) 243 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 '^^?^'. 
 
 p--: 
 
 ^D3 
 
 ujro 
 
 u:^!)- 
 
 ;!33n 
 
 -r • •• 
 
 (regular) 
 
 (regular) 
 
 niriro 
 
 nr[:\^.n 
 
 nd^n 
 
 rnb-'H 
 
 
 
 nu::n3 
 
 ntri^n 
 
 n^rin 
 
 f^P."^_'~. 
 
 
 
 ntjy 
 
 np^n 
 
 nuJMn 
 
 '^nrj-'n 
 
 
 
 ''^?33 
 
 \"ip3n 
 
 Tiujsn 
 
 nz'^b'^n 
 
 
 
 ^M 
 
 •iD^sn 
 
 "^^^n 
 
 anTJ'^n 
 
 
 
 QnM 
 
 snD^n 
 
 anuisn 
 
 irq-j^n 
 
 
 
 •jnp^D 
 
 ind^n 
 
 ■jnp^n 
 
 i3D;j^n 
 
 
 
 ^D'dB: 
 
 i3p\n 
 
 I3p_n 
 
 
 
 ^iS3 
 
 ©:iDn 
 
 tti'^^n 
 
 irir»n 
 
 n'^'j^n 
 
 ^It.^^. 
 
 ySD 
 
 
 ta'^^ri 
 
 
 ^'''^^1 
 
 p^: 
 
 Ve- 
 
 d^r 
 
 m^ 
 
 m^ 
 
 2^"L:;n 
 
 p2n 
 
 Vsn 
 
 (regular 
 
 ) ^'^^ri 
 
 liiyn 
 
 s'^-j^n 
 
 psn 
 
 Ve?i 
 
 
 •i!:v>n 
 
 iD^n 
 
 ^2^b^r\ 
 
 •'jpsn 
 
 ^p£n 
 
 
 ^ii:\^n 
 
 ^tm 
 
 n^'D'^iit. 
 
 P^^":^. 
 
 VifwX 
 
 
 i!:"^5vS 
 
 •d5i< 
 
 »^nvj^n 
 
 ^?V. 
 
 iVe^ 
 
 
 vd^B^ 
 
 ^^5"^' 
 
 nD::b^i 
 
 riDj-isn 
 
 HD^ED 
 
 
 nj-dBn 
 
 HDUJBn 
 
 ^n'^a'^n 
 
 ^p2n 
 
 iVsn 
 
 
 vd-'in 
 
 vdr*n 
 
 r;:2b^n 
 
 riDpifn 
 
 riD^En 
 
 
 riDdBn 
 
 r;:dBn 
 
 n'^'j'^D 
 
 F-^. 
 
 Vs: 
 
 
 ^'^^ 
 
 d^D 
 
 SU"'"' 
 
 p^'.i 
 
 u;a^ 
 
 Du);n 
 
 Fl 
 
 i's^. 
 
 D:i2n 
 
 is^ri 
 
 
 • ''n'^q^'n 
 
 (regular) 
 
 (regular) 
 
 (regular) 
 
 •^p^^n 
 
 
 i2'^"j''n 
 
 
 
 
 VJ3^5n 
 
 
 n:zb;n 
 
 
 
 
 riDmn 
 
 
 ^^P^?. 
 
 pSV 
 
 ^DID 
 
 W 
 
 U:-'553 
 
 &j12 
 
244 
 
 § 127. Par. XI. Ferbs :?y. (§§ 115, 116.) 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Praet. 3 m. 
 3 f. 
 2 m. 
 2f. 
 1. 
 PI. 3. 
 2 m. 
 2f. 
 1. 
 
 
 DnispD 
 •jni^ipD 
 
 nsbn 
 ni3pn 
 nispri 
 
 ■jnispn 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 
 nino 
 
 
 
 const. 
 
 
 no 
 
 npn 
 
 npn 
 
 Fut. 3 m. 
 
 no'' 
 
 chaid. no"^ 
 
 no-i 
 
 nD'' 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nbn 
 
 non 
 
 non 
 
 non 
 
 2 m. 
 
 nbn 
 
 non 
 
 non 
 
 non 
 
 2 i: 
 
 • T 
 
 •'npn 
 
 ^:ipn 
 
 ^nbn 
 
 ]. 
 
 T 
 
 novvj. 
 
 =1^*^. 
 
 no&< 
 
 •' T 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 ^no'' 
 
 ^no^ 
 
 ^nb"^ 
 
 ^nb 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nraon 
 
 n^non 
 
 HD-'SOn 
 
 n3^non 
 
 2 m. 
 
 iDon 
 
 ^npn 
 
 "inpn 
 
 ^nbn 
 
 2f. 
 
 n3^2Dn 
 
 nanon 
 
 HD^non 
 
 nD^non 
 
 1. 
 
 noD 
 
 noD 
 
 npD 
 
 npD 
 
 i^wi. com;c?'n'x)e. 
 
 ^«?\i 
 
 
 
 ip.\! 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 
 no 
 
 non 
 
 non 
 
 f. 
 
 
 ^no 
 
 ^nbn 
 
 '^nbn 
 
 PI. m. 
 
 
 •inb 
 
 ^nbn 
 
 •inbn 
 
 f. 
 
 r 
 
 r^.? 
 
 nrlpn 
 
 nrnon 
 
 T ■.• • -J 
 
 Part. 
 
 nno 
 
 nOD 
 
 noa 
 
§127. Par. XI. Fcrbs:^y. (§§115,116.) 
 
 24; 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Pool. 
 
 Poal. 
 
 Filpel. 
 
 Pulpal. 
 
 noin 
 
 23 ID 
 
 2210 
 
 2C2p 
 
 2020 
 
 nsbin 
 
 nnriiD 
 
 712210 
 
 T • 
 
 n2p2p 
 
 n2020 
 
 nirDin 
 
 rnbiD 
 
 rpbio 
 
 r2b20 
 
 r2020 
 
 nizp^n 
 
 nnniD 
 
 r22l0 
 
 r202p 
 
 r2020 
 
 TllZD^n 
 
 ■^rzziD 
 
 T2bl0 
 
 ''npbpp 
 
 ^rpbpp 
 
 "iib^n 
 
 "izpiD 
 
 1221*0 
 
 12020 
 
 12020 
 
 cniso^n 
 
 -f;.^.^'^^ 
 
 Cr22l0 
 
 nr2p20 
 
 or 2020 
 
 ■jnizp^n 
 
 ir.^'^''^ 
 
 l^.r-"!^ 
 
 11^2020 
 
 '|r2p20 
 
 ^Dizpin 
 
 IDZbiD 
 
 1:2210 
 
 132020 
 
 132020 
 
 ::p^n 
 
 ::niD 
 
 2210 
 
 2020 
 
 2020 
 
 npr 
 
 22^Z] 
 
 22_10"] 
 
 2020^ 
 
 2p20'] 
 
 npw 
 
 nnicn 
 
 22_ion 
 
 2p2pri 
 
 2p20n 
 
 spin 
 
 nniori 
 
 22l0ri 
 
 2p2pn 
 
 2p20n 
 
 i^bin 
 
 "•riqiDn 
 
 '^pqion 
 
 ''202pn 
 
 ^2p20n 
 
 nD\>< 
 
 ::3iCwX 
 
 22_iDji. 
 
 2p2pw>«. 
 
 2p2pW 
 
 isbi-^ 
 
 12310'] 
 
 12210^' 
 
 1202P"] 
 
 12020^ 
 
 
 -:33iDn 
 
 n]22icn 
 
 n52p2pn 
 
 n32p2on 
 
 ispin 
 
 1231 on 
 
 1221011 
 
 I2p2pri 
 
 12020n 
 
 HD'^zpin 
 
 n322icn 
 
 r;]22ion 
 
 in32b2pn 
 
 ri32p2pn 
 
 npi3 
 
 2210] 
 
 2210: 
 
 20203 
 
 ^20203 
 
 
 
 2210 
 
 
 2020 
 
 
 
 ^^22 10 
 
 
 •^pppp 
 
 
 
 12210 
 
 
 12020 
 
 
 
 r.:22io 
 
 
 ri32p2p 
 
 
 2Di:a 
 
 22ior: 
 
 22ion 
 33 
 
 3p2p5q 
 
 2020n 
 
246 
 
 § 127. Par. XII. Verbs n3>. (§§ 117, 118.) 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Praet. 3 m. 
 
 ^Z 
 
 n^ 
 
 DipD 
 
 D^pn 
 
 3 f. 
 
 n^^e 
 
 nnb 
 
 ri^^ip3 
 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ^^.P- 
 
 nni: 
 
 njb^pq 
 
 ni^^pn 
 
 2 f. 
 
 n52p_ 
 
 n^_ 
 
 ni^^p] 
 
 ni5:7n 
 
 1. 
 
 ^"n^p_ 
 
 'inb 
 
 '^ni^'ipD 
 
 ^nib^pn 
 
 PI. 3. 
 
 ■^^B 
 
 ina 
 
 "^^DIpJ 
 
 ^^■^pn 
 
 2 m. 
 
 CM|? 
 
 tJ^.^ 
 
 Dni^^pD 
 
 Dnia^.n 
 
 2 f. 
 
 1^.^.P- 
 
 1^.^- 
 
 in^t3^p3 
 
 ■jnis-^pn 
 
 1. 
 
 ID^p 
 
 ^Dna 
 
 IDI^^pD 
 
 I2i53vn 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 const. 
 
 mp 
 
 aipn 
 
 
 Fut. 3 m. 
 
 a^p; 
 
 tJip^ 
 
 n^p; 
 
 3 f. 
 
 £)^pn 
 
 ,fiipn 
 
 G'^pn 
 
 2 m. 
 
 a^pn 
 
 a'lpn 
 
 D^pn 
 
 2f. 
 
 ^5q^pn 
 
 ^5:^ipn 
 
 ^^^pn 
 
 1. 
 
 Q^piJ 
 
 aipi< 
 
 D^'piJ 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 ^53ip; 
 
 ■^^TO 
 
 m: 
 
 3 f. 
 
 
 riD^pn 
 
 n3a'^pn 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ^53^pn 
 
 "i:oipn 
 
 1^^pn 
 
 ' • T 
 
 2f. 
 
 
 »i3^pn 
 
 T I' • 
 
 
 1. 
 
 t]1p3 
 
 Cip3 
 
 t:^p3 
 
 F?/<. ajaoc. 
 
 °Px 
 
 
 OR.: 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 Q^p 
 
 nipn 
 
 cpn 
 
 f. 
 
 'iqip 
 
 ^tJipn 
 
 ^'A^F.^ 
 
 PI. ni. 
 
 ^^•ip 
 
 153 'ipn 
 
 is'^pn 
 
 f. 
 
 riD^/p 
 
 n3t:pn 
 
 n3^pn 
 
 Part. 
 
 ^Z 
 
 nri^ nip: 
 
 S^.tl 
 
^ 127. Par. Xll. ^6. {:. (§§ 117, m.) \^r,^^f;;^'\ 247 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Polol. 
 
 Polal. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 'Dp^n 
 
 t:t)_ip 
 
 ati.ip 
 
 P. 
 
 mp}n 
 
 "^.^.'^p 
 
 m-ipp 
 
 n52 
 
 Tp}^n 
 
 n^bjip 
 
 n^_^_ip 
 
 n33_ 
 
 r]^,P_^n 
 
 ntj^^ip 
 
 nq^_ip 
 
 T\22 
 
 ''n^P_in 
 
 ■^n^^bip 
 
 •Ti^^^ip 
 
 "^n^X 
 
 i!apin 
 
 •^^^^ip 
 
 n-an^p 
 
 IDS 
 
 t:n^p.^n 
 
 cnqt3"'ip 
 
 Din,'q^"ip 
 
 ^^^.^.2 
 
 )mpjin 
 
 'inq^_ip 
 
 ■jnti'^jp 
 
 "i^.^.^ 
 
 ^D^p^n 
 
 ^:t3bip 
 
 ^:^Jjip 
 
 •^33 
 
 
 
 
 113 
 
 sp_^n 
 
 ^?V 
 
 C^lp 
 
 r^ 
 
 Dp_'T^ 
 
 t:qip^ 
 
 na_ip^ 
 
 r^: 
 
 ap.'^n 
 
 t:t:_ipn 
 
 x:53ipn 
 
 •j^nn 
 
 t]p_'^,n 
 
 a^ipn 
 
 tJiDipn 
 
 V^^. 
 
 '^^pin 
 
 ■^Mipn 
 
 ■^ri^^ipn 
 
 ■^rsn 
 
 Dp^^J^ 
 
 t3tl_1pNI_ 
 
 ^'^jp^! 
 
 •j^njj 
 
 113p'^'> 
 
 •itiaip^' 
 
 'i^aXDip'; 
 
 131^1 
 
 na^.ri^n 
 
 rij^^^Dipn 
 
 nDtibipn 
 
 [ n]^3;nn 
 
 inp-^n 
 
 "i^^riipn 
 
 ^:2^^ipri 
 
 
 nj^.pn 
 
 nD^b_ipn 
 
 riDtiaipn 
 
 
 npiD 
 
 ^ ^^.'ip^. 
 
 b^ipD 
 
 r=.? 
 
 
 b: 
 
 
 c?^p 
 
 
 ra 
 
 
 •^rj^ip 
 
 
 1313 
 
 
 ^n^^ip 
 
 
 ^313 
 
 
 n]t)?3ip 
 
 
 
 • Dpl^ 
 
 ,nr),ipS3 
 
 Daipt) 
 
 T f • 
 
 p, ' 
 
248 
 
 § 127. Par. XIV. Verbs^b. (§§ 120, 121.) 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Piel. 
 
 Praet. 3 m. 
 
 N*253 
 
 N^SqD 
 
 iJSr) 
 
 3 f. 
 
 riijs^^ 
 
 riiVit]] 
 
 T ; • 
 
 2 m. 
 
 Tw^sa^ 
 
 n5«5it]3 
 
 nj^stj 
 
 2f. 
 
 nN*2^ 
 
 nii^.q: 
 
 ^'^^.^. 
 
 1. 
 
 '^n&is^ 
 
 ""^.^'4^?. 
 
 •^riwy^^. 
 
 PL 3. 
 
 "^N^ZStD 
 
 ^^V^}, 
 
 v^isq 
 
 2 m. 
 
 an^jsq 
 
 ami^^D 
 
 tDN^^iq 
 
 2 f. 
 
 "jHwvsd 
 
 ]nw\2;.r:D 
 
 IDNS^ 
 
 1. 
 
 ^DN*3s^^ 
 
 ^iiir^p: 
 
 ^^^^.^ 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 5<is^ 
 
 
 *i:s^ 
 
 const. 
 
 Ni^^ 
 
 Nss^n 
 
 ^4P- 
 
 Fut. 3 m. 
 
 ^^^.? 
 
 ii:^iz\ 
 
 ^?.^-1 
 
 3 £ 
 
 ^^^.^. 
 
 ^4^^. 
 
 fi<2i2n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ^^^.n 
 
 i«:2_52n 
 
 i^s^n 
 
 2f. 
 
 \^2^n 
 
 \v^2^^n 
 
 ^^i:^rJ^ 
 
 1. 
 
 ^^^^'^ 
 
 n:sSwV{_ 
 
 ^^.^>^. 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 ■^^^^^.'l 
 
 ; IT • 
 
 'liSSlD'j 
 
 3f. 
 
 n^wvs^n 
 
 riDNk^n 
 
 riDw^ik'^n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 \v:r^n_ 
 
 vvi:2n 
 
 ^\xj:a_n 
 
 2f. 
 
 n;i«2t;n 
 
 njx^i.^n 
 
 riDws^.nn 
 
 1. 
 
 iS^i]D 
 
 N253] 
 
 Nspi 
 
 jP7<^ OjOOC. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 Nist; 
 
 uis^n 
 
 N2^ 
 
 f. 
 
 ''^^^ 
 
 \s;s5n 
 
 '^^^2 
 
 PI. m. 
 
 IJiStt 
 
 ; IT • 
 
 iNS^a 
 
 f. 
 
 riDwVStt 
 
 ri55<^.:2n 
 
 riDwS^.^q 
 
 Part. 
 
 n:si:d 
 
 &t2tl3 
 
 i^Stt^ 
 
§ 127. Par. XIV. Verbs nV. (§§ 120, 121.) 
 
 249 
 
 Pual. 
 
 Uiphil. 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Hithpael. 
 
 N2>2 
 
 N^s^n 
 
 ^^2^^ 
 
 ws::_'2nn 
 
 nw>i2'2 
 
 nN'^5:"2n 
 
 ni<::t:n 
 
 f • • • 
 
 n.s^D 
 
 n.sk'cn 
 
 rx5:^n 
 
 
 nwS'i:^ 
 
 ri^'i'zn 
 
 n^n^n 
 
 nwx::rnn 
 
 \-ix-i^ 
 
 ^-^N^^rn 
 
 MwN-:^n 
 
 \n&<2t)rn 
 
 \\::'2 
 
 iN^'ii-^n 
 
 nvs^::'!:n 
 
 ^.Nsnnn 
 
 CPwv::^ 
 
 nnwviitn 
 
 cr&isrn 
 
 tzpNS^nn 
 
 •JPwVIi^ 
 
 inxs^qn 
 
 'jnx2;_'2- 
 
 IPMif^^^nn 
 
 ^r.xif'p 
 
 ^^^^'^.-.n 
 
 ^DwV^tjn 
 
 ^:x^_^nn 
 
 vsstl 
 
 Nsnn 
 
 ^►^•^v^ 
 
 2n 
 
 ^i^'2r 
 
 iNS'ann 
 
 ixs^'^ 
 
 fi<'^:2^"> 
 
 J«2t)^ 
 
 t^'itin'' 
 
 ^^:2rn 
 
 j{'^::ttn 
 
 N-^tin 
 
 j«:s^nn 
 
 iiS'^n 
 
 N^isttn 
 
 is*2t!n 
 
 . .y^^nn 
 
 \v:2^n 
 
 W'^srjn 
 
 w^s-^n 
 
 \v:2»nn 
 
 N::s^ji 
 
 ^?■^2t)^{ 
 
 N^^W>{ 
 
 &(2^nN^ 
 
 \S2^^ 
 
 •^.x^'sq;^ 
 
 vss^^ 
 
 ^vvspn'] 
 
 riDN^^n 
 
 HDJiittn 
 
 riDwv^^n 
 
 riDJikann 
 
 '^^«-^'2n 
 
 i&{^5ra_n 
 
 'ii«{:sr)n 
 
 vsis^nn 
 
 n2xi"2n 
 
 r>:i^-i'nr\ 
 
 riDN^^^n 
 
 n3wN2^nn 
 
 wn::^3 
 
 N'^StJD 
 
 j^jiap 
 
 N^2tt_nD 
 
 ^'^^.'3: 
 / 
 
 
 wN^rtin 
 
 
 t<-^^r\n 
 
 
 \s^5sr!n 
 
 
 '^^{SQnn 
 
 
 ^wx'^zi^n 
 
 
 ^jtst^nn 
 
 
 riDwSS^n 
 
 
 ri3&i2tinn 
 
 ^Z12)2 
 
 ^^^^^"2 
 
 wNS^a 
 
 ^ts^nt) 
 
250 § 127. Par. XV. Verbs ^%. (§§ 122, 123.) 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Piel. 
 
 Pual. 
 
 Praet. 3 m. 
 
 nb3 
 
 ^\^?. 
 
 nVs 
 
 nVs 
 
 3 f. 
 
 
 nn^ia 
 
 nn^^^ 
 
 nnVj 
 
 2 m. 
 
 rv^l 
 
 n'^pSD 
 
 n^ta 
 
 n^^fa 
 
 2 f. 
 
 n'^^ 
 
 n^^53 
 
 n^^5 
 
 n-iipa 
 
 1. 
 
 ^n^V^ri 
 
 ^n^V"5D 
 
 •in^'fa 
 
 ''n^?^ 
 
 PI. 3. 
 
 \hi 
 
 ^^5D 
 
 <t5 
 
 \V? 
 
 2 m. 
 
 cn;^ 
 
 t:n;'^5: 
 
 cn^V.^ 
 
 t:n;Vi 
 
 2f. 
 
 in;bi 
 
 in'^'yq 
 
 15n;V5 
 
 ir/!?.^* 
 
 1. 
 
 ^2'/'? 
 
 Vj^'p: 
 
 ^rjp5 
 
 ^D^Jpi 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 ribs 
 
 fk^: 
 
 nVs 
 
 riVa 
 
 const. 
 
 r\Sbi 
 
 ribsn 
 
 nVs 
 
 riW 
 
 Fut. 3 m. 
 
 n^;^-; 
 
 ^^y. 
 
 nV^"] 
 
 nVai 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nb^n 
 
 nbsn 
 
 ^^}A 
 
 ?^V.?^* 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ^^.^'^ 
 
 n'^sn 
 
 n^sn 
 
 "V.;^^. 
 
 2f. 
 
 ^!:in 
 
 •'iijsn 
 
 ^inn 
 
 ^^i^. 
 
 1. 
 
 n!?is 
 
 nb5fi< 
 
 '•* T V 
 
 "^.^'^. 
 
 ^Va^i 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 ^^^' 
 
 '1^5'] 
 
 ^^5^' 
 
 iViji 
 
 3 f. 
 
 riD^b^sn 
 
 nj^V^'sn 
 
 riD^'Vlin 
 
 nj'^'pan 
 
 2 ra. 
 
 ^br^n 
 
 nbsn 
 
 ^Vs.n 
 
 I'pjn 
 
 2f. 
 
 ^r?^^. 
 
 riD^VsF] 
 
 riD^Vsn 
 
 ns^Van 
 
 1. 
 
 '^k?^?. 
 
 ^^53 
 
 J"'V.^-? 
 
 rkp^ 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
 ^r. 
 
 T • 
 
 ^5" 
 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 J^^.5. 
 
 n^.r^n 
 
 nb5 
 
 
 f. 
 
 ^t?5 
 
 ""^^'in 
 
 ^Vs 
 
 
 PI. m. 
 
 1^5 
 
 ^bin 
 
 iV5_ 
 
 
 f. 
 
 ^r^V 
 
 riD/'fsn 
 
 riD'^ft, 
 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 nbia 
 
 ^\}?. 
 
 ?^c^^ 
 
 nVat) 
 
 pass. 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
§ 127. Par. XV. Ferbs lib. (§§ 12?, 123.) 251 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Ilithpael. 
 
 Hitlipalel. 
 
 mn 
 
 T • X 
 
 riV?nn 
 
 ninnpn 
 
 nrp^n 
 
 nnb,:in 
 
 nnV^n'l 
 
 
 ^^PP. 
 
 n/'-^.rj 
 
 n^"f.^nn 
 
 n/inndn 
 
 iT^bn 
 
 rr'b^n 
 
 n^t^nn 
 
 
 \-i;V;n 
 
 '<n;|f^n 
 
 \n;"f5nn 
 
 ''n'^'inndn 
 
 Vt^h 
 
 Vt^3n 
 
 VTr«nn 
 
 ■Rinnan 
 
 ^r.^^.-in 
 
 t:n;yn 
 
 cn^Vinn 
 
 Gn;inriDn 
 
 ]n;bin 
 
 •jn^'^in 
 
 vtV/H" 
 
 
 ■^2'.? AH 
 
 ^r7:;n 
 
 ^r'f.inn 
 
 
 n^;- 
 
 nyn 
 
 nV?nn 
 
 
 hx'in 
 
 n'byn" 
 
 riV'inn 
 
 ninnp'n 
 
 5^^.^! 
 
 rb^) 
 
 nV^n^ 
 
 J^jnr^®^': 
 
 ^\}P- 
 
 nb^n 
 
 nV^nn 
 
 ninnpn 
 
 '^k^P- 
 
 n!?in 
 
 nV^nn 
 
 ninnin 
 
 ^k^P- 
 
 •^^in 
 
 ^V^rin 
 
 
 nV>» 
 
 n^iiJ 
 
 "^.^n^"?. 
 
 ninn-d^ 
 
 n^^ 
 
 I*" 
 
 ^bn'; 
 
 ^.inrip'^^ 
 
 !^r!r'^^.r> 
 
 HD^^^n 
 
 r.D^'f^nn 
 
 • 
 
 ^b:^p_ 
 
 ^V:n 
 
 ^Vsnn 
 
 !)inripn 
 
 5^r.?-i^ 
 
 JiD'^V^^n 
 
 rij^y^nn 
 
 • 
 
 ^\^?- 
 
 n>5D 
 
 nV^n: 
 
 riinnip3 
 
 b^: 
 
 
 Van^ 
 
 rinnuj^ 
 
 ~:.^.~ 
 
 
 ntMnri 
 
 
 i^^n 
 
 
 ^b}pT\ 
 
 ^insndn 
 
 V::;n 
 
 
 ^^5nn 
 
 •Tinrpn 
 
 riD/'fjn 
 
 
 nD'f?nn 
 
 
 rhj^i2 nb;^ r>V?n52 mnnd52 
 
252 § 127 
 
 ^■^Dmic^n?. (§124.3.c.) 
 
 , Par. XVII. 
 
 •JOa/ic^N^. (§ 
 
 Verbs 
 124.3.(2.) 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Niphal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Praet. 
 
 m'' 
 
 nmn 
 
 iN-J3D 
 
 Nui3 
 
 Ni^n 
 
 3 f. 
 
 T :(T 
 
 nnnin 
 
 T : IT 
 
 njj'jDD 
 
 nij^-jDn 
 
 2 m. 
 2f. 
 
 
 
 (as txb) 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 • •* 
 
 •Timn 
 
 
 •'HwN^DD 
 
 ^-iws-cn 
 
 PI. 3. 
 
 n*' 
 
 nin 
 
 
 ^J<uD3 
 
 •^iSirn 
 
 2 m. 
 
 finn^ 
 
 t:n;nin 
 
 
 Dn«;i2D 
 
 finvNiiJn 
 
 2f. 
 
 inn*] 
 
 I^.^TJ^ 
 
 
 in>vqD 
 
 inMtsn 
 
 1. 
 
 ^D^V 
 
 •iDnin 
 
 
 ^DwVp: 
 
 i:wypn 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 h-i^ 
 
 
 JXlil33 
 
 
 i^-i^n 
 
 const 
 
 niT 
 
 mm 
 
 TNi^ 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 nn^-' 
 
 mv 
 
 j^-j:*! 
 
 i\'u2"' 
 
 i<v^2i 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nn^n 
 
 nnin 
 
 T • 
 
 (as Kb) 
 
 
 2 m. 
 
 nn^n 
 
 n"iin 
 
 T • 
 
 
 
 2f. 
 
 ''-I 'in 
 
 nin 
 
 \>^-j3n 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 n"i^5< 
 
 nnVs 
 
 Nffi5< 
 
 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 1^1 
 
 n'r 
 
 ^iX©"^^ 
 
 
 "ifit^k:! 
 
 3f. r 
 
 •on^n 
 
 nD/lin 
 
 riDi^^n 
 
 
 
 2 m. 
 
 n^^n 
 
 nin 
 
 ^wx-jpn 
 
 
 ifi^^ipn 
 
 2 f. n3n^n 
 
 fiDnin 
 
 n^wv^n 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 5^T^. 
 
 nniD 
 
 i^-Ql 
 
 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
 
 -li'l 
 
 
 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 ^T. 
 
 ■ nnin 
 
 
 
 
 f. 
 
 ^r 
 
 '^nin 
 
 \vi';D 
 
 
 
 PI. m. 
 
 n-" 
 
 nin 
 
 ^N^'q 
 
 
 
 f. 
 
 
 riDnhn 
 
 HD^^-o:. 
 
 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 rnv 
 
 rn-\'n 
 
 N-03 
 
 
 
 pass 
 
 . 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 
§ 127. |.', 
 
 Par. XVIII. 
 
 and n'r. (§ 
 
 Verbs 
 124. .3. e.) 
 
 Par 
 
 XIX. 
 
 12. (§ 124. 
 
 1.) 1 ''' 
 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Hipliil. 
 
 Hophal. 1 
 
 Praet. 
 
 .V3 
 
 N-^qn 
 
 i<3^n 
 
 3 i\ 
 2 m. 
 
 (as ni) 
 
 
 
 
 2 f. 
 
 
 rT^'jn 
 
 ni<2 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 
 'Ti;^?! 
 
 \nw>{2 
 
 ■^nsinn 
 
 
 PI. 3. 
 
 
 VtDn 
 
 1^J^ 
 
 ^N'^qn 
 
 •iwvn^n 
 
 2 m. 
 
 
 cr);L:n 
 
 cnxs 
 
 cnwvan 
 
 
 2f. 
 
 
 VT'^n 
 
 . . . 
 
 .... 
 
 
 1. 
 
 
 ir^n 
 
 -r 
 
 'iDx'^qn 
 
 
 Inf. abs. 
 
 nb: 
 
 
 5<i3 
 
 
 
 const 
 
 nVJD 
 
 nron 
 
 wV2,wNi3 
 
 .v^sn 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 na^ 
 
 5T^.- 
 
 iSin; 
 
 ^^^! 
 
 iNni"" 
 
 3 f. 
 
 nrpn 
 
 n-Lon 
 
 Kinn 
 
 vv^nn 
 
 
 2 m. 
 
 ncpn 
 
 nr^n 
 
 jiinn 
 
 ii^qn 
 
 
 2 f. 
 
 nan 
 
 n-jn 
 
 \^^i3n 
 
 
 
 1, 
 
 5^P.*5. 
 
 ntp>^ 
 
 iiinfij 
 
 ^i'^ni{ 
 
 
 PI. 3 m. 
 
 rj-i 
 
 rj;^ 
 
 \s*u; 
 
 ^X''2; 
 
 ^i^n^"^ 
 
 3f. 
 
 HD-^-^n 
 
 nD'^-jn 
 
 riDNiir r 
 
 ■2^^i;n^ 
 
 
 2 m. 
 
 rjn 
 
 VuDn 
 
 ^Kin 
 
 ^ii^hn 
 
 
 2 f. 
 
 
 nrtpn 
 
 . ' 
 
 • T 
 
 
 1. 
 
 nrp: 
 
 np.3 
 
 iSi::] 
 
 fi^^DD 
 
 
 Fu^ a/)oc. 
 
 ^.■^ 
 
 '^2 
 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 1 1 Jj 
 
 ntpn 
 
 i^lS 
 
 ji'^nn 
 
 
 i: 
 
 (asHb) 
 
 "•an 
 
 \xif 
 
 \>^''2ri 
 
 
 PI. m. 
 
 
 VuDH 
 
 lisna 
 
 •^1X^2:1 
 
 
 f. 
 
 
 tlB ■ h • A ■■ 
 
 . . . 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 1 lU^J 
 
 nu'2 
 
 wNS 
 
 ^""'Z?. 
 
 N»nin 
 
 pass 
 
 . "^VJD 
 
 
 
 
 
 34 
 
254 
 
 § 127. Par. XX. Participles. (§125.) 
 
 Verbs final Pattahh act. 
 
 Kal. 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Fem, Segh. 
 
 
 pass. 
 
 ^"I'^R 
 
 nb^rjp 
 
 
 — Tseri 
 
 act. 
 
 1^: 
 
 n3U3"^ 
 
 riD-iD^ 
 
 — Hholem 
 
 act. 
 
 ni:^'' 
 
 nn3^ 
 
 
 V gutt. 
 
 act. 
 
 p5?;T 
 
 r\^v) 
 
 J^ !?.?.♦ 
 
 )1 
 
 ? gutt. 
 
 act. 
 
 5?^b 
 
 rm-'fi 
 
 n:pM 
 
 (1 
 
 act. 
 
 ^Z 
 
 ^'^,E 
 
 
 hb 
 
 act. 
 
 Tibb, 
 
 ri^3 and Jl^H 
 
 
 pass. 
 
 ^^b^^ 
 
 n^^^5 
 
 
 regular 
 
 
 JViphal. 
 
 nVoj?: 
 
 nVbp3 
 
 D gutt. 
 
 
 ^itiv: 
 
 n"i^:?D 
 
 niP.?.3 
 
 :?:? 
 
 
 noD 
 
 n3DD 
 
 
 VJ> 
 
 
 I3ii?3 
 
 rj^ipD 
 
 
 Pid. 
 
 regular 
 
 » iP 
 
 PoEL of ::?i? 
 
 b^}>p, ^by^^^. ^r.PR^ 
 
 Pual 
 
 regular 
 
 ^op^ hVlDP^ T\bht>n 
 
 regular 
 
 h 
 It 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 ^^Dp^ 5'»^^"qp.^^_ ^r.Pp^ 
 
 regular 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 Vjp^ nVjp^ n^bpi3 
 
 regular 
 
 Hithpoeh 
 
 ^Dp_ntj nyjp_n^ 3n'^bp_n^ 
 
 1 
 
§ 127. Par. XX. Participles. (§ 125.) 2b5 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 Plur. fem. 
 
 mVjp 
 
 Masc. 
 DecVII. 6. 
 
 Fem. 
 DecX. XIII. 
 
 D-^irVjp 
 
 ni^rjp 
 
 
 III. C. 
 
 X. 
 
 u^yg'i 
 
 niDc)^, 
 
 
 V. c. 
 
 XI. XIII. 
 
 • • 
 
 ni-iJi^. 
 
 
 III. c. 
 
 X. 
 
 '^ypJ 
 
 nipy'T 
 
 
 VII. 
 
 X. XIII. 
 
 D'^yriD 
 
 ni>'M 
 
 
 VII. 
 
 X. XIII. 
 
 c^izp^ 
 
 niip^ 
 
 
 I. 
 
 X. 
 
 c'^-i 
 
 niVij 
 
 
 IX. a. 
 
 X. 
 
 'n^^m 
 
 nrV^5 
 
 
 III. c. 
 
 X. 
 
 c'V^F.2. 
 
 ni^jpD 
 
 N'iphal. 
 
 II. 
 
 XI.XIIL 
 
 ^■"1 ^?.?. 
 
 f^'i^^?.?. 
 
 
 II. 
 
 XI. XIII. 
 
 a'^^ibq 
 
 ni2Dq 
 
 
 VIII. 
 
 X. 
 
 G'^tJipi 
 
 ni^ip: 
 
 
 III. c. 
 
 X. 
 
 ^""V^F-^. 
 
 ni^jp,^. 
 
 Piel. 
 
 VII. c. 
 
 X. XIII. 
 
 D'^D-j^'q 
 
 niDn2;q 
 
 
 VII. 
 
 X. XIII. 
 
 D'^Vijb 
 
 ni^;^. 
 
 
 IX. 
 
 X. 
 
 n^qziD'q' 
 
 ninnioa' 
 
 
 VII. 6. 
 
 X. XIII. 
 
 c^rjp^^ 
 
 niVu3p_ti_ 
 
 Pual. 
 
 II. 
 
 XI.XIIL 
 
 D''V^P."^_ 
 
 ni^^'jp^ 
 
 Hiphil. 
 
 I. 
 
 X. XIIL 
 
 a^'7'^rip^ 
 
 r\'\T^7_p_ 
 
 
 1. 
 
 X. XIIL 
 
 a'^scir) 
 
 nisD^ 
 
 
 VIII. 
 
 X. 
 
 • ^^^.7^.^. 
 
 ni'^'^P^" 
 
 
 III. 
 
 X. 
 
 ' 
 
 Hophal. 
 
 II. 
 
 XL XIIL 
 
 Hithpael. 
 
 a'^!?r:pnn niVjpns viLc. X. XIIL 
 
256 § 127. Par. XXI. Verbs with mffix-pronouns. (5 126.) 
 
 Suffixes. Sing. i. 2 mas. 2 fem. 3 mas. 3 fem. 
 
 f^^' \ ^:^-o? :)^Dp ^Vop '%^ nbi?p. 
 
 3'f. ^:n?-jp ^n?L)p 'qn^Dp "^^H^/"^^!^^ nnVjp 
 
 ^^nropj i^V^_p^ ■'•'•' 
 
 1. — ^'^riV^p '^'^nV^p i^riV^p vJ'^.^.Pp. 
 
 PI. 3. '^a^Vjp iTj^'^jp 'ii^Dp 'in^^^Dp n?yjp 
 
 2 m. •^J^nVjp — — ^n^nVjp rj^nV^P. 
 
 1. — ^^^3!:pp 'V^\^-?: 'i^'^^^V^P. rs'^^^V^P. 
 
 Inf. ^yjp inVjpl' 'nVjp 'lirDp nVop 
 
 Fut. "^pvop^ ^Tj^jp^ ^Vop^ 'i"?^P.'! vj^^p"! 
 
 e;:;s;^^p?^p^ :(?^ ~ ^^^:. ^^^^ 
 
 PL 3. ''Dftqp^ ^'^^jqp^ "^j^^Dp;, ^n^^^ap^ n^^Hp^. 
 
 Imp. '^j'fqp — — ^nVqp rj'f-jj? 
 
 p?w. ^D^ap rjVjp 'rj^^tDp iVop nVjp 
 
 Hij9/».fut.\3b'"'^i2p! ^V^P- '^r.^'^^P- "^^.V'^^P! n.^^'^'^p! 
 

 § 127. Par. XXI. Verbs Txith iniffix-pronmns. (§ 12G.) 
 
 257 
 
 
 Plur. 1 . 2 mas. 2 lem. .'5 mas. 
 
 3 fern. 
 
 IdV^'JP t:Vjp ID^Dp D^Jp 
 
 i^?:?. 
 
 ^Dnrjp 2DnVjp p>lV^p '^^^'''^P l^^'^p 
 
 ^:nrjp — 
 
 
 nnVpp 
 
 1f^>;4^: 
 
 ^3ri!?ppi 
 
 — 
 
 O'TiV^.p 
 
 r^'^pp 
 
 — cp^rnVjp 
 
 ]D^nyjp 
 
 a^'riVop 
 
 v^>:^?. 
 
 iD^nVjp — 
 — ap.^^Vop 
 
 
 a^Vop 
 G^nVt^p 
 
 T^^^.'^P 
 
 ^]V^-jp gdVjp 
 
 
 aVjp 
 
 I^.^P 
 
 iDVjp^ spy^pi p.V^p*! ^V^p*! "iV^p? 
 
 ^fiVjp^ 
 
 a::.'=irjp'; 
 
 15'i'^^P.': 
 
 a^Vjp"] 
 
 P^'^P^ 
 
 "Ij'f'jp^ 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 u'rjp 
 
 
 i3rjp 
 
 D^V^.P 
 
 i^.'^.^e.P 
 
 aVjp 
 
 I^.^.P 
 
 '^.D'P'^ujp:^ ^^.'^.''pp!! "i^.'^.'^'^p! ^V'^P! iV^P- 
 
258 § 127. Paji. XXII. Verbs M^b mth suffixes. (^ 126 a.) 
 
 Suffixes. Sins. 1. 
 
 2 mas. 
 
 3 mas. Plur. 3 mas. 
 
 Kal Praet. "JDiaS? 
 
 • — T 
 
 3 f. '^Dn'^:? 
 
 ^n^:5? 
 
 Dt33? 
 
 2 m. 
 
 1. 
 
 PI. 3. 
 
 • -T I T t ■'■ 
 
 
 Inf. *>n';i3>- snias? !!]?!=? an'ias? 
 
 Fut. 3 iti. •^312:;^'^ 
 
 3 m. with I 
 epenth. 3 ' 
 
 1. 
 
 h3--ffl3?i 
 
 
 PI. 3 m. ^iyhT^_ ^v-S?.^ 
 
 "^ ray IX 
 
 
 Imp. m. '^DD;^ — 
 
 •^riDS? 
 
 Pie/. Praet. ^^SIS 
 
 Fut. 3 m. '^f^S^ 
 3 m. with 
 
 epenth. D 
 
 ^3^2^ 
 
 
 D33? 
 
 
 //ip/t. Praet. '^DDn 
 
 Fut. with > k,.i^>, 
 epenth. 2 ^ . v- 
 
 
 Dsn 
 
§§ 128, 129. nouns; general classificatiom, etc. 259 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 *§ 128. Genera/ remarks, 
 
 1. Most nouns In Hebrew arc derived from rerbs; 
 and In general have for their ground-lorms the infinitive 
 mood or participles. There is a comparatively small 
 number of nouns which are primitive, but they conform in 
 their flexion to the usual laws which regulate those de- 
 rived from verbs. 
 
 2. Declension in Hebrew nouns differs much from de- 
 clension in Greek and Latin. The plural and dual num- 
 bers are, indeed, distinguished by appropriate endings add- 
 ed to the ground-forms; but case, properly considered, is 
 not marked by any peculiarity of inflection in the noun it- 
 self. For the most part, it is designated by prepositions 
 and the construct state of the preceding noun (§ 135). 
 The plural and dual endings, however, the suflixes, and 
 in short, whatever Increases the original ground-form of 
 the noun and shifts the place of its tone, occasion a varie- 
 ty of changes in the vowel-points and in the forms of 
 nouns, which may not unaptly be called declensions. \ 
 
 § 129. Nouns ; general ctassification* 
 
 t Nouns, like verbs (§ 69), are either primitive or deriv- 
 eitive. Those of the latter class are divided into verbals, 
 or those derived from verbs : and denomitiatives, or those 
 derived from nouns. Three classes of nouns may there- 
 fore be reckoned. 
 
260 § 129. NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS, ETC. 
 
 /. JVouns primitive. 
 
 1 1. Nouns primitive are principally those which desig- 
 nate animals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the hu- 
 man and animal body, and some of the great objects of the 
 natural world. But among the names of all these, arc 
 some of verbal derivation. 
 
 t2. In respect to the Jbrm of primitive nouns, it is not 
 distinguished I'rom that of verbals (§ 62. 2). They are 
 treated, in their inflections, in the same manner as if they 
 were derived. Only a knowledge of etymology, therefore, 
 can enable the student to determine whether a noun is 
 primitive or derivative ; and in some cases, it may be doubt- 
 ful to the best etymologist, whether a noun belongs to the 
 first, second, or third class above specified. 
 
 //. JVouns derived from verbs. 
 
 t3. This is altogether the most numerous class of 
 nouns. Very many of them appear to be derived either 
 from participles, or from the infinitive mood. The form- 
 er most commonly denote the subject or object of action 
 or passion {nomen agentis vel patientis); the latter denote 
 action or passion {nomen actionis vel passionis). The first 
 class are concretes, being used to designate some being or 
 thing ; the second are abstracts, denoting simply action or 
 
 passion. 
 
 Such is the general division of meaning in verbal nouns, which re- 
 sults from their origin, or the manner in which they are derived. But 
 usage has introduced many exceptions to this general rule, so that the 
 meaning of the two classes of verbals in question is in some instances 
 confounded ; participial nouns often taking the signification of nouns de- 
 rived from the infinitive ; and vice versa. 
 
 4. The usual forms of the infinitive and participle are 
 very seldom retained in the nouns derived from them ; but 
 
§129. NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS, ETC. 261 
 
 for tho sake of varlcly and distinction, forms difiering from 
 the usual infinitive and participle are employed as the 
 forms of nouns and adjectives, in order that the two spe- 
 cies of words may be readily distinguished from each other. 
 
 In respect to the derivation of verbal nouns, as coming from the in- 
 finitive ami participle, which theory was adopted and exliibiled in the 
 former edition of this grammar, see appendix D. 
 
 ///. JVouns denominative. 
 '\d. By these are meant nouns derived from other 
 nouns either primitive or verbal. 
 
 E. g. D"lb a vine-dresser from the primitive D'^.3 a vineyard ; 
 ■J^Tanj"; eastern from the verbal DHp. the east. 
 
 '\Q. Denominatives are generally analogous to verbals 
 as above described in their forms, and also in regard to 
 the signilications connected with those forms. 
 
 The followino; are some of the modes of forming them 
 from other nouns. 
 
 (ff) By adding to verbals the masculine and feminine 
 terminations ''_ and Tr^ . 
 
 This is the usual mode of forming the following species of nouns ; 
 viz. ordinals.1 as '<i:'<^ six, "tlJUJ sixth ; patronymics and national denomina- 
 tions, as ^3^f^■2 a jMoubite., from ^Ni72 ; "'rNl'^p'^ an Israelite from ^Nl'iJ^ 
 &c. Several adjectives also are formed in this manner ; as "^"133, fem. 
 rs'^w: strange., from ~\DZ a stranger; "^ 3ia"||P ^rs(, from "JT'^TJi. &.C. 
 
 Note. The addition of Yodh commonly occasions some change be- 
 sides that which results from shit^tlng the place of the tone. E. g. 
 •"ij-»]:\lj from '^iVr'J three: ^-.72'' from vrj"* the risiht hand. To the fem- 
 inine n_ and plurals D"'— and rn it is sometimes added whhout a 
 change, and sometimes with one ; as i^'i".;, ^rjTai'D a Naamathite ; 
 ClJiTi?, ■'^''"iris a man of Bahurhii ; mn:^', TlJTijy a man of Anor 
 thoth ; TincN an Ephrathite., from D'^hsx. Composite patronymics are 
 commonly divided, and the article inserted before the second noun ; as 
 ''?"'r"~~]? '^'^ Bcnjamiu., from 'pQ'^^^s : or the first noun Is dropped, as 
 ":^^") a Benjamite. 
 
 35 
 
262 § 1 30. NOUNS COMPOSITE AND PROPER, ETC. 
 
 (6) Bj adding the termination ri'^_ , which is usually 
 of the feminine gender. 
 
 F.. g. '^^iH'yprinceps, T^'^'^H'^^principimn. Words of this form are 
 sometimes defectively written, as D'lT'^ for r)"'2^"':£. 
 
 (c) Rarely by adding the terminations n_ , H— , ''-. , 
 and *!]_.. 
 
 E- g- i^r.^i* o lion from "^"^N ; rt^iN fire-offering from 'iN ; '^^''3 o 
 deceiver from ^''3; ^1'^ a treasury from "tjii.. 
 
 *§ 130. Kouns composite and proper. 
 
 1. Composite nouns are very rarely found in Hebrew, 
 except in proper names. A iew however occur, which 
 are made up of two nouns, or of a noun and a particle. 
 
 E. g. nVjV:^ = n^^ ^i shade of death ; b^"li;3 worthless from ''^a 
 not and b^'2 profit. 
 
 2. Proper names in their formation follow the general 
 analogy of verbals as above given. Very many of them 
 are composite, and consist usually of two nouns, or of a 
 noun and a verb. 
 
 E. g. 'J"^" :z Benjamin^ or son of my right hand ; Wp'y)'r<'' Jehoiakim^ 
 or Jehovah will exalt. 
 
 Note. To the first word in composite proper names a Yodh is 
 usually added, as bN^"}1.5 Gabriel or man of God., from 'li-i and rN; 
 sometimes a Vav^ as ^N^XD'^ Samuel or iiaine of God., from D">1J and ^N. 
 
 The name of God, either Vn or riin"^, forms the beginning or the 
 termination of a great multitude of Hebrew proper names. 
 
 § 131. Jioims J gender. 
 
 tThe Hebrew has only two genders, viz. the mascu- 
 line and feminine. These are distinguished sometimes by 
 the form, and sometimes by the signification of words. 
 
§ 131, nouns; cen'der. 263 
 
 /. Gender distinguished by form, 
 
 tl. In general, nouiis arc masculine which end in one 
 of the oriofinal radical letters of the Avord. 
 
 t2. The feminine is distinguished by adding to the 
 masculine the followinir terminations. 
 
 (a) n_ ; as "^bb a king, icm. rt3"r^ a queen. 
 
 (b) n simply, in words ending with a vowel or quies- 
 cent letter. This form is unfrequent. 
 
 E. g. Nari, fem. rtH'cv ; "'"inr, fem. n-'nny ; nsbr, fem. niDV.'a &c. 
 
 (c) P_''or ri__' in words ending with a moveable con- 
 !^onant. The latter form occurs alter gutturals. 
 
 E. g. nil:);, fem. nl.ti;: ; ^"^^a, fem. n^ii» &c. 
 
 Note. The endings in b and c are in theory the same, because the 
 vowels in the latter are furtive, and are inserted merely to facilitate 
 the pronunciation of two successive consonants. (§ 59. 2. a.) 
 
 3. The following are uncommon feminine terminations. 
 
 (a) N_ ; as ti^v, by an Aramaeism for nsip. 
 
 (6) n_ ; as n-i73T, poetic for nnTST. 
 
 (c) n_. with the proper vowel Pattahh, and with the tone on the 
 ultimate ; as ri'^j:;2 emerald. 
 
 II. Gender distinguished by signification. 
 t4. Nouns which designate objects like the following, 
 are Masculine, though they have a feminine termination, 
 (a) Names of men; as ITi^n^ Judah. 
 (i) Offices of men ; as nns a governor. 
 (c) Nations; as ^"i^n^ the nation of Judah. 
 {d) Rivers; as n2'3N> Amana. 
 
 t5. Nouns which designate objects like the following, 
 d.ve feminine^ though they have a masculine termination, 
 (a) Names of women ; as ^n-^ Rachel. 
 (6) Oflftce or relations of women ; as DJJ mother. 
 (c) Countries; as nv.rii< Assyria, 
 {d) Towns ; as I^S Tyre. 
 
264 § 131. nouns; gender. 
 
 (e) Female beasts ; as liriN a she-ass. 
 
 (y) Members of the body by nature double ; as "JTN the ear. 
 
 Note I. The same word may be masculine in one meaning, and 
 feminine in another ; as ITI^^"^ Judah or the Jews, masculine; but 
 tmrr;' the country oi Judea, feminine. 
 
 Note 2. There are some nouns which are feminine, although des- 
 titute of any distinctive sign of this gender, either in form or significa- 
 tion ; as "iN3 a well; ^33 a talent &.C. These can be learned only 
 from practice. 
 
 in. Kouns of common gender. 
 
 t6. A considerable number of nouns are of common 
 gender. Such are generally the names of beasts, birds, 
 metals &:c. 
 
 These nouns are mostly masculine as io form. Some of them are 
 more commonly employed as masculine nouns ; — others more frequent- 
 ly as feminine. These can be learned only from practice. 
 
 Note. What is of the neuter gender in the western languages, is 
 generally designated in Hebrew by the feminine; as "^^:^ na daugh' 
 ter of Tyre, i. e. city of Tyre. 
 
 7. Nouns of the dual number are universally of com- 
 mon gender. 
 
 IV. Gender of the plural. 
 
 t8. In the plural, the appearance of nouns as to gen- 
 der is in many cases dubious. A considerable number of 
 masculine nouiis form thesr plural as if they were femi- 
 nine ; while many feminine nouns have plurals of the mas- 
 culine form. (§ 133. 4.) 
 
 E. g. masc. laN a father, plural nilSN. Fem. SltaH wheat, plural 
 &*£:n &c. 
 
 Note. The gender of the plural, lei the form be as it may, is with 
 few exceptions the same as that of the singular. Some words exhibit 
 both the masculine and feminine forms of the plural ; but the gender 
 of both forms is the same, viz. it is the same as that of the singular. 
 
§ l.?^. NOl'N'S ; FORMATION OF TIIK FEMININ'F.. 265 
 
 § 1 32. J^ouns ; formation of feminine nouns. 
 
 The addition of the feniiniiip lormiiiatlons (^ 131. 2) to tlie masctiline 
 forms, usually occa'?iotis some change in the vowels of the masculine, 
 because these terminations aflfect the tone-syllable of the ground-form. 
 
 /. Changes occasioned by the feminine ending tl_ . 
 
 1. The masculine sulfers tiie same changes Avhcn it re- 
 ceives the reminine ending n_ , as when it takes a hght 
 sullix beginning with a vowel (§ 1.36. 4. «.) ; because in 
 both cases the tone is moved one place forward. These 
 changes are as follows. 
 
 («) Generally the penultimate vowel of the ground- 
 form, if it be mutable, is dropped ; as ?'l15, fern. nVi15. 
 (§56.2.) ' ' ■" 
 
 (b) Sometimes the ultimate vowel, if it be mutable, is 
 dro]3ped, especially in nouns and participles of Dec. VII ; 
 as "ijvia, fern. n'lj'PI^. (§ 56. 3.) 
 
 (c) In nouns of Dec. VIII, the ultimate long vowel is 
 usually exchanged for a short one ; as DD , fcm. H'Sri ; 
 
 pn, fern, npn &c. (§ 54. 5.) 
 
 2. In nouns of Dec. VI, the feminine ending H- is ap- 
 pended to the original form of the masculine, and not to 
 the usual Scgholate form. (§ 143.) 
 
 E. g. Masc. Y-.'?, original form ^^73, fern, nsb^ ; -i:2N, ^'JN, fem. 
 r!"^":N ; bp.X, ':^3i<i fem. ilbpN k.c. In this case also the original vow- 
 el of the ground-form is usually shortened. 
 
 Note. A few nouns of Dec. V form their feminine as if they be- 
 longed to Dec. VI ; as ^n^, fem. T\'y^'^ as if from a form ^0\ ; b^!^, 
 fem. inb^" ; yj'^, fem. n:y kc. 
 
 3. In nouns of Dec. IX, the feminine terixiination iTi— is 
 substituted for the masculine ending H-; as JlS"^, fem. nS"^. 
 
 Note. In a few nouns of Dec. HI, Ilholem impure is exchanged in 
 the feminine for Shureq ; as pin?3, fem. Mjaiina ; "jiba, fem. rtjiba 
 &c. (§ 52. 4.) 
 
266 
 
 § 132. NOUNS ; FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 
 
 4. The following table exhibits the usual formation of 
 feminines in ?!-.. 
 
 I. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 DID 
 
 Fern. 
 
 
 linnn 
 
 riDinnn 
 
 II. 
 
 i^^",^ 
 
 riij^i^ 
 
 III. 
 
 
 n!:i")5 
 
 
 lAr\)2 
 
 ^K^^^. 
 
 
 'QW 
 
 mrii 
 
 
 
 nijns 
 
 
 B^p.a 
 
 myp^ 
 
 IV. 
 
 =r,? 
 
 ™?^ 
 
 V. 
 
 IE! 
 
 ^?)?.! 
 
 VI. 
 
 1?.: 
 
 t]'Dbp_ 
 
 
 525. 
 
 
 
 IBS 
 
 n-j^,^? 
 
 
 hii 
 
 5"'^^.? 
 
 
 ^5« 
 
 n^Dws 
 
 VI. 
 
 VII. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 IX, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 V T 
 
 
 "^^k 
 
 T •• 
 
 nnj^ 
 
 nn>^ 
 
 ^?^^ 
 
 rTip.i'^ 
 
 n 
 
 •^n 
 
 T? 
 
 ^'^?. 
 
 nn 
 
 T 
 
 nsn 
 
 T?. 
 
 n23 
 
 1?. 
 
 nss 
 
 ph 
 
 np^n 
 
 « 
 
 nj3 
 
 1? 
 
 nsa 
 
 "lio 
 
 nnjc: 
 
 
 XT 
 
 r;&{-i^ 
 
 Hvxn^ 
 
 //. Changes occasioned by the feminine endings n, ru, n_. 
 
 5. The feminine ending fl appended to words ending 
 with a vowel or quiescent letter, produces no change in 
 the vowels of the ground-form. 
 
 E. g. Nan, fem. nNtDn ; ■'"ini", fem. n'^'nsy &c. 
 
 The above masculine forms may perhaps be considered as having 
 originally terminated in a moveable N and "^ , as NtaH, "'"^13? ; in which 
 case the original form of the Segholate feminines would be riNqn and 
 rT'nn:'. See below. 
 
§132. nouns; foiimation of the feminine. 267 
 
 ti. The feminine endings n__ and ri_ (like n_) usually 
 cause the penultimate vowel of the ground-form to fall 
 away, if it be mutable, although they do not shift the 
 place of the tone. The following changes take place al- 
 so in the final vowel. 
 
 (a) With ri__, final Qamets and Tseri, if mutable, are 
 commonly changed into Scghol, through the influence of 
 the furtive vowel (§ 60. 3). Final Tseri, however, not 
 unfrcquently remains. 
 
 E.g. -^d:?, fem. nnby; Voip, fem. n):!;Tp; ^ttpj, fern. n'l^Tan. 
 
 {li) With n_ after a guttural, the change is into Pat- 
 tahh. (§ 60. 3 note.) 
 
 E. g. 'jy.'o^ fem. nyniT:; 5-7., fem. n?i . 
 
 (c) If the final vowel of the ground-form be impure, 
 it is commonly exchanged for the corresponding pure and 
 mutable vowel. 
 
 E.g. \:;\^, fem. n'iiN; ^"^nij , fem. n-^.n.') ; 'iJ^VuJ, fem. hVP^TlJ j 
 friJ^n:, Segholate ri'l"n3 . In na^ujpi the impure ^ remains. 
 
 Note. In such cases as ;2J"'N, fem. n^pk ; r;'iJnri3, Segholate n^lJn: &c. 
 the immutable vowels "*_ and ^ are exchanged for others which are pure 
 and mutable, in order to bring the words within the appropriate forms 
 of feminine Segholates, which usually require the final vowel of the 
 ground-form to be mutable. See on this subject § 52. 4, 5, and § 117. 3. 
 
 7. The Segholate form of the feminine appears most 
 
 frequently in the construct state ; while the ending Ti- is 
 
 more common in the absolute state. 
 
 In feminine infinitives and participles, the endings n _ and D- are 
 altogether the most frequent. 
 
 Note 1. The Segholate forms of the feminine are, for the most 
 part, attached only to masculines of the second^ ffth^ and seventh de- 
 clensions, A very few are formed from nouns of the Jirst. third, fourth. 
 
268 §133. nouns; formation of the plural. 
 
 and eighth ; but none from the sixth and ninth^ because their forms are 
 such, that the terminations ri- and n_. cannot be attached to them. 
 
 Note 2. Those Segholates which come from Dec. VIII are formed 
 by dropping the reduplication of the final vowel ; as DT73'lN, fem. 
 n^^.)2'lN, but plural D'^ai^J'lN ; so also tT£)-IJ six., Segholate riy TIJ. So 
 patronymics, as "^ntji^J a Moabite^ fem. Segholate n"'niXT?3. See no. 5 
 above. 
 
 Note 3. Some feminine Segholates ending in a quiescent letter, 
 imitate the Syriac form of Segholates (Dec. VI), and throw the vowel 
 upon the final syllable ; as ni<tto instead of ni*ty ; nwy:i73 instead of 
 nN/:;.72 &c. (§ 60. 4.) 
 
 The reverse of this is the Arabic form of the Segholate, which 
 drops the furtive vowel. Some Hebrew feminine participles imitate 
 this; as ri^b'^, ri^'^^T"' &:c. unless these may rather be referred to the 
 2 pers. sing. fem. praeter of a Poel form of these verbs, (§ 100 a.) 
 
 § 1 33. J^ouns ; formation of the plural. 
 
 tThc Hebrew, like the Greek, has three nimibers, viz. 
 the singular, dual, and plural. Tiie dual, however, is much 
 less frequent than in Greek. 
 
 The plurals of masculine and feminine nouns are usually, 
 but not always, distinguished by appropriate forms. For 
 the vowel-changes which occur in the formation of the 
 plural, see § 136. 4. a. 
 
 I. Plural masculine. 
 
 tl. The plural of masculine nouns is usually formed by 
 annexing to the singular the following terminations. 
 
 («) Q"^- ; as 0^0, plur. IC'D^D. 
 
 (6) D simply, in some words ending in *^^ ; as ''"iSD, 
 plur. C^llDD : but sometimes u*^. ; as "^iT , plur. Cl^. 
 
 Note. The plural ending is sometimes written defectively, as 
 CD'^tn for D"':"':n. (§ 24. 2.) 
 
 2. In poetry, and in the later Hebrew, the plural is occasionally 
 formed with the following terminations ; viz. {a) ]''- ; as ^r.73, plur. 
 "f^h^ Prov. 31j 3 &c. (6) ''- ; as ^iVn, plur. '':iVn Jer.22:14 ; and per- 
 
§ 133. NOUNS ; FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 269 
 
 haps (c) ^_; ; as "JO, plur. "»:» Ps. 45: 9 for D-iW. The two first forms, 
 riz. in a and b, are Aramaean. 
 
 //. Plural feminine. 
 
 t;}. The plural of feminine nouns is formed in the fol- 
 lowing manner. 
 
 (a) Bj changing the terminations H-, n_ , P.. of the 
 feminine singular into ni. 
 
 E.g. n->Tn, plur. nin^n; nnaN, plur. ninaN ; rssa, plur, 
 
 Note. The D of the feminine ending singular is, in a few cases, 
 retained in the plural, as if it were a radical ; as masc. Ir^, fem. ni\, 
 fcm. plur. nnn!:~. 
 
 {U) By annexing ni to those feminines which, in the 
 slnojular, have a masculine form (§ 131. 5 note 2); as 
 
 -1X3, plur. ni"iNr}. 
 
 (c) By changing Ti''- into ni'^-, and ni into ni"- ; 
 
 as nnq:?, plur. ninn;:?; n^5^,^, plur. ni^p^^^a. 
 
 Note 1. The plurals in the case c, appear to be derived from 
 obsolete forms of the singular in !n*_ and !i^_ . Nouns of these classes 
 sometimes also form their plural after the usual manner; as rT'Sn, 
 plur. D\n"':n and n^rT'in ; n:i:T, plur. D"^ni:T. 
 
 Note 2. The plural ending of the feminine form also, is sometimes 
 written defectively ; as n"^p for nVrp &c. 
 
 ///. Peculiar forms of the plural. 
 
 t4. A very considerable number of masculine nouns form 
 their plural in ri ; while vice versa, many feminine nouns 
 form theirs in Q"^- ; but in either case the gender of the 
 plural is the same as that of the singular. (§ 131. 8.) 
 
 E. g. '2ii father., plur. rn:2ii fathers ; fem. InKx, plur. fem. C^^N. 
 
 Nouns of this description can be distinguished only by practice. The 
 present dubious appearance cf these words may probably have been 
 occasioned by the fact, that in the early stage of the Hebrew many 
 
 3G 
 
270 §134, nouns; formation of the dual. 
 
 words were used both in the masculine and feminine sense,, without ttny 
 variation of form ; like "1j>; in the Pentateuch, which is employed to 
 express both puer and pucUa, as Gen. 37: 2 &c. Gen. 24: 14, 16 &c. in 
 which latter cases the Qeri gives tTn?;?. See Gesenius' Lehrgeb. § 124.4. 
 
 t5. Some nouns, especially those ol" common gender, 
 exhibit two plurals as to form, viz. t*^,. and n'l ; but the 
 gender of both is the same as that of the singular. (§ 131. 
 8 note.) 
 
 E. g. ^iil^ f. a year, plur. D''^!; and ni:**^ &c. 
 
 t6. Some nouns are found only with a plural form, al- 
 though their meaning is often the same as if they were in 
 the shigular. 
 
 E. g. D'^:5 the face; CXj* days,, also a year, or time generally, 
 
 t7. Many nouns have a collective or plural sense, though 
 their form is that of the singular number. 
 
 E. g. T\i:>fowl ; f\'0 children ; ^iilZ^ocks k.c. 
 
 In Arabic very many nouns are collectives, or nouns of multitude, 
 with the form of the singular. They commonly belong to the pluralis 
 fractus. 
 
 8. In a few words, the plural ending u'^_ is superadd- 
 ed to the plural ending 7\\ 
 
 E. g. T\iyz high-place, plur. n^?03 and D-ni'^2, construct ''ni«2 . 
 The Arabic has also a pluralis pluralium, or plural formed from a 
 plural in a similar manner. 
 
 § 134. Kouna ; formation of the dual. 
 
 tl. The dual is usually formed by adding the termina- 
 tion tZ"^.- to the forms of the singular in the following man- 
 ner. 
 
 («) To masculines without change ; as D"!*^ . dual £"12 V • 
 (6) To femlnlnes in n_ after changing the final H into 
 Fl (§40. 2); as nST , dual u:']nSn\ 
 
§ ]34. nouns; fokmation ok tiik ni'Ai,. 971 
 
 Note 1. In the case of Segholate nouns of Dec. VI, llio dual 
 ending is appended to the original form of tlie sing^ular ; as b?."!., orig- 
 inal form i;^"}, dual D";ran. Compare § 132. 2. 
 
 Note 2. The following are unusual and probably antiquated forms 
 of the dual; viz. {a) "l"- and ]_ ; as 'J'^nT and "jni a proper name 
 Gen. 37: 17. 2 K. G: 13 ; {b) _ ; a^ "•T^ Ezek. 13: 18 by apocope for 
 ^11^; i'^) ^- 5 ^^ ^n-?"?- Ezek. 46: 19 Kethibh, by contraction for 
 Q'^n^n*; ((/) C- ; as Spy 1 Chr. 6 : 58 a proper name, which is 
 also written tD;"^< andS* :"^>;. 
 
 Most of these forms occur only in proper names ; and the proof that 
 they are actually duals rests partly on the variety of orthography, 
 (which is sometimes plainly dual, as C?.^, tI3:''y, Q^Vs; above), and 
 partly on comparison with duals of the kindred languages. 
 
 Note 3. The vowel changes which occur in the formation of the 
 dual, are the same as in the plural; for which see § 136, 4. a. 
 
 t2. The dual in Hebrew is used principally to designate 
 
 such objects as are double either by nature or by custom. 
 
 E. g. tU^l"^ the two hands ; LD''_by3 a pair of shoes &c. 
 
 Note. The names of membei's of the human body, which by na- 
 ture are double, have also a plural as well as dual form ; but the dual 
 is generally taken in a literal, and the plural in a figurative sense ; as 
 
 &E3 hands, nT53 handles. 
 
 t3. In a few instances, the dual form stands instead of 
 the plural for a greater number than two. 
 
 E, g. S'^crs X'^ six wings ; S."^!^ '^ib'iJ three teeth. 
 
 It hardly needs to be remarked, that the dual is of course essen- 
 tially plural, requiring a plural verb, adjective &,c. In some cases, it 
 19 difficult to show the reason of the dual form ; as t3')"ir;:2 mid-day &c. 
 Perhaps it is intensive. 
 
 Note. The words Q"^b\D heavens and \^'\p waters, though appar- 
 ently dual, are really plural. They are formed most probably like 
 Chaldce plurals from singulars in N- ; as Chaldee Nb^, plur. Vr '2- 
 So probably in Hebrew, sing. NttliJ, plur. tD';^^ ; sing. N72, plur. tZJ^J. 
 They are declined like duals of Dec. II ; see § 151. 
 
 i"4. The dual is of common gender and is found only 
 
 among nouns, and not among adjectives nor participles. 
 
 5. The dual ending is sometimes annexed to the plural. 
 
 E.g. niain walls, dual O'^n'on two walls &c Compare § 133. 8- 
 
272 §135. NOUNS; construct state. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF NOUNS. 
 
 § 1 35. J^ouns / construct and snffi,x states^ 
 I. Construct state, 
 
 tl. The Hebrew has no cases, in the sense in whicli 
 we speak of cases in Latin and Greek. But when two 
 nouns come together, the second of which is to be trans- 
 lated as a genitive, this relation is indicated, contrary to 
 the usual cusiom of other languages, by some change in 
 the Jlrst noun (if it be susceptible of change) instead of the 
 second. The first noun so situated, is said to be in regi- 
 men, or in the construct state ; while any noun not thus placed 
 before a genitive is said to be in the absolute state. 
 
 Two nouns in such a relation are supposed to be uttered nearly as 
 if they were one word ; for which reason the first noun is usually con- 
 tracted in the utterance (if it be capable of contraction), so that the 
 stress of voice may be transferred to the second. (§ 54. 2. c.) 
 
 t2. The following changes are produced by the con- 
 struct state in the consonants of the ground-form or abso- 
 lute state. For the voioeZ-changes, see § 136. 
 
 (a) In all the classes of masculine nouns singular, the 
 construct is hke the absolute form as to its consonants. 
 
 (6) Femlnlnes singular in Jl— change this ending into 
 n„ (§ 40. 2); as H^J")"] , const. ni^T . Other femlnines 
 singular suffer no change of their consonants. 
 
 (c) The plural ending D*^- and the dual D'^_- become 
 v.; as a'^O'lD, const. "^010; a']7\ const. ^7"] . 
 
 (d) Plurals in m sulTer no change of their consonants 
 in the construct state. 
 
§ I 35. NOrVS ; SUFFIX STATE. 273 
 
 For the manner of annexing paragogic lettei-s to the absolute and 
 construct state of nouns, see § 50. 
 
 //. Snjffix state. 
 
 t3. The sujix slate is that iorm ol" nouns to Avhich 
 arc appended or suffixed iragmcnts of pronouns, equivalent 
 In siiG^nification to our pronominal adjectives in Enghsh. 
 
 E. g. C^D fl horse., with suffix TDiD his horse &c. So ''I'bp is equiva- 
 lent to the Latin rox ejus. 
 
 Pronoun!?, or fragments of pronouns, thus suffixed, may be consid- 
 ered as equivalent, in general, to nouns in the genitive case, and as put- 
 ting the noun to which they are suffixed into a kind of regimen., or 
 constract state (l supra). Frequently the suffix-state requires the 
 same vowel-changes as the construct state, but uot always ; as may 
 be seen by consulting the paradigms of nouns, where both states are 
 exhibited. Of course it is proper to treat of these states separately^ 
 and to employ diflerent names to designate them. 
 
 4. Most of these suffixes, hke those of verbs (§ 126. 
 2), cause the tone of the word to which they arc append- 
 ed to be moved forward, and of course produce a change 
 in the vowel-points. For such changes, see § 136 and the 
 notes on the several paradigms. 
 
 5. Noun-suffixes, like those of verbs (§ 126. 6), have 
 generally three diirerent forms, adapted to the ending or 
 number of the word to which they are appended. 
 
 (n) The most simple form of the suffixes is that in which they be- 
 gin with a consonant, and are appended to nouns singular ending with 
 a vowel. 
 
 {b) To the simple form of some of the suffixes, is prefixed a union- 
 vowel (§ 126. G note), in which shape they are appended to nouns st/i- 
 gular ending with a consonant. 
 
 (c) The tliird form of the suffixes is peculiar to nouns plural. 
 Here all the suffixes take a union-vowel, and all of them, except that 
 of the first person singular, insert a Yodh between the union-vowel and 
 the suffix. 
 
27i 
 
 § 135. nouns; suffix state. 
 
 6. The following table exhibits the suffixes as append- 
 ed to the various forms of nouns ; the first column con- 
 taining those which are attached to nouns singular ending 
 with a vowel ; — the second, those which are attached to 
 nouns singular ending with a consonant ; — and the third, 
 exhibiting the suffixes as they are attached to nouns pluraL 
 Several unusual forms of suffixes are subjoined. 
 
 Sing. Simple form. 
 
 With un. vowel &c. 
 
 Suff. to nouns plural. , 
 
 1. my *•_ 
 
 1_ 
 
 ^_ 
 
 2 m. thy T^ pause Ti 
 
 i'^-T 
 
 ^)% 
 
 2f. thy ^ 
 
 ^T. 
 
 Tj^ ^S.V_ 
 
 3 m. his 1 '=in_ 
 
 i fi ^nl 
 
 
 3 f. her f\^ 
 
 ^- n^. 
 
 r.^l 
 
 VIA. our TjI 
 
 ^^%. 
 
 ^D^l 
 
 2 m. your CD 
 
 Q^. 
 
 ai_\_ 
 
 2f. your "jp 
 
 p. 
 
 1?%'" 
 
 3 m. their CH 
 
 D_ poet. 'M2^ 
 
 T T 
 
 en;- poet. ^^^:._ 
 
 3 f. their ■jn "jr; 
 
 l-riDl. "jH "jH 
 
 |51^J 
 
 (fl) Unusual suffixes to nouns singular. 
 
 Singular 2 masc. rT3_ Ps. 139 : 5 ; nS- Ps. 10 : 14. 2 fem. ']\, 
 Ezek. 5: 12 ; rj_ Ezek. 23: 28. 3 fem. ri- without Mappiq Num. 15: 
 28 ; N_. Ezek. 36: 5 for ri- . 
 
 Plural 1 person fi:l Ruth 3 : 2. Job 22 : 20. 2 fem. irT;2 Ezek, 
 ^3: 48. 3 masc. QlnJ 2 Sam. 23: 6. 3 fern. n;^l 1 K. 7r37. 
 
 (6) Unusual suffixes to 7iou7is plural. 
 Singular 2 masc. rt3_ Nah. 2: 14. 3 masc. \-|i Ps. 116: 12 Chal- 
 daic. 3 fem. Nrj^l. Ezek. 41: 15 for tl% . 
 
 Plural 2 fem. rt;bv. Ezek. 13: 20. 3 masc. rrtiriV Ezek. 40: 16. 
 3 fem. nrrf- Ezek. 1:11. 
 
§ 135. nouns; suffix state. 276 
 
 7. J^otes on the table of sujffixes. {a) Wlion the suffix % of the 1 
 pers. sing, is appended to a noun sinp^ular ending with Yodh, one Yodh 
 is dropped; as ■'\^, with suffix y.'l Zeph. 2: 9 instead of ""^T-T. This 
 suffix draws down the tone upon itself, except in cases where the next 
 word is either a monosyllable, or is Milel ; as rN "'nirN Gen. 12: 13 ; 
 T^vrJ TbD Josh. 14: 11 .^c. (§ 35. 6.) 
 
 (6) The Yodh which is inserted in the suffixes of nouns plural (no. 
 5. c) is sometimes omitted ; as "P."J1 Josh. 1 : 8 &c. for '^^^.'^■; thy 
 -ways ; ^'r\-\ Job 42: 10 &,c. for ^""^i;.! his friends ; Dn^/ia Gen. 10: 5 
 for Dn'^"*^ '^'^"" n(itio7is ; ]r;sbr Gen. 4: 4 for ]r."'?.';;n the fat of them. 
 The form 1_ for T*- is quite common, both having the same sound. 
 (§23. 6. f?.)' 
 
 (c) The forms nriL and nl of the 3 masc. and fem. are generally 
 attached to nouns of Dec. IX, and are more seldom found with other 
 nouns. The forms ^n'^L , TTal , "i^"'!.. are peculiar to poetry. 
 
 {d) As a union-vowel, Tseri predominates ; and as in verbal suffix- 
 es (§ 126. 9. d), so here CD, ]:;, and also C^I '(tl, do not take a 
 union-vowel, except Avith nouns plural. The suffi.x T^ likewise takes no 
 union-vowel except in pause, and with nouns plural. 
 
 (e) "Wherever there is a union-vowel, it uniformly takes the tone, 
 except in the grave suffixes (§ 126. 9. h). These, among the noun 
 suffixes, are CD , "jD , cn , Ifl , which always have the tone, whether 
 preceded by a union-vowel or not. See § 136. 4. 6, note 3. 
 
 The suffix Tj without a union-vowel takes the tone only when ap- 
 pended to words ending in a consonant ; as Tjnl" . (§ 34. 2. i.) 
 
 {f) The same form of suffixes is common to plural nouns of both 
 the masculine and feminine gender or form. But in respect to plurals 
 in n^, not only the epenthetic Yodh of the suffix (no. 5. c) is sometimes 
 omitted (supra 6), but the suffix itself is exchanged for that of nouns 
 singular. Thus we have "^ni^; my testimonies Ps. 132: 12 for "'niy ; 
 'TjnbTa thy stripes Deut. 28: 59 for '"'hb'q ; rfnrnN thy sisters Ezek. 16: 
 52 for I")! ; Cn-.nN their fathers Ex. 4: 5 &:c. &c. 
 
 {g) On the contrary, the suffixes to the feminine singular some- 
 times assume the epenthetic Yodh (no. 5. c), or rather the feminine 
 singular takes the suffixes of nouns plural. Thus we have '^^'^n^rrn 
 thy praise Ps. 9: 15 for "^n?"*") &c. So the infinitives *]";r]T32 thy build- 
 ing Ezek. 16: 31 and CD-'ni-iTri Ezek. 6: 8 ; see § 126 a. 4.' 
 
 Note. The anomalies in b,f g, arc probably the result of error in 
 transcribinsr. 
 
276 § 135. nouns; suffix state, etc. 
 
 8. Femlnines in n_, in order to receive suffixes, change 
 the final Jl into n. (§40. 2. Comp. § 126. 12.) 
 
 9. Nouns dual take the suffixes of nouns plural. 
 
 10. The plural and dual absolute in order to receive 
 suffixes, drop their appropriate endings and take the suf- 
 fixes in their place. 
 
 E. g. na-^, plural C'la", with suffix T^^na-^ &c. Pi3, dual Q";!?, 
 with suffix r.'^h-D &c. (§ IsV. 3.) 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 1 1 . Par. I exhibits nouns as connected with all the various suf- 
 fixes which are usually employed. The object of the paradigm is 
 merely to show the manner in which the suffixes are attached to mas- 
 culine and feminine nouns, without regard to the vowel-changes which 
 usually occur. For this reason, nouns with immutable vowels (except- 
 ing iN) have been selected for the paradigm. 
 
 12. No. I exhibits the usual suffixes in connection with a masculine 
 noun ending with a consonant. A feminine noun with a similar termina- 
 tion would receive suffixes in the same way. 
 
 13. No. II exhibits the manner in which suffixes are attached to 
 nouns ending with a vowel or quiescent letter. The noun ai< in its ab- 
 solute state ends, indeed, in a consonant, but it is in this respect irreg- 
 ular. The construct state and all its other forms have Yodh, as if from 
 a form ""aN ending with a quiescent. The suffixes are of course of 
 the simple form, without a union-vowel. For the form "^aJ* with the 
 suffix of the first person, see above in no. 7. a. For the forms Qp."'3N 
 &,c. see § 136. 4. b. 
 
 The plural of this noun is n^a^J, which takes suffixes like the 
 plural of rrjin; or, rather, like the plural of Dec. XI. 
 
 14. No. Ill exhibits the suffixes in connection with a feminine noun. 
 The suffixes of the 3 pers. fem. singular and of the 2 and 3 pers. fem. 
 plural are omitted in the paradigm for want of room ; but the forms of 
 the noun in these cases are precisely the same as those with masculine 
 suffixes of the .same persons. 
 
 For feniinines in n_ and n_ with suffixes &c. see § 150 and Dec. 
 XIII in the paradigm. 
 
§136. nouns; vowEr--rHANOEs in declensiov, 277 
 
 § 136. J^ouns ; voioel-changes in declension, 
 
 1. It has already been remarked (§ 128. 2) that, speaking after the 
 analogy of the western languages, Hebrew nouns are not declined. 
 But inasmuch as the construct state, the suffixes, the plural, and also 
 the dual, generally occasion changes in the mutable vowels of the 
 ground-form, the exhibition of these changes may not improperly be 
 termed declension. 
 
 t2. The changes of the vowels, almost without excep- 
 tion, respect the ultimate and penult syllable. (§ 53. 2.) 
 
 Of the consonants of nouns, only the final one is ever affected by 
 declension, and this not generally. See § 135. 2, 8, 10. 
 
 3. The theory of the vowel-changes in declension is, of 
 course, essentially connected with the shifting of the tone- 
 syllable ; and all the changes are in accordance with the 
 laws developed in §§ 53 — 58. 
 
 t4. The following recapitulation and statement exhibits 
 three classes of changes, which are dependent on the re- 
 moval of the tone and on the nature of the additions made 
 to nouns. It includes perhaps all the general rules which 
 can be given. 
 
 (a) When the tone is moved forward one place by an 
 accession beginning with a vowel, and forming a syllable, or 
 two syllables with the tone on the penult ; the penult vow- 
 el of the ground-form, if mutable, generally falls away. 
 
 Here belong the following species of additions, viz. 
 
 (1) The plural and dual endings D"'_, D^l, ni ; as 'nS'i, d'^niT &c. 
 
 (2) The following light suffixes of nouns singular, viz. % , ^-, i, 
 
 n-, ^:1, D_, •}_ ; as -irai, "^nni, ^:nm, D-in- &,c. 
 
 (3) The light suffixes of nouns plural, viz. ''_, "^^l^., ^J"^!, "IV, rj"^L, 
 nrl ; as ^ni, r-im, :irn5T &c. ' " . 
 
 Note 1. In a few cases, especially in nouns of the seventh declen- 
 sion, the ultimate vowel is dropped ; as '2'^iii^ D"'l2";iN, "^^liN &c. 
 37 
 
278 § 136. NOUNS ; vowel-changes in declension. 
 
 Note 2. Nouns of the sixth declension take the dual ending, the 
 suffixes &c. upon the original ground-form of the word ; as '^b'O, ^^'3) 
 D'^sbJa, "^sbT? SiC. The plural takes a ditferent form. See § 143. 
 
 (6) When the tone is moved forward one place by an 
 accession beginning with a consonant and forming a sylla- 
 ble, or when the construct state is employed (§ 135. 1), 
 not only does the penult vowel if it be mutable fall away, 
 but generally also the ultimate vowel is shortened. 
 
 This rule includes the following additions and forms. 
 
 (1) The grave suffixes of nouns singular, viz, D5, ']p., DH, "jlTl; as 
 
 (2) The suffix '^, which takes the tone when appended to nouna 
 ending in a consonant. This is constructed variously in respect to the 
 final syllable, sometimes shortening the ultimate vowel and some- 
 times not ; as Ctp, TiTa'iJ ; ^13^, "^"l^" • (§ ^4. 2. a, note 2. Compare 
 §126. 9. h.) 
 
 (3) The construct state of nouns singular ; as ^iT u'o«/, Q'^n'bN ^51 
 TicordofGod^ where the tone is thrown forward upon the second word. 
 See particularly § 54. 2. c. 
 
 Note 1 . In the construct state of the sixth and seventh declensions, 
 the final vowel usually remains unchanged ; but in the latter it is 
 sometimes shortened. In Dec. IX, final Seghol is changed to Tseri. 
 (§ 55. 5. b.) 
 
 Note 2. From the above statement it appears that the suffix-state 
 may have two forms, according as the suffix is light or grave. These 
 are called the light suffix-state, and the grave suffix-state. 
 
 Note 3. It will be seen that the grave suffixes DD, 'JD, of nouns 
 singular, never move the tone-syllable in nouns more than one 
 place, while in verbs they often move it two places. The reason of 
 this lies in the original position of the tone, which in verbs is often on 
 the penult ; and therefore, in order to rest on the grave suffix, must 
 move forward two places ; as "^ribbj^, with sufT. cb'^nlrUJ^ ; while in 
 nouns, the tone is on tlie final syllable, and therefore these suffixes can 
 move it but one place ; as '^^'i, 0^15' • In nouns of the sixth and 
 thirteenth declensions, where the tone appears to be on the penult, the 
 filial vowels being merely furtive disappear in declension, and leave 
 
§ 136. NOUNS ; VOWEL-CHANGES IN DECLENMON. 270 
 
 the suffixes to constitute the syllable next following the real tone-syl- 
 lable, as in other nouns. 
 
 The grave suffixes of nouns plural, being themselves composed of 
 two syllables, of course move the tone forward two places. 
 
 (c) When the tone Is moved forward two places, both 
 the uhimate and penult vowels of the ground-form, If mu- 
 table, generally fall awaj. 
 
 This rule includes the following additions and forms. 
 
 (1) The grave suffixes of nouns plural, viz. S^''-, ]?.''-, D^.'-. ? 
 irf- : as -»m, DD"'-\m, Drr^-^m &:c. 
 
 (2) The construct state of nouns plural; as *>i5"^, d3j~ ~ '''nS'^^. 
 
 For the mode in which the vowels that fall away are supplied, 
 see § 58' 
 
 t5. Feminine nouns suffer much less change by declen- 
 sion than masculines ; because, by the formation of the fem- 
 inine, most of the changes from the ground-form have al- 
 ready taken place (§ 132). A few other changes are 
 here noted. 
 
 (a) Feminines, which have a masculine form, are of course declin- 
 ed like masculines. 
 
 {b) Feminines in !n_, after changing the Tt into n(§ 135. 8), either 
 retain the final Qamets, or shorten it into Pattahh according as the n is 
 or is not joined to the suffix (§ 126. IV note 2). The construct uni- 
 formly has final Pattahh. 
 
 (c) Feminine Segholates in n_ or n_ follow the analogy of Dec. 
 VI. For a particular account of their vowel-changes, see § 150 and- 
 Dec. XIII in the paradigm. 
 
 {d) Plurals in ni follow the general rules in no. 4 above, as to 
 their mutable vowels. The final Hholem, being impure, is of course 
 never dropped. 
 
 t6. The following general rules for the suffixes of the 
 
 plural are derived from the foregoing principles. 
 
 (a) In plurals of the masculine form, light suffixes are 
 
280 § 137. nouns; arrangement of declensioiJS. 
 
 attached to the absolute state, — grave suffixes to the con- 
 struct state. 
 
 (Jj) In plurals of the feminine form, all the suffixes are 
 attached to the construct state. 
 
 § 137. Kouns ^ arrangemtnt of the declensions. 
 
 1 . The general principles of declension in Hebrew nouns have been 
 developed in the preceding section. But such is the great variety of 
 changes which occur in the course of flexion, arising from the nature 
 of the vowels in the ground-forms considered as immutable, mutable, 
 furtive &c. that it has been found most convenient to arrange the nouns 
 into thirteen distinct classes or declensions ; of which the first nine com- 
 prehend nouns of the masculine form, while the ybur last include nouns 
 of the feminine form. These declensions are exhibited in § 154 Par. II ; 
 and the intermediate sections are designed to afford a particular ac- 
 count of each. A paradigm of nouns dual (III) is also subjoined. 
 
 Note. It must not be supposed that all the nouns in the Hebrew 
 Bible can be definitely assigned to some one of these declensions. 
 Very many nouns occur only in one or two forms, and may therefore 
 not exhibit the characteristic marks of any declension. In such cases 
 all the actual forms are commonly noted in the lexicons. 
 
 2. The object of the paradigms is to exhibit nouns, both singular 
 and plural, in all their four states ; viz. the absolute, construct, light 
 guflix-state, and grave suffix-state. These are arranged across the 
 pages, in the manner best adapted to assist the memory of the learner. 
 All svjffixes^ of -whatever kind^ are attached to nouns in the same -way as 
 those of a similar nature exhibited in the jmradigms. 
 
 3. In the notes on the several declensions, contained in the follow- 
 ing section?, a particular account is given of the vowel-changes in each 
 declension. These, ol" course, are merely the applications of the prin- 
 ciples stated in i^ 136, 
 
§138. NOl'NS ; FIRST DECLENSION. 281 
 
 § 1 38. J^ouns ; frst declension, 
 
 tl. The first declension of nouns comprehends all. 
 whether monosyllabic or pollysyllabic, whose vowels are all 
 immutable, whatever those vowels may be. 
 
 E.g. -^^y, Dp,, -I-?., 2n2, y-^^^it., nsDb^72 &c. 
 
 The single circumstance that the vowels are immutable^ marks this 
 declension ; not the kind of vowels, nor the number of syllables. 
 
 2. In many cases it is easy to decide whether the vowels are im- 
 mutable, in others not. Thus in Vip, UJ^sb &c. the vowels are obvi- 
 ously immutable ; but the vowels in SN3, '«ii'^2 &c. can be kno^vn to 
 be immutable only from a lexicon or from a knowledge of etymology. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. All the vowels of the ground-form being immutable, all 
 the additions, as suffixes &c. are in general attached to the ground- 
 form without change. 
 
 Note 2. A very few nouns whose vowels are generally immutable, 
 sometimes suffer a change ; as tljns, const. "iIJ'^s Ezek. 26 : 10 ; '{'''l, 
 const. Ili Ps. 68:6; UJ-^n, const. UJnn Ex. 28: 1 1. Is. 44:12, 13; riNJ^, 
 const. "\Nni: Jer. 28: 10, 11, 12, 14. Such words may be said to be- 
 long, by usage of the punctators, both to the first and second declen- 
 sions. 
 
 Note 3. A few nouns whose vowels are immutable in the singu- 
 lar, appear in the plural as if their vowels were mutable. Thus "iTEit 
 has the plural D"^"12^ ; but it is more probably derived from an obso- 
 lete Segholate form rT^c:;: with a pure vowel (§ 132. 6. c). So the 
 plural construct form "'nNn^C, which is usually assigned to the ground- 
 form "iN^ii, probably comes from a form n~;.N\i:. 
 
 Note 4. Nouns of the form c in the paradigm, sometimes exchange 
 the impure Hholem for Shureq, as being rather shorter. (§ 52. 4. a. 
 Compare § 118. II. a.) 
 
 Note 5. In the case c^ the final guttural, being thrown into the 
 same syllable with the suffix (§ 36 rule 6), loses of course its furtive 
 Pattahh, and takes the vowel of the suffix if there he one, or other- 
 wise a composite Sheva. (§ 46. 2.) 
 
282 I J 39. NOUNS ; second declension. 
 
 § 139. Nouns J second declension, 
 
 tl. The second declension includes nouns with final 
 Qamets or Pattahh pure and mutable, whether monosylla- 
 bles, or polysyllables with their preceding vowels immur 
 table. 
 
 Only a few nouns with final Pattahh are declined after the mod- 
 el of this declension. See note 2 below. 
 
 2. In the construct state singular, before the grave suf- 
 fixes, and sometimes before ^|, final Qamets goes into Pat- 
 tahh (§ 136. 4. by In the plural, the final vowel falls 
 away in the construct state and before the grave suffixes. 
 (§ 136. 4. c.) 
 
 The penult vowel, being immutable, is of course not affected by 
 the rules in § 136. 4. 
 
 3. In many nouns of this declension, especially in those derived 
 from irregular verbs, the final vowel is of doubtful appearance ; and 
 the mutability of it can be determined only by the lexicon or etymol- 
 ogy. In monosyllables, the final Qamets and Pattahh appear like the 
 similar forms in Dec. VIII ; and it is only by the form of the suffix 
 state, by the plural, or by etymology, that the student can distinguish 
 in some nouns, whether they belong to the second declension or to the 
 eighth. Thus n^, plural C^a^ is of Dec. II ; but d^, plur. D''?32 is of 
 Dec. VIll. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. In the case a in the paradigm, D^^"^ would by analogy 
 be Dp.'Si ; but such is the form in Gen. 9 : 5, probably from a ground- 
 form D".. So T> the hand before a suffix beginning with a consonant, 
 has both DlDn: and tD5.1\ (§ 136. 4. h.) 
 
 Note 2. Cases like c and d occur very seldom, and are to be re- 
 cognized as belonging to this declension only by their forms in the 
 suffix state and plural. 
 
 Note 3. Participles in Niphal of the form ^12 J? D fall regularly un- 
 der this declension ; but several of them form their plurals as if they 
 
§ 140. NOUNS ; THIRD DECLENSION. J83 
 
 were of Dec. VII ; as N^p2, plur. D\^^r23 &lc. Such plurals ;)re 
 probably derived from forms lilie NQt::. See § 121. 11. r. 
 
 § 110, J^ouns ; third declension. 
 
 tl. The third declension comprises all nouns which have 
 an immutable vowel in the final syllable, and Qainets or 
 Tueri pure and mutable in the penult. 
 
 It makes no difference whether a word be dissyllabic, as T^p,© ; or 
 polysyllabic, as 'ji"'!?3 &c. 
 
 2. Out of the ground-form or absolute state, the mu- 
 table vowel of the penult falls away. (§ 136. 4.) 
 
 The final vowel, being immutable, is not in general affected by the 
 rules in § 136. 4. 
 
 3. In many nouns of this declension also, it requires the aid of the 
 lexicon or of etymology to determine the mutability of the penult vow- 
 els. Thus li"'~)a would seem to belong here, while it really belongs to 
 Dec. I ; because it stands for H""^?, and the Q,amet3 is therefore im- 
 pure and immutable. (§ 23. 7.) 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGIVr. 
 
 Note 1. The examples in a, t, c, give the usual forms of this de- 
 clension. In the cases d and e also, the penult and final vowels con- 
 form to the rule in no. 2 above. But in another respect, nouns of these 
 forms undergo a change which is mi generis, viz. the Daghesh forte of 
 the ground-form is dropped in declension ; as const. 'ji"lpi instead of 
 ■ji-iDT &c. (§ 45. 4 note 2.) 
 
 Some nouns, of the above form, beginning with a guttural, after 
 dropping the Daghesh as above, assume Seghol under the guttural in- 
 stead of Hhireq parvum ; as '}T"'Tn, const. ]^'''[r}. Job 33: 15; 'ji'^\L*3?, 
 plur. D"'3h">uy Lev. 14: 10 &c. This change probably arises from the 
 influence of the guttural (§ 58. 1); though other words of similar 
 form neglect it ; as "JT^^y, const. ]i5i2< &c. 
 
 Note 2. Some nouns of the form/, especially those derived fromi 
 verbs "'y, exchange the impure Hholem for Shureq out of the absolute 
 state..Compare § 118. II. a, and § 138 note 4. 
 
284 § 141. nouns; fourth declension. 
 
 Note 3. In example «■, the Tseri of the penult under the initial 
 Aleph^ is by custom immutable in the singular ; the orthography being 
 modelled after the Syriac pronunciation (§ 47. 5. b). The plural con- 
 forms to the general rule in no. 2 above. 
 
 Note 4. In example /t, the construct form with Q,amets Hhateph 
 occurs only before a Maqqeph and is very unfrequent, being against 
 the general analogy of the declension and of the language. The fol- 
 lowing are probably all the instances of this form which occur viz. 
 -i^T'i Ps. 145: 8. Nah. 1: 3 Qeri ; - '^jJrUJ Ex. 21: 11; - 'niiq Job 
 17:^9. Prov. 22: 11 ; " -jasp Ex. 30: 23. So with a pure" suffix 
 l31D3;ari Ezek. 5 : 7. Compare § 145, and Dec. VIII in the paradigm. 
 
 Note 5. The word "JIT^ has the plural form d-^l^^ with Vav 
 moveable, like nouns of Dec. VI. (§ 143. note 18.) 
 
 Note 6. In some words, particularly those with a guttural or Resh 
 for the penult consonant, the punctuation is inconsistent with itself; the 
 penult vowel being treated sometimes as mutable and sometimes as 
 immutable. E. g. C'^.D, const. O'^'np as of Dec. Ill; plur. Cl''D"'*iD as 
 of Dec. I; plur. const. ■^D'^"1D and '^D""nD as of both declensions. This 
 probably arose from uncertainty, whether or not the vowel was pro- 
 longed and rendered immutable before the guttural or Resh. (§ 24. 7.) 
 
 §141. JVouns ; fourth declension. 
 
 t 1. The fourth declension includes all dissyUahic nouns 
 with Qamets pure in the ultimate, and Qamcts or Tseri pure 
 in the penult. 
 
 2. The vowels of both syllables of the ground-form 
 being mutable, the rules for the vowel-changes in § 136. 4 
 apply to nouns of this declension in their full extent. 
 
 («) Out of the ground-form, the penult vowel always 
 falls away. 
 
 (6) In the construct singular, before the grave suffixes, 
 and sometimes before % the Jinal Qamets shortens into 
 Pattahh. (§ 136. 4. b.) 
 
 (c) In the plural construct and before the plural 
 grave suflixes, both the vowels of the ground-form fall 
 
§ 1 12. NOUNS ; FIFTH bF.r:r,ENSION. 286 
 
 away (§ 136. 4. c) ; and then a new vowel, viz. Hhircq 
 or Pattahh, is inserted. (§ 58. 1.) 
 
 3. The siinic (lifTicnlty occurs horo, as in the precedin<^ tleclen- 
 sions, in respect to determining what vowels are really mutable. See 
 § 138. 2, § 139. 3. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. The examples o, 6, exhibit the regular forms of this de- 
 clension, hi the plural construct and grave suffix state of c, the ini- 
 tial letter being a guttural takes Pattahh instead of Hhireq (§ 58. 1). 
 In the same parts of J, the penult guttural takes a composite Sheva, 
 and of course determines the vowel of the preceding letter (§ 58. 2). 
 A few nouns with gutturals, however, assume Hhireq in these cases, 
 like nouns without gutturals. One of these is exhibited in e. 
 
 Note 2. In a few nouns also without gutturals, the supplied vow- 
 el in the plural construct and grave suflfix state is Pattahh ; as p|;3, 
 plur. const. "3:3 &c. (§ 58. 1 note.) 
 
 Note 3. In nouns derived from verbs Mb, the final Qamets is treat- 
 ed as if rendered immutable by the accidental concurrence of the N 
 (§ 52. 3) ; as NS::, const. NliE &;c. This happens in the singular and 
 in the plural in D"- ; but Nla^ has likewise a plural in DT (§ 133. 5) 
 in which the Qamets is mutable ; as plur. DTNlii, const. nTMS:^, with 
 suff. Dnixn^ &c. 
 
 Note 4. A very few nouns, like those in /?, i, exhibit in the con- 
 struct and part of the suffix state singular a Segholate form, like nouns 
 of Dec. VI. In other respects they conform to the model of Dec. IV. 
 
 § 142. J\i'ouns ; fifth declension. 
 
 11. The fifth declension comprehends dissyllabic nouns 
 with Tseri pure in the ultimate, and Qamets pure in the 
 penult. 
 
 2. The vowel-changes arising from declension are in 
 general the same here as in Dec. IV (§ 141. 2), with 
 the following exception; vi.^ that in the construct singular, 
 
286 § 142. nouns; fifth declension. 
 
 before the grave suffixes, and sometimes before '7\, the 
 final Tserl is exchaiisjed for Pattahh. (l36. 4. ^.) 
 
 This exchange of Tserifor Pattahh instead of its usual correspond- 
 ing short vowel Seghol, is what distinguishes nouns of this declension 
 from those of Dec. IV. 
 
 3. IVouus of doubtful appearance occur here, of course, as well as 
 in the preceding declensions. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. The example in a gives the regular forms of the declen- 
 sion ; that in b exhibits forms with a guttural. 
 
 Note 2. The examples c, d, present cases of a Segholate form of 
 the construct singular ; the latter having also a regular form. All the 
 other forms of these nouns, and of the few others which resemble 
 them in the construct, are conformed to the usual laws of this declen- 
 sion. Compare § 141 note 4. 
 
 Note 3. As in Dec. IV (§ 141 note 3), so here ; the final vowel of 
 nouns derived from verbs Nb is treated as immutable on account of the 
 final N. An example of this kind is given in e. Such are nV^, N'?.^, 
 N'7,'] &,c. A few other nouns also form their construct state singular 
 in the same manner, viz. "JV, const. II'; Ps. 69: 3; nS^, const. Hr") 
 Ps. 27 : 12 ; Uian /-re, const, "ii 72 tl. These last are not found with suf- 
 fixes, nor in the plural. 
 
 Note 4. In a few words whose final Tsei-i, from their derivation, 
 would appear to be pure, this vowel is nevertheless retained in de- 
 clension as if it were impure. Thus in example/", "j'tlj", piur. D"'3'r'!'i 
 "^l-p"", &c. So ysn, bSN, ns-^lJ, and n73;iJ which has the plur. const. 
 "n^.ip Ps. 35: 26, and "^r.^'i; Is. 24 : 7. 
 
 Note 5. The noun ij^y retains the final Tseri, except in the con- 
 struct plural. Here the regular form is ""^py, like "^ppT ; but it is twice 
 written with Daghesh euphonic (§ 29. 10) "^j^y Gen. 49: 17. Judg. 
 5 : 22. So QD-'i^? Is. 58 : 3 if derived from n^.y ; but Gescnius in his 
 lexicon derives it from a form a^i'. 
 
 § 143. Js'ouns ^ sixth dfclension, 
 
 tl. The sixth declension comprises dissyllabic nouns 
 whicli have the tone on the penult and a Jurtive vowel in 
 the final syllable. 
 
§ 113. NOUNS: SIXTH DFxr,E\si()\. 287 
 
 In other words, tliis declension includes all Segholate nouns of two 
 syllables ; excepting a few nouns and infinitives witli tlie fcuiinine end- 
 ing n_, n_, which belong to Dec. XUl. The furiive vowel of the 
 final syllable is Seghol, Pattahh, or Illurcq parvum. (§ 59. 2.) 
 
 Note. All Segholate foi'nis are fuctiiious and merely euphonic 
 (§ 59. 2). They appear only in the absolute and construct states of 
 the singular ; for all nouns of lliis species, when they receive <iny ac- 
 cession, neglect the furtive vowel and develope their original state, 
 which is a monosyllable ending with two consonants ; as ^r.", ^^^« 
 with sufi'. isra &c. 
 
 2. The Ibllowins: arc the rules for the vowcl-chanijcs 
 Sec. in declension. 
 
 (rt) The construct singular is generally the same as 
 the absolute. 
 
 The construct state retains in general the furtive vowel, for the 
 same reason that it is inserted in the absolute, viz. to avoid tile se- 
 quence of two final consonants without a vowel. (§59. 1, 2.) 
 
 (b) The suffixes of the singular are usually appended 
 to the original form of the noun ; see note under no. 1. 
 
 (c) The plural absolute assumes a form like that of 
 nouns of Dec. IV. 
 
 {d) In the plural construct and before the grave suffixes, 
 the penult vowel of the plural absolute is dropped, and 
 the original vowel of the ground-form is restored. 
 
 Note. The plural absolute of this declension is quite anomalous, 
 and cannot be derived from either the original or factitious forms of 
 the singular, by any of the usual laws of declension. 
 
 3. Nouns of this declension are mostly derived from verbs ; and of 
 
 couree exhibit the radical letters of the verbs from which they spring. 
 
 Hence, they may be divided into regular and irregular Segholates ; the 
 
 former comprehending all those which have their three consonants 
 
 moveable, as "^p^,, nsb, 'ij'ip &,c ; the latter including those in which 
 
 one of the radicals becomes quiescent, either in the absolute state or in 
 
 the course of declension, as DVZ, const. ni53; n';'\, const. rr^T &c. 
 
 Segholates of this latter class are limited to those derived from verhe 
 ' ' '•. 
 
 li' or ■'y, and -? ; see V below. 
 
288 § 143. nouns; sixth declension. 
 
 4. The original vowel of the monosyllabic ground-forms is pure 
 in all cases and sometimes short, and is either of the ^, £, or O class ; as 
 ^!:^, "]!JD or '^CD, p^fj!, Vipi &c. In the factitious forms, the origin- 
 al vowel is often changed to Seghol by the influence of the furtive 
 vowel (§ 60. 3), or if short it is lengthened. 
 
 5. Segliolate nouns may be divided into three classes, 
 according to the original vowels of tijeir ground-forms; and 
 maj be called Segholates of the Jj, E^ or O class. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 /. Regular Segholates of the A class. 
 
 Note 1. The example a presents a genuine Segholate of the A 
 class with all its forms throughout. The penultimate Seghol stands 
 uniformly for Pattahh (4 supra), and is commonly changed to Qamets 
 by the influence of pause accents (§ 60. 7. a). For the omission of 
 Daghesh lene in "^^^,72 &c. see § 29. 15. a. 
 
 Note 2. The examples in fe, c, give the usual forms when the pe- 
 nult or final radical is a guttural, and where the furtive vowel is of 
 course Pattahh (§ 59. 2). A i^ew nouns with gutturals, however, con- 
 form to the model in a ; as d»7.,.- , l^n^. &.c. The noun yi.X with the 
 article is always y'^.J^n (§ 55. 5. o); and the names of several letters 
 of the Hebrew alphabet also have a like form ; as PiVn, n^." &;c. 
 
 Note 3. In the construct state of c is exhibited the form ^TT, 
 which a £ew nouns of the A class assume ; compare the construct of 
 Dec. V. So Tirj, const, "i jn. 
 
 Note 4. A very few words of this class occur in their original mon- 
 ^psyllabic state ; as i;\i, NyiJ, ""1N a proper name. 
 
 //. Regular Segholates of the E doss. 
 
 Note 5. The examples (/, f, give the regular forms of the E class ; 
 and those in/", o-, give the usual forms with an initial guttural. A few 
 nouns with gutturals, conform to the model in d ; as "np.n, p72y &c. 
 The noun T^"], makes T^y'^J-^ 2 Sam. 22: 36 and T^rj;: Ps. 85: 8. 
 
 Note 6. The example /; exhibits the forms with a final guttural, 
 and also another form of the construct which a few nouns of this cl.iss 
 adopt, viz. :i55t5, ■s^h &,c. Compare note 3 above. 
 
 Note 7. In cases like e and ^, the Segholate forms of this class re- 
 semble those of the A class; as -i5p, ^';.^;, ^b?2 &c. The suffix state, 
 however, at once exhibits the distinction between them, by present- 
 
§ 11.J. nouns; sixth declension. 280 
 
 ins: (he original vowels of the monosyllabic forms; as ""lijp, "'prn 
 ^rr^ &c. 
 
 Note 8. A very few words of this class occur in their original 
 state; as NUn, "i")?. &,c. 
 
 * * * 
 
 Note 9. JS'outis of both the A and E classes. A very few nouns adopt 
 jn some cases the forms both of the A class and of (he E class. Thus 
 "Tir; (note 3) makes in the suffix state singular iTirii but with ri_ 
 paragogic and in the construct plural i( is niTn and "^"llin. So \':\ 
 and alrn. In like manner u;S?. has the fern. M*«i?:3? and rt'iJSS. 
 
 ///. Regular Segholatcs of the O class. 
 
 Note 10. The example i presents the usual regular forms of the 
 O class. A few nouns, as in j, have Qibbuts in the suffix state instead 
 of Qamels Hhateph. 
 
 Note 11. The forms with a guttural are given in k. A Syriac 
 form is also exhibited which sometimes occurs in the suffix state of 
 these nouns, viz. Vr>b instead of i^i'E (§ 60. 6). The suffix form 
 M^i'S is common in this kind of nouns, instead of 'Tr!:S''2, or rather TibsE 
 
 I;tx ';:t^ 1 : t: -r 
 
 by § 58. 3. This forjn is even found in some nouns without a guttu- 
 ral ; as "^^taj? &c. 
 
 Note 12. The example I exhibits a composite Sheva, viz. Hhateph 
 Qamets, under the first letter of the plural absolute. This is follow- 
 ed only by the nouns 'il^'in and nni«, all others plurals having simple 
 Sheva. See the next note. 
 
 Note 13. Several anomalies occur in nouns of this class. 
 
 (a) In the vowel-points ; as UJIUJ, plur. D'^Tp'^'d shu-rd-shlm ; Tii'7'p, 
 plur. Q''''e'"j^ qu-dhd-shlm and a'"»p'lj^ ; btlN, plur. D^'brrN, 1""^?!^, '^'''?!^i< 
 by Syriasm lor D'^'^rj^. ^c. (§ 47. 5. b) ; but plur. const. "'bt^N &,c. 
 
 (6) In formation ; as "j^j^, plur. ni:'n2 ; na':, n^!^5; ; ns"!, 
 ninri:. These plurals probably come from forms like ins, rr'aD, nb2. 
 
 The noim CUJp Prov. 22: 21 exhibits the original form of this class. 
 IF. Syriac Segholatcs. 
 
 Note 14. The original form of (he Hebrew Segholates, as above 
 stated, is ^i;73, ^20, "Ijpi &.c. As distinguished from this form, Se- 
 gholates in Syriac throw the vowel between the two last letters of the 
 word ; as "];", "lED &.c. These forms are imitated in the following 
 Hebrew words ; viz. \iJ5"7? ^■5'P ^^ pause DDU;, all the known forms 
 of which are given in m and n ; and "^5^ once Ps. 18 : 26. 
 
 The nouns "iN'3 and "nNs have forms like words of this class in 
 
!i90 § H3. NOUNS ; sixfH declension. 
 
 the consti'uct plural, viz. nil^a, ">";iN2; but all their other forms are 
 of Dec. 1. For Tbii; see note 22 below. 
 
 Note 15. All infinitives construct in Kal, except those with a fem- 
 inine ending in some classes of irregular verbs, have the forms of Syr- 
 iac Segholates, and receive suffixes in the same manner. These have 
 been fully described and exhibited in § 126. IV notes 6 — 8, and § 127 
 
 Par. XXJ. 
 
 V. Irregular Segholates. 
 
 These may be arranged according to the kinds of irregular verbs 
 from which they are derived. Like regular Segholates, they exhibit 
 the forms of the .^^ jE, and O classes. 
 
 (a) Segholates from verbs IS? and "'5!'. 
 
 Note 16. Segholates of the A class from verbs T^ and ''2> assume 
 two forms. 
 
 (1) They exhibit a moveable Vav as their middle radical, which 
 out of the absolute state becomes quiescent in Shureq or Hholem, and 
 presents the forms in o and p of the paradigm. Out of the absolute 
 state, therefore, these nouns belong to the Jirst declension. The only 
 exception is bl^., which has the Vav moveable throughout, and is de- 
 clined like ^1?.^.. 
 
 (2) They exhibit a moveable Yodh as their middle radical, which 
 out of the absolute state becomes quiescent in Tseri or Hhireq mag- 
 num, and presents the forms in q and r of the paradigm. Hence, 
 these nouns also, out of the absolute state, belong to Dec. I. The only 
 exception is, that a few of them have a regular plural with Vav move- 
 able, as in r. These are b";n, d"?^n ; yv a fountam, niD;;5? ; ^1^ a 
 young ass., tD^"]^??. 
 
 Note 17. In the E class, these nouns are like 'i''2 for "J^s, and 
 'i''! for yS..') having the radical Yodh quiescent in the absolute state, 
 and therefore belonging wholly to Dec. I. 
 
 Note 18. In the class, the radical Vav is quiescent in the abso- 
 lute state and throughout the singular; as ^^T for I^.T, and "ir^i; for 
 "I'^u:. Of course the singular of all nouns of this description belongs 
 to Dec. I. The plural also, in some nouns, has the Vav quiescent, 
 and belongs to Dec. I ; while in others it has the Vav moveable and 
 takes a regular form, as in s and t. 
 
 {b) Segholates from verbs 117 ■ 
 
 Note 19. The Segholates from verbs i-iV are of course of the form 
 ■'p or 1? (§ 122. 1). In consequence of having a quiescent for their 
 
§ 143. NOL'NS; SIXTH DECLENSION. 291 
 
 fmal letter, they do not take the genuine Segholatc form uilli a I'lir- 
 live vowel ; but either tlirow forward the vowel of the ground-form 
 between the two last radicals and conform it to the final quiescent, as 
 '"IE instead of "^"ID or '"')h ; or else conform the furtive vowel to the 
 final quiescent, as nn2 instead of I'nz ( § 48. 2. a.). It is only in the 
 suffix state and plural that nouns of the former kind ("^"ic) develope 
 themselves to be of the sixtk declension instead of the Jirst ; while 
 those of the latter form (^ni) arc not found in the Hebrew Bible out 
 of the absolute state. 
 
 Note 20. The example u belongs probably to the A class, and pre- 
 sents the usual forms and also the form of the absolute in pause. Light 
 suffixes beginning with a vowel are commonly preceded by Hhireq 
 under the first radical ; while before Tj, Seghol is usual. These forms 
 are all anomalous. The examples r, to, exhibit the forms of the E 
 and O classes. 
 
 Note 21. Few of the Segholates from verbs "rh have plurals. Of 
 those which have them, the usual form is given in x ; and in y is exhibited 
 the double form of the plural which four^ or five nouns of this sort as- 
 sume, by exchanging Yodh for Aleph. (§ 39. 2. c.) 
 
 VI. Segholates with anomalous plurals. 
 
 Note 22. Several Segholate nouns, in the plural absolute., drop the 
 appropriate vowels of that form and take the usual vowels of the con- 
 struct ; as -|t:y, plur. D"^'-^^; instead of D"'"}'^?. ; ynuj, n''<3"2J ; J?\2;ri, 
 a-'r^in ; Vruj, D-ibt" ; "'^'Ji i^"~'^ for T^^^t ; T'";''^^? &c. v:si< Prov. 
 25: 11; d''::2|:"i; ; n":2?l; D'^ZUS; which five hist come from ground- 
 forms which do not now occur; viz. T^'.i<, ].pi<, Dp.'iJ, "jiri, ]p2. 
 
 Note 23. In the plural construct several forms occur with Daghesh 
 forte euphonic; as pVfi, "'^Vn for "'Jr.i:n ; n'43:?, nii'iijy for rriZ'&J. 
 So also Vr20 for Vr^O ; ninj:;j: with a composite Sheva without the 
 Daghesh, for ninpj'j. (§ 29. 10.) 
 
 * * * 
 
 Note 24. The paragogic ^_. when appended to Segholates, is at- 
 tached to the original form of the word, like light suffixes ; as yiN, 
 "^e-nt* ; dnp, MaVp.; b:|, n!r:S ; DD-JLJ, r;»D-^ &c. But the tone uni- 
 formly remains on the penult syllable. (§ 34. 2. /i.) 
 
 Those nouns denominative also, which are derived from Segholates. 
 are formed by attaching their formative endings, viz. "ji, ]_, n^, "i-.. 
 to the original monosyllabic form of the Segholate. Thc^e endings 
 always take the tone. 
 
292 § 144. nouns; seventh declension. 
 
 § 144. Jsfoims } seventh declension, 
 
 tl. The seventh declension comprises those nouns with 
 final Tseri pure which are either monosyllabic, or have the 
 preceding vowels immutable. 
 
 This declension includes most of the present participles masculine 
 of regular verbs ; see the paradigm of participles, § 127 Par. XX. 
 
 2. The following are the changes from declension. 
 
 (a) The construct singular is generally like the abso- 
 lute ; in a few cases it exchanges final Tseri for Pattahh. 
 
 (6) Out of the absolute state final Tseri generally falls 
 away, except in the plural absolute ol monosyllables. 
 
 (c) Before suffixes beginning with a consonant, where 
 the final letter of the noun takes a vocal Sheva, a new 
 vowel arises, viz. Hhlreq, Pattahh, or Seghol. (§ 58. 1.) 
 
 3. In this declension, also, many nouns occur whose vowels are of 
 doubtful appearance ; and which can be distinguished as belonging 
 here, only by the suffix or plural forms. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. The example in a presents the usual forms of monosylla- 
 bles ; final Tseri before Maqqeph being sometimes shortened to Seghol. 
 Those in b and c exhibit the usual mode of declining all participles of 
 regular verbs which fall into this declension. The participles of 
 verbs with a final guttural make their construct state in Pattahh, like 
 d and e. 
 
 Note 2. The example in d has final Pattahh in the construct. 
 Several other nouns, even without gutturals, take the same form ; as 
 nsp73, const. *i3p» ; ^U)y?3, ^^i"^ &.C. A few others, besides the 
 Pattahh in the construct, exhibit in the first syllable an exchange of 
 Pattahh for Hhireq parvum ; viz. f?")'?, ")2*J^, nr"^^, nn'J:^, ■)^;''P^. 
 These are found only in the absolute and construct singular. 
 
 Note 3. In e is an example of nouns, which before "^i C3 &c. adopt 
 
§145. nouns; eighth declension. ' 293 
 
 Seghoi instead of Hhireq parvum (2 supra) ; as u;;;, "tjUJ;: &c. The 
 noun t3:3N has DpDpni* with Tseri ; and NDii makes ^NCS and ^^^3, 
 dropping the Daghesh tbrtc and neglecting tlie vowel. (§ 45. 4 note 2. 
 Compare § 140 note 1.) 
 
 Note 4. The forms in/ are those of some monosyllahles which re- 
 tain Tseri throughout, except in the construct and grave suffix state of 
 the plural. Some polysyllables also imitate monosyllahles in retain- 
 ing the tinal Tseri in the plural absolute ; viz. D^'-i^V''^, D"'y2"), niTa^siUJ, 
 C^sVui", 3''-\i:o, D"0-"is, D"'q:nJ<. The monosyllable y-i retains 
 Tseri throughout, and therefore falls under Dec. I. So D'^ySl (from 
 ^72) has the const, plur. "y"2, but with grave suffix DH'^yTp. Ezek. 
 7: 19. 
 
 Anomalous forms, 
 
 NoTF. 5. (fl) The noun n:i toh, with Pattahh in the absolute state, 
 has once """iz Prov. 31 : 2, as of this declension. So "JT, plur. D":! ; 
 and DTiQ men from the obsolete n'Q. 
 
 (6) Several nouns with tinal Hholem assume tlie forms of nouns 
 of this declension; viz. Vs'i^X, plur. mrSUJi*; 'ip'])?, "^"^P.lBi ^"^^ 
 r.nas, D'^nwa, '^ntt2 : see & 133. 8. 
 
 T' • T;n' " t:it ' i 
 
 § 145. Kouns ', eighth declension, 
 
 tl. The eighth declension includes all nouns which in- 
 sert Daghesh forte in the final letter of their ground- 
 forms, when they receive accession. 
 
 The nouns of this declension exhibit different final vowels, and they 
 all have Daghesh forte implied in the final letter of the absolute state, 
 although it is never written ; as D^ for 73^ = ^f^^ ; 51N for EN from 
 7\':h k,c. (§ 45. 3). Hence, it is only the suffix or plural form that 
 distinguishes words as belonging here ; because in case of any addi- 
 tion the Daghesh is developed ; as n^, plur. D'^T^^ ; 5)N, with suflF. iEJJ. 
 
 2. The following are the changes from declension. 
 («) Tlie construct state is generally the same as the 
 ahsolute ; but before Maqqeph the ultimate vowels Qa- 
 39 
 
294 § 145. nouns; eighth declension. 
 
 mets, Tseri, and Hholem, are usually shortened to Pat- 
 tahh, Seghol, and Qamets Hhateph. (§ 54. 4.) 
 
 (h) Out oi' the ground-form and construct singuhir, the 
 Daghesh forte of the final letter appears ; and final Qa- 
 mets, Tseri, and Hholem, are usually shortened to Pat- 
 tahh, Hireq parvum, and Qihbuts. (§ 54. 5.) 
 
 (c) Penultimate vowels, if mutable, conform to the 
 rules in § 136. 4. 
 
 3. The following classes of words fall under this declension. 
 
 (a) Nouns derived from verbs 2>:f ; as pn, f2? &c. (§ 115. 1 note 1); 
 and also the participles of those verbs in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal. 
 
 {b) Other words in which the penult letter is dropped or assimi- 
 lated to the final one ; as 2b for tsib ; infinitive nn for n;.r &c. 
 
 (c) Some words which are either primitive or derived from a 
 Pilel form of verbs ; as !:)2.n, ■jCj^, &c. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. The examples in a, 6, c, present the usual forms of 
 monosyllables with Qamets or Pattahh. The construct C^ is found 
 only in the proper name >1^D D2 ; while C occurs in ri"i*:.3 ""D" Num. 
 34: 11 ; comp. 2 K. 25 : 13 &c. The noun 5.n always has the con- 
 struct Ji^. A few nouns have both Qamets and Pattahh in the abso- 
 lute state ; as DSf or Di', in or nn &,c. and all these have Pattahh in 
 the construct. The exchange in c of Pattahh for Hhireq parvum is 
 quite anomalous, and is found in the following words, viz. JjD, DS, "2, 
 nn, ^abi}, AniT:, iD^, which are all declined like ^72. 
 
 Note 2. The forms in d are the usual ones of monosyllables with 
 Tseri. The construct here (as also in e and f) has two forms, accord- 
 ing as it is or is not followed by Maqqeph ; see above in no. 2. a. In 
 the suffix state &c. a few nouns of this sort anomalously exchange 
 Tseri for Pattahh; as "iS, i:3; ns?, with suffix "'n^', but with r^ para- 
 gogic TiT)^ kc. Nouns with final Seghol shorten it into Hhireq parvum ; 
 as ^791?, V:r72-;D.^ 
 
 Note 3. The examples in e and J" give the forms of nouns with 
 Hholem pure. The noun fy in / varies as to its forms ; having them 
 sometimes with Qamets Hhateph as in the paradigm, and sometimes 
 with Qibbuts; as "'T^, DDT;^ &,c. Once ^;ni? Ps. 81 : 2 with Shureq 
 for Qibbuts. 
 
§110. KO!.'N>;; NI.VTH DECLENSION. 295 
 
 Note 4. In g and h are examples of nouns with penult vowels ; 
 of which that of the former is /wrp, and that of the latter impure. In i 
 the construct is always 'n before the word "nrt", but is ^n before 
 other nouns, probably for the sake of distinction ; as rfy^D ^n Gen. 42 : 
 15. So also ■'■5, const. "*". A few other nouns ending with Yodh have 
 the plural like that of ■^n; as •"ib, D' •;!: ; "'ic, 2N^i: &.c. (§ 133. 1. b.) 
 Note 5. When the tiiial letter wliich would by analogy be doub- 
 led is a guttural or Re^h, the Daghesh is of course excluded and the 
 preceding vowel lengthened (§ 4G. 1). Hence, nouns which would 
 otherwise belong here assume forms which cause them to fall under 
 other declensions ; as n"lJ, with suff. nt), derived from "^"^'J^, but hav- 
 ing forms like those of Dec. II. So nV, plur. C'^n!:, like Dec. I &c. 
 
 Note 6. A few nouns have forms partly of this declension and 
 partly of others ; as nN a ploughshare^ plur. Cri*, D^'nN ; but also 
 iriN, DTiwN| of Dec. I. See also in the lexicons D'^3n?a, fi'^I^D;, and 
 also the plurals of nouns ending in Yodh. See note 4 above, and 
 § 133. 1. b. 
 
 § 146, Jiouns ; ninth declension. 
 
 tl- The ninth declension comprises all those words 
 ending in n_, which are derived Irom verbs H^. 
 
 2. The following are the changes from declension. 
 
 {a) In tlie construct singular, final Seghol is changed 
 to Tsen. 
 
 (6) With suffixes &c. the ending n- is dropped. 
 
 (c) Penultimate vowels, if mutable, conform to the 
 rules in § 136. 4. 
 
 Note. In the construct, Seghol remains in a few cases ; as iij;'^ 
 ^V."2~ 1 K. 4 : 5 ; so Jer. 17 : 18. The usual change to Tseri is quite 
 anomalous (§ 55. 5. 6). With suffixes, these nouns imitate the verbs 
 from which they are derived. (§ 126 a.) 
 
296 §§ 117, 148. NOUNS ; tenth and eleventh declensions. 
 
 § 147. J^ouns ^ tenth declension, 
 
 tl. The tenth declension includes all nouns with the 
 feminine ending »!_ , which have the preceding vowels 
 immutable. 
 
 2. In the construct state u_ becomes ri_. ; before 
 suffixes it becomes n_ or fl- (§ 136, 5. 6). The plural 
 is usually in fl'l. 
 
 Note. When it is said above, that nouns which belong' here have 
 their vowels immutable^ the remark applies to the vowels in the/emt- 
 inine forms of nouns simply, and not as compared with the vowels of 
 masculine ground-forms. Thus nb^lii, 5^73 n, rtj^n &,c. exhibit no 
 change of penult vowels in the course of inflection, and are therefore 
 assigned to this declension ; but a change has already taken place 
 in deriving these feminines from the masculine forms i?i"J^, Cn, 'pT\. 
 (§ 132.) 
 
 § 148. Kouns ; eleventh declension, 
 
 tl. The eleventh declension comprehends all nouns 
 with the feminine ending M-, which have a mutable Qa- 
 mets or Tseri in the penult. 
 
 The same remarks on the vowels apply here, as in the preced- 
 ing section. (§ 147. 2 note.) 
 
 2. The changes Irom declension are the same as in 
 Dec. X ; except that here, the mutable vowel of the pe- 
 nult falls away in the construct state and before suffixes. 
 (§ 136. 5.) 
 
 3. There is a considerable number of nouns apparently belonging 
 to this declension, and which from their derivation would seem to have 
 their penult vowels mutable, but which do not suffer any change in 
 those vowels from inflection. Such are ^iVx, ^TN^rri, ~Vt^ ^^- ""^ 
 so nbta, nbojjt, n3-)3 &c. all of which belong to Dec. iV Indeed, of 
 nouns of this sort with penult Tseri, the greater number have it im- 
 mutable in all their forms. 
 
§149. nouns; twelfth declension. 297 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. The examples in a and b give the usual forms. Those 
 in c, d^ e, exhibit forms where a new vowel arises, according to the 
 rules in § 58. 1. 
 
 Note 2. There is a considerable number of nouns which, out of the 
 absolute state, do not exhil)it the usual forms of this declension, but 
 substitute for them the Segholate forms of Dec. XIII. Thus in the 
 example in y, the forms npj:r72, '^nr'bJ373 &,c. are used instead of 
 nDr^:^, \-]3r^a &c. So nns^j^, const. nnV4^'3 &-c. Nouns of this 
 description are mostly noted in the lexicons. 
 
 Note 3. A few nouns are treated in declension as if they belong- 
 ed partly here, and partly to Dec. X ; as ~D^, const. DB"^, but with 
 suff. Ti^i ; nrn3, const, nra:, but with suff. "'inb:?^ ; so ri^N/oi, 
 
 ?TT13 &.C. ' 
 
 § 149. J^ouns ; twelfth declension, 
 
 t 1. The twelfth declension includes only those femi- 
 nine nouns in H- which are derived from Segholates of 
 Dec. VI. 
 
 The feminine ending is attached to the original form of the Seg- 
 holate ; as '^V.'?., feni. ri3b:o &.c. so that these nouns have the appear- 
 ance of belonging to Dec. X. 
 
 2. Nouns of this declension are declined precisely like 
 those of Dec. X, except in the plural absolute ; which, 
 in all but the termination Hi, is formed like the plural of 
 Dec. VI. 
 
 E. g. Masc. •T^Vti, fern, nsbj: ; masc. plur. CSbti, fem.plur. nisbu. 
 
 Hence, it is only the plural absolute which serves to distinguish 
 these nouns. Thus !^^^73 from its form might seem to belong here ; 
 but it has the plural DTli?^, which shews it to be of Dec. X. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGIVi;. 
 
 Note 1. The example in a is derived from a noun of the .'3 class 
 (§ 143. 4) ; those in 6 and c from nouns of the E class ; and that in d 
 from a noun of the O class. The forms in e are those of a noun with 
 a penultimate guttural. 
 
 Note 2. In two nouns which have Vav moveable in the penult of 
 
298 §160. nouns; thirteenth declension. 
 
 the singular, the Vav quiesces in the plural; as masc. ^i.^., fern. 
 rib"]?, fern. plur. nijjiy and sing, with n parag, '7\r)bb ; so ti];']- , const. 
 
 n2V'.5 P^"r. nv'i):. 
 
 § 1 50. J^ouns ; thirteenth declension. 
 
 tl. The thirteenth declension includes all feminine 
 Segholates in ri-./ and n_* ; i. e. all those which have 
 the tone on the penult and a furtive vowel in the final 
 sjllable. 
 
 The furtive vowel here is Seghol orPattahh. The Segholate forms, 
 like those of Dec. VI, are factitious and appear only in the absolute 
 and construct state; compare § 143. 1 note. The final vowels of the 
 original state of these feminines, being always of the A, £, or O 
 class, and generally pure (§ 132. 6. c ), are often changed by the 
 influence of the furtive vowel (§ 60. 3) ; but they always reappear, 
 as in Dec. VI, whenever the word receives any accession. 
 
 Note. All feminine infinitives and participles hi D- or n_. fall un- 
 der this declension. 
 
 2. The singular number is declined as in Dec. VI. 
 The plural absolute is quite anomalous, sometimes drop 
 ping the original final vowel of the ground-form, and some- 
 times retaining it. 
 
 E. g. rr^AP^? plur. abs. riT'napJJ &c. but rrnn'S, plur. abs. ni-inis 
 &c. The lexicon must be consulted for each noun ; as the appear- 
 ance of the singular will not determine the mode of forming the plural. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. These nouns, of course, have the forms of the A class, as 
 in a ; of the E class, as in 6, c ; and of the O class, as in c?, e. Nouns 
 of the O class take Qamets Hhateph before suffixes &c. when they 
 come from an original masculine form with Hholem ; as masc. '.liis. 
 fern. nUJl, with suff. '•P'lia ; but those which come from a masculine 
 with Shureq, take Qibbuts before suffixes &c. as masc. w"^n;, fern. 
 n">2Jti:, Avith sufi". "^n'iJri: &c. 
 
 Note 2. In f and g are examples of feminine infinitives in n_ &.c. 
 These all belong to the E class of Segholates. 
 
§§151,152. nouns; dual and irregular foiims. 299 
 
 Note 3. A few nouns which are properly of (he E class some- 
 times take Pattahh hcfore suflixes &c. as rii?.;.i'' from p^i", with suff. 
 \np:i"' ; inf. n2\p has once Tilso Ps. 23: G. So fTiii.N, n':.\N, n5i;.J3. 
 
 § 151. Koiins ; paradigm of nou7is dual. 
 
 tl. Nouns dual of the several declensions, are exhibited 
 in their absolute and construct states in Par. III. 
 
 2. The construct state of the dual, is the same as that of plurals in 
 D''_ . Of course, the grave sulTixes of nouns plural are attached to 
 the dual in the same manner as to the plural. (§ 135. 9, 10. § 136.4.0.) 
 
 3. Dual nouns are not frequent, and none are found in the ninth 
 declension. Of those which do occur, some have no singular and oth- 
 ers are not found in the construct; see the paradigm. 
 
 Note. The plural nouns W'h'J^ and CTS are declined like dual 
 nouns of Dec. II. (§ 134. 3 note.) 
 
 § 152. J^ouns irregular in form and declension, 
 
 tl. The Hebrew exhibits quite a number of nouns which 
 are irregular, either in consequence of some change in 
 their radical letters, or of borrowing their oblique forms 
 from some otlier root. 
 
 Such are li^ father^ JIN brother^ nTtlN sister^ "IJ^N tuo??, ^T^N woman^ 
 ■j2 son^ nz daughter &.c. &c. all the forms of which are noted in the 
 lexicons. To them, therefore, the learner is referred. 
 
 2. The Hebrew numerals also present a variety of 
 anomalous forms. In the western languages, this species 
 of words usually have an adjective signification ; but In He- 
 brew, they are mostly primitive nouns. Their usual forms 
 are exhibited in Par. Ill and in the following explanations 
 and notes. 
 
 /. Cardinal numbers. 
 
 3. From one to ten the forms ol' cardinal numbers have 
 the distinction of gender, and generally also that of the 
 
300 §152. nouns; cardinal numbers, etc. 
 
 absolute and construct states. From three to ten, how- 
 ever, the primitive forms are of the feminine gender ; 
 while the derivative forms ending in n_ and n_ are of 
 the masculine gender. 
 
 The forms of ^HN; are used as adjectives ; all the others are noons, 
 and are sometimes put in the construct, and sometimes in apposition or 
 adverbially with the nouns to which they relate. (§ 17^.) 
 
 4-. From eleven to nineteen, the cardinal numbers are of 
 a compound form ; viz. thej are made up by joining to 
 forms of the nine units the words 'y^'$ in the masculine 
 and nilDU? in the feminine, without an intervening con- 
 junction. The numerals thus formed have no construct 
 state, but are put in apposition or adverbially with other 
 nouns. (§ ]7f.) 
 
 The words ^UJi> and rrn'iSy are found only in the above connex- 
 ions and are evidently derived from lip? ten ; somewhat like the ter- 
 mination teen for ten in thirteen^ fourteen &.C. 
 
 5^^ From twenty to ninety, the cardinal numbers which 
 express the tens, are the plural forms of the correspond- 
 ing units; except that the form for twenty is the plural 
 of the form for ten. These forms are of common gen- 
 der, and have no construct state. 
 
 When intermediate units are to be expressed, they may either pre- 
 cede or follow the tens ; as d"'i?5'l!l yauj = ^fi^pl 'D'^J^it = 77. (§ 17^.) 
 
 to ^ Hundreds are expressed by the forms of the word 
 T\^12 preceded by the nine units ; thousands, by the forms 
 of r]75^ v.^ith the same units ; ten thousands in a similar 
 manner by the forms of flDDn, 121, or 5<'l3"l. 
 
 In expressing^ a sum of hundreds with intervenino' tens and units, 
 the smaller numbers may either precede or follow the hundreds ; as 
 
 n:"^^ TiiiTZ^^ ;i:^ n^-Jii'PI D"'PUJ= 162 years Gen. 5: 18 ; or niNt! UJr*J 
 Df:u;n t)"'2?n"4J = 372, Ezra 2 : 4. The latter mode prevails ia the 
 later Hebrew. 
 
§ 152. ORDINAL NUMBERS, ETC. 301 
 
 In expressing thousands with intervening smaller numbers, the for- 
 mer are placed first j as n"*:b-i;n niNrj iijoni Q''DbN nvzp = 8580, 
 Num. 4: 18. 
 
 //. Ordinal numhers. 
 1'% The ordinal numbers extend only from two to ten. 
 Beyond this number, and sometimes also below it, the car- 
 dinal numbers are used as ordinals. 
 
 The ordinals are derived from the cardinals by annexing to^them 
 the termination ^_ (§ 129. 6. a). Most of them like^vise insert "*-- in 
 the final S}- liable of the ground-form. The form *"y^2n fourth loses 
 the prosthetic N of the ground-form. The ordinal for five has two 
 forms, viz. "''^an and "'ip'TDH. 
 
 Note. The ordinals have a feminine form in ri''_ , and sometimes 
 in r;^_. . In this shape they are commonly employed to denote part ; 
 as n"'n"'\U5 the tenth part. 
 
 NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 
 
 Note 1. No. I exhibits the usual forms of the cardinals from one 
 to ten. The feminine nnN is for nnriN (§ 41. 3. b). The Aramaean 
 form nn for TfiN occurs Ezek. 33: 30. The form D^V'?^ is the dual 
 of the absolute yj ; the feminine D^n\p for D'^n:',^ is also dual from an 
 obsolete root ?n2'ij. 
 
 Note 2. There is a dual form of these cardinals, which is used ad- 
 verbially ; as D';ryn'^ sevenfold Gen. 4 : 15,24 &c. tS'^.^yanN /omt- 
 fold 2 Sam. 12: 6.'" 
 
 Note 3. The plurals of some of these forms likewise appear ; as 
 ■'•Q'^nnN Gen. 27 : 44 ; ninTr?. tens Ex. 18 : 21, 25 &.c. 
 
 Note 4. A few of these cardinals are also found with suffixes ; as 
 n:'^:\p both ofus; Dpn'iJV'^; ye three &c. 
 
 Note 5. No. II presents the forms of cardinals from elerven to nine- 
 ttcn. Those for eleven and twelve have two forms. The word 'ri/i/^ 
 in the former is derived by Simonis from n"4;y to think^ but with 
 no satisfactory explanation why it should be employed as a numeral. 
 la the latter, the forms WZp and Cn'O coincide with the Ara- 
 maean dual (§ 134. 1 note 2, d). The form n'CJS; nib'a for eighteen 
 occurs oncp Judar. 20 : 25. 
 
 40 
 
302 § 153. ADJECTIVES, ETC. 
 
 Method of notation. 
 
 Note 6. The Hebrews made use of the letters of the alphabet to 
 denote numbers. Like the Greeks, they divided the letters (including 
 the final ones) into three classes ; of which the first denoted units ; 
 the second, tens ; and the third, hundreds. To express thousands and 
 higher numbers they began the alphabet anew, placing two dots over 
 each letter. When more than one letter was employed, the accent 
 called Garshayim or Double Geresh was sometimes used to mark them 
 as numerals. These modes of representing numbers are all exhibited 
 in the paradigm. 
 
 Fifteen is denoted by TD = 9 + 6 = 15; never by Tt'* , because this 
 last is the contraction for the word tl^JT;'. 
 
 In designating composite numbers in this way, the letters which 
 represent the larger numbers are placed first ; as I23r = 429 ; nSZPlT 
 = 4898; ^^Tiii = 1823. 
 
 § 153. JS'ouns ; forms of adjective nouns, 
 
 tl. Hebrew adjectives have no peculiar and appropri- 
 ate forms, but only such as are common to nouns. The 
 feminine form of the adjective is derived from the mas- 
 culine in the same manner as the feminine nouns (§ 132). 
 The dual number does not occur. (§ J 34. 4.) 
 
 Whatever has been said of the forms of nouns in the preceding sec- 
 tions, applies also to adjectives ; so that the latter do not need to be 
 treated of separately. 
 
 2. Comparison is formed with adjectives by a periphrasis.^ for which 
 see §§ 173, 17ft. The construct state of adjectives appears most fre- 
 quently when they are used as nouns, or with a noun understood ; as 
 5b~''n;ij") the upright of heart Ps. 6 : 11. 
 
§ 154. Par. I. JVouns with sujixes. (§ 135.) 
 
 303 
 
 Suffixes. 
 
 Noun sing. 
 
 Noun plural. 
 
 
 /. JVoun nutsculine 
 
 endins' with a consonant. 
 
 Siiig. 
 
 D^D a horse. 
 
 CCID horses. 
 
 1. 
 
 '^DID my horse. 
 
 *^dD w?^ horses. 
 
 2. m. 
 
 rjD^D thy — 
 
 ^'^b^O thy — 
 
 2. f. 
 
 *?]b^D % — 
 
 *!5';p^D % — 
 
 3. rn. 
 
 iDID /i/5 ^ 
 
 I^DID /??'.s — 
 
 3. f. 
 
 riD^iD her — 
 
 n/p^D /icr — 
 
 PI. 1. 
 
 •130^0 owr — 
 
 Ij^iplO our — 
 
 2. m. 
 
 D3D^D your — 
 
 Dp'^p^O your — 
 
 2. i; 
 
 "JpplD your — 
 
 'jp'^p'^D your — 
 
 3. m. 
 
 Cq^D their — 
 
 Cn;p1D their — 
 
 3. f. 
 
 ■JD^O their — 
 
 in;p'lD their — 
 
 
 II. JVoun masculint 
 
 ending with a quiescent. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 2i< father. 
 
 '2i^ father. 
 
 1. 
 
 ''DX my father. 
 
 PI. 1. '=)D''pfi< our father. 
 
 2 m. 
 
 rp2i{ % — 
 
 2 m. Gp^2!S! your — 
 
 2 f. 
 
 '^^pij % — 
 
 2 f. ]^^^,^, your — 
 
 3 m.^n 
 
 •^25;, i^'^wS/i/s- 
 
 3 m. Dn;nvy their — 
 
 3 f. 
 
 ri'^nx her — 
 
 3 f. "jn^^wV //le/r — 
 
 ///. Noun feminine. 
 
 Sing. nnin a /ai^?. 
 
 1. Tl")in my law. 
 
 2 m. ^nnin % — 
 
 2 f. "^niin % — 
 
 3 ra. in-jin his — 
 
 PI. 1. '^Dn-jin o?/r — 
 
 2 m. dpnnin ?/02/r — 
 
 3 m. Drriin their — 
 
 ni"iiin laws. 
 
 Tlilin my laws. 
 
 ^j-'nnin thy — 
 '!)')rinin thy — 
 
 IDWlin our — 
 
 'Qn'^n^l^T\ their — 
 
304 
 
 § 154. Par. II. Dedemions of nouns. 
 
 
 Sing. abs. 
 
 Const. 
 
 Light suff. 
 
 Grave suflf. 
 
 
 
 Dec. I. Singular. 
 
 (§ 138.) 
 
 
 (a) 
 
 D^D 
 
 D^D 
 
 ^D^D 
 
 d::did 
 
 (*) 
 
 ni3^ 
 
 1125 
 
 '^niBs 
 
 c^ni'ma 
 
 (0 
 
 DISip 
 
 DISp 
 
 ^DiDa 
 
 nrjiD-d 
 
 (</) 
 
 ni^^jt 
 
 ^.'1^'^. 
 
 ^n"!^^^. 
 
 cpn_iVvN:_ 
 
 
 
 Dec. II. Singular. 
 
 (§ 139.) 
 
 
 (°) 
 
 
 t2^_ 
 
 • -r 
 
 tssri'^ 
 
 (*) 
 
 DilS 
 
 nDis 
 
 '^niDis 
 
 fip.^^Jis 
 
 (c) 
 
 :?ni3 
 
 ;?nis 
 
 '';?ni3 
 
 aD::?ni3 
 
 (d) 
 
 ^p 
 
 ^d 
 
 h^tp 
 
 tD.rd 
 
 
 
 Dec. III. Singular. 
 
 (§ 140.) 
 
 
 («) 
 
 n^^s 
 
 TpB 
 
 ^TPP. 
 
 i=?Ti"^ 
 
 (i) 
 
 T'^?. 
 
 T^P- 
 
 ^"i-hi^ 
 
 
 0) 
 
 i^D]? 
 
 ^rjp 
 
 ^^rjj? 
 
 t!::>rjp_ 
 
 (d) 
 
 pIDT 
 
 p-lDT 
 
 ^DinriT 
 
 DlDDin^ST 
 
 (0 
 
 V^'P. 
 
 Ti'^m 
 
 ^Drtn 
 
 'cpDV-n. 
 
 (/) 
 
 t{:)2 
 
 t^:)2^ 
 
 ••D^i^ 
 
 Di:D^]^^ 
 
 (g) 
 
 DinwN{ 
 
 D^nwsJ 
 
 ^t^Dfii 
 
 tiiDD^nj^, 
 
 (h) 
 
 ^i^5 
 
 ;?il5, -^^5 
 
 ^'pi'is 
 
 ^?Vi^5 
 
 
 
 Dec. IV. Singular 
 
 • (§ 141.) 
 
 
 (a) 
 
 nn^ 
 
 in^ 
 
 ^ni'^ 
 
 tDSnn^ 
 
 (*) 
 
 22h 
 
 Dn^ 
 
 ^^^S 
 
 Dppnp 
 
 («) 
 
 oin 
 
 Din 
 
 -i^Dsn 
 
 ^^PPA, 
 
 (<J) 
 
 
 i?"f 
 
 n^d 
 
 iDD-]>:p 
 
 (0 
 
 pl2l 
 
 p^?. 
 
 ypy^ 
 
 ci^.P.^?. 
 
 </) 
 
 ^?? 
 
 m 
 
 ^SDS 
 
 CJ^.S33 
 
 (^) 
 
 ^n:!^ 
 
 T ▼ 
 
 ND2 
 
 ■•i^ns 
 
 T ? 
 
§ 154. Par. II. Declensions of noiuis. 
 
 305 
 
 Plural alis. 
 
 Light suff. 
 
 
 Const. 
 
 Grave suff. 
 
 
 Dec. I. 1 
 
 ^LURAL. 
 
 
 
 n-^D^s 
 
 ^0^0 
 
 
 ^0^^ 
 
 CD^D^D 
 
 ani35 
 
 ni25 
 
 
 •^ihs^ 
 
 c::;niB5 
 
 C'^'J^Sp 
 
 •^D^SUJ 
 
 
 "••J-lDp 
 
 t:D;D^£p 
 
 C^rti^. 
 
 ^riV^_ 
 
 
 ^^^'^. . 
 
 ns^n;VwN{. 
 
 
 Dec. II. 
 
 Pli'ral. 
 
 
 
 t'^T 
 
 -^lyn 
 
 
 ^?" 
 
 Cip.'^P.I 
 
 cnrjis 
 
 'iDDiS 
 
 
 •"nils 
 
 L:::;2Di-i 
 
 t:vniD 
 
 Wis 
 
 
 ''nis 
 
 DD^Dis 
 
 D'^V^* 
 
 •^"Itp 
 
 
 ■'T'P 
 
 Gp;iP 
 
 
 Dec. III. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 ^'Ti?s? 
 
 ''Tj?^ 
 
 
 ''Tl^ss 
 
 ^TTT'P. 
 
 D'^s^^q 
 
 ''2'''^53 
 
 
 ^?'^^. 
 
 ^^^V\A 
 
 D'^'^VJp^ 
 
 ^!:^t:p^ 
 
 
 ■4."'^'^" 
 
 Dp^bVJp^ 
 
 t2^Dn:DT 
 
 ^3in::T 
 
 
 •'pnST 
 
 ^?''?;"i?» 
 
 niD^Tn 
 
 (as Dec. X.) 
 
 
 
 
 C'^o^D^q 
 
 ^01323 
 
 
 ''D^D^^ 
 
 D^'^D'lDX? 
 
 i:^!Diaw>i 
 
 ''^^-^' 
 
 
 ''D^^wVi^ 
 
 ^T^:^-^. 
 
 
 Dec. IV. 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 D'^nn'i 
 
 '•-O'n 
 
 
 ^1^" 
 
 CD^nn'^ 
 
 ^^'?S 
 
 '^k\ 
 
 
 •^nnp 
 
 ^?.'?.r^ 
 
 S'^^Dn 
 
 
 
 *>!2pn 
 
 ^?^?.^51 
 
 tn^^p 
 
 "•I^P 
 
 
 ••ni^d 
 
 SP.'^I?."*? 
 
 D^p^S?. 
 
 ?-^,?'. 
 
 
 ^?.^.^ 
 
 ^?^E^.^ 
 
 G'^SD-) 
 
 ''SDD 
 
 
 •'SDS 
 
 C!p;S33 
 
 niNizs 
 
 (as Dec. XI.) 
 
 
 
 
306 
 
 § 154. Par. II. Declensions of nouns. 
 
 
 Sing. abs. 
 
 Const. 
 
 Light, suff. 
 
 Grave sufF. 
 
 (A) 
 
 1?? 
 
 lib?., 'jrD?'. 
 
 
 
 (0 
 
 y^2 
 
 T •• 
 
 ^b% :?!?2 
 
 •^^j^s 
 
 
 
 
 Dec. V. SiNGUjjiR. 
 
 (§ 142.) 
 
 
 (a) 
 
 IE! 
 
 )P-! 
 
 ^^.?.l 
 
 t:n3p_T 
 
 (4) 
 
 nsn 
 
 ^^n 
 
 ''1?.n. 
 
 an-i^sn 
 
 (o) 
 
 fin? 
 
 H*ll 
 
 •^sns 
 
 nnsHD 
 
 (d) 
 
 ins 
 
 •^^^.^ "=^.1. 
 
 '^nns 
 
 CD^nD 
 
 (0 
 
 s«Va 
 
 iAbi2 
 
 \s'^^ 
 
 fin.sba 
 
 (/) 
 
 1?: 
 
 
 
 
 (°) 
 
 (A) 
 (0 
 
 (d) 
 
 (^) 
 (/) 
 
 (A) 
 
 (0 
 (i) 
 
 (0 
 
 Dec. 
 
 ^^ 
 dip 
 
 VI. Singular. A class. (§ 143.) 
 
 -)y: •'■in 
 
 dip 
 
 • r; T "; 
 
 tDD-lp2 
 
 cndip 
 
§ 154. Par. II. Declensions qfnoutis. 
 
 307 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Plur. abs. 
 
 lAght sufT. 
 
 Const. 
 
 Grave suff. 
 
 n-^Dd? 
 
 iD'dj? 
 
 ^P.'P? 
 
 Drpd^ 
 
 
 ^'<',^ 
 
 
 ^5')S 
 
 ^-.7.^^ 
 
 
 Dec. V. Plural 
 
 
 
 
 ^'^f?.! 
 
 ''^pT 
 
 '?.?.! 
 
 BrDpT 
 
 
 • •• -J 
 
 ''"^^n 
 
 ^'Ti.n 
 
 apnsn 
 
 
 nisPD 
 
 (as Dec. XI.) 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 '"^l.^. 
 ^^^P. 
 
 
 
 Dec 
 
 VI. PHTRAL. .4 
 
 class. 
 
 s?'?.^^ 
 
 
 
 'in::?] 
 
 n^D 
 
 ^^.''l^.^ 
 
 
 D"^:?-); 
 
 £ class. 
 
 7.11 
 
 Dp^ni 
 
 
 an£D 
 
 i-)SO 
 
 ^nsD 
 
 iDp^nsD 
 
 
 ^'IrP. 
 
 
 '^nnp 
 
 CpnDp 
 
 
 ^'R^,n 
 
 y\^: 
 
 •^p^n 
 
 Dp;pVn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s^nss 
 
 class. 
 
 •^ns: 
 
 a^.'^ns: 
 
 
 cnp^n 
 
 ^y?. 
 
 ^np2 
 
 ap.'^nps 
 
 • 
 
 
 ~ T J 
 
 •• r; -r 
 
 
 
 
 - f »r' 
 
 •^Q^iP 
 
 ^P.^?1B 
 
308 
 
 § 154. Far. II. Declensions of nouns. 
 
 I 
 
 (m) 
 
 Sing. abs. 
 
 
 Syriac Seghohtes. 
 
 Const. Light suff. 
 
 Plural abs. 
 
 («) 
 
 ^5^ 
 
 
 aid 
 
 ^)2p^p 
 
 
 io) 
 
 Irre^ 
 
 ^ular I 
 
 Segholates from 
 nM2 (as 
 
 rerbs 1^ and ''y. 
 Dec. I.) 
 
 
 (P) 
 
 "^fl 
 
 
 ^in (as 
 
 Dec. I.) 
 
 
 (?) 
 
 b^ 
 
 
 b'^V (as 
 
 Dec. I.) 
 
 
 (0 
 
 T^ 
 
 
 ")'':? (Sing, as Dec. I.) 
 
 ^^TX 
 
 (*) 
 
 ^^"i 
 
 (Sing. 
 
 as Dec. I.) 
 
 
 ^"^in 
 
 (0 
 
 -lid 
 
 (Sing. 
 
 as Dec. I.) 
 
 
 anvip 
 
 («) 
 
 Sing. abs. 
 
 Dec. 
 
 VII. SiNGULAI 
 
 Const. 
 
 I. (§ 144.) 
 Light suff. 
 
 Grave suff. 
 
 (J) 
 
 n;^>s* 
 
 
 n;>s 
 
 '^s']iK 
 
 a::3')^5« 
 
 (0 
 
 V^^.P-^. 
 
 
 ^^.W 
 
 ^V^p-^. 
 
 ^^.V^P-^ 
 
 id) 
 
 nsT^' 
 
 
 m\^ 
 
 'H^!^. 
 
 DDnsTti 
 
 (e) 
 
 ^?.P^ 
 
 
 b^i2 
 
 ■ 'Vp.^- 
 
 ^?.^P.^ 
 
 (/) 
 
 V. 
 
 
 V- 
 
 ^2y 
 
 ci^ip^ 
 
 («) 
 
 •r 
 
 Dec. 
 
 VIII. SiNGULAF 
 
 T ~ 
 
 .. (^145.) 
 
 cs^^: 
 
 (i) 
 
 fi»« 
 
 
 Clfi< 
 
 ^£J< 
 
 asswv 
 
 (0 
 
 ia 
 
 
 ^•2 
 
 '^'^^ 
 
 DD'^n_ 
 
 id) 
 
 
 
 ^?.'"^?. 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ClDSb 
 
 (e) 
 
 pn 
 
 
 pn,-pn 
 
 ''pn 
 
 aspn 
 
 (/) 
 (*') 
 (/») 
 
 
 
 p,-*:; 
 
 1?.^. 
 
 
 
 (0 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 («) 
 
 n-n 
 
 Dec. 
 
 IX. Singular 
 
 njn 
 
 (§ 146.) 
 
 t^;.n 
 
 (i) 
 
 rn.a 
 
 
 n7;t2 
 
 't? 
 
 ciD.^ir 
 
§ 154. Par. II. Declensions of nouns. 
 
 !i09 
 
 
 Irregular Segholates from verbs nb- 
 
 
 Siiig. abs. 
 
 Const. Light sulT. 
 
 Grave suff. 
 
 Plural abe. 
 
 
 I ns ins 
 
 1 • : : • 
 
 
 
 
 ■ "^-in i'^sn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^T^S}. 
 
 (.r) ^-5 
 
 
 
 n^")-5 
 
 (i/) ^-^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dec. VII. Plural. 
 
 
 Plural abs. 
 
 Light sulT. 
 
 Const. 
 
 Grave suff. 
 
 ni:aD 
 
 ^11^l3 
 
 m^c: 
 
 ars.^n-^ip 
 
 n^2*]i^i 
 
 ■'n'^iws 
 
 '^n;>s* 
 
 ^T?!"?^ 
 
 n'^V^F-^. 
 
 '^-^P-^. 
 
 'c.'^P-^. 
 
 12Thpm 
 
 ninsT^' 
 
 ^-l■"^^37:q 
 
 niniTi:' 
 
 L:p;nin2T^' 
 
 T(^h}p__ 
 
 (as Dec. XIII.) 
 
 
 
 "^^V!. 
 
 
 "•??. 
 
 C5^??. 
 
 
 Dec. VIII. Plural. 
 
 
 S'^! 
 
 ^^1 
 
 '?.'l 
 
 c^.'?.^- 
 
 S'^EwS 
 
 ''iTwV 
 
 ''S&i 
 
 ^T^.^- 
 
 c-^^ti 
 
 '"^. 
 
 '''!i^. 
 
 t^;"^ 
 
 ni3^ 
 
 \ni2b 
 
 niab 
 
 ns^nis"? 
 
 z^n 
 
 MO 
 
 ^n 
 
 '^?.'H'.r! 
 
 D-^Vm 
 
 '^_^-? 
 
 ''Vm 
 
 Dn^V.^a 
 
 c^D^'q 
 
 ■^3^^ 
 
 ■•35^'. 
 
 c^;p5^ 
 
 c-^n 
 
 ■"H 
 
 
 
 
 Dec. IX. Plural. 
 
 
 n'^T'n 
 
 ''i'n 
 
 V.n 
 
 ^^'J.n 
 
 a^^^ 
 
 ^■;ii 
 
 ^^tj 
 
 Ci^V^ 
 
 n 
 
310 
 
 § 154. Pak. II. Bedensions of nouns. 
 
 
 Sing. abs. 
 
 Const 
 
 Light suflf. 
 
 (a) 
 (A) 
 
 Dec. X. Singular. (§ 147.) 
 
 nnin nnjn 
 
 
 («) 
 
 Dec. XI. 
 
 T T 
 
 Singular. (§ 148.) 
 
 ■^nDp 
 
 (4) 
 
 HDD 
 
 r\:p 
 
 "TlD-d 
 
 (0 
 
 r-ipri 
 
 r\\A;i 
 
 ^np^ns 
 
 (d) 
 
 (0 
 
 
 
 
 (g) 
 
 nnspri 
 
 nnrtp^ 
 
 "^nriEuir) 
 
 («) 
 
 Dec. XII. 
 
 Singular. (§ 149.) 
 
 
 (0 
 
 tiDnn 
 
 nsnn 
 
 ^nsnn 
 
 (d) 
 
 
 nsnn 
 
 '^nnnn 
 
 (e) 
 
 fnil 
 
 n"i??.3 
 
 \n-;?.3 
 
 (a) 
 
 Dec. XIII. 
 
 Singular. (§ 150.) 
 
 ^^n^D^Q 
 
 (*) 
 
 nnb^ 
 
 nnbn 
 
 ^rinnj 
 
 (0 
 
 nd^5 
 
 ^'^^. 
 
 ^npN; 
 
 (d) 
 
 n^ns 
 
 DDPS 
 
 Tuns 
 
 
 
 
 
 fe) 
 
 nnb' 
 
 ^^.^^ 
 
 \^Dp 
 
§ 154. Par. II. Declensions of iiouiis. 
 
 311 
 
 Grave suff. 
 
 Plural abs. 
 
 Const. 
 
 Suffix. 
 
 
 Dec. X. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 D^nnin 
 
 ni-nn 
 
 niiin 
 
 ^niiin 
 
 C2n':?^n3 
 
 nibins 
 
 m^ins 
 
 Tiibin^ 
 
 
 Dec. XI. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 DDnDp 
 
 ni]*j 
 
 niDp 
 
 ''nird 
 
 s^nDp 
 
 niDiD 
 
 nijp 
 
 Tiira 
 
 DDnp_"i2 
 
 1 : 
 
 nip"|2 
 
 ^nipis 
 
 n5n^_^n 
 
 n^^r^ 
 
 Di^aDH 
 
 "^ni^DH 
 
 CDnb^r 
 
 r\\byy 
 
 ri'1^5:?. 
 
 ''^11^^.? 
 
 (as Dec. XIII.) 
 
 
 
 
 (as Dec. XIII.) 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 DDns^^ia 
 
 Dec. XII. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ^niDb^ 
 
 Dp.n^^;^ 
 
 
 ni^M 
 
 ^Tli^M 
 
 DDnsnn 
 
 niD-jn 
 
 nisnn 
 
 ''nisnn 
 
 DDnsnn 
 
 T t: 
 
 ninnn 
 
 
 nDnn:?.: 
 
 ni-i:?3 
 
 niin 
 
 '^il1'^?3 
 
 
 Dec. XIII. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 DDn-)5D^^ 
 
 ni-i5Dt3 
 
 ni-i^Dx; 
 
 •^niisqiq 
 
 ^^.1r^. 
 
 
 
 
 :r]np5^, !^nu3\x 
 
 
 
 
 
 r; •.. 
 
 
 
 rjnnp 
 
312 § 154. Par. III. Declension of nouns dual. (§ 151.) 
 
 Sing. abs. 
 
 Dual abs. 
 
 D. const, i 
 
 1 
 
 Sing. abs. 
 
 Dual abs. 
 
 D.const. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 
 )y. 
 
 a^]_7. 
 
 '^Tl 
 
 DV 
 
 • U^W 
 
 
 '">: 
 
 
 
 nisn 
 
 Dma-) 
 
 
 
 VII. 
 
 
 
 11. 
 
 
 
 C!']]tNi'n 
 
 ^21i<l2 
 
 1^ 
 
 X 
 
 III. 
 
 ''T 
 
 513 
 1? 
 
 VIII. 
 
 
 ?^^? 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 
 X. 
 
 
 H?? 
 
 t:^D33 
 
 •^£35 
 
 nas 
 
 • — T — 
 
 
 
 D^s^^n 
 
 ^bn 
 
 
 XI. 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 T T 
 
 ti^nst? 
 
 •^nst^ 
 
 '•• -r 
 
 VI. 
 
 ''^p. 
 
 
 t3^h^^S 
 
 • — ▼ ; 
 
 XII. 
 
 *^r.i^p_ 
 
 '^ ^?.l 
 
 S'^^n 
 
 ^^.r- 
 
 
 n^riDT 
 
 ^'^??!1 
 
 ^ '^'^•1 
 
 a-jsin 
 
 ^s-js 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D^]_n^ 
 
 • • • Y 
 
 
 XIII. 
 
 
 b:^A 
 
 ^^??.3 
 
 '^f.?.^ 
 
 ntdn3 
 
 a"]n"ipn3 
 
 
 nrii 
 
 
 
 
 
 
§ 154. Par. IV. JVumera} nmns 4-c. (§ 152.) 
 
 313 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 Cardinals 4 
 
 •c.from 1 
 
 /o 10. 
 
 
 No. 
 
 Si^np. 
 
 Masc. abs. 
 
 Const. 
 
 Fern. abs. 
 
 Const. 
 
 Ordinals. 
 
 1 
 
 »( 
 
 T *,' 
 
 "Hi^ 
 
 nrii^ 
 
 nnws 
 
 
 2 
 
 n 
 
 C'^DD 
 
 ''P.P 
 
 QT-P 
 
 inp 
 
 '3? 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 npVd 
 
 ntfvd 
 
 D^p 
 
 •drp 
 
 "^pn^p 
 
 4 
 
 ^ 
 < 
 
 n>;2-i&« 
 
 n>"2-)5< 
 
 5'2."1^^ 
 
 yn-iws 
 
 1P3-| 
 
 5 
 
 n 
 
 -u'qn 
 
 ^"ip'^n 
 
 tm 
 
 Dtiri 
 
 'P^n 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 n'wZ) 
 
 i^^'^ 
 
 dp 
 
 ■jp 
 
 'ipp 
 
 7 
 
 T 
 
 ^ n>;2d 
 
 n;pnp 
 
 >"Td 
 
 yrp 
 
 T^P 
 
 8 
 
 n 
 
 r.Dbd 
 
 nDbp 
 
 riDrip 
 
 
 ^rx]p 
 
 9 
 
 "J 
 
 nr»pn 
 
 n^pn 
 
 :?pn 
 
 :;?pn 
 
 •^jrhpn 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 rn'^:?_ 
 
 jf^T^?. 
 
 "^"?? 
 
 "5"^?. 
 
 
 //. Cardinah frmn 11 to 19. 
 Blasculine. 
 
 12 n'^ -id:? C'^Dd 
 
 -)d? -ipd 
 
 13 i'^ nd:? ndbd 
 
 14 i''" -id^ ^'i^"^}^- 
 
 15 Vb .ndy T^^^n 
 
 16 V^ ndip ndd 
 
 17 t"'' ")dp nipnp 
 
 18 n'^ nd? riDbd 
 
 19 u^ -ids? HiPdn 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 nndj!'. 0"^™ 
 
 rinds', "^nd 
 
 nndip. dVd 
 
 nnd?'. ::?2-)j^ 
 
 nnd:?. 'Qtin 
 
 mdp dd 
 
 nm 
 
 ?na 
 
 riTp? nDi3p 
 nnd:? ydn 
 
314 § 154. Par. IV. JVmntral nouns. (§ 152.) 
 
 
 
 
 ///. Cardinals from 20 to 90. 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 s 
 
 
 a^-itojy^ 
 
 60 
 
 D 
 
 Q'^tJtS 
 
 30 
 
 b 
 
 
 £]^p^;p 
 
 70 
 
 :? 
 
 £:^:?3d 
 
 40 
 
 12 
 
 
 D^'^'isnfi^ 
 
 80 
 
 t) 
 
 n^j^p 
 
 50 
 
 D 
 
 
 n^ujt^n 
 
 90 
 
 s 
 
 D^>;pn 
 
 
 
 
 /r. 
 
 Hundreds. 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 P 
 
 
 ^^1?. 
 
 600 nn 
 
 (a) 
 
 nii« 53/(3 d 
 
 200 
 
 1 
 
 
 c-^Kv^ 
 
 700 dn 
 
 (1) 
 
 niwN^a :pnd 
 
 300 
 
 t3 
 
 
 niiS'Q, iDbp 
 
 800 rin 
 
 (^) 
 
 ni>i52_ r^jjnp 
 
 400 
 
 n 
 
 
 nvx^, s'^nfii 
 
 900 prih 
 
 (T) 
 
 n%v5 >-^n 
 
 500 
 
 pn 
 
 (1) 
 
 nii«^, tD^n 
 
 
 
 
 F. Thousands. 
 
 1,000 .Nj jrjb^is. 10,000 nnnn, in-i, .vian 
 
 2,000 i Q'll^.fii 20,000 ni2") "^rid 
 
 3,000 K fi'^s*':^^ n'jiVd 3o,ooo nisn :Drd 
 
 4,000 i D^^s^ ri:pl")5^ 40,000 ^n^in >"3"JwN5 
 
 5,000 n D^s^wNi nmn (120,000 12-1 ni'^as?. C'^np 
 
 6,000 i' D^S^wN! nM (or 12 times 10,000 
 
 7,000 T ^^^b^, nyrd 600,000 ^% niiS^ tcp 
 
§§ 155, 15G. PARTICLES, ETC. 315 
 
 PARTICLES. 
 
 § 155. General remarks, 
 
 tl. Under the i^cneral appellation o[ particles ^ are com- 
 prehended adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and inter- 
 jections. 
 
 t2. Like nouns, some of these are primilive, but most 
 of them derivative. Of the derivatives, some have an 
 ending appropriated solely to the form of particles, as 
 DD^X trulu from "jlDJi truth ; while most retain the form 
 
 of verbs, nouns, or pronouns. 
 
 3. Composition of words is more frequent among particles than in 
 the leading' parts of speech. Apocope is also more common ; all the 
 prepositions &,c. which consist of only one letter, being doubtless apoc- 
 opated words ; as b for ^N, -IQ for "JTa &c. 
 
 4. The older grammarians have, for the most part, considered all 
 the particles as derivative nouns ; but this is not probable, as primitives 
 are found in all the other parts of speech. It is, however, very difficult 
 to draw the exact line between the primitive and derivative forms,^ 
 as the etymology is often much obscured by the changes which the 
 particles have undergone. 
 
 § 156. Adverbs. 
 
 1. Primitive adverbs are the following. 
 
 o 
 
 Ti< then ; "^ii^ ""ti xi^here ? ■}";£<, (]';n») whence ? ysf.tsohiiher ? DN <7h, 
 nonne ? n's, ~S, MSD thus ; i^b not ; "^tyj^ when ? He, 12, ^?D Acre ; D\2: 
 there. 
 
 Also the interrogative prefix tl an, nonnc ? for the punctuation of 
 which see § 61. 20. 
 
 2. Some derivative adverbs have appropriate adverbial 
 endings, viz. 
 
 (a) In a_ ; as a!ttN truly from "iTp.N truth. 
 
 (fe) In DL; as ai<riE suddenly., instead of Di'nS} from i'fic. the wink 
 «f an eye. 
 
 (c) In •'_ : as •'TN from in then. 
 
316 § 157. PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 3. Many derivative adverbs have the forms of other 
 parts of speech, viz. 
 
 (a) Of nouns with a preposition ; as d'^3D}? before^ ^^V^ upwards^ &c. 
 
 {b) Of nouns in the accusative ; as sing. n£J2 securely ; plur. D'^"^\i3'^a 
 uprightly. Some of these forms are no longer used as nouns ; as I'JN not. 
 
 (c) Of adjectives; as masc. i^i:^ -well; fem. nnJiTa quirMy., D^yn 
 twice ; plural niN"ji3 fearfully. These are used in a neuter sense, 
 like multum., noWu &c. (§ 162.) 
 
 (c^) Of the infinitive absolute, especially in Hiphil ; as "iis> again.y 
 literally re^/eunffo ; 'rt2.'^nmuch.,\it.mukiplicando; D3T2i n caWy. Some- 
 times with a preposition ; as 3T"lb abundantly. 
 
 (e) Of pronouns; as ITTT here ; TITZ how., &c. 
 
 4. Some adverbs are compounded of other words. 
 
 (a) Of prepositions and adverbs ; as I?,"?? wherefore ; n2N"*13> how 
 long ? 
 
 (6) Of two adverbs ; as ln2^Ni where., from "^N and tlD &.c. 
 
 5. Several adverbs receive after them verbal suffixes 
 (§ 6Q. 7. § 126); in which connexion the suffixes are gen- 
 erally in the nominative case. 
 
 E. g. '^i'7.12? / am yet., ^iS'lii' he is yet ; ^ISP.'^N he is not ; i'N where is 
 he? Gen. 3 : 9 rtS'.iJ for ,"7'.^ where art thou? The suffixes are 
 usually those with an epenthetic Nun which belong to the future tense. 
 
 Note. The forms ''^5^1 ^"^5^ &c. have a noun-suffix, and are thus 
 used as nouns, signifying / alone &,c. literally in my being alone he. So 
 ^"11^3 Ps. 101 : 33. 146 : 2, lit. during my continuance &.c. 
 
 § 157. Prepositions, 
 1. Primitive prepositions are the following. 
 
 2 in ; 3 as ; b, ?N t^^ifor ; "J/O from ; riN with., in suffix state "'nN ; 
 nN the sign of the accusative case, with sufT. ^riTN. 
 
 The prepositions r, 3, ^, are always prefixed to the words which 
 they govern ; as n'^'iJN'7.2 in the beginning. So also 'J73 is generally 
 prefixed and its final Nun assimilated. For the punctuation of all these, 
 sec § 61. 7—14. 
 
 The prefix 3 often has the sense of a conjunction. 
 
§ 157. PREPOSITIONS. 317 
 
 2. Many derivative prepositions have the forms of oth- 
 er parts of speech, viz. 
 
 (a) or nouns sing-ular in the accusative or construct state; as "JS^ 
 causa, on account of; "l^ :_ before ; nnp under, &.C. 
 
 (6) Of nouns plural in the construct state ; as ^N, "^bN to, for, po- 
 etic ; "jW, ■'jJD &c. Several prepositions take suffixes upon dual or 
 plural forms ; as nnn, "'nnn, T'rnn, but also Dnrn &lc. So V^ upon, 
 phir. const, "py poetic, with suff. ""bl], •^"•Iry, D^'^??'^ ; see no. 3 below. 
 
 (f) Of nouns in the construct state with prefix prepositions ; as 
 V2 by ; "':cb before, &c. 
 
 {(1) Of adverbs with prefix prepositions; as 'J'^JJS, "^r)"^!!:? without; 
 Ttif2 since Sac. 
 
 (c) Of adverbs followed by a preposition, so as to denote but one 
 idea; as b n'lnD around ; b b^a above; "J 73 y^in wilhoul, &.C. 
 
 (/") Of a double preposition ; as DS-'K) from with ; ■j"'2'3 between ; 
 nJin bN raider; like the French d''aupres, de chez k.c. 
 
 {g) Of a paragogic letter or suffix, viz. H— towards, to ; as tl73Tp 
 towards Sodom; ir»^")k to the ground &c. So also 11— and n_.. are, in 
 a very few instances, appended to words with a similar meaning ; as 
 npJO to Syene Ezek. 29 : 10 ; n.^JD to JVob 1 Sam. 21 : 2. 
 
 3. Several prepositions which have the form of nouns, 
 receive after them nonn-suffixcs (§ 66. 7. § 135. 6) ; in which 
 connexion the suffixes are usually in the genitive case. 
 
 Inasmuch as prepositions have the forms of nouns both in the sin- 
 gular and plural, they also receive suffixes both as singular and plural 
 nouns ; as " r.^^n '^:"'2 between me and thee ; :i3'^nT3^3 between us. See 
 above in no. 2. b. 
 
 Note. The following instances occur of prepositions with verbal 
 suffixes, viz. ■•:nnn 2 Sam. 22 : 37, 40, 48 ; r^irinn Gen. 2:21; ""^J^z 
 Ps. 139: 11. ' 
 
 4. Most of the primitive prepositions are quite irregu- 
 lar in their mode of receiving suffixes, and are thereibre 
 fully exhibited here. 
 
 (a) The prefix S takes the following forms. 
 
 Sing. ^Z; "Tja, in pause ^2; fern. ^2; T2; ^72. Plural ^'2Z; D32 ; 
 
 a2;ir!2,]n2. ■ 
 
 42 
 
318 § 157. PREPOSITIO\S. 
 
 Note. The prefix b takes suffixes precisely like 2, with the addi- 
 tion of the 2 plur. fern. Snibb, and 3 plur. masd^poetic iloV. Once 2 
 pers. sing. nD^_ Gen. 27 : 37. 
 
 {I)) The prefix 3 usually takes the paragoglc 1X3 before 
 suffixes. The following are its forms. 
 
 Sing. "3:a3; "^jibs; l^^i^S ; !lV23. Plural ^2173^ ; 055, seldom 
 fcs'iTss; ens, arts, seldom t]ri.i2:3. 
 
 Note. The prepositions 3, b, S, sometimes take the paragogic i>j 
 in order to render them independent words; as b£5fi<~i^2 Ps. 11 : 2 
 for b?.i<2. See Ges. Lex. under t». 
 
 (c) The preposition 1^12 before many of the suffixes 
 takes the form "112^, probably signifying a parte, de la part 
 de &c. The forms are as follows. 
 
 Sing, ''i/-?.?:, poetic ^113 and ";» ; 't^^T:, in pause ^a» ; ^72)2 ; 157272, 
 poetic ?,rt372 and ^n:a ; "S^.TS. Plural n:7272 ; D?.73; 13^ ; DiiTp., po- 
 etic an: 72 ; ]n73. 
 
 (f/) The preposition Tii^ , when it is the sign of the 
 accusative, becomes nii^ before suffixes, as follows. 
 
 Sing. '^nN, TiTN; '^r'N, in pause ^nN and 1't':^pii ; fern. ^nN ; inN ; 
 rfA\ Plural n:nN ; LDnN, d^.riTN ; Dnk, cnnN, onn''^ ; IC^'^^N "ir^^"^? 
 
 (e) The preposition jn>{ 'ivith sometimes takes suffixes 
 like the preceding, especially in the later Hebrew ; but 
 its appropriate forms arc the following. 
 
 Sing. ■'nN ; '^rii<, in pause ^nJ< ; fem. Mf^^^? ^'?.'? > ^^^. > ~'^i!*?• 
 Plural !):Pi< ; DDri< ; DrN\ 
 
 (y*) The forms of W^ with are the following. 
 
 Sing. "^722:; '^722;, in pause ^732?; fem. ^7ii2J ; 1725';; n72^;. Plural 
 5i;722> ; D272y ; d!7.722>, 0732?. The form '^'^72^; also occurs, but only with 
 the suffix of the first person singular; see Ges. Lex. under D2?. 
 
 NoTK. The pronouns M72n and riir; sometimes take prepositions 
 before them without change; as iiarrz Ex. 36 : 1 ; MiHS Gen. 41 : 
 19; n72n72 Ecc. 12: 12, &c. &,c. 
 
§§ 158, 159. coNJUNCTroNS. interjections. 319 
 
 § 158. Cov junctions. 
 
 1. Primitive conjunctions are the followinj^. 
 
 V2N hut; VX or ; "^wX only ; ^N that nut ; V\^ also; DJ< if; lb if ; 
 jD lest ; TEN expletive, /lox-, //ie?i. 
 
 Also the copulative prelix "i a/iti; lor the punctuation of which, 
 see § 61. 15 &c. 
 
 2. Several derivative conjunctions have the forms of 
 other parts of speech, viz. 
 
 (a) Of pronouns ; as "l;pN ('ij) because^ that ; like or*, quod &c. 
 (6) Of pronouns preceded by prepositions ; as "nvPN—jy^ because ; 
 -lipN-ny until, &LC. 
 
 (c) Of a double conjunction; as ''S Da although; DN "'S 6m^, unless. 
 
 § 159. Interjections, 
 
 1. Interjections, being simple exclamations occasioned 
 by joy or sorrow, are mostly primitive. Such are the 
 following words. 
 
 HN, nnN, ^lH alas! -H, ^hti, JT^IN, ""inN, -^^rbN bdo / ^^{!^ aha. 
 eiige .' ]i7, ir;!!^ /o, ecce .' N3 quaeso. So NiN a/i, quaeso ! from ntt 
 or nriwX and N3. 
 
 2. A few derivative interjections have the forms of 
 other parts of speech, viz. 
 
 (fl) Of verbs in the imperative, both of the singular and plural 
 forms ; as T,'^'n age ! plur. 53", from 3il^ ; C^J hush^ be still ! plur. 
 ID", in Piel from riDIl ; riN") Idov, ecce ! 
 
 {b) Of nouns; as "'T'iJN O the blessedness of! Ps. 1 : 1 &c. Jlb^?n 
 far be it from, God forbid! "'a O hear! ^-\ enough, hold! 
 
 3. The interjection "niTi takes after it verbal sufBxes in the nomin- 
 ative ca?e; as "'^fn, '^iV5^ ecce ego ! t^zt] ecce tu! &c. 
 
PART V. 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 § 160. Order of Syntax. 
 
 In the etymological part of the preceding pages, it was thought 
 proper to follow the natural order of the Hebrew language, and con- 
 sider, Jirst^ the pronouns whose ground-forms are all primitives ; sec- 
 ondly^ the verbs, which for the most part are primitive ; and thirdly^ 
 nouns and other parts of speech, which are mostly derivative. But 
 in the syntax, as the subject of a sentence, or nominative case, natu- 
 rally comes first in order, it seems more proper, first^ to consider the 
 noun, pronoun &c. and then^ the verb and other constituent parts of a 
 sentence. 
 
 SYNTAX OF NOUNS. 
 
 § 161. jYoiDis used in the place of adjectives. 
 
 The adjectives of the Hebrew, when compared with those of the 
 occidental languages, are very few in number. In consequence of 
 this, substantives are very frequently employed in the place of ad- 
 jectives. 
 
 tl. When two nouns come together, the first of which 
 is in the construct state, and the second of course in the 
 genitive, one of them is very often to be taken as an ad- 
 jective. 
 
 (a) Commonly the second noun quaHfies the first. 
 
 E. g. ?]CD "^^3 vessels of silver i. e. silver vessels ; db^.y riTHN pos- 
 session of eternity i. e. everlasting possession; Is. 24: 10 :inn~n2"^p 
 city of desolation i. e. desolate city ; Gen. 34 : 30 *1S5^ ''ri^ men of 
 number i. e. which can be numbered, or which are few. 
 
§ 161. NOUNS USED AS ADJECTIVES. 321 
 
 NoTF.. This construction is a very common one in all languages ; 
 and the Hebrew, as well as others, not unlrequently adopts it when 
 adjectives might be employed ; as wNirj "jna pncst of the head i. e. 
 high priest, instead of biian 1^2^- Even adjectives themselves are 
 sometimes constructed as nouns in the genitive, following the noun 
 which they qualify ; as yn ri'4;N a xn'omaii of evil i. e. an evil woman, 
 instead of nr-j n^N ; Mb^a '^73 waters of fullness i. e. full streams, in- 
 stead of D"Nr72 D";??. See the next section. 
 
 {b) Sometimes the first noun qualifies the second. 
 
 E. g. ■'■'TIN naip the tallness of his cedars i. e. his tall cedars; 
 T1U:3 l^auiTa the fatness of his fle.th I e. his fat flesh; DnNH-^S the 
 Tehole of men i. e. all men. 
 
 Note. Instances of nouns used as adjectives before the genitive are 
 rather unfrequent, except in respect to bb, which is usually found in 
 this construction. 
 
 2. When two nouns arc in apposition, one of them is 
 not unfrequently to be taken as an adjective. (§ 168. 2.) 
 
 Here, too, sometimes the frst noun is to be construed as an adjec- 
 tive, as Is. 45 : 23 *i:2~ npl^C righteousness sentence i. e. righteous 
 sentence ; but more commonly the second^ as Prov. 22 : 21 r)70J< D'''l^N 
 words truth i. e. true words ; riV^ ^N'^u;''. Israel the whole of him i. e. 
 all Israel. Compare Ps. 71 : 7, &c. 
 
 t3. When two or more nouns are connected by the 
 verb of existence (T\'^TI) expressed or understood, those 
 which designate quality are usually employed as adjec- 
 tives. 
 
 E. g. Gen. \ : 2 the earth !ilr;3T ^iHn Jiri'^i^ was desolation and emp- 
 tiness i.e. desolate and empty. Ps. 10: 5 T^'^pS'ipJa DTlTa highness 
 are thy statutes i. e. they are high, out of sight. Job 8 : 9 bi?-n 
 !i;r!:N yesterday are we i e. of yesterday, hesterni sitmui. 
 
 4. Nouns with prepositions prefixed are sometimes 
 used as adjectives. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 77: 14 '^S'^11 '>^'7.*p? ill holiness is thy way i. e. thy way 
 is holy ; 1 Chr. 26: 14 b5,"iP2 f^,^"^ a counsellor with wisdom i. e. a wise 
 counsellor; Ps. 17:9 "iUD32 ■'5']N my enemies in respect to life i. e. my 
 deadly enemies. 
 
322 § 161. NOUNS USED AS ADJECTIVES. 
 
 5. Of two nouns connected by a conjunction, one is 
 sometimes employed as an adjective. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 4: 4 "jnsbriJan IDNiT niniSz?: of the firstlings of his 
 Jiock and of the fat of them i. e. of the fat firstlings &c. Gen. 3: 16 
 ^DSn") ']3in5£y thy pain and thy conception i. e. thy painful conception. 
 Perhaps Ps. 119: 168. 
 
 Note. This construction is called Hendiadys^ i. e. tv did dvo7v. 
 
 6. The Hebrews sometimes used a circumlocution to 
 express qualities, which in other languages are usually de- 
 signated by adjectives. 
 
 For this purpose they employed the following nouns in the con- 
 struct state before other nouns. 
 
 (a) ii:"}* man ; as D'^HlT 'vD'^N a man of words i. e. an eloquent 
 man ; "ip.n U:"'i< a man of piety i. e. a pious man. 
 
 {h) DT]^ men ; as ^^"1 "^njQ men of hunger i. e. hungry men. 
 
 (c) ^5? lord^ possessor ; as 1^"t) b?2 possessor of hair i. e. hairy ; 
 n'^"l2 "^bs^s possessors of a covenant i. e. bound together by covenant. 
 
 (c?) ]2 son and ra daughter ; as b'^n~'i3 son of strength i. e. a hero ; 
 n^.Q-'J?. son of death i. e. condemned, worthy of death ; n^cj "ii: son 
 of a year i. e. a yearling. So '^"'UJn nT33 the daughters of song i. e. 
 the singing birds, Ecc. 12:4. 
 
 The word 12 son is not always employed with the like significan- 
 cy, but sometimes loses its appropriate meaning. Thus, sons of the 
 poor means ' the poor'; sons of foreigners means ' foreigners' ; son of 
 wrtn. means ' man' ; son of nobles means ' a nobleman.' So in Homer, 
 vTfg ' Aymmv is the same as ' Aiaioi. The nature of the passage, 
 therefore, must determine the manner in which the term son is to be 
 taken. 
 
 Note. The iirst noun in constructions of this kind is sometimes omit- 
 ted, and can be supplied only from the sense of the passage ; as Job 
 31 : 32 rr^it tsday for ITni* ']3 son of the way i. e. a traveller ; Prov. 
 17:4 "np/Jp falsehood for a man of falsehood i. e. a liar. So Gen. 15: 
 2 pU373'n for son of Damascus I e. a native of Damascus. 
 
§§ 1C2, 1G3. nouns; insertion of the articlf., etc. 323 
 
 § 1G2. Adjectives used as 7i0U7is, 
 
 tThe Hebrew, like otiicr languages, often supplies the 
 place of nouns by adjectives taken in an abstract or neu- 
 ter sense. 
 
 E.g. Jos. 24 : 14 D'^^n integrit}/, lit. upriglit, innocent; Job 20: 
 22 V73y (rouble^ lit. troublesome &c. Ps. 10: 10. Compare § 161. 1. 
 a, note. So in Greek, to xwAoV, to rrogtoV, &c. 
 
 Note. In this way some adjectives are constantly used as epithets 
 of persons or tilings ; as "^'^2^^ strong; for ' God' ; "T'sN sti-ong for ' bull, 
 horse'; nan hot for " the sun' ; ninr white for *■ the moon' &.C. So 
 for God we say in English the Almighty^ the Omnipotent &c. in French, 
 PEternel &:c. This is called the epitheton ornam. 
 
 § 163. Nouns; insertion of the article, 
 
 tl. In general, the Hebrew article (§ 65), like the in 
 English, is used in speaking of a definite, before-mentioned, 
 well known, or monadic object. 
 
 E. g. '^T.'?." ^he king ; Gen. 2 : 7 D'liJvJ the man before mentioned ; 
 C^U^rr the sun ; Vl'*'! '''^ earthy &c. 
 
 Note. In poetry, definite objects are often designated without the 
 article ; as Ps. 48 : 3 the city l'^ ^'^.73 of the great king ; Ps. 72 : 1. In 
 a similar manner the earlier Greek poets, particularly Homer, omit 
 the article where the Attic prose writers insert it. 
 
 t2. The article is commonly, but not always, used in 
 constructions like the following, viz. 
 (a) Before the genitive. 
 
 E.g. V^.^n ''"?-^'^ '^*^ ^^'^s^ ^f^^^^ ^""'^ ' "'sn^^'^ ''^^^ ^^^ *'**'^ ^f 
 
 vaar i. e. the warriors. (6 IGl. 1. a.) 
 
 (6) Before a noun of multitude in the singular. 
 
 E. g. Ti!)^r\ the -wicked ; p'^lStrt the rishtems ; "'ryiSln the Ca- 
 naanite. 
 
 (c) Before generic nouns, when used with a particular, 
 individual signification. 
 
324 § 164. xouNs ; omission of the article. 
 
 E. g. *l!^iSl the river i. e. the Euphrates; ^2"73lri the desert i. e. 
 the Arabian desert ; "Jt^iiJlri the adversary i. e. Satan, J diujiokog. 
 
 (rf) Before the vocative. 
 
 E. g. Deut. 32 : 1 u*72^n O heavens! Ps. 114 : 5 i^lrt O seo / &C. 
 
 t3. The article is sometimes used as a pronoun, either 
 demonstrative or relative. 
 
 E.g. ai^n this day ; lnb';V!n this night; D^'SiTT this time. So also 
 .Tos. 10: 24 the warriors inN N^D^nil w/io accompanied him; Judg. 
 13 : 8 i!Ae c/mW TS^'H which is born, &c. 
 
 4. The Hebrews sometimes employed the article with 
 an indefinite signification, like the English a or an. 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 17 : 34 "''nNti a lion ; Num. 11 : 27 '^'JVn a ymith &c. 
 So in Is. 7: 14, lri?ab^ii may, in conformity with this rule, be render- 
 ed a virgin, and not the virgin, as Gesenius and others have translated 
 it. In cases of this kind, however, the article is usually omitted ; as 
 Job 1 : 1 there was '•Ij'^ii a man ; Ex. 2:15. 
 
 Note. The indefinite article a or an is sometimes expressed by 
 "•ni? one ; as 1 Sam. 1 : 1 there was inN UJ'^N a man, &c. This con- 
 struction is the usual one in Chaldee and Syriac. So in Greek, Matt 
 21 : 19 Gvxij f.iia a Jig-tree ; Mark 14 : 51 iig rig viuvioxog a young 
 man &c. 
 
 § 1G4, .hfouns ; omission of the article. 
 
 The article is commonly omitted in the following con- 
 structions, VIZ. 
 
 1. Before proper names, especially those of persons, 
 
 countries, rivers, mountains, and places. 
 
 To this principle, however, there are so many exceptions, that it 
 can by no means be regarded as a general rule in the language. Thus 
 we find rr^D Euphrates always without the article, and 'J'.'^^fn the Jor- 
 dan almost always with it. So ■':''D Sinai, "JT'lt Sion &c. always 
 without ; but p^lVfj Lebanon, r/O'^S^j Carmcl &c. often with the article. 
 
 2. Before a noun in the construct state followed by a 
 genitive. 
 
§ 1C5. ARTICLE BEFORF. .\D.IKrTIVF>. 395 
 
 E. g. r,)rr ^ni the -^-nnl of Jehovah^ instead of "in^n &c. But 
 there are exceptions eiuini^h here to show that usage is variable Thus, 
 when the tbllowing genitive is a proper name which excludes the ar- 
 ticle, the first noun may take it ; as Gen. 31: 13 bN-D"'?. bJ<~ the God 
 of Bethel : Gen. 24: G7 ~n'i; ^irnxn to the tent of Sarah. So where two 
 genitives come together; as Ezek. 45: IG )'"\Nn Qyn Vb all the peo- 
 ple of the land (§ 172. 3. 6). In a lew other cases, it is also used by way 
 o[ emphasis &c. 
 
 3. Before a noun which has a suffix pronoun. 
 
 But here also the article is sometimes used, especially with a gen- 
 itive or for the sake of emphasis &,c. as Josh. 7 : 21 "^briNr: "rrtz in 
 
 ' . T: IT T f : 
 
 the midst of my tent., &c. The reason of the usual omission in this case 
 and the preceding one is, that the genitive or suffix pronoun gives suf- 
 ficient diJinitcHcss to the meaning of the preceding noun, without the 
 use of the definite article. 
 
 4. Before the predicate of a sentence. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 10: 5 'rj-pc^j^ uDi'^a loftiness are thy statutes ; Ps. 35 : 6 
 ^"J;;n :33~iT~*r;1' their way is darkness. So in the Greek. Compare 
 § 165. 2.' 6." 
 
 § 1G5. Article before adjectives, 
 
 tl. In general, where a noun has the article, the adjec- 
 tive or pronoun agreeing with it must also have the ar- 
 ticle. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 10: 12 !irT-..')n ^"^yrj the great city; Num. 11:34 
 i<inrt Sipan this place. 
 
 Note, in a few cases the noun has an article and the adjective 
 omits it ; as Gen. 29 : 2 nbina 'JiaNn the great stone. 
 
 2. The article is usually omitted before adjectives in 
 
 the following constructions, viz. 
 
 (a) When the noun to which the adjective belongs 
 omits the article. 
 
 E. g. Jer. 11 : 19 5]V?N -iii^ a tame lamb., &.C. 
 
 Note 1. When the noun omits an article required by the sense, 
 merely through the influence of a suflix pronoun or genitive whicji 
 43 
 
326 §§106,167. nouns; neuter gender, etc. 
 
 follows it (§ 164. 2, 3), the adjective which belongs to it may still 
 take the article; as 2 Chr. 6: 32 bi^aJi "^^T^V thy great name; Deut. 
 11:7 bi^^'n 11)11'! ^^^,^ the great work of Jehovah. 
 
 Note 2. The adjective sometimes has an article when the sense 
 of the noun does not require it, as 1 Sam. 19 : 22 ^Tiatl "^13 the great 
 cistern ; Jer. 27: 3. 38 : 14 &,c. In these cases, however, the article 
 may perhaps be regarded as a relative (§ 163. 3), and we may trans- 
 late, cistern which is great. 
 
 (b) When the adjectlvo is the predicate of a sentence. 
 
 E. g. n''l:^'i:NrT iia God is good ; riiJT; D'i-'rj ^T^2 blessed be the 
 name of Jehovah. Compare § 164. 4. 
 
 § 166. iKouns ; mode of expressing the neuter gender c^c. 
 
 tThe Hebrew having no neuter gender, commonly 
 employs the feminine to express it, but sometimes the 
 masculine. (§ 131. 6 note.) 
 
 E. g. Ps. 27 : 4 / have asked nJiN one thing ; Ps. 12 : 4 nVpH^ great 
 things ; Gen. 42: 30 nrdj? hard things, &,c. Less often the masculine ; 
 as Prov. 8 : 6 D"^'1''^r noble things. 
 
 Note. The feminine is also sometimes used in a collective sense 
 for objects which are properly masculine ; as Mic. 1 : 11, 12 nn^a^'♦ 
 inhabitress i. e. inhabitants; Mic. 7 : 8, 10 JDillN for enemies. So yii a 
 tree, !^^N a grove of trees, kc. So in Arabic the pluralis fr actus, which 
 is used as a collective, very often has a feminine form. 
 
 *§ 167. Mouns of midiitude and plural is excellenliae, 
 
 1. The Hebrews often employ nouns of the singular 
 form in a collective sense, especially national denominations. 
 (§ 133. 7.) 
 
 E. g. '';i;2^'J die Canaanite i. e. the inhabitants of Canaan, &.c. 
 
 2. For the sake of emphasis, the Hebrews commonly 
 employed most of the words which signify Lord, God, &.c. 
 in the plural form, but with the sense of the singular. 
 This is called the pluralis excellentiae, and is found in the 
 following words. 
 
§ 168. nouns; apposition. 3'27 
 
 (a) 'jinij Lord in all the forms of the plural, except ^^tN my mas- 
 ters ; biit the form ''^Tii. is always used with the sense of the singular 
 for God. (6) nVrN God in all the forms of the plural, (c) bi"2 lord 
 in all its forms. (</) D"'U;'1)7 r/ic j/joi< //o/y O/ie Hos. 12: 1. I'rov 9 : 
 
 10. 30 : 3. Jos. 21 : 19. (e) ""I'^j ilie Almighty is probably of the plu- 
 ral form (§ 133. 2. b). {/) D'^D'in household god as singular 1 Sam. 
 19: 13, IG. {g) Occasionally in a few other words; as Job 35 : 10 
 God ^'ds my maker; Ecc. 12: 1 T'^J■^^ thy Creator. See also Is. 22: 
 
 11. 42: 5. Ps. 149: 2 ; and ' anomalies in the concord of verbs.' 
 
 3. Tlic plural, especially in poetry, is not unlVequent- 
 ly used instead of the singular. 
 
 E. g. Job 6 : 3 the sand C"^;22 of the seas i. e. the sea. Even in ca- 
 ses where only one can possibly be meant, is this the case; as Judg. 
 12: 1 he was buried '''^,^'2 in the towns cf Gil cad i. e. in a town ; Gen. 
 8 : 4 the ark rested "^"l~\r!2 on the mountains oj" Ararat i.e. on a moun- 
 tain. Job 21 : 32 nT-)3i: the graves i. e. the grave. 
 
 § 168. J^ouns ; apposition, 
 
 tl. In Hebrew, as in other languages, two nouns desig- 
 nating the same thing arc placed in apposition. 
 
 2. In Hebrew, nouns are not unl'requently put in ap 
 position, in cases where the second noun in other langua- 
 ges would be a genitive. (§ 16 J. 2.) 
 
 E. g. Prov. 22 : 21 nttN D'''n53N words which are truth i. e. words 
 of truth ; Zach. 1 : 13 D'^^PS ^"''1^" words which are consohtio7is i. e. 
 words of consolation ; Ex. 24 : 5 D'^Tsb'^i tJ^HrT offerings which are. 
 peace-offerings. 
 
 3. Nouns are usually put in apposition which designate 
 weights, measures, time &c. 
 
 E. g. 2 K. 7 : 1 rhb nfjp a seah oC fne meal; 2 K. 5 : 23 Ul'^'2'3 
 ^p.5 two talents of silver ; Gen. 41 : 1 D"*^^ Q^n-'-P iwo years oi time ; 
 1 K. 7: 42 D"';/a'^ ^"^"1^13 ■'r»I) two rows o? pomegranates ; Ezek. 22: 18 
 ?]03 D'^^D dross o{ silver. Compare § 176. 6. 
 
 Note. These last instances may be explained, also, by supposing 
 
328 § 169. nouns; repetition. 
 
 the latter noun to be in the accusative and used adverbially^ as it is in 
 Arabic ; or which amounts to the same thing, we may say that the 
 latter noun is in an oblique case and governed by a preposition under- 
 stood ; as two talents in silver &c. 
 
 4. Sometimes nouns are put in apposition where the lat- 
 ter noun designates a whole or genus, of which the former 
 designates only a part or species. 
 
 E. g. Judg. 5: 13 dy D'^'n'^'lN the nobles of or among the people. 
 
 5. Some examples occur of apparent apposition, in 
 which there probably is an ellipsis of a noun. 
 
 E. g. niNli? [""n^N] ll'l'n'! Jehovah God of hosts. So probably Is. 
 30: 20 ynb [•'C] tiys water water of trouble ; IGN [nttH] r>12n the glo^ai 
 the glow of his anger. The Hebrew noun, which probably is omitted 
 in these phrases, is supplied in the brackets. 
 
 *§ 169. Kouns ^ repetition, 
 
 1. The Hebrews frequently employed a repetition of 
 nouns without the copula 1 for the following purposes, viz. 
 («) To denote multitude. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 14: 10 "iJ^n ni"iN!5 ni"lN3/ji^5 pits of bitumen i. e. 
 many pits, &.c. 
 
 (Jj) To denote distribution. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 32: 17 ilSb "Tny '^'TS, flock Jlock by itself I e. each flock 
 by itself. 
 
 (t) To denote all, every. 
 
 E. g. Deut. 14: 22 mJI^ ti3il5 year year i. e. every year. Some- 
 times also Tiyti^ a copula ; as Deut. 32 • 7 "ilTI 'iT'i generation and 
 generation i. e. all generations ; see no. 2 below. 
 
 (rf) To denote intensity. 
 
 E. g. Ecc. 7 : 24 pby pby deep deep i. e. very deep. So earnest- 
 ness in warning or threatening, in grief, joy &,c. is usually expressed 
 by repetition. 
 
 Note. In order to denote intensity, it is not always necessary that 
 the same word should be repeated ; but a synonymous word, or a word 
 
§ 170. nouns; genitive case. 
 
 of similar sound and signification, is often subslitnloil with llic same 
 ctTect, as Ps. 40: 3 "ji'ri CU clay mire i. e. the mir)' clay ; Job 30 : 3 
 nNi;?J^ ni<'\^ li'iisdng and destruction i.e. great wasting &;,c. (§ 178.2.) 
 
 2 Repetition wilh (he copula iisuaWy denotes diversity. 
 
 E. g. Deut. 25: 13 pwNiT pN stone and stone i. e. dilTerent stones 
 or weights; Ps. 12:3 3ri nrs -iinth a heart and a heart i. c. ditferent 
 hearts, with deceit. 
 
 § 170. JVoitns ^ mode of expressing the gcnilivc case. 
 
 Although the cases of nouns in Hebrew are not distinguished by 
 appropriate forms (§ 128. 2. § 135. 1), yet they are properly designat- 
 ed, as in the English and French languages, by the relations which 
 nouns sustain in a sentence. Thus, a noun which is the subject of a 
 sentence is always in the nominative case ; — a noun which expresses 
 the relation of property, possession k,c. is in the genitive case ; — 
 while those nouns which mark the object of any relation, may be said 
 generally to be in the objective case ; or specifically to be in the geni- 
 tive, dative, accusative, or ablative, according to the species of relation 
 of which they are the objects. 
 
 tl. Most commonly the genitive case is made by a 
 noun preceding it in tlie construct state (§ 135). The 
 noun itself in the genitive undergoes no change. 
 
 2. The genitive is often expressed also by circumlocu- f 
 tion, VIZ. * ■; 
 
 (o) By b "I'dlS! which belongs or Is to. 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 21: 8 the overseer of the herdsmen b^H'ii'b "^ '43 N; Tiy/«c/i be- 
 longed to Saul 1. e. of the herdsmen of Saul ; Ezek. 41:9 the breadth 
 of the -jcall y-Dil V ^'-r'^. ~<s^hich belonged to the side i. c. of the side-wall. 
 This kind of circumlocution is more frequent in the later Hebrew, and 
 is common, with little variation, in all the kindred dialects. 
 
 Note. This mode of expressing the genitive is most commonly 
 used, when two or more genitives follow each other in succession ; 
 as Cant. 1.1. 
 
 (b) By 7 simply. 
 
 E. g. *"43")":? "JS the son of Jesse ; ^'^N'? H'^il) the shrub of the earth. 
 This occurs particularly in the designation of time ; as Gen. 7 : 11 
 
330 § 171. nouns; genitive case. 
 
 in the sixth himdreth year n3"'''«r]b of the life of Koah. Also in desig- 
 nating an author ; as '^l'^i' ^'"3!'3 a psalm of David. Or in describing 
 the materials of a thing; as Ezra 1:11 3?^;^ n'^-.5 vessels of gold. 
 
 Instances like those in b are common in the kindred dialects, and 
 not unfrequent in Hebrew. All of them may be resolved into the 
 case a, excepting that there is in h an ellipsis of the relative pronoun 
 ^■JN; as •'■>2J^b [n;;rj "ITI^N] '}= the son which is to Jesse; so H"'^ 
 y*iN^ the shrub which belongs to the earth ; the 600f/i year which be- 
 longed to the life of Noah^ &.C. 
 
 (c) Bj 1^ denoting origin. 
 
 E. g. Job 6: 25 d3!^ 'l^T'^ ^^^ reproof from you i. e. your reproof 
 This is unfrequent. 
 
 Note. The genitive in regimen is generally placed immediately 
 after the noun &c. which causes it to be put in the genitive ; but in a 
 few cases, some word closely connected with the clause is inserted 
 between the genitive and its antecedent. Thus, Gen. 7 : 6 n^fi ^^2^ 
 D"^^ a flood of waters wo5, Heb. a flood was of waters ; Hos. 14:3 
 ■JIS^ NT23n""'?3 thou wilt forgive all transgression., Heb. all thou-wilt-for- 
 give transgression; Is. 40 : 12. Job 15 : 10. One can scarcely refrain 
 from believing that such cases, so contrary to the common usage of 
 the Hebrews, must have originated from error in transcribing. 
 
 § 171. J^oims ; use of the genitive case. 
 
 1. The genitive marks a great variety of relations and 
 dependencies in Hebrew, which can be better exhibited 
 by examples, than taught by rule. 
 
 E. g. Judg. 9 : 24 b^'2'^1' ''P.S O^JH the violence of [towards] the sons 
 ■of Jerubhaal. Prov. 20: 2 ^'^.73 ri;o"'i< the terror of the king i. e. which he 
 causes. Prov. 1 : 7 It^n"] riNT'^ the fear of Jehovah i. e. reverence to- 
 wards him. 1 Sam. 14:15 DTT^N ri'3'nr! the terror of God i. e. that 
 which God hath sent. Is. 26: 11 Dy~ri^'_p_ jealousy of [for] the people. 
 Lev. 26: 45 a"':rN*'^ n"''^_2 covenant of [with] the elders. Ps. 35:16 "^i^h 
 :;^^'73 mockers of [for] dainties i. e. to obtain them. 1 Sam. 16: 20 "iTsn 
 C"::. the ass of bread i. e. which carries bread. Ezek. 35: 5 yp. "jT'l?' 
 the sin of the end i. e. which brings consummation. Is. 34: 5 "''^Tn D? 
 the people of my curse i. e. whom I have cursed. Is. 54: 9 HJ ^72 the 
 •xaters of A'oah i. e. of the time of Noah. 
 
§172. nouns; construct state. 331 
 
 In short, the connexion and nature of the case must decide the 
 shade of meaning which the genitive designates ; as is evident from 
 the above examples. Instances of this nature might easily be multi- 
 plied. 
 
 2. In Hebrew, the genitive frequently stands nlicre 
 
 we might naturally expect apposition. 
 
 E. g. ms ^^^3 the river of Euphrates i. e. the river Euphrates ; 
 1 K.10:15 D''">nn ^"^i^J* the 7ncft of the merchants i.e. the merchantmen. 
 
 3. Tiic genitive sometimes follows adjectives which 
 express qualities belonging to the genitive noun. 
 
 E. g. 2 Sam. 4: 4 D''by'^ ^'2>}_ tame of feet i. e. in his feet; Ps. 
 24: 4 D"ED "^j?: pure of hands i. e. of pure hands ; Prov. 6 : 32 ib-'nOlrt 
 deficient of\\xi\ understanding. So in Lathi, integer xitae., scelerisque pu- 
 TVS Sac. 
 
 4. Sometimes the genitive following an adjective is 
 used as a noun of multitude, and the adjective then de- 
 notes a part of this multitude. 
 
 E. g. Prov. 15 : 20. 21 : 20 onN b'^DS the foolish of men l e. fool- 
 ish men. 1 Sam. 17: 40 five D''33N; "'p.^'^n smooth of stones i. e. smooth 
 stones ; Job 41 : 7 D''i573 '^jf.^CN the stroi^g of shields i. e. strong shields. 
 
 § 172. J^oiois y construct state zuithout a genitive, ^c. 
 
 The reason why the vowels of a word in the construct state are 
 shortened, is the close connexion in which such word stands with the 
 genitive that usually follows it (§ 135. 1). But as close a connexion may 
 exist in some other forms of expression, and of course produce the 
 same effect upon the vowels of the former noun. Some of these 
 forms are exhibited below. 
 
 tl. The Jorm of the construct state is sometimes found 
 where there is no regimen, i. c. no word directly govern- 
 ed by it ; as in the following constructions, viz. 
 
 (a) Before 2 ; as Is. 9: 2 ^''iCj^a Dn:o\p the joy in [of] harvest; Is. • 
 5 : 11 ^p.33 ''72''2li;7a who rise early in the morning. 
 
 (6) Before b ] as Is. 56 : 10 DWb "^sriN lovers of slumber. 
 
332 § 172. nouns; construct state. 
 
 (c) Before bi$; as Is. 14 : 20 -liia— ^paN-^N "'^"li"' gomg down to 
 the stones of the pit. 
 
 (d) Before ni< ; as Jer. 33 : 22 the Levites "^nN TiT^a who serv- 
 ed me. 
 
 (e) Before ^72 ; as Jer. 23 : 23 ii^;?l^ ''^!V^?. a God near at hand. 
 
 {/) Before "b^ ; as Judg. 5 : 10 '^■J'l"^^ ""^.^J^ '^ho go on the way. 
 
 (g) Before "i"»23n ; as Lev. 4: 24 Ti5w\ fiTpJS i^e place which. So 
 also even if "T4iN is only implied, as Is. 21 : 1 Tin {-;:n ri';"ip_ i/te ci^y 
 [where "\'4JN] David dwelt., ^I'^.p. being in the construct form. 
 
 (/t) Before I copulative ; as Is. 33 : 6 ri2.'ni r.asn wisdom and 
 knowledge. So even where "i is omitted, as Is. 28 : 16. 
 
 (i) Sometimes before adjectives; as 2 K. 12: 10 inN '}^■^^5 ohc 
 cojfer (§ 161. 1. a, note) ; Is. 17 : 10 D^:»S;3 "^.rjS pleasant plants. 
 
 2. In a very few cases, the construct form seems to 
 stand for the absolute ; or rather there is an elh'psis of 
 the second noun. 
 
 E. g. 2 K. 9 : 17 / see n^S'iJ a multitude i. e. the multitude of Je- 
 hu, as the preceding part of the verse shows. Ps. 74 : 19 give not 
 n;^nb to the beasts i. e. to the beasts of the forest ('^?*^^), or to the 
 wild beast. So in Ps. 16 : 3, ■'l"''li< is probably for y>Nn ''^.'"■IN, as 
 supplied from the preceding part of the verse. 
 
 Vice versa.) for the use of the absolute instead of the construct see 
 §168. 2, 5. 
 
 t3. The construct state has reference solely to the 
 relation of two nouns to each other, and not at all to the 
 case of thejvrmer of those nouns (§ 135. 1.) Hence the 
 noun in the construct state may be in the nominative, 
 genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, or ablative case, just 
 as the other part of the sentence demands. 
 
 («) In the nominative ; as 1 K. 12 : 22 dTjVNin 'iS'^ the word of 
 God came to Shemaiah. 
 
 {b) In the genitive; as Job 12: 24 '^nNrj-Qy "'"^'N*^ ^V. f^'^ ^^"''^ 
 of the 2^rinces of the people of the land, where ""uJNI is in the genitive 
 in regard to sb., and in the construct as it respects DJJ; ; while d^ is in 
 the genitive in regard to '^*pN'n, and in the construct as it respects 
 
§ 173. nouns; oblique cases. 333 
 
 (c) In the dative ; as Job 3 : 20 UJd: "''^^b to those who are grieved 
 in spirit^ where the former word is in the construct state and also in 
 the dative. 
 
 {d) In the accusative ; as 1 Sam. 9 : 27 that I may show thee ^a^TlNt 
 D'lnVN the word of God^ where "ilT is in the construct state and also 
 in the accusative. 
 
 (e) In the vocaUve ; as 2 K. 1 : 13 D-^riVNil 'ii'^tA O man of God. 
 
 (/) In the ablative ; as Ps. 17:4 '^"•nsiu "1?'13 by the word of thy 
 Hps^ where the tirst noun is in the construct state and also in the ablative. 
 
 § 173. J^ouns ; mode of designating other oblique cases. 
 
 1. The dative is marked by 7 signifying to or Jbr. 
 
 Note. In a few cases b stands before the nominative ; as 1 Chr. 
 3: 2 the third was DT^'^lNb Absalom. Sometimes before the accusa- 
 tive ; as Ezra 8:16/ sent "^l^fp^^b Eliezer &c. The latter case is 
 Syriasm. 
 
 t2. The accusative is sometimes designated by rifijt ; oth- 
 erwise it is without any distinctive sign. 
 
 Note 1. The use of riN with the accusative is limited (a) to nouns 
 with the article ; (6) to nouns having a genitive or suffix after them ; 
 (c) to proper names. Consequently it is used only in cases where a 
 defnite idea is conveyed by the noun. The particle DN is much more 
 frequent in prose than in poetry. 
 
 Note 2. But ni< is sometimes used before the nominative, as 2 K. 
 6 : 5 bT'^?"!!}?.") and the iron fell into the water ; especially before the 
 nominative of passive verbs, as Gen. 17:5 "^Q'lpTiit thy name shall no 
 more be called Mram. Sometimes before the nominative of neuter 
 verbs; as 2 Sam. 11 : 25 !TT^! "il~n~r)N let not this matter displease 
 thee ; Ezek. 35: 10 D^TilSl ^:\lJ""nN the two nations are mine. 
 
 It is most probable, that originally DNt was a pronoun signifying this^ 
 (he^ the same. So the Rabbinic Hebrew uses it, as DT'^fi in^Na on the 
 same day ; see Ges. Lehrgeb. p. 684. Allowing it to be a pronoun.^ we 
 may account for its being placed before the nominative &,c. 
 
 3. The vocative generally has the article. 
 
 4. The ablative takes "jX] ftom^ out of; 3 hu by ; C3? 
 mth kc. 
 
 14 
 
334 §§ 174, 175. nouns; use of the accusative, etc. 
 
 § 174. J\''ouns ^ use of the accusative case, 
 
 tl. The accusative commonly, as in other languages, 
 denotes the object of a transitive verb. 
 
 t'i. The accusative, in a great number of cases, forms' 
 adverbial designations of time, place, measure &c. and is 
 also used in all those cases where the Greeks understand 
 
 xar«, and the Latins, secundimu qrwad S^'c. 
 
 Hence circumstances like the following are usually put in the ac- 
 cusative case. * 
 
 (a) Place whither ; as 2 Chr. 20 : 36 lli'^-ij-ir nS^.'? to go to Tar' 
 shish. 
 
 {b) Place where ; as Gen. 18 : 1 briNn-nns at the door of the tent. 
 
 (c) Time when and how long ; as i"!^ in the evcnijig ; 'ip.S in the 
 morning. So Gen. 27 : 44 D''"TnN d'^73'' during certain days. 
 
 {d) Measure ; as Gen. 7 : 20 the waters rose fifteen HTSN cubits. 
 
 (e) The material of wliich any thing is made ; as Gen. 2:7 God form- 
 ed man '-\t}'S of dust from the earth. See § 197. 
 
 (y) Cases where yiuru would be implied in Greek; as 1 K. 16: 23 
 lame Tb^'^TiN as to his feet ; Ps. 3 : 8 thou hast smitten all thine en- 
 emies Tb as to [onl the cheek bone. 
 
 (g) Cases where a noun is taken in an adverbial signification ; as 
 Deut. 23: 24 HiT: voluntarily ; Ezek. 11 : 19 "5nN Sb nnanimoiisly ; 
 Ex. 24: 3 irjN Vip unanimously, &c. 
 
 3. The accusative is sometimes put after verbal nouns 
 of an active signihcation, and is governed bj them. 
 
 E. g. 2 K. 4: 1 njlT^-nJ* M'7.''^ fearing Jehovah; Is. 11 : 9 fiy?. 
 lnifl"^~nN the knowledge of Jehovah, lit. the state of knowing Jehovah. 
 
 § 175. JVouns ; case absolute,. 
 
 tl. By case absolute is meant the case of a noun which 
 stands in the beginning of a sentence, without any verb or 
 predicate directly belonging to it. 
 
 2. The case absolute is commonly the nominative ; 
 and it is sometimes connected with the rest of a sentence 
 in the following manner. 
 
§ 1 7G. nouns; construction ok mmlral.^. .5.35 
 
 ((/) By J'av copulative ; a;* Job 3(} : 2G -l|~n Nr"! VZ'^i "^§073 as to 
 the number of his i/rars, surely there is no computation of it. 
 
 (6) The nominative absolute is often found whore the sense 
 requires an oblique case, and then the oblique case is most commonly 
 made by a pronoun, viz. for the genitive, as Ps. 18:31 ^^"11T C^n "^Nn 
 as to God^ perfect is his wi/ v, uistcad of * the way of God is perfecf ; for 
 the accusative, as Ps. 74 : 17 Dn"!^'^ nnN Cinni y"'^ as to summer and 
 s'inter^ thou hast made them. So Jer. 6 : 19 rT2 ^CN'S'T ^n'nin as to iny 
 laK\ they haie abhorred it. 
 
 (c) Sometimes a participle is joined with the nominative, which 
 makes it like the English case absolute; as 1 Sam. 2 : 13 npT 'C"'i<~b3 
 n^T. tJny man offering a sacrifice., the servant of the priest came., Sic. 
 
 Note. Pronouns are found in the case absolute, as well as nouns. 
 
 3. Tlic case absolute is sometimes made by the oblique 
 cases. 
 
 («) By the accusative ; as Gen. 47 : 21 n"?^~nj< as to the people, 
 he led them from one town to another. 
 
 {b) By the dative ; as Ps.l6:3 Q''"«pilp.b as to the saints who are in the 
 land.) all my delight is in them, 
 
 (c) By the ablative ; as Gen. 2 : 17 i"!^ ^io nS'in yr73 as to the 
 tree of knowledge of good and evil., thou shalt not cat of it, &.C. 
 
 § 176. vVoun5 ; construction of numerals ^c, 
 
 1. The cardinal numbers from two to ten, are common- 
 ly constructed with plural nouns in the following manner ; 
 the gender being usually the same as that of the noun. 
 
 (a) In the construct state with nouns to which they 
 relate. 
 
 (Jj) In apposition, or perhaps adverbially, with the 
 nouns to which they relate, and either before or after 
 them. 
 
 E. g. d-Ii mrb'iJ three sons ; 'm):^ nirs three daughters. 
 
 The method of putting the cardinal after the noun is less com- 
 mon, and belongs rather to the later Hebrew. 
 
 Note. The forms of THN o?ie are commoaly adjectives. (§ 152 3.) 
 
 L ^<A^ 
 
336 § 1 76. NOUNS ; construction of numerals. 
 
 2. The cardinal numbers from eleven to nineteen are put 
 m apposition, or rather adverbially, with nouns either sin- 
 gular or plural, and commonly stand before the noun, but 
 sometimes after it. The gender is usually the same as 
 that of the noun. 
 
 E g. Num. 1 : 44 ttJ'^N "^iys? d^ri) twelve men; 2 Sam. 9 : 10 n-^J2n 
 W^zs "nt:^ ffteen sons, &c. 
 
 3. The tens, or cardinal numbers from twenty to ninety, 
 are of common gender ; are put in apposition with nouns 
 either singular or plural ; and may stand either before or 
 after the noun. 
 
 E. g. Judg. 11 : 33 'T^aJ O'^^.Tp?:! twenty cities ; Gen. 32 : 15 D^}r\^. 
 ta'^^^ip::; twenty rams. 
 
 4. Numbers composed of tens and units, such as 26, 
 34, 48 &c. when standing before the noun, require it to be 
 in the singular; but when the 7ioun precedes, it is in the 
 plural. In both cases, the gender of the smaller numeral 
 is the same as that of the noun. 
 
 E. g. Deut. 2:14 !121D r!5TaUJ1 D'^^pyi: thirty and eight years ; Jos. 
 19 : 30 D^P'^-T D-^nu;? d'^'^i* cities twenty and two, &,c. 
 
 5. The numerals T\i^12 hundred and ^bijl_ thousand may 
 be put in either the absolute or construct state with 
 nouns either singular or plural, and may stand either be- 
 fore or after the noun. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 17: 17 1^yil~'niil2 a hundred years ; 25 : 7, 17 nr^j DN^Q 
 
 O TXT" ^ ' 7 ^^-, 
 
 a kindred of years ; 2 Chr. 3: 16 ilN^. d^3173"1 100 pomegranates ; Is. 7: 
 23 "JC-T V\::,ii, a thousand of vines ; Ezra 8: 27 V\):ii., D'^sb-jni^ 1000 Darics. 
 
 Note. Numbers composed of thousands and smaller numbers fol- 
 low the same rule as composite numerals in no. 4 above. 
 
 6. In many cases, the numerals are used alone to de- 
 signate weights and measures in common use, the noun 
 being omitted. (§ 211.) 
 
§ 176. NOUNS ; CONSTRUCTION OP NUMERALS, ETC. 337 
 
 E. s;. Gen. 20 : IG qD3 ^ib.N a thousand shekels of silver ; Ruth 3 : 
 15 D''";i'"'*P ^'^ nix measures of barley ; 1 Sam. 10: 4 Dnb"''PU3 m-o 
 loaves of bread. The word n'^N cubit commonly takes the preposition 
 2 after the numeral; as Ex. 27 : 18 n73w\^ "tj^j one hundred in cubits 
 i.e. 100 cubits. 
 
 7. The cardinal mmibers beyond Icn are also used as 
 ordinals ; and arc cither put before the noun and in ap- 
 position with it, or are })ut in the genitive after the noun. 
 
 E. 2:. Gen. 7 : 11 DT"' 'y'^V ny^'JJa on the seventeenth day ; 1 K. 16: 
 10 l'?w'^ D"'"lt5y ri:UJ2 in the year of ixventy seven i. e. the twenty sev- 
 enth year. 
 
 Note. For the ordinal numbers below ten., see § 152. II. 
 
 8. The cardinal numbers below ten are also used as or- 
 dinals in designating years and days of the month. 
 
 E. g. 2 K. 18: 10 'ii-g n:^ the sixth year ; Gen. 8: 5 '2i-\hb ^PiiZ 
 on the frst day of the month ; Lev. 23 : 32 UiTPib S^y'tlins on the ninth 
 of the months &.C. 
 
 9. The cardinal numbers are used disiribiitively by re- 
 peating them without a copula. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 7 ■ 8 D';':*^ D^:\p two and two., or two by two ; 7: 3 Wi'ij 
 J^y^UJ seven and seven.) or by sevens. 
 
 10. The answer to the question hoiu often? is made 
 by a cardinal number joined with D^S step, time, either 
 expressed or understood. 
 
 E. g. Jos. G : 3, 11, 14 nnN t3?E 07ice ; Ex. 34 : 23 D'^aiJD 'ilibui 
 three times ; 2 K. G : 10 njlN once ; Gen. 4: 24 ri»l'iil U''::i^'D seventy 
 seven times. 
 
 11. Fractions of numbers are expressed by "T^ part 
 joined with cardinal numbers. 
 
 E. g. 2 K. 11 : 7 nin^n "n'^j two Ihird-parts =| ; Gen. 47: 24 
 nn^n y?-)^ four dhh-parts = j, &c. In Zech. 13 : 8 two thirds are 
 expressed by D'):'*:;-"'-?. The denominator of the fraction is usually to 
 be gathered from the context. 
 
338 §§ 177, 178. adjectives; comparison. 
 
 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 
 § 177. Adjectives ; comparative degree. 
 
 tl. The comparative degree In adjectives is made by 
 using 1^ prce, in comparison of, after the adjective and be- 
 fore the noun with which the comparison is made. 
 
 E. g. Judg. 14: 18 t^rq pinQ sweeter than honey ; Ps. 19 : 11. 
 
 t2. In the same manner also, 1^12 is used to make a 
 comparison after nouns or verbs signifying condition or 
 quahty. 
 
 E. g. Is. 52 : 14 his visage "liJ'^N^. f^'^^'^ was marred more than any 
 man''s ; Gen. 41 : 40 ^/373 ^l^N / will he greater than thou. 
 
 3. The particle of comparison "j^^, when used before 
 the infinitive mood, implies a negative, and may be trans- 
 lated so that not, or than that, according as the sentence is 
 constructed. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 4 : 13 Mi\!Ji?3 "'pS? biia my iniquity is great so that it 
 cannot he pardoned, or greater than that it can he pardoned. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the adjective necessary to make out the compar- 
 ison is omitted ; as Is. 10 : 10 their gods Sb'.^l'^"'^ were more powerful 
 than those of Jerusalem. 
 
 Note 2. In the Rabbinic, comparison is made by '^ni^ more. In 
 Arabic it is made by prefixing 5*, both for the comparative and super- 
 lative degrees. In the New Testament the positive degree not unfre- 
 quently is used for both the others, in imitation of the Hebrew. 
 
 § 178. Adjectives j superlative degree. 
 
 tl. The Hebrew has no appropriate form nor con- 
 >itruction to mark the superlative degree of adjectives ; 
 but expresses it by various circumlocutions in the following 
 manner. 
 
 (a) By the article prefixed to an adjective of the positive degree ; 
 as 1 Sam. 17:14 David was "Jtip^v] the smallest. The Arabian makes 
 his superlative by prefixing the article to the comparative form. 
 
§ 178, ADJFXTIVES ; SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 33'J 
 
 (//) By a genitive or suffix following the adjective ; as 2 Chr. 21 : 
 
 17 V32 "jiap the smallest of his sons ; Mic. 7 : 4 C^Tt3 the best of than 
 (f) A superlative of intensity is formed, when a word is repeated 
 and put in the genitive plural ; as D'pTpr; 'd>''i'p holy of holies i. e. most 
 holy place; Ecc. 1 : 1 D'^'rnn bar; vanity of vanities \. e. exceedingly 
 vain. So 1 K. 8 : 27 heaven of heavens i. e. the highest heaven ; Gen. 
 9 : 25 servant of servants i. e. a most abject servant ; Deut. 10: 17 God 
 of gods i. e. the supreme God &c. 
 
 {d) The comparative degree sometimes necessarily expresses the 
 sense of the superlative ; as Gen. 3: 1 now the serpent was irsa U^'^V 
 fTi-^^ri r^n cunning above all the beasts of the field i.e. the most cunning 
 of aU. 
 
 (e) Some novns necessarily imply a superlative; viz. (l) lUN'n 
 head, as Ps. 137 : 6 "'nnQt) 'XNI the head of my joy i. e. my highest 
 joy; (2) -|iDa^rs< born, as Is. 14: 30 D^Vl ""TSa first born of the 
 ■ci-retched i. e. most wretched; Job 18: 13 n?.^ 1132 the first born of 
 death i. e the most terrible death. 
 
 2. Besides the above modes of expressing a superla- 
 tive, the Hebrew exhibits a variety of methods by which 
 intensify of meaning is denoted. 
 
 (a) By nJ<73 very or 1N53 1J<J3 very very ; as Gen. 7:19 the waters 
 increased 1N73 TNU very exceedingly Sic. 
 
 {b) By repeating the same word; see § 169. 
 
 (c) By two synonymous words see § 169. (/, note. • 
 
 {d) By repeating the same word and putting it in the genitive 
 when repeated ; as Hos. 10 : 15 D:?n^"n n^l the evil of your evil i. e. 
 your base wickedness. Sometimes a synonyme is used in the genitive 
 instead of the same word being repeated. 
 
 (e) The name of God placed after a noun is intensive ; as Jonah 
 3:3a great city D^nrf^V. before God i. e. really or truly very great ; 
 Gen. 10 : 9 .Ximrod was a mighty hunter Jlin"^ "p.Db before Jehovah i. e. 
 exceedingly expert in hunting. So Acts 7 : 20 Moses was u(jTi7og rw 
 6toi fair to God i. e. very fair ; Luke 1 : 6 righteous ivMniov rov 
 Gfov before God i. e. really or eminently pious. 
 
540 § 1 79. ADJECTIVES QUALIFYING NOUNS. 
 
 § 179. Adjectives qualifying nouns, 
 
 tl. Adjectives used as epithets, or simply qualifying 
 noun^^ generally agree with the noun in gender and number. 
 
 What is said here respecting the adjective, is applicable almost 
 universally to participles and pronominal adjectives when they modify 
 nouns. 
 
 Note. For the use of the article with adjectives, see § 165. For 
 the use of adjectives before a genitive, see § 171. 3. 
 
 2. The p/Mva/z5 excellent iae commonly, but not always, 
 takes an adjective singular. (§ 167. 2.) 
 
 E.g. Is. 19: 4 JTiij^ D'^Dhi* a hard master; but also Jos. 24: 19 
 
 n^p^p, CnVN a holy God. 
 
 3. Nouns of multitude in the singular commonly, but 
 not always, require a plural adjective.* 
 
 E. g. Jer. 50 : 6 ni'nik 1^22 a wandering Jlock. 
 
 4. Dual nouns take plural adjectives. 
 
 E. g. Is. 35 : 3 n'lD'l Cn- weak hands. 
 
 5. Nouns of common gender, having more than one 
 adjective, adaiit both the masculine and feminine forms in 
 the adjectives. 
 
 E. g. 1 K. 19 : 11 pTHI !lb'1'l.*| tl^*! a great and strong wind. 
 
 t6. Adjectives qualifying nouns are usually put after the 
 nouns which they qualify. 
 
 The number of apparent exceptions to this rule is so very small, 
 and some of them so equivocal, that it appears dubious whether real 
 exceptions are to be admitted. See however Fs, 89 : 51 D''2'^~b3 
 D'^?ay all the numerous peoples ; also Is. 53: 11. Jer. 3 : 7, 10. 16: 16. 
 
 Note. The pronominal adjective n^f this not unfrequently precedes 
 the noun with which it agrees. 
 
 7. When an adjective serves to qualify two or more 
 
 * Note. When the concord is directed by the sense., as in nos. 2, 3, rather 
 than by the grammnlUal form of the noun, it 18 culled conslructio ad setisum. 
 
^ iJjO. ADJKCTIVES AS I'REDICATES. 341 
 
 nouns, it is usually put al'for thcru ; and the gender of it 
 may be eitlicr masculine as the more worthy, or the same 
 as the gonder ol" tlie la>^t noun. 
 
 E. £f. Neh. 9: 13 D-nii: n"i:i'ii ^"i^r g^"^'^ '"^'^ «"'' statutes; Ezek. 
 1:11 niTIS dn''S:3'] C~.''?.S their faces and Tilings were separated. 
 Here ninns a participial adjective is feminine, as is the noun also 
 which next precedes it. 
 
 § 180. Adjectives as predicates, 
 
 tl. When an adjective is the predicate of a sentence, 
 and the verb of existence (HTI) is omitted, the adjective 
 stands regularly before the noun and is usually without the 
 article. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 4:13 "^py i'i'l.l great is my {niquity. 
 
 In a very few cases it stands after the noun ; as in Gen. 19 : 20. 
 I Sam. 12: 17. 
 
 t2. When an adjective is the predicate of a sentence, 
 it generally agrees in number and gender with the noun 
 
 to which it relates. 
 
 The exceptions to this general rule are quite numerous in He- 
 brew ; but they may probably all be explained on the principle, that 
 when adjectives are used as predicates, they are often to be taken in 
 an abstract sense as nouns of the neuter gender. Thus Ps. 73 : 28 ri!5")j5 
 iia ''': D'^n'rN approach to God is to me delightful i. e. a pleasant or 
 delightful thing ; the noun being in the feminine and the adjective in 
 the masculine standing as a neuter noun (§ 162). So Gen. 27:29 
 ^l^nN "■^niii (he cursers rf thee are cursed i.e. an accursed thing; the 
 noun being in the masculine plural and the adjective in the masculine 
 singular for the neuter. 
 
 So Virgil Aen. iv. 569 varium et mutahile semper femina ; Statins 
 Theb. II. 399 blundum potestas ; Achill. Tat. 7xov}]o6i> (.uv yvvt]. So 
 TO 7T«r, z« TiuvTu the universe.^ rational or material. 
 
 3. When it is necessary to use the article before an 
 adj':?ctive employed as a predicate, the verb of existence 
 (fT^n) or its equivalent the pronoun >5'^n is usually insert* 
 ed: \§ 183.) 
 
 45 
 
342 §§ 181, 182. pronouns; use of the primitives, etc. 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 17:14 It^Jjn N^n T)'! David was the smallest i. e. the 
 youngest. In cases of this kind, the adjective is placed after the noun 
 to which it relates. 
 
 4. In like manner, participles used for the present tense 
 of verbs, sometimes stand as predicates after the noun, 
 and take the article. (§ 203.) 
 
 E. g. Deut. 3 : 21 nlNnrr ^"'j"'?. thine eyes see. 
 
 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 § 101. Pronouns ; concord with nouns, 
 
 |1. In general, pronouns agree with the noun for which 
 they stand, in number, gender, and person. 
 
 2. From this general rule there are several exceptions of not unfre- 
 quent occurrence, which may be arranged in the following order, viz. 
 
 («) As to number ; as Deut. 21:10 when thou goest forth against 
 ^"S'^it thine enemies and God iDriD gives him into thine hand; Deut. 
 28 : 48. Jos. 2 : 4 and the woman took the two men and secreted him, 
 &c. See the note below. 
 
 (6) As to gender ; as Ezek. 13 : 20 Dr^N and Ruth 1 : 22 lrt7ari re- 
 ferring to women ; Ex. 1:21 and God made Dn^ for them i. e. the 
 midwives; Judg. 19 : 24. 21 : 22. Is. 3 : 16. So vice versa Deut. 5: 
 24. Ezek. 28: 14 nJ* and 2 Sam. 4: 6. Jer. 50: 5 riiiri referring to men. 
 
 (c) As to both number and gender; as Job 39 : 14 J^"'^"^?. ^Ti'r 
 SHE leaveth her c^gs, where the antecedent is fi'^22'1 in the plural mas- 
 culine ; Is. 35 : 7 in the dwelling 'D'^lVi of the jackals and rliS^T i?i her 
 couching place, where d'^iri is plural and masculine ; Job 6 : 20. 14: 19. 
 
 Note. In cases like the above, the pronoun is to be regarded as? 
 nsed sometimes in either a collective or distributive sense (§ 167. 1. 
 § 188. 4), and sometimes in an abstract neuter sense (§ 180. 2). 
 These anomalies are common in Arabic, and were probably intro- 
 duced into written language from the expressions of common life. 
 
 § 182. Pronouns ; use of the primitives, 
 
 tl. The primitive personal pronouns arc usually, but 
 not always, in the nominative case. (§ 66.) 
 
§ 1S3. I'KONOUNS USED FOR THK VERB, KTC. Sl.l 
 
 2. When a pronoun ol" any form is to be repealed for 
 the 3ake of emphasis (§ 178. 2), it is done by using tlie 
 primitive form ; which may tlien be in any case required 
 by the nature of the sentence. 
 
 («) In the BaittiMitive ; as Ps. 9 : 7 ^73?! CnDT n^N the memory of 
 them of them has pciished i. e. the very memory of them &c.. 
 
 {b) ht-iixe- gomiivc ;-t» 1 K. 21 : 19 (he dogs shall lick ':]73^-ntJ 
 !ini< C.n the blood of thee even (f thee. 
 
 (c) In the dative ; as Hag. 1 : 4 DrN D?b r^n is it time for you 
 yourselves ? 
 
 {d) In the accusative ; as Gen. 27 : 34 *:N Da ''??.'^,^ ^^^^^ '"^ ^^'^'^ 
 me. 
 
 (f) In the ablative ; as 1 Sara. 25 : 4 "jl^n '^:^. ""^ zcith me even me 
 be this evil. 
 
 NoTK. The primitive pronoun is sometimes placed first ; as Gen. 
 49 : 8 Judah '^"'nN "nTV T,r\ii thee even thee shall thy brethren praise. 
 
 3. The pronoun is sometimes used by way of empha- 
 sis, instead of repeatlno; a noun. (§ 169.) 
 
 E. ff. Gen. 4: 27 *lV"i H^n &5 nu3?^ and to Seth even to him was 
 born a son. 
 
 Note. The construction described in this section is very common 
 in Arabic ; although in Hebrew it has been in a great measure over- 
 looked, until the publication of Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar. 
 
 *§ 183. Pronouns used for the verb of existence. 
 
 1. When a persona] pronoun is the subject of a sen- 
 tence, it implies the verb of existence (nTi) between it and 
 the predicate. The verb itself is usually omitted. (§211.) 
 
 E. g. Gen. 42 : 11 n:n:N D"':3 righteous are we ; Gen. 29 : 4 "J'^NTJ 
 DnN whence are ye ? Gen. 3 : 10 ''33k\ DT^y naked am /, 
 
 2. Personal pronouns of the third person sometimes 
 
 stand simply in the place of the verb of existence. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 9 : 3 every thing which moves ^n ti^t1 T«2?*? which is alive : 
 Ps. 16 : 3 the saints nTari y"jN2 '^TfJN who are in the land ; Zech, 1 • 
 9 n]?.N nan na what are these ? 
 
344 § 184. PRONOUNS ; USE OF THE SUFFIX PRONOUNS. 
 
 Note. This sense of the pronoun of the third person is still more 
 plainly exhibited when the subject of the proposition is in the first or 
 second person; as Zeph. 2 : 12 ye Cushhcs^ victims of my sxeord DrN 
 in 3t1 are ye! 2 Sam. 7 : 28 D^'-rNri Nnn-nriN thou art God ; Ezra 5 : 
 11 the sey-vants of God V^Ti i<:n;N are wc^ these words being- Chaldaic 
 and answering to the Hel'rew m72!^ ^:n:N. In Syriac and Arabic, this 
 use of the personal pronoun is very ccmmon. 
 
 § 184. Pronouns ; use of the siijjix pronowis. 
 
 « 
 
 tl. In general, the pronouns suffixed to verbs are in 
 tile accusative case (§ 126. 1), while those suffixed to nouns 
 are In the genitive case. (§ 135. .3.) 
 
 2. Verbal suffixes are sometimes used in the following 
 constructions, viz. 
 
 (a) In the dative ; as Jos. 15: 19 "'jrin: thou hast given to me; 
 Zech. 7 : 5 ^:N ''in^^i^ have ye fasted for me for me i. e. on my ac- 
 count (§ 182. 2. c) ; Job 10 : 14 if I sin "inn^oiJn then thou watchest it 
 FOR me i. e. on my account; Prov. 13: 20 lb^:o i'^n.'.p he seeks for 
 him, correction; Ps. 94: 20 Tj'^.anl' is it bound to thee? 
 
 (i) To denote relations which are usually expressed by particles ; 
 as Is. 65: 5 'Tj'^ri'ij^p I am more holy than thou; 1 K. 21 : 10 nnn^sf"! 
 and caused them to testify against him ; Ps. 42 : 5 D'^TN / moved along 
 WITH them^ &c. This usage is more frequent in Arabic. 
 
 3. The suffixes of nouns are sometimes used in the fol- 
 lowing constructions, viz. 
 
 («) In the dative ; as Ps. 115:7 D^i'^'n^ — d^."'ra'^ they have hands 
 — they have feet, for Drib Dtl!]! hands are to them, &,c. 
 
 {b) Instead of the preposition ":-y ; as Ex. 15: 7 T^'^p^ those ti'/to 
 me up AGAINST thee, instead of 'Tj^'ry D''73|5. So Ps. 53 : 6 ^:n. 
 
 t4. The feuflixcs of nouns may have either an active or 
 a passive sense. 
 
 {a) Active; as ''C'^n my violence i. e. that which I do; ""^30 my 
 book I. e. that which I possess. This sense of the suffixes is the com- 
 mon one. 
 
 (6) Passive ; as Jer. 51 : 35 ''p'^n my violence \. e. done upon me ; 
 Ex. 20 : 20 iriwH-)"; his fear i. e. which he inspires ; Is. 56 : 7 TiVsn my 
 
§ 185. PRON'Ol'VS ; PLACK OF TIIR SITPMXKS. ;M.5 
 
 prayer i. e. ofTorfil Ui mo ; Ps. 5G : 13 '^''^.'13 thy vows i. c. made to 
 thee ; Is. L'l : 2 rrnn^wS Iter s{<rhi)ig i. c. a sighing over her. Compare 
 §171. 
 
 Note, For the plcoiuxsm and ellipsis oi' personal pronouns, see 
 §§210, 211. 
 
 § 185. Pronouns ^ place of the siijfix pronouns. 
 
 tl. When a noun in the genitive Is used merely to 
 qunlify a preceding noun (§ 161. 1. o), the suflix pronoun, 
 which as to the sense belongs to the first noun, is usually 
 placed alter the second. 
 
 E. g. Dan. 9 : 24 '^i2Jn;5 'n'^i* thy holy city^ lit. the city of thy holi- 
 ness ; Is. 2 : 20 isDD V."'^^. /"* silver idols^ lit. the idols of his silver ; 
 Zcph. 3:11 jil^N^ ''l'^-:^ thy proud exuhers, lit. the exulters of thy 
 pride, &.c. 
 
 Note. In a few cases the suffix is attached to the frst noun; as 
 Ps. 71 : 7 '•^'■"■'Ona my strong refuge^ lit. my refuge of strength. 
 
 2. Suffix pronouns are usually placed in a sentence 
 (ij'ter the noun for which they stahd ; but sometimes this 
 noun is not mentioned until alter the pronoun, either Im- 
 mediately or perhaps at the distance oi" several senten- 
 ces ; and sometimes it is to be supplied only from the 
 general sense of the passage. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 87: 1 "i;"!p ''I'l'lr iriT^D") its foundation is on the holy moun- 
 tain 1. e. Zion's, as appears from v. 2 ; Is. 8 : 21 rrs *^'2'J he passes 
 through it i. e. the land, see v. 22 ; Ps. 9:13 xvhcn he taketh vengeance 
 for blood n^T Dniji he remembercth them i. e. the afflicted, as in the 
 second part of the parallelism ; Ps. 65 : 10. 68 : 15. 18 : 15 Di:."'D': he 
 discoinfted them i. e. the enemies, as in v. lo. So Job 37 : 4 after it 
 [lightning] roars the thunder Dlj;^"; tib") nor does he suffer them to delay 
 when his voice is heard^ where them must mean the rain^hml &c. which 
 follow thunder. See also the book of Nahum, which is wholly an or- 
 acle against Nineveh, although that city is fu-st mentioned in c. 2 : 9 ; 
 unless the inscription of the book is to be taken as part of th^ prophe- 
 cy. In Is. 45: 13 is a prophecy respecting Cyrus, as appears from v. 
 11 compared with c. 44: 28. 48: 14, 15. 
 
346 § 186. PRONOUNS J nouns used as pronouns. 
 
 Note. Sometimes, although the pronoun is immediately preceded by 
 a noun, it does not refer to that noun, but to one which must be sup- 
 plied from the sense ; as Ps. 44 : 3 by thy hand thou didst drive out the 
 nations tsy^n^ a7id didst plant them i. e. the Israelites, as appears from 
 V, 2. So Ps. 81 : 16 comp. v. 14. Ps. 105 : 37. Gen. 10: 12, where 
 Kin probably refers to Nineveh in v. 11. 
 
 *§ 186. Pronouns j use of nouns in place of personal pronouns, 
 
 1. In addressing a superior, the Hebrews commonly 
 avoided using the pronouns of the first and second per- 
 sons, and employed for the first the words ^"^ns? thy ser- 
 vant, ^n^Nl thy handmaid &c. and for the second, the word 
 *'D'1'7^ my lord, &c. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 44 : 16 what shall we say to my lord? God hath discov- 
 ed the guilt of thy servants ; lo^ we are servants to my lord. Verse 19 
 my lord asked his servants &.C. i. e. thou didst enquire of us. 
 
 2. The place of the personal pronouns, especially 
 when the sentence is reflexive, is often supplied by the 
 most distinguished and essential parts of either the exter- 
 nal or internal man, as follows. 
 
 (a) By "CJSi soul most frequently; as Job 9: 21 ■«ipD3 S."1N Nb / 
 know not myself; Ps. 7 : 3 lest like a lion "^tps^ PJ'^U'^ he rend me ; Ps. 
 3: 3 vijs:^ to me ; Ps. 11 : 1. 16 : 10. 35 : 3. Amos 1 : 8 Jehovah 
 hath sworn iliiS^^S by himself. 
 
 {b) By a"'j3 person ; as Prov. 7:15 '^'^33 ^tTiSb to seek thee ; Ezek. 
 6 : 9 Dn^3S^ ?:^pj they abhor themselves, &,c. 
 
 (c) ' By S^. heart; as Ex. 9 : 14 r^^b thyself; Ps 16 : 9 ''2^? / 
 myself &c. 
 
 (rf) Occasionally by several other words; as &''^n life; Ps. 7 : 6. 
 16: 9 nins heart, soul; Is. 26: 9 n^^l spirit; Ps. 6 : 8 "J-^y eye ; Ps. 
 16 : 9 '^'liZjiesh ; Ps. 17 : 14 IP.a belly; Ps. 6 : 3 d:;? bone, &c. 
 
 Note. The same usage prevails very extensively in Aramaean and 
 Arabic. 
 
§§ 187, 188. verbs; rovroRD with nouns, etc. 347 
 
 *§ 187. Prononns j use of the relative. 
 
 J. The relative pronoun HpNl, is used vvitli antece- 
 dents oi" all persons, numbers, and <:!^enders. (§ 68.) 
 
 Note. When the pronouns tiT and ^T are used as relatives (§ 68. 3), 
 they imitate TyN in being of all persons, numbers, and genders ; as 
 Job 19 : 19 Ti^nN nn and those whom / luive laved. 
 
 2. The relative TiDi^ is ol'ten used with other words, 
 merely to give them a relative sense. 
 
 («) With nouns and pronouns; as Gen. 13: 16 'TDS~nN *^TiJN which 
 dust ; Vr n'ON to whom; iriN* TIJN whom; Deut. 28: 49 ii'2ib -\^N 
 whose language; Ps. 1 : 4 H^l ^sp'^ri "^*«P^f which the wind scatters^ &c. 
 
 (6) With adverbs ; as D\U "1*^J< where ; D'Ji72 mz^N w/jence, &c. 
 
 Note 1. The word ~\'^i<_ is commonly, but not always, separated 
 from the word which it qualities, by another word. 
 
 Note 2. The %vord which "n'iJN serves to qualify is often omitted j 
 as Ezek. 21 : 35 iri the place [iz] nNn33 "I^N where thou wast crea- 
 ted ; Ex. 32 : 34 [D^p»] T^iJt-^i<. to what place ; Is. 43 : 4 [n^] T^NW 
 from what time., &,c. 
 
 For the ellipsis of "i^UN, see § 211. 
 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 §188. Verbs; concord with nouns. 
 
 In this section are exhibited those general rules of concord, which 
 the Hebrew has in common with most other languages. For anoma- 
 lies in concord peculiar to the Hebrew, see the next section. 
 
 tl. In general, a verb agrees with its nominative case 
 in number, gender, and person. 
 
 t2. Nouns of multitude in the singular often take a 
 verb in the plural. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 33 : 13 INSSn-bS intti then all the flock will die. See 
 § 179. 3 note*. 
 
 Note. Sometimes none but verbs in the singular are employed after 
 nouns of multitude ; in other cases a sentence begins with a verb sin- 
 gular and proceeds with plural verbs ; as Ex. 1 : 20, 33 : 4. Is. 2 : 
 20. Ps. 14: l,&c. 
 
348 § 1 89. VERBS ; anomalies in concord. 
 
 3. When several nominatives, either all mascuHne or 
 of different genders, are connected, they usually take a 
 verb in the plural masculine. 
 
 E. g. Ex. 17t 10 and Moses and Aaron and Hur ^V^' ascended ; Ps. 
 85: 11 !liiJ353 n7?iN;l~TJ5n mercy and truth are met together; Gen. 8: 
 22, &c. 
 
 For exceptions to the above general rule, see § 189. 9. 
 
 4. When the subject and predicate of a sentence are 
 
 connected by the verb of existence (n'^n), the verb often 
 
 agrees with the latter. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 27 : 39 '^^'v^T^ M^rf^ V"^-^^ "'?.'?^'t »*^'c^* countries shall 
 be thine abode ; 31 : 8. Lev. 25 : 33. Ezek 35 : 15, &c. 
 
 5. Dual nouns take verbs like nouns plural. 
 
 § 189. Verbs ^ anomalies in concord, 
 I. As to number. 
 
 tl. The pluralis excellentiae commonly, but not always, 
 takes a verb in the singular. (§ 167. 2.) 
 
 E. g. Gen. 1 : 1 D-'rTbN N-\s God created : Ex. 21 : 29 r]J2V '5'>r^'2 
 his owner shall be put to death. 
 
 Note. The pluralis excellentiae., in a very few cases, takes a verb 
 in the plural, viz. Gen. 20 : 13. 31 : 53. 35 : 7. Ex. 32 : 4, 8. 2 Sam. 
 7:23. 
 
 2. Plural nominatives of the feminine gender, which re- 
 late to beasts or things and not to persons, frequently take 
 a verb singular, whether it precede or follow them.* 
 
 E. g. Ezek. 26 : 2 ninbn ln"J2-^D broken is [are] the gates ; Joel 
 1 : 20 i'^?T\ rii7:r!2 the beasts cry ; Gen. 49 : 22. Jer. 4 : 14. 48 : 41 
 51 : 29, 56. Ps. 119 : 98. Job 27 : 20, &c. 
 
 Note. The 3 pers. fern, plural of the future seems to be used, in 
 some cases, for the 3 pers. fern, singular of the same; as Ex. 1 : 10 
 n»n^^ n:N'n.pn-''3 when there shall happen war ; Juilg. 5: 26. Job 
 
 nVi'e. 
 
 * Note. This construction of the feminine plural with a verb singular is 
 technically called the pluralis mhunianis. Compare ia Greek the neuter plu- 
 rals. ioined wiUi verbs singular. 
 
§189. VF.RIiS ; ANOMALIES IN CONCORD. 349 
 
 ;i. AVlicn a nominative plural is used in a distributive 
 sense, viz. to denote each or every one of the subjects in 
 question, it often takes a verb in the singular. 
 
 E. g. Ex. 31 : 14 DTan"! m''V?.~'3 every one u-ho profanes it [the sab- 
 bath] shall be put to ilcuth^ [it. they who profane it; Prov. 27 : 16. 
 28: 1, &c. 
 
 4. W^ien the verb precedes a plural nominative, it is 
 not unfrequcntly put in the singular. 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 1 : 2 d'^'ib';' ~2:sb "'n'^T and there was to PeninnaJi 
 children i. e. Peninnah had cliildren ; Is. 13: 22 D"",J< n:^ the jackals 
 shall hox!.-l ; Deut. 5 : 7. Judy. 13 : 12. 2 Sam. 21 : 6. Ps7l24 : 5. In 
 all such cases, the verb is used in a kind of impersonal way, like the 
 French il rient des homines^ there comes some men. 
 
 Note 1. Sentences often begin in this manner with a verb singu- 
 lar, and proceed with a verb plural ; as Gen. 1: 14 nilN'O Tj^ let 
 there be lights in the finnamenl T'iT] and let them he for signs &.c. Num. 
 9: 6. Ezek. 14: 1. Esth. 9 : 23. "' 
 
 Note 2. In analogy with the above rule, when the verb follows 
 a plural nominative, it is in a very few cases put in the singular ; as 
 Ecc. 2:7 "'":; TC^Tt D"]^ '''iz there were slaves to me i. e. I had slaves ; 
 Gen. 46 : 22 these were the sons of Rachel "V^ '^^'5. tt7i?c/i [there was] 
 zi-ere born to Jacob ; Gen. 35 : 26. Dan. 9:21. Is. 64 : 10. 
 
 //. As to gender. 
 
 T). Feminine nominatives, either singular or plural, some- 
 times take a verb masculine, whether it precedes or fol- 
 lows them. 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 25 : 27 *^nn5iy N'-'irr thine handmaid brought ; 1 Chr. 
 2: 48 lb^ '^^?."'3 the concubine bore; Judg. 21 : 21 ni:3 1w\:!£;'. t3J< if 
 the daughters go out ; Ruth 1 : 8 the Lord shew kindness unto you even as 
 VE [Ruth and Orpah] Dr!"i\py have done to the dead ; Is. 57 : 8 Tjb-nnSnl 
 and thou hast made for thyself a covenant., where the subject of the 
 verb is feminine as the context plainly shews. So Lev. 2:8. 11 : 32. 
 IK. 22:36. Ecc. 7:7. 12:5. Jer. 3 : 5. Cant. 3 : 5. 5:8. 8; 
 . 4, &c. 
 
 6. In a very few cases, a masculine nominative is fol- 
 lowed by a verb feminine. 
 46 
 
330 § 189. verbs; anomalies in concord. 
 
 E. g. Ecc. 7 : 27 nbin'p n'lJaJJ saith the preacher^ where the verb 
 follows the grammatical form of the nominative, rather than the sense 
 of it; Judg. 11 : 39 j7n~^nr]T and it became a custmn in Israel^ where 
 p*n may be perhaps of common gender. 
 
 7. Nouns of common gender take either a mascu- 
 line or feminine verb, and sometimes both in the same 
 construction. 
 
 E. g. Is. 33: 9 y'^.N mV?/3N b^N the land mourns and is withered; 
 14 : 7. 2 Sam. 22 : 8 Qeri. " Job 20 : 26. Jer. 2 : 24. 
 
 Note. There are many more nouns of tlie common gender in He- 
 brew, than has been generally supposed (Ges. Lehrgeb. p. 472) ; 
 which accounts for many supposed anomalies of gender. 
 
 8. Nouns of multitude frequently take a verb Jeminme, 
 and in some cases admit no other. 
 
 E. g. Ex. 5 : 16 Tj/Sy ^!^}I:2^ thy people have sinned. The names of 
 nations often take a feminine verb; as Ps. 114: 2. This construction 
 resembles that of the pluralis fractus in Arabic, which often takes a 
 verb feminine, whatever the sense of the noun may be. 
 
 9. When several nominatives of different genders are 
 connected, the verb sometimes agrees with a masculine 
 noun as the most worthy, and sometimes conforms to the 
 noun which stands nearest to it. 
 
 (a) With a masculine noun ; as Prov. 27 : 9 nb m^'^^^ '^'^p\^^ V^^ 
 ointment and perfume make glad the heart ; Hos. 9 : 2, &c. 
 
 (6) With the nearest noun ; as Num. 12: 1 pn-NT D^'ia 1?t}ni 
 then spake Miriam and Aaron ; Num. 20 : 1 1 Dl'^^'ll T^^Z^* ^''P^.1 <*'^<^ 
 the assembly and their cattle drank; Gen. 7 : 7. 1 K. 17 : 15. Esth. 9 : 
 29, &c. 
 
 For the general rule respecting composite nominatives, see § 188.3. 
 
 Note. Where there are several nominatives connected, and the 
 sentence begins with a verb singular, it commonly proceeds %vith a 
 verb plural ; as Gen. 21 : 32. 24 : 61. 31 : 14. 33 : 7. (Supra 4 note 1.) 
 
 ///. Jls to both number and gender, 
 
 10. Feminine nouns of multitude in the singular often 
 take a verb in the plural masculine. 
 
§ 190. VERBS IMPEUSOXAL AND INDKFINIIK. o.'it 
 
 E g. 1 Sam. 2: 33 all iT'a'lTg the increase of thy house ^ni?^^ shall 
 Jic ; Jt'v. 44 : 12 rT'nN/i; the remainder of Jmlah -who VZ'ii set their fa- 
 cts ; Zeph. 2 : 9. Gen. 48 : 6. This is the construclio Xid scnsmn. 
 (§ 179. 3 note*.) 
 
 11. Plural iionniiativcs of tlic ieniinlne gender some- 
 times take fi verb in tlie singular masculine, whether 
 they precede or lollovv the verb. 
 
 E. g. Job 42 : 15 DTD^ D^pS ^^"^3 4<b there were not found women 
 so beautiful ; Jer. 48 : 15 Tib^ ~"'"\^' her towns ascended in the flames; 
 Ex. 13:7. 1 K. 1 1 : 3. Is. iV : 6. " Mic. 2 : 6, Hab. 3 : 17. Ps. 57 : 2. 
 Job 22 : 9. Compare no. 4 above. 
 
 12. When the subject of a verb js a noun in the con- 
 struct state iollowed by a genitive, the verb sometimes 
 agrees with the second noun, or genitive. 
 
 E. g. 2 Sam. 10 : 9 and Joah saw that ri'7ZrV:1Z ""ri? nn"^r: the from 
 of the battle was against him^ where the verb agrees with riJ^nV^. ; Is. 
 22 : 7 nNi:?2 iTp^?. "^'j^'? the choice part of thy vallies i. e. thy choice 
 vallies shall be filled, where the verb agrees with •j'JiPny. So Job 29; 
 10.38:21. Is. 2:11. Jer. 10 : 21, &c. 
 
 § 190. Verbs impersonal and with ind finite subjects, 
 
 tl. Impersonal verbs arc made in Hebrew by the 
 third person masculine or feminine of cither the praeter 
 or future tense. 
 
 E. g. ^ri7} and it happened ; ^b ^^ it is bitter to me ; "^b h^2^ / am 
 quiet, lit. it Ls quiet to me ; ib "12£ or ib ">l?"T it was grievous, to him; 
 1 Sam. 30: 6 "I'l'lb "i:i;rj and it was grievous to David ; Job 4 : 5 and, 
 now N?3n it comes vjion thee. 
 
 In Gen. 4 : 26 the passive form is used impersonally ; viz. then 
 
 ^nin ii was becnta to call vpoti the name of Jehovah, for men began ^c. 
 {jT, Roth a- UATfii other plAce'f ^ ' 6 ^ 
 
 Note. Impersonal verbs commonly take after them a dative case 
 with the preposition r. If we translate them as personal verbs, the 
 subject of the verb is to be made by rendering this dative case as a 
 Romrnative ; as "'b "li^ ^ f'"* grieved, lit. it is grievous to me 
 
352 § 190. VERB& IMPERSONAL AND INDEFINITE. 
 
 t2. In Hebrew many verbs often belong to indefinite 
 nominatives, such as tU'^iJi, tDlN &c. which are sometimes 
 
 expressed, but are more frequently omitted. 
 
 This construction answers to the use of on^ tout le monde &c. in 
 French, or to the Greek ki'yovat, &c. and is quite common in Hebrew. 
 The following are examples. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 11:9 N-^p^ one called ; Gen. 48 : 1 '^QN'! and one told ; 
 1 Sam. 26 : 20 as ^^^^ one }mrsues a partridge ; 16 : 23. Is. 9:5. 64 : 
 3 from everlasting ^lyXD'iZ^ Nb they have not heard ; 47 : 1 '^b~nN"1p"] t{b 
 they shall not call thee iS^c. Dan. 1:12. Hosea 2 : 9. 
 
 Note 1. When a nominative is expressed, it is sometimes U3^N &c. 
 and sometimes the active participle of the verb is employed ; as Is. 
 16: 10 ^"^in ^"^^^ the treader shall tread i. e. one shall tread; Is. 
 28 : 4 tlN"irT JlN^^ the seer sees i. e. one sees; 2 Sam. 17 : 9. Deut. 
 22 : 8. So in the plural ; as Jer. 31:5 D'li'DStl ^^133 the planters shall 
 plant i. e. one shall plant ; Nab. 2 : 3. 
 
 Note 2. The 3 pers. plural is often to be rendered passively in 
 such cases, in order to represent the meaning in English ; as Job 34 : 
 20 "1^2N n'^'^D"' the mighty one is removed^ lit. they remove the mighty 
 one; Prov. 9:11 for by me ^S"]"] are increased [lit. they increase] 
 thy days^ and years ^Q'^pT^ are added [lit. they add] to thee ; Job 4 : 19. 
 7: 3. 17: 12. 19: 26. 32: 15. 
 
 Sometimes, perhaps, the 3 pers. singular may also be rendered 
 passively ; as Is. 28 : 2. Job 38 : 11. 
 
 The idiom described in note 2 is not unfrequent in the New Tes- 
 tament ; as Luke 12 : 20 rijv ipv^'ii^ oov aixairovaiv thy soul shall they 
 require, i. e. thy soul shall be required ; 16 : 9 that, "jshen ye die, d'i'io)v- 
 rat ye may he received [lit. they may receive you] irito everlasting habi- 
 tations, &,c. 
 
 3. Occasionally the second person of the verb is em- 
 ployed, instead of the third person with an indefinite nom- 
 inative. 
 
 E. g. Is. 7 : 25 n^a'ij NiSn N? one shall not come there, lit. thou shalt 
 not come; Job 18: 4. Lev. 2: 4. Also in the common phrase with 
 the infinitive 'Tj^tis "l^ until thou comest, I e. till one comes. (§ 124. 4. a.) 
 
§§ 191, lO^. verbs; r=;K of the praf.tf.r, ktc. 353 
 
 *§ 191. General use of the tenses. 
 
 1. As the Hebrew has but two distinct forms of tense, and as it 
 must, no doubt, have expressed all those sliades of tense which are 
 common to other languages ; it is obvious that the two tenses in ques- 
 tion must have had a diverse, various, and extended use. 
 
 2. Tlie praeter and iuture tenses, as they arc called, 
 can be used in a fi:reat many cases indifferently to express 
 the same idea. Both of them are made aorisis hy the 
 use of F<r/y conversive (§ 93) and some otlicr particles pla- 
 ced heforethein; so that Avith this Vav prefixed, they 
 express the same time as that which is designated by the 
 Icadirto; verb or participle in the sentence. 
 
 Still, the predominant use of the praeter is to express 
 past time of some shade or other; and tlie predominant 
 use of the future is to designate some shade of future time. 
 
 § 192. Verbs ; use of the praeter tense. 
 
 The praeter tense of verbs is used in the following sig- 
 nifications, viz. 
 
 J. For the perfect tense. This is its appropriate use. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 3:13 Tshat is this which n-'yiy thou hast done .^3:11 
 ■who T'-jn has told thee ? 3 : 14, 17, 22. 
 
 2. For the pluperfect tense. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 2 : 2 God finished the work which tTilJy he had made ; 
 2: o Jehovah T^t2X;rj i<? had not caused it to rain. 
 
 3. For the past tense of narration or historic tense. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 1 : 1 God N"12 created ; 1 : 2 the earth HD'^rt was desola- 
 tion ; 29 : 17 Rachel '^Nr-nD^ ~^^vl '^^ beautiful. 
 
 Note. It is common, when this historic tense is used, to place the 
 nominative before the verb ; but this usage is not without many ex- 
 ceptions, as in Gen. 1:1,2. To make variety, the future with Vav 
 conversive (§ 93) commonly follows the praeter in the same sentence 
 or in a succeeding one. This usage saves the necessity of repeating 
 the praeter. Compare Gen. 4 : 2—5. 1 Sam-. 7: 15, 16: 
 
354 § 1 92. VERUs ; USE of the praeter tense. 
 
 4. For the present tense in cases like the following, viz. 
 
 (a) In verbs signifying quality or condition ; as ^^a he is great ; 
 DSn he is wise, &c. 
 
 {b) Wlien the object of tlie verb is rather to express a state of 
 acting, than to assert any one particular action; as Ps. 119: 28 my 
 soul nsb/I weeps for trouble ; 1 1 9 : 30 the way of truth ■^n"in2 / choose ; 
 Is. 1 : 15 votir hands 51 N^ 'a are full of blood. 
 
 (c) In general propositions, where the object of the verb is not 
 to designate any particular time of action, but action at any time ; as 
 Ps. 1 : 1 blessed is the man who 'ijbll ii^ walketh not — ^"IT Nb treadeth 
 not — i"^^ Nb sitteth not. 
 
 5. For the future tense in cases like the following, viz. 
 (rt) In prophecies, protestations, and assurances ; as Is. 9 : 1 the 
 
 people who Jiave walked in darhiess 'IN'n shall see a great light ; Is. 2 : 2 
 iT^tri and it shall come to pass ; 2 : 3, 4, 11, 17, 19. 
 
 (6) When a future tense (with a future meaning) precedes the 
 praeter, in the same construction ; as Is. 1 : 30, 31 ye =l'^!iri shall he as 
 an oak — 1*0 nin J^^^^ and the mighty man sliall be 4-c. 3: 25, 28 thy 
 men 'jbct shall fall by the sword — and her gates =lbiN1 13NT shall mourn 
 atid lament. 
 
 Note. In cases like these, the conjunction Vav (§ 94) is prefixed 
 either to the verb itself, or to the nominative of it, when this nomina- 
 tive precedes the verb. See above for the former case ; for the lat- 
 ter which is very frequent, see Job 19 : 27 / shall see ^IN"! ''i'^i;') and 
 my eyes shall behold i. e. I shall behold, where ^i<'*^ is made future by 
 the Vav before its nominative. There are a few cases in which there 
 is an ellipsis of the Vav, or where poetic license drops it ; the sense of 
 the praeter remaining the same as if the Vav were expressed. 
 
 (c) When any word expressive of future time stands at the begin- 
 ning of any construction, it requires the praeter that follows it and has 
 a Vav prefixed to be rendered as the future ; as 1 Sam. 2 : 31 behold 
 the days D'^N2 are coming.^ Tiy'lJI when I will cut off S^c. 
 
 So thfi praeter is made future, when it follows an infinitive con- 
 struct having a future sense ; as Deut. 4 : 30 ':]ir "i^2 when thou shalt 
 be troubled '^iN^Zttn and these things shall overtake thee ; Gen. 2:5. So 
 also Ex. 17:4 12^73 liJ? yet a little time "^^^j^Ol and they xmll stone mt : 
 Ex. 16:6 at evening Srs?'!'''! ye shall know. 
 
§ 19.3. VERHS ; USE OF TIIR FUTURE TEKSE. 355 
 
 6. For the imperative mood in cases like the following. 
 
 (a) When an imperative precedes, and the praeter is connected 
 with it by Vav; as Gen. G : 21 '^'b ng take for thyself nCDNT and ^col- 
 lect. Compare above in no. 5. b. 
 
 (b) Sometimes when \'av is prefixed without tlie preceding im- 
 perative ; as Gen. 33: 10 if I have found favour in thine eyes^ rpjlb"] 
 then take ^-c. Ruth 3: 9. Gen. 47 : 23. Deut. 29 : 7, 8. 
 
 7. For the subjunctive mood in all its tenses ; especial- 
 ly when a future tense Avith a subjunctive meaning pre- 
 cedes in the same construction. (§ 193. 5.h.) 
 
 (o) For the present; as Gen. 3: 22 nb'vp^-'jc lest he put forth his 
 hand^ Hj^rT and [lest he] take, ~?^"] fl"^ [lest he] eat ^'C. where the 
 first verb is in the future and the others in the praeter, but all have 
 a subjunctive sense. 
 
 (6) For the imperfect; as Is. 1 : 9 ^2*''jn we should be as Sodo7n, 
 !i:^:3"1 we should be like Goinorrha ; Gen. 33: 13 ^n?3i — d^ps'^ should 
 one hurry them, then they would die; Ruth 1:12. Judg. 8:19. 
 
 (c) For the pluperfect ; as Is. 1 : 9 unless Jehovah "^""nin had left, 
 vs a remnant <S,-c. 2 K. 13 : 19 then ri^3^, thou wouldest have smitten the 
 Syrians. Job 10: 19. Nam. 22: 33. 
 
 {d) For the futurum exactum or future perfect, as it is named; as 
 Ruth 2: 21 :i?3-DN '^'J until they shall have finished; 3:18. Is. 4 : 4. 
 Gen. 24: 19. 
 
 § 193. Verbs ; use of the future tense. 
 
 The peculiar forms which the future tense sometimes assumes in 
 order to mark diversity of meaning, are treated of in §§ 91 — 93. It re- 
 mains in the syntax to describe the various senses which the future 
 form conveys, in cases where peculiarity of structure is not concerned. 
 
 The future tense of verbs is used in the following sig- 
 nifications, viz. 
 
 1. To indicate future time. This is its appropriate use. 
 
 2. For the present tense. 
 
 E. g. 5>*1i< Kb / know not; bS^N nV / cannot ; NiSn 'J'^NQ whence 
 earnest thou ? tUjpin-nTa what seekest thou ? This sense of the future fe 
 very common, and agrees with the common use of it in Arabic. 
 
356 § 193. VERBS ; use of the future tense. 
 
 Note. The future is often used for the present in general proposi- 
 tions, where there is no precise limitation of time ; as Prov. 15 : 20 a 
 wise son n73iy7 makes glad his father^ i. e. it is a general fact that he 
 does so at all times. (§ 192. 4. c.) 
 
 3. To designate past time. 
 
 (a) When preceded by particles that indicate time past, (l) By 
 ?N then; as Jos. 10: 12 '^2']';' TwX then spake he. (2) By DIP. not yet ; 
 as Gen. 2 : 5 Ti'Jj^l D"i.l5 was not yet., or before it was. But sometimes a 
 future sense is attached to a future form after both of these particles ; 
 as Ex. 12: 48. Job 10: 21. 
 
 (6) Sometimes, though not very frequently, it indicates the past 
 time of narration or the historic tense ; Gen. 2 : 6 and a mist ~V.?2 'went 
 up ^c. 2: 10 and thence TnS"; it was divided 4rc. 2 : 25 ViliUilsn"; i^bl 
 and they were not ashamed. 
 
 Note. With Vav conversive, the future forms a common historic 
 tense (§ 93). But in the simple form, as above, it is specially employ- 
 ed to denote habitual or continued action ; as 1 K. 5 : 25 thus much Sol- 
 omon ]n'^ gave to Hiram yearly ; Job 1 : 5 thus Ti'i^'S^ did Job continvr- 
 a%; 2 Sam. 12: 31. 2Chr. 25:14. 
 
 4. For the imperative in cases like the following, viz. 
 (a) Always where the Jirst or third person of the imperative is 
 
 needed (§ 89. 3) ; as Gen. 1 : 26 D'liJ "ip^'D let us make man ; 1:3 
 ^iN-^^n"; let there be light., kc. 
 
 Note. Where excitement, determination, urging, pressing entrea- 
 ty &c. is to be expressed, the future, and for the most part the para- 
 gogic future (§ 91), is employed ; as inb'^^N let me rejoice now ; fi'n^pii 
 let me arise now. 
 
 {b) In prohibitions ; because the Hebrew imperative is not used 
 with negatives; as Ex. 20: 15 i::5n N'b steal not, lit. thou shalt not 
 steal. 
 
 5. To express all the various meanings of the optative 
 and subjunctive moods. 
 
 («) For the optative, especially when the particle N3 
 is subjoined. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 7 : 10 N3 — \m''_ O that it might cmne to an end .' Cant. 7 • 
 9 NJ-^Ti: O may they be! 1 K. 17 : 21. Is. 19 : 12. 47 : IS. 
 
§ 193. verbs; use of the future tense, 357 
 
 For the optative use of ilie paragogic and apocopated future, see 
 § 91. 
 
 {()) For the subjiinrtive, cspcclnlly after particles sig- 
 iiiiying- that^ so ikal, in order that, 6cc. 
 
 The following arc the particles which usually precede the future 
 in its subjunctive sense, (l) "idN tt'ct ; as Gen. 11:7 ^^^'O;^ Nr "^^N 
 that they may nnt xinderstami^ kc. (2) "IT 3:;? that ; as Gen. 27: 4 m^?-'? 
 ■"J?: "rjDnari tliat my snul may bless thee. (3) "1 that; as rTD^T tliat he 
 may die. (4) ""S that ; as Gen. 38 : 16 -ji^hat wilt thou give me NT^in "3 
 that thou muyeat come in iiitto me ? (5) b that ; 1 K. 6 : 19 ]rinb that thou 
 mayest place. (6) "ITIJN: ■}y72r m order tliat ; as Ezek. 20 : 26 "^v^N "J?'?^ 
 ^^"i;; in order that they may hws:. (7) bJ< that not ; as N'^'^n ^N be not 
 a/raid, or that thou be not afraid. (8) "^2 tliat not ; as Ps. 10: 18 ^3 
 ^iy iT'OT"' that one may no more continue. &.c. (^) "JS that not ; as Lev. 
 10 : 7 in^P "jS that ye may noi die. 
 
 JN'oTE. The future often follows particles like the above, even 
 when the subjunctive sense is not required. 
 
 (c) For designating all those shades of meaning, which 
 we express m Enghsh by the auxiliaries may, can, must, 
 mi'jht, could, should, would, &c. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 3 : 2 Ir^i*: u-e may eat ; 30 : 31 !]b-^nN-:i:2 what shall 
 [must] I give thee? Judg. 14: 16 my parents have I not told T'aN ^bl 
 and shoidd I tell thee ? Prov. 20 : 9 "^mT'-^IZ who can [will] say ? So 
 also Job 10: 18 yi^N / should have died ; Gen. 31 : 37 '^nV-y^**.] ihat I 
 might take my leave of thee ; 29 : 8 until that all ^tsOU"^^ shall have been 
 gathered, comp. § 192. 7. f?. 
 
 6. When the future with Vav conversive, which com- 
 monly indicates past time (§ 93), is used as a proper future, 
 the Vav must be regarded merely as a conjunction. 
 
 E. g. Is. 9 : 5 to us a son shall be given, and the government '•Jiri 
 shall be upon his shoxdder 4-c. Is. 9 : 10, 13, 15, 17. 51 : 12, 13. . 
 
 Note 1. In like manner, the future with Vav is sometimes found 
 in the following senses, viz. 
 
 (a) For the present indicative; as 2 Sam. 19: 2 belwld the king 
 weeps "^Nri'T and mourns. 
 
 {b) For the present subjunctive ; as Jos. 9:21 let them live 1^"^2 
 and let them he S,'C. or may thev be i^'C. Job 14 : 10. 
 
358 §§ 194, 195. verbs ; use of the imperative, etc. 
 
 Note 2. The very small number of instances in which the above 
 use of the future with Vav is found, would almost lead one to suppose, 
 that the punctuation of Vav copulative has been exchanged by mistake 
 for that of Vav conversive. 
 
 § 194. Verbs ; use of the imperative inood. 
 
 The imperative mood and the future tense are evidently very 
 nearly related to each other, and in many sentences are used almost 
 indiscriminately. For the use of the future in an imperative sense, 
 see § 89. 3. § 193. 4. The imperative, besides its proper sense, is em- 
 ployed for the future in the following constructions. 
 
 1- When two imperatives immediately succeed each 
 other, the latter often has a future sense, and the former 
 a conditional one. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 42 : 18 T'T)'] 1ii:5> do this and live i. e. on condition ye 
 do this, ye shall live ; Prov. 3 :'3, 4, 7. 4:4. 7:2. 9:6. Is. 8 : 9. 
 36: 16. 45: 22. 55: 2. 
 
 2. When an imperative is connected with a future in 
 the same construction, it often has a future meaning. 
 
 (a) Sometimes when it stands before the future ; as Is. 45:11 
 '';ibi<T2J WILL ye enquire of me — and "^J.^l^ri will ye prescribe to me 4'C. 
 6: 9."' 
 
 {b) When it stands after the future; as Gen. 45: 18 IrirriN") and I 
 •will give you the best of the land of Egypt ^-^N") and ye shall eat the 
 fat of the land ; 20 : 7. Is. 54 : 14. Ruth 1:9.' 
 
 § 1 95. Verbs ; construction of finite verbs with cases. 
 
 tl. The Hebrew has no verbs formed, as in Greek 
 and Latin, by prefixing prepositions to them, so as to 
 make composite verbs. But it possesses an equivalent 
 mode of varying the sense of verbs, by inserting a pre- 
 position between them and the noun with which they are 
 constructed. 
 
 Different prepositions, of course, will give different shades to the 
 
§195- VERHS ; CONSTRl'CTION WITH CASKS. .JOD 
 
 meaning of the same verb ; and in [h\< way a great variety of forms of 
 verbs are made in Hebrew, Aramaean, and Arabic, which may be 
 called composite ; almost exactly as we may say in English, jmt^ put 
 hy^ put up, put in, put down, put aside, put away, &.c. 
 
 E. g. !:D: to fall ; r^ re: to fall over to, to fall away ; ]''3 7? J to 
 leave, to depart from ; ""rc':; "rc: to fall down before any one. 
 
 N'^P to call ; 2 i^np to call to, to invoke ; b ^cnp to name. 
 
 ?»N"^ to ask, with an accusative o( person ; rN>^ to demand, with an 
 accusative of the thing demanded ; a bN">lJ to consult any one. 
 
 The following arc some of the principal cases in which 
 verbs are constructed with prepositions before their nouns. 
 
 2. The preposition S is oCtcn put after verbs of the 
 following classes, viz. 
 
 Generally, verbs signifying to he angry, to trust., to hold, to sin against, 
 to reprove. Sic. More particularly, verbs si^mifying to pray to or ?n- 
 voke, to worship, to testify against, and verbs of sense, viz. those which 
 signify to look upon, to hear or listen to, to smell, to touch, &c. 
 
 3. The preposition 7 is often put after verbs of the 
 following classes, viz. 
 
 Verbs signifying to make, to attain to, or to become any thing; as 
 2 Sam. 7:14/ will be to him SNb for a father [a father] and he shall 
 he to me "jiVybr a son [a son] ; 1 Sam. 4 : 9 a""4J:}itb Dn'^^ri be ye for men 
 i. e. be men, act courageously; Gen. 2 : 22 and Jehovah made the rib 
 n'tJNr for a woman i e. a woman. The later Hebrew often inserts b 
 in cases where, in the older books, the verb is directly followed by an 
 accusative ; as b'^^^ri Jon. 4 : 6, comp. Ex. 12 : 27, &.c. 
 
 4. The prepositions D, I'D, hz, -j^S, ^:?3, '^nnx, ^}ph, ■ 
 Sic. are also often put after verbs, and serve to modify 
 the simple meaning of the root. 
 
 Note. It is of great importance to study diligently the peculiari- 
 ties of verbs, as thus constructed with prepositions ; since the knowl- 
 edge of these is essential to an accurate and critical acquaintance with 
 the Hebrew language. Practice, however, and a constant use of the 
 lexicon, are the only means of acquiring such knowledge. 
 
360 § 196. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE., 
 
 §196. Verbs governing the accusative, 
 
 tl. Active transitive verbs govern tlic accusative case. 
 
 t2. Many vei'bs are both transitive and intransitive ; and 
 consequently are used either with or without an accus- 
 ative alter them. 
 
 E. g. M^r to rveep and to bemoan ; ?jrin to go and to pass through 
 Gen. 2 : 14 ; SU:^ to dwell and to inhabit Fs. 22 : 4 ; "nTST to sing and to 
 celebrate with praise ; so '7;'^, "i'^'ii;, &c. 
 
 3. In Hebrew, many verbs govern an accusative di- 
 rectly, without any intervening preposition, which we can 
 translate only by inserting a preposition before the noun. 
 
 E. g. TiKs to bring good tidings to any one ; !T~i?J to be refractory 
 AGAINST any one ; ^"^3? to give a pledge for any one, &,c. 
 
 In this way some whole classes of verbs (with occasional excep- 
 tions) take the accusative directly, where in our language we must 
 generally supply a preposition. 
 
 (o) Verbs of putting off and on, of ornamenting ; as '^i- to clothe 
 Ps. 65: 14 ; "CLB to unclothe ; TTN to gird on ; ri"J^" to adorn with Hos. 
 2:15; T'CV to "jorap vp one''s self \\irii Ps. 104 : 2, &c. 
 
 (6) Verbs of plenty and want ; as ii):J2 to be full Ex. 1:7; i'itj 
 to be abundant ; !ni to satiate with drink ; y"^3 to overflow ; ^Ctl to 
 lack Gen. 1 8 : 28 ; ^^\D to bereave 27 : 45, &c. 
 
 (c) Verbs of dwelling in or among ; as iDli) to inhabit Ps. 57 : 5 ; 
 ■n^a to dwell 120 : 5 ; ^St to dwell Gen. 30 : 20 ; l^'iJ^ to sit or dwell Ps. 
 80: 2. 107: 10, &c. 
 
 (rf) Verbs of going out and coming in, coming upon, happening to ; 
 as iS*^2 to come Ps. 44 : 18 ; ii:i:l2 to befall Jos. 2 : 23, &c. 
 
 (e) Verbs of overflowing, overspreading &.C. take the accusative of 
 the thing with which they overflow &c. as Ex. 3:8 a land which 
 ■^5"T^ abn niT overflows with milk and honey ; Joel 4: 18. Jer. 9: 17. 
 Lam. 3 : 48. 
 
 4. Neuter verbs sometimes take an accusative case. 
 
 E. g. :in S.jn to celebrate a feast ; l^TTl ^in to propose an enigma, 
 &c. Such cases resemble the English phrases to run a race, to fght a 
 fghtf kc. 
 
§ 197. VERIIS OOVERMNG TWO ACCUSATIVES. 361 
 
 NoTK. This construction is in common use, when other words are 
 adiled which are desig-ned to pvo intensity to the expression ; as Gen. 
 
 27 : 34 rriQn ^rbn.") ~p>^ p?^!!! «"f' 1'^ cried a loud aud bitter cry 
 I e. he wept aloud and bitterly ; Neh. 2 : 10. Ps. 25 : 19. Jer. 16 : 4. 
 1 Sam. 20: 17. 
 
 § 197. Verbs governifig two accusatives, 
 
 tl. In general, all verbs which have a causative mean- 
 ing may govern two accusatives, the one usually of d. per- 
 son and the other of a thing. 
 
 E. g. Ezek. 8:17 DttH y-\.\r-nij ^Nba they filed [caused to be 
 full] the earth with violence ; Gen. 41 : 42 •i;'.i;~'''ia2 TnN '^2"^!T and 
 he clothed him with [caused him to put on] garments of fine linen, &c. 
 
 2. As the conjugations Piel. and Hlphil usually have 
 a causative meaning (§§ 78, 79), so they often govern 
 two accusatives, especially in verbs oil the following clas- 
 ses, viz. 
 
 Verbs signifying to put on or q^, to cover, to adorn, to Jill, to give 
 or bestow^ to take away or deprive, to teach, to shexv, &c. 
 
 3. Many verbs in Kal often have a causative meaning 
 or one kindred to It, and may therefore govern two accu- 
 satives, especially verbs of the followmg classes, viz. 
 
 All those verbs mentioned under no. 2 above ; also A'erbs signify- 
 ing to anoint, to sore, to plant, to stone i. e. cover with stones, to nourish., 
 to fiurnish, to rob, to do good or evil to any one, to call or name, to com- 
 mand, to convert one thing into another ; as Job 28 : 2 n'l^^n: p^22^ "(5** 
 stone he fuses into brass ; Ex. 30 : 35 ri"l.i:p ^rriN D^'^}"* ihonshalt make 
 it incense, or thou shalt make with it [of it] incense. So Gen. 2 : 7 God 
 made man ^iaTN" "J7J IDi' with dust[out of dust]yrorft the earth, where 
 '^t)V is the accusative of the material, as grammarians speak. (§ 174. 
 2.'e.) 
 
 Note. The intervention of appropriate prepositions, 2,r,'j7D,by, &:c. 
 before the latter noun in cases like the above, is not unfrequent ; so, 
 that the Hebrew often exhibits both methods of constructing a sen- 
 tence, viz. either with or ziHthout an intervening proposition before 
 the latter noun, when a verb is followed by two accusatives. 
 
362 § 1 98. VERBS ; construction of the passive with cases. 
 
 §198. Verbs; conslruclion of passive verbs zoith cases. 
 
 1. With verbs of a passive sense, the agent or subject 
 of the verb is commonly designated by 7 prefixed. 
 
 E. g. Ex. 12:16 tJiis only imist be prepared DSb by you ; Prov. 14 ■ 
 20 he is hated even 1?15?"lb by his associates. 
 
 Sometimes I'D is used instead of b ; as Cant. 3 : 10. Ecc. 12 : 11. 
 
 2. The passive ibrms of verbs which govern two ac- 
 cusatives, retain but one of them ; the other being usual- 
 ly made a nominative. 
 
 E. sf. Ps. 80 : 1 1 irrbit ti^^'n ^D3 the mountains were covered with 
 the shadow of it ; in the active voice it would be, it covered the moun- 
 tains with the shadow of if. Ex. 25 : 40. 28 : 1 1 . 
 
 Note. The same rule holds -true when one of the cases of the ac- 
 tive verb is a dative or other oblique case ; as Gen. 2 : 23 N*i.J^"] DNTb 
 {Tvi?i< [Q">??] the name woman shall be given to her^ the word n'iJN being 
 in apposition with Q'iJ understood ; comp. v. 20 where the same words 
 are employed in the active construction. 
 
 3. Sometimes verbs of a passive form have an active 
 sense ; and in this case they may govern an accusative 
 like active verbs. 
 
 E. g. Job 7 : 3 ■'ribn:Jl / have inherited months of vanity., where the 
 verb is in Hophal ; Ex. 20 : 5. Deut. 13:3. 
 
 § 199. Verbs ; use of the infinitive absolute, 
 
 tl. The infinitive absolute in Hebrew answers to the 
 Latin fiferund in do of the ablative case. 
 
 o 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 24: 21 ^b?3n ^'b^ regnando regnabis i. e. thou wilt 
 SURELY be king. It is probably to be taken, in most cases, like the Lat- 
 in ablative o{ manner. 
 
 t2. The infinitive absolute is usually put before a finite 
 tense of the same verb, and serves to qualify its meaning 
 in the following manner, viz. 
 
 (a) It marks intensity of various degrees ; as 1 Sam. 23 : 22 d'n^; 
 
§199. verbs; use of the infinitive absolute. 3G3 
 
 N^rt m3'2 "f^^nf subtilely will he deal ; 20: G '-N\U3 VnUJ3 he hns urgently 
 requested ; Amos 9 : 8 "!"''^"^i< T'r^'^Jrr Nb / ■will not utterly destroy <^'C. 
 Gen. 31 : 30. 43 : 3, 7 yn: i"ni;n could we indeed know ? 37 : 8 ^b73ri 
 ^r'Sn shalt thou indeed reign ? 19: 9 UlD*^ D-i 12911:^1 and noia he would 
 fain act even as a judge among us. 
 
 (6) It denotes assurance, certainty ; as Gen. 2 : 17 D^Tzn ni?3 thou 
 shalt surely die ; 3:4. 37 : 33 vj'lb fjiU he is siirely torn hi pieces ; 
 Judg. 15:2 "^nn/Ci* S73N surely I thought^ or said. 
 
 (c) It marks continuance of action; as Is. 30: 19 M25n Nb 122 
 thou s1w.lt not always weep ; Ex. 34 : 7. Jer. 23 : 17. Especially is con- 
 tinuance denoted, where t-a-o intinitivos absolute are used ; as 2 Sam. 
 15 : 30 "331 rir" they went up continually weeping ; Gen. 8 : 7 NIJ:;;'.! 
 SiuJT ai^'^and it continued going and 7-elurning ; Jer. 7: 13. 11:7. 25: 
 3. 26 : 5. In such cases, a participle is sometimes used for the sec- 
 ond infinitive, as in 2 Sam. 16:5; or a noun, as Is. 29 : 14. 
 
 ((/) In general, it gives intensity, energy, animation, vivacity, or 
 some coloring of this nature, to the expression; although it is difficult 
 always to express it in an English version. In a similar manner, the 
 intensive particles of the Greek, German &c. cannot be well express- 
 ed in any translation. 
 
 Note 1 . In regard to the choice of conjugations from which the 
 infinitive absolute is taken, it may be remarked, that commonly it is of 
 the same conjugation as the finite verb, with which it is joined. Some- 
 times however it is of a diflferent conjugation ; as Job 6 : 1 bf?.^'' '-'ip'^ 
 where the infinitive absolute is in Kal, but the finite verb in Niphal ; 
 Ezek. 16:4 rirnrt fib binnn where the infinitive is in Hophal and 
 the finite verb in Pual. 
 
 Note 2. The infinitive absolute is not always derived from the 
 same root as the form of the finite verb with which it is coupled. It 
 is sufficient if the meaning be synonymous ; as Is. 28 : 28 ^ "'^inT] \:;^^^t 
 he will thoroughly thresh him^ where the verbs are derived from •>!;"}* 
 and Ui^'l, both signifying to thresh. 
 
 Note 3. In Arabic, the infinitive absolute is put after the finite 
 verb ; in Syriac, before it ; but in Hebrew, before or after^ though most 
 commonly before. Between the infinitive and the finite verb there is 
 sometimes placed a particle of negation, as Mb ; or some affirmative . 
 or expletive particle, as Da ; or even a preposition, as Ezek. 7 : 14 
 ^ippi ^yp.rj. 
 
364 § 199. VERBS ; use of the infinitive absolute. 
 
 3. The Infinitive absolute is sometimes used instead of 
 an adverb. (§ 156. 3. d.^ 
 
 E. g. il"^t2''l7. bene faciendo for bene ; 1 Sam. 3 : 12 tlVpT bniTt in- 
 cipiendo etfiniendo i. e. from beginning' to end, utterly. 
 
 Note. In a few cases, instead of the infinitive absolute^ the infini- 
 tive construct seems to be employed ; either adverbially, as Is. 60 : 14 
 Jlimi) incurvando for TV)t\'^ ; Hab. 2 : 10 n'^p for ni^p^ ; — or with a fi- 
 nite verb, as Num. 23 : 25 ^i^pP ^'^ ip tJwu shult not curse at all^ for 
 
 sisp ; Ruth 2 : 16 iV'in-b'-i:, for bVr^i ; Ps. 50: 21 t-t^r^^'-ni^^ for 
 !l"'n, SiC. In Is. 22: 13 the infinitive absolute may perhaps be used 
 for the infinitive construct. 
 
 4. The infinitive absolute is sometimes found in the 
 place of a finite verb. In this case, there is probably an 
 ellipsis of the finite verb, with which the infinitive would 
 be coupled. (§211. 9.) 
 
 E. g. Deut. 5 : 12 -\in\i; for the full form ^n ^ ?::•:: n'n-72'U Deut. 6 : 
 17 ; Ex. 20 : 8 nT=>T for '^'stn SdT Deut. 7 : 18 ; " Job 40 :"2 inn cm 
 contendendo ? for "2.'^ inr; Judg. 11 : 25. 
 
 The following are examples of this use of the infinitive absolute. 
 
 (a) For the praeter, when the praeter precedes ; as Dan. 9 : 5 
 "ITDI ^ITnTJ -xxe have rebelled and apostatized ; Est. 9 : 6. Jer. 14 : 5, 
 Gen." 41 : 43. Judg. 7:19. Ecc. 8:9. 9:11. 
 
 So without a preceding praeter; as Ezek. 1 : 14 the living crea,- 
 iures ST^T Ni2£"i ran and returned ; Ecc. 4 : 2. 
 
 {b) For the future, when the future precedes ; as Jer. 32 : 44 Jields 
 shall they buy iiniDT and they shall write bills of sale^ '^^IPI — DTlnm and 
 they shall seal them^—and take witnesses ^c. Num. 15: 35. Deut. 14: 
 21. Is. 5:5. 
 
 So without a preceding future ; as Ezek. 11:7 you N'^^cirr will I 
 hring out <^c. 1 K. 22 : 30. 2 Chr. 18 : 29. 
 
 (c) For the imperative ; as Deut. 5: 12 'ni72'>r! keep ; I : 16. Jer. 
 2 : 2 Tii^rj go ; 13 : 1, &c. Nvun. 25 : 17. See the first examples above. 
 
 Note. The infinitive absolute is, in some cases, to be translated in 
 a passive sense ; as Prov. 12:7 tlie wicked ^T^rj are to be destroyed. 
 This is elliptical ; the full phrase would be ^^sn"; ^icrr. So nsn in 
 Prov. 15: 22. 
 
 For the construction of the infinitive absolute with cases, see § 202. 
 
§ 200. VF.RHS ; USE OF THF, INFINITIVE CONSTRL-CT. 3G5 
 
 *§ '■200. Verbs ; use <if the iiiJiitUive construct. 
 
 The infinitive construct, being a sort of verbal noun (§ 87. 4), is 
 used in all the cases like a noun, so far as the construction, position, 
 government, and even Ibnn of the word is concerned ; only it has, 
 from the nature of the case, no plural. The following are examples 
 of its use in the several cases. 
 
 1. In the nominative case. 
 
 E.g. Gen. 2:18 DnJjr: niTi the being (inf of n^ln) of the man 
 alone is not good ; 29: 19 T.T] my giving (inf. of "jHO) is good; 11: 6. 
 30 : 15. 
 
 2. In tlie genitive case. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 29 : 7 7\Ciiri_ m; the time of coUccti7}g ; 2 : 4 nV^^^ DV2 
 in the day of making i-c. Num. 9:15. Ps. 128 : 2, et passim. 
 
 3. In the dative case. 
 
 E. g. Num. 7 : 5 ibyb ^l"^?!! and let them be for serving i. e. let 
 them serve, 8:11; Ezek. 30 : 16 ^")":.2rTb n^.i^n it shall be for pierc- 
 ing through i. e. it shall be pierced through ; comp. § 201. 1. 
 
 4. In the accusative case. 
 
 E. g. 1 K. 3 : 7 / knen; not f<in nN2i: the going out or coming in ; 
 Jer. 5 : 3. Gen. 21:6. 
 
 Note. The accusative here commonly has \ before it ; as Gen. 
 11 : 8. Ex. 2: 15. Comp. § 201. 1. 
 
 5. In the ablative case. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 39 : 2 / will guard my way NTUln^y>om sinning^ &c. 
 
 6. The infinitive construct, like nouns, takes preposi- 
 tions before it and suffixes alter it. 
 
 In translating the infinitive in this construction, we must for the 
 most part give it a finite sense, as in the following examples. 
 
 (a) With 2; as Gen. 2 : 4 DwVnsria when they were created, lit. in 
 the being created of them ; Ex. 16 : 7 ir»>i;2 because he heard ; Is. 1:15. 
 
 {b) With 3 ; as Gen. 44 : 30 \\23 when I come ; 39: 18 ^'3■"lrl3 
 when I lifted up. 
 
 (c) With b ; Gen. 2: 3 niyj^'b when he made it ; Is. 7 : 15 ini'^b un- 
 til he know ; 1 K. 16 : 7 ^o provoke him by his doings r>T^jnb in that he 
 was i-c. 
 
 48 
 
366 § 201. VERBS ; infinitive construct with lamedh. 
 
 {d) With 1^ ; Deut. 7 : 8 D^nN niil^ O^lnNW "^3 because Jehovah 
 loves you^ lit. because of the loving of Jehovah you. The preposition 
 yi2 has often a negative sense in such cases ; as Gen. 27 : 1 his eyes 
 were c('un nij^'n)?. so that he could not see, lit. from seeing; 16 : 2. Ex. 
 14 : 5. For ]a before the infinitive in comparisons, see § 177. 3. 
 
 (e) With ly; Judg. 6 : 18 '^niUJ ns; until thou returnest ; 3: 26. 
 
 (/) With b? ; Jer. 2: 35 "^l^N-b^" because thousayest ; Job 10 : 7 
 
 {g) With ']^12b_ ; as Gen. 37 : 22 b'^iS^T 'J^'^b that he might save ; 
 Ezek. 21 : 15. ' , " 
 
 {h) With nrtn ; as Is. 60 : 15 S^lsnTi'. ^n'l''rT nnn because that thou 
 iicast forsaken <S-c. 
 
 (t) With "\nN, •'7.nN &c. as Gen. 60: 14 T^^i? •'"iri.^ after he 
 was buried. 
 
 Note. In a very few cases, the infinitive construct is used for the 
 infinitive absolute; see § 199. 3 note. 
 
 § 201. Verbs ; idiomatic use of the ivfniiivc construct xtiith b. 
 
 tl. The infinitive construct with the prefix 7, in very 
 many cases, answers precisely to tlie EngHsh infinitive pre- 
 ceded by the particle to. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 2 : 5 and there was no man I'^^b to till the groxmd ; \. 
 10 and a river went out from Eden mpUJnb to water the ground ; 11:6 
 all which they may purpose DVyUyb to do^ &c. 
 
 Note. When the negative '^riba comes before an infinitive, the 
 preposition b is put before the former ; as Gen. 3:11 which I com- 
 manded thee b^N ^*^^-"? ^"'^ to cat. 
 
 2. The infinitive construct with the prefix 7 and with 
 the verb of existence (fT^Jl) expressed or implied, consti- 
 tutes a periphrasis expressing tlie meaning of several forms 
 of the finite verb, viz. 
 
 (a) Of the praeter ; as 2 Chr. 26 : 5 D"'rtbiS: ui-il^ "^in'^^T and he 
 sought God^ lit. and he was in seeking God ; Gen. 15:12 and the sun 
 Niib Tt";i was about to go dotwn, lit. was in going down ; 2 Chr. 11 : 
 22. Ezra 3: 12. 
 
§ 202. VKRBS ; INFIXITIVE WITH CA^V:>, ob7 
 
 (/;) Of the present ; as Is. 41 : 14 Vr-niilsb [n^rr] he heiaa down 
 
 for himself cedars^ lit. [he is] in hewing^ down &.c. Prov. 19 : 8 he thai 
 
 is zi'ise n:u N^^b [^^vj] Jindelh prosperity^ lit. is in finding; Is. 21 : 1. 
 
 (c) or the future; as Is. 38: 20 •':i':'u:T-"r [n;|n^] r.in^ Jehovah 
 will deliver //le, lit. will be for the delivering of me ; Ps. 25 : 14 Jeko- 
 rah D^'^'iin^ [n;'.r|')] will teach them, lit. will be for tlie teaching of 
 them ;'40 : 15. 62 : 10. Ecc. 3 : 14. 
 
 {d) Of the passive ; as Jos. 2 : 5 and it came to pass SaDr "l^u^n 
 when the gate was to be shut, lit. in the shutting of the gate; Deut. 31 : 
 17 rDNr riTTI and they shall be devoured, lit. and it shall be for de- 
 vouring thorn ; Is. 6 : 13. 
 
 (e) Of the Latin participle in dvs, or the English auxiliaries shall, 
 can, must, &c. as 2 K. 4 : 13 nvji;b l^l^] ~'?. ^'hul is to be done for 
 thee? 2 Chr. 19: 2 -{Ti;b [~^"] Ji^'i/nrrt shotdd one help the wicked? 
 Judg. 1 : 19 \i;"'-^irir [~^n] iih he could not dispossess them; Hos. 9: 
 13. Amos G; 10. 2 Chr.' 20: 6. 
 
 *§ 202. Verbs } construction of the infnitive zuith cases, 
 
 1. The infinitive construct governs nouns in the ob- 
 hque cases, like finite verbs. (§§ 195 — 198.) 
 
 The accusative, of course, occurs the most frequently in this con- 
 struction. Here also belong the cases m which the infinitive construct 
 takes verbal suffixes. (§ 126. 1, 5.) 
 
 Note. The infinitive absolute also, in a very tew cases, takes an 
 accusative after it; as Is. 22: 13 ^u)z bbwSn "TwS*:: du'^Di npa ;in cae- 
 dendo boves et jugulando oves et edendo carnem 4"C. 
 
 2. The subject of the infinitive construct, corresponding 
 to the nominative case oi" finite verbs, is usually put in the 
 genitive case alter the verb. 
 
 E. g. Judg. 13: 20 3n"r~ nVr^a in the lighting vp of the flame i.e. 
 when the flame lighted up ; 1 Sam. 23 : 6 IJ^^^f? D^^^ in the flying 
 ofAbiathar i. e. when Abiathar fled ; Ps. 66 : 10. 
 
 Here belong the cases in which the infinitive construct takes noun- 
 suffixes. (§ 126. 5. § 135. 3.) 
 
 Note 1. The infinitive construct often takes the cases of both the 
 subject and object in the same sentence ; as Gen. 2: 4 '^^^7^\'^ nil!;S> DT''2 
 D^n'ilj"] yni-t in the dvy of JehovalCs making the earth and the heavens i.e. 
 
368 § iJOo. VERBS ; use of participles. 
 
 in the day when Jehovah made &,c. 1 K. 13 : 4 ^i'^-nN 'rfb^alr; 5;b\p3 
 UJ'^N when the king heard the word of the man 4*c. Is. 58 : 5 a day vhlV 
 Ti;55 D'HN when a man will ccfflict his soul^ &,c. 
 
 So with the subject and two accusatives; as Gen. 41 : 39 '"ITIN 
 rii<T~^3~nN '^niN D'^rjVN 5''1^n since God^s shewing you all this i. e. 
 since God hath shewn &.c. 
 
 Note 2. The genitive usually stands next to the verb, but in a 
 very few cases the accusative is put first ; as Is. 5 : 24 ]r:;b "iljj? V3W3 
 ■^N as thejlame ofjire devours the stubble ; 20 : 1. Gen. 4: 15. 
 
 *§ 203. Verhs ^ use of participles. 
 
 Active participles are often used in the place of finite 
 verbs, viz. 
 
 1. For the present tense. 
 
 E. g. Ecc. 1 : 4 one generation ^blTT passeth away and another gen- 
 eration i^3 Cometh ; 1 : 7, 8. Ps, 1 : 6. 3 : 2. 4 : 7. Is. 1 : 7. 
 
 Note. In this manner, participles are used with pronouns of any 
 person, instead of verbs, in order to express the present tense ; as N^,"^ 
 ■'^iN I fear ; nni< Nn;; thoufearest ; ^3(15'?'. °"'^^1'? '^^ /e«'", &c. In in- 
 transitive verbs this use is very common. 
 
 2. For the past tense in all its gradations. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 2 : 10 and a river i<:2^ issued from Eden ; Deut. 4 : 3 
 your eyes r^^^?~lt^ have seen; Gen. 41 : 17, 18, 19. 
 
 3. For the future tense in all its varieties. 
 
 E.g.- Gen. 17: 19 Sarah n^.b^ shall bear a son 4-c. 19 : 13 we 
 la^n'^n'J^'q «''^ about to destroy the city ; 6 : 17 behold I N"'i'5 will cause 
 to cmne a flood; 48 : 4. Ex. 9 : 18. 1 K. 11 : 31. 14: 10. 
 
 Note 1. Participles, when used as verbs, are subject to all the ano- 
 malies of concord which are found in verbs (§ 189). Thus Gen. 4:10 
 l3''Pl;'i: T'n^'? "'^.1 '"ip ^^'^ '^^^'^^ °f ^^^y brother''s blood cries; where the 
 participle agrees with the second noun, &c. (§ 189. 12.) 
 
 Note 2. The two Hebrew participles, active and passive, often 
 have the sense of the Latin participles in rus and dus ; as Gen. 19 : 14 
 1"';^;rt r\'-\7\1 rrri'^Ta Jehovah is about to destroy the city ; Ps. 76 : 8 NnT3 
 metuendus ; Ps. 18:4 bbll^ laudandus, &c. 
 
 4. When the verb of existence (m*^") is added to the 
 participle, an imperfect tense descriptive ol continued ac- 
 tion or condition is designated. 
 
§204. verbs; I'Amicii'r.Es with Cases. Sli'J 
 
 E. ?. Jol) 1:14 the cattle nv«i;")h ITI were ploughing ; Neh. 1 : 4 
 bV?»T-=l D^ ''"^'*.^ I xoas fasting; and praying; 2 : 13, 15. 2 Chr. 24 : 
 11. 30 : 16. Gen. 4 : 17. Dcut. 9 : 22, 24. 
 
 5. The ndvcrbial words D,''. there is and 'J']8^ there is not, 
 either witii or without suilixes, are often connected wltli 
 participles, and thus form a periphrasis i'or the present 
 tense of llie finite verb. 
 
 E. sr. Judsr. 6 : 3G if H'^XVZ TiJ" thou surest ; Gen. 24 : 49. 43 : 5 
 if nV^i'O '^r''^** thou dost not send aia-ay ; Ex. 5: 16 straw "{nD 'j'^N is not 
 given ; Lev. 26 : 6. 
 
 § 204. Verbs ; construction of participles with cases, 
 
 tl. Active participles may govern the same cases as 
 their verbs. (§ 195—197.) 
 
 t2. It is a more common construction, to put the active 
 participle in regimen wMth the noun that follows it. (§135. 1.) 
 
 E. g-. Ps. 84 : 5 T^t)'"'! ■'n'^ii" inhabiters of thy house; Ps. 28 : 1 ■'tllV 
 *li:3 the desceiiders [those who go down] into the pit; 5: 12 ''5'j.^ 
 ^^U; the lovers of thy name ; 19 : 8. Prov. 2 : 19. 
 
 Note. The genitive after the active participle, constructed in the 
 manner jus^t described, is capable of all the varieties of rendering 
 which belong to the genitive al^ter nouns (§ 171) ; and sometimes also 
 prepositions &c. intervene between the participle and genitive, as ia 
 the case of nouns. (§ 172.) 
 
 3. The participle passive is constructed with cases iu 
 tlie following manner, viz. 
 
 («) With an accusative; as Ezek. 9 : 2 Q"'-? 'J^Sb clothed [with] 
 linen garments ; 1 Sam. 2: 18 "tisiSt "^^^tl girded [with] aa ephod. So 
 in Greek avutdehjv iTneif-iit'og II. «. 149. 
 
 {b) With the genitive ; as Ezek. 9: 1 1 D'^-sr: d^n"- clothed [with, ofj 
 linen garments ; Joel 1 : 8 pTl)-n'^^'ri, girded [with, of] sackcloth; Ps. 
 32 : 1 yc;3~^lTU3 pardoned [of, from] sin 4'C. 
 
 Note. When there is but one form of the participle, as n73 from 
 Diy to die^ this form is capable of all the meanings and constructions 
 of both the active and passive participles. 
 
370 § 205. VERBS USED AS ADVERBS. 
 
 § 205. Verbs used as adverbs, 
 
 1. It is a frequent case in Hebrew, that when two 
 verbs immediately follow each other, either with or with- 
 out the copula between them,, the first of them serves 
 merely to qualify the second, and must be rendered ad- 
 verhially, 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 2: 3 n'12'in '12'^n ^N do not make much and speak 
 i. e. do not say much ; Job 19:3 ■'b~^^3^ri ^\2Jin fib ye are not asha- 
 med ye stun me i. e. in a shameless manner ye stun me ; Gen. 26 : 18 
 Ssn^] aub'T and he returned and dug i. e. he again dug; 19: 22. 27: 20. 
 30 :'31. 31 : 28. Hos. 1 : 6. Ps. 51 : 4. 71 : 20. 
 
 The verbs most commonly used thus, are the following, viz. 
 
 i'^t^Tl to do well used for well, skilfully, Ps. 33 : 3. 
 
 5]''Din to add — again, once more, Gen. 4:2. 8: 12. 
 
 nbs to end — adjinem, entirely. Gen. 24 : 15. 
 
 ^ri73 to hasten — hastily, quickly. Gen. 27: 20. Ex.2: 18. 
 
 Jia'in to increase — much, often, 2 K. 21 : 6. Ps. 51 : 4. 
 snu) to return — again, IK. 19 : 6. Job 7 : 7. 
 
 Other verbs are also occasionally found, which may be rendered 
 adverbially ; as Gen. 37 : 7 i^O ; 31 : 27 wherefore nhlr riNnn2 hast 
 thou fled, secretly ? Compare in Greek the adverbial use of the verbs 
 "kav^avM, TvyyavM, q&ut>o), with participles. 
 
 Note. In some cases the second verb is in the infinitive ; as Gen 
 27: 20. Ex. 2-18, &,c. 
 
 2. The manner in which the Hebrews express the idea of 
 suddenly, unexpectedly, in a manner unforeseen or unprovided for, is pe- 
 culiar. They say ^n^ Nb he knew not, or ^IS?"!^^ fib they knew not ; or 
 they use other equivalent expressions. Thus Job 9 : 6 he removes the 
 mountains ^S>1^ i<b they know it not i. e. suddenly ; Ps. 35 : 8 destruction 
 comes upon him y'}^ ^b unexpectedly ; Prov. 5: 6. Cant. 6: 12. Job 4 : 
 20 Q'^'^J^. ''bs^ no one considering i. e. suddenly, unexpectedly. 
 
§ 20f3. ADVERBS. 371 
 
 SYNTAX OF PARTICLES. 
 
 § 206. Adverbs. 
 
 1. Adverbs In Hebrew are often used In the place ot' 
 nouns, and arc tlicn constructed in the following manner. 
 
 («) In apposition with the nouns which they qualify ; as Gen. 18 : 
 4 D-l^-Ci'tt aliltle -water; Neh. 2: 12 UVT2 CttJiN /etc persons; Is. 
 30 : 33 f^2")^ 0""i:y much Tfoof?, &c. 
 
 (b) In the genitive al'ter nouns; as 1 K. 2: 31 hit] "^721 innocent 
 blood; Ezek. 30: 16 D»i'' "^"Xl daily persecutors; Deut. 26: 5 "'na 
 
 2. Adverbs standing in place of nouns sometimes take 
 prepositions before them. 
 
 E. g. Ezek. 6 : 10 asn rN gratis; 2Chr. 29 : 36 DNnS2 suddenly ; 
 1 K. 22 : 20 nbs so lit. in the so; Esth. 4 : 16 ]32 so; Neh. 9 : 19 
 
 D7JV2 daily. 
 
 3. The repetition of adverbs marks intensity. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 7:19 SnTS nNSJ very much ; Deut. 28 : 43 nby?? nri'tt 
 higlier and higher., nt273 TtXZ'D deeper and deeper ; 1 K. 20 : 40 TilTi 
 nsm hither and hither i. e. here and there, all around. 
 
 4. There is in Hebrew no adverb of affirmation, cor- 
 responding to our yes. Its place is supplied as follows, viz. 
 
 (fl) By a personal pronoun ; as Gen. 27 : 24 art thou my son Esau ? 
 and he said, "^1^1 am, that is, yes. 
 
 (i) By a periphrasis for the personal pronoun ; as 2 Sam. 9 : 6 
 art ihou Mephibosheth ? and he said '^^~~^ nsl^ behold thy servant! 
 (§186.1.) 
 
 5. Two negatives in Hebrew serve to strengthen the 
 negation. 
 
 E. g. 1 K. 10: 21 ^'^ni N? 5lp3 'J\Vt silver was not at all regarded. 
 In the parallel verse 2 Chr. 9 : 20 Nb is omitted. Ex. 14 : 11 "'baXJn 
 ■{"N because there 7i:cre no graves ^-c. Zeph. 2 : 2, &:c. 
 
 Note. A negative particle is sometimes joined with nouns and ad- 
 jectives to qualify the sense of them ; as Deut. 32 : 6 CSn Nr not wise 
 i. e. foolish; Ps. 43: 1 T'DH N]r unmerciful; Job 30: 8 DUJ "'^a dis- 
 
372 §§ 207, 208. prepositions, conjunctions. 
 
 graced ; Deut. 32 : 21 !:ijt~i<b not God, D^~i<b not a nation i. e. not 
 worthy of this appellation ; Is. 31 : 8 to*'{<-^b not a mortal ; 10: 15 
 ys'^-fJb no wood at all, &c. 
 
 6. A negative is frequently implied in an interrogative 
 sentence, as in English. 
 
 In tliis way interrogative particles often come to imply a nega- 
 tive sense, viz. 
 
 (o) Tj ; as 2 Sam. 7 : 5 InriN^i wilt thou build me an house ? i. e. 
 thou shalt not; as in the parallel verse 1 Chr. 17. 4. So Is. 27: 7. 
 Prov. 24 : 28. Ezek. 18 : 23, comp. v. 32. 1 K. 8 : 27. Gen. 30 : 20. 
 
 (6) !^!D "what ; as Job 16 : 6 i/" / keep silence '!J'-ri2 "'i.'3~ri73 what 
 quits me ? 1. e. I am not relieved ; Cant. 8 : 4. Prov. 20 : 24. Dan. 
 1 : 10. 
 
 § 207. Prepositions. 
 
 tl. Prepositions govern the oblique cases of nouns, 
 pronouns, &c. (§§ 170, 173.) 
 
 2. Composite prepositions, in many cases, do not difTer 
 in sense from the simple forms. 
 
 E. g. Jer. 9 : 21. Ecc. 10 : 14 "^nnNT: i. q. -""nriN ; Esth. 3: 1. Ps. 
 108 : 5 ??» i. q. b^ ; Judg. 19 : 30 ]72^_ i. q. "jtt, &c. 
 
 3. Vice versa, the simple forms of prepositions some- 
 times take the sense of compound forms. 
 
 E. g. Num. 5 : 20 nnn i. q. nnn« ; Ezek. 23 : 5. So Hos. 12 : 1 
 ay i. q. D^a ; and Is. 45 : 9 ni< i. q. DNr). 
 
 For the pleonasm and ellipsis of prepositions, see § 210. § 211. 12. 
 
 § 208. Conjunctions, 
 
 Since the Hebrew language possesses but very few conjunctions, 
 some of them are necessarily employed in a great variety of significa- 
 tions. This is particularly the case with the copulative "] ; the various 
 uses of which are best learned from the lexicon and from practice. 
 
 For some peculiar uses of Vav, see § 211. 11 note, 13 note. For 
 the ellipsis of conjunctions, see § 211. 13. 
 
§§ 909. '^10. PLEONASM, ETC. 
 
 § 209. Inlcrjeclioiis, 
 
 1. Interjections expressive of calamity or imprecation, 
 often take a dative after them. 
 
 E. fif. 1 Sam. 4 : 8 ^r':' "^TN wo to vs ! Ezek. 30 : 2 di'b nn wo io 
 </te day ! 
 
 2. Interjections Avhicli liave the forms of other parts 
 
 of speech, take after them the cases required by those 
 
 forms. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 1 : 1 *''n'4:i< with a genitive ; 29 : 1,2 JiiJrt with ai^acca- 
 salive, &c. 
 
 FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC. 
 
 § 210. Pleonasm. 
 
 I. Of personal pronouns. 
 
 1. Verbal suffixes are not unfrequently pleonastic, be- 
 ing immediately followed by the noun to which they 
 have relation. 
 
 E. g. Ex. 2 : 6 n"".'.rj~nN ItlN'^ril she saw him the child ; 1 Sam. 
 21 : 14 i'2i;a~nN ir^i")^ he changed it his understanding ; Job 33: 20 
 2~.r. ^f^t" ^^'^"T /'^ ^oul abhors it bread. Such is the predominant con- 
 struction in the Chaldee and Syriac. 
 
 2. The suffixes of nouns are sometimes pleonastic in a 
 similar manner. 
 
 E. g. Is. 17 : 6 ^^'ns viC<p2 in the twigs of it the fruit tree ; Prov. 
 14: 13 nnaip nn-'-iriL^l the end of it joy ; Cant. 1 : 6 "^V^ "^'^5 my 
 vineyard which is to me. Such also is the general usage of the Chaldee 
 and Syriac. 
 
 3. The dative case of pronouns after verbs, and espe- 
 cially verbs of motion, is often pleonastic. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 12 : 1 vib"^\ go for thyself i. e. go; Cant. 2: 11 ^bn 
 n 5 it has gone for itself i. e. has gone ; Gen. 27 : 43 "TjbTins Jiee for 
 thyself i. e. flee ; Is. 31 : 8 i)5 C: he has fed for himself i.e. he has fled ; 
 
 49 
 
374 §211. ELLIPSIS. 
 
 Job 39 : 4 172b ^'2'2i~iib they turned not back for themselves i. e. turned 
 not back. So also Cant. 2 : 17 '^b ln!a/T compare for thysefi. e. com- 
 pare ; Job 12: 11 the palate ib''U^'0'] relishes for itself i. e. relishes; 
 15:28 houses which T^b lS'iP|',~J{b they do not inhabit for themselves 
 i. e. which no one inhabits; Prov. 13: 13 ib bln;^ he shall perish for 
 himself i. e. shall i^erish ; Job 19 : 29 DSb ^''^^i^ fear for yourselves i. e. 
 fear ye. 
 
 Note. The Arabic has the same idiom ; and it is also very com- 
 mon in Syriac. 
 
 4. The dative pleonastic also occurs after participles 
 and adjectives, but more seldom than after verbs. 
 
 E. g. Hos. 8 : 9 « wild ass ib Tl3 lonely for itself i. e. alone or 
 lonely ; Amos 2 : 13 rrb niib,J2 full for itself i. e. full ; Ps. 144 : 2 
 '^b~''L:bc''2 77iy deliverer for me i. e. my deliverer. 
 //. Of prepositions. 
 
 5. The prepositions 3 and "j^ are sometimes pleonastic. 
 
 (rt) 2; as Ex. 32: 22 thou knowest this people that N^in 5>"13 they 
 are evil., lit. that they are in evil; Hos, 13: 9 '^'^.I<1 '^'DT'^'z for my help 
 is in thee., lit. in respect to me [I am] in thy help ; Ps. 29 : 4. Prov. 
 3 : 26. Is. 26 : 4. 45 : 14 bi< ^2 ^N only thou art God; Job 18 : 8. Ez- 
 ra 3 : 3. In the three last examples, it stands even before the subject 
 of a sentence. This is technically called Beth essentiae. 
 
 Note. The name of Beth essentiae is also extended to the use of 
 3 in cases like the following ; as Ps. 118 : 7 "'tlT^r i^^!^^ Jehovah is 
 among my helpers; 54: 6. 99: 6. Job 24: 13. Ju'dg. u": 35. This 
 mode of expression, however, is common in the western languages. 
 
 {b) "(^3 : as Deut. 15: 7 when there shall be with thee a poor man 
 T'r!^ "inNTa one of thy brethren.^ lit. of one of thy brethren ; Lev. 4 : 
 2. 5: 13. Ezek. 18: 10. This idiom is common in Arabic. 
 
 §211. Ellipns. 
 L Of nouns. 
 
 1. The nominative case is sometimes omitted before 
 vcr])s. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 31 : 30 ib '^tl'.^ it was hot (o him viz. C]N anger, i. e. his. 
 anger burned, or he was angry ; 34 : 7, kc. So 1 Sam. 24 : 1 1 Cnn] 
 
§211. ELLIPSIS. 375 
 
 '']''\" aitd it pitied thee^ i. e. mine oye pitied ; comp. Gen. 45 : 20. Deut. 
 7 : Ve. 
 
 Note. The word Ti^ni is not unfrequently omitted, in cases where 
 the sense reqtiires it as the subject of a sentence; as Prov. 10: 24 
 the desire of the righteous 'jn'' he will grant i. e. Jehovah will grant; 
 12:12. 13: 21'. 21 : 13. Job 3: 20. Ecc. 9 : 9. Fs. 10 : 1, comp. v. 
 13, and see below in no. 8. 
 
 2. Thn .accusative case, alter several verbs which are 
 In frequeiit use, is oi'tcn omitted, as being unnecessary to 
 render the languaoe intelli^fible. 
 
 E. ff. mb"' she bore i. c. children ; IT^S he concluded i. e. 0"'"13 an 
 ugrei'iitent ; !^D3 he inclined or spread i. e. "jtN the ear^ or b57.i< the tent ; 
 ii'^2 he lifted up 1. e. i'Tp the voice ; '^"^^ he arranged i. e. D'^5'3 u-ords 
 in prayer, &c. These omissions occasion little difficulty, and are soon 
 rendered familiar by practice. 
 
 3. VV^hen the subject of a proposition is required by 
 the sense to be repeated in the predicate with some ad- 
 dition, tlie actual repetition of it rarely takes place. 
 
 E- g. Cant. 1:15 W^h'' l^^^^i^ thiiie eyes [are the eyes] o/* doves; 
 Ps. 18: 34. 48: 7. 55: 7. Is. 52 : 14. 
 
 4. In the designation of weights and measures, the or- 
 dinary words which express the standard of them are 
 commonly omitted. (§ 176. 6.) 
 
 E. g. qQ3 Pl'rJJ a thousand [shekels] of silver ; nrjT ST^'^i;?. ten [shek- 
 ^^^^ffgold; C^nyip •i;AU5ix[ephahs] of barley ; dnb. "•np two [loaves] 
 of bread. 
 
 .5 In expressing the day of the month, the word W' 
 day is commonly omitted ; see § 176. 8. 
 
 //. Of pronouns. 
 
 5. The personal pronouns are often omitted, as follows, 
 (a) In the nominative case most commonly, as in Greek and Latin. 
 (6) In the genitive after the infinitive mood, or after a noun. E. g. 
 
 Gen. 6: 19 nvnr:!: to preserve ihem alive Sf-c. instead of ani"'ni^b; 
 Ex. 15: 2 Jehovah is my strength rrnSJn and my song., for "'n-^ap ; 
 Ps.40: 10, 11. 60, 6, &,c. 
 
37G §211. ELLiPsi.^. 
 
 (c) In the accusative after verbs ; as Ex. 2 : 25 God looked upon 
 the children of Israel^ and God ^"1^,1 observed them, for C^;^^.^ ; Ps. 
 137: 5 let my right hand n^tr\i forget me; 139: 1. 17: 11. Gen. 
 9 : 22, &c. 
 
 6. The relative pronoun TuNf. is often omitted in the 
 following constructions, viz. 
 
 {a) In the nominative; as Gen. 15: \ 3 in a land C!lb Nb which 
 is not theirs ; Is. 40 : 20. 51 : 2. 51 : 1. 55: 5. 61 : 10, &c" 
 
 (6) In the genitive after a noun in the construct state ; as Ex. 4 : 
 13 send JirvDn [T-IJN] 1^^ by the hand of him whom thou wilt send. See 
 § 172. 2. ■ 
 
 (c) In the accusative ; Prov. 9 : 5 as wine which ""riit:^ / have 
 mingled ; Gen. 3: 13 n"'"l;2' nN^TTTlQ what is this which thou hast done? 
 
 {d) When used to qualify other words; as Ex. 18: 20 the way 
 nn niir,"; ["l"i3N] in which they go ; Job 3 : 3 perish the day ["ll^pN] 
 12 nb.1N. in which / was born ; Ps. 32 : 2. Is. 1 : 30 : 23 : 7, &c. Ecc. 
 1 : 5 and the sun hastens to the place D'i) ii'^71 r.^iT ["l^N] whence he 
 arose. The woi'd which "I'^N would qualify is also often omitted ; as 
 Is. 29 : 1 the city Tin n;n [fta ^"•PN] in which David dwelt ; Ps. 4 : 8 
 more than in the time ^is'n C-lii'^'T]') D:5"T [is "^'-yN] in which their corn 
 and new wine increase., &c. See § 187. 2 note 2. 
 
 (f) In the sense of that which., he who., those who., &c ; as Job 24 : 
 19 SheOl takes away -^i^Dil [n'^"N~nN] those who have sinned ; Ps. 12 : 
 6 / will place in safety ib n"'D"' [t^/NTiN] him whom one pi'^s at i. e. 
 who is contemned. 
 
 (/) In an adverbial sense ; as 1 Chr. 15 : 12 ib ^"^^D■^:^lr! [~>^N] bN 
 to the place which / have prepared for it. (§ 187. 2 note 2.) 
 
 Note. The omission of "Ti^N is much more common in poetry 
 than in prose. In prose, it is generally inserted after a definite noun, 
 and omitted after an indetinite one, as in Arabic. (De Sacy, Gramm. 
 Arabe II. § 363.) 
 
 ///. Of verbs. 
 
 7. The verb of existence (m*^") is commonly omitted 
 
 between a subject and its predicate, especially when the 
 
 predicate stands tirst. (§ 180. 1.) 
 
 E. g. Gen. 3: 11 "'prN DT"l\Nt— 'S/w naked am / ; 4 : 13 ■':*iy bi^-J 
 great is my iniquity, ^c. 
 
§ :i 1. Era.iPMs. • 377 
 
 8. When the words of any one are repeated, the verb 
 "1"2X, \\ hich marks quotation, Is very often omitted, and 
 must be supplied from the sense of the passnjre. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 8 : 4 what I behold the heavens ["'rN nu^{] I exclaim, 
 Lord ^ what is man ^c. 10:4 the wicked in his pride [-^72^] has said 
 'iJlT'"':'? [nnn';'] Jehovah will not punish ; comp. v. 13 where the el- 
 lipsis is supplied, and see ahove in no. 1 note ; 52 : 8, 9. 59 : 8, Joh 
 8: 18. 
 
 9. Wlien a finite verb would be preceded bv an In- 
 finitive absoUitc of the same verb, tlic former is some- 
 times omitted. 
 
 For examples, see § 199. 4. 
 
 Note. Besides the above particular cases of an ellipsis'of the verh, 
 there occur many other, especially in poetry, which cannot be made 
 the subject of definite precept, but must be filled up in conformity 
 with the context. Such are Job 39 : 24. Is. 66 : 6. Ps. 3 : 9. 4 : 3. 
 6:4. 7 : 9. Jer. 11:15. 2 Sam. 23: 17, comp. 1 Chr. 11:19. 1 K. 
 
 II : 25. 2 K. 6 : 33. Hos. 8:1. Prov. 6 : 26. See below in no. 15 note 2, 
 
 IT'. Of adverbs. 
 
 10. The interrogative in is often omitted. 
 
 E. g. Gen. 27 : 24 ""wa !lt nnN art thou my very sou., for InrNin ; 
 3 : 1 ^3 :\N is it so then that., for "S ^HJj ; 1 Sam. 16:4. 30 : 8. 2 Sam. 
 9: 6: 18: 29. Job 40: 25. 
 
 Note. This ellipsis of n often takes place in a negative interroga- 
 tion, before tJb ; as Jon. 4: 11 CnriN i<? *';NT and should not I spare 
 A'ineveh.^ instead of .N^b" ; Lam. 1 : 12. 3: 36. Ex. 8 : 22. 2 K. 5 : 
 26. Job 14: IG for now thou numhercst my steps., "I'ttlpn J^lb") and 
 wilt thou not keep watch over my sins ? So also before Vn 1 Sam. 27: 10. 
 
 11. When two negative propositions follow each other 
 
 III the same construction, es[)cclally in poetic parallelism, 
 the iirgcdive adverb is sometimes omitted in the second 
 projjasition, and must be sunniied. 
 
 E. g. 1 Sam. 2 : 3 speak not proudly, pn:? ii::."; let not a7iy rash 
 thing proceed from your mouth ; Ps. 9 : 19ybr he will not always forget 
 the poor; the expectation of the afflicted shall not always perish; Job 
 28 : 17. 30 : 20. Is. 23 : 4. 38 : 18. Sec below in no. 15. d. 
 
378 §211. ELLIPSIS. 
 
 Note. When a negative is expressed in the first member of a par- 
 allelism, and the second has a Vav prefixed to it, that Vav should be 
 rendered disjunctively, viz. nor^ but, &c. E. g. Ps. 44: 19 our heart 
 has NOT turned back from thee, ^:'i\UN tsriT nor our steps declined from 
 thy paths ; Is. 41 : 28 / looked and there was no man, of them none gave 
 counsel, I inquired of them ^^"'"ip^'l nor did any answer, or but none gave 
 ajiswer ; Job 3 : 10. Is. 28 : 27.""Deut. 33 : 6. (§ 208.) 
 
 V. Of prepositions. 
 
 V2. The prepositions S, 7, &c. are not unfrequently 
 omitted \vhere the sense requires them. 
 
 {a) The prefix a ; as Ps. 6G : 17 "'ni<-3J^-''Q rbN / cried to him 
 with my mouth for "^32; 12: 3. 17: 10, 13, 14. 60: 7 help me '^y^l^'', with 
 thy right hand; 108: 7. 109. 2, &c. 
 
 Note. The prefix 3, when taken as a conjunction (§ 157. 1), usu- 
 ally excludes 2 ; as Am. 9:11 UV")^ ^'S"'^ "si" tl*^ <'«!/* of old, for *^:'^12. 
 
 (6) The prefix b ; as Prov. 27 : 7 ili^n 'dS3 to the hungry soul, 
 any bitter morsel is sweet, for "i^cpb ; 1.3 : 18. 14 : 22. Jer. 9 : 2. 
 
 (c) The preposition "jTa ; Ecc. 2 : 24 nothing is better for a man 
 r5k\'"4: than that he should eat, for b5J<'>">a?J. 
 
 VI. Of conjunctions. 
 
 13. Conjunctions wliicli would express some particular 
 relation of" tlie latter part of a sentence to the foriiicr, are 
 (jftcn omitted, or their place Is supplied by the copulative 
 
 V av.* 
 
 E. g. Gen. 19 : 23 and the sun was rising UTi 'ohh') and [when] Lot 
 entered Zoar ; Prov. 11:2 pride cometh i<1^2 and [then] cometh shame, 
 or does pride come ? and [then] shame will follow ; Gen. 44 : 4. Ex. 
 3: 18. 16: 21. 17 : 6. Ps. 148: 5. 
 
 Note. The copulative Vav is here rendered when, then, &,c. mere- 
 ly from necessity, the appropriate conjunction being omitted. (§ 208.) 
 
 14. Conjunctions which serve to connect words and 
 phrases are often onuttcd.t 
 
 * Note. In teclinical lan;;uage, that part of the sentence, which in cases 
 like the above precedes Vav, is called ;>ro/astJ( ; that which Ibllows, apodosis. 
 
 t Note. This is called tUe constructio nsj/ndetica i. e. without the (nii/Oidf-tO^ 
 or conjunction. 
 
§ 211. ELLirsis. .371) 
 
 (rt) The copulative Vav; as Gen. 31 : 2 ariJbiU biQn yesterday ani\ 
 thr (lay before ; Judg'. 19:2 D''Ti;Tn ni'ZTwS* D"'^^ « year andyoHr months ; 
 Hub. 3:11 rr^;i i:;72"4J sun and moon; Nah. 3: 1. Is. G3 : 11. Ex. 
 13: 9. Judg. 5: 27.' Ps. 10: 3. 
 
 Note. The asyndetic construction occurs principally in the ex- 
 pression of intense feeling in poetry ; or in the phraseology of com- 
 mon life, which it is the custom of ail languages to shorten. 
 
 (6) The disjunctive 1 or IN or ; as 2 K. 9 : 32 n'^ru; D^r^ two or 
 three eunuchs ; 1 Sam. 20: 12. Is. 17: 6. 
 
 (c) The sign of comparison 3 or T^N3 as ; Is. 21 : 8 ln;;'-)N N"Ji?',2 
 he •j.nll roar as a lion ; Ps. 11 : 1 "1152^ C^'^H T\'^'ijiy to your mountain 
 as a bird ; Is. 51 : 12 the san of man u7to shall be made T^icn as grass ; 
 Job 24 : 5. Ps. 40: 8. Nah. 3 : 12, 13. Especially, when the follow- 
 ing member of a sentence has 'j2 so, is 3 as omitted before the first 
 member; as Is. 55: 9 for as the heavens are higher than the earthy ]S 
 so are his n^ays aho-ce S,-c. Ps. 48 : 6. Job 7 : 9. Judg. 5: 15. 
 
 (rf) The conditional particles "'S and dN if provided that, although, 
 &c. as Is. 48 : 21 they shall not thirst, fi3"'bin nTa"jri2 provided that he 
 should conduct them through the desert ; Job 19 : 4. Ps. 139 : 11. Gen. 
 42 : 38. Ex. 4 : 23. 
 
 (f) The particles 13 and n'JTN signifying that ; as Ps. 9 : 21 the na- 
 tions shall know ~'2!7. '-iJ^-N that they arc mere men; 50: 21. 71 : 8. 
 Job 19: 25. Lam. T: 21. 
 
 VII. Ellipsis in poetic parallelism. 
 
 15. In poetry, a noun, pronoun, verb, adverb, or prep 
 osition, expressed in the first member of a parallelism, is 
 not unfrequently omitted in the second member. 
 
 (o) A noun ; as Ps. 24 : 1 nirfb Jehovah's is the earth and nil thai 
 is in it, [ni^T^b] Jehovah's is the world ami they who d-jcell therein. 
 
 (6) A pronoun ; Ps. 22: 6 "iDikX / am a -.vorm and no man, ["'siN] 
 I am the scorn of men ; so Mni< in v. 10. 
 
 (c) A verb ; as Ps. 22 : 3 O my God J^^^wH / call all the day, but 
 thou dost not ansrjaer ; and all the night [xni^kNt] do I call &c. 13 : 3 "13? 
 n'''iL"i< nlN Jww long shall I have [place] anxiety in my soul, [niJ^-iy 
 n'^">L"N] how long shall I have [place] sorrow in my heart all the day ? 
 see below in d ; Is. 49 : 7 kings IN")^ *^*"^^ behold and rise iip, princes 
 [iNl"^] sliall behold and do reverence, &,c. 
 
 (c/) An adverb ; as Ps. 10:5 riTib why, Jehwah, standest thou afar 
 '^fft [~^^] why hxdesi thou thyself; 13 : 3 see above in c; 22 : 2, Sac. 
 
380 § 212. CHANGE OF CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 For the omission of the negative JJb in similar cases, see above in 
 no. 11. 
 
 (e) A preposition ; as Job 12:12 D"^'i: "''>:;'' 2 with the aged is wisclom^ 
 a*'72'' "["^M"] and with length of days is imderstandhig ; 15:3. Is. 28 : 7 
 44 : 28 saying to Jerusalem- — ^^''^t'l and to the temple^ for V^'^tlb/l ; 28 : 
 6. Job 34: 10. Gen. 49 : 25 }:ii_72_ from the God of thy father — "'TJ: DN"] 
 and from the Almighty^ for fli^.tl ; Ps. 22: 2 why art thou distant '"li"^. 
 from the words of my cry^ for '''l^l.'^ ; Job 30 : 5. Is. 48 : 9. 49 : 7. 
 61 : 7. 
 
 Note 1. Vice versa^ a word is sometimes omitted in the first mem- 
 ber of a parallelism, which is supplied in the second member ; as Is. 
 48: 11 for how shall [my glory] be jjrofancd, Zi-hen I will not give 
 ^^33 my glory to another ? 
 
 Note 2. No one thing in all the business of sacred philology and 
 interpretation requires more judgment, skill, nicety of grammatical 
 knowledge, and thorough acquaintance with the Hebrew and poetic 
 idiom, than the application of the principle just exhibited above. A 
 multitude of obscurities in the English translation of the Old Testa- 
 ment might be removed by the aid of it, and much light diffused over 
 the sacred writings. The application of the principle, however, in a 
 multitude of cases, is not properly the subject of any definite rule, but 
 must be directed by critical- tact and sound discretion. 
 
 * § 212. Change of construction in the same sentence. 
 
 1. When a sentence begins Avlth a verb in the Infini- 
 tive preceded by a preposition and used in a finite sense 
 (§ 200. 6), it often proceeds with ?l finite verb. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 60 : 2 iilJ^l — in"iitj2 when he strove and returned ; Gen. 
 39 : 18 N'^JPNT ■'bip '^l^/^'nns when I raised my voice and cried ; Is. 18 : 
 5. 30 : \£ '49 : 6 Qeri. Amos 1 : 11. 2:4. Gen. 27: 45. Job 28 : 25. 
 29 : 6. 38 : 7. 
 
 2. Sentences often begin with a participle, and proceed 
 with definite vcrl). (§ 203.) 
 
 E.g. Prov. 19:26 DN H'^nn!! iiJ-ll'^^J he who abuses his father. 
 and chases away his mother; 2: 14. Is. 5: 11. 48 : 1. 57 : 3. Gen. 
 27: 33. Ps. 15: 2, 3, &c. 
 
§213. CONSTRUCTIO PRAEONANS. 381 
 
 3. Sentences often exhibit a change o( person, especial- 
 ly in poetry, viz. 
 
 (a) A transition from tlie third person to the second ; 
 and vice versa. 
 
 E. g. Is. 1 : 29 for they shall be ashamed of the groves, -which ye 
 have loved ; Gen. 49 : 4 thou wentest up to thy father's bed — he want 
 tip to my couch ; Mic. 7:18. Mai. 2:15. 
 
 (6) A transition from the first person to the tliird. 
 
 E. g. Is. 42 : 24. 44 : 24, 25 / am Jehovah who made the universe, 
 — HE frustrates the signs 4'C- This transition, however, is unfrequent, 
 and for the most part is altered in the Qeri. 
 
 Note. The same changes of person occur also in the use of suffix- 
 pronouns, a transition being often made from the first or second per- 
 son to the third, and vice versa; as Prov. 8: 17 Kethib / [wisdom] 
 love iT'SHN her lovers i. e. those who love me ; ]\Iic. 1 : 2 hear ye peo- 
 ple CV3 all of them, i. e. all of you ; Job 18 : 4. Is. 22: 16, &c. 
 
 § 213. Construciio praegnans. 
 
 The name of construciio praegnans is apphed to plira- 
 ses which imply more than the words literally express, 
 although there is no direct ellipsis. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 22 : 22 '''.r\''rj D-'Q-l \:'i;:^ hear [and deliver] me 
 from, the horns of the wild bulls, comp. v. 13 ; 32 : 8 ""S^y 'n'^lry n^i'^ft 
 / will counsel [and direct] to thee my eye ; 74:7 "Tja'^j "Jl^UiTa ^bVn VnNb 
 to the earth have they [cast down and] defied the dwelling of thy name; 
 
 1 Sam. 10: 9 nriN ilb D\'7'i:N ii?-']ein.!1 and God changed[hh heart and 
 gave] to him another heart ; 1 Chr. 12: 17 ""liCb "^ini/anb but if to de- 
 ceive [and betray] me to my enemies ; Ps. 118: 5. Is. 38 : 17. Joe. 4:18. 
 
 2 Sam. 18 : 19. H«s. 1 : 2, &c. 
 
 Note. The following constructions, which are sometimes ranked 
 here, are rather to be considered as cases of direct ellipsis ; viz. Num. 
 14 : 24 nirr; •«nni< [nS^rb] ti\-q completely [to follow] Jehovah (§ 205) ; 
 Ps. 13 : 4 nian [nzt] I'^J^N-]?. lest I sleep [the sleep of] death. See 
 § 211. 2, 9 note. 
 
 50 
 
382 § 214, 215. zeugma, hendiadys. 
 
 § 214. Zeugma, 
 
 1. The name Zeugma is applied to a construction where 
 two subjects have a verb in common, but this verb ex- 
 presses action &c. which can with propriety be predicated 
 of only one of" the subjects. 
 
 E. g. Job 4 : 10 the voice of the lion and the teeth of the young lions 
 are broken out i. e. the roaring of the lion [is made to cease], and the 
 teeth &c. Gen. 47 : 19 wherefore should we die^ we and our land^ i. e. 
 our land [become desolate]; Is. 55: 3. Hos. 1 : 2. Jer. 15: 8. Est. 
 4: 1. 
 
 2. The figure Zeugma also includes those cases where 
 nouns are grammatically connected with preceding nouns, 
 when in respect to sense such connexion cannot be ad- 
 mitted. 
 
 E. g. Ps. 65: 9 thou makest '^Nl!£i73 the outgoings of the morning and 
 the evening to rejoice^ where outgoings cannot be predicated of eve- 
 ning ; Gen. 2: I the heavens and the earth and all DNiiZ the host of 
 them., i. e. the host of the heavens, viz. the stars. Compare Neh. 
 9:6. 
 
 § 215. Hendiadys, 
 
 The name Hendiadys is applied to a construction in 
 which two nouns are put in the same case and connected 
 by a copula, while in respect to sense one of them must 
 be taken as a genitive following the other, or as an adjec- 
 tive qualifying the other. (§ 161. 5.) 
 
 E. g. Gen. 1:14 and they shall be for signs fi'''l5>i53bn and for sea- 
 sons i. e. they shall be for the signs of seasons &c. 3:16/ will multi- 
 ply thy sorrow and thy conception i. e. I will multiply the pains of thy 
 conception; Job 10: 17 misfortunes and a host i. e. a host of misfor- 
 tunes ; 4 : 16 stillness and a voice i. e. a low voice, comp. 1 K. 19 : 12. 
 2 Chr. 16: 14. Jer. 29: 11. 
 
 For the name, see § 161. 5. 
 
§ 21G. PARONOMASIA. 383 
 
 § 2IG. Paronomasia, 
 
 1. The name Paronomasia is given to an expression 
 which contains two or more words selected in such a man- 
 ner, tliat they may resemble each other in sound, while in 
 sense they may difl'er. 
 
 Paronomasia is a very favorite figure of rhetoric among the He- 
 brews, and is common in all the oriental languages. It differs from our 
 rhyme, inasmuch as the words which constitute it do not necessarily 
 stand at the end of parallelisms or strophes, but may be placed togeth- 
 er in any part of a sentence, and are found in prose as well as poetry.* 
 
 2. There are various modes of constructing the Paro- 
 nomasia, of which the following are the principal. 
 
 (a) By placing together like sounding words ; as Gen. 1 : 2 ^Hn 
 !)!in desolate and empty; 4: 12 "lai 2?3 a fugitive and a vagabond ; 
 18 : 27 "n^Nn 12^ dust and ashes ; Job 30 : 19. Is. 28 : 10, 13 ^b V4 
 "')';- ^R "^P-v ""I^ "'^'^ "'^ ^"™ ^^^^ ""^^ '^™ there, precept here and pre- 
 cept there; 24: 17 nST nrDI Tns terror and a snare and a sling; 
 Ps. 18 : 8. Lam. 3 : 47. Jen 48 : 43. Is. 24 : 3, 4. 
 
 (6) By using like sounding words in different parts of a sentence ; 
 as Hos. 8 : 2 TOy^_ the stalk yields no n^J?. meal ; Is. 5 : 7 and he looked 
 C22X7:b for equity and lo n3'«p73 shedding of blood, for ^Ip'lX righteous- 
 ness and lo nj^^SC the cry of the oppressed ; 1 :9 if ^'i'^iZ^Xl ^' V^ "^^^ ^ot 
 believe, then ^;72i<n Nb ye shall not be established; 61 : 3 he shall ap- 
 point -1CN nnii -i.VS beauty instead of ashes ; Ps. 40 : 4. 52 : 8. 68 : 3. 
 Zech. 9 : 5. Gen. 42 : 35. Amos 5 : 26. 
 
 (c) By changing sometimes the ordinary forms of words, in order 
 to produce similarity of sound; as Ezek. 43 : 1 1 VNSTTan VJJlC'ia,' 
 where Nni73 stands for NilQ ; Ps. 32: 1 nijljn— '^Ds i"iJs-^V^D3, where 
 ^n\U: stands for H^':j2. See Mic. 1 : 8. Ezek. 7: 11. Amos 5 : 26. 
 
 {d) By employing, in some cases, a word sounding in some degree 
 like another ; as Joel 1: 15 it shall come '^T'i^f2 T^3 as destruction 
 from the Almighty ; Jer. 51: 2 / -will send against Babylon Q^TT barbari- 
 ans l^n'lT'l and they shall scatter her ; Is. 32: 7 T^bs ^bs the armour of 
 
 * Besides the name 7tuoovoi.iccoioc,ihe Greek rhetoricians also called 
 this figure 7rap>///;cf<5 and nuQoivvfjiiu ; and the Latins, agnominatio. 
 
384 § 216. PARONOMASIA. 
 
 the crafty is evil ; Ezek. 7 : 6 ^"^irN V'pv! Vp.v? ^3 *<3 V)?. ^^« «"^ ^*' 
 come, co?ne z* theend^ it is waked up against thee ; Is. 1 : 23 d'^'T^b '1^1^ 
 thy princes are revolters^ comp. Hos. 9:15. Is. 57 : 6. Amos 8 : 2. 
 
 (e) By repeating the same word in a different signification ; as Ecc. 
 7: 6 like the noise [crackling] D^l/S^l of thorns under ^"'DJj a pot; 
 Judg. 10:4 Jair had thirty sons^ and they rode upon thirty D''~)''5> asses^ 
 colts^ and had thirty D'^'^'^? cities ; 15 : 16 ■with the jaw bone ^1730" of 
 an ass have I slain Q'^ri'^Tan ^"iTOn one heap two heaps ; 1 Sam. 1 : 24 
 and 1§D li'iJl the lad was yet a lad ; Jer. 1: 11,12 what seest thou, Jere- 
 miah? AnS. A rod 1^/^ of the almond tree. Then God said, Well, for I 
 '7j5iD watch over ^c. 
 
 {f) Proper names are frequently made the occasion of Paronoma- 
 sia ; as Mic. 1 : 10 :i3nn Vi< 132 in Acco weep not, JT^C^'b D^na in Beth 
 Leaphra roll thyself "iSJ? in the dust ; 1 : 14 the houses i"^T3N of Achzib 
 itDNb are liars ; Zeph. 2 : 4 tlS^T^. lnT2> Gaza is forsaken ; Gen. 9 : 
 27 God nD;b riC^ will enlarge Japhet ; 49 : 8 JTl^ln"; O Judah thy breth- 
 ren '?|!n'l^ shall praise thee ; 49 : 16 '^^'1'^ 'JT Dan shall judge ; 49 : 19 
 sii'n^^i'^ l^'ia ^a Gad, a host shall press upon him ; Ruth 1 : 20. Neh. 
 9 : 24.' Num. 18 : 2. Is. 21 : 2. Jer. 6:1. 48 : 2. Ezek. 25 : 16. Hos. 
 2 : 25. Amos 5 : 5, 6. 
 
 Note. Paronomasia is a very common figure in the New Testa- 
 ment ; as Mat. 8 : 22 aqjig rovg vexQOvg 'Odipat zovg tavxoiv vaxgovg 
 let the dead bury their own dead ; see above in e. In Latin are found 
 capiatur Capua, cremetur Cremona; and Cicero exclaims {in Ver- 
 rem IV. 24) quod unquam hujusmodi everriculum in provincia ullafuit. 
 In the writings of the monks of the middle ages, and of the older Eng- 
 lish divines, Parouomasia abounds to excess. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 A. |). 41. 
 
 In § 10. 5 ([). 41) is n roforence to appondix A. In the progress 
 of the work, it was thought best to transfer to the body of the gram- 
 mar the maitor which formerly stood in this place. The student is 
 therefore referred to § 152 note 6 (p. 302), and § 151. Par. IV. 
 
 B. p. 42. 
 
 Hebrew and Greek alphabets. 
 
 The common assertion of writers on the old Greek alphabet has 
 been, that it consisted originally of only sixteen letters. The infer- 
 ence has been drawn from this, that when Cadmus left Phenicia, the 
 alphabet of his country comprised only this number of letters. 
 
 But this assertion in respect to the original number of Greek let- 
 ters, is built upon no detinite and certain testimony. The oldest wri- 
 ters, Herodotus (5. 58) and Diodorus Siculus (5. 24), who relate the 
 story of Cadmus, say nothing of the number of letters; and the ac- 
 counts of later times disagree. Aristotle makes eighteen (Plin. Hist. 
 Nat. 7. 56) ; another account seventeen. (Piut. Sympos. 8 quaest. 3. 
 Isidor. Orig. I. 3. Potter's Greek Antiq. P. III. 8, 237 &c.) 
 
 A comparison of the Hebrew and Greek alphabets will make the 
 subject plainer. This may be made with probability, as follows. 
 
 i< 2 ^ ^i ' ^ ' n '0 ^ 'D b 12 : ::> '^ ^ '^ p ^ c n 
 
 ABF A E{*F) Z II I K A MN 2 O 77(**) (t) P (-^1) T 
 UpsUon and Omega seem to have been added later ; and /?««', 
 A'oTTra, and 2!av7ii to have been rejected from the common alphabet, 
 as being superfluous, and retained merely as numeral signs. In the 
 Latin alphabet, taken from the old Greek, I3uv passed into F, and 
 Ko-rniu into Q. In the place of 2", the corresponding composite letter 
 ^was introduced. 
 
 * LniGViixov Bur, Digamma F, Latin F. ** ^uvru. 
 
 t AoTiTift, Latin Q. t 2'ai/. aB old Greek .S, Herod. 1. 139 
 
386 Appendix C, t) ; vowels, etc. 
 
 As the Greeks adopted a different mode of writing and reading 
 from that of the Phenicians, beginning at tlie right hand and proceed- 
 ing towards the left; so the old Phenician characters (Alph. third 
 column, p. 39) seem to have been reversed by them. Thus 3 of the 
 Phenicians, in Greek is written E ; *T the Phenician R is written P in 
 Greek Lc. The four Gutturals N, M, n, 2>, passed into vowels of ea- 
 sier sound, and were written as the consonants and in a line with 
 them. This fact renders it probable, that the strong guttural sounds 
 given by many grammarians to i' are incorrect, and that n itself in 
 certain positions had a mild sound. Jerome calls n a vowel. 
 
 A comparison of the Greek and Hebrew alphabets in respect to 
 the names of the letters, renders it highly probable that they are of 
 common origin. There can scarcely be a doubt, that the Greeks re- 
 ceived their alphabet from the Phenicians. 
 
 C. p. 60. 
 
 The names of the vowels are Chaldee, and of course indicate the 
 late origin of the vowels. They are probably significant ; but the ex- 
 planation is attended with some diiTiculty. The following exhibits the 
 most probable account of this subject. 
 
 y72p signifies collection or contraction of the mouth in uttering it. 
 
 rtns — opening of the mouth. 
 
 1-1 ij — fractio^ or dividing of the mouth. 
 
 V^»5 — cluster of grapes, from the shape ( ■•• ). 
 
 p-\"»n — a creaking sound. 
 
 aV^n — fullness or strength of sound. 
 TiVin V/3p — Plt2_n means short, hurried. 
 p~\^\li — « hissing sound. 
 
 'Yr\2p — compression of the mouth. 
 
 D. p. 261. 
 
 In the first edition of this grammar, the theory of Gesenius was 
 ailopted, who derives the great body of the Hebrew nouns from the 
 intinitive mood and the participles of Kal, and a few from the infm- 
 itive and participles of other conjugations. This theory appeared, 
 at first view, to be very specious ; and if it be well grounded, a prop- 
 er knowledge of it is, no doubt, very desirable. Much pains was ta- 
 ken in the first edition, to arrange and exhil)it a regular series of these 
 various forms of derivative nouns. Subsequent examination, howev- 
 
Appendix D ; dkrivatiom, etc. 38' 
 
 er, has satisfjcil me tliat the tlieory is true only to a moderate extent, 
 and that it is of very little, if any, practical utility to the student. The 
 Arabic language, to which Gesenius appeals for a complete parallel 
 in respect to the derivation of nouns from the infinitive and partici- 
 ples, will by no means support the theory which he maintains, hi 
 Arabic, the nomen actionis or infinitive forms, and the nomcn ogcnlis ot 
 participial forms, actually comprise but a very small part of the nouns 
 and adjectives in that language; immeasurably the greater number 
 being formed by varying the vowel sounels, or by prefixing, inserting, 
 or suffixing, in a great variety of ways, some of the formative letters, 
 which correspond to the Hemanliv (l^ni'ONrr) letters of the Hebrew; 
 and the use of which, no grammarian has ever attempted to reduce to 
 rule, because it is too complex and multifarious to be capable of any 
 such reduction. 
 
 Still less can any definite peculiar meaning be always attached to 
 individual forms of nouns in Hebrew. So much as this is doubtless 
 true, viz. that certain forms more usually have a certain signification. 
 Thus nouns and adjectives which have a Daghesh forte in the middle 
 radical, more commonly signify habitual quality or action ; as p^~^ 
 righteous^ Nt^n a sinner. So nouns with 73 prefixed often designate an 
 instrument of action ; as nPCT? a key from Jins to open. But such mean- 
 ings are very far from being exclusively attached to such forms. They 
 are even less so, than in the case of certain significant forms in our 
 own language, viz. words ending in isA, a6/e, &c. 
 
 In a word, the exceptions to the theory of derivation and meaning 
 which Gesenius proposes, and which was followed in the first edition 
 of this grammar, are so very numerous ; the introduction of unknown 
 forms of the infinitive and participles (unknown at least in any of the 
 Hebrew now extant) into a language so simple as the Hebrew and 
 not at all abounding in variety of verbal forms, in order to carry 
 through and render probable the theory in question, is so objectiona- 
 ble ; that after repeated investigation and consideration, I have thought 
 it best to exclude the whole subject from the grammar, as laborious, 
 difficult, and comparatively of very little use in practice. 
 
 The only effectual method of becoming acquainted with the signifi- 
 cation of nouns of any form, is practice and the use of a good lexicon 
 and grammar ; for all grammarians and lexicographers, not excepting 
 Gesenius himself, now concede, that the signification of any given noun 
 can never be determined with certainty from the mere form of the 
 word. 
 
383 Appendix E ; accents* 
 
 E. pp. 85, 86. 
 
 IFl. Table of the accents. 
 The accents marked in the following table with (*) belong exclu- 
 sively to poetry ; those marked with (t) belong exclusively to prose ; 
 the others are common to both. The letters i and a are used merely 
 to shew the position of the accents. The names are all Chaldee. 
 
 I. Disjunctives. 
 
 Class I ; pause-accents. 
 
 1 «&13 p^-5 SiLLUQ, i. e. stop^ pause ; or, with the two points at 
 
 the end of the vei*se, plDS T\^'0^ p^?0 pause at the end of 
 a verse ; called also ^■'"l^;:'3 prolonged in reading or cantil- 
 lation ; and f^''^'.! mugitus i. e. loud sound. 
 
 2 ^ n;:riJ< Athn.vhh, i. e. respiration., time to breathe ; called also 
 
 ?^2r!D impidsc of the voice. 
 S *25 ^1~^ ^'^'y^. Merka Mahpakh; composite; see 23, 25. 
 
 Class II ; iised occasionally as pause-accents. 
 
 4 tl-— '^rjr'^ TiPHHHA posterius, i. e. palm of the hand., from the 
 
 shape ; called also ND")n buckler, from the shape ; Nn")n 
 retardation., from its office ; iNb'^N)3 strong, when next be- 
 fore Silluq and Athnahh ; n]:TN going on. It is used in 
 poetry, but merely as a conjunctive ; see 30. 
 
 5 *tlD TiPHHHA anterius ; praepositive. 
 
 c 
 
 6 t — V'^P ^R.'' Zaqeph Qaton, i.e. elevator minor. 
 
 7 t i V'^'i^ ?lj?.f Zaqeph Gadhol, i. e. elevator major. 
 
 8 t i NnbJip Segholta, i. e. cluster of grapes, from its shape. 
 
 Class III. 
 t !ll '^''^r' Tebhir, i. e. interruption, breaking off. 
 
 10 £ 5''^^ Rebhia, i. e. resting upon or over. 
 
 11 *DD ly*^-! ^"'^'1 Rebhia Geresh; composite, and theGeresh ihae- 
 
 posiTivE ; see 10, 15. 
 
 12 tC— NnUJD Pashta, i.e. expansion of the voice; postpositive. 
 
 13 132 ^'p")I Zakqa, i.e. dispersion ; postpositive. In poetry, when 
 
 not postpositive, it is used merely as a conjunctive ; see 31. 
 
 14 tCil ^""^^ Yethibh, i. e. sittiiig, stopping ; called also Cnp'JS "nSUJ 
 
 tuha anterior, and ?e;4J^ nsiu tuba inferior ; praepositive. 
 
Api'F.xnix E; accents. 389 
 
 ^ Class IV. 
 
 15 t 2 Ujia Gkresh, i. e. cxpulsUm ; called also D'^n buckler ; and 
 
 NrCN stuff, rod. 
 IG t 2 DV'rl-ii ^■^^'^"■^'^'I'^'i i- <^- '^""''''"' ^crcsh ; called also Q^C~in 
 
 and ]^Snr! dii;il and plural of 0~\n; see 15. 
 
 17 ti-— n"-^"^ r;u;''"rr! Ti.i.isiia Gni:nuoi.A, i.e. cvulsio major ; called 
 
 also n^br^ (cnulicalur F) and NOln buckler: praepositive. 
 
 18 J li rr^S "^r.lR. Q.-^R-"<E PiiAiiA, i. e. the two horns of a heifer., from 
 
 the shape. 
 \9 12 "^.".^ Pazi:r, i.e. (Usperser. 
 
 20 1^2 p^^r Pksiq, i. e. cessation ; called also NjvpD separation ; nev- 
 
 er used alone, but always preceded by a conjunctive on 
 the same word. See below in IT 5. d. IT 6. 6, note. 
 
 II. CoN.TUNCTlVES. 
 
 21 D n;i?3 MuNAim, i. e.joinef^; called also '^^?y a.scen< ; ba/llDlQ 
 
 sieve; Ti;* "^.EUJ straight trumj^et ; ^bin 12*3 walking 
 trumpet. In poetry it is inferius or superius., i. e. written 
 either below or above the line, as 3 or 3. 
 
 22 '2 ^"^'P. Q.ADMA, i. e. before ; also Nb TN going on ; h'^^ a cord. 
 
 23 Hi NS")'?. Merka, for ii:2^']ii_'>2_ prolonging ; also ']""n^;.': or ^""n^ 
 
 prolonging ; Ht'ii'^ 7:>roceef/i7!^. 
 
 24 t 2 ^"?^2p ^^^'l'?. Merka Khephula, i. e. Merka doubled; also 
 
 called ■j'^nOTn ]''~}P, two threads. 
 
 25 "2 'TcH^ Mahpakh, i. e. inversion ; called also '^SJ^^ ^?.ii3 crook' 
 
 ed trumpet ; ^^DH *l3"i2J inverted trumpet. In poetry it is 
 inferius or superius., as ^ or S. 
 
 26 D n"."'r:'V4? Shalsheletii, i. e. a chain ; called also D''^'^^ elevat-- 
 
 ing the voice. 
 
 27 t ^ Na~n Darga, i. e. steps., a ladder. 
 
 28 tCI2 •^itJp. ^""^""'.r^ Telisha Qetan'Na, i.e. evulsio minor; post- 
 
 positive. 
 
 29 n tr^?. Yerahh, i.e. 7noo?i; called also ittT"|~]2 'n~\'\ the 7noon 
 
 a day old ; nir^y round; bab^ a wheel. 
 
 30 *n!2 Tn>HHii.v posterius, a conjunctive in poetry; see 4. 
 
 c 
 
 31 *C!3 Zarqa, a conjunctive in poetry when not postpositive ; ae.e 1 3. 
 
 51 
 
390 Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 ^2. JVumher of the accents. 
 The different signs used as accents amount only to about twenty ; 
 but the accents made by compounding or doubling these signs, may 
 amount to nearly twice that number. Some reckon only twenty-five ; 
 others make five or six more ; but the number above given is, per- 
 haps, as convenient as any. 
 
 TF 3. Similar accents distinguished. 
 
 («) Athnahh (_) and Yerahh (_) are similar in figure, but are 
 counterparts as to position. 
 
 {h) Rebhia (j.) should be over the middle of a letter as i ; while 
 the vowel Hholem should be smaller in size and placed over the side 
 of the letter, as N or N. In common printing, however, the size and 
 position of Rebhia is often the same as that of Hholem ; and they are 
 to be distinguished only by practice and a knowledge of forms, 
 
 (c) Tiphhha (_) and Merka (_) are counterparts in form. So al- 
 so Pashta or Qadma (l) and Geresh (_). 
 
 (rf) Pashta (_) and Qadma (_1) have the same figure ; but Pashta 
 is always postpositive (IT 4. b) ; while Qadma is scarcely ever so. 
 Doubtful cases may always be determined by the consecution ; see 
 the tables in IT 7. 
 
 (e) Yethibh ( _ ) and Mahpakh ( _. ) are similar in figure ; but Ye- 
 thibh is always praepositive ; while Mahpakh is scarcely ever so. 
 
 (/) Telisha Ghedhola {-) and Telisha Qetanna (l) lean in oppo- 
 site directions. 
 
 IT 4. Position of single accents. 
 
 (o) When a single accent is placed on a word, the general rule is, 
 to put it upon the tone-syllable, and over or under the letter to which 
 the vowel of that syllable belongs ; see below in 6, note. If the vow- 
 el does not interfere, the accent is put over or under the middle of 
 that letter, as 'ni^', '7"vlJn. If the vowel and accent are to be placed 
 together, the latter is usually put on the left side of the former, as 
 Y"\i< ; but sometimes at the right of Hholem^ as ]t«. If a syllable be- 
 gin with a Sheva, the letter with Sheva is disregarded in locating the 
 accent, as Dinn. 
 
 {h) Six disjunctives and one conjunctive are marked in the table, 
 as being distinguished by their peculiar positions, viz. 
 
Appendix E; accents. 391 
 
 /. Postpositive. II. Praepositivc. 
 
 Tiphhhaanterius D5\ placed only 
 
 ..,,.,, ^ 'f upon the 1st 
 
 \etlulih Cn> , ' ,. 
 
 j^ letter ol a 
 
 TelishaGhedhola D3 1 word. 
 
 Segholta C3\ pi;,cod only 
 
 Pashta Cnf over the fi- 
 
 Zarqa Cai "•'' letter of 
 
 TeUshaQetannaon) a word. 
 
 These accents always retain their position, excepting in a very 
 few cases where that position is occupied by other accents, and they 
 are thus forced from it. Cases of this nature are to be distinguished 
 by a reference to the usual consecution. Zarqa is sometimes crowd- 
 ed out of its place in printing; as r^, Ps. 43: 4, where it could not 
 be put over ":: on account of its form. So sometimes with Yodh and 
 Vav. See below in IT 9. i, note. 
 
 Note. It is hence eA iJent, that these seven accents do not neces- 
 sarily mark the tone-syllable (§ 33. 4) ; since their position is always 
 the same, whether the tone be on the ultimate or penult syllable. 
 
 IF 5. Position of accents -when compound or repeated. 
 
 (a) Merka Mahpakh {-:). The Merka is always placed on the 
 tone-syllable, and the Mahpakh on the preceding syllable of the same 
 word, if there be one. If not, usage vnries ; sometimes, in case of a 
 monosyllable or a penacuted dissyllable, both parts of the accent are 
 written on the same letter, as 3^c, ]7>\ ; at other times, the Mahpakh 
 is thrown upon the last syllable of the preceding word, with or with- 
 out Maqqeph; as D"'a~^ai:5, "jtij "'Ji^'s. Different copies vary in 
 regard to the accentuation of the same words. 
 
 {hi) Rebhia Geresh ( - )• The Rebhia is always placed on the 
 tone-syllable, and the Geresh is praepositive ; as "TJi^pTi:"). In mon- 
 osyllables and penacuted dissyllables, they both fall on the same let- 
 ter, as bis, -.EN, ]''iS ; the Geresh being never thrown upon the pre- 
 ceding word. 
 
 (c) Pashta when repeated ( L' ). Pashta being always postpositive, 
 and therefore not always marking the tone-syllable (IF 4. 6), is common- 
 ly ■a-rj^^en ao^«i/i over the penult syllable, when that syllable happens to 
 have the tone; as Gen. 1 : 2 irin. This is done merely to mark the 
 real tone-syllable, and occurs only with Pashta ; though the same 
 was formerly practised with all the praepositive and postpositive ac- 
 cents. See the treatise nT:"'ain "n^'wi porta accenimm appended to 
 the linal Masora. 
 
 (ci) Pesiq (l) with conjunctives. The accent Pesiq is always placed 
 
392 Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 after the word to which it relates, and is always preceded by a con- 
 junctive accent on the same word, the latter retainino;^ its usual posi- 
 tion. Pesiq is thus connected with at least seven of the conjunctives, 
 and very probably with all of them ; see IF 6. 6, note (l) ; and IT 7 
 Tab. III. 
 
 (e) Zarqa {Z) in poetry 'duith other accents. The accent Zarqa, as 
 a conjunctive in poetry, appears only in connection with some other 
 accent following it;* either upon the same Avord, as ribs'" ; or on one 
 joined by Maqqeph, as y?.n — "p ; or perhaps without Maqqeph, as 
 Cn ^■^'^'".2 Pp- 49: 15 ed. Mich. In every case of genuine accentua- 
 tion, it appears to be connected with some one of the conjunctives. 
 Zarqa appears only on words of more than one syllable, and is placed 
 on the syllable next preceding the tone-sj liable, 
 
 IF 6. Classification of the accents. 
 
 (rt) The division of the accents into the two greater classes of dis- 
 junctives and conjunctives, and the opposite uses of these two kinds of 
 accents, are stated in § 33. 7. The test for distinguishing to which of 
 these two divisions any given accent belongs, is the following, viz. 
 
 When an accent stands upon a word ending with a vowel or quiescent, 
 and the next word, begins with an aspirate ; if that aspirate takes Daghesh 
 lenc, the accent is disjunctive ; if not, it is conjimctive. (^ 29. 13.) 
 
 {b) The conjunctive accents all appear to be on an equality as to 
 their power or office ; but the su]>division of the disjunctive accents 
 into appropriate classes, is a subject on which great labour has been 
 bestowed by the older gramniari ms, and in respect to which scarcely 
 any two have been agreed in opinion. Bohl divided them into domini 
 majores el minores ; Wasmuth afterwards classed them as emperors, 
 kings, dukes, and counts ; Pfeitfer arranged them as emperors, arch- 
 dukes, barons, and counts ; and Boston, in his celebrated Tractatus Stig- 
 mologicus, divides them into doniinus absolutus, domini primarii, majo^ 
 res, minores, et minimi. The conjunctives they all denominated min- 
 istri or servants. 
 
 The reason of this diversity is, that there are no certain and pre- 
 cise marks by whicli any one class of the disjunctives is definitely dis- 
 tinguished from the others. Every system of classification, which is 
 
 * NoTK. The instance quoted bi low iVnui Ps. 40 : 15 (the only one 1 have 
 been able to find wilhoat Maqqeph) does not disprove this ; for the best copies 
 differ here, and the reading is not established. 
 
 ^..^ 
 
ApPENUIX E ; ACCKNTS. o93 
 
 built upon the supposcil interpunction or distinction of the sense of 
 Scripture by the diflVront accents, must be nusfatory ; because there 
 is no one relation of words to each other, nor distinction of words from 
 each other, in which various accents, and even those of different clas- 
 se>, are not occasionally oniployod. By assuniinc;- this principle, Ihere- 
 fore, as the ba'^is of their divisions, the older writers on accents have 
 been led to widely different results, while they have been able to 
 form no system which will bear the test of close examination. See be- 
 low in IF 10. /». 
 
 Note. Writers on the accents have also disputed respecting the 
 nature of some of the accents, i. e. whether they were di^iunctive or 
 conjunclivo. The chief disputes have been respecting Pesiq, Tiphhha 
 posterius in poetry, and Merka Khephula. An investigation of sohie 
 hundreds of chapters, in order to lind examples for the application of 
 the rule given above in o, afforded the following results. 
 
 (1) Pesicj (l) is disjunctive, and is preceded by the following con- 
 junctives, viz. ((_) Gen. 3: 22. Deut. 31 : 24. Ecc. 4: 1, &.C. (u) 
 Ps. 62 : 13, 64 : 6^ 70 : 5, &c. (l_) Ps. 10 : 7. G9 : 3. 96 : 5, &c. (iJ) 
 Ps. 20 : 8. 131:1. 143 : 6. (l_) Ps. 10 : 3. 65 : 12, &c. (l_) Gen. 2 : 
 21, 22. Deut. 7 : 26, &c. (ll) 1 Sam. 12: 3. 2 K. 18: 14. Pesiq was 
 not found with the three last of these conjunctives before an aspirate, 
 so as to furnish decisive evidence of its nature when connected with 
 them ; but analogy, the nature of Pesiq, and the fact that conjunctives 
 are all on an equality as to their power, leave little room to doubt 
 that Pesiq is alvi-ays disjunctive. See TF 7 Tab. III. a. IT 8. i. 
 
 (2) Tiphhha posterius ( _) is proved to be conjunctive in poetry, 
 by Ps. 3:9. 18:5. 22 : 13. 57 : 7, &c. 
 
 (3) Merka Khephula (_) is proved to be conjunctive by Ex. 5:15. 
 Ezek. 14: 4, &c. 
 
 (c) The divisions in the foregoing table are founded on the use of 
 the accents in prose. The basis of the classilication of the disjunc- 
 tives, as there exhibited, is simple. The pause-accents make the pri- 
 viary divisions of a verse ; or, when a verse is very short, it has 
 only one of them (Silluq) at the end ; as 1 Chx\ 1 : 1, 2, 3, 4. When 
 the verse is longer, it is divided by Silluq and Athnahh into two parts, 
 which are often very unequal in length. 
 
 {(I) The secondary divisions of a verse are made within the limits 
 of the primary divisions, by the second class of disjunctives as marked 
 in the table. The number of these secondary divisions in any verse 
 
394 Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 depends, of course, on the number of the primary one?', and on the 
 length of the whole verse. In the same manner, the disjunctives of 
 the third class are used to subdivide the secondary divisions ; and 
 those of the fourth class to subdivide the divisions made by those of 
 the third. 
 
 (c) The poetry of the Hebrews, according to the accentuators, 
 comprises only the books of Psalms (cVnn), Proverbs (''"rTuTs), and 
 the greater part of Job (li'N); technically called r73N truth, by com- 
 bining the initials of the names (IT 1 1. c). In these books, the primary 
 divisions are made by Silluq, Athnahh, and Merka Mahpakh. Thus, 
 Silluq alone is found in Ps. 19 : 1. Job 19:1, &c. Silluq and Athnahh in 
 Ps. 1: 4, 5, &,c. and Silluq and Merka Mahpakh in Ps. 1:2. 3: 4. Some- 
 times all three are employed, and the verse is divided into three parts ; 
 as Ps. 1 : 1, 3, &c. 
 
 (y) To subdivide these primary divisions in poetry, all the other 
 disjunctive accents, excepting those which belong exclusively to prose, 
 are used indiscriminately ; so that in poetry all the accents of the sec- 
 ond, third, and fourth classes in the table, may be assigned to one 
 class, and called, in distinction from the pause-accents, lesser disjunc- 
 tives. 
 
 IF 7. Consecution of the accents. 
 
 (o) The leading pause-accent (Silluq) always stands at the end of 
 a verse, and the other disjunctives which may be employed, are 
 distributed on the right of it, viz. between it and the beginning of the 
 verse, according to their respective rank. See above in IT 6. c, t/, &,c. 
 and also the tables below. 
 
 {b) To disjunctives of every class are usually attached one or 
 more conjunctives, located on one or more of the preceding words, and 
 occasionally on the same word. 
 
 (c) The words thus occupied by a disjunctive and its preceding 
 conjunctive or conjunctives, are called the clause of that disjunctive ; 
 and the disjunctive is said to govern this clause. 
 
 Note. Zaqeph Gadhol (.1:) and Yethibh (_) have no conjunctives 
 attached to them ; and of course have no clause except the word on 
 which they stand. 
 
 {d) The following tables, with the accompanying explanations, 
 exhibit the various consecutions of the accents both in prose and in 
 poeiry. 
 
ArrF.xnix E; accfnts. 
 
 395 
 
 Table I. Prose accents. 
 (a) Consccutiom of the disjunctives. 
 Class I ; pause-accents. 
 
 1 
 
 Class II. 
 3 
 
 -\ 
 
 fr - 
 
 Class III. 
 
 Class IV. 
 9 
 
 
 ^ c 
 
 
 ? 
 
 f 
 
 
 V 
 
 • 
 
 (/ 
 
 
 f 
 
 c 
 
 
 c 
 
 ) 
 
 
 9 
 
 C 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 
 <v 
 
 
 
 L — 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 10 
 
 Pesiq (l) in its various 
 connexions see below 
 in Table III. 
 
 (6) Disjunctives in connexion with conjunctives. 
 
 Class I. 
 11 12 
 
 13 
 
 Class II. 
 
 14 
 
 -s ' 
 
 15 
 
 ■ none. 
 
59G 
 
 Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 Class III. 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 19 20 
 
 rr 
 
 
 none. 
 
 21 
 
 3, S 
 
 Class IV. 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 Pesiq (l) with conjunctives see below In Table III. 
 
 24 
 
 Table II. Poetic accents. 
 
 (fl) Consecutions oj^ the disjunctives. 
 Class I ; pause-accents. 
 
 25 26 
 
 Class II ; lesser disjunctives. 
 
 27 
 
 1^ ~__ Ps. 18: 1. 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 
 L_ 
 
Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 397 
 
 (6) Disjunctives in connexion with conjunctives. 
 Class I. 
 30 31 32 
 
 
 ) 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 r 
 •> 
 
 ) 
 
 K 
 
 
 J 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 _, 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 " 
 
 - 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 , 
 
 - 
 
 ~ 
 
 \ 
 
 hi 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 
 
 } 
 
 — 
 
 — ~ 
 
 
 — T 
 
 
 
 r — 
 
 5 i 
 
 33 
 
 rr 
 
 36 
 
 Class II. 
 
 34 
 
 37 
 
 35 
 
 r — 
 
 ^-i- .- ' 
 
 
 Table III. Pesiq. 
 
 (a) Pesiq as a disjunctive. 
 In prose, Pesiq with a conjunctive usually appears as a disjanctive 
 of the fourth class, and as such is regularly found occupying the place 
 of any of the accents in the consecutions given in Tab. I no. 8. But 
 it occasionally appears to have also the power of a disjunctive of the 
 second and third classes, and is so used in Gen. 22: 11. 14. 39: IQ, 
 46 : 2. Ex. 17 : 15. 34 : 6, 23. 35: .35, &c. &c. 
 .'52 
 
398 
 
 Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 In poetry, Pesiq belongs to the second class, and is usually remov- 
 ed one or two places from the governing pause-accent. With Merka 
 and Shalsheleth, it sometimes stands next to Silluq and Athnahh ; as 
 Ps. 24 : 4. 89 : 2, &c. 
 
 (6) Pesiq in connexion with conjunctives. 
 Prose. 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 '— <( — 
 
 Prose or Poetry. 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 I — 
 
 43 
 
 \- ■ 
 
 ^ 3 5 
 
 ~{ 
 
 
 44 
 
 1 . 
 
 L — 
 
 IF 8. Explanation oj" the tables of consecutions. 
 
 (a) General remarks, (l) The tables are designed to exhibit the 
 usual consecutions of the accents, beginning at the close of a verse and 
 reckoning towards the right. In all the consecutions, as given in the 
 tables, the accents which stand at the left hand belong to the next 
 higher class ; and those on the right of them are used to subdivide the 
 clauses of the former in the order there exhibited. 
 
 (2) When more than one consecution, or line of accents, is placed 
 on the right of an accent in the tables ; any accent in any one of the 
 perpendicular columns may, generally speaking, be used in the place 
 of any other accent in the same column. Thus in Tab. I no. 5, the 
 first subdivision on the right of Zaqeph Qaton (L) may be made by 
 
Appendix E ; accents. 399 
 
 Pashta (_) or Yethibh (_) ; the second by Rebhia, Pa«hta, or Yethibh ; 
 the third also by Rebhia, Pashta, or Yethibh ; and so through all the 
 tables. 
 
 (3) With the exception of the pause-accents, Tiphhha, and Se- 
 gholta, all the accents^ disjunctive or conjunctive^ may be repeated in im- 
 mediate consecution^ as often as is necessary. 
 
 Prose AccEirrrs. Tab. I, 
 
 (6) In the first class, no. 1 shews that Silluq is sometimes the only 
 pause-accent in a verse ; no. 2 exhibits it as preceded by Athnahh in 
 the same verse, as is usually the case ; see above in IT 6. c. These 
 accents are never repeated. 
 
 (c) In the second class, no. 3 shews what secondary divisions are made 
 on the right of Silluq and Athnahh ; both of them having subdivi?ions 
 of the same kind, made by the same accents, and in the same order. 
 Thus Tiphhha stands at the head of the first subdivision ; Zaqeph 
 Qaton or its equivalent Zaqeph Gadhol at the head of the second, third, 
 fourth, Sac. and Segholta at the head of the tifth &.c. see above in a. 
 
 2, 3. The number of intermediate clauses between Tiphhha and 
 Segholta is various, depending on the length of the verse, and the con- 
 sequent repetition or omission of the Zaqephs; comp. Gen. 1:7. 3: 
 
 3. Ezra 7 : 13. Tiphhha is never repeated nor omitted; Segholta is 
 never repeated, but is often omitted. Comp. in o, 3. 
 
 Note. In general, Segholta seems to govern a larger clause than 
 Zaqeph ; and Zaqeph a larger one than Tiphhha. (IT 7. c.) 
 
 {d) In the third class, the several consecutions shew the order of 
 the subdivisions made by this class of accents under those of the pre- 
 ceding class; i. e. those made within the limits of the secondary divis- 
 ions (IF 6. d). All these accents are subject to repetition or omission, 
 as the length of the secondary clauses may require. The tables shew . 
 that Rebhia ("_) and Pashta (l) are common in the consecutions at- 
 tached to all the disjunctives of the second class; while Tebhir (_) is 
 attached only to Tiphhha ( - ); Yethibh ( _ ) to Zaqeph Q,aton ( « ); 
 and Zarqa ( ~) to Segholta ( 1 ). 
 
 (e) The fourth class of disjunctives have no subdivisions under 
 them, and of course have none but conjunctives attached to them. 
 No. 8 exhibits the order of their consecutions when attached to ac- 
 cents of the third class ; and shews that they may all be connected, in 
 the same order, with any one of the third class which admits subdivis- 
 ions in its clause. 
 
400 Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 (y) In Tab. I. 6, is exhibited the manner in which the conjunc- 
 tives are attached to the several disjunctives. They are often repeat- 
 ed (supra a, 3), and in many cases are wholly omitted ; especially 
 where the disjunctive clause consists of only one word, or of two or 
 three words joined by Maqqeph. 
 
 Poetic Accents. Tab. II. 
 
 {g) The poetic accents are arranged in the tables, on the same 
 principles as those of prose, as above explained. But in poetry, the 
 verses, and of course the members of them, are much shorter than in 
 prose, and the subdivisions much fewer. 
 
 (/t) The conjunctives in poetry (nos. 30 — 37) are much more nu- 
 merous than in prose, and are more frequently repeated. Most of 
 the disjunctives have a long train of them. 
 Pesiq. Tab. III. 
 
 (i) Pesiq appears to possess an equal value in all its combinations 
 with conjunctives ; and is quite anomalous in respect to position, as is 
 stated in the table. From an investigation of several hundreds of chap- 
 ters, it was found with only the seven conjunctives exhibited in the ta- 
 ble ; but it is very possible, that in other parts of the Bible it may oc- 
 cur in connexion with the remaining ones. Some of the consecutions 
 in nos. 40 — 44 belong only to prose. 
 
 (A) The mode of tracing the accents on the pages of the Bible is 
 simple. Commencing at the close of a verse, the consecutions are to 
 be followed through to the beginning. In the following examples, 
 those accents in capitals are pause-accents ; those in small are lesser 
 disjunctives, and the class to which they belong is designated by the 
 figures which follow them ; those in Italic are conjunctives. 
 
 Prose. Gen. 1 : 1 SiLLuq with Merka ; Tiphhha 2 with Merka : 
 Athnahh with Munahh ; Tiphhha 2. The shortness of the verse ex- 
 cludes all disjunctives of the third and fourth classes, and admits only 
 one in each clause of the second class ; see above in c. 
 
 Verse 2 Silluq with Merka ; Tiphhha 2 ; Zaqeph Qaton 2 with 
 Munahh : Athnahh with Munahh ; Tiphhha 2 ; Zaqeph Qalon 2, Pash- 
 ta 3 (wi'itten twice *[[ 5. c) with Merka^ Rebhia 3. Here are subdivis- 
 ions made by accents of the third class, but none by those of the 
 fourth; and Tiphhha and Rebhia occur without any conjunctives, as is 
 often the case, both with them and with all the disjunctives. 
 
 Note. Words before Maqqeph, here and elsewhere, have no ac- 
 
Appendix E; accents. 401 
 
 cent upon them ; unlos«. it be, that occiisionally they have one pail nf 
 a co^lpo!^ite accent. See § 32. 
 
 Podic. Ps. 1 : 1 Sii.i.i'f^ willi Munalih ; Rebhia Gcresh with Mrr- 
 ka : Atiinahh with Mcrka ; Tiphhha anterius with Mmmhk : Mkr- 
 KA IMaiii'aku with Yrroh ; Zarqa postpositive with Mcrka; Pcsiq with 
 Mithpnkh ; Kobhia with Mvnuhh. 
 
 Verse 2 Sili.uq with Merka ; Rebhia Geresh with Merka : Mkuka 
 Mahpakh ; Rebhia wUhMcrki ; Tiphhha anterius ; Pesiq wWh Muhpakh. 
 
 Note. The precedins^ tables of the accents were formed with mucli 
 labour from actual investigation, and are. as perfect as circumstances 
 would permit. It is believed, that they are more complete than are 
 elsewhere to be found; though an alteutivc and more extended ex- 
 amination would probably aflbrd the means of making some additions to 
 several of the consecutions. In some cases too, the student will prob- 
 ably lind parts of consecutions varying from those in the tables, both 
 because copies of dilTerent editions differ in the accentuation besides 
 having various readings in themselves, and because occasional errors 
 in this species of typography are unavoidable. In doulitful cases, the 
 only method of obtaining satisfaction is to compare different editions. 
 The most accurate edition in all respects is that of Michaelis ; the 
 next is that of Jablonski ; that of Van der Hooghti although the most 
 elegant, is not always correct, especially in regard to the accents. 
 
 IT 9. Double accentuation. 
 
 (r() Double accentuation is to be carefully distinguished from all 
 those cases of compound accents and of accents repeated, which are 
 treated of in IT 5. It is of two kinds, as pertaining either to particular 
 words or to a tniin of discourse. 
 
 (6) Many cases occur, both in prose and in poetry, where particu- 
 lar words exhibit a double accentuation ; viz. two disjunctives, or a 
 disjunctive and conjunctive, or two conjunctives, in the usual order of 
 consecution, are placed on the same word, instead of placing the in- 
 ferior accent on the precetling word. The following are examples, viz. 
 
 ; — — — : — Pashta '- — — * — — — 
 
 Pesiq (l) also, besides its usual conjunctives, frequently takes Zar- 
 qa ( :2; ) conjunctive on the same word. 
 
402 Appendix E ; accents. 
 
 Note. In the case of Zaqeph Qaton with Pashta ( - ), the latter 
 thoucfh postpositive is here necessarily thrown back upon a preceding 
 syllable ; see IT 4. b. 
 
 (c) A case of double accentuation, as pertaining to a train of dis- 
 course, occurs in the decalogue, Ex. 20: 2 — 15. When the decalogue 
 was read in course, as a part of a Sabbatical section of the law, it was 
 read as thirteen verses; and was furnished with one train of accents 
 accordingly, containing thirteen Silluqs. But at the feast of Pentecost, 
 in which the .Jews were accustomed to commemorate the promulga- 
 tion of the law from Mount Sinai, the decalogue was publicly read as 
 divided into ten portions, each of which was furnished with its appropri- 
 ate train of accents. These portions were very unequal, and are indi- 
 cated in our common Hebrew Bibles by the letter D.* See on this 
 subject Abicht de accentibus Heb. c. VII. 
 
 In some cases, where the different divisions terminate at the same 
 place, the two trains of accents coincide and only one appears ; as in 
 part of V. 6, and v. 7, 11, 12, 14. The two last portions were made 
 by dividing v. 14; and of course Silluq milst be understood upon '^S'.T 
 along with Athnahh, although in modern editions the former is usual- 
 ly omitted. 
 
 Note. The above quotations are made from the edition of Michae- 
 lis. In that of Van der Hooght, the verses are numbered differently, 
 but the other divisions and the two trains of accents are the same as 
 in that of Michaelis. 
 
 IT 10. Original design of the accents. 
 
 It is stated in § 33. 1 that three uses have been assigned to the ac- 
 cents, viz. to mark the tone-syllable ; to serve as signs of interpunc- 
 tion ; and to guide the recitation or cantillation of the sacred text. It 
 may here be proper to inquire, which of these uses was probably in- 
 tended by the accentuators. 
 
 (a) Were the accents intended to mark the tone-syllable ? We have 
 seen (TF 4. 6) that seven of the accents do not necessarily indicate the 
 
 * The Rabbins consid(;rcd this double accentuation as a great mystery, and 
 deliglited to draw from it recondite doctiines. '■'•Magna multaque in iis latere 
 mijsltiia, qiiilibet faleri ntctsse liubet, qui dujilicem in decalogo et aliis in locis 
 consideraltil acrxntuolionein. Nemo uuquam fuit ex omnibus retro kominibus, 
 qui rationem ejus dare poluil, nee evil poslliac vlUis, qui ium jttnetrare valtbi! 
 Ax." Elias Schnegassius in Abicht c. vii. 
 
Appendix E ; accents. 403 
 
 place of the tone. It can therefore hardly be deemed probable, that 
 the authors of the accents invented them for this purpose, and then 
 placed them in such positions as not to accomplish their object. Nor is 
 it any more probable, that they invented nearly forty accents to de- 
 signate the tone-syllable, when in all cases one would have better an- 
 swered their purpose. For such reasons, this opinion hrs generally 
 been rejected. 
 
 {b) JVerc (he accents invented as signs of interpnnction ? This opin- 
 ion has found many supporters, both among ancient and modern wri- 
 ters on the accents. No satisfactory theory, however, has ever yet 
 been proposed by the advocates of this view ; scarcely any two of 
 them being agreed in respect to it. Nor is this disagreement a sub- 
 ject of wonder ; for there is not a page of the Hebrew Bible which 
 does not confound all attempts to support the theory of real interpunc- 
 tion by the accents. Every kind of connexion, even the most intimate 
 that can exist between words, is constantly broken up by the use of 
 the disjunctives. Thus in Ps. 18 : 1 we have nNTr; nn'^>pn ''■?.^~,~^^. 
 the words of this song, where '''^.^~ a noun in regimen with the follow- 
 ing word, the most intimate of all grammatical connexions, has a dis- 
 junctive accent upon it ; and so in a multitude of cases. On the other 
 hand, the conjunctive accents are sometimes placed on words which 
 have no connexion, either in respect to grammar or sense. Thus in 
 Ps. 4 : 5 commune -with your own hearts 07i your bed nbo ^'Z'^l and be 
 still Selah, where the words be still and Selah are united by the ac- 
 cents in the most intimate and inseparable connexion ; and so in very 
 many cases. Not a chapter in the Bible can be pointed and read 
 according to the accents and make sense of it, if they are regarded as 
 distinctive of the sense and meaning of words. (IF 6. b.) 
 
 Some writers have been aware of this difficulty, and to avoid it 
 have made the accents distinctive of either a dictamen logicum, gram- 
 maticum, or rhet»ricum. When one of these fails, they then resort to 
 the other. But in 1 Chr. 1 : 1 — 10, — which is a mere catalogue of 
 proper names, all having the same relation to, and connexion with 
 each other, — the accents, both conjunctive and disjunctive, are employ- 
 ed ia all their accustomed mixture and sequences. To what dictamen 
 must we resort, in order to account for a usage like this ? 
 
 Another difficulty in the way of considering the accents as signs of 
 interpunction, is presented by those cases in which two or more ac- 
 cents are placed on the same word (IF 9. 6). Is a word at the same 
 
404 Appendix E ; accents, 
 
 time disjoined in different degrees ? or at the same time both disjoined 
 and conjoined ? or can it be doubly conjoined ? The same difficulty 
 also occurs in those cases, in which the very same words, in the same 
 connexion and sense, are furnished with accents of different kinds ; as 
 2 Sam. 22 which has prose accents, compared with Ps. 18 where the 
 same song has poetic accents ; and which in the former case often has 
 conjunctives, where in the latter it has disjunctives. Is then the same 
 composition at the same moment both poetry and prose ? or are the 
 same words, in the same connexion and meaning, in the one case to be 
 conjoined with others in sense, and in the other case to be at the same 
 time disjoined from them in sense ? Let him believe it, who thinks 
 with the Rabbins, that the Scriptures have seven times seven senses ! 
 
 (c) The accents -were intended to guide the cantiUatio7i of the sacred 
 text. From time immemorial the Jews have cantillated the Scriptures 
 in their synagogues (§ 33. 8). Among the greater part of them, this 
 cantillation is and ever has been modulated by the accents. This cus- 
 tom is at least as old as the Talmud, in which it is mentioned ; and this 
 must be as old as the accents themselves. (Talm. Bab. Megilla c. iv. 
 fol. 32 col. a.) 
 
 If we allow this to have been the primary design of the accents, 
 then we can account for it how genealogical tables can have conjunc- 
 tive and disjunctive accents, — how the poetical consecution should dif- 
 fer from that of prose, — and how the titles of the Psalms &c. should 
 have the same consecution as the body of the Psalms themselves. On 
 this ground too we can account for the variety of the accents., which on 
 any other is inexplicable. For to what purpose are so many conjunc- 
 tives, all having merely one and the same power of joining words to 
 each other, if that is all their office ? Whereas variety of modulation, 
 90 as to render cantillation agreeable, would not only admit, but require 
 various conjunctives, as the representatives of different modulations. 
 
 One other circumstance may be added. The name given to the 
 accents, in the Porta Accentnfiin appended to the final Masora and 
 certainly very ancient, is ni-"^^; rmmc, rnof^w/aiton, a word derived from 
 "ja: to beat a musical instrumeiit., as a harp Sic. All the Jews, with 
 one consent, allow the musical use of the accents to be one of the de- 
 signs which the authors had in view ; and the foregoing considerafion^ 
 may serve to shew, that in all probability it was the principal one. 
 
AlTENDlX E ; ACCENTS. 405 
 
 1" II. Present utiUtij of the accents. 
 
 {a) All the accent's, except seven, almost invariably designate the 
 tone-syllable of words. This atTorils c^reat assistance to any one, who 
 desires to render himself familiar \vitii this part of Hebrew ^ammar, 
 so intimately connected with the vowel-changes which take place in 
 this language. 
 
 {h) They generally serve, like the accents in Greek, to distinguish 
 words of the same form but of different meaning; as hz they built^ 
 ^:£ among ws ,• ^3UJ they led captive 3 plur. from t-i^S'IJ, ^^p they turned 
 back 3 plur. from 3iUJ ; "ijN he caught 3 praet. of Kal, "nN / shall see 
 1 fut. apoc. from ntn, &.c. &c. 
 
 (c) In poetry, the pause-accents serve, for the most part, to di'^tin- 
 guish the parallelisms with a good degree of accuracy. Very seldom 
 indeed is one constrained to differ from the division which they make. 
 This is quite useful to the beginner in the study of Hebrew poetry. 
 It is indeed a matter of surprise, that the authors of the accents should 
 have committed such a mistake, as to designate only the books of 
 Psalms, Proverbs, and Job, as poetic (f[ 6. e). Is then the song of 
 Moses, of Deborah and Barak, the Canticles, Lamentations, and most 
 of the prophets, not poetry ? Still, as the prose accents which are 
 used in these books, generally serve to distinguish the parallelisms 
 which they contain, the mistake of the authors of the accents is of lit- 
 tle consequence at the present time. 
 
 In regard to the prosaic parts of the Old Testament, the accents 
 are of less importance in marking the divisions of the text ; as the stu- 
 dent seldom needs any other guide to interpunction, than the sense of 
 a passage. 
 
 {d) The vowels, in innumerable cases, are affected by the accents, 
 being changed through their intliience from short to long, and vice 
 versa. It becomes then indispensable to an accurate and extensive 
 knowledge of the mutations of the Hebrew vowels, to acquire an ad- 
 equate knowledge of the accents. 
 
 (e) Finally, no student of Hebrew, who has a love for his business 
 and genuine ardour in the pursuit of it, can ever sit down satisfied to 
 read his Hebrew Bible, and pass over it leaving large portions of its 
 characters unexplained, and himself unable to decide whether they are 
 worth the trouble of explanation. The labour of acquiring all the 
 knowledge of the accents which is attainable at the present day, is 
 .^3 
 
406 
 
 Appendix F ; conjugations. 
 
 certainly very little, with the aid of tables like those presented above. 
 Two or three days faithful exercise in writing down the accents 
 and tracing their consecutions, will render the business easy ; and to 
 pursue it afterwards will frequently be pleasant, and not unfrequently 
 profitable. 
 
 F. p. 145. 
 
 The following table exhibits the forms of ^^B in all the conjuga- 
 tions, and of course the origin of all the names of the conjugations. 
 
 /. Usual. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 1. Kal 
 
 3. Piel 
 5. Hiphil 
 7. Hithpael 
 
 :S>B 
 
 :^S>2 pi-^el. 
 
 b'^^-pri hiph-^il 
 b^lEnri hith-pd^'S'el. 
 
 II. Umisual. 
 
 2. Niphal 
 4. Pual 
 6. Hophal 
 
 b^'53 nlph-'Sal. 
 
 b??S pu-Sal. 
 
 ^^Bil hbph-'Sal. 
 
 9. Poel ^4^15 po-'Sll. 
 
 11. Hithpoel b^'^sn^ to/t-/)o-S>e/. 
 
 12. Pole] ^V.^'C jD65>-/e/. 
 
 14. Hithpolel bby3n;-| hUh-p6S>-leL 
 
 15. Pilel bV.2:2 j»i2.'-/f/. 
 
 17. Hithpalel bV>:2nrj hith-pd^-lll. 
 
 18. Pealal b^'b^D /jfyd/-2>d/. 
 20. Pilpel Vsbs pil-pel. 
 
 22. Hithpalpal bsbsnr; hUh-pdl-pdl. 
 
 23. Peoel b^T 2?3 jof yo-2>e/. 
 
 24. Tiphel V^^n tiph-S>el. 
 
 8. Hothpaal ^52^!^ hoth-pa-Sdl 
 10. Poal bsis po-Sdl 
 
 13. Polal 
 
 16. Pulal 
 
 19. Poalal 
 21. Polpal 
 
 bbJ>S pd'J-ldl. 
 bbi'C pu'S-ldl 
 
 V^b^e p^^dl-^d.!. 
 bsbs pbl-pdl. 
 
 25. Popaal b^B2;s poV-porVdl 
 
PRAXIS. 
 
 In the following praxis, the Jirst number or figures of any refer- 
 ence indicate in ail cases the section of the grammar, and the other 
 figures or letters refer to the subdivisions of that section. Dec. I. &.c. 
 refer to the declensions in ^ 154 Par. II. When the letters no. are 
 prefixed, the reference is to the number in the praxis itself 
 
 Those portions of the grammar which are to be attentively studied 
 in the first perusal, are indicated by the marks (*) and (t) ; the for- 
 mer being used to mark whole sections, and the latter parts of sec- 
 tions. When placed before a section or part of a section, they include 
 also all subdivisions belonging thereto, which are printed in large type. 
 
 If the study of Hebrew be commenced under an instructer, the 
 following assignment of recitations will be found convenient. 
 
 Recitation I. §§ 10—19 mclusively. II. §§ 20—23. III. §§ 24 — 
 27. IV. §§ 28—36. V. §§ 37—38 to verse 6. VI. Reading of 
 Gen. 1 : 6 — 15; the reading lessons in all cases to be conducted on 
 the same principles as in § 38. VII. Gen. 1 : 16 to 2 : 25. VIII. Gen. 3 
 and 4 to V. 11. IX. §§ 45—52. X. §§ 53—60. XI. §§ 62—71. XII. 
 §§ 72—80. XIII. §§ 84—90. XIV. §§ 91—93 with the paradigm of 
 the regular verb (§ 127 Par. I) ; giving an account of the characteris- 
 tics and the uses of each conjugation as studied in Rec. XII. Exerci- 
 ses here in writing full paradigms of various regular verbs, would be 
 very useful. XV. §§ 128—134. XVI. §§ 135—143. 
 
 The student may now with advantage begin the study of his He- 
 brew Bible, and in this way come gradually to a more thorough 
 knowledge of those portions of the grammar which he has already 
 been over ; while recitations in the remaining part may be continued 
 at the pleasure of the instructer. The student will find it most profi- 
 table, to take at first short lessons, to make himself perfectly familiar 
 with the parts of grammar referred to in the praxis, and to persevere 
 in reviewing thoroughly and frequently the grouad which he may 
 have srone over. 
 
PRAXIS : GENESIS I. 
 
 Genesis, Chap. I. 
 Rec. XVII. Verse 1. — d'Tl''*. ^^"^2 n"'->yN'7a. 
 
 1. n"^u;N";\2, a preposition 157. 1 ; for punctuation, see 61. 7. — 
 rT'\pN'n a feminine denominative noun 129. 6. b ; Dec. I. i, and 138. 1. 
 Syntax 173. 4. 
 
 2. i<-;2 a verb N>b § 120 and 127 Par. XIV ; 3 masc. praet. of Kal, 
 conjugated Kal Nna, Niph. ^{"Ja:, Pi. N'^.a;* syntax in 189. 1. 
 
 3. D'Trbi* a noun plural from M^bN 133. 1 ; comp. Sheva under N 
 26 : 5 ; Pattahh furtive under final n of the root disappears when the 
 word receives any accession 27, 1, 2, as does also Mappiq 30. 1 ; the 
 Hholem in the plural is defectively written 24. 3, as is usual in this 
 and other similar words; Dec. I. d; nom. case to N"na 167. 2. 
 
 XVIII. Verses 1, 2. — nn";r7 Vl^^l • V^-^vJ '^^.l o'^*?^i ^^. — • 
 
 4. nij 157. 1,4. d ; syntax in 173. 2. — C";»"^^! made up of the ar- 
 ticle -n 65 and 61.1; and the noun U'l2'^ 134. 3 note, and 151. 3 note 
 with 154 Par. Ill; ace. case after N"ia 196. 1. 
 
 5- Y').^7l ^^.1- Vav conjunction 158. 1 and 61. 15. — nN in no. 4. 
 — V^NJ^ made up of the article n 61. 2, and the noun f "J.N from 
 ground-form y~li* Dec. VI. a, and 143 note 2; comp. 55. 5. a; syn- 
 tax as in no. 4. 
 
 6. rrn^rr a verb Sib from ^^ri §122 and 127 Par. XV, also Pe 
 guttural 102. 3 note ; conjugated Kal n;^rj, Niph. rT^tn3 ; 3 fern, 
 praet. of Kal 122. 4 note. 
 
 7. XIX. Verse 2 to the end. ^ri'2.1 IMD nouns originally of Dec. 
 VI; see 143 note 19, and 47. 3; for the pointing of Fat), see 61. 19. 
 h. See also 216. 2. a. 
 
 8. ']ilJn masc. noun from root ^^ri, Dec. VI. I ; nom. case to rr^in 
 understood 211. 7. — b^' prep, with the form of a noun 157. 2. a ; root 
 tlby. — ■^:3 noun plur. const, from obs. sing. ri:s Dec. IX. 6, and 146 ; 
 found only in the plural 133. 6; syntax in 207 and 172. 3. d^ compared 
 with 135. 1. — Qinn masc. noun Dec. I. c, and 138 ; plur. in DT 133. 
 4; genitive 170. 1 and 135. 1. 
 
 9. nn-i Dec. I. d ; const, state 135. 1 ; nom. case (l72. 3) to nCH'lJJ 
 participle fern, from ^ir^'n a verb i" gutt. conjugated Kal P]nn, Piel 
 
 * Note. To conjugate a verb in Hebrew, is to repeat the forms of it in the 
 praeter of all tlie conjugations in use. It should then be declined through the 
 tense or mood in which it is found. The nouns also should be declined through 
 all their forms. 
 
PRAXIS ; GENESIS I. 
 
 ;)n-), inf. qnn. part. masc. C]nna 90. 2; for the fom. iorni, see 90. ?, 
 and 127 Par. XX. It is here used as a verb of past time 203. 2, and 
 agrees with nm. 
 
 10. 2V:ri like D'^a'^ri in no. 4, except that Pattahh under 7^ is pro- 
 longed by the pause-accent 60. 7. a ; syntax in 170. 1 and 135. 1. 
 
 11. XX. Fcrse 3. ^t!i<'^ Vav convcrsive 93; -)7JN"' a verb NB 
 from -i^^N § 107 and 127 Par. V; conjugated Kal 173^, Nipb. 
 i:?i<:, Hiph. "T'^Nrr, Hith. 'n^ijNnrr; fut. Kal 'n^N'* and ^ttN"' 107. I. 
 c ; final Tseri shortened to Seghol 54. 3, comp. 93. 3 and 35. 4. Synt. 
 as in no. 2. 
 
 12. •'n;' fut. apoc. from Jl^^ in no. 6, § 123. I. d 2 and note 1. 
 For the use, see 91. 6 and 193. 4. a. — niN masc. Dec. I. a ; no plural. 
 In ^Trl the \'av conv. omits Daghesh 93. 1 and 45. 6. 
 
 13. XXI. Verse 4. Nn^l Vav in no. 11 ; N");; fut. apoc. Kal from 
 ni*"^ a verb nb 122 and '} guU. 104; conj. Kal HwN-;, Nlph. r^f^n:, 
 Pu. -Nn, Hiph. i-iNnr:, Hoph. "N")-, Hith. riij-in- ; form in 123. 1, d 
 2 ; synt. as in no. 2. — -iTNn art. 61.2, and noun no 12. — 13 conjunc- 
 tion. — iTU masc. adj. Dec. I, fern. ?init2 Dec. X and 132. 4; synt. 
 in 180. 1 and 211. 7. 
 
 14. V"^!} fut. apoc. Hiph. from r"i2 99. I. c; comp. 91. 6. d and 
 93. 1. — "i"'?. prep, like a const, noun 157. 2. a. — "j'^n 61. 17. — l^'-prin 
 61. 2 small. 
 
 15. XXII. Verse 5. N'^p.'^T verb Nb as in no. 2. — IINb 157. 1 and 
 61. 6 ; synt. in 173. 1 and 195. 1. — Di"^ irreg. noun, sing. Dec. I, plur. 
 Dec. II. — ^v'r "°^" ^^^^^ '■^~ paragogic 50. 4. o, from b";b of Dec. 
 VI. q; form in 143 note 24; Pattahh changed to Qamets 60. 7. a; 
 ^b a mixed syllable 37. 5. — a"\3? Segh. n. Dec. VI A class, but found 
 only in abs. state. — ~\p.l Dec. VI. i. — Tni* numeral 152. 3 small, and 
 154 Par. IV^ ; used as an ordinal. 
 
 16. XXIII. Tern* 6 and part of 7. y^p.-j Dec. Ill and 140; Pat- 
 tahh furtive 27. 2. — '^ins from ^^':r\ Dec. VI. p^ and 143 note 16 ; 
 const, and the whole taken as a prep. 157. 2. c. — ^ri"*! 61. 16 small 
 — b"'-S'D Hiph. part, see in no. 14; Dec. I; synt. in 203. 4. — a^72b 
 nos. 10, 15. 
 
 17. Verse 7. t)?^} fut. apoc. Kal from nir:? a verb fib and D gutt. 
 123. I. rf 1 ; Vav in 93. 1. _^'^p->rj no. 16 and'§ 61. 2. 
 
PRAXIS ; GENESIS I. 
 
 18. XXIV. Verses 7 in part, 8, 9. ^'iiN rel. pron. 187; nom. to 
 rr^^ understood 211.7. — nnna prep. 61. 11 and 157. 2. e ; nnn like a 
 noun of Dec. VI. b ; lit. under pari. — ^'"'p"J^ 61. 6 ; genitive case 170. 
 2. b. — bi-a 61. 12 and 157. 2. e; V? like a noun of Dec. II. d; lit. 
 upper part. — '^ri'^T no. 12 ; synt. in 190. 1. — ^S adverb ; root p3. 
 
 19. Verse 8. D"7r^ no. 4 and 60. 7. a. — "^j'^J ordinal 154 Par. IV 
 and 152. II. 
 
 20. Verse 9. ^li^"^. fut. Niph. from tTiJ? a verb nb with Vav move- 
 able 117. 2. b. — bi? prep. 157. 1, 2. a. — fiTpO Dec. Ill; root D^p. 
 
 21. rii$-]n-i Vav conj. verb from riN-j no. 13, fut. Niph. 102. 5. 
 — ri'ttJZ'ri art. and fern. adj. with yiit understood, or used as a noun, 
 Dec. X ; root X'2.''. 
 
 22. XXV. Verse 10. M?.p^^t conj. 61. 16 ; prep. 61. 7; noun Dec. 
 IX. a, and 146 const, state; root riTj^ in no. 20. — Q'^s^ Dec. VIII. o, 
 and 145. 
 
 23. Verse 11. N'^ln fut. apoc. Hiph. from i*-*^'^ 91. 6. a. — N'ij'l 
 and n'i35> Dec. VI. — ^^''ipj part. Hiph. from 2?nT 105 and 127 Par. 
 IV ; Dec. I. — i'l^. Dec. VI. c. 
 
 24. XXVI. VN Dec. VII. a. — ^"IB Dec. VI. w, and 143 note 19; 
 root rrns. — ni^2? part. act. Kal from Mtiy in no. 17 ; § 90. 1. i, and 
 122. 2. b ; defectively written 24. 3. — "'■ID with Dagh. euphonic 29. 8. 
 
 25. T3"^?2'^ prep, and noun Dec. I ; 1 suffix pronoun 3 masc. sing. 
 135. 6 col. 2. — ^%ii_ qualities ii 187. 2, in which. — iS'-\l Dec. VI. c, 
 with light suffix. — Tn 157. 4. a. 
 
 26. Verse 12. NiTnT 3 fern. fut. apoc. Hiph. from i<i:^ a verb "'D 
 class I, and Nb §5 109, 120, and 122 Par. VI and XIV."— ^nr72ir no. 
 25; suffix Ml- 135. 5. b and 7. c. — Nn;;T in no. 13. 
 
 27. XXVII. Verse 13. ^">2:^V'P ordinal 152. II, and 154 Par. IV. 
 
 28. Verse 14. Tl"; no. 12; sing, with plur. nom. 189. 4. — nSN73 
 def written for nT-\iJ«» 24. 3 and 133. 3. c, note 2; from ground- 
 form -iik\a Dec. Ill ; plur. D""- and ni 133.5; root -)ii<. — 5''p")2 
 prep, with Hhireq parvum, to prevent the concurrence of two vocal 
 Shevas 58. 1, compared with 61. 7; ?'"p'l const. Dec. Ill; see no. 16. 
 
 29. b"'^i-b inf const. Hiph. from b'ls ; synt. 201. 1. — n"'n'i 94. 
 1 and 192. 5. b ; comp. 189. 4 note 1. — rin'Nb 24. 3 ; pi. from nikV 
 Dec. I, see 133. 4; synt. 195. 3 — D"''i^:i7jbn, conj. 61. 17; noun pi. 
 from -l?.i72 Dec. VII and 144 ; root nb^; synt. 195. 3 and 215. — D-'^rbn 
 no. 15 D^"". — C^t'viJ"! pi. of n3UJ Dec. XI: plnr. in W- and DT 133. 5. 
 
PKAXIS ; GENKSIS I. 
 
 30. XXVIII. Verse lb. nniiiTsb no. 28 ult. — 'T'Nlnb inf. const. 
 Hiph. from -|ij< a verb VJ 117 and 127 Par. XII ; comp. no. 29. 
 
 31. Ferse IG. C'^r'^-'!" H-lN/Sn "^zt ; lb I Par. IV. 2 ; art. 1G3. 2. 
 n, and 165. 1 ; Q'^V'! P'- ^^3- "i^sc. from M^.'^ Dec. Ill ; Hholem def. 
 written 24. 3, comp. no. 3; synt. in 179. 1. — b'lari 24. 3; art. 165. 
 1 ; synt. 178. 1. a. — nr:;:2>or prep, and Segh. noun Dec. XIII const, 
 state; root b'^io. — Dvr: 163. 2. o, and no. 15. — f^I^^l raasc. adj. 
 Dec. VIII and'l4o (with Puff. ^itip^ 2 Chr. 10: 10); synt. as Vnarr 
 above. — D'^ns^'sn Dec. II. b. 
 
 32. XXIX. Verse n. -jn^.T fut. Kal from "jni a verb '[d 113 and 
 127 Par. X ; anomalous 114. IV. 5. — CnN 157.^4. d. 
 
 33. Verse 18. buJ^b"], no. 14 ult. inf const. Kal from b'^J^; synt. 
 in 201. 1. — ai^a 61. 6. 
 
 34. Tfrse 20. ^iC^l'^i"; fut. Kal from y^'i?, 193. 4. a. — 'i'cs yy^ 
 nouns of Dec. VI in apposition 168. 1. — fi^n fem. adj. Dec. X from 
 masc. Ti Dec. VIII, 132. 4; root ''^n. — 7\\:^ Dec. I; see 133. 7. — 
 ;i2=!:>: fut. Polel from ?]^^•, 81. 4 and in. 8. 
 
 35. XXX. Verse 21. cr^nri art. and n. plur. Dec. I; 133. 1. 6, 
 note. — "bs const, of V3 Dec. VIII. e, and 145. 2. a ; synt. in 161. 1. 6, 
 note. — l".^n- art. 61.2 small, and 165. 2. a, note 2. — n^iD'n'^'n art. 
 and fem. Segh. part. Kal from '^•)2'^ 90. 3 and 127 Par. XX; synt. in 
 163. 3 and 203. 1 ; comp. in no. 9."— crirT:? nos. 25, 26, and § 135. 
 7. b. — F|:3 Dec. IV. /; synt. in 161. 1. a. 
 
 36. Terse 22. ^-\n-;T no. 12 ult. fut. Piel from "Tpz 104. 4 and 127 
 Par. Ill ; final Tseri changed to Seghol as in no. 11 ult. — "^^Nb inf. 
 const, from "ittJJ no. 11 ; for punctuation of b, see 61. 9 and 47. 5. a. 
 — ns'in ^ns imperatives Kal of verbs Mp. — ^Nb73^ conj. 61. 17, and 
 imper. Kal of J{b^. — D''/3^2 prep. 61. 6, and noun plur. no. 22 ult. 
 
 37. Verse 24. JtSin no. 26, and 193. 4. a. — ri»rtairreg. noun, see 
 lexicon; in apposition with "ijos 168. 1. — iri'^n const, of ?i^n taken as 
 a noun (comp. no. 34) with paragogic T 50. 4. rf, and 50. 5 ; Daghesh 
 omitted in Yodh 45. 4, 6 ; vowel under Yodh dropped 56. 3. The 
 regular const n^n appears in v. 25. 
 
 38. Verse 26. 1l^?2 1 pi. fut. Kal of nip:? no. 17 ; synt. in 189. 1 
 note, and 193. 4. a. — ^:?3b:!i2 prep, and noun Dec. VI. a, with light 
 suffix 135. 5. b. — !i:nnnn3 prep, as in no. 28 ult. m72"| Dec. I with 
 light suff. as above. — ^IT^.";"! conj. and fut. Kal of rn^. — r^nn prep. 
 
PRAXIS ; GENESIS I. 
 
 as in no. 28, and noun Dec. XI. a; Daghesh omitted in ^ 29. 15. «, 
 b. — ^'P.lvJ art. as pron. 163. 3, and masc. part. Kal ; comp. in no. 35. 
 
 39. Verse 27. mIj?.? found only in abs. state, 137. 1 note; root n;2;- 
 
 40. Fierse 28. '7~»n';} no. 36. — 3nb 157. 4. a note, 9.nA corrigenda 
 at the end of the volume. — ^->s &c. no. 36. — tn'^n:? for tincna 95. 
 2. a; imper. Kal with suff. 126. 6. a &.c. and IV note 11. — ^n") im- 
 per. of rTiT, comp. no. 38. 
 
 41. Verse 29. nsrj 159. 1 and 50. 4. J. — \nn; 114. IV. fe.— n^^iV; 
 prep, and noun Dec. XII. (^, and 149 ; synt. in 195. 3. 
 
 42. Verse 30. p";\^. Dec. VI ; gen. after ^3 172. 3. 6, and const, be- 
 fore n^iJ? 161. \.h. 
 
 43. Verse 31. nipi' 192. 2. — -|\\:q 178. 2. a. — "^JJrt art. 165. 2. 
 a, note 2. In the similar cases vv. 5, 8, 13, 19, 23, the ordinal does 
 not take the article. 
 
 Chapter II. 
 
 44. Verses 1—3. ^Vs^l Vav 93. 1 small; fut. Pual from tnb3. — 
 CNni: Dec. IV. g, and 141 note 3; see 214. 2. [2] 5:5'^2 fut. apoc. 
 Pid from nbs 123. III. c. — irDNr^a Dec. XI. /. and 148" note 2 ; for 
 the form of the word, see 47. 2 note ; the N would here seem to be 
 in otio 23. 6, since it does not prolong the Pattahh. [3] in 1 57. 4. a. 
 — 4**^2 192. 2. — DTiUS'b prep. 61. 9, and inf const, from T,^'J 122. 2. 
 e ; synt. in 200. 6. c. 
 
 45. Verses 4, 5. ni'lbTn pi. const, found only in this form and with 
 suff. 137. 1 note ; root Tb\ — nN";2MS, prep, and inf. const. Isiph. from 
 N"12 with noun-suffix 126. 5 and IV notes 14, 15 ult. Synt. in 202. 
 2 small. See § 16 6 and 95. 2. d. — nrD2? no. 44 ult. genitive after ZiV 
 200. 2; const, before ni?T] and governing yiN &.c. in the ace. 202. 1, 
 2 and note 1. [5] ti-;.^ Dec. IX. b. — rj^H'^ cnt: 193. 3. a ; so np^ii:^ 
 fut. Kal of a verb b' guU. 60. 7. o, and 105. 2. b. — 'n"^t:5:n Hiph. of 
 *(a73; pluperf 192. 2. — "jV^ adv. 156. 3.6; synt. in 206. l.a. — 
 '.•Z'Jb no. 44 ult. synt. in 201. 1 and 202. 1. 
 
 46. Verses 6, 7. n^y^ fut. Kal from 7\\v. — nj:">pn Hiph. of inpil}. 
 [7] ■^]£"'^1 fut. Kal from -\:c;' cl. Ill of ^O ill. 4 note, and I; Seghol 
 for Tseri 93. 3 and 64. 3. — -^E^' synt. in 174. 2. e, and 197. 3 ult. — 
 ■^73 170. 2. c. — ns'i fut. Kal of n?2 a verb \t> and b' gutt. 113 and 
 105. — VSN Dec. VIII. b ; dual with light suff. 135. 9 and 154 Par. 
 Ill ; form in 41. 3. a ; root C];}*. — n72;i:3 const, from r!>3\a2 Dec. XI. 
 c ; ace. after Hc"^ ; root DUJs. — D""]!! n. pi. Dec. VIII. ?, and 145 note 
 4 ; comp. 133. G. — "a^pb synt. in 195. 3. 
 
PRAXIS ; GENESIS II. 
 
 ■17. rcrsrs 8, 9. f'^\l '"!• •'^!>' 'I'Oin "t:: llo. — CVL)^;] fut. apoc. 
 conv. Hiph. from DVD ; "iv 118. III. c. — D'l: adv. — n::'' CO. 7. a. [91 
 
 * » ITT ^ ' 
 
 Ti'O'JLi^ *'">t- iipoc. Hiph. from ri^X lO.'i. 3; comp. no. 45 v. 5. — T^H?- 
 part. Niph. from ^'^n a verb iigutt. 90. 1. «, and 102. 3; used as an 
 adj. 90. 3; comp. 179. 1 small. — Hw^.")^: Dec. IX ; root nijn. — boN^a 
 Dec. II ; root rsN. — T^'It "o. 10. — "jan Dec. VIII ; two forms ]5 
 and "ja 145 note 1, the former being most common. — n^'~n fem. inf. 
 con>:t. from S-'n"" 109. I. c, comp. 87. 4. ; g-enitive 200. 2, and governs 
 the ace. 202. 1. It has the article like a common noun. — i"n] lilD 
 61. 19.6; synt. 162 and 202. I. 
 
 48. i^crses 10—14. N:^^ part, of Ni:^ 24. 3; synt. 203. 2. — n.?:^ 
 61. 12. — nip-cnb no. 46 v. 6, and 201. 1. — "tns^ fut. Niph. as p;tst, 
 193. 3. b. — a-'uiw^i'-j pi. of -s^Nn Dec. I, irregular. [11] N^rt 183. 1. 
 — 22^", art. as rcl. pron. 1G3. 3 ; part. Kal from ^^'^ ^ verb i"y 115 
 and 127 Par. XI; S}-nt. 203. 1. — 2^1J — \-rN. 187.2.6. [12] imi const, 
 from 2rTT Dec. IV; comp. Sheva under T, 26. 5 small ; for ^, see 61. 18 
 small; nora. to n;n 211. 7. — N-i-n, art. 61. 2 small, and 165. 1; Niri 
 66. 6, used as a demonstrative, 179. 6. [14] ri^onp const, of f^^^p 
 Dec. XII. 6; ace. after "^br; 196. 2.— N^n 183. 2. " 
 
 49. Ferscs 15 — 17. nj^'T fut. Kal from nfpb 114. IV. a. — ^lnrt2:::T 
 fut. Hiph. from n:; a verb ^D cl. IV, 112 and 127 Par. IX and X Hiph. 
 def. written 24. 3 ; suffix Tn_ 126. 6. c, and IV note 16. — H'lni'^ inf. 
 const, from nar with verbal suffix 126. 5; comp. 126. IV note 6 and 
 127 Par. XXI ; synt. in 201. 1 and 202. 1 small. — nn72'Jr^ idem. [16] 
 i:^"*] fut. apoc. Piel from r^ri 123. III. c ; comp. 117. 2. b ; and see 
 above in no. 44 v. 2. — S^Kb. no. 36. — bbN inf abs. Kal from b?N 127 
 Par. V; synt. in 199. 1,2. d. — VDw\n fut. Kal of bDN, but also \vith 
 final Pattahh in v. 17, see Ges. lex. art. niN note 1 ; synt. in 193. 5, 
 c. [17] 7y?5 case absolute 175. 3. c. — "bDN inf. const, with noun- 
 suffix 126. 5 and IV note 6; comp. 202. 2 small. — m^n rriT: inf. abs. 
 and fut. Kal from ni73 127 Par. XII ; synt. in 199. 1, 2. 6. 
 
 50. Verses 18 — 22. nvrr inf const, of r5"'?l, nom. case to fT'in un- 
 
 T t' , T T- 
 
 derstood 211. 7 ; governing C"]tN.-i 202. 2. — Sii:> adv. 156. 3. a and 5 
 note; properly a noun of Dec. VIII. — iV 157. 4. a note; Daghesh 
 euphonic inb 29. 8 ; synt. in 173. 1. — T"1'';3 prep, and noun of Dec. 
 "VI with suffix. [19] -i:^'^2 no. 46 v. 7, def. written 24. 3. — Ni'] fut. 
 apoc. Hiph. from i\i2 124. 4. a, and 127 Par. XIX. — niNnr, b ia no. 28; 
 synt. in 201. 1. — t<"}p'^ 193. 5. c, and 195. 1 smaU, — •*!;!:; in app. with 
 'b 168. l,but the b omitted 211. 12. b : or perliaps 210. 2. [20] nVJ'il 
 
PRAXIS : GENESIS 111. 
 
 133. 4. — D>vba case absolute 175. 3. h. [21] bs^T fut. apoc. Hiph. 
 from rc:. — ri^s^nn Dec. XI ; root d'ln. — V"^"".l! f"^- ^^^ ^^ V^l ^^• 
 II of "3 110 ; Pattahh chang:ed 60. 7. a. — vni-Vi^j pi. with suflf. from 
 :!?!:i: Dec. IV. i, and 141 note 4; comp. 133. 5; synt. in 170. 2. c. 
 — rtinnn prep, with verbal sufhx 157. 3 note; for sutfix, which re- 
 fers to iem. yb:*:, see 126. 7, 8 ; comp. in no. 18. [22] "J^.'^T fut. apoc. 
 Kal of n:2 123. I. rf 1. — rriJNb irre?-. noun of Dec. I, XIII, and II ; 
 synt. in 195. 3. — ^Nls'^T fut. Hiph. of Niz with suffix which moves for- 
 ward the tone and causes Qamets under Yodh to fall away, 1 1 8 par. 
 second ; see also 93. 1 small. 
 
 51. Verses 23 — 25. D^'E?! this timc^ iww^ 163.3; adverbially 156. 3, 
 h ; or 174. 2. c. — r7-^\\ Nnp^^ 198. 2 note. — nnj^b Pual, 95. 3. d, e. 
 [24] -iT^: with Qamets Hhateph for Hholenj 54. 2. b. — Vni< 135. 
 13 and 154 Par. I. — i73N Dec. VIII. d. — pn-jT as fut. 192. b. h. — 
 int;N2 from rr^^N, const. n'^JN &c. irreg-. see in v.2'2. [25] ^^r]^^ synt. in 
 188. 3". — Dri.\:o numeral with suff. 152 note 4. — □"'72^-1^ adj. from 
 L'^'J Dec. VIII." e, and 145. 2. c ; Shureq for Qibbuts 21.19 note. — 
 ^UJ-iJisn;; Hithpolel of li/is 117. 8, and 118. IV. c; for Qamets, see also 
 60. 7. 6'2 a; as past, 193. 3. h. 
 
 Chapter HI. 
 
 52. Verses 1—5. b*3^ 177. 1 and 178. 1. c?. — '^S 5]N 211. 10.— 
 :ib:2«r) Nb 193. 4. h, and 195. 4. [2] bSNi's 193. 5. c. [3] ^"iS/^n, conj. 
 61." 17; hut, 211. 11 note. —^57252 comp. 210. 2, 3. — nnn from i'^:, 
 193. 4. fc, and 195. 2. — ]nn5ari fut. Kal of nn72 with parag. Nun 95. 
 1. a, and 35. 2 ; see also 118 at the beginning ; as subjunctive 193. 5. 
 h 9. [4] n:72 199. 2. b. [5] n'' 203. 1. — DDbDN no. 49 v. 17. — 
 ?iripD31 Niph. as fut. 192. 5. c par. second. — Q^Ti! dual of y^ Dec. 
 VI. '^", and 143 note 16 (2). — D^rirNS 61. 9 and 47. 5. a. — n;V 204. 2. 
 
 53. Ferse.'! 6^10. N -inn s. fiN^ 123.1. £^. — niwVtn noun Dec. X, 
 used as predicate 161. 3. — n72n;. part. Niph. 90. 1. a, and 102. 
 3; see 203. 3 note 2. — b^S^^unl:" 201. 1. — njiriT then 211. 13.— 
 innT 114. IV. b. — rT72:; 157. 4./. * [7] D^73'n-':i; from 0-1^:5^ Dec. VIII, 
 comp. no. 51 v. 25. — ^nsn'; fut. of nsp. — nb? const, of nb.:; Dec. 
 IX. b ; root fbv. — nS^n from rrii:!?!; Dec. X; see 24. 3, and comp. 
 no. 3. [8] '^bnn^2 part. Hithp. agreeing with D"'^^b^J. 203. 3 note 1 ; 
 see 80. 3. d. — n"n-ib no. 9 ; see Jahn's Bib. Arch. § 101. V, — wXzrn'.2 
 fut. Hithp. 80. 3. b; "synt. in 189. 9, comp. 188. 3. [9] ni'N adv. \V 
 with suff. 156. 5 ; form of \vt as of Dec. VIII, 156. 3. 6. [lO] N^'NT 
 Vav conv. 93. 1 small ; fut. Kal of NT^ 110. 2 and I. 6. — N?nN ful. 
 Niph. 102. 5; sense in 77. 2. c. 
 
PRAXIS : GENESIS l\\ 
 
 54. Ferses II — 15. 1^5- Illph. from obs. 'liZ. — nn.X 60. 3. — 
 -r::wX 54. 2. 6; synt. in 201. 1 note. — ^::i).'0 no. 52 v. 3. — ni^^N 
 GO. 7. a, and 37 rule 5. [I2j nnn: 114. IV. 6, and 95. 3. a. —''y^S', 
 157. 3./ [13] n-'t-y 211. 6. c. — ^:N"'.an Hiph. 124. 3. rf, and 127 
 Par. XVII ; with sufl'. 126. 6. b. [14] m"iN pass. part, of n-^J* ; synt. 
 180. 1, and 177. 1 ; see also 178. 1. d. — Yc.'l ^'^^^^ Y^^ ^^^^ '^^ ^^^- °^ 
 r|rn 124a. 2. — "^'^'I'-bs, see DV no. 15; synt. in 161. 1. b note, and 
 174. 2. c. — T^^.n in no. 46 v. 7 ; with suff. 135. 5. c. [15] nn\Nt Dec. 
 X; root 2;;;n. — is^'iii" 118 beginninc;. — 'i'N-i no. 48 v. 10; syot. in 
 174. 2. f. —r\:z^tT) sutr. in 126. 7. — npy 142 note 5. 
 
 55. Verses 16—24. r:z'\n 123. IV. b ; synt. 199. 2. a. — "7?.^^::^^ 
 Dec. III. f?, and 140 note 1 par. second, with fern, suflf. 135. 5. b; put 
 with ^:in 215 and 161. 5. —"^ibri fut. Kal of n'rv — D^2a plur. of ^2 
 irrog. noun 152. 1. [17] ^s??.?: ... nu?N 187. 2. cr. and note 1. — '^l^iai;? 
 prep. 157. 2. c, and 3 ; root "iny. — rt- :3.\n 126. IV note 9 ; comp. She- 
 va under "D 26. 5 small ; suff. in 126.7, reterring to f^/OTN which here 
 means the earth and its productions ; comp. 213 and 185. 2. 1. [8] '^^ in 
 pause 157. 4. a note. [19] ni7. const, of n:^! Dec. X. — ""'CN no. 46 v. 
 7. — "rj^r:; inf const, of ard with n. suff. 126."5 ; synt. 200. 4. e. [20] ^rt 
 60. 7. a; for "'n Dec. VIII. i. [21] ni:n3 pi. const. Dec. XIII. d. 
 [22] nnwXS const 172. 1. e. — n?*]!: no. 47 v. 9 ; prep, in 61. 10. a ; 
 synt. 201. 1. — nb-4:^-|2 &c. in 192. 7. a. — ■'HT Vav conj. 61. 19. a; 
 verb •'n 124. 4. 6. ' [23] ^rin";r'>i?': 126. IV note "l 4. [24] ^^y'^ 54. 3 
 and 93. 3; also 105. 4. — ]2;^!2 fut. apoc. Hiph. — i'l.nn Dnb 161. 1. 
 b ; comp. 61.2 small. — nD5nnn fern. Segh. part. Hithp. 90. 2, 3, and 
 127 Par. XX; sense in 80. 3. 6; article in 163. 3. 
 
 Chai'ter IV. 
 
 56. Verses 1 — 5. "irjO} fut. apoc. of rr^in ; and "»';:. n] fut. conv. of 'ib^ ; 
 see for both 192. 3 note. [2] 7\'0p'^ fut. apoc. conv. Hiph. of P^o;^, us- • 
 ed adverbially 205. 1 and note. — nnlrb 109.1. c, and 61. 10. a. — 
 vrikS from nx irreg. noun 152. 1. — Tl'si^^ part, as a noun const. Dec. IX. 
 [3] N'l'^T see no. 50 \. 19. — nirT'biSee Ges. lex. art. inin\ and 47. 5. a. 
 [4] inHrnw, conj. 61. 17; prep. 61. 12; noun Dec. VI; suff. 135. 
 7. b ; synt. 161. 5 and 215. — yd^2 f"t. apoc. of r>T^. [5] '^VV'^ fut. 
 apoc. of rj"lP; synt. 211. 1. 
 
 57. Verses 7 — 15. 5"'D''n 1 1 1 and 127 Par. VIII. — ni<-IJ inf. const, of 
 N->p: 124. 3. d, and 127 Par. XVII ; put lor ni^;i) 60. 4, comp. 47. 2 ; synt. 
 200. 1. — yan part. 203. 3 note 1, and 189. 5. — inp^iUJn suff. referring 
 to nN"^n 181. 2. b ; so 12. [8] Onvna no. 50 v. 18; prep, in no. 
 
10 PRAXIS: GENESIS V. 
 
 28, comp. 61.16 small, and 102. 3 note ; synt. in 200. 6. a, and 202. S 
 small. — D|?«1 fut. apoc. com. of C^p 118. 1. c, par. third. — ^l^;;"!?!!!! 
 fut. of ^^11 126. IV. note 9; Pattahh under -| 58. 3, comp. 102. 4; 
 suff. 126. 6. c. [10] n-'pvy: part, of pTJi, 203. 1, 3 note 1. [11] 
 JlCS irreg. noun from n?., const. ">D &,c. suff. 135. 5. a. — nnj^b Segh. 
 inf. of npb 114. IV, a; form in 131.2. c; prep. 61. 10. a. — 'r^'-\il2 
 Dec. II, and 139 note 1. Ll2j riDn no. 56 v. 2. — nn 114. IV. b. — 
 2?D part of 5^;. — -IDT 61. 19. b ; see 216. 2. a. Ll3j ^li^i'J Dec. III. 
 — i<ri:iJ3 inf const, of HT'j reg. form, comp. supra in v. 7 ; synt. in 
 177. 3.' [15] D^n^TIJ 152 note 2. — Dj^;: fut. Hoph. of D^:, 60. 7. a. 
 — Dili'^1 no. 47 v. S. — nisn inf const. Hiph. from t^'DZ 124. 3. <>, and 
 127 Par. XVIII ; synt. 201. 1 note, and 202. 2 notes 1,¥. 
 
 58. Verses 16 — 26. y^i2 fut. conv. of n-4:\ [17] I'^rn "^Tl^l no. 55. 
 — lr!?.3 part, of nrr ; synt. 203, 4, and 204. 1. — 132, suff. state of "ja 
 no. 54. — '7T;n in apposition with au; after Nnp"; 168. 1. [18] ^\l^,1 
 fut. Niph. of -ibv [19] "^n-ij 154 Par. IV. 2, and 152 note 1. — D"^-^;: ir- 
 reg. pl. of rr^'N no. 50 v. 22; pi. of Dec. II. — rt'^y'^Tj 152. II note. 
 [20] ^SN const', of nN 135. 13. — SU5^ 196. 2 and 204. 1. [22] •:i':jl 
 noun const. Dec. VII. — rTiuti: Dec. XIII. e, and 150 note 1. — bT/ia 
 Dec. VIII and 145 note 2 ult. — DTHN const, of ninN irreg. 152. 1. 
 [23] Vt;;b supra v. 19. — li'^'^J 105. 5. — "^'i;: v. 19. — nsTiStrt fern. pl. 
 imper. Hiph. denominative from "jTi^ ; properly M;:TNtj, but one Nun is 
 expressed by Daghesh 29. 2; comp. 114. IV. 6 ult. — ^'J^^h 184. 4. b. 
 [24] !3^:^'S'4J &LC. 152. 5 small, and 176. 10. [25] n'iJ 3praet.*of DiUJ or 
 nr:;. — V:,^ri. 126. IV note l. [26] N^n 182. 2, 3. — V?.-^ Pual of 
 nb\ — bnin Hoph. of rbn ; synt. 190. 1 small. — Nnpb synt. 195. 1 
 small, and 201. 1. 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 59. Verse 2. t3w\"}3 126. IV note 1. — DN")2Jl no. 45. [3] "'h^l liv- 
 ed., comp. in no. 12. — nNX3n D""i;b"*i 176. 3, 5. — n!ri'1 fut. apoc. conv. 
 Hiph. of -5^\ [4] ■'-inN' 157. 2. b. — in^i^in inf const. Hiph. 202. 2 
 note I. — nTk\?J nV-p 176. 1, 5. — ni:! pl. of n? irreg. noun for n?.s, 
 from )z or obs. 'ja ; sing. Dec. VIII ; pi. Dec. XI. [5] '^Q 124. 4. b. 
 —iftn 176. 1. a.' [6] D^D'iJ "^iJTpn 176. 1. b. [8] Innt::^ fi^n;^ 152. 
 4 and 176. 2. [24] ^s:^ij 'l56. 3. b and 5. [29] ^:73n:^ fut." Pi. of 
 2n3 with sufi: 126. IV note 14; see 216. 2./. — ns-^-n;; Dec. II dual. 
 — n-l'iN Pi. of T:i$ 104. 4 and 115. 2. b small; suff. 126. IV note 14; 
 comp. Sheva 26. 5 small. [32] niNa •>ii»n~'}2 161. 6. rf, and 176. I. a. 
 
praxis; genesis vi. vii. H 
 
 Chaptkr VI. 
 GO. Verses 1 — 5. ^n^ Iliph. of ir^n a verb h 115 and 127 Par. 
 
 XI. — 3-ib inf. const, of nn-j, 201. k [2] rinb 21. .3, fem. adj. 180. 1. 
 — nni:^i fut. of nf:b, 45. 4. — n-\nr GO. 7. 6 2 a. [3] ^in; ful. apoc. 
 Kal of "jm 118. 1. c par. third. — 3-yii2 perhaps prep, and inf const. 
 5"4J from iai^ IIG. I. 6par. second, with verbal suffix; or perhaps 
 prep, with rel. pron. -'^j 68. 2, and particle Q^. Neither mode is sat- 
 isfactory in regard to either the sense or the form of the word. [4] 
 »?. ■'l'?>'< l^tJ- -l and ^^''- 2. b. — riTan ref to D"':2 omitted, 211. 2. — 
 ""■y^prw^ pi. const, of obs. 'UijN, used as pi. of ■ti:"'N [5] rrrn fem. adj. 
 from n-\ 132. 4. VIII; const. Dec. X; root San. — nn-vi;n"5 pi. const. 
 Dec. Xlil or Dec. XI. /; root n-^n. — 'iz\ see nb Dec. VIII. d. — a?"! 
 adj. 145 note 5. 
 
 61. Verses 6 — 21. CnS'.} fut. conv. Niph. of Dn: ; sense in 77. 2. 
 c. [7] rinrrN s. nn^a. — "^nan; 113. 3 note. [11] nn">^ni s. nn'r. — 
 CT^nsynt. 198. 2 and 197.3. * [12j nnn'c;: fem. part. Niph. 90. l.aand 
 3. [13] f«2 s. N^2. — ""irn 159. 3 ; see 28. 4. b. — DnTi'i;?: 203. 3 note 
 2 ; verbal suff. 126. 5. '[14] ''^Z,?, 172. 3. b. — D^:p/s. )j?_. —ym72 61. 
 13. [15] 7-iZn-^ s. isriS. [16] nrix light^ trop. window. — n^V.^n fut. 
 Pi. of nrs with suff. 121 a, and 127 Par. XXII; lit. to a cubit shalt thou 
 complete [limit, contract] it i. e. the ark. — n'ri'^b^, Dagh. omitted in 
 M5. 4 ; see 207. 2; nVya in 143 note 24; adv. 156. 3. a. — r!-^i:3 s. 
 ■i^ Dec. VIII. c. — a'.nnri pi. of 'nnn 133. 1. b ; synt. in 197.^3 and 
 note. [17] rn-v^i inf. Pi. 201. 1. — "is"; s. ^na 118. VI. 6, and 60. 7. a. 
 [18] "nb,7-2 Hiph. of Qip ; see 24. 6'. — ni^in s. iSi2. [19] n'-^nnr 
 inf. Hiph. of n^n, 201. 1. [21] nj^ 114. IV.' a. — r^i*.: 193. 5. c — 
 nSDNT 192. 6. a. 
 
 Chap. VII. Verse 2. n^"n-;j 176. 9. — in'nhp without the art. 165. 
 2. b. [4] Di^ 174. 2. c, and 176. 4. — Dnp;'ri'61. 4 and Dec. I. [6] 
 D^'O gen. 170. 2. c, note. [8] n::-'^ ^"iTN 187. 2. a, and no. 59 v. 24. 
 [11] n:-2J2 176. 7 ; comp. 170. 2V 6. — nVD-^^n s. ];2f73 Dec. II. [16] 
 ^-^;? 157. 2./, and 3; synt. 195. 4. [l7] ^N^'.! 45.' 4 note 1. — tS'nni 
 fut. apoc. conv. of ail 118. I.e. [19] -j'N73 206. 3. — 'iSi';] fut. Pu.'of 
 
 no2. — D-'n-n 61. 3. [22] nn-jns 61. 3, 6. —ma s. nn^: 127 Par. 
 
 XII. [23] n:2^T fut. apoc. Niph^ oiTiTrn 123. 11. c, and 46. 3. — -DN 
 -rs 173. 2 note 2. 
 
12 PRAXIS ; GENESIS VIII* IX. X. XI. 
 
 Chap. VIII. Verse 1. :|SU;^T fut. Kal of rjS'i;. [3] ^SU:^2 H^ par. 
 first, —^i^l '^ii'r: 199. 2. c^—T\-4p^J2 Dec. IX and 61. 13." [4] mnn 
 s. n^3 and HS. I. c par. third ult. — ''"?.^J 167. 3. [-5] inN2 211. 5. 
 [7] n^n- fern. inf. const, of t'21 110. 1, c ; synt. 202. 2. [8] V^J^fl in- 
 terrog. and praet. Kal of bbp^, 192. 7. c. [9] rin;^'.! 126. IV note 9 
 par. second. [10] ^n^T fut. apoc. conv. of bnn or b'^T]. — nVi? inf. Pi. 
 of nVwJ 205. 1 and note ; comp. in no. 56 v. 2. [12] bn^'T fut. conv. 
 Niph. of rn^ 110. II. a ; see 77. 2. b. [13] ^D'^T 118. Ill c par. third. 
 fl6] N:i; 124. 3. b. [17] N^.iri 109. III. b. —XS.y^^ 192. 6. a. [19] 
 tsn-in-BTpTDb Dec. XI. 5-, and 148 note 2. [20] b;;!} s- ^b? 123. IV. c?. 
 — ri^y s. rrV:' [21] nn;;T s. n"^-! 1 19. 5 par. second. — 1"'ni;273 133. 6. 
 — nisn): s.'n^D 124. 3. e. [22] inrj:'; 60. 7. 6 2 a. 
 
 Chap. IX. Verse 2. C^wy/^IJ^ Dec. II ; root N'^';^ ; suff. in 184. 4. b. 
 — blDPin s. nn 145 note I'ult. — D3'n;!2 139 note 1. — nsra Niph. of 
 in: 60. 7. 6 2 a. [3] m^n 183. 2. [4]"=i73n 168. 1. [6] '^J;!: 175. 2. c. 
 [14] '■^}p_'^ inf Pi. of denom. verb from yjy with noun-suff. 126. 6, and 
 IV note 14 ; Dagh. omitted in 2 29. 4. 6, and 95. 3. rf, e. [20] bn^l 
 fut. conv. Hiph. of ?bn — D-JS 143 note 1. [21] T^tiH fut. apoc. Kal 
 of nn-ij 123. I. <Z. — ?an'i 127 Par. XV ; Hithp. like Piel 123. III. c. 
 — 'r\b'r\it. with unusual suff. 135. 6 col. 2. [23] D^ip Dec. VI. n, and 
 143 note 14. [24] XTC".- 111-4 note, and I. [25] Q^niay 178. 1. 
 c. [27] riS2 123. IV. d par. second. 
 
 Chap. X. Verse 9. iinn* \:sb 178. 2. e. — ^HJ$;: fin. Pattahh 105. 
 4; comp. 60. 7. a 2. [12] N^r^ 185. 2 note. [16] ^01^:;^ &c. 167. 
 1. [18] ^-^tiZ Niph. of y^D. [19] nSN> lit. in thy coming^ 124. 4. 
 a par. second. — !n70TD 157. 2. ^. [25] "l^; 189. 4. 
 
 Chap. XI. Verse 1. D^^nN 152 note 3. [2] 0^02 126. IV note 6. 
 [3] nnrj 159. 2. a. — nzsbVgi. 2, 3. 6 ,- comp. 126! iVnote 9, and 196. 
 4. [5]"'T^*T s. 'in^ 109. i. b. [6] Dr^b s. b's Dec. VIII. e.—'D^r\r\ 
 inf. const. Iliph. of bbn ; regularly bnrj, but takes the suff. as in 126. 
 IV note 14, comp. note 15; see also 116 both paragraphs at the be- 
 ginning. The Si would properly have a comp. Sheva, as 'n 56. 2 ; but 
 this would seem to be prolonged here into the corresponding short vow- 
 el, perhaps on account of the Methegh ; nom. case 200. 1. — 1!DT^ s. 
 C::. 116. IV. d. [7] nbiJ s. bba 116. IV. d, -and 91.2,3. '[8] 
 ^^-1~12 102. 3; comp. 103.1. b. [9] N^fS 190. 2. [12] "^n 124. 4. b. 
 [30] nbi noun Dec. IV. [32] D^ntaiz for D^nN^ 47. 5. a ; dual of 
 lnN?3 Dec. XI. 
 
praxis; genesis xii. xih. xiv. xv. l."} 
 
 Chap. XII. Ferse 1. 1^-^?. 109. I. J, ;ind 210. 3. — ;jw\^i< fut. Hiph. 
 of r^wS'-j; suff. 126. 7. [2] ^'dJ^ti 127 Par. XXII aiid 58. 3. — "»ia^ 
 195. 3.'— '^S-i.Ii.^il 126. IV note 14. — n;:nT 61. 16 small, and 194. 2! 
 6. — "^V?)!^ P«rt. Pi. of i-bp^ Dec. Vll. e, and 144 note 3. — Sw\N fiit. 
 of inN. [4] na- 98. I. a. — in.Nlcr 124. 3. b ; see 60. 4 and 47. 2. 
 [5J ^\^D-l 60. 8. a. [7] Nn:'.^ 123.' II. c. — nzTQ 144. note 2. [8] 
 n-jr.n sk' 5 and 157. 2. g. — i::.T 124. 3. e Kal, and 127 Par. XVIII. 
 [9] iiD:T rjirrj 199. 2. c. [11] Nin'r S'-ipn 205. — nc-; const, of 
 Htl femVof n?.;, 171. 3. [12] n;lnf 192. 5. a. [13] aD"-) 190. 1 
 antfigS. 5. b 4." [14] Niis 200. 6.^6. [15j ibbri": fut. Pi. of rrJi, 
 comp. inc. IX V. 14. [I7j D'^y^: 196.4. [19] nj: NT 93. 1 small, 
 and 193. 5. c. 
 
 Chap. XIII. Ferse 5. ^rhr: 163. 3 and 203. 2. — D^rriN 143 note 
 13. a. [6] Tim adv. 156. 3. 6, and 5. [7] '^yH part, of nynusedas a 
 noun. [9] list! 77. 2. c; tone retr. 35. 6 ; comp. 54. 3. — bi<:3^n 
 174. 2. a. — rt:o"'N"l fut. parag. Hiph. of a denom. verb from 'J'^tt^ 127 
 Par. VIII; see 211. 13. — r!r\^^-ipN'i idem from bn'^Z^ [10] rinuj 
 200. 6 and 202. 2 note 1. [16]'\-i'z3-iP1 s. DHUJ. — "1?V;~rii< . • ."^izpN 
 187. 2. a. — 5:5^"' fut. Hoph. of Vo;; ; used as the future of Kal 124 a. 2, 3. 
 
 Chap. XIV. Verse 3. ^-inn constr. praeg. 213. [4] n-^^y-uiyvlin 
 176.7. [5] :)3:i 124. 3. c,' Hiph. [6J D-jnna s. nnn i. "q. n'^ri. 
 [10] ri-iN2 143 note 14 par. second; and i69. 1. a. — JTnn, prep. 
 157. 2. g ; and noun from "in, 60. 1 ; see Ges. lex. [11 J nnp'.T 45. 
 4. [12] ax"« mr,) 203. 2, comp. 4. [13] D-Vcri 163. 4, or per- 
 haps 167. 1.— ^H;? 161. 6. c. [15] pV.'^?.!! '^^'- 2. c, and 213.— 
 b2i2 124. 3. e, Hiph. [17] in^np^ 121. 1, b ; Qamets for Pattahh 55. 
 1 and 54. 2. a, note 1 ; N proh. in otio, comp. in no. 44 v. 2. [20] 
 ^''■:,:i s. -i:i and 144 note 5. [21] -jn 114. IV. b. [22] "^nbnn Hiph. of 
 dn^. [23] t3N, see Ges. lex. DN no. 6 ; nj>N implied 211. 15 note 1. 
 [24] p'^ "^"^y^s nothing for me except 4'C. see Ges. lex. and 156. 5 note. 
 
 Ciup. XV. Verse 1. ^2-)" 156. 3. d, and 206. 3; comp. 169. 1. rf, 
 note. [2] 'Tt'lt-,^ with the vowels of Cfi rN because "'iTN precedes ; 
 see Ges. lex. — "'3:J$1 211. 13. — p9«-]nn IGl. 6. d. — i<nn 183. 
 2. — pV^J 161 note' ult. [5] ""0?r; imper. Hiph. of 11223 [6] 
 n2*^n!i s. i-^jn, 102. 3; with suff. 185. 2, comp. 166. [7] niib 114. 
 IV. ■6,'and 35. 6. — rrruj-j':; inf. fem. of 'Jli-^; 112 a, Dec. XIII. g.^ [9] 
 ri-p parag. form of np. 92. 1, 4, and 114. IV. a. — nob/'^tt fem. Segh. 
 part. Pual denom. from '^zJr.^. [12] t^inb 201.2.0. — r;3"^n n'^rtt^ 
 
14 praxis; genesis xvi. xvii. xviii. xix. 
 
 161. 2. [14] Jl^by;: 60. 8. a. — TJ s.yr; 203. Sand note 2. [17l nN2 
 s. Ni2; "^3 Tjy/im omitted, comp. 211. 14. e. — yz^ 161. 1. a. — liE^n 41. 
 
 1. e. [18] ^rjrri &c. 163. 2. c, and 164. 1 small. 
 
 Chap. XVI. Verse 1. r\^1^f2 131.2. b; comp. 129.6. a, small, 
 [2] nsaN 97. 4. [3 J nn-vpb inf. 170. 2. 6 ; so i?. [4j !in^n 60. 8. a. 
 — -JPriT fut. Kal of b^;5 116. I. c par. second. [6] rj">?yriVfut. Pi. of 
 Tiyj ; suflf. 126 a. 5. [8] nn"iz fem. Segh. part. ISL 2. c, and 60. 3 
 noVe. [10] T:z'\_ri 123. 4. fe, and 199. 2. a. [H] ^.It''! Poel of n^; 
 100 a. — '];;:y Dec. VI. tv. [13^ "^Nn my vision Dec. VI. w ; tone on 
 the suffix 135. 7. a. — "^Jn^^"^ ^^ ^ ^^''^ y^^ *^^ llive nfier ?tti/ vision? 
 ■"i^^ with Hholem as if the tone were upon it 60. 7. 6 2 c, as is some- 
 times the case before pause-accents. [14 N*i|'^ 190. 2. — ""nb 61.6. 
 
 Chap. XVII. Verse 4. ^3N 175. 1, 2. — ^J<b. 195. 3. [Si ^72U:-nJ« 
 173. 2 note 2. LIOJ bian inf const. Niph. of iriJa 200. 1 and 168. 1 ; 
 see also 198. 1 and 202. 2. [14] n^n 118. III. a 2, and 60. 7. a 2. 
 [15] ^-jiD 175. 1, 2. [17] ]iVn61. 24. — nV.^,": scil. ]3 211. 1. —CitT 
 Ges. lex. DN no. 8. [26] h'vs^ Niph. of bttj 114. II. a. 
 
 Chap. XVIII. Verse 2. nni^U;'^] 123 VI. &, and 80. 2. a. [3] "'Zin 
 and 'TIS?? 186. 1. [4] t:i'a 206. 1. o. [10] !-i^n nrs see Ges. lex. art." 
 Ti no. 4. [12] Tibs inf const, of nbs. [14] rn^'^iz m aiiy thing 
 greater than Jehovah? i.e. too great for him to accomplish, 177.2. 
 [17] rsDS^ri 61. 21.— r-.tJi> 203. 3 note 2. [18] i^fj inf. abs. of ii^ri 
 123. 1. 6, and 199. 2. 6. [19] TIJN ^r^sb 158. 2. 6. — T-\a\^1 «A«i ^.c! 
 211. 13, comp. 193. 5. 6 3. — M''Sn s. N=i2, put after prep." 'jyab 157. 
 
 2. c ; see 202. 2 note 1. [20] Inzp^ s. SS'n. [21] r7nj7.s?:^3rt 61. 24. 
 — nxsn 163. 3. — nb3 adv. [22j'nsnny 156. 5. [257nbrn 159. 2. 
 b. — ri^rjl 212. 1. [27 I ^D^t-l "1D1" 216. 2. o. [28] "ji-^prf: 95. 1. a, 
 and 196. 3. b. [30] -in", 21 i. 1, and 193. 5. a. 
 
 Chap. XIX. Verse 4. ^''ss-ij^ 60. 7. 62 a ; see 193. 3. «, and 211. 13. 
 [7] nnn s. i'T-i 118. III. a 2, and 60. 7. & 2 a. [8] bxn 67. 1. [9] 
 -Uii). 114. I. c. — inNbri s. Mb.f^- — 'oi^p 199. 2. d. — S-n: s. ^^^I'n 118. 
 III. a 2, comp. 116.' ill. a; see 177. 2." [llj nns 174.2. b. — ^Sn s. 
 
 irris:. — TNi^'.i s. n^b. [15] i»DT 157. 4. 6, note. — n::\S)^2 s. y^a. 
 [16 "^n^n^T s. r;'n?o 116. VI. c." [19] T^t s. n^72 127 Par. XII 
 and 192. 7. a- [21] '"'Ssrj 126. IV note 6 ; see 201. 1 note, and 202. 
 2 note 1. [22] ^rttt 205. [25] a"''1^'!l s. T^i? irreg. 143 note 17 
 and 61.3. [27] D2U;:] 213. [32] rrsb 109. I. tf. comp. 159. 2. fl. 
 [33] rp.^nn 95. 2. 6.'~nn3-fi2 126. IV note 8. 
 
praxis; psalms i — v. 15 
 
 Chap. XX. Verse 3. n\s^ pass. part. Ibni. of TVZ 204. 3. b. \b] 
 -Dna s. ch and 1-15. 2. — I^Pt^n s. ]hy,z and 140 note 1. |G] ^cna 
 121. I. 6 par. second ult. fT] n^HT 194. 2. 6. — n""i73 rrrx 203.5- 
 — :?! s. i-i\ [9] r:73 68. 4. — rry";: 193. 5. c. |13| n3?nn s. r7i;n- 
 [16 ;ip.r ^I'-N 211. 4. — n-Di;-) lem. Segh. part. Niph. of n^; 203. 2. 
 [17j vnnTJwN-i i^•c^^ pi. of r;;:.^ 43. 2. o. 
 
 Psalms. 
 
 I. Terse I. ''^-^iwV l-fiO. 2. fc, and 209. 2. — ^Vln &c. 192. 4. c. — 
 n^?2 s. ni^r Dec. XI ; root y>■^ [2] n'D'-)'' 156. 2. «. [3] i-^nD 
 Dec. VI. «, and 143 note 19. — V^2^ s. i:2: 114. I. 6 ult. [i] ^ic-n 
 s. qn; and 187. 2. a. [6] y^V 203. 1 note. 
 
 II. Ferse 1. a"':^Nlrn s. d'n!: Dec. VIII; comp. 211. 15. (?, and so 
 in V. 2 before naii^n"; &.c. For the use of the tenses, see 192. 4. fc, and 
 193. 2. [2] mo-i: Niph. of 1D\ [3] rp^n:; Pi. of pn:, 193. 4. a, 
 note. — ^:c^^^-lci"0 s. ^.c}:2 Dec. VII, and 133. 5; root nO"; ; poetic 
 sutr. 135. 7. c, and 50. 4. d. -~V2\ 157. 4. a, note. [7] av- 163. 3. 
 —V^lk"". s-"*i?.; 96. 1.6 ult. [ef 'Tjnrn; 195. 3 ult. [9] D:;^nn fut. 
 Kal of-S'J-^ with suff. 116 par. second. [12] ""Cin s. HDn. 
 
 III. Verse 2. nsn s. 25"^. [3] "•"^-C:": 186. 2. n. — nry^TlJ'; 50. 4. 
 rt, and 40. 2. [5] ^rip 211. 12. a. "[6] r!;-i:\\:^ 91. 27comp. 126 
 IV note 9 par. second. [7] nnd s. D"^'!;, reflexive. [8! ■';^;"''>ijin, see 
 99. I. d. — ^"V Dec. VI. w, and 174. 2./. — ^i/y dual of ]-^. 
 
 IV. Verse 1. ni::7:'r s. nxD Ges. Lex. [2] "pni: 185. 1. — ran-jJi 
 192. 4. 6, and 211. 6. a. — "'::n imper. of ]:n with sufT. 115. 1 notes 
 1, 2, and 55. 5; comp. 126. IV note 11. [3] rrQ-n^" 60. 1 note 2; 
 comp. 66. 4; see also 211. 15. d. — "^ninp 211. 7. [4] ib 170. 2. 6. 
 [5] ^73^1 s. 273^. [7] riC: 121. IV. 6; comp. Ges. lex. let. 0. L8]- 
 r)V72_ 177. 2, and 211. 6. /ult. 
 
 V. Verse 2. r.r'^TNrr 92. 1, and supra no. 58 v. 23. — i^^^2 imper. of ^''z. 
 [3] bVznN lOO.'l. " [4] Y^^'TJ^.N 211. 2. [5] -f rn' Dec. VII; par- 
 ticiple, 90. 1. 0. — 'Tjn:;';' 118 par. first and second; suff. in 184. 2. b. 
 [6] D"'bV'~ part.of :"rn. — nw\:;^ 121. I. a. [7] a"'?J^-i:;\s 161. 6. a. 
 — nyn-) Pi. of aypi. [9] "':n: s. nn:. — ':]n-^"i^, suff. 184. 4. 6, which 
 thou requirest. — '^'4''.'^ U)9. III. 6. [10] nr'iD: fern. part. Niph. of 
 ■jns. 162 and 166. — ni^rj Dec. X. — 2:r^b 211. 12. [12 flsin'j 
 Pi. of ]:-j, 60. 8. a. — "iCni =. ^DD and 2n. 13. [l.^] r^n 197. ^>. 
 
 55 '' ' 
 
IG praxis; psalms vi — xii. 
 
 VI. Verse 3. br73Nl part. Pulal of b^N, 81. 6 and 90, 2, 3 ; 72 omit- 
 ted 95. 2. e ; formerly followed by Maqqeph, as is yet the case in 
 some copies, and therefore written with Pattahh 54. 2. 6 ,- synt. 1 80. 1 . 
 — '':NS-i 126. IV note 12. — "'^^^^ 186. 2. d. [4] ""-iJSn. idem. — 
 'in73-ny"211. 9 note. [6] nn^"^ fut. Hiph. of nn\ [9] '""'Oz Dec. 
 W. u ; see 135. 7. o, which should read ' one Yodh is mually dropped.'' 
 
 VII. Verse 1. ^'Cj s. ^"'UJ. [2] '':b''^ri, see in 99. I. d. [5] '^TaV^ 
 S.-'l 197. 3. [6] Pl^n-; 124 b. — nc:^'^. 61. 3, 6. [7] NTJp^!-l 77. 2.*c. 
 — n^\:Z prob. forimper. 192. 6. [9] ''iP^:2£3 supp. ^733, as in Ps. 18:21; 
 see'211. 9 note. [10] J13— 1735^ 193. 5. «. [n] ^^"''T'P! 153.2 
 and 171. 3. [12] CJ;t supp. probably ^'^"1, which must be taken as 
 the nom. of avuj;; ; comp. v. 10, and see 211. 1. [14] C^bnl: s. pb"^. 
 
 VIII. Verse 2. T"tir\ prob. inf const, of ]n2 like ST]") from Ti;; 
 Gen 46: 3 ; comp. 87. 4 ; nom. case to rt^Tl understood 200. 1 and 
 21 1. 7 ; lit. the spreading out of whose [thy] ^Zory is over the heavens. — 
 r^yn .... Ti'N 187. 2 and 202. 1. [4] nn3:i3 95. 3. a. [5] -n^: 
 ^^=i:wNt 211. 8. [8] Cb;^ s. bb and 161. 2. —"'^^ s. n-i'I; and 133. 2. b. 
 
 IX. Verse 2. ':^\'niNbD3 fern. part, of Nbs 162 and 166. [3] nn73TN 
 196. 2. [61 'iJi 60. r note 1. L7] S"nNrt 175. — ^Tan s. D73n. — " 
 nirn; scil. nnN, riirr;, 211. 1 note. — rryari genitive 182. 2. a; see 
 corrisrenda. L8nwXD3' 144 note 3. LlO^ ^-lila 210. 5. a. [I3j DniN 
 185. 2. [I4j "':::rj regular, for the usual •':sn ; see 126. IV note 11. 
 [15] ■j'i'i:-nn 161.6. (^; comp. 131. 6 note. [16] ^T 187. 1 note. [17] 
 •O02 part. Kal from t.-;::. L19J nn^Nin sc. Nb 211. 11. [21] -^iirN 
 iTiTan sc.-'S 211. 14. rf. 
 
 X. Verse 1. D'b^:n sc. Vll2b 211. 15. rf. [3] y2£l2^ parallel with 
 T'D") and nom. to "^na and VN:, see 211. 14. a, and note ; and comp. 
 v.'lS. [4] •J-in":-ba 211. 8, and comp. v. 13. [5] Di-|73 161. 3. — 
 vn-i/)::-b3 175. 3. a. [7] n^i< 196. 3. b. [10] n^n^ Qeri, fut. of 
 TiDi] SC. r:;;-}w\s. — rvii'^ s. nnt. — b?:'i 189. 4. [13J Via 60. 1 note 
 2 ;%'ee 211. 15. d. [15]'i<:c72n-b5 comp! Ps. 37 : 36. [18] ])3 170. 2. c. 
 
 XI. Verse l.^tz^b 186. 2. a. — -\is:C 211. 14. c. [2j n'\'\'>\ s. 
 J-*!;, comp. 47. 1. -^1722 157. 4. 6, note. [3] nirr^^n s. D'-iJ Dec. 
 I; root nr:; or rriu;. [6] n:n irreg. noun ; root n:a ; synt. 168. 
 
 XII. Verse 2. ^DD s. DCC. [3] n5\p 211. 12. a. — nb.T sba 169. 
 2. [6] ib n''D^ 211. 6. e. [8] D^^pn sc. n-".:^'. in v. 6 ; see 185. 
 2 note. [9] DnS inf const, of on-i, 200. 6. 6 ; prob. for D^n3 and 
 then n^b.T is in app. with D_ 168 ; comp. v. 2, and Prov. 28 : 12. 29 : 2. 
 
praxis; psalms XI ii — xi\. 17 
 
 XIII. Ferse 3. "jii^ Dec. Ill ; see 211. 15. c. [4] nv^n l-vy^N-)^. 
 213 note; comp. 193. 5. i 9. [5] VnrD*: 12G. IV note'l par. sec- 
 ond; comp. 184. 2. 6. 
 
 XIV and LIII. Ferse 2. ir^J-! 203. 5; comp. 211. 15. d. [4] VJ'-};^ 
 see Ges. lex. yi^ no. 4. — n!:3wS 211. 14. c. In LIII. 6, ^:n is part, of 
 nsn ; suff". in 12G. 8 col. 2, and 184. 2. b. 
 
 XV. Ferse 4. tH'O'i . . . r.tn: 203. 1 note, comp. 180. 1. — i^'nJir 
 prob. inf. const. Hiph. of :>n-\ like i':? 118. IILa2; comp. 105.3, 
 and see Ps. 37: 8. — na; fut. Hiph. of n^tt. 
 
 XVI. Ferse 2. nn72it either by mistake for rr^^rN 86. 2 ; or else 
 •»\1J03 in the voc. is to be supplied ; see Ps. 42 : 6. 43 : 5, fcc. -^Tjsit: 
 184. 2. 6; lit. my happiness is nolhing in addition to [besides] thee i. e. 
 I have no happiness but thee ; comp. b^ in Gen. 28 : 9. 31 : 50. 
 [3] D^-^inpb 175. 3. b.—^yiii1, 172.2. [4] ^-\-73 so. Tt2;« 211. 
 
 1. a ; comp. 213. [8] n-ttn adv. — ''V'^^'R ""s sc. -in"; 211. 1 note ; 
 see 61. 14. [9] ^ypz . . . "'li^s . . . •'ab 186. 2. c, d. 
 
 XVII. Ferse 1, \-i-:-D dual const, of ns^p. [3] \-lbT prob. inf 
 const, of D?5T with suff. 116. I. b par. second ult. nom. case 200. 1. 
 [5] *f72n 199^4. c. [6] t2n s. nD:. [9] '':^Ti? s. Tj">^. — ^c.:.2 161. 
 4. — ^D-"!?: sc. nv^wN 211. 6. [12] i:-73T 174. 2./, org. [13] ")2")n 
 211. 12. [14] D:iJa 186. 2. rf, and 197. 2. 
 
 XVIII. Fern 2. *l»n-)N 126. IV note 9. [4] >brT73 203. 3 note 
 
 2. [5] }^^l\^ 130. 1. [7] •'i— 12:2 s. n:: and 170. 2. b ; for the historic 
 use of the future, see 193. 3. b. [8] u:?nr!;i ^?5ni 216. 2. a. [9] 
 n''b-a s. n^na irreg. [10] i^i") s. rrus. [l 1 J n-i^^.t s. rjwXi. [12] n-^; fut. 
 apoc. of D""^, for n'd^ 35. 6 and 54. 3. — DpnuJ ''z^ 178. 2. rf, comp. 
 169. rf, note. [i5] n:!»;"^c?: 185. 2. — sn s. lan ^0 s/iooL — aan";] s. 
 D^tl and 116 at the beginning. [17] nriU"! sc. in^ 211.2. [22]. 
 "•nr^-j-N^T 213. [24] ^riii} 123. I. d 2 and note 1. [26] "iDnnn 
 Sic. 100. 1.' [28] ni'3-) pi. fem. part. Kal of ani 90. 3 and 179. 4. 
 [34] nib^N3 211. 3. — [35] innn: Pi. of nn: agreeing with "'ni>inT 
 189.4. ^38] nniV? s. nb3 and 200. 6. e^ [41] ;i-^> 174.^2./. 
 [42] D:y s. n:y\nd 127 Par. XXII. [46] nHz"] s. bn:. — ^5-^n21 
 102. 3' and 213. [47j ""n 124. 4. 6. — a^-\^ intrans. 76. 3, 4, and 
 193. 4. a. 
 
 XIX. Ferse 5. anj^ s. tp_ Dec. VIII. — dln/btt s. Snb^O. [8] D^^-pu 
 fem. part. Hiph. of nnir 204. 2. — Tis Dec. VI. «. [14] Dr"'N / shall 
 be blameless, fut. Kal with Pattahh from D72n, also DD'' in another 
 meaning; see 116. I. c par. second; and for the Yodh, 24. 4. 
 
PRAXIS ; PSALMS XX — XXVIf. 
 
 XX. Verse 2. '^D^:; s. !i:y, 126 a and 58. 3; see also 193. 5. «, c. 
 — "^na/ip^ 126. IV note 14. [4! !n?.m^ 50. 4. c, and 91. 2. [7] ^n:?:: 
 213. (8] rr^N. sc. ^T'Sr 211. 15 note 1. [10] rty^'JJin comp. 
 99. \.d.' 
 
 XXI. Fcr^e 4. ni5-l2 197.2, or 211. 12. f/. [11] 1?3^"1D Dec. 
 VI. i< ; poetic suffix. 1 13i DD*^ Dec. VI. w, and 174. 2. g. 
 
 XXII. Tme 2. pitTj sc. 1-\1^\ 211. 15. (?. — "'l^T sc. I^a 211. 15. c. 
 [7] Dy "^^TS 204. 3. b. "(9] Supply here S?3NV. 211. 8. — b'a 199. 4. 
 a. [lOj 1":^ prob. inf. const, of n^a ; lit. iu to prodire meiim i. e. 
 thou didst cause me to come forth &c. [13] '''7."'2N 162 note. [15] 
 Dr!3 s. dot: and 116. II. a. 116] ''nipb^ dual; supply 1: 211.12. b. 
 [17] D"'y";»?3 part. Hiph. of ^T"! borrowing the form of verbs ^•y 118. 
 III. a 2; comp. 145 note 5. — "^"li^.S must be rendered as a lion if 
 the present reading be correct, supplying "^I^STlS as in Ps. 7:3; 
 comp. 211. 9 note. Another probable reading is ^-«3 from a root ^^3 
 signifying in Arabic arete constrinxit. Others are "'nNs and ^"lN3 ; but 
 none of the readings are entirely satisfactory. [18 j MJan ref to D^^^~),'0 
 comp. 185.2. — "'n~^N")'^ they triumph over me ; comp. the sense of 
 HN-J in Ps. 37: 34. 54 :' 9. [221 d"'?3n s. DN'n or □''n and 47. 2; 
 prob. i. q. a'^'lB in v. 13. — "'^n"'^?'. 193. 6. o, comp. 5 note ; see 213. 
 [23, ^nJ^.: s. nN and 60. 1. — ^V^riN 29. 4. b ,■ sutf. in 126. 7. |30] 
 o^n Pi. of JT'r! agreeing with "^'iJN understood, 211. 6. a. [31 1 ^eO") 
 impers. 190. 1 par. third, and corrigenda at the end of the volume. 
 [32] n"i;>" to exhibit beneficence ; comp. in Ps. 37 : 5. 52: 11, &c. 
 
 XXIII. Verse 4. r\Vp,:^ 130. 1. — ^nn-^j s. SUJ; and 150 notes 2, 
 3 ; comp. in Ps. 27 : 4. 
 
 XXIV. Verse 4. Q";?? ^p_: &c. 171. 3. [4] NV^b J«-^3 lit. who 
 has not taken in vain ; comp. Ex. 20 : 7. 
 
 XXV. Verse 5. "^n'ONS s. n^X for ni^^.Nl Dec. VIII and 145 note 
 2 ult. [7] niNtsn s. riNcn fem. ifrom NlliP 131.2, b ; const. nNIsn ; pi. 
 n^K-on by 47. 2; comp. 47. 6. [11] nnbOT 192. 6. b. [12] in^'^ 
 supp. -I'^iwNl 216. 6. c. [14] "-hD noun as predicate 161. 3. — D^^'lini: 
 for fut. 201. 2. c. 
 
 XXVI. Verse 2. 'Dins s. "inr and 126. IV note 12. — ^iSI-jiS for 
 ns-^i: paragogic imper. of ?in2C 92. 1 ; comp. 126 note 11. [4] 
 D"'73be.5 s. Drr. [9] cn nor 211. 11 note. 
 
 XXVII. Verse 2. inp2 202. 2. — ^nlC. . .n^'l'J 168. 1. [4] 
 Tii^ comp. supra in Ps. 23: 4. [9] Un s. irra:. [i2] ns"'! s. nD^ 
 and ^^\. 16 small. 
 
praxis; psalms xxviii — xxxv. 10 
 
 XXVIII. Fersc 1. 'D';^np-':ii 213. ("l] 'ztrt s. ar:;. [8] ittlb 
 referring prob. to tjTay in v. 9 ; see 185. 2. [9J C^;~) imper. of ^3.""^ 
 with sufBx. 
 
 XXIX. Fcrsc l.inr: 159. 2. «, and 209.2. [4] niss 210. 5. <t. 
 [6] Dn-* p. -):::]. suff. in 185. 2. [81 r'-n"'^ s. r^n. 19] bb^n^ s. b^n. 
 — Vr2 prob. refers to CrN '^:2 in v. 1 ; and the suff. is to be taken 
 collectively. 
 
 XXX. Verse 2. T^T^^'ilN 126. IV note 14. f4l "'T"}"'^^ Q,eri, as 
 TCg. inf. const, in";, with suff. ''"I"' ! '^'^^ *^<^ usual form of the inf is 
 n"i"i, with suff. T;"}") as in v. 10. The Kethib *n-ii'73 is therefore prob- 
 ably the true reading; as in Ps. 28 : 1. [6^ iJ^"! and Q""^n nom. cases 
 to verbs of existence implied, 211. 7. — "'32 Dec. VI. u. [S] 
 ""lin'^ s. -inn i. q. nnrj. — rrja: 203. 4. [lOj Supply S70Nb. 211.8. 
 [13] cr-r fut. Chald. of 3^1. 
 
 XXXI. Fcrse 10. "V-'i:^ 190. 1. [121 ^'.'zxb, s. "JS^. [18] n^s"^^ 
 fut. Chald. of 072-; see 213. [22] -li:^?^ V^fa sc. 3 211. 14. c. 
 [23] ^7?nn inf of Ton. 
 
 XXXII. Ferse 1. r^D—niu: 121. IV. c, and 204. 3. b ; see also 216. 
 2. c. [41 ""-^.uJb s. Ti:b bee. VIII. 15] Comp.211. 15 note l,forthe 
 prob. use of ■'ri";73i<. [6| After n:C73 supp. perhaps ri*n:i, comp. Ps. 
 116 : 3 ; others supply "rii<. [7 J '^Z^^ s. "jh from ];"l ; inf. used as a 
 noun ; so 'jV?. [C] n^i^^'-'N s. y^-^ and 213. [9] 'J-'i- •J\\ sc. Dri.b- 
 — i'^n:|7 s. "ly. — DVrlb s. nbs; synt. in 201. 2. e, n^n being understood. 
 — 2T"np b^ 200. 1 ; lit. ihcre is no approaching to thee i. e. they fly froni 
 thee. The meaning of the simile probably is, do not foolishly depart 
 from God. For "^^^.N, comp. 1 90. 3. 
 
 XXXIII. Ferse 3. )^z nn"^q^- 205. [10] ^^z;r. 118. III. a 2. 
 XXXIV'. Ferse 6. ntj"'2n &c. sc. D""):?; in v. 3. [10] ^w^-^^ s. N'n; ' 
 
 121. I. d. [13] yDnn 61. 2. § 90. l. V, or 174. 3. [18] ^p?;^ sc 
 Cp-'-zc in V. 16. [20] Db37:n suff. in 181. 2. b. 
 
 XXXV. Ferse 3. p'lirjl ™P- Hiph. of p"^-). — -{jp prob. noun; s. 
 ^i;0. [8] y^.-; Nb suddenly., 205. 2. [10] •'nTZ2i:i— bs c^-o i/jsc 
 186. 2. d. [I2i bn3"«i: / am vtterly forsaken, 200. 1. ' [14] "«nin\!; s. 
 rin"^. [15] C-3;. s. !-!33. [16] "^C^nz &ic. lit. profane mockers at 
 feasts i. e. profligate parasites; synt. in 210. 5. a. — ph" 199. 4. 
 [17] an^T-'^ s. nNr,y. [21] ^rrsj nrjN-j sc. ji:^d3 as in v. 25. 
 [28] Comp. 211. 15. 
 
20 PRAXIS ; PSALMS XXXVI — xtv. 
 
 XXXVI. Verse 2. 5>"4J2 DN3 s. dJ<D , the evil aspiration of the wicked 
 is in my heart i. e. either it afflicts wie, or it shall he my subject. [3] 
 Kiir7jb. &c. b prob. in regard to. [8] l^'^Dri;; 123. I. h. [9j l.^l")^ 
 123. i. h par', second. [13] WT Pual of tim 104. III. e. 
 
 XXXVII. Verse 2. nb?3''. either fut. Kal of b»2 used intransitively 
 and tropically ; or fut. Niph. of bib 73 to burn., consume., &c. 116. IV. 6, note 
 1. — ■jiVs"; s. b^j. [4] bii* s. blb.n and 116. I. 6, note. — nu)?.^ see 
 above in Ps. 22 : 32. [7j bbinnrjl s. b^lH to wait. [8] Pl'nn s*. no'n 
 123. IV. e, comp. 59. 2. b. — y-^nb s. ^^-» 118. III. a 2 ; ^fN eerie, «ti- 
 que. [10) n::i2riri s. ')">2. [22] T'ls-iaTa part. Pual of^ns, suff. 
 ref to n'lTi^, in v. 20; see 185. 2 note. [24] bt:^"» s. bw. [31] 
 lyJZT] 189. 2^ 4. [34] nNin see above in Ps. 22. 18. 
 
 XXXVm. Verse 3. nnm Niph. of nnj 113. 3 note. [6] •'nb^^ 
 s. n!?5N. [8J n!rp3 part. Niph. of nbj?, 198. 2. [11] "nn-ino Pe- 
 alal of ^nD 81. 8. — Drr 182. 2. b. [17] :ib""i:jn supp. "j?. 21 i. 15. 
 
 XXXIX. Verse 2. ^11^2 sc. ni:? nrrr2 2ii. 7. [7] Ivdh;; 123. I. 
 /i. [14^ y\^n imper. apoc. Hiph. of Jiy*^, for !i2.;uJii ; comp. 123. IV. 
 c, and 55. 1. 
 
 XL. Verse 4. ^N'^"'";! ... ^IN'I';; 216. 2. a. [6] Inniai* 193. 5. c. 
 
 XLII. Verse 5. rriri* i/tese things sc. which follow. — D"?.1I85 fut. 
 Hithp. of r-J-l with suff. see 80. 2. 6, and 184. 2. 6. [6] "'b.nin fern, 
 imp. Hiph. of b^in to wait. 
 
 XLIV. Tern 3. &^:i:ni 185. 2 note. [5] Nnn 183. 2 note. [11] 
 '^I'n poetic for l^ , 50. 4. e. [16] '':nS3 126 a. 2, and 126, IV note 2. 
 [23] ^3:inirT Pual of :inn 104. 4, comp.' 24. 4. [27] nnnt:? 50. 4. fl, 
 comp. 40. 2. 
 
 XLV. Verse 3. n^5'5^ Popaal of ns^ 81. 13. — pS^n s. p^\ — 
 ^D-^2 126. IV note H^lt.'" [5] nb-j nbi: 205. [6] "'5":iN . , . 0"'^? 168. 
 — nb:2 161. 4. [7] "^NtpS 145 note 3, comp. 45. 4 note 2. [9] ■»;» 
 prob. 133. 2. c. [12] iNn'; s. n^H and 55. 2. [13| Hs-na 131. 6 
 note. — ^bn"' s. nbn <o cares*. [14] ri-U3 s. nas Dec. VIII. [15] 
 biin s. ba^ 
 
ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. 
 
 I. In the text. 
 
 [The following (able gives every error which has been discovered in the He- 
 brew ; and also some things which are to be added to the text. I'hose 
 marked with (*) were occasioned by the breaking of the types &c. and do 
 not occur in all the copies. A few trivial errors in the English part are not 
 noted, because they can occasion no dilUculty to the student. The occur- 
 rence of these will be readily pardoned, by all who can estimate the extreme 
 labour of correcting the proofs in this species of typography.] 
 
 Page 52 cl. Ill line 2 for Ua read ilia. Page 71 /. 4 from bottom, 
 for shd-md^yf r. shd-md^''t. Page 83. 3. cf, l. 1 for third r. second ; 6. 
 /. 1 for fourth r. thh-d. Page 95 § 38. 4 for ii-Hncth r. nN iieth ; this 
 error arose from an accident which happened to the form, after the 
 last proof had been revised. Page 96. 12 /. 3 for '" r. 2 ' read ' r. 3.' 
 Page 101. a, t 2 for f)3i< r. RIJ*. Page 107 for the nos. 7, 8 r. 4, 5. 
 Page 123 note 2 ?. 4 for ni-hiphdkh r. ne-h^phdkh. Page 124. 2 let 
 the two last lines of the paragraph read as follows : ' with penultimate 
 or final gutturals, Pattahh ; and with Yodh penultimate or final, HJiireq.'' 
 Page 129. 6 /. 5 for D'^p-.ys* r. a'^p.iJ?. Page 130. 16 /. 3 for ^* r. \ 
 Page 139 /. 6 for -:r!* r. r^tr,. Page 143 /. ult. for ]'>r-iE r. T;;:-!?'; 
 for t:;?!:^-!* r. uiCtpn. Page 146. 1 Z. 7 after ' infinitive ' add ' and im- 
 perative."' Page i 53 § 82 I. 4 for f'r"i2 r. V^'^C. Page 155 in 2 fern, 
 for ^n* r. ^n. Page 179. 3 ?. 3 for ;n3 r. SP:'. Page 180. III. d, in 
 the Hebrew twice for 7 r. T. Page 186.1. c, /. 3 for nn"; r. nn"} Gen. 
 46 : 3. Page 187 I. 1 before frJ- insert 'y^ ^en. 20 : 7.' Page 188. 
 Ill /. 2 for a-i;>y:l* r. U^^z2. ' Page 193. IV. «, I. 6 for ' Hiphll 
 and HophaP r. ' and Hiphil ' ; IV. b, /. 1, 2 read thus : ' imper. "jn. 
 fr.rj ; inf fern. n:n Ps. 8 : 2, nn for n;n' kc. § 115. 1 /. 7 dele com- 
 ma after 'vowel.' Page 196. 7 Z. 5 in 12 copies for TinitJ r. Tiin'r. 
 Page 199 (2) I. 1 for -jn^* r. jn\ Page 200 /. 2 for ^ab.^T r. ^rb'i. 
 Page 204. 2 /. 4 for "l^N^'r. n^^^" Page 207. o, I. 1 for 2 r. 3; c, I. 2 
 in a few copies dele 5it2\ Page 209. IV /. 2, 3 in the Hebrew twice 
 for n r. n. Page 230. h, I. 7 for 2 r. 3. Page 236 Niph. fut. 2 pi. m. 
 for Vrt2|>P* r. Vrqpr. Page 237 Pual fut. 1 pi. for ^'^.p.^ r. ^^p.}.- 
 Page 242 Niph. fut. 1 sing, for 5"23nN r. ^'^^S«. Page 245 Polpal 
 praet. 2 pi. m. and fut. 2 sing. f. insert Qibbuts (. ) under the first D*. 
 
ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA. 
 
 Page 251 Hithpael inf. abs, for nn* r. nn. Page 300 correct the 
 numbers after no. 3, to 4, 5, 6, 7. Page 304. c, for DiD\L" r. t2TSUJ. 
 Page 306 Dec. VI. rf, for "iCD* r. *icb. Page 313 in 7 for ^1'^ r. 
 y^^. Page 318 I. 2 after the word ' masc' insert ' Snb and'. Page 
 339. 1. e, 1.3 for -)iD2 r. -\iDr. Page 341. 2 /. 8 for a-D* r. a'lD. 
 Page 343. a, /. 1 for ' nominative ' r. ' genitive,' and throw that and 
 the next paragraph into oie. Page 351 § 190. 1 /. 9 at the end insert 
 ' So Ruth 2 : 11, and other places.' Page 357. 6, /. 12 for 6 i\ 9. 
 Page 3d3, 2, 6, I. 3 for nEU;73 r. nsxb'n. 
 
 II. In the references. 
 
 See the preface, P<^g^ vi. 
 Page 34 line ult. for E. 19, 20 r. E. 10. Page 51 I. 1, 2 for 11 
 read 10. Page 70 /. 3, 5 for § 35. I. 3 read §61.2. Page 84. I. ult. 
 for 1 r. 2. Page 85 § 33. 4 for 2. b, c read 4. b. Page 86. I. ult. for 
 19 r. 10. Page 89. h, 1.3 dele c. Page 100. l.a for 113. 3. r. 113. 1. 
 Page 103. 2. b for 126. 6. d, r. 126. 7. Page 105. /. uU. for the whole 
 reference r. § 140 note 1. Page 109. 4. I. ult. for the whole refer- 
 ence r. § 143. V. a. Page 1 12 X 2 for 137 r. 146. Page 115 Z. 6 for 
 8 r. 6 ; 5 /. 3 for d r. c. Page 120. ^. 6, /. 3 for 137 r. 146. Page 
 
 121. 2 note, I. ult. for XV r. XXI ; /. 4 fr. bot. for 137 r. 144. Page 
 
 122. 2 /. ult, for 6, 12 r. 9, 12. Page 125. 2 I. ult. for the ref r. 
 § 139 note 1. Page 126.^^ult. for 137 r. 143. Page 129 /. ult. for 
 3 r. 4. Page 139. 6 note /. 3 for 184 r. 182 ; /. ult. for 125 r. 126. 
 Page 153 § 82 /. ult. for the reference r. § 124 c. Page 155 /. ult. 
 for the references r. §§ 199, 200. Page 157 /. 6 for the references r. 
 §§ 199, 200, or cfele the whole line. Page 161 I. 1 for 128 r. 125. 
 Page 182 /. 2 for 182 r. 175. Page 194 note 2 for 55 r. 54. Page 
 214. II. c, for the reference r. § 139 note 3. Page 219. /i, /. ult. for 20 
 r. 21. Page 233 note 6 1.3 for q read Sn, n (§ 143 note 15)'. Page 
 279. c (2) /. 3 for 59 r. 58. Page 300 /. 7, 14, and 24, for 177 r. 176. 
 Page 302 § 153. 2 /. 2 for the reference r. §§ 177, 178. 
 
k 
 
■\ 
 
«M 
 
 I